specifications - erie construction...

SPECIFICATIONS

Transit Operations Facility

Phase I

FTA Project No. PA‐04‐0097

ISSUE FOR RE‐BID

050713.01 ‐ General Contract

Volume II of IV

Divisions 2 thru 14

Prepared By:

CDM Architects, Inc. & CDM Smith Inc.

503 Martindale Street, Suite 500

Pittsburgh, PA 15212

Erie Metropolitan Transit

Authority (EMTA)

Erie, PA

August 5, 2013

“The preparation of this document has been financed in part through a grant of the Federal Transit

Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, under the Urban Mass Transportation Act of 1964, as

amended, for the Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority.”

Phase I

General Conditions

and Technical Specifications Volume I General Conditions Volume II Technical Specifications – Divisions 2 -14 Volume II Technical Specifications – Divisions 15-16 Volume IV Appendices

111119-81700 August 5, 2013 Transit Operations Facility Phase I TOC-1 ISSUE FOR RE-BID

Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority General Conditions – Volume I

Table of Contents

Invitation for Bid

Instructions to Bidders

Bid Forms

Form A-2.1.3 – Forms of Bid

A-2.1.3-01 General Construction

Form A-2.1.4 – Bid Bond

Bid Certification Forms

A-4.1.3 – Buy America Certification

A-4.4.1 – Debarment Certification

A-4.5.2 – Lobbying Disclosure Form

A-4.6 – Non-Collusion Affidavit

A-4.7 – DBE Assurance Form & MBE/WBE Solicitation and Commitment Form

B.2.2 – Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Nondiscrimination/Sexual Harassment Clause

Bond Forms (See Section 00600)

Form B – Performance Bond

Form C – Labor and Materialman’s Bond

Form D – Maintenance Bond

Section 00100 Mobilization/Demobilization

Section 00200 Supplemental Instructions to Bidders

Article 1 Abbreviations and Definitions

1.1 Abbreviations and Definitions

1.2 Referenced Standards

Article 2 Priority of the Contract Documents

2.1 Priority of the Contract Documents


General Conditions Table of Contents (Continued)

Section 00300 Information Available to Bidders

Article 1 Environmental Conditions Data

1.1 Environmental Site Assessment Reports

1.2 Geotechnical Investigation Reports

Section 00500 Conditions Affecting the Work

Article 1 Coordination of the Work Site

1.1 Contractor Notification

1.2 Adjacent Railroad

1.3 Adjacent Operating Facility

Article 2 Time of Completion

2.1 Time of Completion

2.2 Additional Shift Work

2.3 Damages

Section 00600 Contract Bonds

Article 1 Bonds and Certificates

Article 2 Bond Forms

Section 00700 Supplemental General Conditions

Article 1 Responsibility of the Owner’s Representative

Article 2 Supervision of Construction

Article 3 Use of Explosives

Article 4 Differing Site Conditions

Article 5 Sanitary Provisions

Article 6 Recovered Materials

Article 7 Disposal of Material Outside the Worksite

Article 8 Laws to be Observed

Article 9 PA One-Call

Article 10 Third Party Coordination

Article 11 Permits and Tap-In Fees

Article 12 Railroad Coordination

Article 13 Insurance Requirements

APPENDICES

Appendix A Procurement Handbook Part III – Procurement Procedures

Appendix B Procurement Handbook Part IV – Standard Contract Terms Attachment A - Davis-Bacon Act Requirements & Wage Rates

Appendix B-1 Project Labor Agreement


DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGES 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 to 12 01026 Application for Payment 01026-1 to 4 01035 Change Order Procedures 01035-1 to 12 01038 Requests for Information (RFI) 01038-1 to 4 01045 Cutting, Coring, and Patching 01045-1 to 6 01046 Control of Work 01046-1 to 4 01050 Project Controls (Surveying) 01050-1 to 4 01101 Safety, Health, and Emergency Response 01101-1 to 8 01110 Environmental Protection Procedures 01110-1 to 6 01171 Electric Motors to 250 HP 01171-1 to 12 01200 Project Meetings 01200-1 to 4 01300 Submittals 01300-1 to 18 01310 Construction Scheduling 01310-1 to 10 01370 Schedule of Values 01370-1 to 4 01400 Quality Control 01400-1 to 6 01410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services 01410-1 to 2 01500 Temporary Facilities 01500-1 to 10 01501 Maintenance and Protection of Traffic 01501-1 to 4 01561 Pest Controls 01561-1 to 2 01575 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01575-1 to 8 01580 Project Identification Sign 01580-1 to 2 01600 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 01600-1 to 2 01601 Control of Materials 01601-1 to 2 01630 Substitutions and Product Options 01630-1 to 4 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 to 2 01710 Construction Waste Management and Cleaning 01710-1 to 2 01720 Project Record Documents 01720-1 to 4 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data 01730-1 to 10 01740 Warranties and Bonds 01740-1 to 2


Technical Specifications – Volume II DIVISON 2 - SITEWORK 02080 Manholes and Structures 02080-1 to 6 02300 Earth Moving 02300-1 to 10 02301 Historic Fill Removal Transportation and Disposal 02301-1 to 4 02302 Contaminated Material Removal Transportation and Disposal 02302-1 to 6 02461 Steel “H” Pipes 02461-1 to 4 02510 Water Distribution System 02510-1 to 8 02515 Disinfection of Water Distribution System 02515-1 to 2 02535 Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 02535-1 to 2 02551 Site Gas Distribution 02551-1 to 4 02635 Site Storm Utility Draining Piping 02635-1 to 4 02639 Watertight Precast Concrete Box 02639-1 to 4 02740 Asphalt Paving 02740-1 to 4 02751 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02751-1 to 6 02765 Pavement Markings 02765-1 to 2 02827 Cantilever Slide Gate, Architectural and Chain Link Fences, and Swing Gates 02827-1 to 4 02870 Dumpster Enclosure 02870-1 to 8 02920 Lawns and Grasses 02920-1 to 10 02930 Exterior Plants 02930-1 to 10 02953 Sewer and Manhole Testing 02953-1 to 6 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100-1 to 6 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1 to 4 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 to 14 03351 Concrete Floor Finishes 03351-1 to 2 03411 Structural Precast Concrete 03411-1 to 4 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete 03450-1 to 22 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Masonry 04200-1 to 30 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05120-1 to 10 05210 Steel Joists 05210-1 to 8 05310 Metal Deck 05310-1 to 6 05500 Miscellaneous Metals 05500-1 to 12 05510 Metal Stairs and Railing Systems 05510-1 to 4 05531 Gratings and Floor Plates 05531-1 to 4 05800 Expansion Control 05800-1 to 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 to 4 06200 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 to 6


DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing 07100-1 to 6 07231 Building Insulation 07231-1 to 10 07270 Firestopping 07270-1 to 12 07415 Metal Roofing System 07415-1 to 10 07420 Metal Wall Panel Systems 07420-1 to 12 07512 Coping, Flashing and Trim 07512-1 to 16 07540 Membrane Roofing 07540-1 to 22 07720 Roof Accessories 07720-1 to 6 07901 Caulking and Joint Sealers 07901-1 to 16 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 to 10 08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08120-1 to 8 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08311-1 to 4 08315 Blast Resistant Doors and Frames 08315-1 to 10 08331 Overhead Doors 08331-1 to 14 08362 Blast Resistant Overhead Doors 08362-1 to 14 08370 High Speed Overhead Rubber Doors 08370-1 to 12 08400 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance System 08400-1 to 10 08700 Finish Hardware 08700-1 to 20 08800 Glazing 08800-1 to 10 08910 Fire-Rated Window Systems 08910-1 to 12 08950 Insulated Translucent Fiberglass Panels 08950-1 to 12 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard Systems 09250-1 to 10 09300 Ceramic Tile 09300-1 to 12 09500 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09500-1 to 10 09650 Resilient Flooring 09650-1 to 4 09901 Surface Preparation and Shop Painting 09901-1 to 6 09902 Field Painting 09902-1 to 20 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10121 Writing Boards and Accessories 10121-1 to 4 10155 Polymer Toilet Partitions 10155-1 to 10 10200 Louvers 10200-1 to 8 10400 Signage 10400-1 to 12 10421 Dimensional Letters 10421-1 to 8 10500 Metal Lockers 10500-1 to 8 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Accessories 10522-1 to 4 10800 Toilet and Shower Accessories 10800-1 to 4 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11000 Equipment Schedule 11000-1 to 4 11301 Oil Water Separator 11301-1 to 6 11396 Diesel Engine Driven Generator 11396-1 to 32 11451 Residential Appliances 11451-1 to 6 11501 Spray Painting Equipment 11501-1 to 10 11510 Shop Equipment 11510-1 to 8 11515 Fabricated Equipment 11515-1 to 4 11700 First Aid Kits 11700-1 to 2 11900 Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment 11900-1 to 2


DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12512 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12512-1 to 6 12690 Floor Mats 12690-1 to 4 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13110 Cathodic Protection 13110-1 to 6 13120 Fuel Island Canopy 13120-1 to 18 13140 Fluid Management System 13140-1 to 12 13200 Fuel Storage Tank 13200-1 to 20 13215 Fuel Storage and Dispensing System 13215-1 to 20 13500 CNG General Provisions (reference only) 13500-1 to 22 13620 CNG Civil Structural Requirements (reference only) 13620-1 to 8 13650 Piping and Tubing and Compressed Air System Requirements (reference only) 13650-1 to 20 13660 Electrical Equipment Fabrication and Installation (reference only) 13660-1 to 10 13710 Single Tower CNG Dryer (reference only) 13710-1 to 8 13720 CNG Compressor Packages (reference only) 13720-1 to 12 13740 CNG Gas Control, Storage and Dispensing Equipment (reference only) 13740-1 to 12 13750 Electrical and Computerized Control Systems (reference only) 13750-1 to 18 13900 CNG Station Equipment Technical Data Forms (reference only) 13900-1 to 14 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14450 Vehicle Lifts 14450-1 to 14


Technical Specifications – Volume III DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL (included for reference only) 15250 Thermal Insulation 15250-1 to 10 15300 Fire Protection Systems General Provisions 15300-1 to 8 15330 Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems 15330-1 to 10 15400 Plumbing General Provisions 15400-1 to 14 15410 Plumbing Piping Systems 15410-1 to 22 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15440-1 to 10 15450 Plumbing Equipment 15450-1 to 14 15500 HVAC General Provisions 15500-1 to 16 15505 HVAC Piping 15505-1 to 24 15506 Under Floor Radiant Heating Piping 15506-1 to 16 15541 Centrifugal Pumps 15541-1 to 12 15550 Heating Equipment 15550-1 to 12 15555 Hot Water Boilers 15555-1 to 18 15575 Flue Stacks, Breeching, and Vents 15575-1 to 8 15782 Packaged Rooftop Air Handling Units 15782-1 to 12 15855 Air Handling Units 15855-1 to 16 15857 Vehicle Fume Exhaust Removal System 15857-1 to 8 15860 Fans 15860-1 to 16 15890 Ductwork and Accessories 15890-1 to 30 15950 Electric Automatic Temperature Control System 15950-1 to 46 15952 Control Sequences for Automatic Temperature Control Systems 15952-1 to 44 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 to 22 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL (included for reference only) 16000 Electrical General Provisions 16000-1 to 20 16015 Electrical Systems Analysis 16015-1 to 12 16110 Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports 16110-1 to 16 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum) 16120-1 to 10 16122 Fiber Optic Data Highway Network 16122-1 to 8 16141 Wiring Devices 16141-1 to 4 16191 Miscellaneous Equipment 16191-1 to 14 16425 Low Voltage Switchboard 16425-1 to 22 16470 Panelboards 16470-1 to 4 16480 Low Voltage Motor Control Center 16480-1 to 22 16482 Variable Frequency Drive Controllers (PWM) 16482-1 to 10 16492 Automatic Transfer Switch 16492-1 to 14 16500 Lighting System 16500-1 to 10 16501 Lighting Control and Energy Management System 16501-1 to 8 16502 Lightning Protection System 16502-1 to 4 16600 Underground System 16600-1 to 6 16660 Grounding System 16660-1 to 4 16720 Fire Alarm System 16720-1 to 24 16724 Card Access Control 16724-1 to 6 16727 Gate Security System 16727-1 to 4 16728 Gas Detection System 16728-1 to 16 16741 Telephone System 16741-1 to 2 16746 Page Party Intercom System 16746-1 to 10 16781 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System 16781-1 to 14 16950 Electrical System Testing and Settings 16950-1 to 12


Appendices - Volume IV

Appendix A Procurement Handbook Part III – Procurement Procedures (located in Vol. 1) Appendix B Procurement Handbook Part IV – Standard Contract Terms and Sample Contract

(located in Vol. 1) Appendix B-1 Project Labor Agreement (located in Vol. 1) Appendix C Environmental Safety Assessment Report – Phase 1 Appendix D Environmental Safety Assessment Report – Phase 2 Appendix E Geotechnical Investigation Reports

LIST OF DRAWINGS – PHASE I General

G-0 Cover Sheet G-1 Overall Drawing Index

Civil

C-1A Civil Existing Conditions/Demo Plan A C-1B Civil Existing Conditions/Demo Plan B C-2A Civil Site Plan A Phase I C-2B Civil Site Plan B Phase I C-3A Civil Grading and Storm Drainage Plan A Phase I C-3B Civil Grading and Storm Drainage Plan B Phase I C-4A Civil Utility Plan A Phase I C-4B Civil Utility Plan B Phase I C-5 Civil Stormwater Management Details C-6 Civil Utility Details C-7 Civil Site Details C-8 Civil Site Details C-9 Civil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Phase I C-10 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Details

Landscaping L-1 Landscape Site Plan Phase I Architectural

A-1 Cover Sheet, Drawing Index, Abbreviations, General Notes and Overall Site Plan A-2 Bus Maintenance and Storage Buildings Code Plan and Building Code Summary A-3 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Overall Floor Plan A-4 Bus Maintenance Building Floor Plan - Sector A A-5 Bus Storage Building Floor Plan – Sector B A-6 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Overall Roof Plan A-7 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Exterior Elevations A-8 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Overall Building Sections A-9 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Wall Sections A-10 Bus Maintenance Building Wall Sections A-11 Bus Maintenance Building Enlarged Stair Plans and Sections A-12 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Reflected Ceiling Plan, Enlarged Toilet

Rooms - Plans A-13 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Enlarged Toilet Rooms – Elevations and

Sections


Architectural (Continued) A-14 Bus Storage Building Exterior Elevation, Section and Details A-15 Bus Maintenance Building Exterior Elevation, Section and Details A-16 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Exterior Sections and Details A-17 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Exterior Signage Layout and Details A-18 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Finish Schedule and Partition Types A-19 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Door, Window and Louver Schedules A-20 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-21 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-22 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-23 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-24 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-25 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-26 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Building Perimeter Screen Wall A-27 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Miscellaneous Details A-28 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Enlarged Fuel Room Plans and Sections A-29 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Enlarged Fuel Room Sections and Details A-30 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Enlarged Fuel Room Enlarged Plans and Elevations A-31 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Door and Finish Schedules and Details

Equipment

EQ-1 Bus Maintenance Building Equipment Plan – Sector A EQ-2 Equipment Details

Liquid Fueling System FS-1 Fuel System Site Plan FS-2 Fuel System Gasoline and Diesel Storage Tank Plan and Sections FS-3 Fuel System Gasoline and Diesel Storage Tank Details

Structural S-1 General Notes S-2 Foundation Plan S-3 Foundation Plan S-4 Enlarged Foundation Plan S-5 Room Ceiling Plan S-6 Roof Framing Plan S-7 Roof Framing Plan S-8 Snow Drift Plan S-9 Column Schedule S-10 Column Schedule S-11 Joist Loading Diagrams S-12 Sections S-13 Braced Frame Details S-14 Truss Section and Details S-15 West Wall Elevation and Details S-16 Typical Masonry Details S-17 Foundation Sections and Details S-18 Foundation Sections and Details S-19 Foundation Sections and Details


Structural (Continued) S-20 Foundation Sections and Details S-21 Wall Details S-22 Roof Framing Details S-23 Roof Framing Details S-24 Roof Framing Details S-25 Site Retaining Wall Plans and Elevations S-26 Site Retaining Wall Details S-27 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Fuel Room Foundation Plan S-28 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Fuel Room Roof Framing Plans S-29 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Fuel Room Truss Profiles and Details S-30 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Fuel Room Details

CNG Fuel System (included for reference only) CNG-G00 CNG Notes CNG-G01 Site Layout with Gas and Electrical Trenches Locations CNG-G02 CNG Equipment Layout CNG-G03 CNG Control Room and Air Compressor Room CNG-G05 Signage Details CNG-E01 Single Line Diagram CNG-E02 Grounding Grid Details CNG-E03 Hazardous Locations CNG-M01 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) CNG-M02 Piping Details

HVAC (included for reference only) H-1 HVAC Symbols, Abbreviations and General Notes H-2 Bus Maintenance Building Floor Plan - Sector A H-3 Bus Storage Building Floor Plan – Sector B H-4 Bus Maintenance Building Roof Plan - Sector A H-5 Bus Storage Building Roof Plan - Sector B H-6 Enlarged Floor Plan Sector A – East H-7 Enlarged Floor Plan Sector A - West H-8 Enlarged Floor Plan Upper Level - Sector A – West H-9 Enlarged Floor Plan Upper Level - Sector B – North H-10 Enlarged Floor Plan Upper Level - Sector B – South H-11 Sections H-12 HVAC Details Sheet 1 of 2 H-13 HVAC Details Sheet 2 of 2 H-14 HVAC Schedules Sheet 1 of 3 H-15 HVAC Schedules Sheet 2 of 3 H-16 HVAC Schedules Sheet 3 of 3 H-17 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Fuel Room Plans – Sector B

Plumbing (included for reference only) P-1 Plumbing Symbols, Abbreviations and General Notes P-2 Bus Maintenance Building Buried Piping Plan - Sector A P-3 Bus Storage Building Buried Piping Plan - Sector B P-4 Bus Maintenance Building Piping Plan - Sector A P-5 Bus Storage Building Piping Plan - Sector B P-6 Bus Maintenance Building Utility Piping Plan - Sector A - East P-7 Bus Maintenance Building Utility Piping Plan - Sector A - West


Plumbing (Continued) P-8 Bus Maintenance Building Roof Plan - Sector A P-9 Bus Storage Building Roof Plan - Sector B P- 10 Enlarged Plumbing Plans P-11 Plumbing Gas, Water and Utility Riser Diagrams P-12 Plumbing Details P-13 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Buried Piping Plan -

Sector B P-14 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Building Piping Plan – Sector B

Fire Protection (included for reference only) F-1 Bus Maintenance Building Fire Protection Plan - Sector A F-2 Bus Storage Building Fire Protection Plan - Sector B F-3 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Bus Storage Fire Protection Plan – Sector B

Electrical (included for reference only) E-1 Symbols and Legends Sheet 1 of 2 E-2 Symbols and Legends Sheet 2 of 2 E-3 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Overall Classification Plan E-4 Bus Maintenance Building Classification - Section E-5 Bus Storage Building Classification - Section E-6 Overall Site Single Line Diagram E-7 SEMCC-48-1 and SEMCC-48-3 Single Line Diagrams E-8 MEMCC-48-2 and MSBMCC-48-1 Single Line Diagrams E-9 Fixture Schedule E-10 Panelboard Schedules Sheet 1 of 5 E-11 Panelboard Schedules Sheet 2 of 5 E-12 Panelboard Schedules Sheet 3 of 5 E-13 Panelboard Schedules Sheet 4 of 5 E-14 Panelboard Schedules Sheet 5 of 5 E-15 Equipment Adapter Table E-16 Elementary Diagrams Sheet 1 of 2 E-17 Elementary Diagrams Sheet 2 of 2 E-18 Lighting Control Riser Diagram E-19 Security System and CCTV Riser Diagram E-20 Paging System Riser Diagram E-21 Fire Alarm Riser Diagram E-22 Communication Riser Diagram E-23 Riser Diagrams E-24 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Overall Grounding Plan E-24A Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Underground Plan E-25 Bus Maintenance and Bus Storage Buildings Overall Roof Plan E-26 Bus Maintenance Building Receptacle Plan - Sector A E-27 Bus Storage Building Receptacle Plan - Sector B E-28 Bus Maintenance Building Equipment Power Plan - Sector A E-29 Overall Exterior Site Utility and Lighting Plan E-30 Bus Maintenance Building Lighting Plan - Sector A E-31 Bus Storage Building Lighting Plan - Sector B E-32 Bus Maintenance Building Telecommunications Plan - Sector A E-33 Bus Storage Building Telecommunications Plan - Sector B E-34 Bus Maintenance Building Security Systems Plan - Sector A E-35 Bus Storage Building Security Systems Plan - Sector B E-36 Bus Maintenance Building Fire Alarm System Plan - Sector A


Electrical (Continued) E-37 Bus Storage Building Fire Alarm System Plan - Sector B E-38 Electrical Room Enlarged Plans E-39 Service Entrance Enlarged Plan E-40 Site Electrical Details Sheet 1 of 5 E-41 Site Electrical Details Sheet 2 of 5 E-42 Site Electrical Details Sheet 3 of 5 E-43 Site Electrical Details Sheet 4 of 5 E-44 Site Electrical Details Sheet 5 of 5 E-45 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Enlarged Fuel Room Plan E-46 CNG Station and Fuel Room – Alternate 9 Heat Trace Enlarged Plan

© 2013 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved

111119-81700 August 5, 2013 Transit Operations Facility Phase I 02080-1 ISSUE FOR RE-BID

SECTION 02080

MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of: 1. Modular precast concrete manholes with tongue-and-groove joints with precast concrete

grade adjustment ring, frame, cover, and accessories. 2. Bedding and backfill materials.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International 1. ASTM A48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens 3. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick 4. ASTM C270 – Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 5. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 6. ASTM D698 – Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort 7. ASTM C913 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater

Structures 8. ASTM C923 – Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals 9. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement 10. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion

Materials 11. ASTM C990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast

Box Sections Using Preformed Joints Sealants

B. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT) 1. PennDOT Publication 408 – Specifications, edition current at time of bid.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Manufacture’s published detail drawings, modified to suit design conditions if required,

and Contractor prepared drawings as applicable. 2. Manufacture’s descriptive literature and specifications covering the product specified. 3. Manufacture’s installation information. 4. Submit manhole, component construction, features, configuration, and dimensions. 5. Submit manhole steps construction, features, configuration, material and dimensions. 6. Submit Flexible butyl resin sealants, features, configurations, material, dimensions and

installation procedures. 7. Submit mortar, frame and cover manufacturer components, features, model numbers,

dimensions, and material. 8. Submit pipe sleeves components, features, model numbers, dimensions and materials. 9. Submit external sealing system descriptive literature, installation instructions, shipping and

storage information.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Through-wall lift holes shall not be permitted in manhole component construction.

B. Comply with precast concrete manufacturer’s instructions for unloading, storing and moving precast manholes and drainage structures.

C. Store precast concrete manholes and drainage structures to prevent damage to Owner’s property or other public or private property. Repair property damaged from materials storage.

D. Mark each precast structure by indentation or waterproof paint showing date of manufacture, manufacturer, and identifying symbols and numbers shown on Contract Drawings to indicate its intended use.

E. The flexible butyl resin shall be shipped in a removable two piece wrapper.

F. Ship and store external sealing system per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C913 and ASTM C478, and with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923.

B. Mortar: Provide non-shrink, non-staining mortar, in accordance with ASTM C270, Type N.



C. Reinforcement: Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 1002.

D. Concrete – Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 704, Class A.

E. Exterior Surface Coat – Bitumastic Coating.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Frames and Covers - shall conform to ASTM A48 Class B or better. 1. East Jordan Iron Works Model 1975 or approved equal. 2. Machined to fit in pairs, shall be marked as pairs, and delivered in pairs. 3. Solid with with vent holes and have "Sanitary Sewer" or "Storm Sewer" cast into it as

appropriate.

B. Self-sealing hinged manhole frames and covers - shall conform to ASTM A48 Class B or better. 1. East Jordan Iron Works Model 1975 or approved equal. 2. Machined to fit in pairs, shall be marked as pairs, and delivered in pairs. 3. Solid and have "Sanitary Sewer" cast into it.

C. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic coated deformed steel bars. 1. Deformed bars shall be of new billet steel grade 40, meet the requirements of ASTM A615

and be 3/8 inch in diameter. 2. Polypropylene plastic shall meet the requirements of ASTM D4101.

D. Pipe Sleeves: Approved, flexible watertight pipe sleeves, installed in the precast manhole or inlet by manufacturer for a watertight installation, conforming to ASTM C923. 1. Kor-N-Seal I Flexible Pipe to Manhole Connector. 2. Z-LOK Pipe to Manhole Connector as manufactured by A-LOK. 3. Approved Equal.

E. Gaskets: Flexible Butyl Resin Sealants conforming to ASTM C990. 1. Conseal CS-102 or CS-202. 2. Kent Seal Mastic Sealant. 3. Approved Equal.

F. Grade Adjustment Rings: Precast concrete grade adjustment rings of necessary heights conforming to ASTM C478. The minimum grade ring thickness shall be 4 inches and the maximum grade shall be 9 inches.



2.03 CONFIGURATION

A. Manhole sidewall Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section; Reinforced Cast-In-Place Concrete sections, lipped male/female joints, sleeved to receive pipe sections. Through-wall lift holes not permitted.

B. Manhole Shape: Cylindrical.

C. Clear Inside Dimensions: As indicated on Contract Drawings.

D. Design Depth: As indicated on Contract Drawings.

E. Clear Cover Opening: As indicated on Contract Drawings.

F. Pipe Entry: Furnish openings as indicated on Contract Drawings.

G. Steps

1. Shall be installed by the manufacturer of precast units and shall be in placed at the time of

delivery. 2. Shall be prealigned vertically and spaced on equal centers 3. Locate steps the minimum distance from ends of risers and top sections as indicated on the

Contract Drawings.

2.04 BEDDING AND FILL MATERIALS

A. Bedding: Coarse Aggregate No. 57: Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.

B. Backfill: As indicated on Contract Drawings.

1. Suitable native material, as specified in Section 02300. 2. No. 2A Coarse Aggregate, as specified in Section 02300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.

B. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.

C. Verify correct size of manhole excavation.

D. Verify configuration and invert elevation of existing manholes where indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe.



B. Do not install manholes where site conditions induce loads exceeding structural capacity of manholes.

C. Verify manholes are internally clean and free from damage. Remove damaged units from the work site and replace.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for manholes and structures in accordance with Section 02300 in location and to depth shown. Provide clearance around sidewalls of manhole or structure for construction operations and granular backfill.

B. When groundwater is encountered, prevent accumulation of water in excavations. Place manholes in dry trench.

C. Place manhole base on coarse aggregate bedding, bedding shall be placed in 4 inch lifts and thoroughly compacted using mechanical compaction equipment to 97% of the material’s maximum dry weight density as determined by ASTM-D698 (Standard Proctor).

D. Lift precast manholes at lifting points designated by manufacturer.

E. When lowering manholes into excavations and joining pipe to units, take precautions to ensure interior of pipeline and manhole remains clean.

F. Precast bases, barrels and other sections shall be set to ensure that the floor is level and to ensure that all pipe inlets and outlets are at the correct elevations.

G. Lower, set level, and firmly position base section before placing additional sections. Anchor to foundation slab.

H. Assemble multi-section manholes and inlets by lowering each section into excavation.

I. Ensure that sections are placed vertically.

J. Remove foreign materials from the joint surfaces. Install two continuous Flexible Butyl Resin Sealants in tongue and groove joints between precast sections in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

K. Verify sealing materials are placed properly.

L. Joint sealing materials to be installed on site.

M. Verify manholes installed satisfy required alignment and grade.

N. All pipes entering and exiting the manholes are to be cut off flush with the inside face of the manhole, sealed and finished with mortar.

O. Fill lifting holes completely with non-shrink mortar.

P. Poured Invert



1. Pour invert of PennDOT Class A concrete in order to direct flows through the manhole. 2. Accurately shape invert to a semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside of connecting

pipes, and steel trowel finish to a smooth dense surface. 3. Make changes in size and grade gradually. 4. Make changes in direction of the entering pipe and laterals to a true curve of as large a

radius as the manhole will permit. 5. Slopes in the manhole floor outside the invert area shall drain toward the pipe at

approximately 2.5%. 6. Trowel smooth. 7. Contour to form continuous drainage channel.

Q. Backfill excavations for manholes in accordance with Section 02300.

R. Grade Rings 1. Two precast grade rings shall be used to bring the manhole to finished grade. 2. Place grade rings on a full bed of non-shrink, non-staining mortar. 3. Parge the outside of the grade rings.

3.04 CASTINGS INSTALLATION

A. Set frames using on a full bed of mortar as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Grade rings shall be placed between frame and precast concrete section.

C. Structure shall be set such that cover is flush with final grade.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with Section 02953.

B. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with Section 02953.

C. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding.

D. Compaction Testing: In accordance with ASTM D698.

E. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02300

EARTH MOVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. In addition to clean fill, contractor will likely encounter buried “unsuitable material” during earth moving that consists of historic fill, construction and demolition debris, and potentially contaminated material and/or soils. In general, unsuitable material shall be overexcavated and replaced with select fill and properly disposed off-site.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the: 1. Soil and aggregate materials. 2. Excavation. 3. Rock removal. 4. Filling and Embankment. 5. Rough grading. 6. Compaction. 7. Finish grading and topsoil. 8. Removal and replacement of unsuitable on-site soil materials as identified in the

geotechnical report. The geotechnical report and boring logs and Phase II Subsurface Investigation Plan indicate the general locations and depth of material identified as “fill”, “historic fill” or “unsuitable material” that shall be overexcavated, removed, and replaced with select fill. Refer to Summary of Work section and Bid Form for description.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02302 – Contaminated Material Removal, Transportation and Disposal.

B. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02301 – Historic Fill Removal, Transportation

and Disposal. C. Safety, Health and Emergency Response Plans are included in Section 01101. D. Environmental Protection Procedures are included in Section 01110.


A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates;

2006



2. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a 3. ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine

Aggregate 4. ASTM D2434 - Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head) 5. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System); 2006 6. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005 7. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005

B. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT) 1. Publication 408 – Specifications, edition current at time of bid.

C. Geotechnical Report prepared by Urban Engineers.

D. Phase II Environmental Assessment prepared by Urban Engineers.

E. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection (PADEP) 1. PADEP Document 258-2182-773 (Management of Fill Policy) 2. 25 Pa. Code Chapters 287 to 299 (residual waste regulations) 3. 25 Pa. Code Chapters 271 to 285 (municipal waste regulations) 4. Solid Waste Management Act, 35 P.S. §§ 6018.101 et seq.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Rock: Solid mineral material with volume in excess of 1/3 cu yd or solid material that cannot be broken and removed with 3/4 cu yd capacity excavator without hammering, drilling, or blasting.

B. Clean fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), uncontaminated, nonwater-soluble, nondecomposable inert solid material. The term includes soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such. (25 Pa. Code §§ 271.101 and 287.101)

C. Regulated fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, historic fill, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such that has been affected by a spill or release of a regulated substance and the concentrations of regulated substances exceed the values in Table FP-1a and b.



There are two types of regulated fill that will likely be encountered during this project: 1. Historic fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), material

(excluding landfills, waste piles and impoundments) used to bring an area to grade prior to 1988 that is a conglomeration of soil and residuals, such as ashes from the residential burning of wood and coal, incinerator ash, coal ash, slag, dredged material and construction and demolition waste. Many residential houses and other structures were demolished and buried in place beneath the project site, which will be classified as “historic fill”.

2. Contaminated material: Same as “regulated fill”. For purposes of this specification,

contaminated material was identified by testing in the area of former building #6 (boring #B-17), as identified on Figure 2 of Phase II Subsurface Investigation Plan developed by Urban Engineers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures, pavement and property; include structural calculations to support plan as required by Engineer.

B. Soils 1. Product Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 75 lb sample of each type of fill to testing

laboratory. 2. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source.

C. Geotextile Fabric 1. Product Data: Submit manufacture’s data for geotextile fabric. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify fabric meets or exceeds specified requirements.

D. Off-Site Disposal Permit(s), Forms, Sampling and Analytical Results, and/or Manifests: When disposing of excavated soils or rock or regulated fill off-site, provide all required disposal permits, forms, sampling and analytical results, weigh tickets and/or manifests required for the proper disposal of those materials.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish each subsoil material from single source throughout the Work.

B. Perform Work in accordance with PennDOT Pub. 408.

C. Manage fill material in accordance with Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), dated August 7, 2010, as amended.

D. Owner’s Representative shall be on-site to observe the limits of unsuitable material overexcavated and replaced.

E. Owner’s Representative shall provide guidance with regard to proper classification and segregation of the unsuitable material as “historic fill” or “contaminated material”, both of which shall be managed as “regulated fill” according to the PADEP Management of Fill Policy:



1. “Historic fill” shall be managed as regulated fill under PADEP’s municipal waste regulations (25 Pa. Code Chapters 271 to 285). Refer to Specification 02301 – Historical Fill Removal Transportation and Disposal.

2. “Contaminated material” shall be segregated separately from the “historic fill” and tested

by the Owner’s Representative according to the PADEP Management of Fill Policy. If testing reveals that the material contains concentrations of regulated substances that exceed the limits in Table FP-1a and b of this Policy, the material must be managed as regulated fill, specifically 25 Pa. Code Chapters 287 to 299 (residual waste regulations). Refer to Specification 02302 – Contaminated Material Removal Transportation and Disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. Suitable Native Material: Reasonably free of organic matter, coal or coal blossom, or other objectionable matter.

B. Select Fill 1. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 2. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SM, SP, GM, GP or ML. 3. Granular material, free of deleterious matter and conforming to the following gradation and

plasticity limits. Particle/Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight 3 in. 100 3/8 in. 35 - 95 No. 4 25 - 90 No. 10 15 - 80 No. 40 10 - 45 No. 200 3 - 15 Liquid Limit, 25, max. Plasticity Index, 7, max.

C. Frost-free Select Fill 1. Well graded granular fill with less than 3% material finer than 0.02mm. 2. AASHTO No. 57 Aggregate 3. AASHTO No. 67 Aggregate

2.02 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Coarse Aggregate No. 2A: Conforming to PENNDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.

B. Coarse Aggregate No. 67: Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.

C. Coarse Aggregate No. 57: Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.

D. Free Draining Gravel: PennDOT No. OGS Coarse Aggregate, Conforming to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.



2.03 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall consist of fertile, friable, natural soil of loamy character without admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site. It shall contain a normal amount (2%-10%) of decomposed organic material, free from heavy clay, coarse sand, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign material having an acidity range of pH 6.0 to pH 7.0. Topsoil must also be free of viable plants or plant parts of common Bermuda grass, Quackgrass, Johnson grass, Nutsedge, Poison Ivy. Canada Thistle or other as specified. Topsoil shall not be delivered in frozen or muddy condition.

B. Use topsoil from excavation and rough grading available from stockpiles on the site. Provide additional topsoil as required.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Geotextile Fabric: PennDOT Class 4, Conforming to PennDOT pub. 408, Sec. 735

B. Geotextile for perforated pipe underdrain shall be as manufactured by Typar Model # 3151.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D698.

B. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

C. Furnish materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work as indicated on Drawings.

B. For filling operations: 1. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. 2. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls and underground utilities to support loads

imposed by fill.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Call Pennsylvania One Call System at 1-800-242-1776 not less than three working days before performing Work. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

C. Protection 1. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage. 2. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping. 3. Protect bench marks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving,

and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.



D. The geotechnical report and boring logs and Phase II Subsurface Investigation Plan indicate the general locations and depth of material identified as “fill”, “historic fill” or “unsuitable material” that shall be overexcavated, removed, and replaced with select fill. Under the guidance of the Owner’s Representative according to section 1.05E, This unsuitable material shall be segregated and stockpiled on-site at the location indicated on the plans. The unsuitable material shall be transported off-site and disposed of according to Specifications 02301 or 02302. Refer to Summary of Work section and Bid Form for description.

E. Surface Preparation 1. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials. 2. Proof roll to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than

requirements for subsequent fill material. 3. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with select fill

and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. 4. Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 3 inches.

3.03 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations indicated.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.

D. Stockpile soil 10 feet high maximum.

E. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.

F. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

G. Stockpile materials on impervious material and cover to prevent erosion and leaching, until disposed of.

H. Unsuitable material classified as “historic fill” may be placed directly into construction and demolition debris roll-off boxes for transportation off-site for disposal.

I. Unsuitable material classified as “contaminated material” may be placed in appropriate containers for proper transportation and disposal offsite.

3.04 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading.

B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 10 feet and protect from erosion. Stockpile material on impervious material, until disposal.

3.05 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded.

B. Remove excess subsoil not intended for reuse, from site.



3.06 TRENCHING

A. Saw cut pavement to neat lines to the dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings, not more than 7 calendar days prior to excavation.

B. Excavate whatever substance encountered to the depth and width indicated on drawings, sufficient to install the work and allow inspection. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for bedding material.

C. Remove unsuitable excess excavated material from the site. Remove large stones or other hard matter capable of damaging pipe or impeding consistent backfilling or compaction.

D. Place and maintain safe barricades around all excavated openings during the progress of the work.

E. Backfill excess excavation, with No. 2A, Coarse Aggregate and thoroughly tamp.

F. Compact the resultant subgrade to 97% of the materials dry weight density as determined by ASTM-D698 (standard proctor).

G. Protect and support existing utilities and appurtenances.

H. Root Trimming 1. Trim roots encountered during excavation back to the “bark” of the root or back to where

the root is not split or frayed. 2. Trim roots neatly. 3. Trim only those on the tree side of the excavation.

I. Maintain profiles of utilities. Coordinate with other utilities to eliminate interference. Notify Owner’s Representative where crossing conflicts occur.

J. When Project conditions permit, slope side walls of excavation starting 2 feet above top of pipe. When side walls cannot be sloped, provide sheeting and shoring or trench box to protect excavation.

K. When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft and not capable of compaction in place, excavate to 24 inches below grade of bedding material. Backfill with No. 57 Coarse Aggregate and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

L. The Contractor shall remove any water accumulated in the excavation. Sanitary sewers shall not be permitted to be used as drain lines for construction work.

M. Blasting is not permitted.

N. Perform excavation adjacent to existing utility service in accordance with utility's requirements.

O. Do not advance open trench more than 100 feet ahead of installed pipe.

P. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

Q. Trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

3.07 FILLING AND EMBANKMENT

A. Place material in continuous layers as follows:



1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum 9 inches loose depth. 2. Structural Fill: Maximum 9 inches loose depth. 3. Granular Fill: Maximum 9 inches loose depth.

B. Compact soils in accordance with PennDOT Pub. 408. Maintain moisture content of fill materials necessary to attain required compaction density.

C. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

3.08 GRADING

A. Grade site as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise.

C. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

D. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation or filling.

3.09 TOPSOIL

A. Preparation for Topsoil 1. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1 inch in size. Remove contaminated

subsoil. 2. Scarify surface to depth of 3 inches where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where

equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil.

B. Placing Topsoil 1. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, and planting is required, to nominal depth of

6 inches. Place topsoil during dry weather. 2. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of

subgrade. 3. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. 4. Lightly compact placed topsoil.

3.10 GEOTEXTILE

A. Install geotextile fabric over prepared subgrade.

B. Seams shall overlap adjacent material a minimum of 12 inches.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Contractor.

B. Provide a minimum 24 hour notice to the testing agency prior to needing testing.

C. Compaction percentage will based on maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) method of compaction testing.



D. Testing to determine in-place densities will be performed in accordance with the following: 1. Density Tests: ASTM D2922. 2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.

E. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Stockpile Cleanup 1. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free

standing surface water.

B. Site Cleanup 1. Dispose of rocks, roots, and other debris removed from soil materials. 2. Clean ditches, pavements, adjoining lawn areas of excess soil or aggregate materials,

leaving the site in clean and neat condition.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.

D. Prohibit construction traffic over topsoil.

3.14 SCHEDULES

A. Fill within 3 ft. beneath roadway, driveway, and parking lot pavement: 1. Compact uniformly to minimum 100 percent of maximum density.

B. Fill in building area and a minimum 20 ft. beyond, and 3 ft. below pavement: 1. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

C. Fill in landscaped areas: 1. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



SECTION 02301

HISTORIC FILL REMOVAL, TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work described in this Specification applies to the proper handling, removal, segregation, staging, transportation and off-site disposal of “unsuitable material” encountered during earth moving that consists of historic fill” as defined in 1.03C of this Section.

B. In general, as described in SECTION 02300 – Earth Moving, unsuitable material shall be

overexcavated, placed in roll-off containers or trucks for off-site disposal, and replaced with select fill. This subsurface unsuitable material will likely be encountered in the vicinity of the proposed building footprint as shown on DRAWING C-2B – CIVIL SITE PLAN B PHASE I and described in the Geotechnical Report developed by Urban Engineers, but may be encountered at other locations of Work.

C. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for:

1. Proper handling, removal, segregation, staging, transportation, and offsite disposal of “historical fill” and construction and demolition debris (otherwise indistinguishable from “historic fill”).

2. Completion of all required paperwork for transportation and off-site disposal, including but

not limited to, material shipping records, bills of lading, landfill weigh tickets, etc. 3. Make all required notifications and secure all required permits prior to work, including but

not limited to, PA One Call, PADEP, municipality, county, etc.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02300 – Earth Moving. B. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02302 – Contaminated Material Removal,

Transportation and Disposal. C. Safety, Health and Emergency Response Plans are included in Section 01101. D. Environmental Protection Procedures are included in Section 01110.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), uncontaminated,

nonwater-soluble, nondecomposable inert solid material. The term includes soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such. (25 Pa. Code §§ 271.101 and 287.101). Excavated material may be classified by the Owner’s Representative as “clean fill”, but still unsuitable for fill beneath the proposed building. “Clean fill” may be used without restriction on other areas of the site that don’t require select fill.



B. Regulated fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), soil, rock,

stone, dredged material, used asphalt, historic fill, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such that has been affected by a spill or release of a regulated substance and the concentrations of regulated substances exceed the values in Table FP-1a and b.

C. Historic fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), material used to

bring an area to grade prior to 1988 that is a conglomeration of soil and residuals, such as ashes from the residential burning of wood and coal, incinerator ash, coal ash, slag, dredged material and construction and demolition waste. Many residential houses and other structures were demolished and buried in place beneath the project site, which will be classified as “historic fill”. Historic fill shall be managed as regulated fill according to the Management of Fill Policy.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Federal regulations include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration - 29 CFR part 1926

2. U.S. Department of Transportation - 49 CFR Subchapter C - Hazardous Materials

Regulation 3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency - 40 CFR parts 261 through 279

B. State regulations include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Solid Waste Management Act 2. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, The Waste Transportation Safety Program (Act 90) 3. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, 25 PA Code, Article VIII. Municipal Waste, Chapters

271-285 4. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, 25 PA Code, Article IX. Residual Waste Management,

Chapters 287-299 5. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Management of Fill Policy (#258-2182-773), effective

date 08/07/2010


A. Manage fill material in accordance with Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), dated August 7, 2010, as amended.

B. Owner’s Representative shall be on-site to observe earthmoving and define the limits of unsuitable material to be overexcavated and replaced by Contractor.



C. Owner’s Representative shall provide guidance with regard to proper determination and segregation of the unsuitable material as “historic fill”, which shall be managed as “regulated fill” according to the PADEP Management of Fill Policy. This “historic fill” shall be managed as regulated fill under PADEP’s municipal waste regulations (25 Pa. Code Chapters 271 to 285).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Properly excavate, handle, remove, segregate, stage, transport, and dispose off-site of “historical fill” and construction and demolition debris (otherwise indistinguishable from “historic fill”).

B. Provide all of Contractor’s employees and it’s Subcontractor(s) with personal protective

equipment and protective clothing consistent with the levels of protection for this Work as indicated in the Contractor's Site Safety, Health and Emergency Response Plan as described in Section 01101.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform all earth work in accordance with Section 02300 and the Safety, Health and Emergency

Response Plan as described in Section 01101.

B. All site health and safety controls shall be fully established and in operation prior to beginning work. Site controls shall include but not be limited to work zones properly barricaded, decontamination facilities, and all support equipment and supplies including personal protective equipment. All site controls shall be reviewed by the Construction Manager in the field.

3.02 CLASSIFICATION OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

A. Owner’s Representative shall be on-site to observe earthmoving and define the limits of

unsuitable material to be overexcavated and replaced by the Contractor. B. As Contractor excavates material, Owner’s Representative shall provide guidance with regard to

proper classification and segregation of any unsuitable material encountered as either “historic fill” or “contaminated material”.

“Historic fill” shall be managed as regulated fill according to PADEP’s Management of Fill

Policy under PADEP’s municipal waste regulations (25 Pa. Code Chapters 271 to 285). This material shall be handled and properly disposed as construction and demolition debris.

“Contaminated Material” shall be managed according to Section 02302.

3.03 REMOVAL AND STAGING OF HISTORIC FILL AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS

A. Employ methods necessary to remove all buried historic fill and construction debris and place in roll-off boxes or trucks for ultimate transportation offsite for proper disposal as municipal waste (construction and demolition debris).



B. Any bulk containers used for temporary staging of historic fill or construction debris shall be

solely used for that purpose and properly labeled, secured, and adequately covered to prevent exposure to the weather.

C. Bulk containers shall be temporarily staged at location designated by Owner for this purpose on

Drawing C-2A. D. Solid material shall be sufficiently dewatered prior to their leaving the site to be accepted by the

disposal facility.

3.04 TRANSPORTATION AND OFFSITE DISPOSAL

A. Prior to transport, Contractor shall verify that the disposal facility is permitted to accept and will accept material of the general quality and quantity described by these Specifications.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that free-liquid does not develop during

transport. "Wet soils" or materials shall not be loaded for transport. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly dispose of any free liquids that may result during transportation.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02302

CONTAMINATED MATERIAL REMOVAL, TRANSPORTATION, AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work described in this Specification applies to the proper handling, removal, segregation, staging, transportation and off-site disposal of “unsuitable material” encountered during earth moving that consists of potentially contaminated material and/or soils defined as “contaminated material” in 1.03B of this Section. In general, unsuitable material shall be overexcavated and replaced with select fill and properly disposed off-site.

B. As described in Section 02300 – Earth Moving, unsuitable material shall be overexcavated,

placed in containers for off-site disposal, and replaced with select fill. This subsurface unsuitable material will likely be encountered in the vicinity of the proposed building footprint as shown on DRAWING C-2B – CIVIL SITE PLAN B PHASE I and described in the Geotechnical Report developed by Urban Engineers, but may be encountered at other locations of Work.

C. Soil sampling and analysis from boring B-17 (as identified on drawing number FIG-2 of the

Phase II Subsurface Investigation Plan developed by Urban Engineers), indicates that the material in this area contains concentrations of regulated substances that exceed the limits in Table FP-1a of the PADEP Management of Fill Policy. Therefore, it is anticipated that the material in this area must be treated as “regulated fill” under this policy and managed in accordance with the PADEP’s residual waste regulations.

According to the Phase II report, “Contaminated material” is not anticipated to be

encountered in any other areas within the proposed earth moving area. However, the Owner’s Representative will be monitoring earth moving for potential “contaminated material.”

D. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for:

1. Proper handling, removal, segregation, staging, transportation, and offsite disposal of “contaminated material”.

2. Completion of all required paperwork for transportation and offsite disposal, including but

not limited to, material shipping records, bills of lading, landfill weigh tickets, PA Residual waste Form U, PA Residual waste Form 26R, etc.

3. Make all required notifications and secure all required permits prior to work, including but

not limited to, PA One Call, PADEP, municipality, County, etc. 4. Owner’s Representative will provide characterization, sampling, analysis of collected

contaminated materials sufficient to secure approval from offsite disposal facility for acceptance of these waste materials.



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02300 – Earth Moving. B. Contractor requirements as provided in Section 02301 – Historic Fill Removal, Transportation

and Disposal. C. Safety, Health and Emergency Response Plans are included in Section 01101. D. Environmental Protection Procedures are included in Section 01110.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Clean fill: As defined by PADEP Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), uncontaminated,

nonwater-soluble, nondecomposable inert solid material. The term includes soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such. (25 Pa. Code §§ 271.101 and 287.101). Excavated material may be classified by the Owner’s Representative as “clean fill”, but still unsuitable for fill beneath the proposed building. “Clean fill” may be used without restriction on areas of the site that do not require “select fill”.

B. “Contaminated material” (as “regulated material”): As defined by PADEP Management of Fill

Policy (258-2182-773), soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, historic fill, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such that has been affected by a spill or release of a regulated substance and the concentrations of regulated substances exceed the values in Table FP-1a and b. This contaminated material shall include solid and free liquid materials encountered.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Health and Safety Plan to Construction Manager. B. For contaminated material, submit a copy of all analyses to the Construction Manager within 2

days of receipt of the laboratory report. C. Submit to the Construction Manager for review all required documents for transportation and

offsite disposal, including but not limited to, material shipping records, bills of lading, landfill weigh tickets, PA Residual waste Form U, PA Residual waste Form 26R, etc. If required, Construction Manager will be responsible for obtaining Owner’s signature prior to transportation.

D. Prior to contaminated material transport offsite, submit to the Construction Manager written

confirmation from the disposal facility that they are permitted to accept and will accept material of the general quality and quantity described by these Specifications.

E. For solids, submit certified tare and gross weights of loads for solid and for liquids, submit

volume from disposal facilities.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Federal regulations include, but are not limited to, the following:



1. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration - 29 CFR part

1926 2. U.S. Department of Transportation - 49 CFR Subchapter C - Hazardous Materials

Regulation 3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency - 40 CFR parts 261 through 279

B. State regulations include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Solid Waste Management Act 2. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, The Waste Transportation Safety Program (Act 90) 3. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, 25 PA Code, Article VIII. Municipal Waste, Chapters

271-285 4. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, 25 PA Code, Article IX. Residual Waste Management,

Chapters 287-299 5. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Management of Fill Policy (#258-2182-773), effective

date 08/07/2010


A. Manage fill material in accordance with Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Management of Fill Policy (258-2182-773), dated August 7, 2010, as amended.

B. Owner’s Representative shall be on-site to observe earth moving and define the limits of unsuitable material to be overexcavated and replaced by Contractor.

C. Owner’s Representative shall provide guidance with regard to proper determination and segregation of the unsuitable material as “contaminated material/regulated fill”. “Contaminated material” shall be segregated separately from clean fill and “historic fill” and tested by the Owner’s Representative according to the PADEP Management of Fill Policy. If testing reveals that the material contains concentrations of regulated substances that exceed the limits in Table FP-1a and b of this Policy, the material must be managed as regulated fill, specifically 25 Pa. Code Chapters 287 to 299 (residual waste regulations).


A. Properly excavate, handle, remove, segregate, stage, transport, and dispose off-site of contaminated material.

B. Provide all of Contractor’s employees and it’s Subcontractor(s) with personal protective

equipment and protective clothing consistent with the levels of protection for this Work as indicated in the Contractor's Site Safety, Health and Emergency Response Plan as described in Section 01101.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform all earth work in accordance with Section 02300 and the Safety, Health and Emergency

Response Plan as described in Section 01101.

B. All site health and safety controls shall be fully established and in operation prior to beginning work. Site controls shall include but not be limited to work zones properly barricaded, decontamination facilities, and all support equipment and supplies including personal protective equipment. All site controls shall be reviewed by the Construction Manager in the field.

3.02 CLASSIFICATION OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

A. Owner’s Representative shall be on-site to observe earth moving and define the limits of

unsuitable material to be overexcavated and replaced by Contractor. B. As Contractor excavates material, Owner’s Representative shall provide guidance with regard to

proper classification and segregation of any unsuitable material encountered as either “historic fill” or “contaminated material”.

“Historic fill” shall be managed according to Section 02301. “Contaminated Material” shall be managed as regulated fill, specifically 25 Pa. Code Chapters

287 to 299 (residual waste regulations).

3.03 REMOVAL AND STAGING OF CONTAMINATED MATERIAL

A. Employ methods necessary to remove all buried contaminated material and place in roll-off boxes or other appropriate containers for ultimate transportation offsite for proper disposal as residual waste.

B. Excavate contaminated material to the limits necessary to achieve the required cleanup as

directed by the Construction Manager and/or Owner’s Representative. Assume that the Owner’s Representative will use visual and field screening techniques (e.g., PID) to determine the acceptable cleanup limits. Contractor shall allow time during earth moving activities for Owner’s Representative to safely and sufficiently monitor for presence of contaminated materials.

C. Any bulk containers used for temporary staging of contaminated material shall be solely used for

that purpose and properly labeled, secured, and adequately covered to prevent exposure to the weather.

D. Bulk containers shall be temporarily staged at location designated by Owner for this purpose on

Drawing C-2A. E. Solid material shall be sufficiently dewatered prior to their leaving the site to be accepted by the

disposal facility.



3.04 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS

A. Final sampling and analysis for characterization and offsite disposal or offsite treatment and disposal of all contaminated materials collected during the execution of the work described in this Section shall be performed by the Owner’s Representative while meeting all applicable Federal, State and local laws, rules and regulations.

B. Owner’s Representative shall collect and analyze a sufficient number samples for constituents

required by the disposal facility for acceptance. These analyses shall be performed by a laboratory certified for such analyses by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Contractor shall allow sufficient time for Owner’s Representative to complete sample collection and analysis once Contractor completes staging of contaminated materials.

C. Sampling and analysis for the contaminated material shall be conducted according to the PADEP

Management of Fill Policy – Appendix A. D. Owner’s Representative shall submit a copy of all analyses to the Contractor within 2 days of

receipt of the laboratory report. Analytical data shall be kept confidential, distributed by Contractor only to the disposal facilities.

3.05 TRANSPORTATION AND OFFSITE DISPOSAL

A. At least 7 days before transport, prepare and submit to the Construction Manager for review all required documents for transportation and offsite disposal, including but not limited to, material shipping records, bills of lading, landfill weigh tickets, PA Residual waste Form U, PA Residual waste Form 26R, disposal facility approval, etc. If required, Construction Manager will be responsible for obtaining Owner’s signature prior to transportation.

B. For disposal of contaminated solid and liquid, where more than one disposal option exists, the

Contractor shall propose to the Owner the least costly disposal option(s) that meets all applicable Federal, State and local laws, rules and regulations. Disposal determination will be subject to the Owner’s review and approval.

C. Prior to shipment, Contractor shall provide to the Owner written confirmation from the disposal

facility that they are permitted to accept and will accept material of the general quality and quantity described by these Specifications.

D. The Contractor shall not be permitted to transport materials offsite until all disposal facility

documentation has been received, reviewed, and accepted by Owner, Construction Manager, and the Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that free-liquid does not develop during

transport. "Wet soils" shall not be loaded for transport. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly dispose of any free liquids that may result during transportation.

END OF SECTION


111119-81700 02461-1 August 5, 2013 Transit Operations Facility Phase 1 ISSUE FOR RE-BID

SECTION 02461

STEEL 'H' PILES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Rolled steel section piles.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.

C. Structural Precast Concrete is included in Section 03411.


A. ASTM A690/A690M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel, Copper, Phosphorus Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine Environments; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)

B. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate details and schedule of pile installation sequence. Identify recommended pile length and shapes to suit design loads.

C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that steel casings meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: 1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piles. 2. Sequence of drilling. 3. Identify pile drilled hole diameters. 4. Final base and top elevations.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Piles: ASTM A690/A690M; structural steel, rolled H sections, minimum 50 ksi yield strength; sizes and lengths indicated.

B. Protective Coating: SSPC-Paint 15 Primer applied to steel exposed above ground.


A. Provide shop testing and inspection of piles under provisions of Division 1.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Coat pile with specified protective cover in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow to cure before installing piles.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Notify adjacent and affected land owners and building occupants with 90 days notice before proceeding with the Work.

B. Use drilling method that will not cause damage to nearby structures.

C. Protect structures near the Work, from damage.

D. Prepare to place piles from excavated working elevation.

E. Cuts and fills will be completed and compacted to final elevation prior to proceeding with pile drilling.

F. Subsurface conditions depicted on the drawings represent those encountered at the geotechnical report test boring locations. Actual conditions may vary between the test boring locations than depicted on the drawings.

G. Coordinate drilling and pile placement with existing Penelec pole location. 1. Drilling or pile placement of all piles within twenty (20) feet of existing Penelec pole may

not proceed prior to receiving written approval from Penelec. 2. Prepare and submit a written plan, procedure and sequence of drilling and pile placement

of all piles within twenty (20) feet of existing Penelec pole.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Drilling Holes: Drill holes at each pile location indicated on drawings. 1. Insert steel casing to drill holes as necessary to stabilize soil around holes. 2. Diameter of drilled holes shall be as indicated on the drawings. 3. Do NOT drill holes within three (3) diameters of previously drilled hole until concrete has

properly cured.



4. Each hole shall be drilled to a bottom elevation depth to maintain minimum embedment into bedrock as indicated on the drawings.

5. During drilling operations, record elevation bedrock is encountered and final bottom

elevation for each hole.

B. Pile Placement: Place steel piles in drilled holes as follows: 1. Ensure piles are centered in drilled holes prior to placing concrete. 2. Place piles in all locations and in the orientation as indicated on the drawings. 3. Cut off tops of piles to elevations indicated on the drawings and grind top surface smooth. 4. Do not damage piles during installation or concrete placement.

C. Concrete Placement: Place concrete in drilled holes after piles are in place and as follows: 1. Ensure piles remain in place and plumb during placement of concrete. 2. Place concrete from final bottom elevation of drilled hole, as determined in field, to top

elevation as indicated on the drawings. 3. Use vibratory methods to ensure proper concrete consolidation - see Cast-in-Place

Concrete Section 03300.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Vertical For Plumb Piles: 1 in 48.

B. Maximum Variation From Pile Cut-off Elevation: 2 inches.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 2 inches.

D. Maximum Relative Variation Between Adjacent Piles: Any point along exposed length of the pile: 1. 2 inches measured perpendicular to the face of the wall. 2. 2 inches measured parallel to the face of the wall.


A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Division 1. 1. Inspection will be performed per IBC Table 1704.9. 2. Concrete tests shall be performed per Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02510

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire water lines.

B. Flowable fill encasement.

C. Fire hydrants.


A. ASTM International 1. ASTM A193 – Standard Specification of Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting 2. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI

Tensile Strength 3. ASTM D1598 -Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal

Pressure 4. ASTM D1599 - Test Method of Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic

Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C104 - ANSI Standard for Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fittings for Water 2. AWWA C105 - ANSI Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe

Systems 3. AWWA C110 - ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through 48

In. (76 mm through 1,219 mm), for Water 4. AWWA C111 - ANSI Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe

and Fittings 5. AWWA C115 - ANSI Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-

Iron Threaded Flanges 6. AWWA C116 – Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior

Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service 7. AWWA C151 - ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or

Other Liquids 8. AWWA C153 - ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service



9. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association; 2001 (ANSI/AWWA C509)

10. AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings 11. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Perform Work in accordance with municipality requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WATER PIPE

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. Bituminous outside coating: AWWA C151. Pipe Mortar Lining: AWWA C104, double thickness. Polyethylene Encasement: AWWA C105. 1. Pipe Class 52, AWWA C151, for nominal thickness, rated water working pressure and

maximum depth of cover. Furnish 18 ft or 20 ft laying lengths. 2. Fittings: Ductile Iron Mechanical Joint, AWWA C110 or C153.

a. Coating and Lining:

1) Cement Mortar lining Double thickness AWWA C104

b. Stainless steel nuts and bolts. c. Ductile Iron Fittings shall be wrapped in Polyethylene Encasement: AWWA C105. d. Fittings shall have a permanent buried marker installed indicating the location of the

fitting as shown on the contact drawings. 3. Joints

a. Mechanical and Push-On Joints: AWWA C111.

4. Polyethylene Encasement: AWWA C105.

a. 4 inch D.I. pipe, 14 inch tube.



b. 6 inch D.I. pipe, 16 inch tube. c. 8 inch D.I. pipe, 16 inch tube. d. 12 inch D.I. pipe, 27 inch tube.

5. Provide lubricants, gaskets and required special tools.

2.02 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

A. Bedding: PennDOT #67 Coarse Aggregate, As specified in Section 02300.

B. Cover: PennDOT #2A or suitable on-site material, As specified in Section 02300.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Trace Wire: Electronic detection materials for non-conductive piping products. 1. Unshielded 6 gage copper wire. 2. Install trace wire continuously along pipe as shown in the contract drawings. Tape or

insulate trace wire to prevent corrosion and maintain integrity of pipe detection. 3. Terminate trace wire for each pipe run at structures and valves along pipe system. 4. Provide extra length of trace wire at each structure, so trace wire can be pulled 3 feet out

top of structure for connection to detection equipment. 5. Test trace wire for continuity before acceptance.

B. Tape Marker 1. All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall have a magnetic tape marker laid directly above

the pipe for the full length of the pipe approximately 18-inches below the finished ground surface. a. Tape shall be 3-inch wide, consisting of two exterior plies of polyethylene with an

aluminum foil core. b. Tape shall be colored blue and labeled “DANGER - BURIED WATER - DO NOT

DIG” in black letters. c. Splices, where required, shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. d. At completion of the project, before final payment, the contractor shall test the entire

length of the pipe using pipe location equipment. Tests shall be made only in the presence of a representative of the Owner. Any section of tape that is not continuous or that is undetectable shall be removed and re-laid.



2. All ductile iron water main shall be installed with a plastic ribbon tape. Tape shall be vinyl warning tape, colored blue, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial.

C. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified on contract drawings.

D. Flowable Fill: according to PennDOT Pub. 408. 1. Cement. Type I, IP, or II, Section 701. If using Type IP cement, adjust the quantity of

flyash in the design as necessary. From a source listed in Bulletin 15. 2. Fine Aggregate. Type A, B, or C; Section 703.1; except, having a maximum loss of 20%

in the Soundness Test, PTM No. 510. The fine aggregate may be natural sand or manufactured sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate. Type A, B, or C, AASHTO 10, Section 703.2. Except 10% maximum

for material finer than the 75 ìm (No. 200) sieve. From a source listed in Bulletin 14. 4. Water. Section 720.1 5. Admixtures. Section 711.3. Including air-generating admixtures. 6. Geotextile, Class 4, Type A. Section 735 7. Mix Design. Submit a mix design and test results (density and strength) to the

Representative, at least 3 weeks before construction. Use Table A as a guideline for the mix design or submit an alternate design based on density guidelines and conforming to the strength requirements of Table A. Base the submitted mix design on an absolute volume of 1 m3 (1 cubic yard).

TABLE A Mix Design

Properties & Criteria Type A Mix Design ( /m3 ( /CY))

Cement (kg (lbs))* 45 (100) Pozzolans (kg (lbs))* 910 (2000)

Bottom ash (kg (lbs))* 0 or Coarse Aggregate

or Fine Aggregate Air Generating Admixture*

Slump (mm (inches)) 178 (7) min

AASHTO T 121, C 136 **

Density (kg/m3 (pcf)) N/A AASHTO T 121, C 136

Water Absorption of --

Aggregate AASHTO T 85

Compressive Strength 0.86 (125) max



Properties & Criteria Type A (MPa (psi))

PTM No. 604 28 Days 8. *Quantities may be varied or alternate designs submitted to adapt mix to conform to

density and strength requirements or to adapt to specific site conditions. 9. **Some applications may require containing flowable backfill by constructing dikes from

the mix by using less water to produce a 75 mm (3-inch) minimum slump, if approved by the Representative. Thickening of the mix in other areas is allowed if approved by the Representative.

10. Provide mix designs that conform to specific density requirements, if specified. If source of

material is changed, submit a revised mix design before using material. Conduct design mix testing at the highest flowability or slump being used for the project.

11. If applications involve exposed metal or metal coated with a layer of thin concrete (< 13

mm (< 1/2 inch)), test the design mixes for corrosion resistance as follows:

Resistivity, AASHTO T 288, 60 day cure > 2000 ohm-centimeters pH of pulverized flowable backfill 5.0 to 9.5 Chlorides of pulverized backfill after cure < 200 ppm Sulfates of pulverized backfill after cure < 1000 ppm Sulfides of pulverized backfill after cure < 200 ppm

12. Certification. Certify the properties of flowable backfill as specified in Section 106.03(b)3. 13. Forms. Section 1001.2(h)1

E. Fire Hydrants: 6-inch hydrant, Mueller-Super Centurion 250 (A-423) or approved equal, with two (2) 2-½” hose outlets with City of Erie threads and one 4-inch pumper nozzle with City of Erie threads.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 TRENCHING

A. See Section 02300 for additional requirements.

B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.



C. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust restraint bearing on subsoil.

D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Handle and assemble pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Contract Drawings. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.

B. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets: Coat buried steel with one coat of coal tar coating before backfilling.

C. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping (10 ft horizontal, 18 inches vertical) in accordance with PA DEP code.

D. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 5 ft of cover.

E. Maximum pipe deflections shall not exceed 50% of manufacturers recommendations. Relay pipe that is out of alignment or grade.

F. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

G. Install pipe to have bearing along entire length of pipe. Excavate bell holes to permit proper joint installation. Do not lay pipe in wet or frozen trench.

H. Install pipe with no high points. If unforeseen field conditions arise which necessitate high points, install air release valves as directed by engineer.

I. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600 and install PVC pipe in accordance with AWWA C-900.

J. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 331300.

K. Close pipe openings with watertight plugs during work stoppages.

L. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points.

M. Install trace wire and tape marker as shown on Contract Drawings.

3.05 INSTALLATION - TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES

A. Install tapping sleeves and valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. In accordance with AWWA C105, encase Ductile Iron piping and fittings in polyethylene to prevent contact with surrounding backfill material.

3.07 THRUST RESTRAINTS

A. Provide tees, bends, caps, and plugs with concrete thrust blocks. Pour concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed earth. Locate thrust blocks at each elbow or change of pipe direction to resist resultant force and so pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair.

B. Do not cover pipe joints with concrete.



C. Install tie rods, clamps, set screw retainer glands, or restrained joints. Protect metal restrained joint components against corrosion by applying a bituminous coating, or by concrete mortar encasement of metal area. Do not encase pipe and fitting joints to flanges.

D. Install joint restraints as shown in the Contract Drawings.

E. Restrain PVC Pipe for the lengths shown on the contract drawings on each side of pipe the joints. All connections between PVC pipe and ductile iron fittings shall be made with a ductile iron gland assembly to a mechanical joint on the fitting.


A. Perform pressure test on potable water distribution systems in accordance with AWWA C600.

B. Pressure test system to 150 psi. Repair leaks and re-test. 1. After completion of pipeline installation, including backfill, but prior to final connection to

existing system, conduct, in presence of Engineer, concurrent hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests in accordance with AWWA C600.

2. Provide equipment required to perform leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests. 3. Test Pressure: Not less than 150 psi. 4. Conduct hydrostatic test for at least two-hour duration. 5. No pipeline installation will be approved when pressure varies by more than 5 psi at

completion of hydrostatic pressure test. 6. Before applying test pressure, completely expel air from section of piping under test.

Provide corporation cocks so air can be expelled as pipeline is filled with water. After air has been expelled, close corporation cocks and apply test pressure. At conclusion of tests, remove corporation cocks removed and plug resulting piping openings.

7. Slowly bring piping to test pressure and allow system to stabilize prior to conducting

leakage test. Do not open or close valves at differential pressures above rated pressure. 8. Examine exposed piping, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints carefully during hydrostatic

pressure test. Repair or replace damage or defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, or joints discovered, following pressure test.

9. No pipeline installation will be approved when leakage is greater than that determined by

the following formula:

L = SD(p)^1/2 133,200 L = allowable, in gallons per hour S = length of pipe tested, in inches D = nominal diameter of pipe, in inches p = average test pressure during leakage test,

in pounds per square inch (gauge)



10. At completion of the project, before final payment, the contractor shall test the entire length of the pipe using pipe location equipment. Tests shall be made only in the presence of a representative of the Owner. Any section of wire that is not continuous or that is undetectable shall be removed and relaid.

11. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and

retest at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02535

SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, spacers, pipe casing, and accessories.

B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sanitary sewer system.

C. Cleanout Access.


A. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2005

B. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2006

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS

A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; SDR 35, inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot style, rubber ring sealed gasket joint. Joints shall be "push-on" type.

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Pipe Markers 1. Plastic Ribbon Tape: bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4

mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

B. Pipe Casing Spacers: Projection type, non-metallic spacers constructed of preformed sections of high-density polyethylene. Spacers should be ISO 9001:2000 certified for strength and quality. The spacers should have a minimum number of projections around the circumference that total the number of diameter inches. Spacing between spacer rings should be calculated based on the actual installed load (weight of pipe filled with liquid) but should not exceed 10 feet. Spacer should also have a minimum height that clears the pipe bell or as otherwise indicated on the plans.



2.03 PIPE CASING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-252 Grade 2 Structural Steel material; inside diameter sufficient enough to house plastic pipe, fittings, and casing spacers.


A. Pipe Bedding Material: PennDOT #67 Coarse Aggregate, As specified in 02300.

B. Pipe Cover Material: PennDOT No. 2A or suitable on site material, As specified in 02300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCHING


B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling.

3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321. Seal watertight.

C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

D. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet which is to be stubbed outside of the building perimeter. Coordinate connection with plumbing contractor.

3.03 INSTALLATION – SPACERS

A. Casing spacers should be installed using double backed tape provided with the spacers in order to fasten them tightly to the carrier pipe.

3.04 INSTALLATION – PIPE CASING

A. Casing should be installed around plastic pipe, fittings, and spacers in locations shown on plans.


A. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

B. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with 02953.

C. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with 02953.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02551

SITE GAS DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Pipe and fittings for natural gas distribution on site outside buildings.


A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011

B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010

C. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011

D. ASTM D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings; 2011e1

E. ASTM D2517 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2006

F. ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010

G. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012

H. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements.


A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. Steel Pipe Above Ground: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 black: 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3 malleable iron, ASME B16.11 forged steel, or ASTM



A234/A234M wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded.

B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR11: 1. Fittings: ASTM D2513. 2. Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit.

C. Reinforced Epoxy Resin Piping: ASTM D2517: 1. Fittings: ASTM D2517. 2. Joints: Bell and spigot with epoxy resin.

D. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service " in large letters.

2.02 GAS COCKS AND VALVES

A. Gas Cock and Pressure Regulating Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Gas Cocks Up to 2 Inches: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.

C. Gas Cocks Over 2 Inches: 125 psig WOG, Steel body and tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.

D. Pressure Regulating Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends larger than 2 inch.


A. Bedding: As specified in 02300.

B. Cover: As specified in 02300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location and invert are as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2 inches diameter. Thread ferrous pipe 2 inches diameter and under.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections with flanges and unions.



3.03 TRENCHING


B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPING

A. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.

B. Route piping in straight line.

C. Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

E. Install cocks and other fittings.

F. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 24 inches of cover in non-travelled areas and 48 inches of cover in driveways and parking areas.

G. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe.

H. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve.

3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Seal enlarged sleeve watertight.

B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.

C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location.

D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress upon service pipe. For plastic service pipe, use steel pipe riser from below ground to regulator.

E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating away from building openings.


A. Pressure test gas piping. Coordinate with National Fuel Gas (utility provider) for required test pressure and procedure.

B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02827

CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE, ARCHITECTURAL FENCES, CHAIN LINK FENCE AND SWING GATE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Cantilever Slide Gate

B. Gate Operator

C. Architectural Fence

D. Chain Link Fence

E. Chain Link Swing Gate


A. ASTM B117 – Practice for Operation Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus

B. ASTM B221 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes

C. ASTM D523 – Test Method for Specular Gloss

D. ASTM D822 – Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus

E. ASTM D1654 – Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

F. ASTM D2244 – Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

G. ASTM D2794 – Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

H. ASTM D3359 – Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

I. ASTM F1184 – Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

J. ASTM F2200 – Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.

K. UL 325 Class I, II, III, and IV

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog cuts, data on posts, hardware, fabric, and accessories, and printed specifications and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, schedule of components, and relationship of gate to operator components and fences.




A. Manufacturer: Company having a minimum of 3 years experience in manufacturing of slide gate systems.

B. Fence/Gate Contractor: Contractor having a minimum of 3 years experience installing similar products/project in accordance with ASTM F567.

C. Single Source: To ensure system integrity, obtain the cantilever slide gate, hardware components and accessories, and the gate operator and components and accessories from a single source.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE

A. Cantilever Slide Gates shall have architectural finish of vertical metal pickets style approved by the owner. Basis of design is the Aegis II product from Ameristar Fence Products. 1. Materials, including all accessories, and fabrication shall follow manufacturer’s

specification.

2. Industrial steel fence panel with 1” x 14 ga. pickets.

3. Double wall rail 1 ¾” x 14 ga.

4. Top of pickets to have a pressed spear end.

5. 10 year warranty on corrosion.

6. Color to be selected by Owner.

B. Bi-parting Gates shall consist of two (2) cantilever slide gates and operators.

C. Factory fabricated, assembled, and tested device, including all components, welds, vertical and horizontal internal and external members, diagonal trusses, metal pickets, truck assembly and components, guide rollers, and gate posts.

2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL PICKET FENCE

A. Architectural fence shall have architectural finish of vertical metal pickets style approved by the owner. Basis of design is the Aegis II product from Ameristar Fence Products. 1. Materials, including all accessories, and fabrication shall follow manufacturer’s

specification.

2. Industrial steel fence panel with 1” x 14 ga. pickets.

3. Double wall rail 1 ¾” x 14 ga.

4. Top of pickets to have a pressed spear end.

5. 10 year warranty on corrosion.



6. Color to be selected by Owner.

B. Factory fabricated, assembled, and tested device, including all components, welds, vertical and horizontal internal and external members, diagonal trusses, metal pickets and components, posts.

2.03 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND CHAIN LINK SWING GATE

A. Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual

B. Intermediate Posts: Type I Round

C. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I Round

D. Accessories 1. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer. 2. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.

E. Hardware for double swing gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60-inches high, 3 for gates taller than 60-inches; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket set in concrete, active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold gate on fully open position.

F. Finishes 1. Chain Link Fabric: Galvanized coated steel chain link fabric per ASTM A392. 2. Components: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 3. Hardware: Hot-dipped galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M. 4. Accessories: Same finish as framing.

2.04 WARRANTY

A. Gate, components, operator system, and fences shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects for 3 years from date of sale.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXECUTION

A. Make field measurements and verify locations of utilities, grades and system before installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect existing work from damage due to installation of the work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gate, operator, and all system components and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

B. Install architectural vertical metal picket fence, components and hardware in strict accordance



with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

C. Install chain link fence, components, and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

D. Install chain link swing gate, components, and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Cantilever Slide Gate and Operator 1. Provide manufacturer’s field representative to observe system startup for cantilever slide

gates and operator systems. 2. Prepare and start equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations and test each system components. 3. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer’s published tolerances.

3.05 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. Grounding shall be responsibility of licensed electrical contractor.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Touch up any scratched surfaces using manufacturer recommended materials.

B. Clean up debris and unused materials, and remove from site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02639

WATERTIGHT PRECAST CONCRETE BOX

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section includes the construction of the underground precast concrete stormwater detention system as indicated on the drawings.

B. Precast concrete box underground storage tanks shall be as designed, engineered, manufactured and installed to meet: 1) designed storage capacity requirements; 2) water tightness performance capability equal to ASTM C-990, section 10. 3) water tightness performance in a continuous 10 psi condition for a period of 168 hours, losing less than 1% of total water volume through joint leakage shall require third party verification of not less than 2 prior existing underground precast concrete box installations that meet ASTM C-990, section 10 “Performance Requirement For Joints” standard, 4) 4 year labor and material warranty, and 5) HS-25 loading requirements. 1. designed storage capacity requirements – 30,000 cubic feet 2. water tightness performance capability equal to ASTM C-990, section 10 3. water tightness performance in a continuous 10 psi condition for a period of 168 hours,

losing less than 1% of total water volume through joint leakage shall require third party verification of not less than 2 prior existing underground precast concrete box installations that meed ASTM C-990, section 10 “Performance Requirement For Joints” standard

4. 4 year labor and material warranty 5. HS-25 loading requirements


A. ASTM A-48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings Class 35 B

B. ASTM A-416 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete Grade 270

C. ASTM A-615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

D. ASTM C-32 Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick

E. ASTM C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

F. ASTM C-270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

G. ASTM C-478 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

H. ASTM C-913 Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures

I. ASTM C-990 Section 10, Performance Requirements for Concrete Joints



J. ASTM C-1433 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers

K. US Patent No. US 7,828,496 B1 “Watertight Joint Seal for Concrete Structures”

L. Federal Specifications (FS): FS-SS-S-210 Sealing Compound Preformed Plastic for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints

M. Pipe openings shall be sized to accept pipes of the specified sizes and shall be sealed with hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C 595M.

N. The structure shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading, and existing soil pressure, ground water pressure and buoyancy

O. The access cover shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading and shall provide a minimum of 27-½ inches clear opening. Manhole frame and cover shall be East Jordan or Quirin manufactured from gray iron conforming to ASTM A-48 Class 35B.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted as described in Division 1 – General Requirements.

B. Certifications by a Professional Engineer shall be submitted that the Precast concrete watertight box shall conform to the specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND DESIGN

A. Concrete: 5,000 PSI at 28 days; with ASTM C-33 #57 or #67 coarse aggregate; self compacting; air entrained precast concrete.

B. Deformed steel conforms to ASTM A-615 Grade 60. Welded wire fabric conforms to ASTM A-185, deformed welded wire fabric and shall conform to ASTM A-497.

C. Post-tensioning strands shall be ½”diameter, ASTM A-416 Grade 270, 7 wire, low relaxation strand.

D. All precast concrete box section joints shall have closed cell neoprene gasket material around the entire interior and exterior perimeter of each joint.

E. The structure shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading, and existing soil pressure, ground water pressure and buoyancy. The materials and structural design shall be per ASTM C-478, C-1433 and C-913. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi.

F. The access cover shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading and shall provide a minimum of 27-½ inches clear opening. Manhole frame and cover shall be East Jordan or Quirin manufactured from gray iron conforming to ASTM A48 Class 35B.

G. Butil mastic sealant for joints shall conform to ASTM C-990 and FS-SS-S-210 Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic for Expansion Joints and Pipe J.

H. Pipe openings shall be sized to accept pipes of the specified sizes and shall be sealed with hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C-595M.



PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.01 WORK

A. This section includes directions for the installation of the structure. 1. Submittals

a. Manufacturer’s product data on the structure shall contain:

1) Dimensions of structure 2) Volumes-Capacities-Dimensions of the structure

b. Shop drawings showing materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. c. Box culverts shall be post tensioned using an electric motor driven hydraulic post

tension jack providing a minimum of 28 kips on each post tensioning cable. d. All post tensioning cables shall be encased in a protective sheath containing lithium

grease. e. All post tensioning cable ducts shall be grouted after post tensioning is completed. f. After post tensioning is completed grout shall be pressure injected into the entire

annular space of each joint g. Grout shall consist of 1 bag of #2 Portland cement; 5 gallons of water and Interplast

additive equal to 1% by weight of cement.

B. The precast concrete box sections shall be post tensioned, causing the closed cell neoprene gasket material to form a 10 psi joint seal. Each strand shall be stressed to 28,900 lbs. On first pass, cable shall be stressed to 30% of full load; second pass 100%.

C. After post tensioning, all joints between precast concrete box sections shall be filled in the field with pressure injected non shrinking, expandable grout through a series of preformed joint grout seal ducts at locations specified in the plans.

3.02 PRODUCTS

A. Precast Concrete Box 1. Precast concrete box shall be manufactured in a NPCA certified plant. 2. Precast concrete box shall conform to the shapes and dimensions shown on the drawings

and as specified. 3. Design loads shall consist of dead load, live load, impact load and loads due to soil

pressure ground water table and pressure and any other load on the Terre Box™. Live loads shall be HS-25.

4. The access cover shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading and shall provide a minimum



of 27-½ inches clear opening. Manhole frame and cover shall be East Jordan or Quirin manufactured from gray iron conforming to ASTM 48 Class 35B.

3.03 EXCAVATION / INSTALLATION

A. Earthwork 1. The Contractor shall prepare excavation large enough to accommodate the precast concrete

box and to permit grouting, sealing, backfilling of 8 inch cover and 12 inch around perimeter of the installation. Additional installation specifications may be necessary, depending on soil and site conditions.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Openings or “knockouts” in precast concrete storage chamber and/or distribution structure shall be located as shown on the drawings and shall be sized sufficiently to permit passage of the largest dimension of pipe and/or flange.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02740

ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Aggregate base course.

B. Bituminous Concrete Paving.


A. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT) - Publication 408, Specifications, edition current at time of bid opening.


A. Perform Work in accordance with PennDOT Pub. 408.

B. Mixing Plant: Conform to PennDOT Bulletin 15 (certified supplier).

C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate for Subbase Course: Subbase No. 2A - as per PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 350.

B. Tack Coat: In accordance with PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 460.

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN

A. Base Course: Superpave Asphalt Mixture Design, HMA Base Course, PG 64-22, < 0.3 Million ESAL's, 25mm Mix, as per PennDOT Pub. 408, Sec. 309.

B. Binder Course: Superpave Asphalt Mixture Design, HMA Binder Course, PG 64-22, < 0.3 Million ESAL's, 25mm Mix, as per PennDOT Pub. 408, Sec. 409.

C. Wearing Course: Superpave Asphalt Mixture Design, HMA Wearing Course, PG 64-22, < 0.3 Million ESAL's, 9.5mm Mix, SRL-L, as per PennDOT Pub. 408, Sec. 409.

D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.



3.02 BASE COURSE

A. Place and compact base course.

B. Place and compact base course according to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 350.3.

3.03 PREPARATION - TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat in accordance with PennDOT Pub. 408 standards.

B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and pavement edges.

C. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

3.04 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

B. Place wearing course within 24 hours of placing and compacting binder course.

C. When binder course is placed more than 24 hours before placing wearing course, or the binder course has been exposed to traffic, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.

D. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

E. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

B. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner.

B. Provide a minimum 24 hour notice to the testing agency prior to needing testing.

C. Compaction percentage will be based on maximum density as delineated in PennDOT Pub. 408.

D. Testing to determine in-place densities will be performed in accordance with the following: 1. Subbase: ASTM D6938. 2. Bituminous: ASTM D2950.

E. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.



3.07 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 1 day or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02751

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Concrete sidewalks, parking areas, and curbs.


A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002)

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000

D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

F. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007

G. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b

H. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011

I. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2010

J. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2011

K. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2008)

L. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a (Reapproved 2008)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound.

B. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical details.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.

B. Design paving for parking and buses.

C. Concrete Sidewalks: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick, Portland cement, brushed finish.

D. Parking Area Pavement: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, thickness per plan, wood float finish.

2.02 FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.

B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D1752). 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.

B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A185/A185M; in flat sheets; unfinished.

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer.

2.06 MIXING

A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.02 SUBBASE

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.



3.04 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

3.05 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement as indicated.

3.06 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

3.07 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Do not place concrete when base surface is wet.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

3.08 JOINTS

A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

B. Provide sawn joints: 1. At 5 feet intervals. 2. Between sidewalks and curbs.

C. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab.

3.09 FINISHING

A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.

B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius.

C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.

D. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.




A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in General Requirements Section. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed

firm. 2. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure

conformance with specified requirements.

B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under

same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.

C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02765

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, and curb markings.

B. Roadway lane markings and crosswalk markings.


A. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT) 1. Publication 408 - Specifications, edition current at time of bid. 2. Publication 111M - Traffic Control Pavement Markings and Signing Standards, Series TC-

8600 and TC-8700.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Transverse Markings: according to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 961.2.

B. Longitudinal Markings: according to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 962.2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Transverse Markings: surface applied, according to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 961.3 (a), (b), (d) and (e).

B. Longitudinal Markings: according to PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 962.3.

3.02 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT

A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked.

B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings.

C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities.

E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method.



F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02827

CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE AND GATE OPERATOR SYSTEM, ARCHITECTURAL FENCES, CHAIN LINK FENCE AND SWING GATE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Cantilever Slide Gate

B. Gate Operator

C. Architectural Fence

D. Chain Link Fence

E. Chain Link Swing Gate


A. ASTM B117 – Practice for Operation Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus

B. ASTM B221 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes

C. ASTM D523 – Test Method for Specular Gloss

D. ASTM D822 – Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus

E. ASTM D1654 – Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

F. ASTM D2244 – Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

G. ASTM D2794 – Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

H. ASTM D3359 – Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

I. ASTM F1184 – Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

J. ASTM F2200 – Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.

K. UL 325 Class I, II, III, and IV

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog cuts, data on posts, hardware, fabric, and accessories, and printed specifications and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, schedule of components, and relationship of gate to operator components and fences.




A. Manufacturer: Company having a minimum of 3 years experience in manufacturing of slide gate systems.

B. Fence/Gate Contractor: Contractor having a minimum of 3 years experience installing similar products/project in accordance with ASTM F567.

C. Single Source: To ensure system integrity, obtain the cantilever slide gate, hardware components and accessories, and the gate operator and components and accessories from a single source.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE

A. Cantilever Slide Gates shall have architectural finish of vertical metal pickets style approved by the owner. 1. Materials, including all accessories, and fabrication shall follow manufacturer’s

specification.

B. Bi-parting Gates shall consist of two (2) cantilever slide gates and operators.

C. Factory fabricated, assembled, and tested device, including all components, welds, vertical and horizontal internal and external members, diagonal trusses, metal pickets, truck assembly and components, guide rollers, and gate posts.

2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL PICKET FENCE

A. Architectural fence shall have architectural finish of vertical metal pickets style approved by the owner. 1. Materials, including all accessories, and fabrication shall follow manufacturer’s

specification.

B. Factory fabricated, assembled, and tested device, including all components, welds, vertical and horizontal internal and external members, diagonal trusses, metal pickets and components, posts.

2.03 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND CHAIN LINK SWING GATE

A. Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual

B. Intermediate Posts: Type I Round

C. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I Round

D. Accessories 1. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer. 2. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.

E. Hardware for double swing gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60-inches high, 3 for gates taller than 60-inches; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket set in concrete, active leaf



latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold gate on fully open position.

F. Finishes 1. Chain Link Fabric: Galvanized coated steel chain link fabric per ASTM A392. 2. Components: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 3. Hardware: Hot-dipped galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M. 4. Accessories: Same finish as framing. 5. Color(s): As approved by the Owner from the manufacturer’s standard range.

2.04 WARRANTY

A. Gate, components, operator system, and fences shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects for 3 years from date of sale.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXECUTION

A. Make field measurements and verify locations of utilities, grades and system before installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect existing work from damage due to installation of the work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gate, operator, and all system components and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

B. Install architectural vertical metal picket fence, components and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

C. Install chain link fence, components, and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

D. Install chain link swing gate, components, and hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Cantilever Slide Gate and Operator 1. Provide manufacturer’s field representative to observe system startup for cantilever slide

gates and operator systems. 2. Prepare and start equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations and test each system components. 3. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer’s published tolerances.



3.05 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. Grounding shall be responsibility of licensed electrical contractor.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Touch up any scratched surfaces using manufacturer recommended materials.

B. Clean up debris and unused materials, and remove from site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02870

DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install a pre-formed exterior dumpster enclosure with aluminum support framing, screening panels and operable access gates, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Earthwork is included in Division 2.

B. Asphalt paving is included in Section 02740.

C. Concrete paving is included in Section 02751.

D. Cast-in-place concrete pad is included in Section 03300.

E. Masonry work is included in Section 04200.

F. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500.

G. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

H. Field painting is included in Section 09902.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, detailed information on materials proposed and installation methods.

B. Product Data: Submit two (2) copies of the Manufacturer’s catalog, product brochures and technical data. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, available finishes and other data sufficient to indicate compliance with the Project specifications. Include details on fabrication and installation, catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Include layout plan, elevations, sections, door swings, dimensions, connection details, and attachments to all adjacent construction.

1. Show locations of swinging access gates for each dumpster.

2. Show locations of screening panels and aluminum support frame construction.

3. Show all anchorage to the reinforced concrete pad.



4. Show locations of adjacent masonry screen wall, exterior and interior protective bollards, electrical transformers, perimeter pavement and outline of dumpsters to be provided by Owner.

5. Provide setting drawings, templates and instructions for the installation of anchorage devices built into concrete pads, pavement, masonry screen wall, or other site work.

D. Samples of Materials:

1. Samples of screening panels, gate panels, aluminum support structure, hardware and all accessories involving material and/or color selection.

2. Two samples of each component, color and finish required for the proposed dumpster enclosure. Provide 6-inch square samples of the same thickness and material required for the work on this Project.

3. Samples for each type of hardware, top rail, column cap and accessory.

4. Samples will only be reviewed for color, material and texture. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

5. Submit full range of colors and materials available from the product Manufacturer for matching and selection. Finish color(s), material(s) and texture(s) shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.

E. Warranty: Issued and executed by the product Manufacturer, and countersigned by the Contractor.

F. Maintenance Data: For dumpster enclosure to include in maintenance manuals.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A167 – Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

2. ASTM A653 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

3. ASTM A666 – Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar

4. ASTM B26 – Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

5. ASTM B86 – Specification for Zinc and Zinc-Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings

6. ASTM B209 – Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate



7. ASTM B211 – Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod and Wire

8. ASTM B221 – Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes

9. ASTM B429 – Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes

10. ASTM E84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. AA ADM-1516166 – Aluminum Design Manual

D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE 7-95 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

1. NAAMM – Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products

F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain dumpster enclosure and accessories through one source from a single Manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of zoning and building authorities having jurisdiction in the Project location.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have minimum five (5) years documented experience producing the dumpster enclosure systems specified in this Section and shall be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

D. Installer shall be approved by the product Manufacturer and shall be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene at the job site seven (7) business days prior to the scheduled start of construction for the work activities of this Section.

1. Require attendance by representatives of the General Contractor, installing contractor, dumpster enclosure Manufacturer, and any other trades or entities directly affected by the construction activities of this Section.



2. Notify the Engineer and Owner at least four (4) business days in advance of the scheduled meeting date.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Project site in the product Manufacturer’s original, unopened and undamaged protective packaging, with labels clearly indentifying the Manufacturer and material contents.

B. Storage: Store all materials in an enclosed and protected area to prevent physical damage from temperature, moisture, exposure to the elements and impact from construction activities.

C. Handling: Protect and handle all materials to prevent damage to the finished surfaces, in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s written recommendations.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Take measurements of supporting concrete pads, footings or paving. Verify the actual locations of adjacent masonry screen wall, protective bollards, exterior electrical equipment and asphalt paving, prior to the preparation of shop drawings and fabrication.

B. Indicate field measurements and existing site conditions on the shop drawings to fully document any field condition that may interfere with proper installation of the dumpster enclosure system.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide a written warranty from the product Manufacturer that covers all defects in materials, for a minimum period of one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion.

B. If any part of the dumpster enclosure system fails because of a manufacturing defect within the warranty period, the Manufacturer will furnish the required replacement part(s) at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Product: Dumpster enclosure shall be ‘Covrit Gate and Screening System’ as manufactured by CityScapes Incorporated, Hilliard OH 43026, (877) 727-3367; or approved equal.

B. Substitutions: Submit any proposed alternates in accordance with Section 01630. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Thermoformed Plastic Panels: Fabricated from rigid high-impact thermoformed Acrylic Butylene Styrene (ABS) sheets. ABS Plastic shall be color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized with protective layer and mold resistant.

1. Minimum Thickness: 3/16-inch.



B. Aluminum Framing System: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for the type of use and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following for aluminum plates, shapes and bars (Alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5).

1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods and Wire: ASTM B211.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes: ASTM B221.

3. Structural Pipes and Tubes: ASTM B429.

4. Sheets and Plates: ASTM B209.

5. Castings: ASTM B26.

C. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel.

1. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x Stainless steel TEK screws.

2. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. Provide factory-formed, modular panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and all required components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths as indicated on the approved shop drawings.

B. Fabricate products to the following configurations:

1. Panel Style: Vertical Siding.

2. Panel Texture: To be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner.

3. Gate Style: Vertical Siding, Madison Style from Park Collection.

4. Panel and Gate Height: 7-feet high, as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Gate Width: 8-feet wide (48-inch Pair), at three (3) locations, as indicated on the Drawings.

6. Decorative Top Rail: Coved Trim Profile.

7. Column Cap Style: Standard Hip Cap.

8. Dumpster Enclosure Size: Series 1428, sized for three (3) 6-yard capacity dumpster bins, as indicated on the Drawings.

9. Dumpster Enclosure Layout: Enclosure with three (3) swinging gates and side personnel access opening, as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24-gage metal, and finished with product Manufacturer’s standard coating system, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings or specified herein.



D. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in the largest practical sizes, for delivery to the Project site.

1. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted.

2. Supply components required for proper anchorage of framing.

3. Fabricate anchors and related components of material and finish as required, or as specifically noted on the approved shop drawings.

E. Gate Hardware: Provide the Manufacturer’s standard adjustable cradle pipe hinge of the size required to fit support pipe provided on the Project. Include glide rings, grease nipples, slot and set bolts for adjustment, heavy-duty handles and stainless steel drop pin assemblies for each swinging gate leaf.

F. Dumpster Enclosure: Package shall include but not be limited to the following components: Extruded aluminum columns, side panels, bottom channels, top trim, column caps, gates with pipe hinges and mounting hardware, protective bollards, anchoring ‘J’ bolts with leveling nuts and washers, gate handle kits and retractable drop pin kits.

1. Provide all necessary components and accessories to provide a complete and properly operating dumpster enclosure system.

2. Should any component or accessory that is omitted from this Section, be required for the proper operation or to complete this enclosure system, it shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.04 ENCLOSURE FINISHES

A. Aluminum Framing: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-applied, high-quality, two-component urethane enamel coating system.

1. Custom Color: Color for the aluminum wall frames, door frames and steel hinges shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner to match the exterior metal wall panels on the adjacent building construction.

B. Panel Coating: Manufacturer’s standard panels constructed of thermoformed high impact ABS with integral color and a co-extruded acrylic UV protective layer on both sides of sheet.

1. Custom Color: Color for the ABS wall system at Vertical Siding on both fixed panels and swinging gates shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner to match the exterior metal wall panels on the adjacent building construction.

2.05 PROTECTIVE BOLLARDS

A. Steel Bollards: Pipe for protective bollards shall be welded and seamless galvanized steel pipe with plain ends, conforming to A.S.A. Pipe Schedule 40, ASTM A53.

1. Pipe size shall be 5.563-inches outside diameter with minimum 0.258-inch nominal wall thickness, 14.62-pounds per linear foot.



2. Set bollards within the concrete footings as shown on the Drawings.

3. Prime and paint all bollards safety yellow with system as specified in Section 09902. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Installer shall examine the field conditions under which the construction activities of this Section are to be performed. Ensure that the existing conditions and dimensions are in compliance with the final approved shop drawings.

B. Submit written notification to the Construction Manager and Engineer if the existing field conditions are not acceptable to complete the work of this Section.

C. Do not start the work of this Section until any and all deficiencies or unsatisfactory conditions have been adequately corrected.

D. Proceeding with any of the work from this Section shall constitute acceptance of the existing field conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with the product Manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide brackets, anchors and accessories as required for a complete installation.

B. Fasten structural supports to paving, footings, or piers at the spacing indicated on the approved shop drawings.

C. Insert thermoplastic panels into structural supports, except where fixed attachment points are indicated. Butt thermoplastic panels to adjacent panels for uniform fit. Fasten fixed panels in accordance with the final approved shop drawings.

D. Metal Separation: Where aluminum materials would contact dissimilar materials, insert rubber grommets at attachment points, thus eliminating where dissimilar metals would otherwise be in direct contact with each other.

E. Erection Tolerances: Misalignment from the true position shall be 1/4-inch maximum.

F. Install protective bollards in the locations shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

3.03 REPAIR

A. Repair any damaged work, as recommended by the product Manufacturer.

B. Replace any significantly damaged, deeply scratched or broken panels, at no additional cost to the Owner.



C. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be restored. Return any items with such damaged finishes to the Manufacturer’s shop for the required alterations.

D. Repair or replace any damaged or missing hardware and fasteners.

E. Replace any unacceptable work, which cannot be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 ADJUSTMENTS

A. After the installation is complete, adjust and lubricate all hardware according to the product Manufacturer's written instructions for smooth and proper operation.

B. Adjust and align hinges to provide a uniform clearance along the vertical edge of swinging gates.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. All components shall be kept clean during installation and throughout the construction process.

B. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation.

C. Protection: Protect the enclosure system to ensure that the finishes and structure of the installed systems are not damaged by subsequent construction activities.

D. Prior to Substantial Completion: Clean all exposed surfaces of framing, panels, gates, hardware and fittings. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with the product Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

3.06 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion of work under this Section, clean up and remove from the Project site all excess materials and debris resulting from the work under this Section.

B. Dispose of all such waste materials and debris in a lawful manner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02920

LAWNS AND GRASSES

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the following

1. Seeding. 2. Topsoil. 3. Lawn repair.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, backfilling, rough grading and fine grading.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass, identifying source, including name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.


111119-81700 02920-2 May 7, 2013 Transit Operations Facility Phase 1 Issue for Bid

E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil.

F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.

G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed at least three projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Contractor and or Subcontractor shall submit in writing to the Owner, and the Landscape Architect, a complete list of completed projects, owners, and addresses of those that would qualify as stated above.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.

1.07 SCHEDULING

A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during season appropriate for seeding procedures. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Seeding Seasons- May 1st thru June 1st and August 15th thru September 30th.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.



1.08 LAWN MAINTENANCE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Lawns: 45 days from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Three (3) mowing.

3. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.

1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch. Anchor as required to prevent displacement.

C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 3 inches .

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week.

D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 30 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 30 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow grass 2 to 2-1/2 inches (38 to 50 mm) high.

E. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) to lawn area.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.



2.02 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: Topsoil shall consist of fertile, friable, natural soil of loamy character without admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site. It shall contain a normal amount (5-15 %) of decomposed organic material, free from heavy clay, coarse sand, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign material having an acidity range of Ph 6.0 to Ph 7.0. Topsoil must also be free of viable plants or plant parts of common bermuda grass, quackgrass, johnson grass, nutsedge, poison ivy, Canada thistle or other as specified. Topsoil shall not be delivered in frozen or muddy condition.

1. Topsoil Source: Existing, import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2.03 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

a. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

2. Select responding to soil test.

B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.

2.04 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

D. Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer



E. Water: Potable.

2.05 PLANTING ACCESSORIES

A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application.

2.06 FERTILIZER

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.


2.07 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

C. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

D. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.



2.08 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long.

1. North American Green S-75 or equal.

B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd. (0.5 kg/sq. m), with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long.

C. Bird netting to hold straw

2.09 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.

2. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test.

3. Weight of Sulfur, Iron Sulfate and Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as

needed according to soil test.

4. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test.

5. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test.

6. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test.

7. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test.

8. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): as needed according to soil test

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding over spray.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.03 LAWN PREPARATION

A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening as required by soil test.

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

3. Spread topsoil soil mix to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of top soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches (50 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of soil.

b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: In areas where existing lawns are damaged, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.

2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches (150 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening as needed according to soil tests.



3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm)in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and

other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.04 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

B. Sow seed at the rate of 8 lb/1000 sq. ft.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with erosion-control fiber mesh and 1:4 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread with bark chipper for a smooth even layer of straw.

1. Anchor straw mulch with bird netting. Anchor with netting staples as needed.

F. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch, peat mulch, planting soil, topsoil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) and roll to a smooth surface.

3.05 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Seeding rate same as conventional seeding above.



2. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.

3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply mulch at a minimum rate of 1500-lb/acre (15.3-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate.

4. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry application at a minimum rate of 500-lb/acre (5.1-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate of 1000 lb/acre (10.2 kg/92.9 sq. m).

B. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with erosion-control fiber mesh and slopes 1:4 or greater with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 and less than 1:4 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread with bark chipper for a smooth even layer of straw.

1. Anchor straw mulch with bird netting. Anchor with netting staples as needed.

3.06 LAWN RENOVATION

A. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.

1. Reestablish lawn where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required.

B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil.

C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil.

D. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

E. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

F. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm).

G. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

H. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.

I. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established.



3.07 SATISFACTORY LAWNS

A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).

B. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.

3.08 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established.

C. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

3.09 SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE

A. Restoration Seeding: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows: Proportion Name Min. Pct.

Germ. Min. Pct. Pure Sd.

Max. Pct. Weed Sd.

75 pct. Perennial Ryegrass 90 98 0.150

(Lolium perenne)

25pct. Annual Ryegrass 90 98 0.150

(Festuca rubra variety)

B. Sun and Partial Shade: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows: Proportion Name Min. Pct.

Germ. Min. Pct. Pure Sd.

Max. Pct. Weed Sd.

75 pct. Perennial Ryegrass (3) Varieties 90 98 0.50

(Lolium perenne)

10pct. Red Fescue 90 98 0.50

(Festuca rubra variety)

15 pct. Kentucky bluegrass (2) Varieties 90 98 0.50

(Poa pratensis)

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02930

EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Trees.

2. Shrubs.

3. Plants.

4. Soil Amendments.

5. Mulches.

6. Weed control.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, backfilling, rough grading and fine grading.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. 2 lb (2.2 kg) of organic mulch, in labeled plastic bags.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported soil.

F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.

G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."



E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.

F. Observation: Landscape Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.



B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect.

1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

3. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

4. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.

1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

D. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.



E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.

2.02 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES

A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.

1. Provide balled and burlapped trees.

2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height.

B. Small Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows:


2.03 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS

A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.

B. Form and Size: Specimen-quality, exceptionally heavy, tightly knit, symmetrically shaped coniferous evergreens and the following grade:

1. Heavy Grade: "X."


2.04 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

a. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.

2.05 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch (13-mm)\ sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.



B. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.06 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:


B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.


C. Time release Fertilizer Packets or Tablets: Provide fertilizer packets to release over the period of three (3) years.

1. Composition: 16 percent Nitrogen, 8 percent phosphorus and 16 percent soluable pot ash.

2.07 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Aged shredded hardwood. Double Hammered

2.08 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Granular Pre-emergent Herbicide: Active ingredient: Trifluralin

2.09 STAKES AND GUYS

A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indicated, pointed at one end.

B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.



C. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.

D. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturers written instructions.

2.11 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:10.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.



3.03 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

2. Spread topsoil to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches (50 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.04 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION

A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate at least 24 inches (600 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

2. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.

B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill.

C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.



3.05 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING

A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 2 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.

1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

B. Organic Mulching: Apply 2-inch (50-mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 2 inches (75 mm ) of trunks or stems.

3.06 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.

3.07 GUYING AND STAKING

A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50- through 125-mm) caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches (1830 mm) above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Use the number of stakes as follows:

3. Use 2 stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in caliper; 3 stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

3.08 PLANTING BED MULCHING

A. Apply weed-control granular pre-emergent herbicide before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover areas to be mulched, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Granular Pre-emergent Herbicide: Active ingredient Trifluralin

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated.



1. Organic Mulch: Apply 2-inch (50-mm) average thickness of organic mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.

3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 02953

SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section Includes: 1. Testing Manholes

a. Exfiltration Test.

2. Testing Gravity Sewer Piping

a. Low-pressure Air Test.

3. Deflection Testing Plastic Piping.

1.02 UNIT PRICE AND MEASUREMENT

A. Work under this section is incidental to other items in this contract.


A. ASTM International 1. ASTM D2122 - Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and

Fittings

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following prior to start of testing: 1. Testing procedures. 2. List of test equipment. 3. Testing sequence schedule. 4. Provisions for disposal of flushing and test water. 5. Certification of test gauge calibration. 6. Deflection mandrel drawings and calculations.

B. Test Reports: Indicate results of manhole and piping tests.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXFILTRATION TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Plugs.



B. Pump.

C. Measuring device.

D. Contractor shall supply water.

2.02 AIR TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Air compressor.

B. Air supply line.

C. Shut-off valves.

D. Pressure regulator.

E. Pressure relief valve.

F. Stop watch.

G. Plugs.

H. Pressure gauge, calibrated to 0.1 psi.

2.03 DEFLECTION TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Go, No-Go mandrels.

B. Pull/retrieval ropes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify manholes and piping are ready for testing.

B. Verify trenches are backfilled.

C. Verify pressure piping concrete reaction support blocking is installed.

3.02 PIPING PREPARATION

A. Lamping: 1. Lamp gravity piping after flushing and cleaning. 2. Perform lamping operation by shining light at one end of each pipe section between

manholes; observe light at other end; reject pipe not installed with uniform line and grade; remove and reinstall rejected pipe sections; re-clean and lamp until pipe section achieves uniform line and grade.

B. Plug outlets; brace plugs to resist test pressures.


A. Testing Gravity Sewer Piping: 1. Low-pressure Air Test:



a. Test each section of gravity sewer piping between manholes. b. Introduce air pressure slowly to approximately 4 psig.

1) Determine ground water elevation above spring line of pipe for every foot of

ground water above spring line of pipe, increase starting air test pressure by 0.43 psig; do not increase pressure above 10 psig.

c. Allow pressure to stabilize for at least five minutes. Adjust pressure to 3.5 psig or

increase test pressure as determined above when ground water is present. Start test. d. Test:

1) Determine test duration for sewer section with single pipe size from the

following table. Do not make allowance for laterals.

AIR TEST TABLEMinimum Test Time for Various Pipe Sizes Nominal

Pipe Size (Inches) Time, T (Minutes

per 100 feet)3 0.24 0.36 0.78 1.2

10 1.512 1.815 2.118 2.421 3.024 3.627 4.230 4.833 5.436 6.0

2) Record drop in pressure during test period; when air pressure has dropped more

than 1.0 psig during test period, piping has failed; when 1.0 psig air pressure drop has not occurred during test period, discontinue test and piping is accepted.

3) When piping fails, determine source of air leakage, make corrections and retest;

test section in incremental stages until leaks are isolated; after leaks are repaired, retest entire section between manholes.

4) Where any section of sewer fails to pass the hydrostatic leakage test, it will not

be accepted until the Contractor has located and corrected the deficiency and the section has passed a subsequent leakage test. Where, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, excessive numbers of sections are failing to pass the hydrostatic leakage test, pipe laying operations will be suspended by the Owner's representative until such time as cause for failure, whether materials or



installation methods or both has been established and the Contractor has committed to a course for correction of the problem.

5) Where a section has failed to pass the hydrostatic leakage test, the Contractor

shall employ approved air isolation testing to locate the deficient portion(s) of the failing section. If the air test confirms a leaking joint or joints, the Contractor shall excavate, remove, and reconstruct the faulty section. In any instance where the leak cannot be defined and located and where the section fails to meet the hydrostatic test procedure, the Contractor shall completely remove and reconstruct the failing section manhole to manhole, including laterals, using new pipe material throughout. Cost associated with air testing, retesting by hydrostatic methods, or removal and reconstruction of failing section will be borne solely by the Contractor.

B. Deflection Testing of Plastic Sewer Pipe 1. Perform vertical ring deflection testing on all flexible sewer piping (PVC) where a

structure exists on both the upstream and downstream section of pipe to be tested, and after backfilling has been in place for at least 30 days but not longer than 12 months.

2. Perform testing prior to the paving operations. 3. Allowable maximum deflection for installed plastic sewer pipe limited to 5 percent of

original vertical internal diameter. 4. Perform deflection testing using properly sized rigid ball or 'Go, No-Go' mandrel. 5. Furnish rigid ball or mandrel with diameter not less than 95 percent of base or average

inside diameter of pipe as determined by ASTM standard to which pipe is manufactured. Measure pipe in compliance with ASTM D2122.

6. Perform test without mechanical pulling devices. 7. Locate, excavate, replace and retest pipe exceeding allowable deflection at no additional

cost to Owner.

C. Testing Manholes 1. Exfiltration Test

a. Plug pipes in manhole; remove water in manhole; observe plugs over period of not

less than 2 hours to ensure there is no leakage into manhole. b. Determine ground water level outside manhole. c. Fill manhole with water to within 4 inches of top of cover frame. Prior to test, allow

manhole to soak from minimum of 4 hours to maximum of 72 hours; after soak period, adjust water level inside manhole to within 4 inches of top of cover frame.

d. Measure water level from top of manhole frame; at end of 4 hour test period, again

measure water level from top of manhole frame; compute drop in water level during test period.



e. Manhole exfiltration test is considered satisfactory when drop in water level is less than values listed in table below:

Manhole Depth

(feet) Allowable Leakage (inches) for Manhole Diameter

4 feet 5 feet 6 feet 4 0.11 0.14 0.17 6 0.17 0.21 0.26 8 0.23 0.29 0.35 10 0.28 0.35 0.42 12 0.34 0.43 0.51 14 0.40 0.50 0.60 16 0.45 0.56 0.68 18 0.51 0.64 0.77 20 0.57 0.71 0.86 22 0.62 0.78 0.93 24 0.68 0.85 1.02 26 0.74 0.93 1.11 28 0.79 0.99 1.19 30 0.85 1.06 1.28

2. When unsatisfactory test results are achieved, repair manhole and retest until result meets

criteria at no additional cost to Owner; repair visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.

B. Openings for other work.

C. Form accessories.

D. Form stripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS



C. Masonry is included in Section 04200.

D. Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 05120.

E. Steel Joists: Placement of embedded steel anchors, plates and joist seats in cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 05210.

F. Steel Deck: Placement of steel anchors in composite decking is included in Section 05310.


A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010

C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008

D. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012



F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.


A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.


A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.

B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place concrete work.

B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.

D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.

2.03 REMOVABLE PREFABRICATED FORMS

A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

B. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; 2 inches thick.



2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.

B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.

1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based compound.

2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.

3. VOC Content: None; water-based.

C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type.

D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

G. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05120.

H. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.

3.02 EARTH FORMS

A. Earth forms are not permitted.

3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.



B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.

C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.

F. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing.

G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork.

3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

D. Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Division 4.

E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

F. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.

3.06 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.



B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400.

B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

C. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.

3.09 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.

B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete Forms and Accessories is included in Section 03100.


C. Architectural Precast Concrete: Reinforcement for precast concrete panels is included in Section 03450.

D. Masonry is included in Section 04200.


A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008

C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004

D. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007

E. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007

F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012

G. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b

H. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2006

I. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011

J. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Plain and Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.

1. Unfinished.

C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A884/A884M, deformed, Class A epoxy coated type.

D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of the Architect / Engineer. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.

B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.

C. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:



1. Beams: as indicated on drawings 2. Column Ties: as indicated on drawings. 3. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: as indicated on drawings. 4. Slabs on Fill: as indicated on drawings.

D. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.


A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Division 1, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Reinforcement For Foundation Wall Framing Members and Slab-on-Grade: Deformed bars and welded wire reinforcement, galvanized finish.

B. Reinforcement for Construction Joints in Floor Slab: Plain bars

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Concrete for composite floor construction.

B. Floors and slabs on grade.

C. Concrete walls.

D. Concrete foundations.

E. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

F. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork are included in Section 03100.

B. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.

C. Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing are included in Section 03351.

D. Joint Sealers: Sealants and fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs are included in Section 07901.


A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002)

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007)

E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000

F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010

H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008)

I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008

J. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004



K. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007

L. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012

M. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a

N. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2012

O. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012

P. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2011b

Q. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2010a

R. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012

S. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a

T. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011

U. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2009

V. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2011

W. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012

X. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2011

Y. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2010

Z. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008)

AA. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2011

AB. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008)

AC. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011

AD. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011

AE. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; Corps of Engineers; 1974

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured proprietary products and items, including but not limited to admixtures, patching compounds, curing compounds, finishing compounds, waterstops, joint systems and other accessories as requested by the Architect / Engineer. 1. Data will show compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 2. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility

with floor covering adhesives.

C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit signed and sealed laboratory test reports for concrete materials and concrete mix designs in accordance with ACI 318.

D. Samples: Submit samples of materials including names, sources, descriptions and locations of intended usage. Submit samples including: 1. Six inch long samples of waterstops, construction joint devices, and isolation joint devices. 2. Materials requested by the Architect / Engineer.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.

F. Pre-Installation Conference Meeting Minutes.

G. Surface Preparation Plan: Submit a written plan indicating manufacturer’s concrete surface preparation requirements for surfaces receiving coatings and/or finishes.


A. Codes and standards: Perform work of this section in accordance with following: 1. ACI 117 "Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials" 2. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" 3. ACI 302.1R "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 5. ACI 305R "Guide to Hot Weather Concreting" 6. ACI 306R "Guide to Cold Weather Concreting" 7. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice" 8. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

B. Concrete Testing Service 1. Engage a testing agency in accordance with Division 1 of the specifications to perform

material evaluation tests. 2. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the Architect / Engineer.



3. Re-testing of previously rejected materials shall be done at the Contractor's expense.

C. Pre-Installation Conferences 1. Conduct conference at Project site in accordance with Division 1 before installation of the

following: a. Floors and Concrete Slab-on-grade b. Concrete walls

2. At least 14 calendar days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Contractor's superintendent b. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes c. Agency responsible for field quality control d. Ready-mix concrete producer e. Concrete Subcontractor f. Primary Admixture manufacturers g. Architect / Engineer / Owner’s Representative h. Subcontractors responsible for under slab equipment

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200.


A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.



C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.

D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F.

E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.

B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260. 1. Products:

a. Air Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. b. MB-VR or Micro-Air, BASF c. Sika AER, Sika Corp. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications

C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. 1. Products:

a. Pozzolith R, BASF b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications

D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. 1. Products:

a. Glenium 3030 NS, BASF b. Plastol 5000, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Sika 686, Sika Corp d. Substitutions: see Division 1 of Specifications

E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. 1. Products:

a. Pozzutec 20, BASF b. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.



c. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co.. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,

prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Products:

a. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper VaporCheck II 10-mil Class A b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 10-mil (Class A)

www.stegoindustries.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR Class A - 10 mils d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications

B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. ASTM C1107/C1107M; Grade A, B, or C. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 3000 psi.

C. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic aggregate, and activator.

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type II. 1. Products:

a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com. b. FlexCon, Euclid Chemical Co.. c. Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications.

B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application. 1. Products:



a. Hilti - HY 150, RE 500, HY 20, HSE 2421.. b. Simpson Strong-Tie ETF Fast Cure Epoxy. c. Euco Epoxy System #452, Euclid Chemical Co.. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications.

C. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572. 1. Configuration: Dumbbel type at construction joints and other joints. 2. Size: To suit joints.

D. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement.

E. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07901.

2.07 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement. 1. Products:

a. Evapre, W.R. Meadows Co. b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co.. c. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications

B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound, that dissipates within 3 to 5 weeks; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Products:

a. CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc. b. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc. c. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications.

C. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A. 1. Application: Use at Bus Storage Areas.



2. Products: a. Kure 1315, BASF. b. Super Diamond Clear, Euclid Chemical Co.. c. Cure and Seal WB 25, W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 of Specifications.

D. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches

wide.

E. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil thick, clear.

F. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Urban

Engineers, Inc. for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer.

D. Normal Weight Concrete 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: As

indicated on drawings. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 44 percent by weight. 4. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 6. Air Entrainment: Non-Air Entrained.

E. Controlled Low-Strength Material (Lean Concrete) 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: As

indicated on drawings.



2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious material by weight. 3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 67 percent by weight. 4. Maximum Slump: 4 inches 5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1/2 inch 6. Air Entrainment: Non-Air Entrained

2.09 MIXING

A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes for batches 1 cubic yard or smaller. For larger batches, increase minimum mixing time of 1-1/2 minutes by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cubic yard.

B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

C. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing

applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.

D. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints shall be a minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactable granular fill before placing vapor

retarder as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand.

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.



B. Coordinate to ensure all items from other trades have been installed and located prior to concrete placement. Written approval must be received from the Owner’s Representative stating all items have been installed and located by other trades prior to concrete placement.

C. Concrete Placement for Floor Slabs: Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. 1. Concrete for floor slab in Maintenance area shall not be placed prior to the Contractor

receiving final shop drawings approved by the Architect / Engineer and Owner for all equipment shown on drawing EQ-1.

2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 3. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or

darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

4. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. 5. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified

below.

D. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.

E. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

Identification Name, number, date, mix type, quantity, mix time and amount of water introduced.

F. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.

G. Place concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated in the drawings.

H. Concrete Placement in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by

hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun



to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306.

J. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 305.

K. Concrete Surface Preparation: All concrete surfaces receiving coatings and / or finishes shall be prepared in accordance with the coating or finish manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Coordinate concrete surface preparation prior to placing concrete. 2. Submit plan of concrete surface preparation to Architect / Engineer at the Pre-Installation

Conference for approval. 3.04 SLAB JOINTING

A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.

B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.

C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including

columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.

D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.

E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant.

3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES

A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Division 1, will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances.

B. Minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values 1. Slab-on-grade (Design Thickness 5" of less): F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15. 2. Slab-on-grade (Design Thickness Greater than 5"): F(F) of 35; F(L) of 35.

C. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section.

D. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10.

E. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.



3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.

B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height.

C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows:

D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other

surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.

Moisture Cure: Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water-fog spray or saturated burlap. a. Moisture Cure: Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water-fog

spray, or saturated burlap. b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. c. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over

floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture Cure: continue initial curing for a minimum of 7 days total. b. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof

tape or adhesive; secure at edges.



c. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer.


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Divsion 1.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.

D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure one set of four concrete cylinders for laboratory tests. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed each day.

F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

G. Concrete Test Specimen: comply with ASTM C31 H. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM

C143/C143M.

I. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

J. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

K. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect / Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours of test.

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect / Engineer. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect / Engineer for each individual area.



3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03351

CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing are included in Section 03300.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers are included in Section 03300.


A. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2006

B. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2009

C. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations.

C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. For light reflective slabs, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during application, with dry shake hardener applied.

B. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet square.

C. Locate where directed.

D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet above the floor surface over each 20 foot square area of floor being finished.

B. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.

C. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.

B. Dry Shake Hardener: At a rate of 2 lbs per sq ft. 1. Use at following locations: Entire 8" thick slab in Maintenance, and Entire 10" thick slab

in Parts Storage.

2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS

A. Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with concrete, filling the pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete prior to set. 1. Composition: Silicate based. 2. Products:

a. Eucosil, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Kure-n-Harden, BASF. c. Med-Cure, W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 1

B. Dry Shake Hardener: Premixed dry powder with light reflective formula for spreading on and working into concrete surface prior to set. 1. Composition: Non-oxidizing metallic aggregate. 2. Products:

a. Diamond Plate Light Reflective, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Lumiplate, BASF. c. Substitutions: See Division 1

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.

B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials suitable for further finishes.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03411

STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Retaining Wall Lagging

B. Grout packing.


A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008

C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012

D. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b

E. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012

F. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007)

G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010

H. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011

I. PCI MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1999, Fourth Edition

J. PCI MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; Seventh Edition, 2010

K. PCI MNL-123 - Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1988, Second Edition

L. PCI MNL-135 - Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2000

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate standard component configurations, design loads, deflections, cambers, and bearing requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, unit locations, fabrication details, unit identification marks, reinforcement, connection details, support items, dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent materials. Indicate design loads, deflections, cambers, bearing requirements, and special conditions.




A. Designer Qualifications: Design precast concrete members under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of precast concrete and licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.

C. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in erecting products of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

D. Welder Qualifications: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4.


A. Handle precast members in position consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points.

B. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection.

C. Protect members to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete.

D. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST UNITS

A. Precast Structural Concrete Units: Comply with PCI MNL-116, PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL-123, PCI MNL-135, ACI 318 and applicable codes. 1. Design components to withstand dead loads and design loads in the configuration indicated

on the drawings. 2. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Design members exposed to the weather to provide for movement of components without

damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

4. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building

structural members and clearances of intended openings.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cement: White Portland type, conforming to ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Aggregate, Sand, Water, Admixtures: Determined by precast fabricator as appropriate to design requirements and PCI MNL-116.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars.



2. Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A775/A775M.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: Plates, angles, items cast into concrete, and inserts conforming to PCI MNL-123, and as follows: 1. Material: Carbon steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Finish: Unfinished.

B. Grout 1. Non-shrink, non-metallic, minimum yield strength of 10,000 psi at 28 days.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Conform to fabrication procedures specified in PCI MNL-116.

B. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing bars in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M.

C. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast members. Make records available upon request.

D. Ensure reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in items are embedded and located as indicated on shop drawings.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of precast concrete members are uniform in color and appearance.

B. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality, and minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.

C. Finish members to PCI MNL-116 Commercial grade.

2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Conform to fabrication tolerances specified in PCI MNL-135.


A. Provide mix design for concrete.

B. Test samples in accordance with applicable ASTM standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare support equipment for the erection procedure, temporary bracing, and induced loads during erection.



3.03 ERECTION

A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members.

B. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. Protect members from staining.

C. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment.

D. Grout underside of column bearing plates.

E. Secure units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances.

B. Conform to PCI MNL-135 for erection tolerances.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations.

B. Provide non-combustible shields during welding operations.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean weld marks, dirt, or blemishes from surface of exposed members.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03450

ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to design, engineer and install architectural precast concrete panels, complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Architectural precast concrete cladding units at arched sections of the exterior building facade.

2. Architectural precast concrete units at arched infill sections of the masonry screen wall.

3. Architectural precast concrete sills at the exterior window openings.

4. Architectural precast concrete coping at the masonry screen wall.

C. The Manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer a letter signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer (PE), registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, certifying that the precast concrete panels and all associated steel support framing and fasteners meet the design criteria set forth by the Engineer and required by the Building Code.

D. The Manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer two sets of design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer (PE) registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania for review and for the project records.

E. Coordinate the Work of the architectural precast concrete with the adjacent building materials including but not limited to masonry, decorative fence, rigid building insulation, and insulated translucent fiberglass panels.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Decorative architectural fence set within architectural precast concrete units is included in Division 2.

B. Installing connection anchors in concrete is included in Division 3.

C. Masonry work is included in Section 04200.

D. Furnishing and installing connections attached to structural-steel framing are included in Division 5.

E. Metal fabrications for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes are included in Section 05500.



F. Water-repellent finish treatments are included in Section 07100.

G. Building insulation is included in Section 07231.

H. Coping, flashing and trim is included in Section 07512.

I. Caulking and joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

J. Translucent fiberglass panels set into architectural precast concrete units are included in Section 08950.

K. Design loads for the Project are included on Drawing S-1.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.

D. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners.

1. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in hardware and connections.

2. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction.

3. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.

4. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions.

5. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel.

6. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.

7. Indicate locations and details of brick units, including corner units and special shapes, and joint treatment.

8. Indicate locations and details of stone facings, anchors, and joint widths.

9. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.



10. Comprehensive engineering analysis, signed and sealed by the qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, who is responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, anchors, fasteners, and types of panel reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast concrete panels.

a. The engineering analysis and final design for the overall architectural precast concrete panel system shall take into account all anticipated loading combinations due to lifting and transportation as well as design loads, wind loads and seismic loads, as indicated on Drawing S-1.

E. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12-inches by 12-inches by 2-inches thick.

1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.

2. Samples for each unit required, showing full range of color and texture expected. Include Sample showing color and texture of joint treatment.

a. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout

showing manufacturer's full range of colors.

b. Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by the Manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.

3. Admixtures.

4. Bearing pads.

5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

6. Brick units and accessories.

7. Stone anchors.

I. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

J. Source quality-control test reports.



K. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 211.1 – Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete

2. ACI 211.2 – Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete

3. ACI 216.1 / TMS 0216.1 – Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies

4. ACI 305R – Hot Weather Concreting

5. ACI 306.1 – Specification for Cold Weather Concreting

6. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

7. ACI 318M – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS C5.4 – Recommended Practices for Stud Welding

2. AWS D1.1 / D1.1M – Structural Welding Code - Steel

3. AWS D1.4 – Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel

F. Architectural Precast Association:

1. Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products Manual.

G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 27 – Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application

2. ASTM A 36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

3. ASTM A 47 – Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

4. ASTM A 108 – Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished



5. ASTM A 123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

6. ASTM A 153 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

7. ASTM A 184 – Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

8. ASTM A 185 – Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

9. ASTM A 276 – Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

10. ASTM A 283 – Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates

11. ASTM A 307 – Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

12. ASTM A 325 – Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

13. ASTM A 416 – Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete

14. ASTM A 496 – Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement

15. ASTM A 497 – Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete

16. ASTM A 500 – Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

17. ASTM A 563 – Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

18. ASTM A 572 – Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

19. ASTM A 615 – Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

20. ASTM A 666 – Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar

21. ASTM A 675 – Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties

22. ASTM A 706 – Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

23. ASTM A 767 – Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement



24. ASTM A 775 – Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars

25. ASTM A 780 – Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

26. ASTM A 884 – Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement

27. ASTM A 934 – Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars

28. ASTM B 633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

29. ASTM C 33 – Specification for Concrete Aggregates

30. ASTM C 144 – Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

31. ASTM C 150 – Specification for Portland Cement

32. ASTM C 260 – Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

33. ASTM C 330 – Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete

34. ASTM C 404 – Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout

35. ASTM C 494 – Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

36. ASTM C 567 – Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete

37. ASTM C 618 – Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete

38. ASTM C 881 – Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

39. ASTM C 920 – Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

40. ASTM C 979 – Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

41. ASTM C 989 – Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars

42. ASTM C 1017 – Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

43. ASTM C 1077 – Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

44. ASTM C 1107 – Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

45. ASTM C 1218 – Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete

46. ASTM C 1240 – Specification for Use of Silica Fume for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete, Mortar and Grout



47. ASTM D 412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

48. ASTM D 1743 – Test Method for Determining Corrosion Preventive Properties of Lubricating Greases

49. ASTM D 2240 – Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness

50. ASTM D 4397 – Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications

51. ASTM E 165 – Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination

52. ASTM E 329 – Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

53. ASTM E 488 – Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

54. ASTM E 709 – Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination

55. ASTM F 436 – Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

56. ASTM F 568 – Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners

57. ASTM F 593 – Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

58. ASTM F 844 – Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

H. Precast / Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):

1. PCI MNL 117 – Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products

2. PCI MNL 120 – PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete

3. PCI MNL 124 – Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete

4. PCI TR-6 – Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants

5. Architectural Precast Concrete – Color and Texture Selection Guide

I. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC-PA 1 – Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel

2. SSPC-Paint 20 – Paint Specification No. 20: Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)

3. SSPC-Paint 25 – Paint Specification No. 25: Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II



4. SSPC-SP 3 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 3: Power Tool Cleaning

J. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA)

K. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

L. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 DEFINITION

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, pre-approved by the Engineer.

1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Design Loads: Shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Wind Loads: Shall be indicated on the Drawings.

3. Seismic Loads: Shall be indicated on the Drawings.

4. Project Specific Loads: Shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Design framing system and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2-inch maximum.

6. Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 120 deg F.

7. Overall architectural precast concrete panel system shall comply with all Building Code requirements. Should a conflict exist between the Building Code requirements and the Project Design Criteria, the more stringent requirements shall apply.


A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load-bearing members.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.



1. Participates in PCI's plant certification program at time of bidding and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units or participates in APA's "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" and is designated an APA-certified plant.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

D. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

G. Sample Precast Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating the architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of two (2) sample mock-up wall panels approximately 16 square feet in area for review by Engineer and approval by Owner. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in the sample panels.

1. Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.

2. Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes.

3. After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at the Manufacturer's plant and one at the Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

4. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed by the Engineer or Owner.

H. Precast Sill and Coping Samples: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of two (2) samples for both the window sills and screen wall coping system. Sizes shall be approximately 12-inches by 8-inches by 4-inches high for review by Engineer and approval by Owner. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in the samples.

I. Color Range Samples: After sample panel approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of three (3) sets of samples, approximately 16 square feet in area, representing the anticipated range of each color and texture on the Project's units.

1. Following range sample, maintain one set of samples at Project site and remaining sample sets at the Manufacturer's plant as color and texture approval reference.



J. Mockups: After sample panel and color range sample approvals but before the production of architectural precast concrete units, construct full-sized mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate the aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution on the Project.

1. Build mockup for building façade as indicated on Drawings including curved panel top, reveals (both vertical and horizontal), returns for building attachment, openings for translucent fiberglass panel and brick masonry infill, finished corners, metal coping, sealants, and architectural precast concrete complete with anchors, connections, flashings and joint fillers.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically approved by Engineer in writing.

K. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units temporarily on the ground.

B. Support units during shipment on non-staining shock-absorbing material.

C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.

F. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on the approved Shop Drawings.

1.09 SEQUENCING

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions, as required for a complete and proper installation on the Project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricators: Provide custom precast concrete products by one of the following Manufacturers, or approved equal:

1. High Concrete Group, LLC, Denver, PA 17517, (717) 336-9300



2. Nitterhouse Concrete Products, Inc., Chambersburg, PA 17202, (717) 267-4505

3. Sidley Precast Group, Thompson, OH 44086, (440) 298-3232

4. Oldcastle Precast Inc, Selkirk, NY 12158, (800) 523-9144

5. Fabcon Precast Concrete Products, Buffalo, NY 14203, (800) 870-7595

6. Smith-Midland Corporation, Midland, VA 22728, (540) 439-3266

7. Tindall Corporation, Spartanburg, SC 29301, (800) 849-4521

8. US Concrete Precast Group, Middleburg, PA 17842, (570) 837-1774

2.02 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

B. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.

2.03 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A-615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A-706, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A-184, fabricated from ASTM A-615, Grade 60 or ASTM A 706-A, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A-185, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A-49, flat sheet.

F. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A-884, Class A coated, deformed, flat sheet, Type 1 bendable or 2 non-bendable coatings, as required for Project.

G. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for the spacing, supporting and fastening the reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.

2.04 PRE-STRESSING TENDONS

A. Pre-stressing Strand: ASTM A-416, Grade 270, uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.



1. Coat un-bonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor passing ASTM D-1743 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include all anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type, brand and mill source.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C-33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.

C. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C-330, with absorption less than 11 percent.

D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C-979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and non-fading.

E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C-260, certified by the Manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by the Manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C-494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C-494, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C-494, Type D.

4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C-494, Type E.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C-494, Type F.

6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C-494, Type G.



7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C-1017.

2.06 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A-36.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A-108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A-283.

D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A-47.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A-27, Grade 60-30.

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A-572.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A-500, Grade B.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A-675, Grade 65.

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A-496 or ASTM-A 706.

J. Headed Anchors: ASTM F-1554, Grade 36; carbon-steel, headed anchors; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A-563; and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F-844.

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A-325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A-563; and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F-436.

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For steel in exterior walls and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A-123 / ASTM A-153 or electro-deposition according to ASTM B-633, SC 3, Types 1 and 2.

1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.

M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non-galvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply according to SSPC-PA 1.

N. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.07 STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A-666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.



B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F-593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.

1. Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an anti-seize thread lubricant during assembly.

C. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A-276, with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

2.08 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for protection of architectural precast concrete units as recommended by the precast fabricator for application:

1. Elastomeric Pads: Plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D-2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412.

2. Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D-2240; capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test one specimen for every 200 pads used on the Project.

3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100, ASTM D-2240.

4. Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.

5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, non-leaching, plastic strip.

2.09 ACCESSORIES

A. Reglets: Stainless steel, Type 302 or 304, felt or fiber filled, or with face opening of slots covered.

B. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and all other accessories required to install the architectural precast concrete units on the Project.

2.10 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C-150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C-144 or ASTM C-404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C-1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B



and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C-881, of type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at the architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C-1218.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion full-depth mixture by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117.

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.12 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.

2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.



2.13 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1 and AWS C5.4, ‘Recommended Practices for Stud Welding.’

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to the supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Drawings, as recommended by Manufacturer or as required for Project.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10-inches in any shape or dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or pre-stressing strand without prior approval from the Engineer.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in ASTM A-775, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.

2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum coverage. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from the finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Place reinforcing steel and pre-stressing strand to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold the reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation and erection stresses.



G. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.

1. Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast, pre-stressed architectural concrete units until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.

2. Detension the pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat- cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.

3. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.

4. Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich, or epoxy paint to avoid corrosion and possible rust spots.

H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, ‘Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants.’

K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for both hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Engineer's approval.



2.14 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for any cast-in items.

B. Provide panel shapes and sizes, with joint locations, drips, reveals and returns as indicated on the Drawings, or as approved by the Engineer.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match the approved design reference sample, field mockups, and as follows:

1. Design Reference Sample: Architectural precast concrete finish with smooth surface, light exposure, uniform color and only fine exposed aggregates, shall be selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner.

2. As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide smooth concrete surfaces that are completely free of any pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs.

B. Finish all exposed top, bottom and back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match the face-surface finish.


A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."

B. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 requirements for concrete strength.

C. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply with ACI 318 requirements, the precaster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C-42.

1. A minimum of three (3) representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by the Engineer.

2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.

3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.



4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Engineer, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the following:

a. Project identification name and number.

b. Date when tests were performed.

c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.

d. Name of concrete testing agency.

e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core

tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

D. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match the adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not install any precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting masonry, steel or other structure is complete.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pad, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb and square within the specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as units are being permanently connected.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain all horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.



3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch.

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt the continuity of any adjacent roof flashing.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified by AWS.

3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a minimum 4.0-mil-thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A-780.

4. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and reprime any damaged painted surfaces.

5. Remove, reweld or repair incomplete and defective welds.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench.

F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect all architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.




A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections and prepare reports for all architectural precast concrete work including but not limited to the erection of precast concrete members.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to ASTM E-165 or ASTM E-709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.

D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to the Construction Manager, Contractor and Engineer.

E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.05 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with the Project requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so that any cured patches blend with the color, texture and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between the original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20-feet minimum.

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A-780.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean the surfaces of all precast concrete units that are exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag and/or any other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean the exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove any weld marks, other markings, dirt and stains.



1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 04200 MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to construct all masonry work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Concrete masonry units including:

a. Regular concrete masonry units (CMU). b. Split-Face type concrete masonry units.

2. Face brick. 3. Installation of deformed steel reinforcement provided under Division 3. 4. Masonry horizontal joint reinforcement, ties, anchors, through-wall flashing and

accessories. 5. Coordination and installation of items in masonry such as lintels, window, door and louver

frames, vent pipes, conduits, and other items furnished and installed by other trades. 6. Grouting of masonry cells, bond beams and lintels. 7. Foam insulation within un-grouted cells of masonry units. 8. Mortar dropping collection system within masonry cavity walls. 9. Coordination and installation of items in masonry such as lintels, window, door and louver

frames, precast sills and caps, insulation, roof canopies, signage, vent pipes, conduits, lights, and other items furnished and installed by other trades or contractors.

C. Provide masonry units, mortar, and grout testing prior to installation by the Owner’s independent

testing laboratory.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Testing during construction of masonry units and grout using materials delivered to the site for placement as part of the work, to determine compliance with the Contract Documents, will be provided by the Owner in accordance with Division 1.

B. Precast architectural concrete is included in Section 03450.



C. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500. D. Expansion control is included in Section 05800. E. Waterproofing and dampproofing are included in Section 07100. F. Building insulation is included in Section 07231. G. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. H. Coping, flashing and trim is included in Section 07512. I. Caulking and joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

J. Doors and windows are included in Division 8. K. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950. L. Field painting is included in Section 09902. M. Signage and dimensional letters are included in Division 10. N. HVAC equipment is included in Division 15. O. Electrical equipment is included in Division 16. P. Masonry in manholes and similar yard structures is included in Division 2. Q. Deformed steel bars for wall reinforcing and CMU lintel reinforcing are furnished under

Division 3.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:

1. Masonry reinforcement. Fabrication and placing drawings and details for mild steel and

prefabricated joint reinforcement. Reinforcement placing drawings shall conform to the requirements of Section 03200.

2. Product data for each type of concrete masonry unit. 3. Proposed mortar proportions including compressive strength test results from mortar cube

breaks. 4. Proposed grout mix design with compression test results from an independent certified

testing laboratory from the proposed grout. 5. Letter from approved manufacturer of concrete masonry units certifying that provided units

will meet or exceed required specifications along with test results of section properties and compressive strength based on unit strength method from independent testing laboratory.



6. Documentation that masonry units meet the minimum required fire-resistance rating as

indicated on the Drawings. Submit all certifications and test data as required to prove compliance with this Section and the Building Code.

7. Product data for joint reinforcement, anchors, straps, and ties. 8. Miscellaneous Items: Product data for insulation, joint filler, masonry cleaners and

accessories. 9. Foam Insulation: Product data, performance, thermal and acoustic properties for field

applied insulation. 10. Integral Waterproofing: Product data and test information for factory applied water

repellent to be used at all CMU.

B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer for review, sufficiently in advance of the installation of materials, to allow investigation and resubmittal of new samples if the original samples are found not to conform to the contract requirements. Submit the following samples in sizes and quantities stated:

1. Face Block and Brick: Two samples of each type used for color matching purposes, review by the Engineer and approval by the Owner.

2. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Two representative samples for each type of CMU used. 3. Mortar: Two product sample cases containing a full range of all colors available from the

proposed Manufacturer. Samples shall be used for color matching purposes, review by the Engineer and approval by the Owner.

C. Test Reports

1. For each type of masonry unit, certified preconstruction test reports, including compressive strength, absorption (24-hour cold water, 5-hour boil, and initial suction), dimensional analysis, unit weight, saturation coefficient and moisture content in accordance with ASTM C140.

2. Compression strength testing reports for masonry prisms before and during construction in

accordance with ASTM C1314. 3. Mortar test results before construction in accordance with ASTM C270. 4. Grout test results during construction in accordance with ASTM C1019. 5. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory.

D. Certifications

1. The masonry unit Manufacturer must provide a letter certifying that the units comply with the specified compression strength requirements.



2. The grout supplier shall provide a letter certifying that the grout conforms to ASTM C476 and that the compressive strength of the grout is not less than 2,000 psi at 28 days.

3. Material certification for cement and hydrated lime, and product data sheets, and any mortar

or grout admixtures. 4. Certify that the Contractor is not associated with the independent testing laboratory and that

the Contractor or its officers have no beneficial intent in the laboratory.

E. Weather Procedures

1. Cold weather construction procedures. Submit a description of procedures to be used when the ambient temperature or the temperature of masonry units falls below 40oF.

2. Hot weather construction procedures. Submit a description of procedures to be used when

the ambient temperature exceeds 100oF or 90oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 3. Review of hot and cold weather construction procedures will be for information only. The

Contractor remains fully responsible for complying with the requirements of this Section and for the adequacy of procedures employed.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ACI 530/ASCE 5 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 - Specifications for Masonry Structures

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

2. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement 3. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement 4. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 5. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 6. ASTM C114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement 7. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 8. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Units 9. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar



10. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 11. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 12. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 13. ASTM C331 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry

Units 14. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 15. ASTM C426 - Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry

Units 16. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 17. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 18. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars of Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 19. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout 20. ASTM C1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or

Expanded Rubber 21. ASTM C1314 - Standard Method for Constructing and Testing Masonry Prisms used to

Determine Compliance with Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry. 22. ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

1. UL 618 - UL Standard for Safety Concrete Masonry Units

D. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 1. NCMA-TEK 9-1: Mortars for Masonry 2. NCMA-TEK 3-2: Grouting for Concrete Masonry Walls 3. NCMA-TEK 18-5: Masonry Mortar Testing 4. NCMA-TEK 18-3: Quality Assurance

E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition F. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition



G. Where reference is made to any of the above, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.


A. Masonry shall comply with the recommendations of the Building Code, ACI 530 and other stated requirements, codes and standards. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards, and this Section shall apply should any conflicts exist.

B. Single Source Responsibility

1. All CMU shall be obtained from a single Manufacturer, as approved by the Engineer, to ensure quality of appearance and performance.

2. All Brick shall be obtained from a single Manufacturer, as approved by the Engineer, to

ensure the quality and uniformity of appearance.

C. Testing services required to demonstrate that the materials proposed for incorporation into the work comply with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM standards shall be furnished by the Contractor. The cost of such testing, unless specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the Contractor.

D. All field testing and inspection services to confirm that the properties of the materials actually

incorporated into the work conform to these Specifications and to satisfy the Building Code requirements, will be provided by the Construction Manager. The cost of such work, unless specifically stated otherwise, will be paid by the Construction Manager. Facilitate such testing and inspection as follows:

1. Advise Engineer of installation far enough in advance to allow for assignment and scheduling of inspection and testing personnel.

2. Furnish any labor necessary to assist the Construction Manager’s testing agency in

obtaining and handling samples. 3. Material Properties:

a. The mortar shall conform to the property specifications of ASTM C270 for the mortar type specified.

b. Concrete masonry units shall be sampled and tested in compliance with ASTM C140

and in conformance with ASTM C90. c. Bed joint thickness must not exceed 5/8-inch. d. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 Coarse Type, and the grout compressive strength

shall not be less than the minimum strength shown on the Drawings as determined in accordance with ASTM C1019.

E. Methods of testing shall conform to ASTM or other standards as indicated. Include in reports a

description of the portion of construction represented by the specimen(s), and a summary of conditions under which the specimens were stored prior to testing.



F. Inspection

1. All reinforced masonry will be inspected by the Engineer. 2. The Engineer will observe the work of this Section for conformance with the Drawings and

specifications. The Contractor shall correct or replace any unacceptable or otherwise non-conforming work as directed by the Engineer.

3. Level of Inspection:

a. Inspections will be performed in accordance with Level 1 special inspection per the

Building Code and Level 1 Quality Assurance per ACI 530.1 Table 3.

G. Confirm properties of materials used for construction and test results for compressive strength as follows.

1. Items to be completed before the delivery of any masonry units or materials:

a. Submit a letter from the masonry unit supplier certifying that units conform to the reference standards specified when sampled and tested in compliance with ASTM C140 (concrete masonry). Submit laboratory test results documenting that the masonry units meet the minimum compressive strength specified when tested per ASTM C140.

b. Submit a letter certifying that the mortar to be used conforms to the property

specification requirements for Type S mortar in accordance with ASTM C270 and submit laboratory test data demonstrating that the mortar has the minimum compressive strength specified when sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C780.

c. Submit laboratory test results demonstrating that the grout has the minimum

compressive strength specified when sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C1019.

2. During construction, the Construction Manager's testing lab will test the following

specimens for compressive strength. Provide one set of specimens for each 5,000-square-feet of masonry wall area, but not less than one set per project for testing.

a. One set of three masonry units to be tested in compliance with ASTM C140 (concrete

masonry). b. One set of three grout specimens constructed and mixed in compliance with ASTM

C1019.

H. Sample Panel: Before any masonry work is begun, construct on the site, where directed by and for the approval of the Engineer, a sample panel of the exterior masonry cavity wall system. The panel shall be approximately 8-feet long by 4-feet high in size, and shall incorporate all of the various types of CMU, brick and masonry veneer, rigid and foam insulation with all ties and reinforcements.



a. Include the correct color, size, type and texture of brick and masonry units with the selected color and tooling of mortar.

b. Include one complete exterior and interior vertical control joint to be caulked under

Division 7 and one finished end showing proposed wall opening construction. c. Include one length of through-wall flashing with weep holes. d. One face shall show the specified workmanship, coursing, bond, thickness and tooling

of joints. e. Reconstruct wall sample panel as ordered until approved by the Engineer and Owner. f. This sample wall panel, when approved, shall become the standard for overall

appearance and acceptable finished work on the project. g. Sample panel shall remain in place for the duration of construction and shall be

completely removed from the job site at the completion of the project when and as directed by the Engineer.

I. Cold and Hot Weather Construction: Masonry construction in cold and hot weather shall

conform to the applicable requirements of the Building Code, unless otherwise specified herein. Heat and enclosures will be the only protection method allowed for cold weather construction. No mortar additives shall be used for this purpose.

J. All masonry work shall conform to the Building Code and ACI 530, except as modified herein.


A. All materials for the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Store materials off the ground and protected from weather.

B. All masonry work shall be shipped stacked with pallets, shrink wrap, banding, plastic, and/or

cardboard protection or other suitable protective device, and shall be similarly protected and stacked off the ground on the site. CMU and brick shall be protected from the weather and staining with the use of non-staining, waterproof tarpaulins, membranes, or other plastic covering approved by the Engineer.

C. Prevent wetting by capillary action, rain, or snow. Manufactured materials, such as cement and

lime, shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, and shall be plainly marked with identification of material and maker. Materials in broken containers, or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used, shall be removed from the site and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. All masonry and brick shall be well covered and protected during manufacture, storage,

shipping, and while on the job site to prevent contamination that may lead to efflorescence in the finished work. If efflorescence occurs in the finished work, the Engineer may order the removal and replacement of areas so affected at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Lift all CMU and Brick with wide belt-type slings where possible. Do not lift with wire ropes.



F. Do not use pinch bars or wrecking bars to handle stone. Do not use any equipment that contains substances that might stain units.

G. Brick and CMU shall be handled, stored and protected per the Manufacturer’s instructions. All

units shall be supported during shipment on non-staining shock absorbing material. Any broken, cracked, chipped, soiled or otherwise damaged units shall not be used, shall be removed from the site, and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - MASONRY

A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU)

1. General Requirements:

a. Provide special units required by the Drawings, including solid, corner, pilaster, bond beam, lintels, sloped sill, and jamb units.

b. Provide 2-cell units. c. Use formed U-shaped units for reinforced masonry lintels. d. Similar units shall be obtained from one Manufacturer to ensure even color and texture. e. Units shall be free from substances that will cause staining or pop-outs and shall have a

fine, even texture with straight and true edges as approved by the Engineer. Minor cracks or defects incidental to the usual method of manufacture, or minor chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, will not be deemed grounds for rejection except that not more than 5 percent of a shipment shall contain chips larger than 1/4-in from any edge or corner on the faces.

2. Hollow and solid CMU shall conform to ASTM C90, normal weight, Type I, load bearing,

2-cell units, except for more stringent provisions listed below. Units shall be 8-inches by 8-inches by 16-inches, 6-inches by 8-inches by 16-inches, or 12-inches by 8-inches by 16-inches nominal face size with bed dimension as shown on the Drawings or as required for the project.

3. CMU shall be free from substances that will cause staining or pop-outs and shall be fine, even texture with straight and true edges. All units shall be wet steam cured for at least 18 hours and then air cured in covered storage for not less than 28 days before delivery.

4. Minimum compressive strength on the net area (average of three units) when tested in accordance with ASTM C140 shall be 1900 psi on the net area. Minimum compressive strength of any individual unit shall be not less than 80 percent of the required three-unit average.

5. Water absorption shall not exceed 10 lbs/cu ft (average of three units) when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.



6. Moisture content at time of delivery to job site shall not exceed 35 percent of total absorption.

7. No overall dimension (width, height, or length) shall differ by more than 1/16-inch from the specified standard dimension, except that dimensions measured to a split-face or end shall not be held to this tolerance.

8. Cure masonry units in an autoclave in a saturated steam atmosphere at an average temperature exceeding 350 degrees F for a period of time sufficient to assure that the units will meet the requirements for drying shrinkage not less than 28 days before delivery.

9. Oven dry weight of the concrete shall not be less than 130 lbs/cu ft.

10. Provide all special units required by the Drawings, including solid, corner, pilaster bond beam, internal and external corner units, lintels, sloped sill, jamb units and other special units as shown or required for the project. Where applicable, saw cut units as required to provide special size units.

11. Units shall be obtained from one Manufacturer to ensure even color and texture.

12. Provide UL tested and approved units that meet requirements of the Building Code, where required for fire-rated construction. Refer to Code Drawings for the locations of fire-rated wall assemblies.

13. Units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the units or impair the strength or permanence of the construction.

B. Split Face Masonry Units

1. Split face units shall conform to ASTM C90. Units shall have a clear-colored, integral water-repellant admixture at the time of manufacture, by the Dillon Company; or equal.

2. Sizes and shapes shall be nominal 4-inch, 8-inch, 12-inch, and 16-inch deep masonry units,

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or as required for the Project. 3. Shapes shall be standard, with corners and chamfers where indicated or required. 4. Color shall be ‘Graphite’ as manufactured by Duchini, Inc., Erie, PA; or approved equal. 5. Provide split face CMU bond beams above openings where indicated on the Drawings, as

specified herein, or as required for the project.

C. Face Brick

1. Face brick shall be manufactured by Redland Brick, Inc, Harmar Plant, Pittsburgh, PA; or approved equal.

2. Field Brick shall be Utility Size with the nominal dimensions of 3-5/8-inches by 11-5/8-

inches face by 3-5/8-inches and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBA, except that any brick with face chipping which reveals a color different than adjacent face color will be rejected.



3. Provide a special shape brick as required and approved. Special brick shall be same day batch as standard shape brick and shall be molded and fired along with all other brick to provide color match as approved.

4. The variations in color and texture shall not exceed those of the samples approved by the

Engineer. 5. Types of Exterior Face Brick:

a. Type A (Field Brick) – #617 Fort Washington SB, Red Matt, Flash, Utility Size Brick b. Type A (Soldier Course) – #617 Fort Washington SB, Red Matt, Flash, Econo Size

Brick c. Type B (Accent Brick) – #875 Cool Gray, Smooth, Utility Size Brick

D. Integral Waterproofing

1. Integral waterproofing shall be provided for CMU walls at all locations. 2. Provide masonry units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that

does not reduce flexural bond strength. Amount used shall be as submitted and approved. 3. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar

containing integral water-repellent Manufacturer’s mortar additive according to ASTM E514, using 4-inch wythe units, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.

E. Provide asbestos-free Karnak 920; Sonneborn 700; Toch RIW Marine Mastic D and D or

approved equal, asphalt emulsion for covering any steel encasing in masonry. Emulsion shall be non-bleeding when set.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT, TIES, ANCHORS

A. Deformed steel reinforcing bars conform to ASTM A615 and shall be as specified in Section 03200. 1. Fabricate reinforcement for masonry in accordance with the provisions of Section 03200,

except as amended by the following paragraphs. 2. Hooks. The term "standard hook" as used herein or as shown on the Drawings for masonry

reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 530-02, Section 1.12.C.

B. Horizontal joint reinforcement shall be welded wire units fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, and having a width of 1-1/2-inches to 2-inches less than the nominal thickness of wall or partition. Joint reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code and shall be prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10-feet with matching corner and tee units. Units shall be galvanized after fabrication to conform to ASTM A153, Class B-2, 1.5-oz/sq-ft.



1. Single wythe masonry reinforcement shall be ladder type, fabricated with single pair of 9-gauge side rods welded at 16-inch intervals to 9-gauge cross rods.

2. For composite exterior walls, reinforcement shall be truss type, fabricated as specified

above with adjustable 2 piece, eye and pintle, 9 gauge rectangular box ties spaced not more than 16-inches on center. Space side rods for embedment in each face of back-up wythe. Eye section, welded to truss side rods, shall extend 1/4-inch beyond face of wall insulation and pintle section shall, when in place, extend to cover one half of the outside mortar bed.

3. Joint reinforcement shall be continuous as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal; Hohmann and

Barnard; Wire-Bond; or approved equal. 4. Joint reinforcement lengths shall be lapped 8-inches.

C. Screw-Attached Masonry Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of wire tie section and metal anchor section complying with the following requirements:

1. Wire Tie Shape: Triangular, 3/16-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized. 2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches into masonry wythe of veneer face. 3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, minimum 14 gauge, with screw holes top and bottom

and with raised, rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie, hot-dip galvanized.

4. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except manufactured with hex washer

head and neoprene washer, #10 self-tapping screws with minimum nominal shank diameter of 0.19-inch, by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion protective coating:

a. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours

per ASTM B117.

5. Neoprene Gaskets: Screw-attached masonry veneer anchor manufacturer’s standard closed cell neoprene gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and to prevent moisture from penetrating through screw holes to steel studs behind sheathing.

6. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Screw-Attached Masonry Veneer Anchors

1) “DW-10,” Hohmann & Barnard, inc. 2) Type III Anchor, Wire-Bond

b. Organic-Polymer-Coated Steel Drill Screws

1) “Traxx,” ITW Buildex 2) “Dril-Flex,” Elco Industries, Inc.



D. Individual metal ties for multi-wythe composite wall shall be “Z” ties fabricated from 3/16-inch cold drawn galvanized steel wire complying with ASTM A82, of the length required for proper embedment in each wythe of masonry.

E. Joint stabilization anchors shall be D/A 2200 by Dur-O-Wall, Control Joint Anchor 1700 by

Wire-Bond, or Slip Set Stabilizer by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. F. Masonry straps shall be minimum 1/4-inch thick by 1-inch wide, and of the required length,

fabricated from hot-dipped galvanized steel. Straps shall be similar to Heckmann Building Products No. 273, or approved equal.

G. Provide and install miscellaneous anchors and attachment members, required both for the

anchorage of work of this Section and that of other trades requiring attachment to masonry, which are not specifically provided under separate Sections.

H. Galvanized 16-gauge dovetail anchors and 22-gauge anchor slots shall be furnished for

anchorage to cast-in-place concrete work. Provide anchors at 24-inches on center horizontally and at 16-inches on center vertically for anchorage of facing masonry. Provide at ends of all CMU partitions where concrete is adjacent.

I. Ties to steel columns shall be 3/16-inch diameter galvanized trapezoidal ties, Dur-O-Wal, No.

D/A 730 spaced at 16-inches on center with 1/4-inch wire D/A 709 or 710 galvanized column anchors welded to structural steel. Use same ties to anchor to beam webs, spaced 32-inches on center horizontally. Miscellaneous corrugated metal ties shall be 1-1/2-inches wide, 16 gauge, galvanized steel, length to provide embedment as shown or as approved, spaced at 16-inches on center. Anchors welded to structural steel shall be touch-up painted with zinc rich paint.

J. Top of CMU partitions shall be anchored to roof deck, floor deck, concrete slab or beam, or steel

beam with partition anchors PTA-422 by Hohmann and Barnard, Hauppauge, NY, or approved equal, spaced at 48-inches maximum on center. Anchors shall be Grade 50 galvanized steel, channel shaped, 3/16-inch thick x 3-inch flanges x 12-inches long or approved equal. Anchors shall be attached to steel deck with 6 No. 10 TEK screws, to steel beam with 4 Hilti ENP2K-L15 powder actuated fasteners, and to concrete member with 2-3/8-inch diameter Hitli HY-150 injection adhesive anchors with 3-1/2-inch embedment, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

K. Weld on adjustable anchors and ties shall be 1/4-inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel.

Anchors shall be Heckmann Building Products No. 315, or equal. Triangular ties shall be Heckmann Building Products No. 316, or approved equal. Web ties shall be 12-inches long by a width for the wall where it is used. Heckmann Building Products No. 318, or approved equal.

L. Miscellaneous corrugated metal ties shall be 1-1/2-inches wide, 16 gauge, stainless steel, length

to provide embedment as shown or as approved, spaced at 16-inches on center. M. Ties and anchors shall be manufactured by Dur-O-Wal; Hohmann and Barnard; AA Wire

Products, or approved equal.



2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials

1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150 Type I or Type II. Masonry cements, mortar cements, and plastic cement shall not be used.

a. White portland cement shall contain a maximum of 0.03 percent water-soluble alkali

when tested in accordance with ASTM C114.

2. Lime for masonry mortar shall be hydrated lime conforming to ASTM C207, Type S.

B. Aggregates

1. Sand shall be clean, durable particles, free from injurious amounts of organic matter, dust, lumps, shale, alkali, or surface coatings.

a. Sand for mortar shall conform to ASTM C144. b. Sand for grout shall conform to ASTM C404, Size No. 2.

2. Coarse aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM C404, Size No. 8.

C. Water shall be from a potable water supply. Water shall be free from deleterious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, or organic matter, and shall be clean and fresh.

D. Admixtures/Additives

1. Additives and admixtures to mortar or grout shall not be used unless approved by the Owner.

2. Antifreeze Compounds. Antifreeze liquids, chloride salts, or other such substances shall

not be used in mortar or grout. 3. Air Entrainment. Air entraining substances shall not be used in mortar or grout.

E. Integral Waterproofing 1. Integral type waterproofing shall be provided for mortar used at CMU walls that will be

exposed to moisture. 2. Integral type waterproofing shall be metallic stearate type, Hydrocide Powder by

Sonneborn Contech; Omicron Mortarproofing by Master Builders Company; Integral Waterpeller by Euclid Chemical; or approved equal.

2.04 MORTAR MIXES

A. Mortar for concrete masonry shall confirm to ASTM C270 and shall be Type S portland cement

- lime mortar providing a minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 day when tested in accordance with ASTM C780.



2.05 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout mixes shall be plant mix or factory blended (dry mix with water added at the site). Field mixed grout will not be acceptable.

B. Masonry grout for use in bond beams, lintels, masonry cells, and at other locations shown on the

Drawings shall conform to ASTM C476. Admixtures shall not be used without prior approval by the Owner. Control grout materials and water content to provide adequate fluidity for placement without segregation.

C. Strength: Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days when

tested in accordance with ASTM C1019.

D. Slump: Properly proportioned grout shall have slump of 8 to 10-inches.

2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Compressible filler shall be foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polybutylene

waterproofing material. When compressed to 50 percent of its original volume, filler shall hold a head of 6-feet of water, and maintain its resiliency to allow for installation in temperatures as slow as 40 degrees F. Filler shall remain waterproof at 50 percent compression between temperatures of -40 degrees F and 200 degrees F. Elongation shall be at least 325 percent with a tensile strength of not less than 53 psi. The polybutylene compound shall not migrate in the polyurethane strip. Compressible filler shall be Polytile by Sandell Manufacturing Company; Combriband by Secoa Corporation, Division of Phoenix Building Products, Incorporated; or approved equal.

B. Flexible filler for use in conjunction with masonry shall be Standard Cork, Code 4323 by W.R.

Grace Company; equal by W.R. Meadows; or approved equal. Thickness shall be 3/8-inch or as otherwise shown by width required for joint and wall conditions.

C. Control joint material shall be factory-extruded preformed rubber shear keys conforming to

ASTM D2000, 2AA-805 and shall be as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal; Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America; or approved equal. Install control joints as shown on the Drawings or as required for project.

D. Weepholes

1. Provide compressible filler in vertical joints designated for weepholes. Filler shall be sized to exclude all mortar from brick joints and from bottom 2-inches of joint at CMU and, at stonework, provide as shown and directed at notches in stone and at bed joints.

2. Weepholes shall be located above horizontal joints containing flashing. Place weepholes

symmetrically over wall openings, minimum two per opening. Place at 24-inches on center for brick, at 32-inches on center for CMU and as shown for stonework. Remove filler from weeps after walls are completely set and when directed.



E. Through-Wall Flashing

1. Through-wall flashing shall be factory-assembled material composed of two layers of asphalt saturated square woven glass fabric sandwiching electro-sheet copper, bonded to fabric with asphalt mastic.

2. Electro sheet copper shall consist of a full sheet of copper weighing 3-oz/sq ft. 3. Manufacturers: AFCO Products, Inc.; York Manufacturing; or approved equal. 4. When completely assembled, the flashing shall be grooved by a series of parallel

depressions. 5. Provide 26 gauge, galvanized steel reglets for securing through wall flashing to concrete.

F. Caging Devices and Centering Clips

1. In hollow concrete masonry cores to be reinforced with vertical reinforcing steel bars and filled with grout, provide 9 gauge galvanized steel caging devices. The following products are acceptable:

a. Rebar Positioner 3400, Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, North

Carolina. b. Rebar Positioner RB, Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, New York. c. Rebar Positioner, D/A 810 and D/A 811, Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, Illinois.

G. Grout Stop

1. Fiberglass, galvanized steel, or polypropylene screen. 2. The following products are acceptable:

a. Fil-Stop Fiber Glass Mesh, Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Metal Lath 268, Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. MGS - Mortar/Grout Screen, Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

H. Building Paper Bond Breaker shall be 15-lb roofing felt complying with ASTM D226.

I. Mortar Dropping Collection Device 1. Cavity wall mortar dropping collection device shall be high-density polyethylene (HDPE),

2-inches thick x 10-inches high, 90-percent open fibrous mesh construction.

2. Mesh shall be placed in new cavity walls, continuously above all through-wall flashing locations for the full cavity wall thickness per the product Manufacturer’s instructions.



3. Mesh shall be constructed in a dovetail shape to prevent mortar from forming a continuous dam.

4. Mortar dropping collection device shall be The Mortar Net Green as manufactured by Mortar Net USA, Ltd., Highland, IN, or approved equal.

J. Foam Insulation

1. Foam insulation shall be provided for open cells of all exterior CMU walls that have not been grouted solid and for any interior CMU walls that separate conditioned spaces from non-conditioned or less-conditioned spaces. a. Insulation shall be Core-Fill 500 Foam Insulation as manufactured by Tailored

Chemical Products, Inc., Hickory, NC 28603, (828) 322-6512; or approved equal. b. Two-component insulation system consisting of amino-plast resin and a catalyst

foaming agent surfactant. c. UL approved, Class ‘A’ building material that is suitable for use within fire-rated wall

assemblies and contains no polystyrenes, polyisocyanurate or polyurethanes. d. Provide insulation with a fire-rating of 4-hours minimum at both 8-inch and 12-inch

CMU when tested in accordance with ASTM E-119-88. e. Provide insulation with minimum density of 0.8 PCF (Dry) and 2.7 - 3.3 PCF (Wet). f. Provide foam insulation with the following minimal thermal properties (R-Value of

4.9 per inch): 8-inch CMU (100-lbs density) – R-Value of 9.1 (U-Value 0.10) 8-inch CMU (60-lbs density) – R-Value of 14.2 (U-Value 0.07) 12-inch CMU (100-lbs density) – R-Value of 12.5 (U-Value 0.08) 12-inch CMU (60-lbs density) – R-Value of 20.0 (U-Value 0.05) g. Provide insulation with the minimum acoustical properties of STC 53 / OITC 44 for a

foam filled 8-inch CMU. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Before beginning masonry construction, verify that tolerances of supporting members are within allowable limits, and that any required reinforcing dowels have been placed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Bearing surface for masonry shall be such that the thickness of the initial bed joint shall be

not less than 1/4-inch and not more than 3/4-inch in thickness.

B. Before laying masonry, remove laitance, loose aggregate, or anything else that would interfere with bond between the mortar and substrate.



3.02 MASONRY - INSTALLATION

A. No material which is frozen or covered with frost or snow shall be used in the construction and no antifreeze salts or ingredients shall be mixed with the mortar. Masonry shall not be laid at temperatures below 40 degrees F, without the approval of the Engineer and all work shall be done in such a manner as to ensure the proper and normal hardening of all mortar. All masonry work shall be protected and heated so that the temperature at the surface will not fall below 50 degrees F for a period of 72 hours after placing. Any completed work found to be affected by freezing shall be taken down and rebuilt at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. All exterior masonry veneer shall be laid in full beds of mortar with shoved joints and with all

joints slushed solidly in each course. Stone and CMU with more than 8 percent absorption shall be damp when laid, except in freezing weather. All exterior masonry veneer shall be laid up from an outside scaffold and shall be carried up simultaneously at an approximate level. No masonry veneer shall be laid overhand. Distribution of light and dark brick and CMU shall be as even as possible. Masonry veneer having minor handling defects or damage shall not be used on the project.

C. All CMU shall be laid in a full bed of mortar, applied to shells only. Butter the vertical joint of

unit already set in the wall and all contact faces of the unit to be set. Each unit shall be placed and shoved against the unit previously laid so as to produce a well-compacted vertical mortar joint for the full shell thickness. Units shall set with all cells in a vertical position. The moisture content of the units when laid shall not exceed 35 percent of the total absorption as determined by laboratory test.

D. Maintain tolerances in the erection of masonry as prescribed in ACI 530.1 except walls to

receive tile shall be plumb and true to line within 1/8-inch in 10-feet and single wythe walls where ordered shall be constructed with one better face in regard to plumb and line. The erection tolerances shall be reduced at all locations to minimum within the parameters of good workmanship.

E. Masonry Bonding

1. CMU and masonry veneer shall be laid in stretcher running bond unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Brick veneer shall be installed as required for the specified pattern, to both align with the adjacent masonry as indicated on Drawings and as required for project completion.

2. Fill all joints with mortar, dense and neat. 3. Both vertical and horizontal joints shall be maintained uniform in spacing. 4. Joints for the stone veneer, which vary depending on the location within the specified

pattern, shall be such that one, two or three joints equal 8-inches. Tool joints concave as recommended by the Manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.

5. Joints for CMU shall be 3/8-inch. Tool joints concave as approved except at single score

CMU, rake 3/8-inch deep to match score in CMU.



6. Joints on cavity side of CMU shall be struck flush. Joints on cavity side of face masonry

shall be struck, or troweled flush when mortar is fresh and mortar droppings collected and removed from cavity. Exterior wall cavity and weepholes shall be clear to ensure proper drainage of moisture.

7. Joints of all masonry shall be tooled in accordance with the following:

a. Wait until unit mortar is thumbprint hard before tooling joint. This may require as

much as 3 hours in the shade and 1 hour in the sun in the summertime. b. The required personnel shall be kept on the job after hours, if necessary, to properly

tool joints. c. Both vertical and horizontal joints shall be maintained uniform in spacing. d. Joints for all types of masonry units shall be 3/8-inch and concave, unless otherwise

noted.

F. Sizes shall be as specified and called for on the Drawings, and where "Soaps" and "Splits" are used, the space between these members and the backup material shall be slushed full of mortar and tied-back as approved.

G. Build in and grout fully all wall reinforcing as shown. Notch CMU end and core walls as

required to receive horizontal reinforcing and mortar embedment. H. All ties and joint reinforcing for masonry shall be furnished and installed under this Section.

Continuous longitudinal joint reinforcing shall be provided in all CMU walls, interrupted at expansion and control joints, or knock-out panels where applicable. Space at 16-inches on center vertically unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

I. Furnish and place masonry lintels of the type and dimensions shown on the Drawings and

specified herein. Extend lintels beyond the opening and firmly bed the bearing ends in mortar as shown on the Drawings.

J. Install all frames required to be set in masonry, set masonry to allow 3/8-inch joint between

masonry and frames, build in all frame anchors and fill frames with mortar.

K. Control joints shall be installed at the intersection of masonry walls with structural concrete and elsewhere as detailed on the Drawings. The maximum length, horizontally, between vertical control joints shall be 24-feet, but joints shall be located only as shown or approved in writing. Do not start masonry wall construction until locations of control joints are approved in writing by the Engineer. Joints shall be equal in width to the standard mortar joint. Discontinue all joint horizontal reinforcement at control joints and discontinue all horizontal reinforcement at expansion joints unless otherwise shown or noted on the Drawings.

L. All masonry slots, chases, or openings required for the proper installation of the work of other

Sections shall be constructed as indicated on the Drawings or in accordance with information furnished before the work is started at the points affected. No chase shall cut into any wall constructed of hollow units after it is built, except as directed and approved by the Engineer.



M. Foam insulation shall be placed within all non-reinforced cells of CMU walls separating conditioned spaces from non-conditioned or less-conditioned spaces, all exterior walls and where otherwise noted on the Drawings. Insulation shall not be installed within fully grouted and reinforced cells. Foam insulation shall be installed within the open CMU cells at the project site only by contractors that are licensed and approved by product Manufacturer.

N. Masonry Cavity Walls

1 Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings by suspending by wires a wooden strip the width of the air space. Strip shall be lifted as each course of joint reinforcement is laid in facing wythe. Mortar shall be placed so that excess is not pressed into cavity air space as facing wythe is laid-up. Bevel mortar back from cavity face of brick to prevent mortar from being pressed into cavity as brick is tapped into position. Install cavity mortar protection in cavity.

2. Tie brick veneer to masonry or cast-in-place concrete back-up with veneer anchors

embedded in mortar joints at not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically. 3. Provide concealed flashing around entire perimeter at base of walls in first course above

grade. Provide concealed flashing and cell vents above exterior wall openings and within exterior walls that project above adjacent lower roof(s) and at all locations shown on the Drawings and at any other locations as required to complete the integrity of system. Install as specified hereinafter. Flashing joints shall be made by lapping a minimum of 4-inches and coating the contacting surfaces with mastic.

4. Provide cell vent in exterior wythe of cavity wall located immediately above ledges and

flashing spaced 24-inches o.c., unless otherwise shown. 5. Provide sheet metal flashing drip where indicated or required by reference standard. 6. Cavity wall insulation provided in Division 7 shall be installed in walls where shown with

all joints tightly butted.

a. Coordinate placing of insulation with installation of masonry joint reinforcing and wall flashing.

b. Cut and match tightly around protrusions. Where applicable, cut insulation at 45 degree

downward angle where flashing passes through. c. Parge all surfaces to receive insulation with asphalt emulsion at rate of 5 gallons per

100 sq ft to an average thickness of 1/16-inch forming a continuous vapor barrier over the surfaces and all joints and protrusions.

d. Embed insulation in emulsion. Adhere insulation where required with additional daubs

of approved asphalt emulsion. Exterior walls shall not receive insulation when the temperature is below 40 degrees F.

O. Mortar dropping collection device shall be installed over all through-wall flashing per the mesh

manufacturer's instructions. The use of this device shall not relieve the Contractor from keeping excess mortar from dropping and collecting within cavity. Use approved means for full height of wall for minimizing mortar dropping into cavity.



P. Bed and grout for items coming in contact with masonry where grouting is required, including, but not limited to, wall and joint reinforcing, ties and anchors, pressed metal frame anchors set in masonry. Install all anchor bolts, base plates and seats in masonry walls and build in all items required for the completion of the building as they apply to masonry.

Q. All anchorage, attachment and bonding devices shall be set so as to prevent slippage and shall

be completely covered with mortar or grout.

R. Wetting Masonry Units – Do not wet concrete masonry units before laying unless prior approval is obtained from the Engineer.

S. Surfaces shall be brushed as work progresses and maintained as clean as is practicable. Protect

sills, ledges, offsets, etc. from mortar droppings. Unfinished work shall be raked back where possible, and toothed only where acceptable to the Engineer. The top of partially completed work shall be covered at all times while work is not in progress. Before leaving fresh or unfinished work, walls shall be fully covered and protected against rain, wind, frost, or the elements. Covers of waterproof paper, tarpaulins, or other means acceptable to the Engineer, shall be draped over the wall, shall extend a minimum of 2-feet down both sides, and shall be firmly held in place.

T. Build in all miscellaneous items to be set in masonry for which placement is not specifically

provided under separate Divisions, including reglets, lintels, ties, electrical panel boxes, process equipment, sleeves, vents, grilles, anchors, grounds, and exterior electric conduits and fixtures. Cooperate with other trades whose work is to be coordinated with the work under this Section.

1. Do not embed pipes or electrical conduits in masonry unless their location has been

detailed on the structural drawings. Pipes or conduits placed in unfilled cells of hollow unit masonry will not be considered as embedded. Sleeves through masonry shall not be placed closer than 3 diameters, center to center, nor shall they be placed through reinforced courses or cells.

2. Do not place dissimilar metals in direct contact with each other. 3. Do not embed aluminum conduits, pipes, or accessories in masonry, grout, or mortar,

unless they have been coated or covered with materials that will effectively prevent chemical reactions with cement or steel.

4. Do not insert through-wall flashing or other elements that stop bond in masonry joints

unless approved by the Owner. U. Loose steel lintels shall be galvanized and furnished under Division 5 and installed under this

Section. Loose lintels shall be set in a full bed of mortar and supported by solid or mortar filled hollow concrete masonry units as detailed.

V. Furnish and place masonry lintels of the type and dimensions shown on the Drawings and

specified. Extend lintels beyond the opening and firmly bed the bearing ends in mortar as shown on the Drawings.



W. Bed and grout for items coming in contact with masonry where grouting is required, including,

but not limited to, door bucks and frames set in masonry. Install all anchor bolts, base plates, and seats in masonry walls, and build in all items required for the completion of the building as they apply to masonry.

X. Grouted Foundation Walls

1. Where concrete masonry foundations are required by the Drawings, reinforcing and grouting shall be completed within 72 hours after the completion of the wall and prior to backfilling on either side of the foundation wall.

3.03 MORTAR

A. Mix mortar in accordance with the requirements of ACI 530.1, using a mechanically-operated mixer in which the quantity of water added can be accurately and uniformly controlled. Accurately measure mortar constituents by volume.

B. The consistency of the mortar shall be adjusted to the satisfaction of the mason with water

added as necessary to produce a workable mix. Mortar may be re-tempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore the required consistency. When water is added, it shall be mixed into the mortar, not splashed over the surface.

C. Mortar that has begun to "set" or that has not been used within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing

water was added to the dry ingredients shall be discarded. D. Where the dry-mix method is employed, the materials for each patch shall be well turned over

together until the even color of the mixed, dry materials indicates that the cementitious material has been thoroughly distributed throughout the mass, after which the water shall be gradually added until a thoroughly mixed mortar of the required plasticity is obtained.

E. Mortar boxes shall be cleaned out at the end of each day's work and all tools shall be kept clean.

Mortar that has begun to set shall not be used. F. Colored mortar for the stone and CMU at exterior veneer shall be uniform in color between

batches as approved when in-place and set-up. Any variations in color will be cause for removal and replacement of the affected area as ordered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 THROUGH-WALL FLASHING

A. On all horizontal masonry surfaces to be flashed, the flashing shall be laid in a fresh bed of

mortar or trowel coat of asphalt mastic, while other surfaces receiving the flashing shall be thoroughly dry, free from loose materials, reasonably smooth, and sufficiently spotted with asphalt mastic to hold it in place until the masonry is set. Splices shall be accomplished in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Through-wall flashing shall start 1/2-inch in from the outside face of the wall and go through

the wall as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.



C. Head flashing shall start 1/2-inch in from the outside face of the wall and go through the wall as

indicated on the Drawings. Flashing shall be carried to the first vertical masonry joint on each side of the opening and be turned up at the sides to form a pan. All corners shall be folded and not cut.

D. Secure flashing to reglets with lead wedges or caulk securely with lead wool at 2-feet on center.

Where a run of through wall flashing must terminate at right angles to concrete, cast a reglet into the concrete as approved and install flashing into reglet covering the angle corner and lapping as required to insure moisture drainage to weep holes.

E. At inside of walls extend flashing to 1/2-inch from inside face edge folded back on itself

1/2-inch. F. Do not close-in or cover flashing with masonry until the installation has been inspected by the

Engineer. If flashing is covered before inspection, the masonry will be ordered to be removed at no cost to the Owner so that inspection may be made.

3.05 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING

A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and as specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8-inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2-inch at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6-inches at the ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by the Manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, and other special conditions.

B. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing 16-inches on center, vertically, unless otherwise noted. C. Unless otherwise detailed, reinforce masonry openings greater than 1-foot wide, with horizontal

joint reinforcing placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8-inches apart, both immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2-feet beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.

D. Where interior nonload-bearing masonry partition or wall intersects an exterior or interior load-

bearing masonry wall at 90 degrees, stop horizontal joint reinforcing in interior partition 4-inches short of intersection. Horizontal joint reinforcing in exterior or interior load-bearing wall shall run continuous. In the same courses as horizontal reinforcing, install joint stabilization anchors extending into interior partition and projecting into the exterior wall. Install joint stabilization anchors in horizontal joints 16-inches on center vertically. Grout end core of interior partition and core of exterior wall at intersection full height.

3.06 BONDING, ANCHORS AND TIES

A. Unless otherwise shown, corners and intersections of load-bearing masonry walls shall be bonded in each course with a true masonry bond, except that when necessarily erected separately, they shall be anchored with rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 2-feet apart vertically.



B. Anchor single-wythe masonry veneer to cold formed metal framing with masonry veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with metal fasteners of type

indicated. 2. Embed tie section in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor section relative to course in which tie section is embedded to allow

maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated but not more than 16-inches o.c. vertically and 24-inches o.c.

horizontally with not less than one anchor for each 2-2/3 S.F. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 1’-0” of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8-inches.

3.07 REINFORCED MASONRY

A. Provide reinforcement of the type, size, and spacing and at locations as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Concrete masonry unit walls shall be laid in such a manner as to preserve the alignment and

unobstructed vertical continuity of cells. Cross webs adjacent to vertical cores that are to be filled with grout shall be fully bedded with mortar, to prevent grout leakage. Mortar fins protruding from joints shall be removed before grout is placed. The minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores to be grouted shall be 2-in by 3-in.

C. Reinforcement shall be free of dirt, oil, and other materials that will adversely affect bond, and

shall be straight except where bends or hooks are detailed on the plans. Reinforcement that, in the opinion of the Owner, is bent or otherwise damaged so as to affect its structural capacity shall not be incorporated into the Work.

D. Bond beams and horizontal joint reinforcing shall be continuous with lapped splices as specified

except at vertical expansion joints, or at other locations noted on the Drawings. Bond beam reinforcement shall extend through control joints.

E. Reinforcing around Openings

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, at openings in masonry greater than or equal to 16-inches in any direction, provide a minimum of one #4 in grouted cells or bond/lintel beams on all sides of the opening. Bars shall extend at least 48 bar diameters past the opening on each side.

2. See lintel schedules and miscellaneous details on the Drawings for additional requirements.

F. Reinforcing Details

1. Support and fasten masonry reinforcement to prevent displacement beyond the tolerances noted herein.



2. Install horizontal wire joint reinforcement in the second bed joint above the support for masonry and thereafter at 16-inches vertical intervals and at other locations as detailed on the Drawings.

a. Wire joint reinforcement shall be continuous throughout the wall and around corners

except that it shall not pass through vertical masonry control joints unless so indicated on the Drawings.

b. Lap side rods at least 15-inches at splices. c. Embed joint reinforcement in masonry bed joints with not less than 5/8-in mortar

coverage.

3. Position and accurately space reinforcement in units as shown on the Drawings. Maintain a clear distance between reinforcement and any masonry surface or adjacent bar of not less than 1/4-inch for fine grout or 1/2-inch for coarse grout.

4. Tolerances for placing reinforcement shall be as follows, where d equals distance from

centerline of steel to the compression face of masonry.

a. Walls, beams, lintels, and bond beams:

"d" (in) Tolerance (in) d ≤ 8 plus ½ 8 < d ≤ 24 plus 1 24 < d plus or minus 1-1/4

b. Should it become necessary to move reinforcement in order to avoid interferences with

other reinforcements, conduits, or embeds, all bars shall not be moved beyond their specified tolerances nor more than 1 diameter without prior acceptance by the Owner.

5. Splice deformed reinforcing steel at least 48 bar diameters (for grade 60 rebar) unless

otherwise noted on the Drawings. When lapped bars are spaced 3-in apart or less, increase the lap length to 52 bar diameters or stagger the laps at least 24 bar diameters with no increase in lap length.

6. Clear spacing between vertical bars in columns or pilasters shall be not less than 2-1/2 times

the bar diameter nor 1-1/2-inches. Stagger adjacent splices vertically. 7. Completely embed all reinforcing bars in mortar or grout with minimum cover (including

the masonry unit) as follows:

a. Interior exposure: 1-1/2-inches b. Exposed to soil or weather: 2-inches

8. Provide masonry dowels cast into the supporting concrete at all corners of the structure, in the first adjacent cell in each direction from the corner, at cells requiring vertical reinforcement, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings.



3.08 GROUTING

A. General

1. Walls shall be grouted at reinforced cells and where indicated on the Drawings. Cells containing anchors or inserts shall be fully grouted for at least 8-in each way past the embed. Concrete or mortar shall not be used as grout for concrete masonry units.

B. Preparation

1. Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean and free of mortar projections greater than 1/2-inch, mortar droppings, or other foreign materials.

2. Reinforcement shall be in place and adequately supported before commencing grouting

operations. Reinforcement shall be clean and free of mortar droppings or other debris. Notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to any grouting operations so that reinforcement placement, support, and laps may be observed before grouting. Accurately set embedded bolts with templates and hold in place to prevent movement. Provide minimum 1-in grout space between any bolt and an adjacent masonry surface.

3. Install barriers so that spaces designated for grouting will be filled with grout and the grout

will be confined to those specific spaces. Place vertical barriers consisting of masonry units, or mortar in hollow bond beam units and grouted collar joint at maximum intervals of 30-ft to limit the horizontal flow of grout. The grouting of any section of wall between barriers shall be completed in 1 day with no interruptions greater than 1 hour.

C. Mixing and Handling

1. Accurately measure all ingredients according to the proportions specified for the batch and mix in a mechanically-operated batch mixer. Mix grout for at least 5 minutes but not more than 10 minutes after all ingredients have been added. Add water as required to provide the desired workability.

2. Do not handle or pump grout using aluminum equipment. 3. Transit mixed grout may be used. Continually rotate transit mixed grout from the time the

water is added until the grout is discharged. 4. Grout mixing drums shall be completely emptied before the succeeding batch of materials

is introduced for mixing. 5. The consistency of grout shall be adjusted so that it will flow into place without segregation

of ingredients. Water may be added to compensate for loss. 6. Grout that has begun final "set" and becomes harsh or that has not been used within 1-1/2

hours after initial mixing water was added to the dry ingredients shall not be used. 7. Control grout materials and water content during grouting to provide adequate fluidity for

placement without segregation. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours after the introduction of water into the mix and prior to initial set.



D. Placing

1. Solidly fill with grout all reinforced cells and other cells as indicated on the Drawings. Place grout in a continuous pour to its maximum placement height using lifts of 5-ft or less, and consolidating the grout after each lift. Cells containing anchors or inserts shall be fully grouted for at least 8-in each way past the embed.

2. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration before loss of plasticity, in a manner that will

solidly fill the grout space and minimize voids due to absorption of water into the masonry. Reconsolidate grout by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. Consolidation should normally occur when the plasticity of the grout approaches that of stiff mortar (when a touch leaves an indentation).

3. Complete grouting of beams over openings in one continuous operation. Provide approved

material to confine the grout in a beam where grouting occurs over ungrouted cells below. Material used for confinement shall not inhibit bond between masonry units and mortar.

4. Use extreme care to prevent any grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or unpainted. If any grout or mortar does contact the face of such masonry, it shall be removed immediately. Protect all sills, ledges, offsets, etc. from grout droppings.

5. Limitations on grout type (fine or coarse), and height of grout pours shall be as shown in

Table 04200-1. Units may be laid to the maximum height of the grout pour before grouting unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified.

E. Low-Lift Grouting Procedures

1. Between grout pours in vertical cells, form a horizontal construction joint "key" in walls by stopping all wythes at the same elevation, and stopping the grout lift a minimum of 1-1/2-in below the mortar joint, except at the top of a wall. Consolidate the grout and then continue the pour. For horizontal bond beams, grout cells below the bond beam and consolidate, then grout the bond beam itself stopping the grout pour 1/2-in below the top of the masonry. At the finished course of both walls and bond beams, bring the last pour flush with the top of the masonry during initial placing and again after consolidation.



TABLE 04200-1

GROUT AND POUR HEIGHT LIMITATIONS

Grout Type Grout Pour Max.

Height(1) (ft)

Least Clear Dimensions(2)

Width of Grout Space(3) (in)

Cell Dimensions(4) (in x in)

Fine 1 1 1 x 2 5 2 2 x 3

Coarse 1 1 1 x 3 5 2 2 x 3

(1) Maximum pour heights may be used, when approved by the Engineer, when it can be

demonstrated that the grout spaces can be properly filled. (2) The clear dimension is the cell width less mortar projections; or the grout space width

less the sum of mortar projections plus the width of any horizontal reinforcement inside the space.

(3) For grout spaces between masonry wythes. (4) For grouted cells in hollow unit masonry.

3.09 REPAIR, POINTING AND FINAL CLEANING

A. Exposed masonry and brick shall be protected against staining by wall coverings, and excess mortar shall be wiped off the surface as the work progresses to reduce need for cleaning at completion of the work.

B. Where ordered, remove masonry or brick units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or

otherwise damaged, and units that do not match adjoining units and install new units in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate, as approved by the Engineer, evidence of replacement.

C. Pointing

1. During the tooling of joints, except for weep holes, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar matching the color of the surrounding work as approved by the Owner and tool to match. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance and properly prepare joints for application of sealants where required.

2. Before final cleaning, repoint all unsatisfactory joints as specified above and as required by

the Construction Manager.

D. Final Cleaning

1. After mortar within the new masonry construction has thoroughly set and cured (3 weeks minimum during the summer; 5 weeks minimum during the winter), a sample wall area (approximately 20 square feet in size), shall be cleaned with an approved commercial masonry cleaner, diluted and mixed with water as recommended by the Manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. The sample area may be the sample wall panel specified above or an actual area in the new finish work as directed by the Engineer.



2. The Engineer's acceptance of sample cleaning shall be obtained before proceeding to clean remainder of masonry work. A minimum of 1 week of dry weather is required to evaluate effectiveness of cleaning and effect on masonry and mortar. Upon acceptance, all face brick of the new masonry construction shall be cleaned by the same method to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. Acid solutions shall not be used for cleaning any concrete masonry units. F. Upon completion of the work, all CMU and brick surfaces shall be washed with soap powder

and warm water, applied with a scrubbing brush and then rinsed thoroughly with clear water. Other cleaning methods may be ordered to obtain required appearance as recommended by the Manufacturer. Metal cleaning tools and wire brushes or abrasive powders shall not be used.

G. Do not use any cleaning materials or processes which could change the character of exposed

finishes or which will affect the adjacent masonry or other exposed surfaces. Protect other adjacent work from damage due to cleaning operations.

H. Masonry areas not satisfactorily cleanable will be ordered replaced at no additional cost to the

Owner. PART 4 INSPECTION AND TESTING 4.01 INSPECTION

A. Special Inspection, as defined in paragraph 1.05E, is required for all concrete masonry units installed. The Contractor shall provide adequate advance notice of masonry work to be performed and provide access for inspection. The costs of inspection will be paid by the Construction Manager. Special inspection shall be required:

1. For masonry, other than fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry, during preparation

and taking of any required prisms or test specimens, placing of all masonry units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during all grouting operations.

2. For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry during preparation and taking of any

required prisms or test specimens, at the start of laying units, after the placement of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to each grouting operation, and during all grouting operations.

4.02 TESTING

A. Masonry shall be tested to assure conformance with the physical properties required by this Section.

B. Samples for testing shall be selected by the Construction Manager at the place of manufacture

from lots ready for delivery. At least 10 days should be allowed for completion of the tests, except that a minimum of 21 days should be allowed for completion of drying shrinkage tests when required.



1. Drying shrinkage tests when required, shall be conducted upon units made with concrete mixtures having the same proportions and composition, and made and cured in the same way as those specified herein, not more than 12 months prior to delivery of units.

C. Compliance with the requirements for the specified compressive strength of masonry f'm shall

be in accordance with the IBC requirements for Masonry Prism-Testing, Masonry Prism Test Record, or Unit Strength Method.

4.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. In case the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it and new specimens shall be selected by the Engineer from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. In case the second set of specimens fails to conform to the test requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected.

B. The expense of inspection and testing shall be borne by the manufacturer. C. Quality control and construction tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE6-88. D. Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate, and all other materials meet the

requirements of the applicable standards of quality, and that they are properly stored and prepared for use.

E. Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredients. The method of

measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of materials are controlled.

F. Construction details, procedures, and workmanship are in accordance with the plans and

specifications. G. Placement, splices, and reinforcement sizes are in accordance with the provisions of this chapter

and the plans and specifications.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Structural steel framing members, support members and sag rods.

B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.

C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Steel Joists are included in Section 05210.

B. Steel Deck: Support framing for small openings in deck is included in Section 05310.


A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005

B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005

C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004

D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008

E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012

F. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2007

G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012

H. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009

I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010

J. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010

K. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009

L. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use; 2010

M. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2012

N. ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3,

for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2012



O. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a

P. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2007

Q. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a

R. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts Metric; 2007

S. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel; 2012

T. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011

U. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2011

V. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)

W. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments; 2008

X. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination; 2009

Y. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2008

Z. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2011

AA. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2009

AB. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a

AC. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007

AD. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010

AE. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004)

AF. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)

AG. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition


A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural steel connections.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings



1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.

2. Connections. 3. Indicate cambers and loads. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis.

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."

B. Comply with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

C. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

F. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

G. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an

AISC-Certified Plant - Category 1, conventional steel structures.

H. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

I. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Pennsylvania.


A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry

or rusty before use.



2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.08 SEQUENCING

A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.

C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.

D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

E. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded.

F. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.

G. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.

H. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, medium carbon, galvanized.

K. High-Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A490 (ASTM A490M), with matching ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) nuts and ASTM F436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel.

L. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or A 563M nuts and ASTM F436 Type 1 washers.

M. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain.

N. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

O. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.

P. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.



B. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings.

C. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.

D. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

E. Develop required camber for members.

F. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

G. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel.

H. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or

enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

2.03 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts."

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes

without warp. 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.

2.04 FINISH

A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, high strength bolted, or galvanized. 1. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP2 "Hand Tool

Cleaning" or SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Apply Shop Primer complying with SSPC-Paint 15 immediately after surface preparation. 3. Thickness: Apply primer at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of

not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.



5. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change

color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

B. Galvanize structural steel members to comply with ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Only galvanize structural steel components as indicated on the drawings. 2. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP2 "Hand Tool

Cleaning" or SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Use Galvanizing Repair paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 to touch up galvanized

components.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test

specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated

or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.

A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 50 percent of bolts at each connection.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections.

C. Non-destructive Weld Testing Methods: Use the following non-destructive weld testing methods: 1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94. 2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165. 4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

D. Non-Destructive Weld Testing: All welding shall be subject to non-destructive testing as further described herein: 1. Fillet Welds: 10% of the length of fillet welds by Magnetic Particle Method. 2. Partial Penetration Groove Welds: 25% of welds in compression and 50% of welds in

tension tested by Ultrasonic or Radiographic Method. 3. Full Penetration Groove Welds: 50% of welds in compression and 100% of welds in

tension tested by Ultrasonic or Radiographic Method. 4. Studs: 100% of welds subject to visual inspection and bend tests in accordance with AWS. 5. Plug Welds: 25% tested by Ultrasonic or Dye Penetrant Method.



E. Non-destructive Weld Testing Methods: Use one of the following non-destructive weld testing methods:

F. Deficiencies 1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports

have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. 2. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non

compliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

B. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.03 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.

D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to

accurate locations. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.



E. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of

structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

F. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect / Engineer.

G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

H. Base Plates and Bearing Plates: 1. Do not use separate setting plates thinner than required base or bearing plate. 2. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,

leveling nuts, or other adjusting devices. 4. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 5. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

I. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

J. Splice members only where indicated.

K. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

L. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Bolts that are in direct tension or are indicated as slip critical (SC) shall be fully tensioned. All other bolts shall be "snug tight" per AISC and RCSC.

M. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of

temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.



2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes

without warp. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.

3.04 FIELD FINISH TOUCH-UP

A. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.

B. Touch Up of Bare Steel: 1. Restore surface to comply with required surface preparation. 2. Apply two coats of required paint, primer or galvanized paint to match shop finish.

C. Painted / Primed Surfaces: Apply paint / primer to exposed areas with same material and workmanship requirements as used for shop painting.

D. Galvanized Surfaces: Apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Division 1.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 50 percent of bolts at each connection.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test according to AWS D1.1 and one of the following inspection procedures:

D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Frequency of testing shall be 1 bolt in each connection and if a failure occurs then all bolts in that particular connection shall be tested. In addition testing of epoxy anchors, wedge anchors, expansion anchors and variations of such types of anchors shall be performed to ensure proper installation has been accomplished.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats.

B. Supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Structural Steel: Grouting base plates and bearing plates. Superstructure framing is included in Section 05120.

B. Steel Deck: Bearing plates and angles are included in Section 05310.

C. Steel Deck: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches in decking is included in Section 05310.

D. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists are included in Section 05500.


A. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008

C. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2007

D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012

E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009

F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010

G. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010

H. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2012

I. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)

J. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2008

K. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination; 2009

L. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2008

M. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010

N. SJI "Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders"

O. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2005



P. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2008

Q. AISC, "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", November 1, 1978, including the "Commentary"

R. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004)

S. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)

T. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004)

U. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004)

V. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

D. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172.

1.05 DESIGN

A. General: When engineering analysis and design is required as stated herein, it shall be performed by a "Joist Engineer", employed by the joist manufacturer. Conform to all applicable provision of SJI, AISC, and AWS. Analysis shall conform to well established principles of mechanics and sound engineering practice. Required designs shall be sealed by the "Joist Engineer" and included with other required submittals.

B. Net Wind Uplift: Perform engineering analysis and design to provide necessary bottom chord bridging to satisfy net wind uplift loads where shown on the drawings. In the absence of any stated loads, use the applicable local code for uplift pressure and reduce by the weight of actual structural components plus 10 PSF allowance for roofing, insulation and ceiling.

C. Special Joists: Provide engineering analysis and design for required strength and serviceability of special joists as designated on the drawings and with the following: 1. Design special joists for Joist Loading Diagram as indicated on the drawings. 2. HVAC, Electical, Plumbing and Equipment Items are shown on the roof framing plans and

in the Joist Loading Diagram. Coordinate with H, E, P and EQ drawings for exact locations and weights of items on top of roof and supported from the joists below, prior to the design of the special joists.

D. Joist Girders: Provide engineering analysis and design to provide girders of required strength and stiffness meeting all design criteria.

E. Non-Standard Joist Seats: Provide engineeering analysis and design of non-standard joist seats indicated on drawings.



F. Concentrated Load Distribution: Perform engineering analysis and design of all affected components participating in the distribution of concentrated loads through the steel joist system by considering rationally the contribution of bridging. Show special considerations for the size and connection of bridging where affected.

G. Unbraced Top Chords: Provide engineering analysis and design to provide necessary top chord bridging to satisfy published capacity for selected joist when the supported roofing panel system does not provide for lateral stability of the top chord. The joist supplier may, at his option, provide a joist with a larger chord size than required to economize on bridging. Special requirements for bridging anchorage and attachment shall be stated.

H. Field Spliced Members: Perform engineering design of connections for members which require field splices because of fabrications, shipping, or erection constraints. Consider effect of full patterned live load on either side of field splice.

I. Headers: Perform engineering analysis and design for headers supporting joists and the effect of the concentrated reactions of the header on adjacent joists.

J. Cantilevered and Extended Ends: Perform engineering analysis and design for cantilevered bottom bearing joists and joist with extended ends exceeding either one fourth (1/4) the back up span or the SJI limit.

K. Field Modifications: Perform engineering analysis and design for any joist component which requires field modification for any reason.


A. Joist Engineer Qualification: Steel joist system shall be designed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the state of jurisdiction of the project, with minimum 5 years documented experience in the design of steel joist systems. The engineer shall sign and seal all calculations, shop drawings, and erection plans necessary to complete the system. See Construction Notes in the structural working drawings for additional requirements.

B. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

C. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.


A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 JOIST MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Joists 1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoists.ws



2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Substitutions: See Division 1.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standard. 3. Minimum End Bearing on Concrete or Masonry Supports: Comply with referenced SJI

standard. 4. Finish: Shop primed.

B. Open Web Joists: SJI Type LH Joists 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standards. 3. Minimum End Bearing on Masonry or Concrete Supports: Comply with referenced SJI

standards. 4. Finish: Shop primed.

C. Open Web Joists: SJI Type DLH Joists 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standards. 3. Minimum End Bearing on Masonry or Concrete Supports: Comply with referenced SJI


D. Open Web Joists: SJI Joist Girders 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standards. 3. Minimum End Bearing on Masonry or Concrete Supports: Comply with referenced SJI


E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

F. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications".

B. Provide special joist seats as indicated on drawings.

C. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with manufacturer's standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Specifications" and load tables.

D. Fabricate adjacent joists of the same depth with members aligning for passing of ductwork, equipment and other items.

E. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit, to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2" of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bridging 1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI

"Specifications", except do not use round bars for bridging. 2. Provide diagonal type bridging for "longspan" joists, complying with SJI "Specifications". 3. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. 4. Where horizontal bridging terminates without anchorage because of a building expansion

joint, non structural end wall, or a change in adjacent spans which dictates a change in the number of rows, add "x" bridging to horizontal bridging in the last bay.

2.04 FINISH

A. Shop prime joists 1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and

accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or

other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. 3. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed.

B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.



3.02 ERECTION

A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified.

B. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening.

C. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.

D. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment.

E. Bridging: Install bridging per SJI "Specification." 1. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during

construction. 2. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. 3. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or

beams. 4. Where "open web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted

bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines.

F. Fastening Joists: Fasten joists after joist alignment and installation of framing. 1. Secure joists resting directly on masonry or concrete bearing surfaces by bedding in grout

and anchoring to masonry or concrete construction as specified in SJI "Specifications" for type of steel joist used.

2. Field Welded Connections: Field weld joists to supporting steel framework or steel

embedment in accordance with SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used. a. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.

3. Field Bolted Connections: Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with

SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used. a. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless high strength

thread fasteners are required. b. Provide high strength threaded fasteners installed in accordance with AISC

"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325, or A 490 Bolts", as required by SJI "Specifications."

G. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments.

H. Install supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 12 inches.

I. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.



J. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.

K. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, and surfaces not shop primed.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Division 1.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 25 percent of bolts at each connection.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections. 1. Test all welds as required by Architect / Engineer or Construction Management by one of

the following methods: a. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94. b. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. c. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165. d. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05310

METAL DECK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Roof deck.

B. Metal form deck.

C. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 12 inches.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck is included in Section 03300.

C. Reinforced Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates embedded in reinforced unit masonry is included in Section 04200.

D. Structural Steel: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches and shear stud connectors is included in Section 05120.

E. Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing plates in cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 05120.

F. Steel Joists: Support framing for openings larger than 12 inches and shear stud connectors is included in Section 05210.

G. Steel Joists: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing plates and joist seats in cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 05210.

H. Metal Fabrications: Steel angle concrete stops at deck edges are included in Section 05500.


A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008

B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2007

C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012

D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011

E. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened; 2012

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010

G. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008 H. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks;

Steel Deck Institute; 2007



I. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004)

J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)

K. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004)

L. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1, for submittals procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, cellular raceways and outlet box locations, pertinent details, accessories, and drain pans.

C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes for each type of deck.

D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.

C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.

C. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Deck 1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws.



2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com. 4. Substitutions: per Division 1.

2.02 STEEL DECK

A. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 33, Type 1. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized

substrate. 3. Structural Properties: as indicated on drawings

a. Span Design: 3 or more.

4. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: minimum gage as indicated on drawings. 5. Nominal Height: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR. 7. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. 8. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 9. End Joints: Lapped, welded. 10. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL Assembly Number as indicated on the

drawings.

B. Metal Form Deck: Corrugated sheet steel, with provision for ventilation of concrete: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with

G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: minimum gage as indicated on the

drawings. 3. Nominal Height: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch. 5. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 6. End Joints: Lapped, welded.



2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.

B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. 1. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated-steel sheet weld washers, shaped to fit

deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter prepunched hole if steel deck is less than 22 ga.

C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. 1. Side Laps: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head;

self-drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter or as shown on drawings. 2. End Laps: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head;

self-drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 12 minimum diameter or as shown on drawings.

D. Mechanical Sidelap Connectors: Steel; hex washer head undercut with reverse serrations and self-piercing or stitch point at center.

E. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.

F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.

2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.

B. Cant Strips: Formed sheet steel, 20 gage thick, 45 degree slope, 3 1/2 inch nominal width and height, flange for attachment.

C. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.

D. Floor Drain Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below floor deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Do not place deck panels on structural steel and steel joist support framing until all members are completely connected.

C. Do not place deck panels on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry.

D. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level.

B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing.

C. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.

D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.

E. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum.

F. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively engage adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.

G. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.

H. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.

I. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same

thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.

J. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.

K. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings.

L. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures.

M. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld.

N. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.

O. Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.

P. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.


A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor (unless provided by Owner) will perform field quality-control testing.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor, Engineer and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.



E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements at Contractor's expense.

3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on both surfaces of installed deck panels.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metals, metal ladders with landings and railing, anchors and fasteners, complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete joint accessories are included in Division 3.

B. Masonry reinforcement, ties and accessories are included in Section 04200.

C. Structural steel is included in Section 05120. D. Metal stairs and railing systems are included in Section 05510. E. Gratings and floor plates are included in Section 05531. F. Membrane roofing system is included in Section 07540. G. Coping, flashing and trim is included in Section 07512. H. Door and frame systems are included in Division 8.

I. Painting is included in Division 9.

J. Pipe hangers and sleeves are included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:

1. Shop drawings, showing sizes of members, method of assembly, anchorage and connection

to other members.

B. Samples

1. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during the course of construction.

C. Design Data

1. Submit Manufacturer's load and deflection tables for grating.



D. Test Reports

1. Certified copy of mill test reports on each steel, stainless steel, and aluminum proposed for

use showing the physical properties and chemical analysis.

E. Certificates

1. Certify that welders have been qualified under AWS, within the previous 12 months, to perform the welds required under this Section.


A. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. AA M31C22A41:

a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin b. C22: Finish, Medium Matte c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I


1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 3. ASTM A53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless 4. ASTM A108 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard

Quality 5. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products 6. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 7. ASTM A240 – Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Plate, Sheet, and Strip Pressure Vessels 8. ASTM A276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Steel Bars and Shapes 9. ASTM A307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi Tensile

Strength



10. ASTM A325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

11. ASTM A366 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial

Quality 12. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 13. ASTM A501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing 14. ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 15. ASTM A570 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled,

Structural Quality 16. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 17. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes 18. ASTM B429 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and

Tube

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code - Steel 2. AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 3. AWS D1.6 – Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel

E. Federal Specifications

1. FS-FF-B-575C – Bolts, Hexagonal and Square

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

G. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition.

H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.




A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified.

B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the

work of other Sections.

C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable AWS welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1 and welding of aluminum shall conform to AWS D1.2 and welding of stainless steel shall conform to AWS D1.6.


A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation.

B. Repair items that have become damage or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to

incorporating them into the work. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items.


A. The use of Manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide

standardization for appearance, maintenance and Manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards:

1. Structural Steel ASTM A992 for Wide Flange Shapes

and ASTM A36 for other shapes, plates, rods and bars.

2. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B



3. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B Schedule 40. Use standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized for exterior work.

4. Steel Sheets ASTM A1008 5. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48, Class 35 6. Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 7. Aluminum Extruded Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6 and Alloy 6061 T6 as indicated. 8. Aluminum Extruded Shapes ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6 9. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6 10. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes:

a. Exterior, Submerged or Industrial Use ASTM A240, Type 316 (Type 316L

for welded) b. Interior and Architectural Use ASTM A240, Type 304

11. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers ASTM A276, Type 316 12. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A (Hot dip

galvanized nuts and washers where noted).

13. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325 (Mechanically

galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50, where noted).

a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type I b. General Application Type I or Type II

14. Galvanizing ASTM A123, Zn w/0.05-percent

minimum Ni 15. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.05 percent

minimum Ni 16. Galvanizing, anchor bolts ASTM F2329, Zn w/0.05-percent

minimum Ni



17. Steel, welding electrodes AWS A5.1 E70 2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND FASTENING DEVICES

A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.

B. Unless otherwise noted, expansion anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel wedge type anchors complete with nuts and washers. Type 316 stainless steel wedge type anchors shall be used where they will be submerged or exposed to the weather or where stainless steel wedge type anchors are required. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1-in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Kwick-bolt II; ITW Ramset; Redhead trubolt, or equal.

C. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine

bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel machine bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts.

D. Compound masonry expansion anchors shall be lead expansion sleeve type anchors complete

with nuts and washers. Anchors shall be precision die-cast zinc alloy with a minimum of two lead alloy expansion sleeves. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1-in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Star Expansion Industries, Star Slugin or equal.

E. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system.

Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin, aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud assemblies shall consist of a Type 316 stainless steel all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HVA Adhesive Anchor; Molly, Parabond; Rawlplug, Rawl Chem-Stud or equal.

F. Adhesive anchors, for fastening to hollow concrete block or brick, shall be a three-part stud,

screen and chemical dispenser anchoring system. Adhesive cartridges shall contain premeasured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. Stud assemblies shall consist of a Type 316 stainless steel all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Anchors shall be Hilti, HIT HY-20 System or equal.

G. Automatic end welded headed anchor studs shall be flux ended studs made from cold drawn

steel, ASTM A108. Headed anchor studs shall be Nelson, H4L Headed Concrete Anchors or equal.

H. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and nuts shall

be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

I. Toggle bolts shall be Hilti, Toggler Bolt or equal.



2.04 METAL GRATING

A. Grating shall have rectangular, 3/16-in thick, bearing bars spaced 1-3/16-inches on center with cross bars spaced at 4-inches on center. All grating panels shall be banded with a bar the same size as the bearing bars.

1. Grating shall not exceed the fabricator's maximum recommended span, and meet or exceed the following load and deflection criteria for the maximum span length at the opening being covered by the grating.

a. The grating shall produce a deflection of 1/360 of the span or less under a uniform

live load of 100 lbs/sq ft on the maximum span.

2. Openings 2-inches or greater in diameter/dimension and grating edges shall be banded with a bar of the same depth and thickness as the bearing bars. Cut bearing bars or cross bars shall be welded to the banding bar.

3. Grating clamps, nuts, bolts, washers and other fastening devices for grating and grating supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Anchor blocks, when used, shall be of the same material as the grating. All grating shall be anchored to the supporting system using plank clips, saddle clips or anchor blocks.

B. Aluminum grating material shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6 with a mill finish. Cross bars shall be attached to the bearing bars with interlocked swaged joints. The grating shall be Type BS by Harsco Industrial IKG, Houston, TX; Type 19 SG-4 by Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH; Type 19S4 by Seidelhuber Metal Products, San Carlos, CA; or equal.

C. Steel grating material shall conform to ASTM A570, Grade 36 or ASTM A36, galvanized. Cross bars shall be attached to the bearing bars by welding or with interlocked swaged joints. Grating with cross bars pressed into notches in the top of the bearing bars will not be acceptable. Grating shall be hot-dipped galvanized finish complying with the requirements of ASTM A123, however, the average minimum weight of the zinc coating shall not be less than 2 oz/sq ft.

D. Metal frames and supports for grating shall be of the same material as the grating unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Where aluminum supports are used, they shall be fabricated from aluminum alloy 6061-T6.

2.05 RAILINGS

A. Handrail and guardrail systems shall comply to the requirements of OSHA and the Building Code.

B. Aluminum railing and handrail shall be a mechanically fastened, seamless, extruded aluminum pipe system. Rails shall be 6063-T6 alloy. Posts shall be 6061-T6 alloy. Splice and reinforcing sleeves, brackets, end caps, and toe-boards shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. Cast fittings shall be aluminum alloy No. 214. Railing system fastening hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Aluminum components shall have a mill finish.



C. Steel railing and handrail shall be a welded steel pipe system, galvanized after fabrication. Post, rails and fittings shall conform to ASTM A53. Splice and expansion sleeves shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Brackets and plate work shall conform to ASTM A36. Fastening hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Steel railing, including posts and rails, shall be sealed by welding closure plates in all openings.

D. Railings shall be 2-rail welded railing systems, as shown on the Drawings, fabricated with 1-1/2-inch nominal diameter pipe. Posts shall be Schedule 80 pipe minimum, and rails and handrail shall be Schedule 40 pipe minimum. Posts and top rails shall be continuous. Spacing of posts shall not exceed 3-feet on center and shall be uniformly spaced except as otherwise shown on the Drawings. Posts will be required on each side of structure expansion joints. All railing posts shall be vertical.

E. Welds shall be circumferential welds ground smooth and even to produce a railing that is neat in appearance and structurally sound. Welding methods shall be in conformity with AWS standards for the materials being joined. All rails to post connections shall be coped and fastened by continuous welds. There shall be no burrs, sharp edges or protrusions on any weld on any part of the handrail system. After fabrication, the welds and surrounding area shall be cleaned and hand buffed to blend with the adjacent finish. All mechanical fasteners shall be unobtrusively located in countersunk holes with the top flush with the surface of the rail. Bends in the railing shall be as indicated by the Drawings. No distortion of the circular railing shape will be allowed. Bends and terminal sections shall be made without the use of fittings. Corner bends shall be mitered and welded bends.

F. Railing shall be assembled in sections as long as practical but shall not be greater than 24-feet in length. A field splice shall be used when an assembled section is to be attached to another section. Field splices shall be used in all railing panels that cross over structure expansion joints.

1. Field splices shall use internal splice sleeves located within 8-inches of railing posts. The sleeve shall be welded to the rail on one side and fastened with a set screw to the rail on other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the differential expansion between the railing system and the supporting structure.

G. Safety gates, for railing openings, shall be fabricated of matching pipe and rail material and configuration. The gates shall be self-closing gates with approved stop, latch and stainless steel closure spring and hinges.

H. Barrier chains, for railing openings, shall be fabricated of stainless steel chains. Chain shall be 1/4-inch stainless steel links, with eleven links per foot as manufactured by Eastern Chain Works, Inc., NY; Lawrence Metal Products, Inc. or equal.

1. Chains shall be fastened to the handrail posts at the elevation of each rail. One end of each chain shall be connected to one post with a 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel eye bolt and the other end shall be connected to the other post by means of a heavy chromium plated bronze swivel eye slide harness snap and a similar eye bolt.

I. Toe-boards shall be provided on all railing adjacent to a drop in elevation of 30-inches or more. Toe-boards are not required on the inclined portion of stairway railings or where concrete or steel curbs, 4-inches or more in height, are present. Toe-boards shall be 4-inch high channels of the same material as the railing. The channels shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch and



have flanges of not less than 3/4-inch nor more than 1-1/2-inches in width. Toe-boards shall be positioned with a maximum clearance of 1/4-inch from the floor and fastened to railing posts with 1/4-inch stainless steel U-bolts, with J-bolts at corner posts and with clip angles and two 1/4-inch stainless steel expansion bolts at walls.

J. All railings shall be properly protected by paper or by an approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. After protective materials are removed, the surfaces shall be made clean and free from stains, marks, or defects of any kind.

2.06 METAL LADDERS

A. Ladders, ladder accessories and ladder clearances shall conform to the requirements of OSHA.

B. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated with 2-1/2-inch by 1/2-inch aluminum bar side rails spaced a minimum 18-inches apart. Rungs shall be 3/4-inch diameter aluminum bars fabricated from extruded aluminum shapes, alloy 6063-T5/T6, with a serrated tread, number A5680 by Washington Aluminum Company or equal, spaced 12-inches on center. Wall support brackets shall be aluminum 6061-T6 spaced 4-feet on center with Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. Where possible, the side rails shall be fastened to the floor with 1/2-inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel expansion bolts.

C. Ladder safety post extensions shall be provided on all fixed ladders occurring below hatches and

at locations indicated by the Drawings. The telescoping tubular safety post extension shall be secured to the ladder rungs with stainless steel fasteners and brackets. The ladder post extension shall be Bilco's ladder UP Safety Post, Model 2 or equal.

D. Ladder safety cages, where required by OSHA at fixed ladders over 20-feet in height, shall be

constructed as shown on the plans of aluminum alloy 6061-T6 for plates and bars and alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions.

E. Ladder shields shall be "Ladder Gate" by Siebe Norton, Inc., Cerritos, CA or equal. The bottom

of the ladder shield shall be 7-feet above finish grade. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM

A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.

B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and

strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Welding shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration of the aluminum exposed surface. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.



C. Miscellaneous aluminum items shall include: beams, angles, closure angles, grates, hatches,

floor plates, stop plates, stair nosings, and any other miscellaneous aluminum called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.

D. Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc, shall be complete with welded strap anchors

attached.

E. Aluminum diamond plate and floor plate shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch. Frames and supports shall be of aluminum construction. Fastening devices and hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Plates shall have a mill finish.

F. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be Wooster Products, Inc.; Alumogrit Treads, Type

116; similar by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco or equal. Furnish with wing type anchors and flat head stainless steel machine screws, 12-inches on center. Nosing shall also be used at concrete ladder openings. Nosing shall a single piece for each step extending to within 3-inches at each side of stair or full ladder width. Set nosing flush with stair tread finish at concrete stairs. Furnish treads with heavy duty protective tape cover.

G. Aluminum shall be given an anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the AA M31C22A41.

Other aluminum items shall have a cleaned and degreased mill finish. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL


B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and

strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.

C. Miscellaneous steel items shall include: beams, angles, lintels, metal stairs, support brackets,

base plates for other than structural steel or equipment, closure angles, door frames, and any other miscellaneous steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.

D. Structural steel angle and channel door frames shall be stainless steel. Frames shall be fabricated

with not less than three anchors on each jamb.

E. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments and other functions shall be stainless steel pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe, shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length.

F. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust

and foreign matter and shall be given one shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Paint shall be omitted within 3-in of proposed field welds.



Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces.

G. Lintels, relief angles or other steel supporting masonry or embedded in masonry shall be hot-

dipped galvanized.

H. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz/sq ft of surface.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL


B. Miscellaneous stainless steel items shall include: beams, angles, bar racks and any other

miscellaneous stainless steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. C. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and

strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install ladders and accessories in compliance with the Manufacturer's detailed instructions and the approved shop drawings.

B. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete or other masonry which shall be

installed under Division 3 and Division 4 respectively. Items to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be permitted.

C. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left

unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding.

D. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL-P-15145. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.



E. Specialty products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Expansion bolts shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation. G. Install adhesive capsule anchors using Manufacturer's recommended drive units and adapters

and in compliance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Tension capacity test data shall be provided at the request of the Owner.

H. Headed anchor studs shall be welded in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. I. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive a

protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.

J. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of zinc-chromate primer

followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal.

K. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the masonry or concrete.

L. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the

wood.

M. Between aluminum grating, aluminum stair treads, or aluminum handrail brackets and steel supports, insert 1/4-inch thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect aluminum and steel fabrications from damage due to work of adjacent trades. 3.03 CLEANING

A. As work progresses on the Project, remove debris and leave installation sites broom clean.

B. Prior to final acceptance, clean ladders of any paint, mud or other adherents. END OF SECTION



SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS AND RAILING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and design, fabricate and install metal pan type stairs and landings with custom metal handrail system at roof access stair with steel pipe handrails, all as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete for treads is included in Division 3.

B. Structural steel floor framing is included in Division 5.

C. Stair nosings are included in Division 5. D. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500.

E. Field painting is included in Section 09902.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings showing clearly the location, size and details of all members, including length and size of all shop and field welds. Each field piece shall be plainly marked with suitable erection marks which shall also be shown on the erection diagram. Shop drawings shall show erection details and welding conditions.

B. Provide calculations, created, signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of

Pennsylvania that the stair, handrail and guardrail design conforms to the design criteria set forth by the Building Code.

C. Submit to the Engineer data showing the location, magnitude and direction of all dead and live

load reactions imposed on the structure by the stair and railing system. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

3. ASTM A570 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality



B. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code Steel

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

1. AISC S326 – Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Specification

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

1. NAAMM AMP-510 – Metal Stairs Manual

E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition.



A. Industry Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following standards and specifications:

1. AISC S326

2. NAAMM – AMP-510

3. AWS – D1.1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials shall be delivered promptly so as to cause no delay with other parts of the work. B. Stored materials shall be placed on skids and not on the ground and shall be piled and blocked

up so that they will not become bent or otherwise damaged. C. Materials shall be handled with cranes or derricks as far as practicable. Material shall not be

dumped off cars or trucks nor handled in any other way likely to cause damage. D. Materials with excessive damage, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall not be incorporated in the

work and shall be removed and replaced with new undamaged materials by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Pre-engineered stair, landing and handrail system shall conform to all applicable requirements of the International Building Code.

B. Design stair assembly to support a minimum live load of 100 lbs/sq ft, unless otherwise noted.

C. Design handrailings to meet the building code and to withstand 200 lbs load applied anywhere

on the system and in any direction, or 50 lbs per horizontal foot, whichever is greater.

D. Deflection shall be limited to 1/360 of span. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces: For fabrication of steel stair work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding and/or welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes.

B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A570.

D. Steel Tube: ASTM A500, Grade B.

E. Shop Prime Paint: Prepare and prime as specified in Section 09901.

F. Steel Pipe Handrail System: Provide complete system as shown on the Drawings and a

specified herein. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. Size members as required by design calculations and to conform to layout details shown.

B. Stringers: Stringers shall be clip angled to steel floor framing or to structural concrete walls where applicable. Stringers shall furnish support to intermediate landing and second floor landing. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels. Steel plate stringers will not be acceptable. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Bolt or weld headers to stringers, and framing members to stringers and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts, if used, do not appear on finish surfaces.

C. Metal Risers and Pans: Form metal risers and treads of minimum 14 gauge structural sheet steel

and attach to stringer in an approved manner.

D. Landings: Construct platforms with perimeter structural steel channels as shown, side-supported headers and miscellaneous framing members framing into the stair stringers. Provide minimum 14 gauge landing decking complete with shop welded reinforcing rods topside and perimeter screed members.

E. Attach risers, sub-treads and sub-platforms to stringers by means of brackets made of steel

angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pins to brackets by welding, or bolting.



F. Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated; join pieces together by welding

wherever possible. Provide complete stair assemblies including metal framing, columns, railings, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. Hanger rods or brackets shall be concealed in stairwell enclosure walls.

G. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

Ease exposed edges to radius of approximately 1/32-inch. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

H. Weld all assemblies in accordance with recommendations of AWS. Grind all exposed welds to

match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

I. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop primer. Apply one shop coat of metal primer to fabricated non-stainless metal items.


A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where required and approved for securing steel stair items to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, through-bolts and other connectors. No stair hanging will be allowed unless hangers are concealed by finish work.

B. Perform drilling and fitting for installation of stair work. Set work in location, alignment and

elevation, plumb and level, true and free of rack, in conformance with approved shop drawings.

C. Install railing systems and components as shown and in conformance with approved shop drawings.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect handrail systems and finishes against harmful substances and construction activities.

B. Remove protective coverings when directed. Clean stainless steel and aluminum surfaces with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent.

C. Clean, prepare abraded primed steel surfaces and touch-up with the approved shop primer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05531

GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Formed metal floor and stair tread gratings.

B. Flat surface floor and stair tread plating.

C. Perimeter closure.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Metal Fabrications are included in Section 05500.

B. Metal Stairs: Framing for grating and stair treads are included in Section 05510.

C. Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish is included in Section 09902.


A. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008

B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012

C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009

D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011

E. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009)

F. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2012

G. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012e1

H. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012e1

I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007

J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010

K. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2009 (ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532)

L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)

M. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004)




A. Conform to: ANSI/ NAAMM MBG - 532, ADA & AASHTO H20/H15 Standards.

B. Design Live (Vehicle) Load: Uniform load of 500 lb/sq ft minimum; concentrated load of 14,330 lbs.

C. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size components by single support design.

D. Maximum Spacing Between Bearing Bars: 1/2".

E. Galvanized Finish

F. No Slip Resistant Top Surface

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction details, and tolerances. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net

weld lengths.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, size illustrating surface finish, color, and texture.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special requirements for perimeter framing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ohio Gratings, Inc. Product Wheels n' Heels Metro Heavy Duty Steel Grating.

B. Substitutions: See Division 1

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M; pattern as indicated.

B. Steel Framing: ASTM A572/A572M (Grade 50) shapes, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.

C. Cross Bars: ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M) solid bars.

D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips: Galvanized steel:

B. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate grates to sizes indicated on the drawings.



B. Weld joints of intersecting metal sections.

C. Top Surface: Non-slip.

D. Bearing Bar: Minimum 1/4".

E. Fabricate Bearing Bars spans in short direction as indicated on the drawings.

F. Fabricate units to largest possible widths.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

C. Prime paint items with one coat.

D. Galvanizing for Steel Shapes: ASTM A123/A123M.

E. Galvanizing for Steel Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

B. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable.

C. Verify that supports are correctly positioned.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level.

C. Mechanically cut galvanized finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to NAAMM MBG 532.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05800 EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install fire-rated and non-fire-rated architectural expansion joint assemblies and covers to provide building expansion control as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Work of this Section shall include, but not be limited to the following locations: 1. Floor expansion joint assemblies. 2. Exterior wall expansion joint assemblies. 3. Interior wall expansion joint assemblies. 4. Roof expansion joint assemblies. 5. Fire barriers where required for the above systems.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry is included in Section 04200. C. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500. D. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. E Firestopping is included in Section 07270. F. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. G Membrane roofing is included in Section 07540. H. Coping, flashing and trim is included in Section 07512. I. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901. J. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

K. Acoustical tile ceilings are included in Section 09500.



L. Field Painting is included in Section 09902.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings showing fastening details, plan layouts of all areas requiring architectural expansion joint assemblies and covers and locations of joints.

B. Product Data – Submit copies of the Manufacturer’s latest published literature for all materials

specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data shall clearly indicate the movement capability of joint assemblies as well as the suitability of materials used in exterior seals subject to UV exposure.

C. Certificates – Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratories indicating test

results relative to the compliance of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies with the specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings – Submit shop drawings for the work specified herein for approval and obtain

approval prior to any fabrication, shipment of materials or installation. Submitted drawings shall show the full extent of expansion joint cover assemblies; including large-scale details with profiles of each type of joint assembly, splice joints between sections, joinery, special end conditions, anchorage, fasteners, and relationship to the adjoining materials and finishes. Provide a description of all proposed materials and finishes and include installation instructions.

E. Samples – Submit two samples of each expansion joint assembly, including covers and filler

showing proposed materials, construction and finish with 12-inch long legs containing one factory fabricated type intersection and one field type joint. Samples shall include the following:

1. Samples for each type of metal finish indicated on metal of same thickness and alloy to be used on the Project.

2. Samples of each type of flexible seal to be used on the Project with available color samples.



B. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)


D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)




G. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General – Materials and work shall conform to the latest editions of the referenced standards specified herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics – Where indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, provide

expansion joint cover and/or back-up assemblies has been approved by UL. Fire rating of the joint system shall not be less than the rating of the adjacent building construction.

C. Surface Burning Characteristics – Composite interior systems shall be UL tested and approved

as a Class I fire-rating in accordance with ASTM E84 test procedures. D. Single-Source Responsibility – Where possible, obtain all expansion joint assemblies from a

single Manufacturer. Fire barriers must be provided with the specific expansion joint systems from the same Manufacturer to ensure that they were tested and approved for use together.

E. Loading Characteristics:

1. Floor Joint Systems – Standard floor joint systems, which are not subject to vehicular traffic, shall be designed to withstand a minimum load of 500-pounds without damage or permanent deformation. Heavy duty floor joint systems shall withstand a minimum point load of 2,000-pounds.

2. Wall Joint Systems – Shall be designed to withstand a minimum impact load of 75-pounds without damage or permanent deformation.

F. Project Requirements – In the event of a conflict between expansion joint system requirements

on the Project, the more stringent shall apply. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original, undamaged protective coverings with labels legible and intact.

B. Deliver materials to the Project site that are ready for use and fabricated in sections and

assemblies that are as large as practical for shipping. Assemblies shall be identical to the approved shop drawings, samples and certificates.

C. Store all materials in protective coverings in a manner to prevent damage from the environment

and construction operations. Store all materials under cover and within a dry and clean location that is located above the adjacent grade level. Remove any materials that are damaged or not suitable for installation from the Project and replace with acceptable materials at no additional cost to the Owner.



D. Handle all materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Use proper care during

the handling of all products to avoid any damage to the finished surface, and take all necessary precautions to protect the work of this Section from damage after it has been installed.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Section 01740 – Warranties and Bonds. B. Contractor shall supply a minimum 2-year written warranty from the joint system Manufacturer

to cover any defects in materials and/or workmanship. C. The warranty specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner

may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Where necessary, check the actual locations of walls and other adjacent construction to which the work of this Section must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Include verified measurements on the final Shop Drawings.

1.09 EXTRA STOCK

A. 100 feet of resilient joint filler shall be delivered to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES AND COVERS

A. Joint assemblies shall be extruded aluminum framed by CS Group; Balco Inc.; WABO, (Watson, Bowman, ACME); MM Systems Corp.; Johns Manville; or approved equal.

B. Roof joint assemblies shall be roof membrane over compressible tubes by Roof Manufacturer on

Project (Firestone Building Products Company; Carlisle SynTec Systems Inc.; GAF Materials Corporation; or approved equal).

C. Provide all factory fabricated intersections and corners required by job conditions for

assemblies. Elastomeric material shall be a cellular thermoplastic gasket which is replaceable and which has a Shore A durometer of 65 and allow movement of plus/minus 25 percent.

D. Field joints shall be located at factory formed intersections and corners only. Wall covers shall

have no joints in single runs. Butt thermoplastic material under pressure to provide tight field joints as approved by the Engineer.

E. Color of thermoplastic gasket material shall be selected from standard colors by the Engineer.

F. Aluminum side retainer frames and other aluminum where in contact with concrete and masonry

shall be factory coated with an approved non-chromate primer.



G. Provide masonry anchors and stainless steel fasteners as approved for securing aluminum frames

into recesses in structural concrete and to vertical masonry and concrete as required at 24-in on center.

H. Grout shall be non-ferric, non-shrink type equal to Master Builders Masterflow 713; Euclid

Chemical Co. N-S Grout or equal.

I. Neoprene expansion joint fillers shall be closed cell, black color, open webbed cross section type, Profile Model Number 1FW by Jeene Systems of Watson, Bowman, Acme and furnished with non-sag epoxy adhesive designed for the fillers and site applied to substrate concrete as approved before filler installation.

J. Provide fire-rated joint systems at locations indicated on the Drawings and as required. Mineral

fiber firesafing, U.L. labeled, shall be provided as required and approved to fill voids in joints full depth of slab or wall, below assemblies and covers.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6, sheets and plates.

1. Protect aluminum surfaces in direct contact with cementitious materials using heavy metal free high solids primer or chromate conversion coating.

B. Steel Plates: ASTM A283, Grade C; Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786; and Structural

Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304, unless indicated otherwise, for plates, sheets and strips.

D. Bronze: ASTM B455 alloy C38500 for extrusions; alloy C28000, Muntz Metal for plates.

E. Brass: UNS Alloy C26000 for half-hard sheet and coil.

F. Extruded Preformed Seals: Single or multi-layered rubber extrusions as classified under ASTM D 2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles and formed to fit compatible frames, in the Color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

G. Exterior Seals: Typically two single layered flexible extrusions, one interior PVC and one Exterior, non-hydroscopic, thermoplastic rubber, as classified under ASTM D 2000, retained in a set of compatible frames, in the Color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

H. Fire Barriers: Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue in accordance with ASTM E 1399. Tested in maximum joint width condition as a component of an expansion joint cover system in accordance with UL 2079 including hose stream testing of wall assemblies at full-rated period by UL.



I. Elastomeric Flexible Roof Covers: Continuous neoprene sheet bellows complete with foam support membrane and continuous galvanized attachment flanges, mechanically fastened to roof curb member 24-inches on-center, or as recommended by roof Manufacturer. Cover to be one-piece unit with optional back seal. All transitions and end caps to be factory fabricated with butt joints sealed with site applied flexible splice covers.

J. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapor seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesive and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or as required for a complete and proper installation.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are fabricated. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering before shipment.

B. Aluminum Finishes:

1. Clear Anodize Finish – Exposed aluminum shall have clear anodized finished after required welding conforming to Aluminum Association AA C22A31 and approved samples.

2. Paint Finish – Shall be inhibited thermocured primer, .02 mil minimum dry film thickness and thermocured fluorocarbon coating containing full 70% Kynar 500 resin, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness. Color shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

3. Factory-Primed Concealed Surfaces – Protect concealed metal surfaces that will be in direct contact with concrete and masonry surfaces when installed by applying a shop coat of the Manufacturer’s standard primer to contact surfaces. Provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

C. Stainless Steel Finishes: Shall be Natural Satin, NAAMM-M32, mechanical finish, directional

textured, medium satin. 2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or as required to suit the Project conditions.

1. Select units comparable to those indicated or as required to accommodate the joint sizes, variations in adjacent surfaces, materials, and structural movement.

2. Provide hairline-mitered corners where joints change directions or abuts other materials.

3. Provide exterior closure materials in lengths equal to joint length without field splices. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize the number of end joints.



B. Provide joint components, transition pieces, cross connections and other accessories as required

to provide continuous joint cover assemblies. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corner, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies.

C. Provide plated, concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

D. Provide epoxy adhesives where required to anchor members or joint system components.

E. Shop assemble all joint system components and package with the required anchors and fittings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Make a thorough examination of all surfaces receiving the work of this Section and before starting the installation. Notify the Engineer, in writing, of any defect which would affect the satisfactory completion of the work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure a complete and proper installation for the Work required under this Section.

B. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and

scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, with particular attention given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and/or masonry.

C. Provide all templates as required to related trade for location of all support and anchorage items.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with the Manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for all phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials, and the protection of installed units.

B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in fasteners for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.

C. Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.

D. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid

buckling.



E. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. If necessary, shim to level, but ensure base frames have continual support to prevent rocking and vertical deflection.

F. Locate wall, ceiling, roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with the adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with all required accessories.

G. Locate anchors at interval recommended by the Manufacturer, but not less than 3-inches from each end and not more than 24-inches on-center.

H. Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held to a minimum and metal members aligned mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames.

I. Adhere flexible filler materials (where applicable) to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by the Manufacturer.

1. Seal transitions in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Apply the Manufacturer’s approved adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive to both frame interfaces prior to installing preformed seal.

J. Installation of Exterior Seal Joint Assemblies:

1. Seal all end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions to provide a watertight installation.

2. Install exterior flexible seal in standard lengths.

3. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Install secondary seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize all field splice joints in secondary seal materials to provide watertight joints using the Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.

K. Installation of Fire Barriers:

1. Install fire barriers in accordance with federal, state and local building codes using the Manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

2. Install transition and end joints to provide continuous fire resistance and in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Install firesafing with covers or assemblies over to close expansion openings in walls, floors or roof joints as required.

4. All fire-rated installations shall conform to UL requirements, the product Manufacturer’s recommendations, and the approved shop drawings.

L. Roof expansion joints systems shall comply with all requirements of the roof Manufacturer and

the completed installation shall be watertight. Joint installation must not conflict with any



Warranty requirements of the building roof system. Any such Work that voids the roof system warranty shall be completely removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

M. Install expansion joint assemblies at the locations indicated on the Drawings, where specified herein, and where required on the Project.


A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective material is removed, clean all exposed metal surfaces in compliance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions and/or recommendations.

3.05 EXPANSION JOINT SCHEDULE

NO. MODEL (MFR)

TYPE DESCRIPTION

EJ-1A FCWW-2 (Balco)

Wall / Wall Exterior

(Non-Rated)

Exterior flat seal / Continuous extruded Aluminum frame (RAL-1) with Elastomeric Silicone Expansion Joint System (SILW200) with Back Seal (BS400) –

50-Percent Movement / Color – To be Selected.

EJ-1B FCWW-2 &

MBW2H (Balco)


(Fire-Rated)

Exterior flat seal / Continuous extruded Aluminum frame (RAL-1) with Elastomeric Silicone Expansion Joint System (SILW200) with Back Seal (BS400) –

50-Percent Movement / Color – To be Selected. Fire-Rating (2-Hour) provided by UL approved Metablock fire barrier (MBW2H0350) installed

within fire-rated building wall assembly

EJ-2A TCWW-2

(Balco)

Wall / Wall Interior

(Non-Rated)

Interior flat seal / Continuous extruded Aluminum frame (RAL-1) with Elastomeric Santoprene

Expansion Joint System (SANW200) – 50-Percent Movement / Color – To be Selected.

EJ-2B TCWW-2 &

MBW2H (Balco)

Wall / Wall Interior

(Fire-Rated)

Interior flat seal / Continuous extruded Aluminum frame (RAL-1) with Elastomeric Santoprene

Expansion Joint System (SANW200) – 50-Percent Movement / Color – To be Selected. Fire-Rating (2-Hour) provided by UL approved Metablock fire barrier (MBW2H0350) installed

within fire-rated building wall assembly.



NO. MODEL (MFR)

TYPE DESCRIPTION

EJ-3 ECS-300

(MM)

Floor / Floor Interior

(Non-Rated)

Interior Floor Seal / Elastoprene – 100 Rubber Compression Seal / located between concrete floors

with 1/4-inch support ledges along slab edges. Color – Gray to match Concrete floors.

EJ-4 T-E-1

(Firestone)

Roof / Roof Exterior

(Non-Rated)

Flat Roof Seal / TPO Flat Expansion Joint with Compressible Tube, Welded Splice, Fastener Plates,

and Compressible Insulation with Retainer. Color – White to match TPO Roof System.

EJ-5 T-E-4

(Firestone)

Wall / Roof Exterior

(Non-Rated)

Roof Seal at Parapet Wall / TPO Wall Expansion Joint with Compressible Tube, Welded Splice,

Fastener Plates, and Compressible Insulation with Retainer. Color – White to match TPO Roof System.

EJ-6 EJ/WC (Johns

Manville)


(Non-Rated)

Roof Seal between Parapet Walls / Foam supported bellows with integral attachment flanges (Expand-O-Flash Style EJ/WC). Factory-

laminated Neoprene cover membrane with Aluminum termination bars (Curb-to-Curb 4/28)

Color – White to match TPO Roof System.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install items of rough carpentry work, all complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install all metal frames that are to be built into walls. Install metal frames that are to be installed

in finished openings. Install hollow metal and aluminum doors as well as finish hardware furnished under other Sections.

C. Install curbing or blocking for materials and products furnished under other Sections. D. Provide wood blocking within walls as required for wall trim, architectural woodwork, toilet

partitions, toilet accessories, handrails, fire extinguishers and where otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Wood formwork is included in Division 3.

B. Metal fabrications are included in Division 5.

C. Anchor bolts and other metal appurtenances, except as specified herein, are included within Division 5.

D. Finish carpentry is included in Section 06200. E. Membrane roofing is included in Section 07540. F. Roof accessories are included in Section 07720. G. Doors and frames are included in Division 8. H. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. I. Fire-rated window systems are included in Section 08910. J. Field painting is included in Section 09902. K. Toilet partitions are included in Section 10155.

L. Toilet and shower accessories are included in Section 10800.




A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)

1. AWPA P5 – Waterborne Preservatives 2. AWPA C-20, C-027 – Fire Retardant Standard

B. American Plywood Association (APA) C. American Laminator’s Association (ALA)

D. American Woodwork Institute (AWI)


2009 Edition

F. Where reference is made to the above standard, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS – ROUGH CARPENTRY

A. All lumber shall be of sound stock, delivered dry and shall be fully protected at all times from injury and dampness. Split, broken, or otherwise damaged pieces will not be allowed in the work.

B. Wood for block, nailers and other uses shall be seasoned, 19 percent maximum moisture content,

Construction Grade quality and of Douglas Fir; Southern Pine or Ponderosa Pine species.

1. Wood members that will contact masonry or concrete or where indicated on Drawings, shall be vacuum-pressure treated with 100 percent oxide pure chromated copper arsenate meeting AWPA Standard P-5. Minimum net retention of solid preservative shall be 0.40 lb per cu ft.

2. All treatment shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard

Specifications of the American Wood Preservers Association for treating wood. Apply a heavy coat of the same preservative used in treating to all surfaces cut after treatment.

3. Provide fire retardant-treatment per AWPA C-20 and C-027 for lumber located in fire-rated

assemblies.

C. Plywood for underlayment shall be APA-rated, exposure I classified, Grade C or higher. Thickness as shown on Drawings.

1. Provide a pressure and fire retardant plywood in exterior, non-combustible and fire-rated

assemblies where required.



D. Plywood for Backing Panels:

1. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, not less

than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

E. Plywood at all other locations shall be American Plywood Association APA-rated, Structural I sheathing, 16 Span Rating, for interior conditions, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide a pressure and fire retardant plywood in exterior, non-combustible and fire-rated

assemblies where required. F. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, nuts and washers where sizes are not indicated or specified, shall be

of suitable size and number as approved to securely fasten and hold members in place. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication except where stainless steel is shown.


A. All rough carpentry shall be accurately cut, fitted and installed as detailed.

B. Install roof plywood and panels in conjunction with blocking as shown on existing deck using self tapping, corrosion resistant coated, flat head, screws of sizes and at spacing to withstand wind pressures and uplifts meeting UL90 requirements.

C. Anchors shall be installed, where indicated or required, to anchor carpentry securely to masonry

or concrete. Provide additional backing and reinforcement as required to support the installation of carpentry items.

D. Forms for structural concrete work shall be as specified under Division 3. Provide all other

miscellaneous wood form work as may be required for the completion of the work.

E. Temporary wood doors and cloth or transparent plastic covered frames shall be provided for exterior wall openings during winter construction.

F. Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware:

1. Doors and finish hardware will be furnished under Division 8 and shall be installed under

the work of this Section, except where specifically designated otherwise herein.

2. As soon as the hardware is delivered to the job site, receive, verify and check each set and report to the Engineer any defect or shortage. Give notice to the hardware supplier for all such items which may be defective or missing. Provide a receipt to the hardware supplier for all such items as are found to be correct.

3. Finish hardware, after checking, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor until it is

installed and the project is accepted in its entirety by the Owner.



4. Install wood and metal doors to comply with the Manufacturer's written instructions as shown. Doors shall be installed plumb, square, and true to line.

5. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances:

a. Jambs and Head – 3/32-inch.

b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors – 1/8-inch.

c. Bottom (where no undercut) – 3/8-inch, where no threshold.

d. Bottom (where no undercut) – 1/8-inch, at threshold. e. Provide undercuts as scheduled and furnished with doors.

6. Fit fire-rated doors with clearances as required by NFPA Standard No. 80.

7. Hardware shall be attached and placed by skilled mechanics in accordance with approved

hardware templates provided with the hardware and shall be accurately fitted and adjusted. Lever handles shall be kept covered with heavy cloth and other hardware shall be protected from damage until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.

8. Set each edge and joint of threshold in a seal strip of polyurethane sealant. Grout

remainder of threshold in mortar.

9. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by the Manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

10. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to the acceptance or

occupancy of an area, return to the opening during the week prior to final acceptance or occupancy to make a final check and adjustment of all associated hardware items. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

11. All doors shall be in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, racked, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.

12. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat on steel

and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all finish carpentry work complete including shelving, cabinets and custom casework as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500. B. Rough carpentry is included in Section 06100.

C. Doors and frames are included in Division 8.

D. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700.

E. Field painting is included in Section 09902.

F. Signage is included in Section 10400.

G. Appliances are included in Section 11451.

H. Sinks within countertops are included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings showing details of fabrication and erection of all finish carpentry items and material furnished under this Section.

B. Submit three fully finished samples of each of the following items. Samples will be reviewed

for appearance and finish only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Solid hardwood – 1-foot long in each thickness and type required with stained finish

proposed. 2. Hardwood plywood – 1-foot square showing slip match veneer and in each of the stained

finishes proposed with edge banding. 3. Counter and casework construction – Plastic laminate surface on both sides with edge;

wood laminate construction and hardwood edge 3/4-inch thick by 12-inches by 12-inches.



C. Submit 2 samples of each type of hardware including fasteners for approval by the Engineer. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA P5 – Waterborne Preservatives

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA LD3 – High-pressure Decorative Laminates

C. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) D. American Laminators Association (ALA) E. American Plywood Association (APA) F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be delivered and stored inside where protected from the elements. Materials shall be stacked to ensure proper drainage and ventilation. No materials shall be placed in any building until that building is completely closed-in and sufficiently dry.

B. Components shall be accepted only when delivered dry and shall not be stored or installed until

after all concrete, masonry and drywall work have been completed. C. Materials such that must be installed within an unfinished building while construction is in

progress shall be safely stored and protected inside an adjacent building or structure as designated by the Owner.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF SUBSTRATE AND CONDITIONS

A. Examine the substrate, including stripping and blocking to which materials will be secured, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.


A. For finish carpentry items, comply with the specified provisions of the "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' Illustrated" of the AWI Premium Grade Standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS – FINISH CARPENTRY

A. Interior Wood Trim: Provide kiln-dried finished wood material without finger-jointing, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

1. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide Premium Grade

eastern white pine; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide Premium Grade

Clear red oak, selected for compatible grain and color 3. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Provide either finger-jointed or solid lumber of

Finish Grade, eastern white pine; NeLMA or NLGA. 4. Hardwood plywood shall be rift sliced, slip-matched, face veneer, minimum plywood

thickness of 3/4-inch. 2.02 COUNTERS AND BUILT-IN CASEWORK

A. Counters and cabinets shall be in accordance with AWI casework Custom Grade Standards, Section 400.

B. Core material for plastic laminate work shall be an approved particle board conforming to

Commercial Standard C.S. 236 and 3/4-inch minimum thickness. C. Counters and cabinets shall receive plastic laminate on all exposed surface and laminate shall be

premium grade as defined in AWI 400-16 and 400-17.

D. Plastic Laminate: Comply with the requirements of NEMA LDI by the following:

1. All Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate with nominal 0.062-inch thickness for all exposed work and 0.020-inch minimum thickness for back-up sheets as required.

2. Surface Finish: Provide plastic laminate having a gloss reading of 20 or less. 3. Plastic Laminate Color 1 shall be applied to break-room counter top, backsplash and side

splashes, including all edges and faces. 4. Plastic Laminate Color 2 shall be applied to base and wall cabinets, doors, shelves and all

other areas as directed by Engineer, including edges and faces. 5. Laminate finish shall be matte texture and include two (2) custom or premium colors as

selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. 6. Provide finish laminate on all exposed surfaces and where shown on the Drawings.

E. Exposed Edges: Fabricate with plastic laminate matching other exposed surfaces, unless otherwise shown.



F. Cut openings in plastic laminate finished tops for equipment that is to be installed under other related Sections. Verify size of openings with the actual size of equipment to be used, prior to making openings. Form inside corners to a radius of not less than 1/8-inch. After sawing, rout and file cutouts to ensure smooth, crack-free edges. Seal any exposed edges after cutting with a waterproofing material recommended by the plastic laminate Manufacturer.

G. Solid molded plastic surfacing material, where indicated for tops and sills, shall be Fountainhead

by Nevamar Corporation, similar by DuPont; Formica or approved equal. Provide satin finish, homogeneous thermoset polymer alloy comprised of polyester and acrylic plastics and filled with aluminum trihydrate and integral color. Material shall have the following properties:

1. Hardness (Barcol Impressor) - 55; tensile strength (ASTM D638) - 4500 psi; color change

(NEMA LD3-3.10) - no change; abrasion resistance (CS221-66) - 0.080g/100 cycles; water absorption (ASTM D570) - 24 hours - 0.015 percent, long term - 0.09 percent; impact resistance (NEMA LD3-3.03) - no fracture, 1/4-inch ident/54-inch fall, 3/4-inch indent/156-inch fall with 1/2-inch ball. Material shall be UL Class I - Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 95-175.

2. Provide plastic surfacing material in minimum 3/4-inch thickness or as indicated on the

Drawings. Provide reinforced steel channel frame where and as shown to support tops. 3. Prepare steel, shop prime and shop finish paint conforming to Division 9. 4. Provide with system adhesive and silicone sealant required for fabrication and installation,

color matching the surfacing material as approved. 5. Color shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the standard

finish colors available from the Manufacturer.

H. Solid wood required elsewhere for trim and components shall be rift sliced as detailed. I. Hardwood plywood shall be rift sliced, slip-matched, face veneer, minimum plywood thickness

of 3/4-inch, conforming to P.S. 51.

J. Cabinet Hardware:

1. Doors and drawer pull handles shall be loop stainless steel, DS by Lamp Sugatsune America, Inc. or equal.

2. Stainless steel hinges, spring loaded, European Style, 19-mm, 436-C46/19 by Lamp

Sugatsune America, Inc., similar by Blumcraft or equal for 3/4-inch thick overlay doors. 3. All drawers shall have medium duty side-mounted, cold rolled steel, zinc plated roller

slides with ball bearings, by Grass America, Inc. or equal. 4. Shelf standards for wall and base cabinets shall be chrome plated steel, end-of-shelf

supports with integral doweled ends to fit drilled holes in cabinet sides. 5. Floor guides for movable casework items, where applicable, shall be adjustable with

stainless steel bases, all as approved.



K. All finished wall dimensions within area of work shall be verified in field before fabrication or

installation of any casework. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. Before proceeding with fabrication of work required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawings details as required for accurate fit.

B. Employ only mechanics experienced in the fabrication and installation of items to be installed.

C. Casework for plastic laminate finish shall comply with AWI 400, Premium Grade. Provide

plastic self-edges. Provide balancing and back-up sheets as required in AWI 400, Premium Grade. Casework shall be flush overlay design as approved.

D. All work and components shall be fabricated to conform to the intent of the elevations, sections

and details shown and shall be in accordance with the approved shop drawings and samples.

E. Finished work shall be dressed and sanded, free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain or other defects on surfaces exposed to view.

F. Work shall be continuous in lengths shown. No splicing will be allowed.

G. Plastic laminate work and components shall comply with AWI Premium Grade for applicable

type of work. Provide laminate on both sides of exposed shelves and other exposed work. Provide solid wood edges where and as shown. Provide balancing and backup sheets as required in AWI Premium Grade.

H. Optimum Moisture Content for shop and site fabricated work shall be as follows: Kiln dry solid

wood to the average moisture content of 8 percent as recommended by AWI 100 G-3. Maintain optimum moisture content until final finish has been applied.

3.02 EXAMINATION OF SUBSTRATE AND CONDITIONS

A. Examine the substrate, including grounds, stripping and blocking to which materials will be secured and the conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work under this Section until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in a manner consistent with quality of specified grade to the plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Corners shall be mitered, invisibly glued and nailed. Scribe pieces where so required. Secure to substrate with approved hardware, with concealed nails where required or with finish nails where approved, set and filled as approved to match color of finish.



B. Install casework in a manner consistent with quality of specified grade to be plumb, level, true

and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Secure to substrate with concealed fasteners where possible and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work as required.

C. Install rubber base at all board locations along all exposed edges of casework per finish plans as

shown on the Drawings. D. After completion of work of Section, clean exposed exterior and interior surfaces, remove and

refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish and repair damaged or defective work or replace as directed by the Engineer to the satisfaction of the Owner.

E. Protect finished surfaces with heavy-duty canvas or polyethylene sheets. Secure any loose

components, such as adjustable shelving from damage during delivery. If such items are to be delivered separately from main body of casework, wrap each piece separately to protect finish and clearly mark to show proper location in completed casework.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to perform all the waterproofing, dampproofing and related work necessary for the proper completion of the project as required by the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Dampproofing shall be applied to the exterior surfaces of all exterior poured in place concrete walls and masonry from the top of the footings up to 6-inches below the finished grade.

1. Apply dampproofing to the exterior surface of all building footings, foundations and

below grade walls as recommended by the product Manufacturer for adequate coverage of the concrete and/or masonry substrate. Provide either two Brush coats or one Trowel coat as required to achieve the necessary thickness.

2. Dampproofing shall also be applied to the exterior face of the inner wythe at all exterior

masonry cavity walls. Provide one Brush coat minimum as required for complete coverage over the masonry surface as well as in and around all joints, grooves, and slots.

B. Fluid applied vapor barrier shall be applied to the exterior side of CMU in exterior cavity walls

and behind the exterior metal panel systems.

C. Vapor barrier shall be supplied under interior building slabs on grade. D. Air barrier shall be applied between rigid insulation and non-insulated metal wall panels. E. Provide masonry water repellant to all exposed exterior masonry.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Architectural precast concrete is included in Section 03450. C. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. D. Building insulation is included in Section 07231. E. Metal roofing system is included in Section 07415. F. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. G. Caulking and joint sealants are included in Section 07901.



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for review, in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300, shop drawings, working drawings and product data including detailed product information and colors of materials proposed and material installation methods with details.

B. Submit for review two sets of representative samples of any or all other proposed materials

required for the work of this Section as requested by the Engineer. 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS


1. ASTM C 836 – Standard Specification for High Solids content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course

2. ASTM C 898 – Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Separate Wearing Course

3. ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension

4. ASTM D 5295 – Standard Guide for Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered (Bonded) Membrane Waterproofing Systems

5. ASTM D 695 – Test Method for Compressive Strength of Rigid Plastics

6. ASTM D 790 – Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

7. ASTM D 822 – Recommended Practice for Operating Light and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Arc Type for Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Relation Products) 8. ASTM D 903 – Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 9. ASTM D 968 – Test for Abrasion Resistance of Coatings of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products by the Falling Sand Method 10. ASTM D 1002 – Test Method for Strength Properties of Adhesives in Shear Tension Loading (Metal to Metal) 11. ASTM D 1708 – Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics by Use of Microtensile Specimens 12. ASTM D 3767 – Standard Practice for Rubber – Measurements of Dimensions

13. ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials



14. ASTM E 154 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover

15. ASTM E 1643 – Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 16. ASTM E 1745 – Plastic Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular fill under Concrete Slabs 17. ASTM G 26 – Recommended Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetalic Materials

B. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revisions in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Dampproofing

1. Troweled on dampproofing shall be an asphalt emulsion reinforced with fibers conforming to ASTM D1227, Type II, Class 1. The dampproofing shall be Hydrocide 700 by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of ChemRex Inc., Minneapolis, MN; Karnak 920 Asphalt Emulsion by Karnak Corporation, Clark, NJ or equal.

2. Brushed on dampproofing shall be an asphalt emulsion reinforced with fibers conforming

to ASTM D1227, Type II, Class 1. The dampproofing shall be Hydrocide 700B by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of ChemRex Inc., Minneapolis, MN; Karnak 220 Asphalt Emulsion by Karnak Corporation, Clark, NJ or equal.

B. Masonry Water Repellant

1. Masonry water repellant shall be a spray applied, high performance, water-based product that is suitable for vertical exterior masonry, including both smooth and textured units. The water repellent shall be non-staining, VOC compliant, and shall become an integral part of masonry. Once dry, the water repellent must dry clear to avoid any noticeable discoloration to the masonry.

2. Masonry water repellant shall be Enviroseal PBT by Degussa Building Systems,

Shakopee, MN; Siloxane WB Concentrate by Prosoco, Inc., Lawrence, KS; or approved equal.



C. Vapor and Air Barriers

1. Vapor barrier under concrete floor slab shall be 10 mil thick polyethylene sheet with a vapor transmission rating of 0.20 perms or less. The material shall conform to ASTM E154. Vapor barrier shall include all accessories or components required by the product Manufacturer for a complete and proper system.

2. Air Barrier at perimeter walls shall be ‘Tyvek Commercial Wrap’ by DuPont Building

Innovations; or approved equal. Water Vapor Transmission shall be tested using ASTM-E-96. Air penetration shall be 0.001 (cfm/ft2 e 75 Pa). Air barrier shall be the applied between the rigid insulation and the non-insulated metal wall panels. Air barrier shall include all accessories or components required by the product Manufacturer for a complete and proper system.

D. Fluid Applied Vapor Barrier

1. Fluid-applied Vapor barrier applied to CMU back-up wall shall be two- component synthetic, cold-vulcanized rubber curing to a fully bonded, monolithic elastomeric sheet: Perm-a-Barrier Liquid by Grace Construction Products; or approved equal. Vapor barrier shall include all accessories or components required by the product Manufacturer for a complete and proper system.

E. Concrete Sealer

1. Sealer Type C: Sealer Type C shall be a 40% silane penetrating waterproofing sealer.

Provide “HYDROZO Silane 40 VOC” by DeGussa, Shakopee, MN or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of Dampproofing

1. Surface to be treated shall be free from oil and dirt and shall be in the proper condition as indicated by the Manufacturer prior to the application of the dampproofing material. The concrete or masonry shall have been completely cured and the surface shall be dry and free from frost at the time of application.

2. Surfaces to receive troweled on type dampproofing shall receive one heavy coat carefully

applied so that "holidays" or air-bubble depressions in the surface are completely filled and a thickness of 1/16-inch is obtained from the high points of the surfaces providing a 100 percent coating of the surface. Surfaces to receive brushed on type dampproofing shall receive two coats carefully applied so that no "holidays" are visible. Coating shall extend over exposed top and outside edge of footing.

3. Particular care shall be given to the application of dampproofing at all construction joints

which are encountered.



4. The coat or coats specified is in addition to primer coats as recommended by the product Manufacturer.

5. Do not place backfill before cure time recommended by Manufacturer and before the wall

has been inspected by Engineer. The backfill shall be placed promptly after inspection by Engineer within time limits recommended by Manufacturer.

B. Installation of Water Repellant

1. Water repellant shall be applied only after joints have been caulked and properly cured.

Surfaces shall be clean and free from excess dust. New masonry shall be allowed to cure at least thirty days prior to application.

2. Surfaces shall receive two complete coats at rates recommended by the Manufacturer.

The complete installation shall be in strict compliance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Installation of Vapor Barrier

1. Vapor barrier shall be installed under all interior slabs-on-grade. Laps between adjacent

sheets shall be 10-inches minimum. Vapor barrier will be carefully inspected prior to concrete placement, by the Engineer.

2. Additional polyethylene sheet required for repair and replacement of damaged vapor

barrier shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Installation of Air Barrier

1. Install air barrier over exterior wall substrate in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written recommendations.

2. Start air barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of barrier extended

beyond corner to overlap. 3. Install air barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface

with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain air barrier plumb and level.

4. Seal all seams of the air barrier with seam tape at both vertical and horizontal overlapping

seams. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by the Manufacturer.

E. Installation of Concrete Sealer

1. Allow newly placed concrete to cure a minimum of 38 days or as recommended by the Manufacturer.

2. Apply concrete sealer only after all joints have been caulked and properly cured.



3. Level and spots gouged out by trades. Remove all dirt, dust, droppage, oil, grease, asphalt and foreign matter. Cleanse with caustics and detergents as required. Rinse thoroughly and allow the concrete surface to dry.

4. Apply sealer so as to form a continuous, uniform film by spray, soft-bristle pus broom,

long-nap roller or lambswool applicator. 5. Apply 1 coat of each sealer type at area coverage rates as recommended by the sealer

Manufacturer. Strictly follow the sealer Manufacturer’s written application guidelines. 6. Concrete Sealer Schedule (Exterior Sidewalks and Slabs on Grade): Apply 1 coat of Type

‘C' Sealer. 3.02 CLEANUP

A. At all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. At the completion of the installation remove all tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and remove all of rubbish from and above the area.

B. Remove materials from surfaces where the materials are not required to produce a clean, neat,

workmanlike job. END OF SECTION



SECTION 07231 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and as required to

furnish and install building insulation. Provide thermal and acoustical insulation within exterior masonry cavity walls, on the inside of exterior walls, within interior walls framing, and other miscellaneous insulation as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Types of insulation products required include the following: 1. Polyisocyanurate rigid foam board insulation. 2. Polystyrene extruded board insulation. 3. Faced, unfaced, and foil-faced batt insulation. 4. Miscellaneous insulation, materials and accessories. C. Coordination: Review installation procedures under other sections and coordinate the installation

of items that must be installed with or adjacent to building insulation. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Metal framing is included in Division 5. D. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. E. Waterproofing and dampproofing is included in Section 07100. F. Metal roofing system is included in Section 07415. G. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. H. Membrane roofing insulation is included in Section 07540. I. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

1.03 REFEENCE STANDARDS




1. ASTM C 553 – Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Specification

2. ASTM C 578 – Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation, Standard Specification 3. ASTM C 612 – Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation, Specification 4. ASTM C 665 – Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction

and Manufactured Housing, Standard Specification 5. ASTM D 1621 – Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method 6. ASTM D 1622 – Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method 7. ASTM D 2126 – Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging,

Standard Test Method 8. ASTM D 2842 – Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method 9. ASTM E 84 – Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Standard Test

Method 10. ASTM E 96 – Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form, Standard Test

Method 11. ASTM E 119 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 1479 – Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

C. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) 1. NAIMA 202-96 – Standard for Thermal Performance

D. National Electric Code (NEC) E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition F. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following to the Engineer after award of Contract in accordance with

provisions in Submittals Section 01300 in Division 1 – General Requirements of these Specifications.



B. Product Data: Submit for approval, copies of material specifications, installation instructions

and general recommendations from the building insulation Manufacturers, for each type of building insulation product. Include Manufacturer’s product data sheets substantiating that the proposed insulation materials comply with the minimum specified requirements.

C. Certification: Submit to the Engineer "Certification" that materials and installation comply with

the Project Specifications including Energy Insulation Certification for thermal resistance.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

A. Delivery of Materials

1. Deliver building insulation products in Manufacturer’s original, unopened, factory-sealed, and properly marked containers, bearing the Manufacturer’s name and labels, accurately representing container contents as shown on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Damaged materials shall be permanently removed from Site by Contractor. 3. Do not deliver insulation materials to the Site before the time of installation. 4. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow uninterrupted continuity of the Work.

B. Storage of Materials

1. Store materials in original, undamaged, unbroken containers with the Manufacturer's labels and seals intact.

2. Store all materials at the job-site undercover, protected from weather and moisture, within a

dry, enclosed area, that is off the ground and away from all possible contact with water, ice or snow.

3. Prevent damage to materials during storage, primarily by minimizing the amount of time

they are stored on-Site before being incorporated into construction systems. Only store a sufficient quantity of building insulation materials on-Site as necessary for the continuous advancement of the Work without causing delay.

C. Handling of Materials

1. Handle materials carefully in order to avoid damage and breakage or compressing of boards to less than their specified thickness, or other damage.

2. Do not open containers, or expose materials to detrimental conditions or physical damage.

Materials which are so exposed shall be removed from the Site and shall not be incorporated into the Work. If incorporated into the Work they shall be removed at no additional expense to Owner.

3. Handle materials in a manner which prevents inclusion of foreign materials.



4. Do not open packages or containers until all necessary preparatory Work is complete and installation will begin immediately.


A. Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Certificate of Compliance: Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post a

certificate of insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall mark insulation with the manufacturer's name or trademark;

UL listing, thermal resistance "R" value, insulation only and the thickness to obtain this "R" value. Each package shall be identified with markings placed at no more than 8-foot intervals.

D. Performance Criteria

1. Thermal Conductivity: The thicknesses shown are for the thermal conductivity, k value at 75 F, specified for each material.

2. Provide adjusted densities, based on compressive strength or specified for roof deck

insulations. 3. Insulating materials shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-

developed index of not more than 450. 4. Foil facing shall be flame resistant and shall comply with ICBO requirements for condition

of use. Flame spread rating shall be 25 or less. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection

1. Do not allow building insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or

snow. 2. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage, wetting and moisture

absorption primarily by storing materials under cover and above ground and away from all other construction traffic.

3. Do not allow building insulations to come into contact with welding operations or other

fire or ignition sources. 4. Do not overload the building structure or damage in-place construction system with the

weight of stored materials or use of equipment. 5. Protect materials against damage by construction activities.



B. Scheduling

1. Proceed with building insulation Work only when preceding Work is ready to receive the Work of this Section.

2. Proceed with the building insulation and associated Work only after curbs, blocking,

membrane nailer strips, or other projections through the substrates have been installed, and when the substrate repair or construction and framing of openings is complete.

3. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and tradesmen

required for the installation of the building insulation and backfilling operations are at the Site and are ready to follow with the Work in a manner which will not leave the Work vulnerable to damage or deterioration.

4. Do not advance the installation of building insulation materials beyond that which is

necessary for proper sequencing of the Work. Do not advance Work when there is no proper and secure protection from damaging weather and construction activities.

C. Environmental Conditions

1. Complete the installation and concealment of building insulation materials as rapidly as possible in order to avoid damage from adjacent construction operations and adverse weather conditions.

2. Install building insulations only when weather and temperature conditions comply with the

Manufacturers’ written recommendations. 3. Install building insulation only when damaging environmental conditions are not forecasted

for the time when exposed systems materials components would be exposed to potential damage.

4. Do not apply pressure sensitive tape when temperature is below 35o F or above 110 o F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Insulation for masonry cavity walls shall be glass-fiber reinforced Polyisocyanurate rigid foam board laminated between 1.0 mil reflective aluminum foil facers on both sides.

1. Insulation shall be Thermax Sheathing, 4-feet by 8-feet size boards with square edges, by

the Dow Chemical Company or approved equal. 2. Thermal value for cavity wall insulation shall have a minimum R-Value of 6.5 per inch as

determined by ASTM C 518. Overall thickness of rigid insulation for cavity walls shall be 2-inches minimum (R-Value 13.0) as shown on the Drawings.

3. Density shall be 2.1 lbs/cu ft with a minimum compressive strength of 25 psi.



4. Water absorption shall be 0.05 percent per ASTM C 209 with a water vapor transmission of < 0.03 perm per ASTM E 96.

5. All insulating materials shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-

developed index of not more than 450. B. Insulation located under concrete floor slabs shall be Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:

ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5 and 175, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Insulation shall be Foamular 600, 2-feet by 8-feet size boards, by Owens Corning

Insulating Systems; or approved equal. 2. Compressive strength shall be 60-psi minimum as determined by ASTM D 1621. Overall

thickness of insulation shall be 2-inches minimum, or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Below grade protection board shall be Extruded-Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV. Provide Styrofoam Perimate as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company; or approved equal.

1. Provide below grade protection board over vertical concrete wall surfaces where indicated

on the Drawings and as required to drain water away from the building foundation. Provide a minimum overall thickness of 1.5-inches using boards interconnected with dovetail grooves and shiplap edges.

2. Insulation board shall be certified by UL (D369) and shall have the following minimum

properties:

a. Thermal Value: Minimum R-Value of 5.0 / inch b. Compressive strength: 30.0 psi (ASTM D 1621) c. Water absorption: Maximum 0.1 percent by volume (ASTM C 272) d. Drainage Capacity: 3.0 gal/min/ft (ASTM D 4716 @ 1,200 psf) e. Water Vapor Permeance: Maximum 1.1 perm (ASTM E 96) f. Flexural Strength: Minimum 50 psi (ASTM C 203)

D. Thermal Insulation Materials: ‘Certainteed’ by Owens-Corning; or equal, Fiberglass blankets or

Batts with vapor seal Kraft paper on one face extending to form stapling flanges on both edges. Provide with width and thickness as required to fit between stud framing as shown on the Drawings, or as required for the Project. 1. Batts and Blankets: Owens-Corning, Certainteed or equal, Fiberglass building insulation

blankets or batts in 15-inch and 23-inch widths with foil facing vapor barrier on one side and extending to form stapling flanges on both sides.



2. Batts and Blankets shall have a class "A" fire hazard classification, a flame spread rating not exceeding 20, a fuel contributed factor of 20, a smoke development factor of 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Batts and Blankets shall meet Fed. Spec. HH-1-521F, Type 3 and requirements of the

Department of Building and Safety and have a thermal conductivity "K" factor not exceeding 0.27 Btu.

4. Batt insulation shall be glass fiber conforming to ASTM C665, Type I (unfaced); Type II

(faced); Type III (foil); and Type IV (acoustical). Provide R-3.34 per inch minimum.

E. Sound Insulation Materials 1. Batts and Blankets: Mineral wool fiber or fibrous glass with vapor seal backing paper, full

thickness not less than 3-inches, conforming to Federal Specification HH-I-521F, having a Class "A" classification, a flame spread factor not exceeding 25, a fuel contributed factor of 20, a smoke development factor of 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. a. When in wood framing, vapor seal backing paper shall be Kraft paper with edges

extending to provide stapling flanges, width of batt, or blanket to suit stud spacing. b. When in metal framing, batt or blanket shall be unfaced type and of width to suit stud

spacing for friction fit in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the building insulation

Work is to be performed, and notify Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Commencement with the work of this Section, without prior notification, indicates acceptance by Contractor of work and material conditions, and responsibility for the same.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive building insulation are dry and clean of all debris, dirt and other

contamination before installation begins in any area. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the insulation Manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to Site conditions, submit to the Engineer specific recommendations from Manufacturer for approval before proceeding with the Work.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time

to ice and snow.



C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop the entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Apply the number of layers of insulation as specified, each of the required thickness, or the

required thickness to provide for requirements herein or otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Install vapor barrier on outside surface of exterior skin substrate. Seal vapor barrier assembly by

taping all seams per the Manufacturer’s written recommendations. F. Polypropylene faced insulation shall have staple, fold, staple seams as established by NAIMA

202-96 (Rev. 2000). G. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is to be located on inside of insulated exterior walls,

coordinate the location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and that insulation encapsulates piping.

H. Apply a single layer of insulation to produce the thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are

otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF RIGID INSULATION

A. Install rigid insulation in conjunction with other materials as indicated on the Drawings or as required for the Project.

B. Cavity Wall Applications

1. Cavity wall insulation shall be installed within exterior walls with all joints tightly butted. 2. Coordinate placing of insulation with installation of masonry joint reinforcing and wall flashing. Cut and match tightly around protrusions. Cut insulation at 45 degree downward angle where flashing passes through. 3. Parge surfaces to receive insulation with asphalt emulsion at rate of 5-gallons per 100 sq ft to an average thickness of 1/16-inch forming a continuous vapor barrier over the surfaces and all joints and protrusions. Embed insulation in emulsion. Adhere insulation where required with additional daubs of approved asphalt emulsion. 4. Exterior walls shall not receive insulation when the temperature is below 40 degrees F.

C. Perimeter and Under-slab Applications: 1. On vertical surfaces, where applicable, set units within adhesive as recommended by the

insulation Manufacturer and applied according to the Manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Extend insulation a minimum of 24-inches below exterior grade line, unless noted

otherwise on the Drawings.



3. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to the insulation Manufacturer’s written instructions.

4. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying

protection board. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION

A. Install batt insulation within metal stud framing in conjunction with other materials as indicated

on the Drawings and as required for the project. Provide with tight joints between pieces. B. Interior Wall Applications

1. Completely fill spaces between framing members; snugly butt adjacent batts together; to

provide continuous insulation between framing members. 2. Face vapor barrier or foil facing flanges of insulation material inward. 3. Secure thermal insulation foil facing flanges by stapling to framing members in a manner to

provide adequate clearance between insulation and the finished construction, at intervals not exceeding 6-inches on center along such flanges.

4. Cut neatly to fit angles, irregular spaces, for proper fastening and tight insulation. 5. Split and wrapped around conduit, pipe, or other obstructions, as required to maintain

continuity of installation. 6. Repair or replace any break or tear of the insulation as recommended by the insulation

Manufacturer. 7. Maintain clearances at heat producing devices such as recessed lighting fixtures, ballasts

and HVAC equipment in accord with ANSI C1, and National Electrical Code recommendations.

3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Insulation system components which are dislodged, damaged, expanded, broken, penetrated, or crushed by subsequent installation or construction activities shall be immediately replaced with undamaged material in compliance with the Specifications and properly protected as specified.

B. Building insulation which has become wet, damaged, or deteriorated shall be promptly removed

from the Site and replaced with materials meeting the requirements of this Specification. C. Only the original installer shall repair or replace deteriorated or defective insulation Work. D. Clean-up and remove all scraps and unused insulation materials upon completion of the Work of

this Section. 3.06 PROTECTION



A. All components of the Work shall be protected from detrimental weather conditions and

construction damage until Work is completed and accepted by the Owner.



B. Do not allow construction traffic which is not associated with the installation of building insulation in the area of Work. Protect the area from access by other installers and contractors until the Work of this Section has been incorporated into finished construction systems.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install firestopping, including:

1. Through-penetration firestops and smokestops for fire-rated partition and floor

assemblies, both blank (empty) and those accommodating penetrating items, such as, but not necessarily limited to cable trays, electrical signal cables, conduit, pipes, and ducts.

2. Membrane penetration protection for fire-rated partitions. 3. Construction Gap Firestops: a. Construction joint firestops with partitions, floors, or the intersection of floors to

exterior walls, or the intersection of top of partitions to ceilings. b. Top of partition firestopping in fire-rated partitions. c. Top of partition and construction joint smokestopping in smoke partitions. 4. Intumescent compressible joint filler, designed to prevent the spread of fire through

openings between building components. 5. Accessories as required to provide a complete firestopping system. 6. Specific conditions requiring firestopping may not be fully detailed on the Drawings.

Where a specific firestop system is not indicated on Drawings, the subcontractor shall include proposed system designs in submittals.

7. Design and engineering judgements for nonstandard applications where fire tests and/or

approved systems do not exist. 8. Provide Firestop design documentation for review by the Building Code official.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with all of the other Specification Sections and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for firestopping.

B. In the event of conflict regarding firestopping requirements between this Section and any other

section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.

C. Fire-resistance ratings and locations for Project are included on Code Plan Drawing A-2.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a schedule of through-penetrations which indicates the firestop system to be utilized for each different firestopping applications.

1. Schedule shall indicate construction of the wall or floor assembly; size, number, and

material of penetrating items; firestop system designation; required F-rating and T-rating; UL-listed system number; remarks where applicable.

B. Submit complete list of all firestop systems to be utilized, corresponding to system designations

specified herein.

1. Include all of the individual materials required for each complete system. 2. Approved Installer: Provide document from manufacturer that recognizes the installer as

qualified and approved to install the manufacturer’s firestopping materials. 3. Submit a sample of the firestopping schedule format for the approval of the Construction

Manager and code official prior to submitting the actual schedule. a. Schedule shall indicate construction of the wall or floor assembly; size, number, and

material of penetrating items; firestop system designation; required F-rating and T-rating; UL-listed system number; remarks where applicable.

b. Approved testing agency’s standard details of Manufacturer’s tested firestopping

systems in format acceptable to code official.

C. Provide the following within 2 weeks of contract award:

1. Submit a firestopping schedule which indicates the firestop system to be utilized for each different firestopping application.

2. Submit documentation of UL or FM classification for each material and system to be

utilized. Include certification that such listings are current and subject to followup service inspection by listing body.

3. Submit copies of Manufacturer’s product data, material safety data sheets, standard

details, and installation instructions for fire-rated firestop assemblies.

D. Submit documentation of UL classification or approved third party testing for each material and system to be utilized. Include certification that such listings are current and subject to follow-up service inspection by listing body.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit detail drawings of any firestopping application for which there is no

tested and rated system. Shop drawings shall give all pertinent information of installation method proposed, together with all required dimensions for the proper fitting around other work and materials, together with all special conditions as may be required to complete installation.



F. Submit copies of Manufacturer’s product data, specifications, recommendations, standard details and installation instructions for fire-rated firestop assemblies.



1. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Building Construction and

Materials 3. ASTM E814 – Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

B. Factory Mutual (FM)

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code

(IBC), 2009 Edition

F. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of the bid opening shall apply.


A. Installer: Company specializing in installing of fire rated and classified firestopping systems with minimum of 3 years documented experience and approved by material Manufacturer.

B. All materials and components shall be the approved products of one Manufacturer.

C. Mockup: Provide mockup representative of finished work. Replace unsatisfactory work as

directed. Approved mockup will be used as standard for judging acceptability of work on project. Mockup, if approved, may be incorporated as part of final construction.

1. Provide mockup for each firestop system. 2. Install sample installation in the present of the materials Manufacturer and by Owner’s

representative, not less than one week in advance of start of work. 3. Mockup shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and shall be

representative of installations to be achieved throughout the project. Mockup not meeting the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced with one that does.



4. Installations not comparable to the mockup will be subject to rejection and shall be replaced at Subcontractor’s expense.

D. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to start of work that involves cutting penetrations, conduct a

meeting with installers of such work to identify fire and smoke barriers and required configurations of penetrations. Discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching.


A. Conspicuously mark “REJECTED” on materials that have been damaged and remove from site.

B. Store in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written recommendations. C. Install firestop materials before expiration of material shelf life. 1.07 DEFINITIONS

A. “Through-Penetration Firestop” is a material, device, or construction installed to resist, for a prescribed time period, the passage of flame, heat, and hot gases through openings which penetrate the entire fire-resistive assembly in order to accommodate cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes, or similar items.

B. “F Rating” is the time period that a through-penetration fire block limits the spread of fire,

flame, and hot gases through the fire-block assembly, including penetrating elements, when tested in accordance with the time-temperature curve defined in ASTM E119, fire tests of building construction and materials.

C. “T Rating” is the time period that a through-penetration fire block limits temperature rise

through the fire-block assembly, including penetrating elements, when tested in accordance with the time-temperature curve defined in ASTM E119, fire tests of building construction and materials.

D. Membrane Penetration: Penetrations in a fire-rated partition or floor that breaches only one

side of the barrier.

E. Construction Gaps: Continuous joint or opening, whether static or dynamic, such as where the top of a wall meets underside of a floor, wall-to-wall joints, floor-edge-to-floor-edge joints, floor-edge-to-exterior-wall joints, or other linear breach in a rated barrier.

1.08 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Provide complete through-penetration firestopping systems which have been tested and

approved by UL or FM, or third-party testing agency approved by the Engineer, and are listed under their label service.

B. Firestopping Materials and Systems



1. Shall be capable of closing or filling through-penetrations created by the following: a. The burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation

materials. b. Deflection of sheet metal electrical and mechanical ductwork due to thermal

expansion. 2. Shall be asbestos free and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of

hazardous solvents. 3. Shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact

surfaces. 4. Shall be moisture resistant and may not dissolve in water after curing. C. Construction Gap Firestops: Where movement across gap is anticipated, firestopping system

shall comply with ASTM E119 or UL 2079.

D. Through-Penetration Firestop Ratings 1. Comply with F- and T-ratings as required by local building codes, code official, and as

tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of project conditions.

2. The F-rating shall not apply to all through-penetration firestops and shall not be less than

the required fire-resistive rating of the assembly penetrated, except as specified. 3. The T-rating shall apply to through-penetration firestop locations as specified and shall

not be less than the required fire-resistance rating of the assembly penetrated. a. R-rating shall apply to floor penetration firestops that protect larger than 4-inches

nominal pipe or 15 square inches in overall cross-sectional areas that are not contained within a wall at the point where they penetrate the floor.

b. T-rating shall apply to wall penetration firestops that protect larger than 4-inches

nominal pipe or 15 square inches in overall cross-sectional area, and are below any ceiling. T-rating shall also apply to penetration firestops above corridor ceilings where penetrations are larger than the size indicated herein.

4. The F-rating and T-rating for penetrations through 4-hour fire-resistance rated walls shall

be not less than 3 hours. E. Surface Burning: Firestop materials shall be classified as Class A tested in accordance with

ASTM E84, flamespread maximum 25, and smoke developed maximum 450. F. Construction Gap Firestops: Gaps that may experience movement shall comply with ASTM

E119 or UL 2079.



G. Membrane Penetrations: Comply with the applicable Building Code. H. Firestopping Color: Where applicable, provide ‘Red’ integrally colored firestopping systems

for all Work under this Section to ensure that all materials can be easily identified by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Painting any firestopping materials to provide this finished ‘Red’ color is not acceptable.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Submit Manufacturer’s standard written warranty agreeing to repair or replace components which appear to have failed in general durability or any other form of apparent deterioration (excluding inherent qualities and limitations clearly specified in the Manufacturer’s data which was submitted).

B. Complete installation shall be warranted jointly and severally, on a single document, by the

materials Manufacturer and the Contractor, against defects of materials and workmanship, as defined on the warranty.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with local codes and regulations, where such codes and regulations are more stringent than requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified in these specifications.

B. The firestopping subcontractor shall provide firestopping and smokestopping design

documentation for fire-resistance tested assemblies, as well as for nonstandard conditions for which no approved tests exist for code official review.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL

A. Apply firestopping materials only when the temperature of surfaces to be filled and surrounding air temperatures comply with the Manufacturer’s printed instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. 3M Corporation, St. Paul, MN, USA.

B. Owens-Corning, Toldedo, OH, USA.

C. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL, USA.

D. Hilti Corporation, Tulsa, OK, USA.

E. Specified Technologies, Incorporated, Somerville, NJ, USA.

F. Tremco Incorporated, Beachwood, OH, USA. 2.02 MATERIALS



A. Firestop Material Type 1: Mortar Seal

1. Water-based mortar capable of expanding a minimum of 3 percent by volume. a. Density: 35 to 38 pounds per cubic foot. b. Thickness: Minimum of 4-inches, or as indicated on the Drawings, or if not

indicated, as required for specified fire rating. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 and 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Product Standard: KBS Mortar Seal MS 50; International Protective Coatings

Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: a. Wall Penetration: On-side shuttered using Styrofoam panel flush with damming

material to be removed after drying. b. Floor Penetration – Retainers: Galvanized steel securing clips, holding damming

board as recommended by the Manufacturer.

B. Firestop Material Type 2: Mineral Wool

1. Mineral wool safing insulation. 2. Regular color unfaced with galvanized steel safing clips. 3. FS HH-I-521F, Type I. 4. Manufacturers: a. Certainteed. b. Manville. c. Owens-Corning. d. United States Gypsum.

C. Firestop Material Type 3: Firestop Compound

1. Water-based compound, pourable, trowelable, fusible ceramic fire break materials.



a. Thickness: 4-inches minimum, or if not indicated, as required for specified fire rating. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread and smoke developed less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 and 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: Flamesafe FS500 and FS600; International Protective Coatings Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: a. Damming Panel: Use damming board as recommended by the Manufacturer or

Type X gypsum board. b. Retainers: Galvanized steel securing clips, holding damming board as

recommended by the Manufacturer. c. Bulk Ceramic Fiber: Ceramic fiber to dam smaller openings; resists fire and heat up

to 3,000o F.

D. Firestop Material Type 4: Intumescent Bands or Wrap

1. Wrap strip nominal 1/4-inch thick intumescent material faced on one side with aluminum foil supplied in 2-1/2-inch wide strips.

2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 to 4 hours, as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: FS 195; 3M fire protection products. 6. Accessory Materials: Aluminum tape, 28-gauge galvanized steel restricting collar.

E. Firestop Material Type 5: Firestop Putty

1. Moldable putty with one part, intumescent elastomer. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Meets time and temperature exposure of ASTM E119. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products:



a. Fire barrier moldable putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Flamesafe FSP1000 putty, International Protective Coatings Corporation.



F. Firestopping Material Type 6: Firestop Caulking

1. Water-based, single-component, endothermic caulk. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required. 5. Products: Fire Dam 150 Caulk; 3M Fire Protection Products.

G. Firestopping Material Type 7: Heat Expanding Pillows

1. Tightly woven dustfree fiberglass cloth bags, filled with a combination of mineral fiber

incombustible components, water insoluble expansion agents, and special fire retardant activities.

2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: KBS sealbags; International Protective Coatings Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: Wall and floor penetrations use wire mesh bolted to one side of

wall or under side of floor.

H. Firestop Material Type 8: Foam Seal

1. Fire-resistant penetration seal. 2. Medium density, fire-resistant foam retaining stability of high temperatures. 3. ASTM E814, Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., test No. R8196, series as appropriate for

wall or floor fire rating indicated. 4. Products: a. Firestop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corporation. b. CP 25WB, Fire Barrier Caulk. c. FS 195 wrap strips and putty 303, 3M Corporation. d. Metacaulk 950 Firestopping Penetration Sealant, The Rectorseal Company.



I. Firestop Material Type 9: Firestop Sealant

1. Silicon-based, single-component sealant. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread 5 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-resistant rating 1 to 3 hours as required. 5. Products: CLK N/S and CLK S/L, Nelson Firestop Products.

J. Firestop Material Type 10: Pipe Choke System

1. Heavy gauge metal collar, with highly intumescent material. 2. Tested: UL 1429, ASTM E814, ASTM E199. 3. Products: PCS, Nelson Firestopping Products.

K. Firestop Material Type 11: Intumescent Firestop Block

1. Dense, soft and pliable block-shaped foam firestopping material applied to friction fit

within large openings that expands when exposed to heat. 2. Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetration firestop systems. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84-84a. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 4 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: FS 657 Fire Block; Hilti Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: Wall and floor penetrations use wire mesh or stainless steel plate

bolted to one side of wall or underside of floor. Small voids and gaps to be filled with intumescent firestop sealant.

L. Firestop Material Type 12: Intumescent Firestop Sealant

1. High performance, one-part intumescent firestop sealant, which forms a strong, flexible,

noncombustible barrier that expands when exposed to heat. 2. Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetration firestop systems. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84-84a. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 4 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: FS-ONE; Hilti Corporation.



6. Accessory Materials: Mineral wool, backer rod, intumescent firestop block as backing

material and stainless steel sleeve where required for UL classified pipe penetrations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify adjacent materials are clean, dry and ready to receive installation. B. Verify that openings and items passing through them are ready to receive the Work of this

Section.

C. Verify that field dimensions are as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer.

D. Remove incompatible materials which may affect installation.

E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

F. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Use

masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping materials with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without disturbing firestopping system.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Apply firestopping materials in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions and in conformance with UL listing.

B. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve fire rating required.

3.04 THROUGH-PENETRATING

A. Inspect installation including firestopping materials and any damming or support materials to verify integrity of installation.

B. Where system design permits, remove damming or support materials only after it has been

determined that firestopping materials have fully cured or dried.

C. Install any covering materials or finish as per design requirements and the Manufacturer’s written instructions.



D. All firestopping shall be inspected for proper installation, drying, curing, adhesion as

appropriate for the materials and systems being used. Where necessary, repairs shall be made and repaired installations shall be reinspected.

3.05 FIRESAFING INSULATION

A. Size insulation strips to be 1/2-inch to 3/4-inch greater than the measured width of the void or cavity.

B. Impale steel securing clips in insulation approximately midway between top and bottom

surface, approximately 8-inches in from each end.

C. Push insulation strips into the void or cavity until the securing clips are in contact with the top of floor slab. Top of insulation shall be flush with the floor level.

D. Overlap and butt closely all end joints.

E. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier.

3.06 REPAIRS AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Identify damaged, improperly installed or reentered seals for repair or modification. B. Modifications to penetrations shall be accomplished as per the firestop Manufacturer’s written

recommendations.

C. Only materials used in the original seal and designated by the Manufacturer as suitable for a specific repair shall be used for this purpose.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. B. Protect firestopping material throughout the construction period in a clean and properly

protected condition so that each assembly will be without any indication of damage at the time of completion of Work.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07415

METAL ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Standing seam metal roof panel system with curved profile as indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Structural steel framing is included in Division 5.

B. Insulation is included in Section 07231.

C. Metal wall panel system is included in Section 07420.

D. Sheet metal flashing and trim are included in Section 07512.

E. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Metal Roof Panel System: Metal roof panels with concealed attachment and accessories necessary for a complete watertight installation.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 621 – Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM A 755 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products

2. ASTM A 792 – Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process



3. ASTM C 920 – Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

4. ASTM D 2244 – Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

5. ASTM D 4214 – Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films

6. ASTM E 1514 – Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel

7. ASTM E 1592 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof

and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

8. ASTM E 1646 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

9. ASTM E 1680 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems

E. Factory Mutual (FM)

1. ANSI / FMG 4471 – Class 1 Panel Roofs

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1. UL 580 – Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies

H. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of the bid opening shall apply.


A. General: Provide metal roof panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing agency on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.03 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) per ASTM E 1680 at a static-air-pressure difference of 4 lbf/sq. ft. (191.5 Pa).

C. Water Penetration Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 6.4 lbf/sq. ft. (306.4 Pa) when tested per ASTM E 1646.



D. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel system capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, per ASTM based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings.

2. Snow Loads: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel system shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span

4. Concentrated Load Performance: Provide metal roof panel system that can withstand a concentrated load of 250 lbs. applied to a 4 square inches at mid-span and center of the panel halfway between supports without causing deformation, buckling or side lap separation.

E. FMG Listing: Comply with FMG 4471. Provide metal roof panel assembly listed in FMG’s "Approval Guide."

1. Fire and Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

2. Hail Resistance: SH.

F. Wind Uplift Resistance: UL 580 wind uplift rating UL 90.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction.

1. Thermal Cycle test: Provide metal roof panel system that shows no wear when subject to 100,000-cycles of 1-inch movement in the plane of the panel face relative to the clip anchor.


A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal roof panel system from a single Manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved Manufacturer listed in this Section with 5-years minimum experience in the manufacture of similar products wuth successful use in similar applications.

1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:

a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements.

b. Samples of each component.

c. Sample submittal from similar project.



d. Project references: Minimum of 5 installations not less than 5-years old, with

Owner and Engineer contact information.

e. Sample warranty.

2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 "General Requirements."

3. Approved Manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.

C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum 5-years of experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope.


A. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to erection of metal roof panel system, conduct pre-installation meeting at site attended by the Owner’s Representative, Engineer, Manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors.

1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal roof panel system.

2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal roof panel system.

1.08 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work.

1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.

2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal roof panel system installation.

3. Include structural data indicating compliance with performance requirements and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each product specified including sealants and gaskets. Provide representative color charts of the Manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide 12-inch-long section of metal roof panel showing finishes, vertical joint return, and anchoring details. Provide 12-inch-long pieces of trim.

1.09 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements, from a qualified independent testing agency, when requested by Engineer.



B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer’s field supervisor.

C. Manufacturer's warranty: Submit sample warranty.

1.10 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Protect products of metal roof panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping with water resistant paper. Protect painted surfaces with a strippable protective covering before shipping.

1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal roof panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.

2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel system that fail in materials and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Metal Panel Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that rupture or perforate due to corrosion within 20-years from the date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 20-years from the date of Substantial Completion, including:

1. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244.

2. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214.

3. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Model ‘SRS3’ Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel System, as manufactured by CENTRIA Architectural Systems; or approved equal.



2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Face Sheet: Coil-coated, ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Aluminum-Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792, Grade 50B, class AZ50 Galvalume coating designation, and structural quality.

2. Face Sheet: Minimum 0.030 inch / 22 gage nominal uncoated thickness.

3. Surface: Smooth.

2.03 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with 3-inch high vertical ribs at panel edges and evenly spaced raised longitudinal planks, manufactured for sequential installation by attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and engaging edges of adjacent panels and mechanically seaming panel ribs together, sealed with factory-applied sealant.

1. Panel Coverage: 18-inches.

2. Anchor Clips: Stainless steel, 2-piece, 16 ga., movement allowance 3-inches.

2.04 FINISH

A. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish System

1. Custom Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Metallic System: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat containing mica flakes, and a 0.5-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer clear coat, AAMA 621.

B. Colors

1. Exterior Surface: Color ‘9946 - Silversmith’ by CENTRIA, or approved equal.

2. Interior Surface: Manufacturer's standard primer color.

2.05 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES

A. Provide complete metal roof panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fascia, soffits, gutters, downspouts, insulation spacers and miscellaneous flashings. Provide required fasteners, gaskets, closure strips, and sealants. Fabricate and install accessories in accordance with SMACNA Manual.

1. Steel Roof Panel Systems: Comply with ASTM E 1514.

2. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal roof panels.

B. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and other acceptable fasteners recommended by roof panel Manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating.



1. Exposed Screws: Manufacturer's recommended stainless steel screws with bonded neoprene and stainless steel washers, coated to match panel color.

2. Concealed Screws: Manufacturer's recommended corrosion resistant carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating.

C. Panel Sealants

1. Side Lap Sealant: One part, non-skinning, non-drying, synthetic butyl elastomer sealant.

2. Field Applied Unexposed Sealant: Side Laps, end laps, and flashing details: Gun grade, nonskinning, butyl elastomer or polymeric non-skinning butyl tape.

3. Exposed Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; as recommended by metal roof panel Manufacturer, colored to match the roof panel color.

D. Pipe Flashings: Molded EPDM, with metal collar.

E. Snow Guards

1. Provide 2-rail type aluminum snow fence retention system with model ‘S-5!’ clamps for secure and proper attachment to the standing metal roof seams. Snow guards shall be mounted along each edge of the curved metal roof system as indicated on the Drawings or as required for Project.

a. Clamps for snow guard system shall be suitable for proper attachment to metal roof and all clamps used shall not pierce or otherwise damage the metal panels or finish of the standing seam roof system.

2. Include all posts, rod or rail cross members, clamps, couplings, snow clips with rubber feet, setscrews and hardware as recommended by the product Manufacturer for a complete and proper snow fence system.

a. All system components shall be aluminum or stainless steel and shall be suitable

for use on the specified metal standing seam roof system.

3. Should any component that is required for proper function or attachment to the metal roof system be omitted from this specification, it shall be provided on the Project at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Provide ColorGard Powder Coated finish with custom color to match the color of the metal roof panel system.

2.06 SECONDARY METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Framing Components, General: Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G90 (Z180).

1. Hat Channels: 0.053 inch/16 ga. minimum.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine metal roof panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal roof panel installation. Do not install roof panels until panel substrate meets roof panel Manufacturer's requirements.

1. Inspect framing that will support metal roof panel system to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal roof panels.

2. Panel Support Tolerances: Install metal roof panels on substrate within tolerances acceptable to metal roof panel system Manufacturer:

a. Maximum out of plane deviation 1/4-inch in 20-feet.

b. Maximum deviation 1/2-inch over entire roof. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal roof panel system in accordance with approved shop drawings and Manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install metal roof panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install metal roof panels in one piece lengths from the ridge to eave unless otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement.

C. Attach panels to metal framing using recommended clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by the Manufacturer. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners as approved by the Manufacturer.

2. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for any pipe and/or conduit penetrating the roof.

3. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal wall panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by Manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.

1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



3.03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal roof panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install related flashings and sheet metal trim per requirements of Division 07 Section "Coping, Flashing and Trim."

2. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Comply with performance requirements, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and the Manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings.

5. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Snow Guard System: Install system in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and the approved Shop Drawings.


A. Remove temporary protective films when directed by Engineer. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by the metal roof panel Manufacturer.

B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07420

METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Foamed-insulation-core vertical metal wall panel assembly, with related metal trim and accessories.

B. Explosion release panels with pressure release fasteners, aircraft connection cables, related metal trim and accessories.

C. Exposed fastener metal wall panels, with related metal trim and accessories.

D. Concealed fastener metal wall panels at fuel island canopy, with related metal trim and accessories.

E. Secondary metal framing support systems.


A. Masonry is included in Section 04200.

B. Structural steel is included in Section 05120.

C. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500.

D. Expansion control is included in Section 05800.

E. Waterproofing and dampproofing are included in Section 07100.

F. Building insulation is included in Section 07231.

G. Coping, sheet metal flashing and trim is included in Section 07512.

H. Caulking and joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

I. Doors and frames are included in Division 8.

J. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950.

K. Fuel island canopy is included in Section 13120.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)



1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

C. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and

Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products

3. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

4. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus

5. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction

6. ASTM E 84 - Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

7. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen

8. ASTM E 331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

D. Factory Mutual (FM)

1. ANSI/FMG 4880 Standard for Evaluating Insulated Wall & Roof/Ceiling Assemblies

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 68 – Standard on Explosion Protection by Deflagration Venting

2. NFPA 69 – Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual


1. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials



H. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition.

I. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

J. Where reference is made to any of the above, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply, unless otherwise noted.


A. General: Provide metal wall panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing agency on the Manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Insulated Core Metal Wall Panel, Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.03 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) per ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.56 lbf/sq. ft. (100 Pa).

C. Insulated Core Metal Wall Panel, Water Penetration, Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration per ASTM E 331 at a minimum static differential pressure of 10 lbf/sq. ft. (479 Pa).

D. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, per ASTM E 72:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Withstand test pressures of 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures with maximum deflection of 1/180 of the span with no evidence of failure.

3. Secondary Metal Framing: Design secondary metal framing for metal wall panel assembly according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction.

F. Insulated Core Metal Wall Panel, Thermal Performance: Thermal-resistance (R) value indicated, per ASTM C 1363, corrected to 15 mph wind outside and still air inside.


A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal wall panel assemblies and accessories from a single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved Manufacturer listed in this Section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience in the manufacture of similar products used successfully in similar applications.



1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:

a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements.

b. Samples of each component.

c. Sample submittal from similar project.

d. Project references: Minimum of 5 installations not less than 5 years old, with Owner and Engineer contact information.

e. Sample warranty.

2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements.

3. Approved Manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.

C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with a minimum of 5-years documented experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope.

D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Insulated Core Metal Wall Panel, Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide metal wall systems with the following fire-test characteristics determined by indicated test standard as applied by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal wall system panels with the following characteristics when tested per ASTM E 84.

a. Flame spread index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke developed index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Performance of Insulated Wall: Class 1 wall panel per ANSI/FM 4880.


A. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting at site attended by Owner, Engineer, Manufacturer's technical representative, and other trade contractors.

1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal wall panel systems.

2. Coordinate window, door, and other openings and penetrations of metal wall panel systems.




A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer. Include full elevations showing openings and penetrations. Include details of each condition of installation and attachment. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of all required trim and extrusions needed for a complete installation

1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.

2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal wall panel system installation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each product specified including sealants and gaskets. Provide representative color charts of the Manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide 12-inch-long section of metal wall panel showing finishes, vertical joint return, injected core material, and anchoring details. Provide 12-inch-long pieces of each extruded aluminum trim and gaskets.


A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements, from a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer’s field supervisor.

C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample written warranty.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit for project closeout.


A. Protect products of metal wall panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage.

1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal wall panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.

2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction.

3. Shield foam insulated metal wall panels from direct sunlight until installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within 1-year from the date of Substantial Completion.



B. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wall panels that evidence deterioration of finish within 20-years from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: All metal wall panel products shall be manufactured by CENTRIA Architectural Systems; or approved equal.

2.02 FOAMED INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS

A. Materials

1. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet ASTM A 653, Grade 37, G90, structural quality coil coated per ASTM A 755.

2. Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish

a. Custom fluoropolymer Three-Coat Mica System: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat containing mica flakes, and a 0.5-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer clear coat, AAMA 621.

3. Interior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System: 0.2 mil primer with 0.6 mil acrylic color coat.

4. Foamed-Insulation Core: Closed cell, urethane modified polyisocyanurate foam using a non-CFC blowing agent, foamed-in-place type.

a. Density: 2.6 lb/cu. ft. (43.3 kg/cu. m).

b. Shear stress: 20 lbf/sq. in. (138 kPa).

c. Compressive strength: 20 lbf/sq. in. (138 kPa).

d. Tensile strength: 20 lbf/sq. in. (138 kPa).

B. Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels: Factory-foamed vertical wall panel system consisting of an exterior metal face sheet with interior metal liner panel, bonded to factory foamed-in-place core in thermally-separated profile, with no glues or adhesives, and with factory sealed double tongue-and-groove joint, attached to supports using concealed fasteners.

1. Exterior Face Sheet:

a. Metal Thickness: 0.030 inch/22 gage (0.76 mm).

b. Surface: Embossed, striated.

c. Color: #9946 Silver Smith, by CENTRIA.



2. Interior Face Sheet:

a. Thickness: 0.019 inch/26 gage (0.48 mm).

b. Surface: Non-directional embossed, Planked.

c. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Panel Width: 36 inch (914 mm).

4. Panel Thickness and Thermal Resistance (R) Value: 2.75 inch (70 mm), R-20 per ASTM C 1363.

5. Panel Sealant/Vapor Seal: Factory-applied non-curing butyl.

C. Panel Clips: Concealed stainless steel clip configured specifically for metal wall panel profile, engaging face and liner panel edge without compressing panel insulation.

D. Explosion Release Panels: Explosion release panels where shown on Drawings shall consist of insulated metal wall panels fastened to building structural supports using Fabco Vent-All fasteners consisting of minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel screws and special alloy aluminum and vulcanized neoprene or EPDM explosion venting washers to provide panel release of approximately 35- psf. Fastener size and spacing shall be as recommended by Fabco Fastening Systems. All fasteners are to be Factory Mutual (FM) tested and approved.

1. All explosion release panels shall be properly secured to the steel framing system of the building with aircraft restraint cables, approximately 36-inches in length, and appropriate mechanical fasteners, as required to prevent the designated wall panels from becoming flying projectiles.

2. Design, fabrication and the installation of the explosion release panels shall comply with all of the applicable requirements of NFPA Standard 69, Building Code and Fire Code.

2.03 EXPOSED FASTENER PROFILE METAL WALL PANELS

A. Materials

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Face Sheet: Coil-coated, ASTM A 755.

a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (Class Z275), structural steel quality.

b. Face Sheet: Minimum 0.036 inch/20 gage (0.91 mm) nominal uncoated thickness.

c. Surface: Smooth.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish System:

a. Custom fluoropolymer Three-Coat Mica System: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat containing mica flakes, and a 0.5-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer clear coat, AAMA 621.



3. Color:

a. Exterior Surface: #9946 Silversmith, by CENTRIA

b. Interior Surface: Manufacturer's standard primer color.

B. Metal Wall Panels, General: Factory-formed, Exposed fastener panels with interconnecting side joints, fastened to supports with exposed fasteners, with field-applied sealants in side laps when required to meet performance requirements.

1. Symmetrical deep rib profile with lap joint:

a. Basis of Design Product: CENTRIA, Super-Rib.

b. Panel Coverage: 24 inches (610 mm).

c. Panel Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

d. Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) on center.

2.04 CONCEALED FASTENER METAL WALL PANELS

A. Materials

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Face Sheet: Coil-coated, ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Class Z275), structural steel quality.

b. Face Sheet: Minimum 0.036 inch/20 gage (0.91 mm) nominal uncoated thickness.

c. Surface: Smooth.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish System:

a. Custom fluoropolymer Three-Coat Mica System: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat containing metal flakes, and a 0.5-mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer clear coat, AAMA 621.

3. Color:

a. Exterior Surface: #9946 Silversmith, by CENTRIA.

b. Interior Surface: Manufacturer's standard primer color.

B. Metal Wall Panels, General: Factory-formed, concealed fastener panels with interconnecting side joints, fastened to supports with concealed fasteners, with factory-applied sealant in side laps.

1. Four-rib profile with recessed flat pan between ribs and concealed extended fastener leg:



a. Basis of Design Product: CENTRIA, CS-660E.

b. Panel Coverage: 16 inches (406 mm).

c. Panel Height: 0.875 inch (22 mm).

C. Concealed Clips: Galvanized steel, 0.051 inch/16 ga. (1.29 mm) thick, designed to allow unimpeded thermal movement of panel and configured to hold panel minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) from substrate.

2.05 METAL WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Wall Panel Accessories, General: Provide complete metal wall panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, sills, inside and outside corners, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide manufacturer's factory-formed clips, shims, flashings, gaskets, lap tapes, closure strips, and caps for a complete installation. Fabricate and install accessories in accordance with SMACNA Manual.

B. Formed Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and color of metal wall panel face sheets.

C. Extrusion Trim: Provide manufacturer-provided extruded trim for the following locations and as indicated on Drawings:

1. Base trim.

2. Coping.

3. Panel installation perimeter.

4. Opening perimeters.

D. Sealants: Type recommended by metal wall panel system Manufacturer for application, meeting requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and other acceptable fasteners recommended by the panel Manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine metal wall panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal wall panels.

B. Framing: Inspect framing that will support metal wall panels to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal wall panels.



C. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to insulated metal wall panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following:

1. 3/8-inch in any 20-feet in any direction.

2. 3/4-inch over any single wall plane.

D. Openings: Verify that door, window, louver and any other openings or equipment penetrations match the layout shown on the approved shop drawings.

E. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal wall panel system installation.

3.02 METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panel system in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement

B. Attach panels to metal framing using recommended clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as approved by Manufacturer.

2. Fasten metal wall panels to supports with concealed clips at each joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by the Manufacturer. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal wall panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by the Manufacturer.

C. Joint Sealers: Install joint fillers and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.

1. Seal panel end utilizing 2 beads of non-curing butyl; apply continuously without gaps to complete panel system air barrier.

2. Seal metal wall panel end laps to supports or back-up flashing sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by the metal wall panel Manufacturer.

3. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



3.03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install related flashings and sheet metal trim per requirements of Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

2. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Comply with performance requirements and the Manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on the approved shop drawings.

5. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.


A. Remove temporary protective films. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by the metal wall panel Manufacturer.

B. Clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. Maintain in a clean condition throughout the construction process.

C. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired by field repair.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07512 COPING, FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, equipment, plant, and incidentals to complete all sheet metal coping, flashing and trim work as specified herein for a complete and proper roof installation. This Section covers incidental work required for the installation of the membrane roofing system, metal roofing system, parapet coping, flashing, counter flashing, gutters, downspouts, trim and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The following sections specify work to be done by the Contractor to complete work required in Contract Documents related to work required in this Section. The work of all sections is to be executed in an integrated manner with the total completed work. Where there is a conflict between the Specifications and the drawn details of the roofing system, the requirements of the Manufacturer’s Guaranteed / Warranted roof system, as approved by the Engineer, shall govern. In all instances, the highest quality of material and work shall be installed on the Project.

B. Concrete work is included in Division 3.

C. Architectural precast concrete is included in Section 03450.

D. Masonry is included in Section 04200.

E. Metal roof deck is included in Division 5.

F. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

G. Waterproofing and dampproofing are included in Section 07100.

H. Metal roofing system is included in Section 07415.

I. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. J. Membrane roofing is included in Section 07540.

K. Roof accessories are included in Section 07720.

L. Joint sealers are included in Section 07901.

M. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950.

N. Fuel island canopy is included in Section 13120.

O. Lightning protection system is included in Division 16.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including Manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and

general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop drawings of all coping and metal fabrications specifically made for this project showing

layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. All fastenings and connections to adjacent work shall be detailed. Shop drawings shall show size and location of nailers required to secure the work.

D. Submit physical samples of coping, sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the

specified finish. Submittals shall include at least the following:

1. 12-inch long counter-flashing and reglet samples and a 12-inch long coping sample finished as specified herein and including all accessories, fasteners and other appurtenances.

2. Shop drawings must meet all the requirements of Section 01300.

3. Additional samples of other proposed products such as flashing, fasteners, roof canopy

gutters and downspouts, shall be made available, if requested by the Engineer.

E. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of two or more units showing the full range of variations expected.

1. 12-inch long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide

complete with specified factory finish.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 611 – Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum

2. AAMA 620 – Voluntary Specification High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum

3. AAMA 621 – Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates




1. ASTM A153 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

2. ASTM A240 – Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications



5. ASTM A755 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products

6. ASTM A792 – Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

7. ASTM B32 – Specification for Solder Metal

8. ASTM B209 – Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

9. ASTM D226 – Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

10. ASTM D1187 – Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal

11. ASTM D1970 – Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection


1. Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

D. Factory Mutual (FM) Global

1. FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 – Perimeter Flashing

E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

F. National Roofing Contractor’s Association (NRCA) – Roofing and waterproofing manual.

G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

H. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition

I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.




A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges and copings to comply with recommendations of FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the appropriate wind zone based on project location.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. The sheet metal flashing and trim used with the roof system shall be acceptable to the Manufacturer of the roof system for the specific project installation in detail, part and whole.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.

5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.


A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.




A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact.

B. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from environment and ongoing construction operations. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. Any damaged material shall be rejected and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner

C. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

E. Inspect job conditions for defects that would prevent any satisfactory installation of work as specified.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide two year warranty covering materials and installation of sheet metal and that the system

shall be watertight and weatherproof in accordance with provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications.

B. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner or

Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

1.10 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

A. Where metal abuts or joins adjacent dissimilar materials, execute juncture to prevent electrolysis between the two materials.


A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. All materials shall meet the standards set forth for the specific application with the membrane roof system to be employed in the roofing application as follows:

1. All metals, materials, adhesives, fastenings, shapes and coatings of flashing and trim shall

be compatible with the materials of the roof membrane system in a manner such as not to impact negatively upon the roof system chemically or mechanically.

2. All materials shall be allowable for the roof system certification against failure under FM I-

90, and UL Class “A”.



C. Where sheet metal is required and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide the highest quality and gauge commensurate with the referenced standards.

2.02 SHEET METALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below:

1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.050-inch, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing to both sides, forming a composite aluminum sheet with reflective luster.

3. Surface: Smooth and flat.

B. Stainless Steel: Type recommended by producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated with not less than the strength and durability designated below:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Finish: Number 4 finish with polished directional satin.

3. Surface: Smooth and flat.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by the Manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. Same metal as metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal Manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by the stainless-steel sheet Manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, non-toxic, non-staining tape 1/2-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.



E. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, non-corrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum Manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

I. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal Manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.

J. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

L. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based, of the consistency required for application.

2.04 MANUFACTURED FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of the same metal as reglet.

1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation.

b. Hickman, W. P. Company.

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

d. Or equal.

3. Material: Stainless Steel, 0.019-inch thick

4. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.



5. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

6. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

7. Accessories: a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure

flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

8. Finish: Mill with Manufacturer’s standard coating.

2.05 FABRICATION – GENERAL

A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10-feet with no joints allowed within 24-inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).



F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive Stainless Steel.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49] for application on project.

H. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

I. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

J. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate non-moving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

K. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

L. Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by the Manufacturer.

2.06 COPING SYSTEM

A. Copings, as shown on the Drawings, shall be 0.125-inch smooth 5005-H34 alloy aluminum in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-feet-long sections, with widths as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.

2. Coping expansion joint shall include a concealer splice plate as indicated on the Drawings, or as recommended by Manufacturer, to allow up to 2-inches of movement.

3. Coping shall have 12-inch face with 6-inch back, suitable for building wall thicknesses as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Coping shall be ‘Permasnap Plus’ with custom Kynar finish, as manufactured by the W.P Hickman Company; or approved equal.

2.07 COUNTERFLASHING

A. Counterflashing shall be Springlok or Snap-tite RC-Z by MM Systems Corporation, or equal. Flashing system type MA by Fry Reglet; or approved equal. Flashings and reglet shall be 0.25-inch smooth aluminum. Reglet shall have 2-inch factory formed end lap. Flashing shall have a 3-inch lap. Spring lock pieces shall be able to be removed without deforming flashing.



2.08 GUTTERS

A. Gutter assemblies at roof systems indicated on the Drawings, shall be factory welded from 0.050-inch thick aluminum with custom Kynar finish, as manufactured by W.P. Hickman Company; or approved equal.

1. The color for all gutter systems shall be custom to match the adjacent roof system as

selected by the Engineer. 2. The gutters shall have a rectangular profile with an overall size of 5-inches wide by 4-

inches high, as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Each gutter shall include matching support straps as required for attachment to the

underside of roof canopy. Firmly attach the completed gutter assembly and seal watertight per the Manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings.

4. Fabricate to cross section selected by Engineer, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and

other accessories as required for a complete installation. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers and gutter accessories from the same metal as gutters.

2.09 DOWNSPOUTS

A. Downspout assemblies at the various roof systems indicated on the Drawings, shall be factory welded from 0.050-inch thick aluminum with custom Kynar finish, as manufactured by W.P. Hickman Company; or approved equal.

1. The color for all downspouts shall be custom to match the adjacent roof system or masonry

wall as selected by the Engineer. 2. The downspouts shall have a corrugated rectangular profile with an overall size of 3-inches

wide by 2-inches deep, as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Each downspout shall include aluminum strainer, matching mitered elbows (in profile and

color) and wall support straps. Attach the downspout assembly to the above gutter assembly and seal watertight per the Manufacturer’s instructions and recommended details.

4. Fabricate downspouts and associated support straps in the minimum sizes and locations

recommended by SMACNA.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin Manufacturers' instructions.



a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system

consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

b. Custom Color: As selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated.

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.



B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat the back side of any uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, masonry or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet with no joints allowed within 24-inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4-inch for wood screws. Fasteners at metal decking shall not be less than recommended by fastener Manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

G. All sheet metal flashing, coping and trim shall be installed to meet the requirements for issuance by the roof system Manufacturer for the 20 year Guarantee/Warranty.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF COPING

A. Coping shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications and instructions as required to provide a secure and waterproof coping system.

B. Fasten and secure coping hold down clip onto top of parapet wall lintel.

C. Place metal formed shim on top of anchor plate the length of the parapet wall.

D. Install joint cover on top of firmed shims spaced at 10-feet on center to provide a seal at the

joints between coping lengths.



E. Place a continuous strip of sealant on both sides of the joint cover to prevent any water from seeping into the joints.

F. Lay the aluminum coping over the formed shims joining successive lengths at the joint covers

and shaping the sides of the coping over the anchor plate to hold down clips. G. Adjust and modify new coping to accommodate new lightning protection system along roof

parapets as indicated on the Electrical Drawings and as described in Division 16. Coordinate specific locations and provide all necessary attachment devices and roof repair work as required for installation of this system.

3.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install aluminum gutters and downspouts to underside of steel entrance canopies as indicated on the Drawings. Gutter and downspout assemblies shall be watertight and integral with roof canopy and flashing as shown and as detailed on final shop drawings. Care shall be exercised to prevent the structural steel from interfering with proper roof drainage.

B. Seal the gutter and downspout along edge of roof system in accordance with the Manufacturer’s

recommended details.

C. Provide fasteners that are suitable for the proper and secure attachment of gutters and downspouts to the metal roof system and exterior masonry walls.

D. Install gutters and downspouts as shown on the Drawings and conforming to the approved shop drawings.

3.05 METAL FLASHING WORK

A. Surfaces to be covered with metal shall be free from defects of every description and clean of dirt and other foreign matter before sheet metal work is started.

B. Provide flashings as indicated on the Drawings and in all locations where the use of flashing may

reasonably be inferred as necessary to make the work of this Section complete in its intent to provide leak-proof conditions throughout.

C. Seams, unless otherwise specified or detailed, shall be flat locked and soldered. Tinning and

soldering shall be done slowly with well-heated metal. Pre-tin all metal in areas to be soldered. When soldering, ample solder shall be used so that the seam shall show at least 1-inch of evenly flowed solder. A liberal amount of flux shall be brushed into the seam.

D. Retainer piece of spring lock flashing shall be set in masonry under fabric through-wall flashing.

Solder together at metal through-wall flashing as specified above. Coordinate work with work of Sections 04200 and 07100. The counter flashing over the roof base flashing shall be separately installed spring lock pieces, lap jointed 6-inches minimum and installed as shown. Provide fabricated inside corner pieces soldered watertight.

E. Fabricate and install flashing in accordance with practices of SMACNA. Provide joints ready for

caulking where required.



F. Interlocking type expansion joints as approved shall be placed at 25-feet maximum along continuous flashing runs.

G. Metal work when completed shall be thoroughly cleaned. Excess flux shall be neutralized by

washing with a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda. After cleaning, metal shall be flushed with clean water.

H. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

I. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of [snap-in installation and sealant.

J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate the roof.

K. Wall Flashing: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture where indicated on the Drawings and as required by SMACNA recommendations. Coordinate the installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

3.06 DISSIMILAR METALS PROTECTION

A. Separate aluminum or copper from contact with cementitious materials and other metals (except stainless steel and/or zinc) with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, liquid neoprene, or chromate gasketing or priming.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in the Manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



3.08 ROOFING MEMBRANE SPRAY TEST

A. Upon request of the Owner or Engineer, demonstrate by hose or standing water that flashings and sheet metal work are completely watertight and weathertight. All roof areas shall be given a 24-hour, water tightness test using an approved sprinkler system to completely wet roofing and flashing as approved. Repairs if required shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. In freezing weather, an 8-hour daytime test shall be sufficient with the written approval of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07540 MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install single ply, fully-

adhered Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) roofing membrane system over mechanically fastened insulation and protection cover board, with base flashing, cap flashing, expansion joints, walkway pads, and appurtenances, all as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The entire roofing system shall be installed by a licensed, authorized roofing contractor of the

system Manufacturer providing the warranty. The roofing contractor shall be trained, fully knowledgeable, and qualified to install the system in strict accordance with the system Manufacturer's details, specification and recommendations.

C. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the

installation of the roofing including flashings, roof related insulation, roof related metalwork and accessories per the contract drawings in accordance with the most current specifications and details of the roofing system Manufacturer.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 – General Requirements of these Specifications.

B. Metal roof deck is included in Section 05310. C. Expansion control is included in Section 05800. D. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. E. Metal roofing system is included in Section 07415. F. Coping, flashing, trim, and accessories are included in Section 07512. G. Roof accessories are included in Section 07720. H. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901. I. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950. J. Flashings for pipes, ducts, conduit, and roof penetrations are included in Divisions 15 and 16. K. Electrical work and lightning protection are included in Division 16.



L. Structural design criteria and loads are included on Drawing S-1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall conform to the provisions of the Section 01300 – Submittal of Division 1 –

General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing roof layout, details of construction and

installation for insulation with fastener layout, membrane, flashings, pourable sealer and other sealants and detailed technical data on membrane and flashing materials, insulation, protection board, expansion joints, walkway pads, and all other components proposed. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Representative samples of membrane, through-wall flashing, insulation, and fasteners

proposed and a full cross-section sample of proposed metal coping and proposed metal flashing/reglet system with accessories showing a joint with concealed splice plate, a corner and proposed finish.

2. Provide, with shop drawings, certification that the roofer who will execute the work is an

authorized applicator of the roofing system proposed. 3. Sample of roofing system’s Manufacturer’s Warranty. 4. Submit a letter of certification from the roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing

contractor is an authorized installer of the prescribed roofing material in good standing. C. Manufacturer's Data: Specifications and recommended installation instructions and other data

needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements when approved by the Owner or the Engineer, such data will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.

D. Applicator: Submit letter to the Owner or the Engineer stating that each material complies with

the Specifications. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM B32 – Standard Specification for Solder Metal 2. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 3. ASTM C165 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal

Insulation 4. ASTM C209 – Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board 5. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus



6. ASTM C755 – Standard Practice for Selection of Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation 7. ASTM D297 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products-Chemical Analysis 8. ASTM D412 – Standard Test Methods for Valcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers

and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

9. ASTM D573 – Standard Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in an Air Oven 10. ASTM D624 – Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized

Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers 11. ASTM D746 – Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and

Elastomers by Impact 12. ASTM D816 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Cements 13. ASTM D1149 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration-Surface Ozone Cracking

in a Chamber 14. ASTM D1622 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics 15. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness 16. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

B. Factory Mutual (FM)

1. FM 4450 – Class I Insulated Steel Deck Roofs 2. FM 1-28S – Wind Uplift Pressures on Roofs

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 1256 – UL Standard for Safety Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions

D. Steel Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition F. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition

G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing

system identical to that used for this Project.



B. The roofing material Manufacturer must have at least twenty (20) years of experience as a

commercial roofing material supplier. C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane

roofing system Manufacturer to install the Manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive Manufacturer's special warranty. Installer must submit written documentation from Manufacturer validating the firm’s approval, authorization, or license by Manufacturer.

D. The roofing contractor must have a minimum of five (5) years experience installing the type of

roof system specified for this project and be able to provide evidence of having installed this type of roof system for each of those five (5) years if requested.

E. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must strictly comply with the

Manufacturer’s current specifications and details. F. Source Limitations: Obtain all components including roof insulation, protection cover board,

membrane adhesive and mechanical fasteners from the same Manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing Manufacturer.

G. Pre-Installation Roofing Conference: Conduct roofing conference at the Project Site.

1. Well in advance of commencement of roofing operations but after representative new

roofing substrate has been constructed and prepared for roofing, a pre-installation roofing conference shall be held to inspect the substrate. All parties having an interest in the roofing or work on the roofs, including installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, such as installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment, shall be informed of the conference by the Contractor. Any discussions shall be documented and dispersed to those interested parties including, but not limited to, the Engineer and Owner.

2. Prior to the roofing conference, the roofing contractor shall visit the site to become familiar

with the actual project conditions and shall confirm the dimensions of the roof area covered by this specification.

3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including the

Manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and

fastening. 6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment

curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.



9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

H. The flashing of miscellaneous roof penetrations, such as those required by HVAC, Plumbing or

Electrical, shall be the responsibility of the Prime Contractor performing the Work in that specific section. The roofing work shall be performed by the Roofing Contractor on the Project at the expense of the Prime Contractor that has responsibility for the items that require flashing.


A. Delivery: Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with Manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Storage: Store all materials in an enclosed, dry and clean space on raised platforms protected

against damage by weather and direct sun rays recommended by the Manufacturer or where directed by the Owner or the Engineer.

1. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected

location and within the temperature range required by roofing system Manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

2. Store all solvent based materials in a well ventilated area away from flames and sparks and

keep protected from the elements. C. Restore adhesives, sealants, primers and caulks to a service temperature of 60°F to 80°F prior to

installation (when applicable). D. Remove and replace any material found to be damaged before installation of the roof system at

no expense to the Owner. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store all materials in a dry location. Comply with the roof insulation Manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

F. Protect adjacent building surfaces and landscaping from damage caused by roofing operations

and material loading. G. Store all rooftop roofing materials on pallets or bunking off the roof deck and keep protected

from exposure to inclement weather by covering with breathable, opaque tarps properly secured or weighted to prevent dislodgement by wind.

H. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.




A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to Manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide roof Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which roof Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of the membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, adhesive, roof insulation, protection

cover boards, mechanical fasteners, roof pavers, roofing accessories and other components of membrane roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: Furnish Manufacturer’s written warranty that extends twenty (20) years

minimum from the date of Substantial Completion. 3. This warranty shall be provided to the Owner upon completion of the membrane system.

The roof Warranty shall be in written form, fully executed by the membrane Manufacturer (Warrantor).

4. In the event the roof fails to perform as specified, the Warrantor shall make, at his/her

expense, repairs to the roof to enable it to perform as warranted.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit written warranty, signed by the Contractor and the Roofing Installer, stating that roofing membranes, flashings, counterflashings, reglets, casings and other elements essential to watertightness of roof will continue to be watertight for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Furnish written warranty that extends two (2) years minimum from date

of Substantial Completion. 2. Coverage: Cover the Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing

system. Warranty shall cover all leaks caused by any material defects and/or installation workmanship.

3. Contractor to deliver the Warranty to the Engineer prior to the Owner's final acceptance of

the work. 1.09 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS, REPRESENTATION AND INSPECTION

A. The service of a representative of the membrane and of the insulation Manufacturers shall be

provided as required for instruction in preparation and application of roofing materials. The Manufacturers shall supply such service and inspection as required to produce the warranted roofing system.




A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand uplift

pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by the membrane roofing Manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have

been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Bus Maintenance Building (Phase 1): a. Corner Uplift Pressure: –16 psf b. Edge / Perimeter Uplift Pressure: –16 psf c. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: –17 psf 2. Bus Storage Building (Phase 1 and 2): a. Corner Uplift Pressure: –22 psf b. Edge / Perimeter Uplift Pressure: –22 psf c. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: –18 psf

D. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.


A. Provide fully-adhered, fabric-reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) membrane roofing

system with flashing materials and components as specified below. B. The materials, system and installation shall be as required to produce a complete and an

acceptable FM Class 1, I-90 roof system. C. TPO Sheets shall be internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible, and fabric backed

(ASTM D 6878).



D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ultra-Ply TPO XR 115, as manufactured by Firestone Building Products Company; equal by Carlisle SynTec Systems Incorporated; GAF Materials Corporation; or approved equal.

2.02 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING AND FLASHING MEMBRANE

A. Description: White colored, Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing (TPO) sheet membrane system,

manufactured to conform with the following physical properties: PROPERTY: TEST METHOD: CHARACTERISTIC:

Color (Face) N/A White Thickness, Nominal ASTM D-751 0.060” Thickness Over Scrim ASTM D-7635 0.021”

Breaking Strength ASTM D-751 390 lbf (1,735 N) Elongation of Reinforcement Break ASTM D-751 25% Tearing Strength ASTM D-751 120 lbf (534 N) Brittleness Point ASTM D-2137 -40oF (-40oC) Ozone Resistance ASTM D-1149 PASS (No Cracks)

PROPERTIES (AFTER HEAT AGING):

Breaking Strength ASTM D-751 > 90% Elongation at Break ASTM D-751 > 90% Tearing Strength ASTM D-751 > 60% Weight of Change ASTM D-471 < 1% (change in mass)

Linear Dimension Change ASTM D-1204 < 0.1% (6 hrs @ 158oF)

Water Absorption ASTM D-471 < 3%

Weather Resistance: ASTM G-155 > 20,160 kJ/m²

Puncture Resistance ASTM FTM-101C Pass (Method 2031)

Dynamic Puncture Resistance ASTM D-5635 Pass (65 J) Static Puncture Resistance ASTM D-5602 Pass (25 kg)



RADIATIVE PROPERTIES (WHITE COLOR):

Solar Reflectance CRRC (Initial / 3-Year) 0.79 / 0.69 ASTM E-903 0.81

Thermal Emittance CRRC (Initial / 3-Year) 0.78 / 0.81 ASTM E-408 0.95 Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) CRRC (Initial / 3-Year) 96 / 82 ASTM E-1980 102

2.03 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system Manufacturer, and compatible with the TPO membrane, as required to provide a complete, proper and watertight roof system installation.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction. 2. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet

flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. 3. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, as required for application. 4. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. 5. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum

bars, approximately 1-inch by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors as required for application.

6. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1-inch wide by 0.05-inch thick, pre-punched.

7. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet

flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories

2.04 RIGID ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane

roofing Manufacturer, selected from Manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.

B. Rigid insulation shall be HCFC-free and shall comply with FM 4450 or UL 1256 tests for use

directly over steel roof deck without a thermal barrier. C. Provide Polyisocyanurate rigid insulation with integral facing material both sides, approved for

use under TPO roofing, Model ‘ISO 95+ GL’ as manufactured by Firestone Building Products; or approved equal. Provide insulation in both flat and tapered profiles as required for the Project.



D. Provide a minimum insulation thickness of 4-inches using two layers, 2-inches minimum per

layer, as shown on Drawings. Insulation shall be installed over sloped metal roof deck to achieve 1/4-inch per foot minimum drainage requirements.

1. Provide additional layers of tapered insulation as required to create a 1/4-inch per foot

minimum slope for counterslopes and crickets. 2. Provide tapered perlite edge strip cut and installed as required at crickets located up-slope

of roof accessories to ensure adequate drainage. E. Insulation shall comply with all applicable Building Code, FM and UL requirements. Insulation

shall have the following minimum properties: 1. Thermal Value: Minimum R-Value of 6.0 per inch (ASTM C 518)

2. Density: 2.0 lbs. /cu. ft. (ASTM D 1622) 3. Compressive strength: 20.0 psi (ASTM C165 / D 1621) 4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: < 1.0 Perm Rating (ASTM E 96) 5. Water Absorption: < 1.0-Percent by volume (ASTM C 209) 6. Dimensional Stability: < 2.0-Percent (ASTM D 2126) 7. Fire Resistance: Flame Spread 0 and Smoke Developed 0 (ASTM E84) 8. UL Classified: Class A (UL 790) with certified lab tests for wind uplift resistance

F. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

G. Insulation fasteners and plates shall be FM approved, corrosion resistant, coated steel and self drilling meeting requirements of the membrane Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

1. Mechanically fasten insulation to metal roof deck as recommended by Manufacturer for the

Project conditions. 2. Fasteners shall provide 1/2-inch minimum metal deck penetration. 3. Pull-out resistance shall be 425-lbs minimum per fastener.

H. Adhesive for securing roof insulation where mechanical fasteners are not required and for

securing second layer and crickets shall be an approved product compatible with the insulation used.

2.05 PROTECTION COVER BOARD



A. Roof protection board shall be fiberglass mat faced gypsum panel with non-asphaltic, heat-cured coating on one side of a water-resistant core. Provide ‘Isoguard HD (High Density)’ cover board as manufactured by Firestone Building Products; ‘DensDeck Prime’ as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation; or approved equal. Protection cover board shall be located above the rigid roof insulation where indicated on the Drawings and shall have the following properties:

1. Board Size: 4-feet by 8-feet nominal, 1/2-inch thick with square edges

2. Fire Resistance: Flame Spread 0 and Smoke Developed 0 (ASTM E 84) 3. UL Classified: Class A (UL 790) with certified lab tests for wind uplift resistance 4. Thermal Value: Minimum R-Value of 0.56 (ASTM C 518)

5. Compressive Strength: 500-900 psi

6. Water Absorption: 10.0 percent by volume

7. Weight: 1.975 lbs/square foot (nominal) 8. Surface: Glass mat with non-asphaltic coating 9. Flexural Strength (Parallel): Minimum 80 lbs (ASTM C 473) 10. Flute Spanability: 5-inches (ASTM E 661) 11. Permeance: 35 Perms (ASTM E 96) 12. Surface Water Absorption: < 2.0-grams, nominal (ASTM C 1177)

B. Provide miscellaneous materials as required for proper and secure installation of roof protection

board. FM or UL approved flat bottom plates and fasteners, in the size, type and spacing as recommended by the roof system Manufacturer. Adhesives may be used as recommended by the roof system Manufacturer or as required by the tested roof assembly.

2.06 VAPOR / AIR RETARDER

A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6-mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by Manufacturer for sealing joints and

penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.07 WALKWAY PADS

A. Provide walkway pads for protection of the TPO roof membrane system at all roof access points

(ladders, hatches and doors), around all serviceable rooftop equipment, and at all roof areas subjected to frequent or heavy foot traffic.



B. Walkway pads shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and as required for the Project.

C. Walkway pad system shall consist of UV-Resistant TPO material with open grid layout and textured upper surface, suitable for use over the TPO roof membrane. Fully-adhere walkway pads to the TPO roof surface and provide a sacrificial membrane layer between pads and roof system when recommended by the Manufacturer.

F. Provide ‘X-Tred Walkway System,’ minimum 30-inches wide by 0.54” thick, White colored

TPO, as manufactured by Firestone Building Products; or approved equal. 2.08 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and protection cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to the roofing system Manufacturer.

B. Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive: Insulation Manufacturer's recommended modified

asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.

C. Flashing: Metal for flashing shall be ASTM B209, 0.050-inch thick aluminum for spring lock

flashing and receiver pieces. Spring lock pieces shall be able to be removed without deforming the flashing. 1. Provide with prefabricated weathertight flashing corners and other system appurtenances. 2. Caulk to back-up wall where shown or required with lead wedges as approved.

D. Counterflashing shall be Springlok or Snap-tite RC-Z by MM Systems Corporation; or approved

equal. Flashing system shall be type MA by Fry Reglet Architectural Metals; or approved equal. Flashings and reglet shall be 18-gauge smooth aluminum, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Reglet shall have 2-inch factory formed end lap. Flashing shall have a 3-inch lap.

E Finishes:

1. Counterflashing shall be Polyvinyl Fluoride (PVF) finished aluminum with Kynar 500

coating as manufactured by Penwalt Corporation. Finish color to be selected by Owner or Engineer.

2. The surface condition of this finish coat shall be 100 percent free of holidays, drip marks,

scratches, roll marks or abrasions that are visible from a distance of 5-ft in good light when in installed position. Surfaces shall be free of checking, crazing, peeling, or loss of adhesion.

F. Pipe flashing clamps shall be screw-type, 300 Series stainless steel as approved. G. Solder for metal flashing shall be ASTM B32 60/40 tin/lead with approved rosin flux. H. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water

permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by the roofing



system Manufacturer for use under equipment, pavers or mounting devices, as required on the Project.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with the

specified requirements of Section 05310. Verify that installation of metal deck is sound in the area to receive roofing.

4. Verify that all penetrations through the roof deck, i.e. electrical conduits, plumbing vents,

drains, curbs, etc. have been installed in order to allow proper flashing of these penetrations as the roof is installed. Minimum flashing height for any penetration is 8” from the finished roof surface (adjust accordingly to compensate for insulation thickness), any penetration not meeting minimum height requirements must be extended as required by the responsible party in order to comply.

5. Verify that any parapets and roof edges to receive flashing are installed and ready for roof

installation. B. Commencement of roofing operations indicates acceptance of the roofing substrate for roof

application. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces shall not contain any grease, oil or any other contaminants which could affect the insulation. Clean the roof substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to the roof system Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Deck surfaces to receive insulation shall be free of roughness or projections, with a smooth clean

surface free of debris which will allow application of materials. Remove any sharp projections. C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

D. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.



3.03 RIGID INSULATION BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Lay only the amount of insulation board that can be installed and covered during the work day. Sweep away any insulation debris left over from the insulation application.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation Manufacturer's written instructions for

installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation

thickness is 2.7-inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6-inches in each direction.

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.

E. Position insulation so end joints are staggered and edges are supported by roof deck. Butt joints

tightly. Incorporate tapered insulation as required and approved to achieve necessary slope for proper roof drainage. Stagger joints of second or subsequent insulation layers.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill any gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does

not restrict flow of water. H. Once the roof insulation is laid in place with all joints tightly butted, install mechanical fasteners

for the rigid insulation boards by laying a pattern of insulation plates in accordance with the roof Manufacturer’s specification for the specified design criteria and warranty.

I. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Secure the plates through the insulation to the structural deck with the appropriate type and

length of fastener. 3. Attach through all layers of insulation to deck with one mechanical fastener and plate per 2

square feet minimum and conform to all FM requirements for wind resistance. Pattern of fasteners shall be as required to secure both the sides and ends of insulation as submitted and approved.



4. Care must be taken to ensure that the insulation securement fasteners are not over driven

causing damage to the insulation facer. If an insulation securement fastener is over driven causing the insulation facer to rip or tear or the insulation plate to bend with the sharp edges oriented upward, remove the affected assembly and reinstall a new assembly within 6” of the original position.

5. Use appropriate corrosion-resistant fasteners as recommended by the Manufacturer. Verify

all fasteners are installed snug to the insulation facer. 3.04 PROTECTION COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install protection board per the product Manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints

staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6-inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

C. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize the number of joints. Support edge joints with deck

ribs and stagger end joints of adjacent lengths. D. Boards shall be installed with ends and edges butted tightly. Fasten to substrate using

appropriate corrosion-resistant fasteners that are acceptable for use with the tapered roof insulation and roof membrane system.

3.05 VAPOR / AIR RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Install retarder per the product Manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to

receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2-inches and 6-inches, respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.

C. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air

movement into membrane roofing system. 3.06 FULLY-ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. The timing of roofing operations, with respect to adverse weather conditions, shall be subject to

the approval of the Owner or Engineer. No roofing operations shall be started until surfaces to receive the same have been inspected and approved as to quality and condition. Roofing and flashing substrate materials shall be dry throughout, clean and free from depressions or projections.



C. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system Manufacturer's technical personnel.

D. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum

dimensions required by the Manufacturer. Stagger end laps. E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by

the Manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. G. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of

membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of sheet membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

I. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in

place with clamping ring.

J. Adhere membrane 100 percent to the properly prepared substrate with system bonding cement applied at approved rate.

K. Start at the high point of the roof in order to prevent possible moisture from inclement weather

from migrating under the newly installed roof system. Roll out TPO membrane and position as required to achieve the roofing material Manufacturer’s specified seam width. Orient the field sheet to allow the field assembled seams to shed water and allow the membrane to relax for a minimum of one half hour to normalize dimensionally from the stress placed on the TPO membrane when rolling the product for shipment.

L. Once the membrane is relaxed and positioned as required to achieve the specified seam width

overlaps and oriented so as to allow the seams to shed water, fold the membrane panel in half along the long axis of the membrane panel in order to allow working space for the next step.

M. Apply TPO bonding adhesive to the protection board substrate and to the underside of the rolled

back TPO membrane. Avoid contamination of the field seam areas as specified by the roofing membrane Manufacturer achieving the specified coverage rate in a single evenly applied application of the TPO bonding adhesive without globs or puddles.

N. Using a push broom and moderate downward pressure, “sweep” the applied membrane to ensure

contact between the prepared membrane and substrate surfaces.



O. Allow the bonding adhesive to flash off to the point that the prepared surface feels tacky to the

touch but does not transfer adhesive to your finger when touched with a clean dry finger to test dryness, or move when pushed upon with a finger in a cross directional motion.

1. Care should be taken to weigh down the membrane edges during this step when the

membrane will be exposed to moderate or higher winds to prevent the membrane sheet from being blown onto itself or the prepared substrate while the bonding adhesive is flashing off.

2. If premature mating of the prepared surfaces (membrane and insulation) does occur, peel

the membrane from the insulation facer and removal all loose facer material from the membrane sheet. Reapply bonding adhesive to the membrane sheet and associated area of roof insulation and allow to flash off.

3. If insulation facer is removed to the point that the insulation core is exposed during this

corrective action, then the insulation panel(s) must be removed, flipped over and reinstalled to provide a good bonding surface when possible. Damaged insulation board must be replaced.

4. If inadvertent adhesion occurs between membrane surfaces, peel the plies apart and reapply

bonding adhesive to the affected areas and allow to flash off again.

P. When mating the prepared surfaces, start in the middle of the membrane panel, flap folded back membrane edge to trap air in the fold of the membrane panel and push folded back portion of the panel forward onto the prepared substrate avoiding wrinkles and trapped air. Continue the mating procedure from the middle of the panel to each end of the panel in a moving “wedge” application of membrane to prepared substrate.

Q. Clean both seam mating surfaces with TPO membrane cleaner (splice wash) in accordance with

the roofing material Manufacturer’s specifications and allow to flash off. R. Using a robot hot air welder (use a hand welder for end laps and in difficult to weld areas) and

hot air weld the TPO membrane sheets together in accordance with the roofing material Manufacturer’s specification and details.

1. Once the hot air welded seam has thoroughly cooled check seam with a seam probe (hand

held cotter pin remover or similar inspection tool) to ensure a minimum 1 ½” solid weld. 2. Confirm weld width by conducting periodic destructive seam testing. If hand welder is

used, ensure a minimum 2” solid weld. S. Conduct any necessary remedial repairs to the seams on a daily basis to protect the integrity of

the roof system. T. Apply a hot air welded patch of TPO un-reinforced flashing measuring 4”X 4” minimum over t-

joints formed in a seaming process.



U. Use roof membrane material for required base flashing with the system uncured TPO membrane flashing at inside and outside corners or where approved. Terminate base flashings to membrane with system termination details as approved by Manufacturer.

V. Entire roofing system installation shall be in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings,

the details shown and the Manufacturer's written instructions, all as required so the warranty may be issued.

W. Provide pourable system sealer as required for pockets or to make watertight all conduit and

appurtenances.

3.07 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to the membrane roofing system Manufacturer's written instructions

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to

partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars where indicated on Drawings and where required by the Manufacturer. 3.08 ROOF DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Provide the main roof and overflow drains furnished under Division 15 as indicated on the Drawings. Drains shall be watertight and integral with roof membrane or base flashing as shown and as detailed on final shop drawings. Care shall be exercised to prevent the roof at the drain from being built up and thus interfere with drainage.

3.09 METAL FLASHING WORK INSTALLATION

A. Surfaces to be covered with metal shall be free from defects of every description and clean of dirt and other foreign matter before sheet metal work is started.

B. Flash curbs, parapets, and roof edges in accordance with the contract documents and roofing

Manufacturer’s specifications and details. Should a conflict arise between the contract documents and the roofing Manufacturer’s requirements, temporarily seal the roof at the area in question to prevent water intrusion and bring the conflict to the attention of the owner’s representative and resolve before installing the flashing.

C. Flash pipes and conduits with Pre-Molded Pipe Boots when possible installed in accordance

with the roofing Manufacturer’s specifications. When penetration cannot be flashed with a pipe boot, field wrap the penetration according to the roofing Manufacturer’s recommended details and specification. When installing tightly grouped multiple penetrations, it may be necessary to



seal the roof with a pourable sealer pocket that is fabricated and installed per the roof Manufacturer’s specifications and details.

D. Flash drains in accordance with roofing Manufacturer’s specifications ensuring that an adequate

amount of waterstop is applied between the bottom of the single layer of membrane entering the drain bowl and the upper compression surface of the drain base. Ensure that all bolts are installed to evenly and adequately secure the drain compression ring through the membrane into the drain bowl to effectively create a compression seal to the roofing membrane. Provide roof membrane opening inside the drain compression ring that is larger than the plumbing leader connection opening, but at least 1/2-inch inside compression ring on all sides.

E. Flash irregular shaped or closely grouped roof penetrations using a pourable sealer pocket

fabricated and installed in accordance with the roofing Manufacturer’s specification and details. F. Provide flashings as indicated on the Drawings and in all locations where the use of flashing

may reasonably be inferred as necessary to make the work of this Section complete in its intent to provide leak-proof conditions throughout.

G. Fabricate and install flashing in accordance with practices of SMACNA. Provide joints ready

for caulking where required. H. Interlocking type expansion joints as approved shall be placed at 25-feet maximum along

continuous flashing runs. I. Fabricate and set pipe cap flashings, watertight as shown and as detailed on approved shop

drawings. J. Where metal abuts or joins adjacent dissimilar materials, execute juncture to prevent electrolysis

between the two materials. 3.10 WALKWAY PAD INSTALLATION

A. Surfaces to be covered with walkway pads shall be clean of dirt and other foreign matter before installation work is started.

B. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions and the approved shop drawings for installing

walkway pad system on roof. C. Install sections of walkway pads as required to allow adequate material expansion that closely

matches the adjacent roof membrane and provides a flat walking surface at both hot and cold temperatures.

D. Orient the direction for walkway pads to ensure that bottom layer of bars facilitates roof

drainage. Completed installation of walkway pads shall not interfere with the slope or proper drainage of the roof system.

3.11 ROOFING MEMBRANE DAILY SEAL



A. At the end of each workday install a positive night seal in accordance with the roofing material Manufacturer’s specification and details along the perimeter of the newly installed roof area to protect against water intrusion.

B. Should the newly installed roof system suffer water intrusion determine the extent of wet

insulation by making test core cuts and then replace the amount of insulation determined to be wet.

C. Remove the night seal and any contaminated membrane prior to beginning roofing operations

the next workday. 3.12 DAILY INSPECTION OF COMPLETED WORK

A. Conduct a daily visual inspection of the completed roof area. If the project is a hot air welded project probe all completed seams on a daily basis in order to identify any seam voids or cold welds.

B. Conduct repairs of any identified deficiencies in accordance with the roof Manufacturer’s

written recommendations the day the item is discovered in order to prevent water intrusion into the completed roof system.

3.13 ROOFING MEMBRANE FLOOD TESTING

A. All roof areas shall be given a 24-hour, 1-inch minimum deep flood test. Drains shall be plugged and barriers placed to contain the water. Repairs, if required, shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. In freezing weather, an 8-hour daytime test shall be sufficient with the written approval of the Engineer.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Upon completion of the Project, coordinate with and arrange for the roof system Manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect the entire roofing installation.

B. Notify the General Contractor, Engineer and Owner of the inspection date well in advance of

visiting the project site. C. Provide a copy of the inspection report to the General Contractor, Engineer and Owner upon

completion of the inspection. D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

1. Conduct repairs of the punch list items in accordance with the roofing material Manufacturer’s recommendations, specifications and details.

E. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.15 PROTECTION AND CLEANING



A. Protect TPO membrane roofing system from damage and wear until the Project is completed and has been accepted by the Owner.

B. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for any

damage and/or deterioration, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to both the Engineer and Owner.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove TPO membrane roofing system that does not comply with

requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. Repair substrates and repair or reinstall the TPO membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to Manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

D. Storage of materials, tools and equipment by other trades on the completed roof system shall not

be permitted, except for the installation of Mechanical equipment or roof accessories thereon. E. No unauthorized work or traffic will be allowed on the completed roof system.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install roof accessories, including equipment and pipe curbs, roof hatches with guardrail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. B. Metal roof deck is included in Division 5.

C. Expansion control is included in Section 05800.

D. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

E. Metal roofing system is included in Section 07415. F. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420.

G. Coping, flashing, trim and accessories are included in Section 07512.

H. Membrane roofing is included in Section 07540.

I. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950.

J. HVAC and plumbing requirements are included in Division 15.

K. Electrical and lightning protection requirements are included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings, working drawings and product data showing required openings and details of construction finishes, flashing, caps hatches, curbs, anchors and erection of roof accessories specified herein.

B. Samples

1. The samples shall, upon approval, become the standard of acceptance for the project with

regard to construction and finish for each item. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS




1. AA 6063-T5 – Minimum Expected Mechanical Properties for Extrusion, Architectural

(Alloy and temper) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA)

D. National Roofing Contractor’s Association (NRCA) – Roofing and waterproofing manual. E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of the

bid opening shall apply. 1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Work performed under this Section to be free from defective design, defective materials, defective workmanship, and leakage as a result thereof for a period of 20 years from the date of completion and acceptance of the work.



B. Store all materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from environment and

construction operations. C. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CURBS

A. Curbs shall be 18 gauge stainless steel or aluminum.

B. Curb for equipment at membrane roofing shall be 12-inches high, Style ES-5 by Pate or equal.

C. Pipe curbs shall be 12-inches high, Style PCA-1 by Pate or equal.

D. Curb shall be complete with 1-1/2-inch rigid glass fiber insulation and pressure treated wood nailers, factory applied.

E. Curbs shall be suitable for the equipment being supported above:



1. Coordinate with the individual discipline Drawings and Specifications for the specific size,

type and location of equipment being supported. 2. Provide the appropriate type of curb, number of curbs, or accessories as required for a

complete and proper rooftop installation. 3. Should alternate supports, additional supports or accessories be required for the specific

field conditions, they shall be provided and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.02 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof hatches shall be aluminum, 4-feet by 4-feet, Type F, Access Hatch by Bilco Co.; Babcock-Davis or equal.

B. Hatch shall be 14-inches high to top of curb with 3-1/2-inch roof flange, 11 gauge aluminum

cover and curb with 18 gauge cover liner. Cover shall be 1-inch thick glass fiber board insulated with 3-inches deep beaded flange and curb shall be integrally cap flashed and insulated on exterior with same insulation.

C. Provide factory applied heavy pintle hinges that are through bolted with stainless steel bolts,

telescope enclosed compression springs, snap latch, exterior and interior turn handles and padlock hasp with neoprene draft seal around cover. All hardware shall be stainless steel.

D. Hatches shall be provided with extension devices connected to fixed ladders. Extension to be of

high strength steel with tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless steel spring balancing mechanism. Provide corrosive resistant spring similar to "Ladder Up" safety post as manufactured by Bilco Company or approved equal.

E. Roof hatches shall be located as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. F. All roof hatches shall include integral perimeter railing system, appropriately sized and

configured for the roof hatches below, Type RL-F, Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System by Bilco Company; Babcock-Davis; or equal.

G. Hatch Railing System shall include the following Performance Characteristics: 1. High visibility safety yellow color shall be molded in.

2. Railing system shall attach to the curb and capflashing of the roof hatch and shall not

penetrate any roofing material. 3. Hatch railing system shall meet the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and shall meet

OSHA strength requirements with a safety factor of two. 4. UV and corrosion resistant construction with a twenty-five year warranty from the date of

Substantial Completion.



5. Self-closing gate assembly shall be provided with each hatch rail system. Coordinate and modify the railing and gate assembly configuration as required to suit project conditions at each roof hatch location.

H. Posts and Rails: Shall be round poltruded reinforced, fire-retardant yellow fiberglass treated

with a UV inhibitor. I. Hardware: Mounting Brackets shall be 1/4-inch thick hot dip galvanized steel. Hinges and post

guides shall be 6063T5 aluminum. Fasteners shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel.

2.03 APPURTENANCES

A. Where curb insulation is not furnished on accessories, provide 1-inch minimum, or thickness required by curb construction 3-lbs density, rigid glass fiber board insulation as approved attached to curb as shown on shop drawings.

B. Aluminum Closure and Cover Sheets

1. Provide aluminum sheets equal to curb thickness for interior curb closure or to cover

insulation on exterior where either is not provided with the roof accessories. 2. At curb closures, provide each curb side in one piece. Two opposite side pieces shall have

1-inch minimum, right angle extensions on ends. The other two side pieces shall lap the extensions. Fasten with oval head stainless steel screws.

3. At exterior, over insulation, provide aluminum covers, lapped 3-inches minimum at corners

fastened with flat head stainless steel screws and extending down over roof flange. Fasten the roof accessory through aluminum cover and roof flange to roof substrate. All exterior surfaces shall be smooth and continuous as approved to receive roof base flashing.

4. Aluminum shall be cleaned and degreased, mill finish, unless specified with the individual

roof accessory. 2.04 LADDER UP SAFETY POST

A. Provide Ladder-Up Safety Post Model No. LU-4 with mill finish aluminum by the Bilco Company or approved equal.

B. The device shall be manufactured of high strength stainless steel or aluminum with telescoping

tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. The upward and downward movement shall be controlled by an alloy balancing spring for corrosive conditions.

C. The unit shall be assembled with fasteners as specified by the Manufacturer and in accordance

with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION



A. Install roof accessories as shown, in accordance with approved shop drawings and as approved.

B. Fastening and sealing shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions and as

approved.

C. Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned before sealants are applied.

3.02 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING

A. After other trades have completed work on adjacent materials, carefully inspect roof accessory installation and make adjustments necessary to ensure proper installation, operation and watertight conditions. Replace defective components as required.

B. Clean all materials and components as approved immediately prior to acceptance of project.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07901 CAULKING AND JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required and perform all caulking,

sealants, joint fillers, gaskets and related work necessary for the proper completion of the project as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1. Caulk and seal around the entire exposed perimeters of all penetrations and openings

through walls and for slabs on grade where any item is installed within the openings or through the penetrations.

2. Caulk and seal all sheet metal flashings and other items penetrating through the roof. 3. Throughout all areas of the building, provide a positive barrier that prevents the passage of

air or moisture from the exterior. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3.

B. Masonry is included in Section 04200.

C. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

D. Waterproofing and damproofing are included in Section 07100.

E. Firestopping is included in Section 07270.

F. Metal panel wall systems are included in Section 07420.

G. Coping, flashing and trim are included in Section 07512.

H. Roof accessories are included in Section 07720.

I. Doors and frames are included in Division 8.

J. Storefront system and windows are included in Division 8.

K. Glazing sealants are included in Section 08800.

L. Insulated fiberglass translucent panels are included in Section 08950.

M. Louvers are included in Section 10200.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300, shop drawings, working drawings, and product data including detailed product information, sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability of materials proposed.

B. Submit Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations including the following:

1. Complete materials list showing all items specified to be furnished and installed under this

Section. 2. Sufficient data to demonstrate that all materials meet or exceed the specified requirements. 3. Product data sheets, specifications, product MSDS, installation instructions and general

recommendations from the Manufacturer detailing procedures under which the proposed materials will be installed on the project.

4. Upon approval by the Owner or the Engineer, the proposed installation procedures will

become the basis for inspection and acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the work.

C. Submit for review two sets of special-colored sealant samples illustrating the Manufacturer’s

full range of colors for selection by Engineer. Color shall closely match the substrate surface to which it is applied. Resubmit until approved.

D. Submit Manufacturer’s standard ten-year warranty which shall include coverage of installed

sealants and accessories against failure to achieve airtight or watertight seal or loss of adhesion, cohesion or color stability.



1. ASTM C834 – Latex Sealing Compounds

2. ASTM C920 – Standard Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealers 3. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for use of Joint Sealants 4. ASTM D395 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set 5. ASTM D412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers

and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension 6. ASTM D573 – Standard Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in an Air Oven 7. ASTM D695 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics



8. ASTM D790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

9. ASTM D1002 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint

Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal to Metal)

10. ASTM D1056 – Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber 11. ASTM D1149 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking

in a Chamber 12. ASTM D1667 – Standard Specifications for Flexible Cellular Materials – Vinyl Chloride

Polymars and C0-Polymers 13. ASTM D1708 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics by Use of

Microtensile Specimens 14. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness 15. ASTM D2628 – Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint

Seals for Concrete Pavements

B. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS HH-F-341 – Fillers, Expansion Joint; Bituminous (Asphalt and Tar) and Nonbituminous (Preformed For Concrete)

2. FS TT-S-00227 – Sealing Compound - Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component 3. FS TT-S-00230 – Sealing Compound - Elastomeric Type, Single-Component 4. FS TT-S-001543 – Sealing Compound - Silicone Rubber Base

C. Steel Structural Painting Council (SSPC)

1. SSPC SP-10 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning

D. Sealing and Waterproofers Institute (SWI)

1. Sealant and Caulking Guide Specifications

E. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply.



1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General

1. All materials specified herein shall conform to the requirements of the referenced standards

listed above, to the extent that the requirements therein specified are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section.

2. References to ‘ANSI Standards’ shall mean the American National Standards Institute

Publication A116.1-1967, ‘Two Component Elastomeric Sealing Components for the Building Trade’.

B. Qualifications of Manufacturers

1. Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by Manufacturers regularly

engaged in the manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Owner or the Engineer.

2. Manufacturer shall have been on business of manufacturing the specified types of Sealants

for not less than 10 years. C. Qualification of Installers

1. Installers shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and be

thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and shall have a minimum of 5-years experience installing caulking and sealants.

2. Installers shall be completely familiar with the joint details shown on the Contract

Drawings and installation requirement hereinafter specified in this Section. 1.06 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee: The guarantee period specified in Division 1 of these Specifications shall hereby be

extended to two (2) years for the work of this Section. Contractor shall provide the Owner with a written guarantee against any inherent or developed defects in material or in installation and file five (5) copies with the Owner and Engineer as a prerequisite for final acceptance of the work.

B. Warranty shall further state that installed sealants are warranted against the following:

1. Water leakage through sealed joints. 2. Adhesive or co-adhesive failure of sealant. 3. Staining of adjacent surfaces caused by migration of sealant or primer. 4. Chalking or visible color changes of the cured sealant.



1.07 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Defective work will be determined by the Owner or the Engineer if leakage results from failure

of the sealant or caulking to bond with adjacent work or if it hardens, cracks, shrinks, runs or stains adjacent work.

B. Remove all defective work, clean joints and install new caulking or sealant materials as

recommended by the Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all materials of this Section to the job-site in their original

unopened or unbroken containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store only under conditions recommended by the Manufacturer concerning shelf life, temperature, humidity, ensure the quality of the material when installed. Do not retain any material on the job-site which has exceeded the Manufacturer's recommended shelf life.

B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and

after installation and to protect the work and materials of other trades. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all necessary repairs or replacements

to the approval of the Owner or Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.09 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Joints: Seal all exterior wall joints, between adjacent materials, joints between frames or louvers and adjacent materials, copings, masonry control joints, and all other joints shown on the Drawings or required for the completion of the work. Joints noted as ‘caulk’, ‘caulking’, or ‘sealant,’ shall be sealed as specified herein.

B. Interior Joints: Seal all interior joints between frames and masonry, at tops of masonry walls,

between masonry and structural concrete, floor joints in tile, joints in rooms to be airtight and all other joints shown on the Drawings or required for the completion of the work.

C. Interior Floor Joints: Seal all sawcut type interior floor joints that are exposed to vehicular or

fork lift traffic, as indicated on the Drawings and as required on the Project for a complete and functional installation.

D. Compressible Filler: Provide where indicated on the Drawings and as required on the Project

for a complete and functional installation. E. Expansion Joint Seals: Provide where indicated on the Drawings and as required on the Project

for a complete and functional installation. F. Waterproof Joint Filler: Provide where indicated on the Drawings and as required on the Project

for a complete and functional installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Caulking

1. Exterior and interior sealant for joints on the horizontal plane shall be a two-part, pour

grade polyurethane base Polytok sealant by Toch Brothers, Inc.; Tremco; Sonneborn (BASF); or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer.

2. Exterior and interior sealant for Architectural joints on all other building surfaces shall be a

one-part, gun grade, high performance, low-modulus, polyurethane Dymonic joint sealant by Tremco: Pecora; Sonneborn (BASF); or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer.

3. Interior sealant for sawcut type control joints at floors that are exposed to vehicular traffic

or wheel loads, shall be a two-part, pour grade and/or gun grade, flexible epoxy, Epolith joint filler by Sonneborn (BASF); Tremco; Pecora; or equal.

4. Exterior and interior sealant for joints on all other surfaces shall be a one-part, gun grade,

polysulphide base Thiotok Sealant R.M. by Toch Brothers, Inc.; Pecora; Sonneborn (BASF); or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer.

5. All colors for caulking and joint sealants that are exposed to view or located above grade in

the building shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the standard colors available from the Manufacturer. The color of caulking shall match the finish color of the adjacent material (where applicable) as follows:

a. Color at Split-Face CMU shall be ‘Aluminum Stone’ by Tremco; or approved equal. b. Color at Field Face Brick shall be ‘Redwood Tan’ by Tremco; or approved equal. c. Color at Precast Concrete shall be ‘Off White’ by Tremco; or approved equal. d. Color at Metal Wall and Roof Panels shall be ‘Anodized Aluminum’ or ‘Gray’ by

Tremco; or approved equal. e. Color at Doors, Louvers and Windows shall be ‘Anodized Aluminum’ or ‘Gray’ by

Tremco; or approved equal. f. Color at Accent Face Brick shall be ‘Off White’ by Tremco; or approved equal.

g. Color at painted interior walls and ceramic tile shall be selected from the standard

available colors to match the adjacent finished surface. h. Color at fully concealed installations and in partially exposed installations, where

approved by the Engineer, shall be standard ‘Gray’ by Tremco; or approved equal. 6. Joint backing for joints in superstructure shall be approved closed cell polyethylene rods of

diameters to suit joint conditions.

B. Expansion Joint Seals



1. The expansion joint seals shall conform to the following properties:

Property Requirements ASTM Method

Tensile strength, minimum psi 2000 D412

Elongation at break, minimum percent 250 D412

Hardness, Type A durometer 55 plus/minus 5 D2240

Compression set, 70 hours

at 212 degrees F, maximum 40 percent D395 (Method B)

Oven aging, 70 hours at 212 degrees, Tensile strength, loss maximum. 20 percent D573

Elongation, loss, maximum Hardness, Type A durometer (points change) 0 to plus 10 20 percent

Ozone resistance 20 percent strain, 300 pphm, in air 70 hours at 104 degrees F. No cracks D1149

Low temperature recovery, 74 hours at 14 degrees F. 88 percent D2628

Low temperature recovery 22 hours at minus 20 degrees F. 83 percent D2628

High temperature recovery, 70 hours at 212 degrees F. 85 percent D2628

2. Lubricant adhesive shall be one component polychloroprene compound with the following

properties: a. Solids Content – 24 plus or minus 3 percent b. Density – 8.5 lbs/gallon c. Color – Concrete gray 3. Expansion joint seal shall be Acmaseal ‘C’ Series by Acme Highway Products Corporation

or equal.



C. Compressible filler shall be foamed polyurethane strip that is saturated with polybutylene waterproofing material. When compressed to 50 percent of its original volume, filler shall hold a head of 6-feet of water, and a head of 10-feet of water when compressed 60 percent.

1. Filler shall maintain its resiliency to allow for installation in temperatures as slow as 40

degrees F. Filler shall remain waterproof at 50 percent compression between temperatures of minus 40 and 200 degrees F. Elongation shall be at least 325 percent with a tensile strength of not less than 53 psi.

2. The polybutylene compound shall not migrate in the polyurethane strip. Compressible

filler shall be Polytite by Sandell Manufacturing Company; Combriband by Secoa Corporation, Division of Phoenix Building Products, Inc. or equal.

D. Watertight Joint Filler

1. Joint Material – Closed-cell, cross linked ethylene vinyl acetate with a resistance to weather

oxidation. a. Compression and Recovery – The load required to compress a specimen to 50 percent

of its thickness before the test shall not be less than 10 or more than 60 psi. Upon removal of the test, the material shall recover at least 95 percent of its original thickness in 24 hours.

b. Extrusion – A specimen shall be compressed to 50 percent of its original thickness with

three of its edges restrained. The amount of extrusion of the free edge shall not exceed 0.25-inches.

c. Elongation – 25 degrees minimum at 0 degree F. d. Density – 2.8 to 3.4 lbs/cu ft. e. Water Absorption – A standard test specimen with four square cut edges, when

submerged horizontally under 1-inch of water at 70 degrees F plus 5 degrees shall absorb not more than 3.5 percent weight by volume of water in 24 hours.

f. Weather Test: FS HH-341a, Type 1 Standard Class A, No visible signs of deterioration. g. Dimensional Variation:

1). 0 to 0.1181 thick plus 20 percent, minus 10 percent 2). 0.1181 to 0.2362 thick plus 15 percent, minus 5 percent 3). 0.2362 up plus 10 percent, minus 2 percent

2. Bonding Agent – Two-component epoxy resin bonder that meets all requirements for

bonding concrete to concrete, concrete to steel, concrete to wood and other materials as recommended by the Manufacturer. a. Unmixed properties shall be as follows:



1) Tensile: ASTM D1708, crosshead speed (0.05 ipm) 2) Age: C77 degrees F - 7 days 3) Tensile Strength: 3,900 psi 4) Elongation at break: 5.5 to 6.0 percent 5) Tensile Modulus: 1.4 x 105 psi 6) Flexural: ASTM D790, Procedure B, crosshead speed (0.015 ipm) 2-inch span. b. Mixed properties shall be as follows:

1) Compressive: ASTM D695, crosshead speed (0.05 ipm) 2) Compressive Strength, 7 day: 14,500 psi 3) Bond Strength, 24 hours: 650 psi 4) Adhesive (Tensile Shear), 7 days: ASTM D1002, 1,800 psi

3. Evasote Joint System by E-Poxy Industries, Inc. or equal.

E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,Class 25, Uses T,

M, A and O, two component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, color as selected by Engineer; Dynatred manufactured by Pecora Corporation, or approved equal. 1. Approved by Manufacturer for joints up to 2 inches in width. 2. Movement capability: 25 percent. 3. Shore A hardness range: 25 to 50. 4. Accessories:

a. Primer: Non-staining type recommended by sealant Manufacturer to suit application. b. Joint cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant

Manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. c. Joint backing: ASTM D1667 round closed cell polyethylene oversized 30 to 50 percent

larger than joint width as recommended by sealant Manufacturer. 2.02 BACKUP MATERIALS FOR SEALANTS

A. Primers and Bond Breakers: As recommended by the sealant Manufacturer in their written

product instructions.



B. Backer Rods and Other Backing Materials: Type as recommended by the sealant Manufacturer.

1. Closed-cell resilient urethane or polyvinyl chloride foam; 2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam; 3. Closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber; 4. Polychoroprene tubes or beads; 5. Polyisobuthlene extrusion; 6. Oil-less dry jute.

C. Filler for Use with Asphalt Sealant: Asphalt impregnated, as per ASTM D 1715. D. Filler of Use with Elastomeric Sealer: Plain type as per ASTM D 1752 Type II or Type III. E. Surface Covers: (Where Simple bond-prevention is necessary).

1. Polyethelene Tape, pressure-sensitive adhesive, required only to hold tape to the

construction material. 2. Aluminum foil conforming to MIL-SPEC-MIL-A-148E 3. Heavy wax paper conforming to Fed. Spec. UU-P-270

F. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and

proper caulking and installation of sealants, shall be first quality of their respective kinds as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Manufacturer's Inspection: Just prior to start of application of each type sealant, provide initial

instructions at start of work in order to verify if physical conditions are proper in order to properly instruct applicators and that supervision provided is by qualified personnel handling such materials.

B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected.

C. Contractor to notify the Manufacturer at least 72 hours prior to time inspection is required. D. Failure or refusal of Manufacturer to provide inspection and supervision shall constitute grounds

for non-acceptability of materials manufactured, even though specified hereinafter in this Section.



E. Applicator shall report to the Contractor any detrimental conditions impairing the proper

installation of such materials. Contractor shall correct all such detrimental conditions to the full satisfaction of the Owner or the Engineer or the Inspector at no added cost to the Owner.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. Application: In strict accordance with ASTM C-962 and ASTM C-1193 and Manufacturer's

instructions and supervised by the Manufacturer's approved applicator. Manufacture shall provide field assistance to insure the proper mixing of sealants, cleaning of surfaces, and application of materials.

B. Cleaning: Immediately remove caulking and/or sealant materials from adjacent surfaces not

specified to receive sealant, and/or caulking materials. Leave work in a condition satisfactory to the Owner or the Engineer.

C. Protection: Carefully protect adjoining surfaces from staining. Carefully provide necessary

strippable masking where required to properly limit the extent of caulking and sealant material application.

3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Installation of sealant shall be limited to the following calendar periods and temperature ranges:

1. Spring: March 15th through June 15th

2. Autumn: September 15th through November 15th

3. Temperature Range: 40-degrees F and rising, up to 75-degrees maximum

B. All concrete shall be a minimum of 28 days old before sealant may be placed.

3.04 PREPARATION

A. Joint Cleaning: Joints shall be free of foreign materials full depth of joint. Joint surfaces to be

clean, dry and free from grease, oil, wax or other foreign matter, which would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Clean surfaces in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Priming: Joint surfaces to be primed in accordance with sealant Manufacturer's instructions. C. Steel Surfaces:

1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or scraped or wire-brushed to

remove mill scale. 2. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. 3. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no residue.

D. Aluminum Surfaces



1. Surfaces in contact with sealant shall be cleaned of temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil

and grease. 2. When masking tape is used as a protective cover, remove tape just prior to application of

sealant. 3. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as recommended for that purpose by

the aluminum Manufacturer, and which are non-staining. E. Concrete and Ceramic Tile Surfaces

1. All contact surfaces shall be dry, sound, well brushed and wiped free from dust. 2. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. 3. Treated surfaces shall have the surface treatment removed by sandblasting or wire

brushing. 4. Remove all laitance and mortar from the joint cavity. 5. Where backstop is required, insert an approved backup material into the joint cavity to

required depth. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL

A. Use only the backup materials recommended by the sealant Manufacturer and approved by the

Engineer for the particular installation, compressing the backup material 25% to 50% to secure a positive and secure fit. 1. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of material. 2. Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock. 3. Use foam backup rod or bond breaker tape to minimize joint configuration.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS

A. General: Prior to the start of sealant installation within each joint, verify the type of joint and

confirm that the required proportion of width to depth of joint has been secured. B. Equipment: Apply sealants under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate

means. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed.

C. Application: All joints to receive sealant shall be cleaned, primed, back filled and caulked in

complete accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.



1. Caulking performed under other Sections of these Specifications shall comply with all of the following requirements unless specific changes are specified in those other Specification Sections.

2. Where no backing exists, partially fill joint with a filler material that is compatible with the

specified caulking or sealant material. a. Metal to Metal Joints: Minimum joint width of 1/4-inch. b. All Other Joints: Maximum 3/4-inch, unless otherwise detailed. c. Minimum joint depth shall be 1/4-inch for metal joints; 2-inches for concrete, masonry,

and plaster work joints. 3. Sealant shall be applied generally to a square section configuration. Depth of joint shall be

1/4-inch minimum and 1/2-inch maximum. For joints greater than 1/2-inch wide, provide sealant in a 2 to 1 width-to-depth ratio.

4. Apply sealants under sufficient pressure to completely fill all voids. 5. Non-sagging type sealants shall be used within vertical joints and self-leveling type

sealants shall be used within horizontal joints. 6. Apply non-tracking sealants, having a shore hardness range of 40 to 55, to concrete,

masonry or tile expansion joints, subject to foot or vehicular traffic. 7. Finish all exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces, or recessed as shown on the

Drawings. 8. Provide strippable masking for factory applied sealing materials to prevent contamination

from dirt or debris until parts are assembled. 9. Tool all joints to the profile shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 10. Caulk and completely seal all open joints that remain between building materials or around

the perimeter of exterior openings, as well as all other locations where the Drawings call for caulking and/or sealants to be installed. Provide continuous sealant materials on both sides of component, suitable for both interior and exterior conditions, as necessary to completely seal off joints or other openings against the passage of water, air, dust and moisture.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT SEALS

A. Expansion joint seals shall be installed at the vertical expansion joints where detailed. B. All surfaces to receive adhesive that are in contact with the seal shall be free from dirt, water,

oil, rust, frost and loose debris. C. Joint sides shall be constructed straight and parallel with no sharp edges. D. Installation should not be done when temperatures are above 75 or below 40 degrees F.



E. The exterior of the joint shall be flush with the surrounding construction.



3.08 INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOF JOINT FILLER A. Surface Preparation

1. Concrete:

a. Cleaned free of old existing coatings (where applicable) b. Cured 28 days minimum c. Dry preferred (moisture only if approved by Engineer for difficult site conditions) d. Cleaned of dirt e. Completely remove oil, grease and wax f. Acid etch surface only when surface pH is over 10 g. Sandblast to clean and remove sharp edges or protrusions

2. Steel:

a. Cleaned free of old existing coatings (where applicable) b. Sandblast: SSPC SP-10 c. Immediately apply bonder after sandblast cleaning

B. Bonder Application

1. Power caulking gun 2. Trowel 3. Hand application with rubber gloves 4. Apply enough bonder so that it is squeezed out of the joint area when the filler is pressed

together (Normally 6 to 12 mils thick) C. Environmental Conditions

1. Apply at temperatures above minus 10 degrees F on dry surfaces only. 2. Apply at temperatures above 32 degrees F on moist surfaces.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FLOOR JOINT SEALANTS

A. Perform in accordance with sealant Manufacturer’s requirements for preparation of surfaces and

material installation instructions, except where more stringent requirements apply.



B. Perform installation in accordance with ASM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ration, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by the Manufacturer. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult Manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Tool joints immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins.

Tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant Manufacturer.

3.10 CLEAN UP

A. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. B. Remove excess caulking and sealants from the adjacent surfaces of joints as the installation

progresses. Leave the area of work in a neat and clean condition, free of all smears or other soiling due to the work of this Section.

C. If necessary, use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant Manufacturer for the

type of adjacent material. END OF SECTION



SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and deliver steel doors and frames as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry is included in Section 04200. B. Installation of doors is included in Section 06100. C. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. D. Firestopping is included in Section 07270. E. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901. F. Aluminum doors and frames are included in Section 08120. G. Blast resistant doors and frames are included in Section 08315. H. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. I. Glazing is included in Section 08800. J. Field painting is included in Section 09902. K. Signage is included in Section 10400.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all metal doors, frames, panels and appurtenances. Submittals shall include at least the following:

1. Shop drawings shall show elevations and details of each frame type, schedule of doors and

frames, door elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints and connections and trim.

2. Where approved to be fabricated in more than one piece, locate and detail field splices and

indicate complete instructions for making field splices.



B. Hardware templates shall be furnished to the door Manufacturer by the Contractor for correct hardware alignment and reinforcing.

C. Provide samples and certification as follows:

1. Door frame corner with 6-inch long legs showing construction with the galvanized material

specified, welding, touch-up and priming.

2. Door panel corner, 6-inch square, showing door and insulating materials, construction and finishing as specified above.

3. Provide certification as approved that all materials, construction requirements and fire

ratings herein specified will be met in the project. 4. If required by Engineer, provide independent laboratory testing, conforming to ASTM

E376, of galvanized coating on samples of the door and frame submitted for approval to confirm thicknesses of zinc on base metal.



1. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

2. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron, Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

3. ASTM E376 – Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods


1. ANSI A115 – Specification for Preparation of Steel Doors and Frames for Hardware

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) 1. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows

E. Steel Door Institute (SDI) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition



H. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition I. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition. J. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. Provide custom hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work.

B. Hollow metal work shall conform to Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Division of

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) standards for commercial hollow metal doors and frames except where more stringent requirements are specified herein.

C. Provide custom hollow metal work by one of the following door Manufacturers or equal:

1. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio

2. Curries, Mason City, Iowa 3. Republic, McKenzie, Tennessee

4. Pioneer Industries, Carlstadt, New Jersey

C. Provide fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames investigated and tested as fire door assemblies,

complete with type of fire door hardware to be used.

1. Identify each fire door and frame with UL labels, indicating the applicable fire rating of both

doors and frames. 2. Construct assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80 and as specified herein. 3. Certify that doors and frames within labeled openings are constructed to the same

standards. D. Provide Certified Door Consultant (CDC) Services to properly schedule and select all doors.



B. Doors and panels shall be individually wrapped in corrugated cardboard with wood strips on vertical edges and banded with metal straps.

C. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction operations.



D. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Galvanized steel sheets – Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

B. Zinc-rich touch-up primer – 95 percent metallic zinc dust primer in a vehicle compatible with

the specified painting system.

C. Supports and anchors – Fabricate of not less than 16 gauge sheet metal. Galvanize after fabrication units complying with ASTM A153, Class B.

D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners – Hot-dip galvanize, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as

applicable.

E. Rust inhibitive primer – Air drying or baking type as approved compatible with finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabricate metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Fit and assemble units in the Manufacturer's plant including units which are approved to be partially disassembled and field spliced. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, dress and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. Clearly identify work that cannot, where approved, be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site.

B. Exposed Fasteners – Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson

heads for exposed screws and bolts.

C. Prepare metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

D. Reinforce metal units to receive surface applied hardware. All drilling and tapping of doors for

surface applied finish hardware shall be completed by the door Manufacturer and may not be done at the project site.

E. Shop Painting – Clean, treat and paint exposed galvanized surfaces of fabricated metal units.

1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease and other foreign materials and apply

approved zinc-rich primer to galvanized surfaces damaged in fabrication.

2. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution or hot phosphate solution.



3. Apply one full shop coat of rust inhibitive primer within time limits recommended by the

pre-treatment Manufacturer. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2.03 DOORS

A. General

1. Provide flush design doors, 1-3/4-inches thick, with seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise indicated.

2. For single-acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8-inch in 2-inches.

3. Provide filler of mineral wool or other approved insulating material solidly packed full

door height to fill voids between inner core reinforcing members. No asbestos products will be allowed.

4. Provide a minimum ‘U’ factor of 0.70 at exterior doors for compliance with IECC

requirements for the project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A).

5. Reinforce tubular doors with rigid formed tubular steel where stiles and rails are less than 8-inches wide.

B. Galvanized Steel Doors

1. Fabricate doors of two outer, galvanized, stretcher-leveled steel sheets not less than 16

gauge. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts. Provide weep hole openings in the bottom of doors to permit trapped moisture to escape.

2. Reinforce the inside of doors with vertical galvanized sheet steel sections not less than 22

gauge. Space vertical reinforcing 6-inches on center and extend for the full door height. Spot-weld door at not more than 5-inches on center to both face sheets.

3. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 16 gauge horizontal steel channels welded

continuously to outer sheets. Close top and bottom edges to provide weather seal, as integral part of door construction while providing recesses for required hardware and appurtenances.

4. Provide Z or L shape astragals of 14 gauge galvanized steel at double exterior doors. Screw

fasten to lead edge of active leaf.

C. Finish Hardware Reinforcement – Reinforce doors using galvanized steel for required finish hardware, as follows:

1. Hinges – Steel plate 3/16-inch thick by 1-1/2-inches wide by 6-inches longer than hinge,

secured by not less than six spot-welds.



2. Mortise locksets and dead bolts – 14 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot-welds.

3. Cylinder locks – 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot-welds. 4. Flush bolts – 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot-welds. 5. Surface applied closers – 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than six spot-welds. 6. Push plates and pull handles – 16 gauge steel sheet, (except when through bolts are shown

or specified), secured with not less than two spot-welds.

7. Other required comparable reinforcements as submitted and approved.

D. Face Plates – Provide 1/8-inch steel plates where scheduled, galvanized after all drilling and fabrication. Secure to doors with 1/4-inch diameter carriage bolts, nuts and washers, all galvanized, set at 1-foot on center each way, drilled through doors. Seal under heads of bolts and under plate at top with polyurethane sealant as specified in Division 7. Cap top of plate as approved with 20 gauge minimum galvanized sheet steel. Locate bolts to be free of interference with hardware as approved.

1. At pairs of doors, allow plate on active leaf to overlap inactive leaf by 1/2-inch. Cut back

plate on inactive leaf to receive active leaf plate. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of the same materials, construction and finish as specified for hollow metal doors. Provide faceplates at panels above doors receiving faceplates as specified above.

B. At panels without door/transom head members provide approved channel, three sides of rabbet

in frame for panel. Provide concealed recesses in panels to receive channels. Provide angles welded to jambs to receive panel securing screws from bottom edge of panels. Angles shall be concealed when panels are in place. Provide integral astragals of two minimum, thicknesses of panel face material on bottom edge of panels and a matching recess in top edge of doors. Provide 16 gauge drips as approved on bottom face of exterior panels.

2.05 FRAMES

A. Provide pressed metal frames for doors, transoms, side panels, side-lights, borrowed lights and for other openings where shown, of size and profile as indicated.

B. Fabricate frames of full-welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, continuously

welded full depth and width of frame. Knock-down type frames are not acceptable.

C. Form frames of 14 gauge galvanized steel sheets.

D. Finish hardware reinforcement – Reinforce frames using galvanized steel for required finish hardware, as follows:



1. Hinges and pivots – Steel plate 3/16-inch thick by 1-1/2-inches wide by 6-inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot-welds.

2. Strike plate clips – Steel plate 3/16-inch thick by 1-1/2-inches wide by 3-inches long. 3. Surface-applied closers – 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than six spot-welds.

4. Other required comparable reinforcements as submitted and approved.

E. Mullions and transom bars – Provide closed or tubular mullions and transom bars where

indicated on the Drawings. Fasten mullions and transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between frame members with concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame.

F. Jamb anchors – Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction,

formed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel.

1. Masonry construction – Adjustable, flat, corrugated, or perforated, T-shaped to suit frame size, with leg not less than 2-inches wide by 10-inches long. Provide UL approved fixed anchors at labeled openings. Furnish at least three anchors per jamb up to 7-feet-6-inches jamb height; four anchors up to 8-feet jamb height; and one additional anchor for each 24-inches or fraction thereof over 8-feet in height.

2. Drywall construction – In metal stud partitions, install at least three wall anchors per jamb

at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partition, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

G. Floor anchors – Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which extends to floor, formed

of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet, as follows:

1. Monolithic concrete slabs – Clip type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions.

2. Separate finish concrete slabs – Adjustable type with extension clips, allowing not less than

2-inches height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

H. Head strut supports – Provide 3/8-inch by 2-inch vertical steel struts extending from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend the top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

I. Structural reinforcing members – Provide built-in structural reinforcing as part of frame

assembly where indicated at mullions, transoms, or other locations. Size reinforcing members as required to accommodate superimposed loads and loads from the hollow metal door system itself.

J. Spreader bars – Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs

and mullions.



K. Plaster guards – Provide 26 gauge galvanized steel plaster guards or dust cover boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware installation.

2.06 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers within steel doors where indicated on the Drawings. B. Louvers shall be fabricated from not less than 16 gauge, cold-rolled, galvanized steel sheet. C. Fabricate units with stationary, sightproof inverted Y-shaped blades and channel shaped frames,

not less than 1-inch deep. 1. Space louver blades not more than 3/4-inches on center. 2. Assemble units by welding. 3. Provide vandal proof design with security fasteners or tamper resistant screws. D. Prime paint louver assembly to match the finish and color of the adjacent door surface.

2.07 STOPS – DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Provide stops around solid and glazed panels in hollow metal doors and frames to receive doors, where indicated and as shown.

B. Form fixed stops integral with door and frame, unless otherwise indicated. Stops for glazed

door openings shall be flush type, aligning with faces of door. C. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and

type of installation indicated. D. Provide removable stops where indicated or required, on secured room side of opening, formed

of not less than 18 gauge steel sheets. Secure with oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12-inches on center. Form corners with butted hairline joints.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove wraps or covers upon delivery at the building site and ensure that any scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling are promptly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibitive ‘Direct to Metal’ type primer.

B. Ensure that materials are properly stored on planks or dunnage in a dry location. Store doors

and frame products in a vertical position, spaced by blocking. Cover materials to protect them from damage but in such a manner as to permit air circulation.

C. Prior to installation, check the area of floor on which the frame is to be installed, and within the

path of door swing, for flatness.



D. Prior to installation, remove all temporary spreaders. Check door and frame products for correct

size, swing, fire-rating, and door number at each opening. E. Prior to installation, isolate and protect all interior surfaces of perimeter frame sections to be

installed in masonry or concrete walls from grout and/or antifreeze agents. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings; the Manufacturer's written instructions or recommendations, and as specified herein; HMMA, SDI, and NFPA technical standards; and as specified herein. In the event of a conflict between requirements, the most stringent shall apply on the Project.

B. During the setting of the doors and frames, check and correct as necessary for opening width,

opening height, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness. Maintain installation tolerances and clearances in accordance with the limits recommended by HMMA and SDI, or NFPA for fire-rated openings.

C. Placing Frames – Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, level, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. Place frames at fire-rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.

2. Make field splices in frames as detailed on final approved shop drawings, welded and

finished to match factory work.

3. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. Finish and touch-up marks caused by spreader removal.

D. Frames at all openings located at masonry or concrete walls shall be fully grouted with mortar

grout to deaden sound, increase anchorage strength, and to provide added security protection against battering, wedging, spreading, or other means of force. 1. Grout guards and junction boxes shall be used to protect hardware mortises and tapped

holes from masonry grout of 4-inch maximum slump consistency that is hand troweled in place.

2. Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4-inch maximum slump consistency and hand troweled

into place. Grouts mixed to a thin ‘pumpable’ consistency or plaster based grouts shall not be used on the Project.

3. Frames shall be properly braced and fastened to prevent the pressure of the grout from

deforming the frame members. 4. Frame products shall not be used as forms for grout or concrete. Grout hollow metal

sections in ‘lifts’ or take other Manufacturer approved precautions to ensure that door frames are not deformed or otherwise damaged by the hydraulic forces that occur during this process.



E. Doors shall be installed and fastened to maintain proper alignment with frames for maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.

F. Keep hollow metal surfaces free of grout, tar, and/or other bonding materials or sealers.

Promptly clean grout, tar, and/or other bonding materials or sealers off of frame product and doors.

G. Promptly finish smooth and clean all exposed hollow metal surfaces which have been scratched

or otherwise marred during installation. Treat repaired surfaces for maximum paint adhesion and touch up with a rust inhibitive primer comparable to and compatible with the factory applied primer and finish paint specified in Section 09902.

H. Install labeled fire doors and frame product in accordance with the terms of their listings, NFPA

Standard 80 and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. I. Hardware shall be installed in accordance with the hardware Manufacturer’s recommendations

and templates.

3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND TOUCH-UP

A. Doors shall be adjusted to maintain the perimeter clearances recommended HMMA or SDI, and NFPA for fire-rated openings. Shimming shall be performed as needed to assure that the proper clearances are achieved.

B. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work,

including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.

C. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08120

ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and deliver the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1. Aluminum doors, frames, transom panels and components.

2. All fasteners, frame closure pieces, door closure materials, system reinforcing and

appurtenances required. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry is included in Section 04200. B. Installation of doors is included in Section 06100. C. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. D. Joint sealers are included in Section 07901. E. Steel doors and frames are included in Section 08110. F. Aluminum storefront and entrance systems are included in Section 08400. G. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. H. Glazing is included in Section 08800.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for all products furnished under this Section.

1. Shop drawings shall show elevations and details of each frame type, schedule of doors and

frames, door elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location, and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints, and connections and trim.

2. Provide hardware templates for door Manufacturer's use in correctly aligning and

adequately reinforcing door hardware. Actual hardware will be supplied to the Manufacturer when preparation for the hardware is to be done by the Manufacturer.



B. Samples

1. Submit two each of the following samples from specified Manufacturers for review and

approval. Samples shall be full size and must show gauges, configuration, construction, and finish proposed for the various components. Resubmit new samples of each as required until final approval is obtained.

a. Samples should consist of corner construction of aluminum doors, minimum dimension

6-inch by 6-inch legs. b. Sample chips of the specified custom finish colors for doors and frames.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

1. Submit the Manufacturer's written instructions for storage and installation of doors and

frames.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit the Manufacturer's written instructions for care and cleaning of doors and frames. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Terms and Conditions of contract.


A. Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA)

1. AA 5005-H14 – Sheet Architectural

2. AA 6061-T6 – Heavy Duty Structures

3. AA 6063-T5 – Extrusions, Pipe, Architectural

B. Federal Specifications

1. FS HH-1-529B – Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Aggregate)

C. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 2605 – Specification for Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

2. AAMA 610 – Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Painted Aluminum Extrusions and Curtain Wall Panels

3. AAMA 701 – Specification for Pile Weatherstrip

D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C59 – Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation 2. ASTM C578 – Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation



3. ASTM C591 – Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

4. ASTM C612 – Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation 5. ASTM D2863 – Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like

Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index) 6. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

7. ASTM E283 – Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen


2009 Edition F. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. All products specified in this Section shall be furnished by a single Manufacturer specializing in the fabrication of aluminum doors and frames with not less than five years of successful experience in the fabrication of aluminum doors and frames of the type required for this project.

B. The products, materials, and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this

Section shall comply with the Building Code and be listed on the Approved Product Report of the Building Code Compliance Office. A report by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Building Code Compliance Office for ‘Doors-Exterior Impact’ or a Pennsylvania Professional Engineer certifying that the door and frames comply with the specifications of the Manufacturer and comply with the requirements of the Building Code may be submitted for products not listed on the Approved Products Report. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Section and the Building Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply.


A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper as recommended by the Manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other material warranted by the door

Manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components.

1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel.



D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphaltic mastic, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat.

E. Weatherstripping: Replaceable weatherstripping consisting of woolpile, with nylon fabric and

polypropylene strip backing, complying with AAMA 701 frames, or acoustical weatherstripping as specified.


A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling.

Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at the project or building site under cover.

D. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or

canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Initiate cleaning procedures of coated aluminum in accordance with AAMA 2605 as soon after installation as possible.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Door Manufacturer shall provide warranty for all doors and frames for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover any defects in workmanship and product materials as well as warping, rotting, decaying, bowing, or checking of aluminum doors and/or frames.

B. Contractor shall provide warranty for all installation procedures and performance for a period of

five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include any defects due to workmanship and handling of materials.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Cline Aluminum Doors – Series 100BE-090.

2. U.S. Metals and Manufacturing Corporation – D9 Heavy Duty.

3. Or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS



A. Aluminum flush doors and transom panels shall be 1-3/4-inches thick, completely flush in

design, constructed with extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 tubular jamb rails (0.125-inch lock side and 0.190-inch hinge side) and minimum 0.090-inch thick 5005-H14 smooth aluminum alloy face sheets.

B. Doors shall have an aluminum Internal Framework Reinforcement (IFR) system of 4.25-inches

width with 0.125-inch minimum wall thickness to fortify four-sided perimeter and permit a contiguous hardware support boundary to alleviate post installation hardware reinforcement modification. Doors shall be constructed of one piece 0.090-inch 5005-H14 stretcher leveled aluminum alloy facing. Entire perimeter of doors shall be furnished with special beveled edge design aluminum extrusion 6063-T5 alloys to receive skin the full width of doors.

C. All voids in doors between grid sections shall be filled with a rigid, high density, waterproof,

noncombustible mineral insulation conforming to FS HH-1-529B; polyisocyanurate conforming to ASTM C591, honeycomb material 80 lb per 3,000 sq ft resin, 20 percent phenolic resin, 7/16-inch cell; or other self-extinguishing, insulating stiffening material; with an ASTM E84 flame spread rating of 25.


requirements for the Project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A). D. The face panels shall be bonded to the perimeter, grid sections, and core with a thermosetting

two component epoxy adhesive. Doors shall be completely reinforced for and shop fabricated to receive all specified hardware. Reinforcement shall be 6061-T6 alloy, 0.250-inch thick, minimum. Doors are not to have tempered hardboard cores. Doors shall be Type D9, heavy duty doors, by U.S. Metals and Manufacturing Corporation; Series 100BE-090 by Cline Aluminum Doors, or approved equal.

E. Louvers, where required, shall be extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, 0.062-inch wall thickness,

inverted ‘V’ blade type, as manufactured by the door supplier and as approved. F. Vision panels shall have glazing bead to receive 1-inch thick insulated glass on exterior doors

and interior doors as scheduled, and 1/4-inch thick glass on all other interior doors.

G. Frames shall be 0.125-inch minimum wall thickness, extruded tubular 6063-T5 aluminum alloy Type 1-3/4-inch by 6-inches OF (OS) U.S. Metals Model DF850, or approved equal, with door stops as follows:

1. Interior, non-acoustical doors or all channel frames: Provide an attached channel door stop

with pile number 3251 by U.S. Metals, or approved equal.

2. Interior Doors: Provide removable door stop Number 770 by Zero Weather Stripping Company, or approved equal.

3. Exterior Doors: Provide removable door stop Number 770 by Zero Weather Stripping

Company, or approved equal.



H. Frame joints and components shall be factory milled and fitted to hairline cracks. Corners shall

be mechanically joined with interlocking 3/16-inch wall, aluminum channel clips and flat head stainless steel screws.

I. Frames shall be completely reinforced for all hardware as specified above for doors. Hinge and

strike mounting plates shall be 0.1875-inch extruded aluminum bar stock. Where indicated, frames shall have transoms and/or sidelights as detailed on the Drawings.

2.03 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Type: two-coat, shop applied, high performance, 70% Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coating based on Arkema Inc, Kynar 500 or Solvay Solexis Hylar 5000 resin, formulated by a licensed Manufacturer and applied by Manufacturer's approved applicator, to meet AAMA 2605.

1. Applicator is to pretreat the aluminum with solutions to remove organic and inorganic surface soils, remove residual oxides, followed by a chrome phosphate conversion coating to which organic coatings will firmly adhere.

D. Approved Manufacturers: PPG Industries, Valspar, Morton, Glidden and Akzo Nobel.

E. Approved Designations: Kynar 500, Hylar 5000, Duranar and SAF 266.

F. Color: Finish color shall be reviewed by the Engineer and approved by Owner from both premium and standard colors available from the Manufacturer.

G. Touch-up paint: Provide matching touch-up paint for minor touch-up of small scratches, abrasions, and fasteners. Paint shall be applied per Manufacturer’s written instructions.

H. Color variation: No more than 2E (CMC) when measured in accordance with AATCC 173-1989.

I. Quality: The surface condition of this finish coat shall be 100 percent free of holidays, drip marks, scratches, roll marks, or abrasions that are visible from a distance of 5-feet in good light when in installed position. Surfaces shall be free of checking, crazing, peeling, or loss of adhesion.

J. Any component not deemed satisfactory in finish shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.04 PACKING

A. Doors shall be individually wrapped in corrugated cardboard with wood strips on vertical edges and banded with metal straps.




A. All frames and fittings shall be installed as specified in Section 06100, in strict accordance with the written recommendations of the Manufacturer and the approved shop drawings. Installation shall be performed by workmen skilled in handling aluminum fabrications.

1. Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive doors. 2. Anchor frames to adjacent construction as indicated in accordance with the Manufacturer's

written instructions. 3. Anchor bottom of each frame to rough floor construction with 3/32-inch thick stainless

steel angle clips secured to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless steel fasteners and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors.

4. Seal any metal-to-metal joints between framing members as specified within Section

07901.

5. Hang doors to produce clearances specified in paragraph entitled ‘Aluminum Doors’ of this Section. After erection, adjust all doors, frames and hardware to operate properly.

B. Doors and hardware shall be installed and adjusted under this Section as specified in Section

06100. C. After erection of doors and frames, precautionary methods shall be employed to adequately

protect exposed surfaces of installed items from damage due to installation of other work or from lime, acid, cement or other harmful compounds.

1. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with dissimilar metals, protect from direct

contact by one or a combination of the following methods:

a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the dissimilar metal.

c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of aluminum paint.

d. Use a non-absorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.

2. In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with aluminum,

provide protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration.

3. Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to frequent moisture and aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. In lieu of painting the aluminum, the Contractor shall have the option of painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of aluminum paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.



4. Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry materials with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect from damage: After erection of doors and frames, precautionary methods shall be employed to adequately protect exposed surfaces of installed items from damage due to installation of other work or from lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds.

B. Prior to completion and acceptance of the work, restore damaged doors and frames to original

condition or replace them with new ones. 3.03 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with the door Manufacturer's written recommended procedure.

B. Do not use any abrasive, caustic or acid cleaning agents.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08311

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install access doors and

frames as specified and scheduled herein. B. Door types and items to be furnished are as follows:

1. Non-fire rated wall access doors and frames. 2. All fasteners, hardware, system reinforcing and appurtenances required.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. B. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. C. Joint sealers are included in Section 07901. D. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. E. Ceramic tile is included in Section 09300. F. Plumbing work is included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, provide Manufacturer's standard

details, product data and catalogs as required to demonstrate compliance with all referenced standards. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components, profiles, product finish, and fire ratings where applicable for access doors and frames.

B. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes,

construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single Manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain Engineer’s acceptance for Manufacturer's standard-size units, which

may vary slightly from sizes indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.



1.05 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to

concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule within submittal. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the job site in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages

with labels legible and intact. B. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. C. Store materials indoors within unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from

moisture, the environment and construction operations. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Furnish a Manufacturer’s warranty against all defects in product workmanship and materials. B. Warranty period shall be 2-years minimum from the date of Substantial Completion.

C. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, any faulty materials or workmanship that

develops during the warranty period at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by

one of the following or approved equal: 1. Babcock-Davis / Cierra Products, Minneapolis, MN. 2. J.L. Industries, Inc., Bloomington, MN. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN. 4. Milcor Limited Partnership, Holland, OH. 5. Nystrom Building Products, Minneapolis, MN.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: Level, cold rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM standards A 167 and A 240, commercial quality.

1. Type: 304. 2. Finish: No. 4 Satin. 3. Graining: Vertical.



B. Access door skins, frame faces and trim shall be re-polished to attain consistent vertical

graining.

C. Fabricate reinforcing material, anchors, supports, inserts, bolts and fasteners from the same type of stainless steel as door face skins. Other non-stainless steel materials such as galvanized and cold or hot rolled steel are not acceptable.

2.03 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush, non-rated access doors and frames with perimeter trim, fabricated from stainless steel as

follows:

1. Locations – Interior, for maintenance access to concealed piping and valve controls, locate one (1) within each Restroom, recessed within masonry wall with gypsum wallboard surface. Size shall be 16-inches by 16-inches.

2. Sizes: As indicated above, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or as required for the

Project. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not required. 4. Door: 14-gauge minimum, cold rolled sheet steel, flush construction. 5. Frame: 16-gauge minimum, cold rolled sheet steel, with continuous 1-inch wide flange

along edge of unit. 6. Hinges: Concealed pin type with automatic spring loaded closer to allow for door

removal, set to open 175-degrees F. 7. Latch Device: Self-latching bolt operated by knurled knob with interior release. 8. Lock: Key operated cylinder cam lock with two keys per lock, keyed alike.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assembly manufactured as an integral unit ready for

installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Stainless steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent

surfaces. Furnish with a sufficient quantity of 1/4-inch mounting holes and appropriate type of fasteners in order to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of finish material.

Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.



E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number of latches required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane

when closed. F. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations regarding the specified finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings for access door and frame are correctly sized and located. B. Verify that project conditions are suitable for installation. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and frame

installation, including rough opening dimensions, locations of supports and inserts, as well as anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery and installation with other trades to avoid any unnecessary delays.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames plumb and level within opening and attach securely to supports with plane of face

panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Position units to provide convenient and proper access to concealed equipment or devices that

require access. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation to ensure proper operation. B. Remove doors and frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and replace at no

additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08315 BLAST RESISTANT DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install custom fabricated steel blast resistant doors and frames, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Blast-resistant, non-rated steel doors and frames. 2. Factory supplied hardware for blast-resistant doors including hinges and latching devices. 3. Built-in anchors for blast-resistant doors.

B. Location and extent of blast-resistant doors and frames shall be as indicated on the Drawings

and Door Schedules. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry mortar fill of metal frames is included in Section 04200. C. Metal fabrications are included in Section 05500. D. Joint sealants are included Section 07901. E. Firestopping is included in Section 07270. F. Steel doors and frames are included in Section 08110. G. Blast resistant overhead doors are included in Section 08362. H. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. I. Shop painting is included in Section 09901. J. Field painting is included in Section 09902. K. In the event of a conflict between the requirements for blast-resistant doors and frames in this

Section and another section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.



1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, and within three weeks of Contract award the

following:

1. Product Data: Submit blast door Manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with the specified requirements.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of blast-resistant doors and frames.

Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at opening, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections.

a. Show all proposed anchorage details and accessory items. 3. Provide schedule of blast-resistant doors and frames using the same reference numbers for

details and openings as those indicated on the Drawings and Door Schedules. 4. Statement of Qualifications. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article

to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. a. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and

addresses of Architects, Engineers and Owners, and other information specified. 5. Test Data: a. Submit independent test data from UL or other recognized licensed testing laboratory,

indicating compliance with the specified blast-resistance requirements. b. Alternatively, when blast resistance is not supported or approved by prototype tests,

design calculations created by a licensed Professional Engineer (PE) may be submitted for review and possible acceptance.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 3. ASTM A366 – Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Steel, Carbon, (0.25

Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled 4. ASTM A568 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-

Alloy, Hot Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements 5. ASTM A569 – Standard Specification for Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-

Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial



6. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

7. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

8. ASTM E330-02 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 9. ASTM F2247 – Standard Test Method for Metal Doors Used in Blast Resistant

Applications (Equivalent Static Load Method)

B. UFC 3-340-02 – Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions

C. ASCE – Design of Blast Resistant Buildings in Petrochemical Facilities

D. PIP STC01018 – Blast Resistant Building Design Criteria

E. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) 1. HMMA 802-92 – Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. HMMA 840-99 – Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 69 – Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems

2. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. Building Materials Directory

2. UL 263 – UL Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 3. UL 10C-98 – UL Standards for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


K. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)



L. American Welding Society (AWS)

M. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition

N. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition

O. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

P. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply


A. Perform Work to meet the minimum requirements of HMMA and NFPA standards. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A minimum of five (5) years of experienced in manufacturing

blast resistant door and frame assemblies systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer to have a documented quality assurance program. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Design and Engineering analysis shall be completed and

submitted by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE). C. Contractor: Blast-resistant door assemblies shall be erected and installed under the supervision

of the door Manufacturer's representative. The Contractor shall be approved in writing by the Manufacturer. Submit letter of compliance to the Engineer prior to installation of the work specified.

D. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting two (2) weeks prior to the start of

installation of door, frame and hardware assemblies. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Engineer, installer, and Manufacturer's representative. Review installation and coordination with other work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Package for protection during transportation and handling. Deliver manufactured doors and

frames cartooned or crated to prevent damage during transit and job site storage. C. Weld minimum two temporary jamb spreaders per frame prior to shipment. D. Remove doors, frames and hardware from wrappings or coverings upon receipt at site and

inspect components for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Engineer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.



E. Store doors and frames in vertical position at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on doors or frames becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation between components.

F. Store materials out of water and covered to protect from damage. Do not store doors in contact

with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. G. Clean and touch up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping and handling with zinc-rich

primer or other product as recommended by the door Manufacturer. 1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Provide a complete blast resistant steel door and frame assembly with associated

hardware to meet the specified design criteria. B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, construct and install custom blast-resistant doors and

frame assembly to the following: 1. Structural Performance (Static Loading): Provide doors capable of withstanding a

maximum blast pressure of 176-psf tested to ASTM E330. 2. Pressure Load: Unseating Type Load for outward swinging single door assembly. 3. Rebound Pressure: Design shall be 100-Percent for static type analysis. 4. Deformation: Plastic (permanent) deformation is not permitted for static type analysis. 5. Deflection: Allowable elastic deflection shall be designed to L/60 for all components. 6. Level of Blast Protection Required: Provide Life Safety (Class A) a. Protect personnel from fragments and falling portions of a structure or equipment. b. Attenuate blast pressures and structural motion to a level consistent with safety

requirements. C. Design Calculations: Blast door Manufacturer shall provide for review and approval, all

applicable structural calculations created, sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer (PE), registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

D. Thermal Resistance: All exterior doors shall be insulated. Provide filler of mineral wool or other

approved insulating material solidly packed full door height to fill voids between inner core reinforcing members. No asbestos products will be allowed.


requirements for the Project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A).



1.08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Provide Manufacturer’s Warranty for One (1) year from date of Substantial

Completion. B. Submit a written guarantee from the blast-resistant door Manufacturer, signed by the installer.

Guarantee shall cover all materials and labor required to correct and replace any defective parts or workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering blast-resistant doors and

frames which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Overly Door Company, Greensburg, PA 15601, (800) 979-7300. 2. Protective Door Industries, Harvey, IL 60426, (708) 331-2515. 3. Or Approved Equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,

complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: commercial-quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and

ASTM A568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with

ASTM A653, with G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 12-gauge galvanized sheet steel or as shown

on the Drawings. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to

be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Fabrication: Welding of the door and frame components shall be in accordance with the

standards of the American Welding Society. Welds are to be sized as required by the structural analysis criteria.

G. Shop-Applied Paint / Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking type,

suitable as a base for finish painting as specified in Section 09902.



2.03 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Provide reinforced steel door and frame configurations as shown on the Drawings and Door

Schedule, fabricated and installed to resist 176-psf static pressure. B. Doors: Outward, swinging type, formed sheet steel, blast-resistant assembly. Door panel to be a

maximum of 2-1/8” and constructed to withstand the specified unseating type load for a pressure of 176-psf.

1. Sheet steel faces, thickness, design, and core suitable to achieve specified blast

performance. 2. Blast resistant construction, longitudinal edges welded, filled and sanded with no visible

edge seams. 3. Top and Bottom Channels: Inverted, recessed, welded steel channels. 4. Weld all structural steel channels flush to top and bottom of door. 5. Weld all hardware reinforcement plates in place.

C. Frames: Heavy-gauge formed steel with reinforcing anchors placed to resist all specified blast forces. Frames shall be suitable for swinging type doors, factory template drilled and tapped for surface applied hardware and sealing devices. 1. Sheet steel and metal thickness appropriate to maintain specified door blast ratings. 2. Provide factory assembled frames with mitred and welded corners.

3. Hinges and latching devices to be factory supplied and pre-installed. 4. Provide and install three silencers for single doors on the strike side. 5. Affix permanent metal nameplates to door and frame, indicating Manufacturer's name, door

tag, model number, and performance ratings. D. Hardware: Factory prepared and reinforced, field applied hinging, latching, and perimeter

sealing devices shall be provided to withstand the specified blast forces.

1. Door hardware shall include, but not be limited to, perimeter seals and sweeps, self-closing and self-latching equipment, and door position switches.

2. Provide Manufacturer's standard extra heavy weight hinges, rim type exit device, mortise

lock (at exterior doors), automatic closer, bolts, anchors and accessories required to comply with the structural design criteria.

3. Threshold and perimeter seals shall be factory supplied.



4. All hardware shall all be tested and approved for blast-resistant doors to resist 176-psf static pressure.

5. Swinging door hardware shall all be factory supplied and pre-installed whenever possible,

as recommended by the blast door Manufacturer. 6. Hinges and latching devices shall be supplied complete with the door and frame in

conformance with the blast resistant requirements of Project. Hinges and latching devices shall be pre-installed on the door and frame assembly at the factory.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Factory Finish: All exposed and unexposed surfaces of doors and frames, except hardware, shall be shop painted using a rust inhibitive zinc chromate primer. Factory applied shop painting shall consist of one coat of gray metallic colored primer that is compatible with the finish coating.

B. Standards: Finish painting shall comply with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) ‘Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products’ for recommendations regarding applying and designating finishes.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Finish Painting: Field painting shall be provided as specified in Section 09902. Final color shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner to match the adjacent standard doors and frames.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prior to starting work or processing Shop/Erection Drawings and fabrication, field verify all

framing dimensions and installation conditions at the project site, including heights, widths and depths at all locations.

B. Examine areas to receive blast-resistant doors and frames to ensure that all substrate conditions

are acceptable for product installation in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. Field verify that rough openings are plumb, square and sized to receive the completed door and frame assembly in accordance with the door Manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.

C. Report to the Owner’s Representative any conditions that could adversely affect the proper

installation of the specified work or could require remedial work. D. Examine the areas and field conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed.

Correct any conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until detrimental or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



E. Starting the specified work of this Section shall imply the Contractor's acceptance of the existing

field conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components including doors, frames and hardware in accordance with the blast door

Manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Install doors and frame assemblies to HMMA 840 standards, in accordance with NFPA 80, and

as required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). C. Coordinate with the adjacent 12-inch thick reinforced concrete wall construction for placement

of door frame anchors. D. Allow for deflection to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to the steel frame. E. Doors: Hang doors in a workmanlike manner. Damaged doors shall be replaced at no additional

cost to the Owner. Cutting, drilling, fitting, or other similar-type work to the doors will not be permitted at the site, except for attachment of surface-applied hardware.

F. Frames: Set frames plumb, square, level and at the correct elevation. Align and brace securely

until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion shields and bolts or powder-driven studs. Build wall anchors into walls or secure to adjoining construction as indicated.

G. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and proper function. Refine adjustments as required

for smooth and balanced door movement. H. Shop primer and painting shall be provided as specified in Section 09901. I. Finish painting shall be provided as specified in Section 09902. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation tolerances of the installed frame shall be tested for squareness, alignment, twist and

plumbness, and are to be no more than 1/16-inch (±) out of position in compliance with HMMA 841. Doors or frames that exceed this erection tolerance shall be adjusted until the door opening meets the specified criteria.


A. Provide a qualified Manufacturer’s representative to instruct installers on the proper installation and adjustment of blast door and frame assemblies.

B. Provide Manufacturer’s representative to inspect door installation, and test for a minimum of ten (10) cycles of operation. Correct any deficient doors at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.05 BLAST RESISTANT DOOR SCHEDULE

A. Blast Resistant Doors and Frames:

Doo

r T

ag

Roo

m

Nu

mb

er

Nom

inal

D

oor

Siz

e

Th

ick

nes

s

Mat

eria

l

Doo

r T

ype

Fir

e R

atin

g

Bla

st R

atin

g

Com

men

ts

DB-100G B-100 3’-0” x 7’-2” 1 3/4” GS F N/A 176 psf Phase 1 DB-100H B-100 3’-0” x 7’-2” 1 3/4” GS F N/A 176 psf Phase 1 DB-111B B-111 3’-0” x 7’-2” 1 3/4” GS F N/A 176 psf Alternate 9 DB-112B B-112 3’-0” x 7’-2” 1 3/4” GS F N/A 176 psf Alternate 9

Material types: GS = Galvanized Steel / SS = Stainless Steel Door types: F = Flush / N = Narrow-Lite Glass Blast Ratings: psf = Pounds per square foot / psi = Pounds per square inch

Note: Refer to the complete project Door Schedules for additional information on Phase 1 (Drawing A-19) and CNG Fuel Room Alternate 9 (Drawing A-31).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install overhead doors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The overhead doors on the Project shall include the following types:

1. Overhead Sectional type, insulated exterior steel doors with windows 2. Overhead Coiling type, fire-rated steel doors. 3. Overhead Coiling type, fire-rated steel counter doors.

C. Where scheduled or specified at overhead doors, provide the following:

1. Electrical motor with controls and back-up hand chain operation as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified herein. 2. Microwave motion sensor with transmitter for automatic opening of doors by vehicular

traffic as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 3. Light curtains along door track, with transmitter and receiver units for automatic reversing

of doors, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. D. Where required at overhead doors, all associated motors, starters, push button stations, motion

sensors, reversing edge sensors, light curtains, transmitter and receiver units, power and control wiring from each disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed under this Section and in accordance with the requirements of Division 16.

E. All overhead door assemblies shall meet the electrical classification required for the specific

area where the door is located. Refer to Drawing E-3 for Electrical Classifications on the Project and Division 16 for additional requirements.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Steel framing is included in Division 5. D. Miscellaneous Metals are included in Section 05500.



E. Carpentry is included in Section 06100. F. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. G. Blast resistant overhead doors are included in Section 08362. H. High speed overhead rubber doors are included in Section 08370. I. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. J. Glazing is included in Section 08800. K. Field Painting is included in Section 09902. L. Signage is included in Section 10400. M. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 16. N. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110. O. Wires, conductors and cables are included in Section 16120. P. Electrical power supply, circuit breakers and disconnect switches for each motor operated door

shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. Q. Electrical Classifications for the Project are included on Drawing E-3.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, Manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for the rolling doors (overhead coiling and sectional), motion sensors, light curtains, transformer and receiver units, and all required accessories. Include both general published product data and specific data prepared for this Project.

B. Shop Drawings – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, Manufacturer’s

complete shop drawings prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall include detailed plans and elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, materials and finish of all door components including: door curtain, hood, guides, hardware, anchors and bracing, motion sensors, light curtains, transformers and receivers, wiring diagrams, motor information and characteristics, and hand chain operator. Include the specifications and installation data for all proposed overhead door products, appurtenances and accessories.

C. Certifications – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification of leak tightness based on actual tests conducted on this door, or a door similar in design, to verify that it will withstand the specified hydrostatic pressure with no evident leakage.

2. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification for wind loadings on complete door assembly,

including anchorage to building.



3. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification that the thermal efficiency of the proposed exterior

doors (both overhead coiling and sectional) meet the minimum IECC requirements for the Project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A).

4. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification letter for all required NEMA rating(s) on the complete

overhead door assembly. D. Printed Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data – Submit the following:

1. Wiring diagrams: ‘As-built’ straight line wiring and schematic diagrams showing electrical

connections and control circuitry. 2. Instructions showing installation sequence and procedures, proper door operation,

adjustment and alignment procedures. 3. Lubrication chart indicating lubrication points and type of lubricant recommended for each

component or piece of equipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

2. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 3. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron, Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 5. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wires, Profiles and Tubes 6. ASTM B308 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural

Shapes 7. ASTM E119 – Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 8. ASTM E90 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements


1. AAMA 605.2 – Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels



C. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. Aluminum Association (AA)

E. National Electric Code (NEC), Articles 500 through 505

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 2. MG 1 – Motors and Generators G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. Building Materials Directory 2. UL 263 – UL Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

I. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

J. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition

K. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition



A. Qualifications of Manufacturers:

1. Doors shall be manufactured by a company with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the fabrication and installation of rolling door systems (both overhead coiling and sectional). Proposed alternate door Manufacturers, which are not listed in this specification, shall submit evidence of ability to meet the performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five (5) projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five (5) years.

2. Microwave Motion Sensors shall be manufactured by a company with a minimum of three

(3) years documented experience specializing in the fabrication and installation of motion sensors for overhead doors. Proposed alternate product Manufacturers, which are not listed in this specification, shall submit evidence of ability to meet the performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five (5) projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past three (3) years.



3. Light Curtains shall be manufactured by a company with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience specializing in the fabrication and installation of light curtains for overhead doors. Proposed alternate product Manufacturers, which are not listed in this specification, shall submit evidence of ability to meet the performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five (5) projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past three (3) years.

B. Qualifications of Installer:

1. Installation of all overhead doors shall be performed by a company that is an authorized representative of the door Manufacturer. Proposed installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of both overhead coiling and sectional doors.

2. Installation of all microwave motion door sensors shall be performed by a company that is

an authorized representative of the motion sensor Manufacturer. Proposed installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of microwave type motion sensors at overhead doors.

3. Installation of all light curtains, transformers and receivers shall be performed by a

company that is an authorized representative of the light curtain Manufacturer. Proposed installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of light curtains at overhead doors.

C. Single Source Responsibility – Provide doors, guides, motors and related primary components

from one Manufacturer for each type of door. Provide any secondary door components from a source that is acceptable to the Manufacturer of primary door components.

D. Pre-Installation Conference – Prior to the installation of any overhead doors, motion sensors or

light curtains, the various Manufacturer's representatives shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products.

1. This meeting shall establish the procedures necessary to maintain optimum working

conditions and to coordinate this overhead door installation and associated sensor controls with related and adjacent work.

2. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held, who is in attendance and

meeting minutes shall be sent to both the Engineer and Owner.

E. Electrical Requirements:

1. The overhead doors shall be supplied with all motor starters and controls required for a complete and fully operational door system.

a. The door vendor shall furnish and install the high-speed overhead door including the

motor starters, pushbuttons, sensors, motion detectors and other electrical devices for a complete operating system.

b. The door installer electrical demarcation point shall be the fused disconnect switch install within 15-feet of the door motor.



c. The Electrical Contractor shall install the fused disconnect and the door installer shall

provide all conduit, cable and all controls from that disconnect to the overhead door and associated electrical equipment.

d. The electrical installation shall follow all Division 16 requirements.

2. Door Manufacturer shall refer to the Electrical Classification drawings and provide all

materials in accordance with the drawings and the atmosphere where the equipment is being installed.

3. Overhead doors, where indicated on the Drawings, shall have an end switch dry contact for

the motor to connect to the Building Management System (BMS).

a. Overhead door controller shall accept a normally open dry contract to automatically open or close the door assembly when commanded from the BMS.

b. Signals from the BMS shall override any other push button controls or vehicle motion

detection systems and shall completely open the exterior overhead doors. 4. Electric power required for standard operators is 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz. 5. Proper NEMA enclosures, which are suitable for use within the electrical classification for

the environment in which the high-speed overhead doors are located, shall be provided for the complete motor and control system. Refer to Division 16 and Electrical Drawings for the appropriate Electrical Classification at each overhead door location.



B. Store materials in protective coverings in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and

construction operations. C. Handle all materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall supply a standard 2-year written warranty from the overhead door Manufacturer to cover defects in materials and/or workmanship on all of the overhead door components.

B. Contractor shall supply an additional project specific warranty from the overhead door supplier

that extends five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion and covers all defects in materials and/or workmanship on all overhead door components.

C. Contractor shall supply a two (2) year written warranty from the motion sensor Manufacturer

starting from the date of Substantial Completion to cover any defects in materials and/or



workmanship on all of the components associated with the motion sensor system including transmitters, antenna and remote controls.

D. The warranty specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner



A. All exterior overhead doors and components shall be designed in accordance with the 2009 International Building Code using the following design criteria:

1. Basic wind speed (3 second gust): 90 mph. 2. Exposure Category B. 3. Wind Factor IW: 1.0.

B. Provide additional, non-standard door bracing, reinforcements, or heavier gauge materials as

necessary to conform to the required wind load. C. Provide coatings or other separation for dissimilar metals where applicable.

2.02 OVERHEAD DOORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s for overhead doors include the following, or approved equal: 1. Overhead Door Corporation. 2. McKeon Door Company. 3. The Cookson Company. 4. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. B. Exterior Overhead Sectional Doors: 1. Doors shall be Thermacore Series 595 as manufactured by the Overhead Door Corporation

or approved equal. 2. Doors shall be insulated with CFC-free, fully encapsulated, foamed-in-place polyurethane

with EPDM rubber thermal break between the internal and external skins. 3. Thermal Efficiency – Door shall have a minimum R-Value of 14.41 (U-Value of 0.069). 4. Steel Door Panels – 1-5/8 inches thick with minimum 20 gauge, roll-formed, hot-dipped

galvanized steel with textured surfaces. End stiles shall be 16-gauge steel.



5. Air infiltration – 0.08 cfm at both 15 mph and 25 mph. 6. Sound Transmission Rating – Class 26. 7. Windload – Door shall be designed for the Structural wind criteria specified above and

shall meet the minimum Building Code requirements. Windload shall meet ANSI 102 and if necessary to meet the Building Code requirements, provide higher windload package for each exterior overhead door. Should a conflict exist between any requirements, the most stringent criteria shall apply on the Project.

8. Springs – High-usage package with springs designed for minimum 100,000 life cycle for

high frequency use. 9. Doors shall be electrically operated (motorized) as scheduled on the Drawings with back-

up manual chain hoist operation and bottom sensing edge. 10. Motors, where applicable, shall be 1-hp continuous heavy duty type with instant reverse

and automatic reset thermal overload. a. Motor to be model JST Drawbar Operator by the Overhead Door Corporation or

approved equal. b. Motor shall be provided by the same Manufacturer as the overhead sectional door on

which it is to be used. c. Proper NEMA enclosures, which are suitable for use within the electrical classification

for the environment in which the overhead door is located, shall be provided for the complete motor and control system. Refer to Division 16 and Electrical Drawings for the appropriate Electrical Classification at each overhead door location.

d. The disconnect switch for each motor operated door shall be furnished and installed

adjacent to overhead door by others under Division 16. e. Electronic transmitters shall be supplied for remote door operation.

11. Warranty for product delamination shall extend 10-years minimum from the date of

Substantial Completion. 12. Provide door sizes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Mount doors to the

inside face of exterior masonry walls or building structure. 13. Heavy-duty 3” steel guide rail track for added durability at doors, configured for a 12” lift

clearance. 14. Vision lites with thermal glazing shall be supplied at all exterior doors. Provide the window

size and configuration as indicated on the Drawings.



15. The complete overhead door assembly shall be factory primed and painted on all sides. Finish color shall be selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner from the door Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

16. In addition to the items listed above, provide the following features at each exterior

sectional door:

a. Jamb weatherstrip b. Posi-Tension drums c. Safety bottom fixture d. EPDM rubber header seal

C. Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Doors shall be Fire Door Series 630 with F-265 Slats as manufactured by the Overhead

Door Corporation or approved equal.

2. Steel Door Panels – 1-5/8 inches thick with minimum 20 gauge, roll-formed, hot-dipped galvanized steel with textured surfaces. End stiles shall be 16-gauge steel.

3 Doors shall be electrically operated (motorized) as scheduled on the Drawings with back-

up manual chain hoist operation and bottom sensing edge. 4. Motors, where applicable, shall be 1-hp continuous heavy duty type with instant reverse

and automatic reset thermal overload. a. Motor to be model RDB with Fire Sentinel automatic closure by the Overhead Door

Corporation or approved equal. b. Motor shall be provided by the same Manufacturer as the overhead sectional door on




adjacent to overhead door by others under Division 16.

5. Provide door sizes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Mount doors to the inside face of interior masonry walls.

6. The complete overhead door assembly shall be factory primed and painted on all sides.

Finish color shall be selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner from the door Manufacturer’s standard available colors.



D. Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Counter Doors: 1. Doors shall be Counter Fire Door Series 641 with F-128 Slats as manufactured by the

Overhead Door Corporation or approved equal.

2. Steel Door Panels – 1-5/8 inches thick with minimum 22 gauge, stainless steel surfaces.

3 Doors shall be electrically operated (motorized) as scheduled on the Drawings with back-up manual chain hoist operation and bottom sensing edge.

4. Motors, where applicable, shall be 1-hp continuous heavy duty type with instant reverse

and automatic reset thermal overload. a. Motor to be model RDB with Fire Sentinel automatic closure by the Overhead Door

Corporation or approved equal. b. Motor shall be provided by the same Manufacturer as the overhead sectional door on





5. Provide door sizes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Mount doors to the inside face of interior masonry walls.

E. The counterbalance, coil brackets, and hood enclosure shall be fabricated in accordance with the

Manufacturer’s standard practice. The overhead coil shall be housed in an aluminum hood that is laterally reinforced. Guides shall be fabricated of structural steel of sufficient size, thickness and of depth to retain the curtains in the guides against the wind load specified. Door guides shall be provided with anchors and continuous weld-on wind lock bars. Provide wind locks at every 6th slat (20-psf minimum). All steel door components shall be galvanized after fabrication.

F. Sensing Edge Protection – Door bottoms shall be provided with a combination safety device and

weatherseal. The safety device shall be an electrical type device that works in conjunction with the operator control. A compressible sensor strip shall be mounted along the bottom edge of the rolling door curtain. When the door comes in contact with an object during its downward travel, this strip shall compress and activate an electrical control, which would automatically stop and reverse the curtain movement, causing it to return to the fully raised position. The compressible strip shall also serve as a continuous weather strip along the bottom edge of the door.

G. Electric Motor Operation – At all overhead door locations, provide UL listed electric operator to

move overhead coiling door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot or more than 1-foot per second.



1. Motors shall be rated for 480V, 3- phase, 60 Hz electrical service. Control unit shall be wired for 24 Volts and a suitable control transformer shall be supplied.



2. Proper NEMA enclosures, which are suitable for use within the electrical classification for the environment in which the overhead door is located, shall be provided for the complete motor and control system. Refer to Division 16 and Electrical Drawings for the appropriate Electrical Classification at each overhead door location.

3. The disconnect switch for each motor operated door shall be furnished and installed


H. Operator Controls – Push button operated control stations suitable for surface mounting at both interior and exterior sides of doors.

1. Power operated doors shall be controlled by a 3 operator push button station marked

“OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP” and an automatic rotary limit switch that will break the switch at termination of travel.

2. Provide optional photocell safety device for time delay door close activated by photocell. 3. High efficiency worm gearing, running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a

spring-set solenoid-operated brake completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture and a magnetic reversing contactor within an enclosure that is suitable for use within the environment classification for which the overhead door is located.

4. Continuous hand chain emergency operator that will not affect the timing of the limit

switch shall be provided to operate doors in case of power failure or removal of motor.

I. Operator shall be designed to transmit motion to the door without shock and automatically release motor from driving unit prior to stalling so as to prevent damage to unit from any type of overload. An efficient overload protective device, which will break the control circuit and eliminate any possible damage to motor winding shall be both heat and current sensing and shall be installed integrally with the unit. Operators shall have mechanical advantage of 3:1.

J. Weatherseals – Provide vinyl weather-stripping along bottom bar, on each exterior and interior

guide, exterior lintel, and interior hood. K. Bottom Bar – Two aluminum angles, minimum thickness 1/8-inch bolted back to back to

reinforce curtain in the guides. L. Guides – Three galvanized structural steel angles with minimum thickness of 1/4-inch, bolted

together with 3/8” fasteners to form a channel along the inside face of wall for the curtain to travel. The wall angle portion shall be continuous and fastened to the surrounding structure with minimum 1/2” fasteners. Guides shall be weatherstripped with a vinyl weather seal at each jamb, on both the exterior and interior sides of the curtain.

M. Brackets – Galvanized steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. Brackets shall be

constructed of galvanized steel not less than 1/4-inch thick and shall be bolted to the wall angle with minimum 1/2-inch fasteners.

N. Counterbalance – Helical torsion type spring shall be designed for 100,000 life cycle for high

frequency use. Barrel shall be a tube or pipe barrel of not less than 4-inches in diameter,



supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03” per foot of the opening width. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an exterior adjusting tension wheel.

O. Hood – Aluminum with intermediate supports as required for length. Provide with internal

hood baffle and perimeter weatherseals. P. Motion Sensors

1. Motion sensor based on Falcon Microwave Motion Sensor by BEA, Inc. or approved equal

with 24.125 GHz transmitter frequency. 2. Sensor shall utilize a Planer flat antenna and can discriminate between vehicular traffic and

pedestrians at 30o max. tilt angle. Detection speed 2.2 sec. minimum with NEMA 4 enclosure.

3. ABS and polycarbonate housing with black anodized aluminum adjustable mount bracket,

remote control transmitters, red/green LEDs, and hardware for installation of unit.

4. Cable to have crimp-style connector to prevent water intension through feed cable.

5. Sensor mounting height 11.5’ to 23’ above finished floor and shall be placed such that any mechanical or other permanent obstruction is to be avoided without disrupting the integrity of the sensing device for vehicles and people. Multiple units per door shall be provided if obstructions such as door motors, guides, springs or other equipment obstructs the proper operation as determined by the Manufacturer’s representative.

2.03 FINISH

A. All overhead door components shall be either galvanized or stainless steel. B. Galvanizing shall be of zinc applied by a hot-dipped process. For sheet steel, zinc shall be

applied at not less than 0.90 oz/sq ft of steel and in a manner as to provide a ductile coating, tightly adherent to base metal and conforming to bend tests conducted in accordance with ASTM A653. Structural shapes and similar heavy steel shall be galvanized per ASTM A123 and A153 as applicable. Provide a phosphate coating for paint adhesion at the factory. The Manufacturer's certificate shall be furnished to the Engineer stating that galvanizing has been done as specified herein.

C. Galvanized components shall be shipped with no additional surface treatment for priming and

finishing in the field. Baked-on, Kynar 500 (PVF) Polyvinyl dine Fluoride (by Smith, or approved equal), prime painted surfaces which are compatible with the finished paint specified in Division 9 may be acceptable if approved. Exterior color shall be selected by the Owner or the Engineer.


A. Field verify the actual dimensions and examine substrates, supports and other conditions under which this work is to be performed.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. All doors and components shall be installed and adjusted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions, the details shown on the Drawings and the approved shop drawings.

B. Strictly comply with the door Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.

Coordinate door installation with all adjacent work to ensure proper operating clearances and allow for maintenance.

C. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.

D. Motion sensors shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. Sensors mounted on the

building interior will require support framing below overhead section door spanning from guardrail to guardrail.

E. A knowledgeable representative of BEA (or approved equal) shall be present during and shall oversee the testing of motion sensors. The Manufacturer’s representative shall program and establish transmitter operation, review and demonstrate all proper procedures for this process to the Owner, where at least two (2) of the Owner’s representatives are present.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Test all overhead doors and motion sensors for proper operation. Electrically operated doors shall be tested in both the manual and electric modes of operation.

B. Make required adjustments to provide proper and smooth operation without binding or

distortion as approved by door Manufacturer.

C. Adjust the location of motion sensors as required for proper door operation based on vehicle positioning. Test the motions system on each overhead door to ensure the proper operation of the system and repair or replace components as required to provide a fully functional system.

D. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces

using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by the Manufacturer of material or product being cleaned.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed overhead door assemblies including motion sensor system against any potential damage from other construction work.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08362 BLAST RESISTANT OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials and services required to execute and complete all items of work in connection with furnishing and installing the Blast Resistant Overhead Doors described herein. All work shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including but not be limited to the following:

1. Blast resistant, fire-rated, vertical lifting, steel overhead doors.

2. Factory supplied blast resistant door hardware. 3. Factory supplied blast resistant electric door operators.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Steel framing is included in Division 5. C. Metal fabrications are included in Division 5. D. Firestopping is included in Section 07270. E. Joint sealants are included Section 07901. F. Blast resistant doors and frames are included in Section 08315. G. Overhead doors are included in Section 08331. H. High speed overhead rubber doors are included in Section 08370. I. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. J. Shop painting is included in Section 09901. K. Field painting is included in Section 09902. L. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 16.



M. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110. N. Wires, conductors and cables are included in Section 16120. O. Disconnect switches and circuit breakers are included in Division 16. P. Electrical Classifications are included on Drawing E-3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, detailed shop

drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details for the blast resistant steel overhead door assembly, with all fittings and appurtenances provided. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Statement of Qualifications: For firms and persons specified in ‘Quality Assurance’ Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects or Engineers and Owners, must have an annual audit and review of their quality assurance program, and other information specified.

3. Manufacturer’s standard written Warranty. B. Product Data: Include Manufacturer product data and printed literature, construction details,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, product certificates, and finishes for the blast resistant steel overhead door components.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings of all work, and list the location in the building

for each door. Clearly show and describe in detail, detailed door assemblies, and adjacent construction, including elevations, sections, and details of door, track, hardware, and operating components, dimensions, finishes and relationship of door, frames, track, hardware and operating components to adjacent construction.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors

available for units with factory-applied finishes. E. Product Certificates: Signed by the Manufacturer of the blast-resistant overhead door system,

certifying that products furnished comply with all specified requirements.

1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE). F. Test Data:

1. Submit independent test data from UL or other approved and recognized licensed testing laboratory, indicating compliance with the specified fire-resistance rating and blast-resistance requirements.



2. When blast resistance is not supported by prototype tests, design calculations by a licensed Professional Engineer (PE) shall be accepted.

G. Printed Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data: Submit the following:

1. Wiring diagrams: ‘As-built’ straight line wiring and schematic diagrams showing electrical connections and control circuitry.

2. Instructions showing operation. 3. Lubrication chart indicating lubrication points and type of lubricant recommended for

equipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Equipment and installation shall comply with local, state and federal laws and with other mandatory requirements. Completed installation must comply with all laws and regulations and any changes or alterations required by the authorized inspector or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be made without any additional cost to the Owner.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.

4. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 5. ASTM F2247 – Standard Test Method for Metal Doors Used in Blast Resistant

Applications (Equivalent Static Load Method).

C. UFC 3-340-02 – Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions.

D. ASCE – Design of Blast Resistant Buildings in Petrochemical Facilities.

E. PIP STC01018 – Blast Resistant Building Design Criteria.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 69 – Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems. 2. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.




H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)



L. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition

M. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

N. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply


A. Installation work shall only be completed by the door Manufacturer or by an installation specialist, properly licensed or franchised for installation work, and approved by the door Manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain blast-resistant, fire-rated, vertical lifting overhead doors through one

source from a single product Manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from the blast-resistant overhead door Manufacturer. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience manufacturing

blast resistant overhead door and frame assemblies, similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer to have an annual audit of its quality assurance program. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Engineering design analysis shall be completed by a qualified

Professional Engineer (PE). D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting two (2) weeks prior to the start of

installation of overhead doors, hardware and operator assemblies. Require attendance of all parties directly affecting work of this Section, including contractor(s), Engineer, installer, and Manufacturer's representative. Review installation and coordination with the work of other trades on the Project.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Must be listed and labeled as defined within

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and marked for the intended use. Electrical equipment installed on these blast-resistant overhead door assemblies must be suitable for Class 1, Division 2 hazardous locations.

F. Door system shall bear labeling for the special purpose type fire door equipment from the

following standards:



1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – Reference 0230-GSXZ

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) – Standard #80 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in sequence to meet the installation schedule on Project and in advance of

product delivery, arrange for off-the-ground and covered storage locations. Only materials scheduled to be erected within 48-hours may be stored on site. Other materials will have to be stored off site.

B. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600. C. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package all products with suitable protection during transportation and handling. D. Handling: Remove door panels, door hardware and operators from wrappings or coverings upon

receipt on site and inspect for damage. E. Store in vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between components.

Store materials out of water and covered to protect from damage. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

F. Protect all other adjacent work from the work of this Section. Replace and damaged work,

which cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored, at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Clean and touch up any scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling with zinc-

rich primer or other repair product approved by the door Manufacturer. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The

door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights. Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period: One (1) year minimum from the date of Substantial Completion, provide

to the Owner a written guarantee, warranting the blast-resistant overhead door assemblies against any defects including materials and/or workmanship.



2. With proper maintenance, commencing from the date of final acceptance of the Project,

motors and operators shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year. State that all door and associated control work that becomes defective during the guarantee period shall be repaired promptly, to the requirements of these Specifications and at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Blast resistant, lifting type overhead doors shall be Class B (90-minute) fire-rated, manually

controlled, electronically operated, four (4) leaf type, Model VLFD, as designed, engineered and manufactured by International Door, Inc., Canton, MI 48187, (734) 459-3000; or approved equal.

1. The use of the above Manufacturer's name and model number is for the purpose of

establishing the standard of quality and general door configuration required. Alternate product Manufacturer’s providing evidence of meeting all of the defined door design criteria may be considered as an approved equal on the Project.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Door shall be designed and reinforced horizontally to withstand minimum blast pressure of 176

psf with the deflection limited to the span divided by 120. Sheet steel faces, thickness, design, and core shall be suitable to achieve the specified blast performance.

B. Provide standard counterweight box and guide tower. Door and counterweight guides shall be

self-supporting. C. The steel vertical lift weight counterbalanced fire-rated /blast-resistant doors shall be for the

protection of wall openings not exceeding 12’-8” in width and 14’-0” in height, when installed in reinforced concrete openings, as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Provide a certificate of inspection for the necessary oversized steel vertical lift weight

counterbalanced doors and perimeter steel frames on the Project. D. Door hardware shall be super heavy duty, industrial type. Door guides and supports shall be

designed and fabricated to withstand 176 psf blast loads. Weld hardware reinforcement plates in place.

E. Provide cables, cable drum, sheaves, jamb guides, counterweight assembly, tracks, brackets,

safety devices, door silencers, and all other related hardware as recommended by the blast door Manufacturer for a secure installation and proper door operation.

F. Blast resistant, lifting type overhead doors shall be Fire-Rated at 90-minutes (B-Label) for use

within a 2-hour fire-resistance rated wall assembly. Door labels shall be classified with a maximum temperature rise of 250-degrees F in 30 minutes.



1. When doors are installed on only one face of the wall, heat responsive (fusible links) units shall be provided and located on each side of the wall and so interconnected that the actuation of any one of them will permit the door to close when in the hold open position.

2. Steel through-wall type sleeves for above devices shall be furnished and installed in the

reinforced concrete blast wall for each door location. Size of these wall penetrations shall be minimized, filled with UL approved firestopping materials to maintain the 2-hour fire-rating of the wall, and properly sealed to withstand the 176 psf blast loads.

3. Provide continuous UL approved fire seals around the full perimeter of the door opening to

maintain the fire-rating of the wall assembly. G. Emergency release for manual operation shall be provided in case of power failure. H. Structural steel jambs shall be provided around the perimeter of the door opening for proper

mounting of the door assembly. I. Door shall consist of four (4) leaf type, vertically lifting flush panels, with 5-feet maximum

headroom above the overhead door head. 1. Door panels shall be fully insulated and constructed of 14-gauge interior flat face sheets

(galvanized steel) and 12-gauge exterior flat face sheets (galvanized steel). 2. Blast resistant construction, mechanically inter-locked panels shall be welded, filled and

sanded with visible edge seams. 3. Top and bottom channels shall be full width and shall form a ship-lap joint between

sections. Weld structural steel channels flush to top and bottom of door. J. Provide intrinsically safe, reversing type, safety edge along the bottom of each door assembly. K. Safety Catches: in the case of a cable failure the upper blades will be equipped with heavy duty

factory welded catches. The safety catches will prevent the upper sections from falling further than the section immediately below.

L. Fail-Safety Device: The door will be equipped with a fail safety device that will provide the

following features:

1. Instantly locking bottom section into both weight box and guide when one or both counterweight chains are broken or slacked

2. Instantly cuts power to the motor preventing further damage.

3. Maximum permissible engagement is 6-inches.

4. Eliminates the need for side locks. M. Affix permanent metal nameplates to door and frame, indicating Manufacturer's name, model

number, and performance ratings for blast-resistance (176 psf) and fire-ratings (90-minute).



2.03 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Vertical lifting overhead blast door assembly shall be manufactured in accordance with the door

design criteria, approved shop drawings, and the door Manufacturer’s design recommendations. Door shall be fully insulated with nominal 1-1/2 pound density mineral wool insulation, for full thickness of panel. Door panels shall be faced on the exterior side with minimum 12-gauge steel to withstand 176 psf blast pressure, and interior with 14-gauge steel.

B. Stiles and rails shall be of structural steel sections, not smaller than three inch channels, with all

joints welded and ground smooth. Bracing shall consist of horizontal and vertical structural sections.

C. Equipment

1. Vertical lifting door guides and counterweight box shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes or plates bolted or welded together to provide ample strength at their connections in performing their proper functions. Counterweights shall be guided by UHMW for full travel of door height. Access to the counter weight box shall be furnished by removable 14- GA HRS flat sheet covers up to 8-feet in height.

2. Provisions shall be made on the leaves for application and internal reinforcement of any attached door hardware.

3. Door leaves shall be suspended on plow steel wire rope from machined steel sheaves and lifting drums to counterweights located at one side of the opening.

4. Sheaves, rollers and drums shall have anti-friction sealed bearings.

5. Wire rope shall have the capacity to sustain the dead weight of the door with an additional allowance of 25 percent of impact, all with a minimum safety factor of 10.

D. Flexible, fire-resistant weather seals are provided at top, meeting rails, bottom and sides. Seals

are secured with bolts and continuous steel retainers for easy replacement. Weather strip material shall be designed to withstand a melting temperature of 3000-degrees F. Door bottom weather seal shall be a safety type as specified under ‘Reversing Fail Safe Safety Edge.’

E. Primer: Provide factory applied rust inhibitive zinc chromate primer. 2.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The door shall be supplied with all motor starters and controls required for a complete and fully

operational door system. The vendor shall furnish and install the overhead door including the motor starters, pushbuttons, motion detectors and other electrical devices for a complete operating system. The door installer electrical demarcation point shall be the fused disconnect switch install within 15 feet of the door motor. The electrical contractor shall install the fused disconnect and the door installer shall provide all conduit, cable and all controls from that disconnect to the door and associated electrical equipment. The electrical installation shall follow all Division 16 requirements.



B. Door Manufacturer shall refer to the classification drawings and provide all materials in accordance with the drawings and the atmosphere that the equipment is being installed.

C. Overhead door controller shall accept a normally open dry contract to automatically open or

close the door assembly when commanded from the building control system. 2.05 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of the size and capacity as recommended by

the door Manufacturer for door and operational life specified with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, sheaves, racks, levers, cables, brakes and accessories required for proper door operation.

B. Door Manufacturer shall furnish and install electric operator. Operator shall be of heavy duty

type furnished by the door Manufacturer. Operator shall include an adjustable torque limiting friction clutch.

C. Door operator shall include foot mounted, standard frame, totally enclosed Electric motor

driving a separate caliper disc brake, and emergency hand chain mechanism with electric interlock.

1. Door operator shall be factory wired to a terminal strip within a NEMA 12 enclosure. 2. Limit switches shall be rated NEMA 4, 6P & 13 and shall be plug-in type when located in

general purpose, non-hazardous areas and shall be rated NEMA 7 or intrinsically safe construction in hazardous areas.

3. Provide guard at the “V” belt between the motor and gear reducer assembly. 4. Fusible link actuated, self closing mechanism shall be included for all fire-rated doors. 5. Electric operators shall be designed and installed so that the door can be operated by the

door with smooth acceleration and deceleration at a rate of 3/4 to 1-foot per second. 6. The door control panel /safety disconnect switch shall be furnished in a NEMA 12

enclosure when located in the general purpose, non-hazardous area or shall be furnished in a NEMA 7/9 rated enclosure when mounted in a hazardous area.

7. A push-button control station in a NEMA 7 rated enclosure shall be furnished on both sides

of the door. 8. Electric power required for standard operators is 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz. 9. An intrinsically safe safety edge shall be included on the leading edge of the bottom leaf to

stop the downward travel of the door upon contact with an obstruction. Operation of the safety edge shall cause a reversal of the door travel to the full open position. Failure of the safety edge or its components shall prevent closing operation.



10. Motor Speed: 1800 rpm minimum. 11. Explosion Proof Motors: Provide sealed electrical equipment that is suitable for installation

within Class 1 / Division 2 / Group C or Class 1 / Division 1 / Group D hazardous locations where applicable.

a. The unit shall be UL tested and approved. b. The unit shall be installed in conformance with all NEC requirements.

12. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following.

a. Lincoln b. Marathon c. Reliance d. US Motor

2.06 REVERSING FAIL SAFE SAFETY EDGE A. Door Manufacturer shall provide and install a rubber-encased, reverse action safety edge

mechanism on the electrically-operated vertical lift fine/blast doors.

1. The system is continuously energized and operates through the electrical system to stop the downward travel of the door on contact with any obstruction, providing an instantaneous reversal of the door travel to the full open position.

2. Failure of any component prevents closing of door.

3. A multi-conductor cord from an electrical junction box on the bottom door leaf shall be

provided for the safety edge.

4. The safety edge system shall be Model IDI-FSSE as manufactured by International Door, Inc.; or approved equal.

2.07 EMERGENCY MANUAL OPERATION A. Provide and install devices and make provisions for emergency manual operation in

accordance with the following: emergency chain operation, including plated chain, Reduction unit, sheaves, etc., as required to provide complete operation from the side of overhead doors to suit conditions. This device shall be so arranged that when set for manual operation the brake is automatically released and control circuit is broken, making it impossible to operate the doors electrically until the device is set for motor operation.



B. Chain gear operators shall be approved type, designed for easy uniform effort. Plated chain

shall be installed within easy reach of the floor. C. Operators shall be so designed that the electric motor may be removed without affecting manual

operation of the door by means of the chain operator. D. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to

automatically stop door at both the fully opened and fully closed positions. 2.08 FINISHES

A. Factory Finish: All exposed and unexposed surfaces of door, frame and hardware, except mechanical parts not typically painted due to excessive wear, shall be shop painted using a rust inhibitive zinc chromate primer. Factory applied shop painting shall consist of one coat of gray metallic colored primer.

B. Standards: Finish painting shall comply with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) ‘Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products’ for recommendations regarding applying and designating finishes.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Finish Painting: Field painting shall be as specified in Section 09902. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF PROJRCT CONDITIONS A. Prior to starting work or processing Shop/Erection Drawings and fabrication, field verify all

framing dimensions and installation conditions at the project site, including heights, widths and depths at all locations.

B. Examine areas to receive blast-resistant overhead doors to ensure that all substrate conditions

are acceptable for product installation in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. Field verify that rough openings and steel support structure are plumb, square and sized to receive the completed overhead door assembly in accordance with the door Manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.

C. Report to the Owner’s Representative any conditions that could adversely affect the proper

installation of the specified work or could require remedial work. D. Examine the areas and field conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed.

Correct any conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until detrimental or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



E. Starting the specified work of this Section shall imply the Contractor's acceptance of the existing field conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components including door panels, frames, hardware and operator in accordance with the

door Manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Vertical lifting overhead blast doors, including electric operators, control devices, conduit and

wiring, shall be installed by (or the installation shall be supervised by) the door Manufacturer’s authorized representative. Installation shall be properly done with all work plumb, correctly aligned and in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the door Manufacturer’s latest printed instructions or recommendations.

C. Electrical installation shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the NEC, and all

applicable federal, state and local codes. D. The design for the application and installation of all intrinsically safe control equipment must be

reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication or installation. The contractor will not be allowed to install intrinsically safe equipment unless shop drawings (including wiring diagrams and installation instructions indicating the specific connections and details) are approved by the Engineer.

E. Each door will require a 480V, 3 Phase, 3 wire branch circuit wired to a connection point above

the proposed operator to power the door. F. Mounting of door operator and hardware to structural steel frames shall be part of work of this

Section with the use of case hardened machine bolts tapped into steel jambs. Bolting to concrete or masonry construction shall be by through bolts or bolts embedded solidly in reinforced concrete. Machine bolts for through bolting on doors shall be case hardened in accordance with UL requirements.

G. Koil Kords or S.O. Cords: The Fail Safe Safety Edge shall be wired with a 3 conductor koil

kords or 3 conductor S.O. cords. Koil Kord or S.O. Cords shall be furnished by the overhead door Manufacturer.

H. Fully synchronize doors, with the hardware and cables designed so that the door sections move

simultaneously, the upper section traveling at a fraction of the speed of the lower sections so that they reach the open or closed position at the same time.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace any damaged and malfunctioning controls or

equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Any repairs that are required due to faulty materials, workmanship, design or door construction

shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Coordinate with 12-inch thick reinforced concrete wall construction for placement of anchors. L. Set frames plumb, square, level and at the correct elevation.



M. Allow for deflection to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to the steel frame. N. Finish painting shall be provided as specified in Section 09902. O. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and proper function of door assembly. P. Upon completion of installation, doors shall be adjusted for ease of operation and left free from

imperfections. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide qualified Manufacturer’s representative to instruct installers on the proper installation and adjustment of door assemblies.

B. Provide Manufacturer’s representative to inspect door installation, and test minimum of five (5) cycles of operation. Correct any deficient doors at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Door Marking and Identification: 1. Each vertical lifting blast-resistant, fire-rated overhead door assembly complying with this

description is eligible to bear the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Classification Mark shall include at least the following information:

Special Purpose Type Fire Door Rating 90-Minute (B Label) 2. The Classification Mark shall be located on the edge of the door face near the lower edge

of the top panel or upper edge of the bottom panel. 3. The numbers of the temperature rise (if specified), hourly rating, and letter designation

shall be stamped on the Classification Mark Label by the door Manufacturer in numerals and letters that are clear and legible using metal labels and preprinted Mylar labels.

4. The door Manufacturer shall provide, either on the Classification Mark containing the

above information, or on a label of similar material, the Classified Company’s name or ‘R15836.’

5. Metal labels may be fastened by using drive screws, or by metal pop rivets. Mylar labels

may be also used.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and

shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance and procedures for testing and resetting release devices.



2. Review product data and information within the maintenance manuals. Refer to Section 01700 in Division 1 for ‘Contract Closeout’ information.

3. Schedule training with the Owner’s designated representative(s) and provide ten (10)

business days minimum advance notice. 3.05 BLAST RESISTANT DOOR SCHEDULE

A. Blast Resistant Overhead Doors:

Doo

r T

ag

Roo

m

Nu

mb

er

Nom

inal

D

oor

Siz

e

Th

ick

nes

s

Mat

eria

l

Doo

r T

ype

Fir

e R

atin

g (L

abel

)

Bla

st R

atin

g

Com

men

ts

DB-110A B-110 12’-8” x 14’-0” 2” GS F 90 Minutes (B) 176 psf Alternate 9 DB-110B B-110 12’-8” x 14’-0” 2” GS F 90 Minutes (B) 176 psf Alternate 9 DB-110C B-110 12’-8” x 14’-0” 2” GS F 90 Minutes (B) 176 psf Alternate 9 DB-110D B-110 12’-8” x 14’-0” 2” GS F 90 Minutes (B) 176 psf Alternate 9

Material Types: GS = Galvanized Steel Door Types: F = Flush Blast Ratings: psf = Pounds per square foot / psi = Pounds per square inch

Note: Refer to the complete project Door Schedule for additional information on CNG Fuel Room Alternate 9 (Drawing 31).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08370 HIGH SPEED OVERHEAD RUBBER DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install high-speed overhead rubber doors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The overhead door types shall include the following:

1. Overhead coiling type, high speed rubber doors.

2. Electrical motor with controls and back-up hand chain operation as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified herein. 3. Microwave motion sensor with transmitter for automatic opening of doors as indicated on

the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Where required at high speed overhead rubber doors on the Drawings, all associated motors,

starters, push button stations, motion sensors, reversing edge sensors, track mounted infrared light sensors, power and control wiring from each disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed under this Section and in accordance with the requirements of Division 16.

D. All high speed overhead door assemblies shall meet the electrical classification required for the

specific area where the door is located. Refer to the requirements of Division 16. Provide complete door assemblies within the Phase 2 Fuel Room (B-110) that meet the sealed, rated and explosion proof electrical criteria for use within a Class 1 / Division 2 / Group C hazardous environment.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Steel framing is included in Division 5. D. Carpentry is included in Section 06100. E. Overhead doors are included in Section 08331. F. Blast resistant overhead doors are included in Section 08362. G. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700. H. Field Painting is included in Section 09902.



I. Fuel dispensing systems are included in Division 13. J. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 16. K. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110.

L. Wires, conductors and cables are included in Section 16120. M. Electrical power supply, circuit breakers and disconnect switches for each motor operated door

shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. N. Electrical Classifications are included on Drawing E-3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, detailed shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details for the high-speed overhead rubber door assembly, with all fittings and appurtenances provided. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 2. Manufacturer’s Warranty.

B. Product Data – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, Manufacturer’s product data, printed literature and installation instructions for the high speed overhead rubber door systems, operational controls, motion sensors, and accessories. Include both general published product data and specific data prepared for this project.

C. Shop Drawings – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, Manufacturer’s

complete shop drawings prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall include detailed plans and elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, materials and finish of all door components, hardware, anchors and bracing, motion sensors, reversing edge sensors, track mounted infrared light sensors, controls, disconnects, wiring diagrams, motor information and characteristics, hand chain operator specifications, appurtenances, accessories and proposed installation data for all required high speed overhead doors.

1. Clearly show and describe in detail, complete door assemblies and adjacent construction,

including elevations, sections, and details of the door, track, hardware, and operating components, including pertinent dimensions, finishes and relationship of the various door components to the adjacent construction.

D. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available

for the rubber door curtain panels. Provide an 8-inch by 8-inch sample of the proposed Rubber curtain material for review and approval.

E. Certifications – Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300:



1. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification of leak tightness based on actual tests conducted on this door to verify that it will withstand the specified hydrostatic pressure with no evident leakage.

2. Furnish Manufacturer’s certification letter for all required NEMA rating(s) on the complete

high speed overhead rubber door assembly. F. Printed Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data: Submit the following:

1. Wiring diagrams: ‘As-built’ straight line wiring and schematic diagrams showing electrical

connections and control circuitry. 2. Instructions showing installation sequence and procedures, proper door operation,

adjustment and alignment procedures. 3. Lubrication chart indicating lubrication points and type of lubricant recommended for each

component or piece of equipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products 3. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 4. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron, Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 5. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 6. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wires, Profiles and Tubes 7. ASTM B308 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural

Shapes 8. ASTM E119 – Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials



D. National Electric Code (NEC), Articles 500 through 505



E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 2. MG 1 – Motors and Generators F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1. Building Materials Directory 2. UL 263 – UL Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

J. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

K. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid



A. Single Source Responsibility – Provide high-speed doors, guides, motors and related primary components from one Manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary door components from a source that is acceptable to the Manufacturer of the primary door components.

B. Qualifications of Manufacturers:

1. High-speed overhead rubber doors shall be manufactured by a company with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the fabrication and installation of high speed rolling doors with flexible curtains. Proposed alternate door Manufacturers, which are not listed in this specification, shall submit evidence of the ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and shall include a list of five (5) projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years.

2. Microwave motion door sensors shall be manufactured by a company with a minimum of

three (3) years documented experience specializing in the fabrication and installation of door sensor systems. Proposed alternate door sensor manufacturers, which are not listed in this specification, shall submit evidence of the ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and shall include a list of five (5) projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past three years.



C. Qualifications of Installer

1. Installation of overhead doors shall be performed by a company that is an authorized representative of the door Manufacturer. Proposed installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of overhead doors.

2. Installation of microwave motion door sensors shall be performed by a company that is an

authorized representative of the motion sensor Manufacturer. Proposed installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of microwave type motion door sensors.

D. Pre-Installation Conference – Prior to the installation of any high-speed doors or motion sensors,

the various product Manufacturer's representatives shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. This meeting shall establish the procedures necessary to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this high-speed overhead door installation and associated sensor controls with related and adjacent work. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held, who is in attendance and the meeting minutes shall be sent to both the Engineer and Owner.



B. Store materials in protective coverings in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and

construction operations. C. Handle all materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The

door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall supply the following written warranties from the high-speed overhead door Manufacturer:

1. Fabric Panel Curtain: ‘Lifetime’ warranty that covers any and all defects in the Styrene

Butadiene Rubber (SBR) fabric curtain material for the life of the door assembly.

2. Drive Systems: Five (5) year or 1,000,000-cycle warranty that covers all defects in materials and/or workmanship on components associated with the drive system.

3. Mechanical and Electrical Components: Two (2) year warranty that covers all defects in

materials and/or workmanship on all other mechanical or electrical components.



4. Labor: One (1) year warranty that covers all of the labor associated with any defects in materials and/or workmanship.

B. Contractor shall supply a two (2) year written warranty from the motion sensor Manufacturer to

cover any defects in materials and/or workmanship on all of the components associated with the motion sensor system including transmitters, antenna and remote controls.

C. All of the above warranty periods shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. High-speed overhead doors with 1/4-inch thick rubber fabric curtain, electronically controlled and operated, shall be Model ‘Ultra Tough M&I,’ as manufactured by Albany Door Systems, Lawrenceville, GA 30046, (800) 252-2691; or approved equal.

1. The use of the above high speed overhead door Manufacturer's name and model is for the

purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general door configuration required. Alternate product Manufacturer’s providing evidence of meeting all of the defined door design criteria may be considered as an approved equal on the Project.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. General 1. Provide high-speed overhead rubber door in the sizes and locations as indicated on the

Drawings, and as specified herein. Mount high-speed overhead door assemblies to the inside face of the reinforced concrete walls of Fuel Room B-110.

2. Speed: Doors with non-classified motors shall operate at a variable speed up to 48-inches

per second in the “up” direction. Doors with explosion proof motors shall operate at a variable speed up to 20-inches per second in the “up” direction.

3 Doors shall be electrically operated (motorized) as scheduled on the Drawings with back-

up manual chain hoist operation. 4. An intrinsically safe safety edge shall be included on the leading edge of the bottom leaf to

stop the downward travel of the door upon contact with an obstruction. Operation of the safety edge shall cause a reversal of the door travel to the full open position. Failure of the safety edge or its components shall prevent closing operation.

5. Provide coatings or other separation for dissimilar metals where applicable.

B. Electrical Requirements

1. The doors shall be supplied with all motor starters and controls required for a complete and fully operational door system. The vendor shall furnish and install the high-speed overhead door including the motor starters, pushbuttons, sensors, motion detectors and other electrical devices for a complete operating system. The door installer electrical demarcation



point shall be the fused disconnect switch install within 15-feet of the door motor. The Electrical Contractor shall install the fused disconnect and the door installer shall provide all conduit, cable and all controls from that disconnect to the door and associated electrical equipment. The electrical installation shall follow all Division 16 requirements.

2. Door Manufacturer shall refer to the Electrical Classification drawings and provide all

materials in accordance with the drawings and the atmosphere where the equipment is being installed.

3. Overhead door controller shall accept a normally open dry contract to automatically open

or close the door assembly when commanded from the building control system. 4. Electric power required for standard operators is 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz. 5. Proper NEMA enclosures, which are suitable for use within the electrical classification for

the environment in which the high-speed overhead doors are located, shall be provided for the complete motor and control system. Refer to Division 16 and Electrical Drawings for the appropriate Electrical Classification at each overhead door location.

6. Explosion Proof Motors: Provide sealed electrical equipment that is suitable for installation

within Class 1 / Division 2 / Group C or Class 1 / Division 1 / Group D hazardous locations where applicable.

a. The unit shall be UL tested and approved. b. The unit shall be installed in conformance with all NEC requirements.

2.03 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains

1. Fabric Panels: Two (2) layers of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) with each layer to be 1/8-inch thick minimum, 70 durometer, sandwiched with 1-ply, 110-lbs polyester cord

center. Complete with bonded SBR bevelled continuous windlocks, providing normal resiliency and flexibility at temperatures ranging from -40 F to +180F.

2. Characteristics: Breaking strength shall be 1100 lbs/in/ply minimum.

3 Windows: Minimum two (2) clear vision window panels on each door curtain. 4. Panel Color: Standard Black SBR with two (2) horizontal accent stripes, ‘Safety Yellow’ in

color, across both the interior and exterior faces of curtain.

B. Door Header

1. Door Roll: Fabricate minimum 8-5/8" diameter, steel tube from 0.188-inch steel complying with ASTM A513. Drum tube deflection shall not exceed 0.03" per foot of opening width. Drive barrel shafts are constructed of 2-inch diameter 1045 bolt-on steel shafts.



2. Idler: Fabric guiding barrel shall be constructed of minimum 4-inches O.D. round tubing with a minimum wall thickness of 0.134-inch and supported by 1-1/2 inch diameter 1018 steel shafts.

3. Top Plates: Constructed of minimum 1/4-inch hot-rolled steel laser-cut plates with heavy-

duty, self-aligning bearings with cast iron housings to support both the spring and idler barrels. Include top roll alignment plates for installation.

a. 2-inch diameter shaft bearing shall be load-rated at 10800-lbs dynamic and 6400-lbs

static. b. 1-1/2 inch diameter idler shaft bearing shall be load-rated at 8150-lbs dynamic and

4400-lbs static. 4. Springless System: Direct drive unit with built-in catching device. No counter-balance,

sprockets, chains or torsion springs shall be used.

C. Side Frames 1. Frames: Frame assemblies shall be constructed of steel members to form a slot of sufficient

depth to allow the thicker edges of the rubber curtain windloks to move freely in the guides at all times. Steel members are to be of sufficient thickness and rigidity to maintain the windloks within the guides while enabling the windloks to break away during impact.

2. Wind Resistance: Wind resistant capabilities shall include a windlok rubber component on

each side of the fabric curtain. The windlok feature runs the full height of the door curtain and is contained in the side frames to secure the door under wind pressure and to decrease air infiltration.

3. Finish: Steel frames shall be painted with durable, corrosion resistant coating as specified

in Section 09902. Color shall be ‘Safety Yellow’ as selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner.

4. Covers: Side frames covers shall be hinged to allow easy curtain access.

D. Bottom Bar 1. Bottom bar shall extend the full width of the curtain, sufficient to maintain the bottom edge

of the curtain parallel to the door threshold at all times. The bottom bar shall be constructed of a steel angle and flat bar bolted together and shall have a breakaway center section to reduce the risk of damage during accidental impacts and provide ease of straightening, allowing for simple re-assembly.

2. Provide 6-inch tall weatherproof rubber loop made of EPDM able to properly seal any

sloped or uneven finished floors. 3. Bottom bar and door operation must be totally wireless. No coil cords are allowed on the

Project. All faults registering from the wireless device must be displayed on the control panel.



4. Door to be provided with failsafe electric safety edge. No pneumatic edges shall be allowed.

5. Bottom bar wireless system battery life must last for a minimum time period of three (3)

years. Battery must be able to be replaced at ground level. 6. Bottom bar controls must indicate in advance when battery must be replaced.

E. Safety Features 1. Each high-speed door shall be provided with TruckGuard Light Curtain Safety System to

eliminate contact with any objects within doorway. 2. Light curtain shall be attached to the side frame material and cover area up to a height of no

less than six (6) feet. 3. Light curtain system must have a minimum of 40 infrared thru-beam optical sensors. 4. Control panel must indicate in written visible English each time the light curtain is broken. 5. Door to be provided with failsafe electric safety edge and the door controller must indicate

if this safety edge is not operable or not working properly.

F. Control Panel 1. Provide MCC controller housed within a rated enclosure that is suitable for the NEMA

classified environment where the equipment is located. 2. Controls must include a Vector Control drive system capable of infinitely variable speed

control in both the up and down directions and integrated plc for full programmability. 3. All interior control panel components must be touch-safe (protected from high voltage

when control panel cover plate is open) with No Exposed High Voltage Contacts. 4. All door operational parameters must be set from the Graphical User Interface (GUI). 5. Controller comes with factory set parameters, a 64 bit scrollable graphic/text display that

shows functional information during normal operation and will advise if maintenance is required or if there are any abnormal situations.

6. Controls must be fully self-diagnostic thru the GUI and provide corrective actions for error

conditions. 7. Door must be provided with electronic encoder. A proximity or rotary switch must be

provided to accommodate the top position reference. 8. Control Panel must be provided with a rotary disconnect mounted on the control panel and

primary incoming power fusing. No exceptions shall be permitted.

G. Drive



1. Door shall be electrically operated by a heavy-duty drive unit featuring a self-inhibiting worm gear. The motor and gearbox shall be designed for high cycle operation.

2. Basic operation features shall include a manual disengagement lever to place the high-

speed overhead door in manual operation mode. A safety disengagement switch shall be included with the disengagement mechanism.

3. Door shall be wired and labeled with a minimum 6-feet lead.

H. Electrical Motor 1. Electric Motor Operation: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, intermittent-duty, fully-

enclosed, non-ventilated, UL listed electric motor, sized to move all high-speed overhead doors in either direction and from any position.

2. Power Supply: Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of door electrical

system with the building electrical system. Motors shall be rated for the building electrical service. Control unit shall be wired for 24 Volts and a suitable control transformer shall be supplied for remote door operation.

3. Primary Voltage: Supply shall be rated at 480-volts, 3-Phase, 60-Hertz, 20-amps.

I. Motion Sensors 1. High-speed overhead rubber doors shall include vehicle motion sensors for automatic door

operation, as indicated on the Door Schedule and as specified herein.

2. Motion sensor system shall be the Falcon Microwave Motion Sensor with 24.125 GHz (K-band) transmitter frequency, as manufactured by BEA, Incorporated, Pittsburgh, PA 15275, (412) 249-4100; or approved equal.

3. Sensor shall utilize a Planar flat antenna that can discriminate between vehicular traffic and

pedestrians at 30o max. tilt angle. Detection speed 2.2 sec. minimum with explosion-proof enclosure that is suitable for the NEMA classification at each door location.

4. ABS and polycarbonate housing with black anodized aluminum adjustable mount bracket,

remote control transmitters, red/green LEDs, and hardware for installation of unit.

5. Cable to have crimp-style connector to prevent water intension through feed cable.

6. Sensor mounting height 19’ to 23’ above finished floor and shall be placed such that any adjacent door system, structural, mechanical or other permanent obstruction is to be avoided without disrupting the integrity of the sensing device for vehicles and people. Multiple units per door shall be provided if obstructions prevent the proper operation of the system as determined by the Manufacturer’s representative.

7. Provide all necessary components and accessories including but not limited to: transformers, remotes, brackets and cables; to provide a complete and properly operating motion sensor system. Should any such accessories be required to ensure proper operation, they shall be provided for each unit at no additional cost to the Owner.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF PROJRCT CONDITIONS

A. Prior to starting work or processing Shop/Erection Drawings and fabrication, field verify the actual dimensions and examine substrates, supports and other conditions under which this work of this Section is to be performed.

B. Field verify that rough openings are plumb, square and sized to receive the completed overhead

door assembly in accordance with the door Manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances. C. Report to the Owner’s Representative any conditions that could adversely affect the proper

installation of the specified work or could require remedial work. D. Correct any conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not

proceed with installation until detrimental or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Starting the specified work of this Section shall imply the Contractor's acceptance of the existing

field conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. All doors and components shall be installed and adjusted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions, the details shown on the Drawings and the approved shop drawings.

B. Strictly comply with the door Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate door installation with all adjacent work to ensure proper operating clearances and allow for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation of the electrical service. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. Electrical installation shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the NEC, and all applicable federal, state and local codes.

D. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall constructions and building framing without distortion or stress. Coordinate with the reinforced concrete wall construction for proper placement of anchors.

E. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and proper function of door assembly. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb to provide smooth operation.

F. Instruct the Owner’s personnel in proper door operating procedures and maintenance schedule.

G. Motion sensors shall be installed per the product Manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

H. A knowledgeable representative of BEA, Inc. (or approved equal) shall be present during and shall oversee the testing and adjustment of the motion sensor system. The Manufacturer’s representative shall program and establish transmitter operation, review and demonstrate all proper procedures for this process to the Owner, or the Owner’s designated representative(s).




A. Provide qualified Manufacturer’s representative to instruct installers on the proper installation and adjustment of high-speed overhead door assemblies.

B. Provide Manufacturer’s representative to inspect door installation, and test minimum of five (5) cycles of operation. Correct any deficient doors at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and

shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance and procedures for testing and resetting release devices.

2. Schedule training with the Owner’s designated representative(s) and provide ten (10)

business days minimum advance notice. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Test all overhead doors and motion sensors for proper operation. Electrically operated doors shall be tested in both the manual and electric modes of operation.

B. Upon completion of installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors

to operate in accordance with manufacturer's product data. Make required final adjustments to provide proper and smooth operation without binding or distortion as approved by the door Manufacturer or their authorized representative.

C. Adjust the location of motion sensors as required for proper door operation based on vehicle positioning. Test the motions system on each overhead door to ensure the proper operation of the system and repair or replace components as required to provide a fully functional system.

D. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces

using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by the Manufacturer of material or product being cleaned.

E. Repair any damage to overhead door panel, support frame, hardware, sensors or operators as approved by the Manufacturer. Any component that cannot be repaired shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed overhead door assemblies including motion sensor system against any potential damage from other construction work until the Date of Substantial Completion

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08400 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install all materials, equipment and incidentals for aluminum storefront systems, including framing, aluminum windows, aluminum glass entrance door systems with associated hardware, as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Section 03300.

B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500.

D. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.


F. Steel doors and frames are included in Section 08110.

G. Aluminum doors and frames are included in Section 08120.

H. Fire-rated window systems are included in Section 08910.

I. Finish hardware is included in Section 08700.

J. Glazing is included in Section 08800.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of the Submittals Section 01300 in Division 1 - General Requirements of these Specifications.

B. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.04, Quality Assurance, shall be

included with the initial submittal for the products specified. C. Submit shop drawings and product data showing the materials of construction and details of

fabrication and installation for all products furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall include the following information:



1. Shop-Erection Drawings: Prior to fabrication and delivery, furnish structural calculations

with drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorages, glazing and hardware interface with the work of adjacent trades for review by the Engineer. a. Drawings shall show elevations for each frame type, schedules of door and window

frames, conditions at openings with wall material and thicknesses, hardware locations and installation requirements, joints and connection details, and all associated trim.

2. Manufacturer's Specifications, Data and Product Literature: Required to prove compliance

with specified requirements. 3. Materials List: Items proposed to be provided under this Section. 4. Hardware Templates: Provide hardware templates for the door Manufacturer's use in

correctly aligning and adequately reinforcing doors for specified hardware. 5. Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures: When approved by the Engineer,

will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. Include the Manufacturer's written instructions for the storage and installation of aluminum storefront systems.

6. Certificates: If requested by Engineer, Contractor shall submit a certificate signed by both

the finisher and the Contractor stating that the anodized finishes provided conform to the Specifications. Certificates shall also include certified test reports of finish testing made on random production samples.

D. Samples

1. Prior to fabrication and delivery, submit finish samples of aluminum frames and other

components complete with stops, windows and hardware to the Engineer for review. Resubmit new samples of each, as required, until final approval is obtained. Approved samples may be incorporated into the project.

2. Submit two each of the following samples for review. Samples shall be full size and shall

show gauges, configuration, construction, and finish colors proposed for the various components. a. Corner construction of each door type, 6-inch by 6-inch legs, and showing glazing

provisions. b. 2-foot by 2-foot window, showing vertical and/or horizontal mullions where

applicable and insulated exterior glazing.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit the Manufacturer's written instructions for care and cleaning of aluminum storefront systems.




A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this Section shall conform to the latest edition of the Building Code. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of the Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

B. Coordinate the glazing materials and installation for those applications with the appropriate

supplier to ensure full compliance with the Building Code. C. Employees: Use adequate number of Contractor's skilled employees who are thoroughly trained

and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.



1. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences

2. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 3. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 4. ASTM E547 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration Exterior Windows, Skylights,

Doors, and Curtainwalls


1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

C. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A

1. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) D. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association (AAMA) E. Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AMA)

F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code

(IBC), 2009 Edition G. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid




1.06 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall supply a two (2) year written warranty from the Manufacturer to cover defects in materials and/or workmanship.

B. The warranty specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner


C. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship includes, but is not to be limited to:

1. Failures in operation of operating component or components 2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard 3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye 4. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential

untimely failure of the Work within this Section or the Work as a whole. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a test pressure of 6.24 psf (50 mph).

1. All exterior systems must comply with the minimum air infiltration standards of the

International Energy Conservation Code.

B. There shall be no water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure of 16.5 psf.

C. When uniform design load is tested in accordance with ASTM E330, permanent deformation

shall not exceed 0.549-inch. D. When uniform structural load is tested in accordance with ASTM E330, permanent deformation

shall not exceed 0.192-inch.

E. Systems shall meet the minimum wind loading requirements for the Project location. 1. Wind Loads:

a. Basic Wind Speed (3 second gust) 90 mph b. Exposure Category: B c. Wind Factor IW: 1.0

F. Design storefront systems to comply with the minimum requirements of the applicable Building

Code.




A. Shipment Preparation: Prior to shipment, product Manufacturer shall adequately provide protection for all exposed aluminum framing and trim components against damage to system components and to anodized finish during shipping, handling and erection operations. All work showing defects or damage of any kind will not be accepted.

B. Shipping and Delivery: Door and/or window assemblies shall be shipped to the job-site within

the Manufacturer's original unbroken cartons properly and marked for location within building. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

C. Handling and Storage: All materials for the work of this Section shall be stored and handled as

recommended by the Manufacturer to prevent damage of any nature. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent binding and avoid significant or permanent damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM

A. Provide exterior storefront system as shown for impact resistance meeting the performance criteria specified above and in Section 08800. System shall be 451T Series with 350 standard door by Kawneer Company, Inc., or approved equal. Provide front glazed profile. System shall be 451T Series front glazed profile with 350 standard door by Kawneer Company, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Aluminum sections shall be extruded aluminum AA-6063-T5 alloy and temper within

commercial tolerance and free from defects impairing strength and/or durability. C. Mullions shall have a 2-inch face dimension by 4-1/2 inch depth, and with glass stop. At head

and jamb locations, members shall have a two-piece construction; a basic member with a snap-on glass stop to facilitate glazing. Horizontal and vertical mullions shall consist of three piece construction; a basic member with two snap-on glass stops to facilitate glazing.

D. System shall be a thermally broken, with shear block assembly and glazing inserts sized to accept 1-inch thick insulated glass.

E. Screws, bolts and other accessories shall be Type 304 stainless steel. F. Glazing gaskets shall be EPDM elastomeric extensions. G. Exterior Storefront System Doors

1. Doors for exterior storefront system shall be 350 standard door swing, 3-1/2-inch vertical stile, 3-1/2-inch top rail and 10-inch bottom rail, or approved equal.

2. Glazing shall be provided meeting the performance criteria specified above and within

related Section 08800.



3. Extruded aluminum for storefront system doors shall be AA-6063-T5 alloy. 4. All glazing materials shall be elastomeric glazing gaskets. Refer to Section 08800, Glazing,

for additional requirements. 5. Major portions of the door members to be 0.125-inch nominal in thickness and glazing

molding to be 0.050-inch thick. 6. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional

dimensions of entrance members are nominal and in compliance with Aluminum Standards and Data, published by the Aluminum Association.

7. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening.

2.02 STOREFRONT DOOR HARDWARE A. All storefront hardware shall be provided by the storefront system Manufacturer unless

otherwise noted, and includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Push and Pull: U-shaped bars, Style ‘CP2’ push and ‘C09’ pull. 2. Exit Devices: Interior mounted panic devices on each door leaf. 3. Hinges: Equally spaced 4-1/2-inch by 5-inch heavy duty ball bearing brass butt hinges with

non-removable pin. Provide additional hinges for each extra 2-feet-6-inches of door height (3 minimum).

4. Threshold: Aluminum, 7-inches deep with all corners mitered return, finish as selected by

Engineer. 5. Closers: Overhead concealed closer with Hold-Open and Stop (90°) features.

6. Door Seals and Door Bottom: Zero ‘Sound-Stop’ Door System No. 770 Compress-O-

Matic 3001, sound stop for head and jamb, and No. 361 sound stop at sill; finish shall be Duranodic 313 to match the frame and door. All corners shall be mitered, welded and ground smooth and made watertight.

7. Astragal: Stile adjustable astragal with wool pile and polymeric finish.

8. Lock: Standard 1-point securely lock with aluminum flat faceplate; finish to match the adjacent aluminum door frame; Adams Rite MS1851, or approved equal. Coordinate lock cylinders, stop and indicator with Section 08700.

9. Cooridnate the above storefront hardware with the requirements of the Finish Hardware in

Section 08700, which include a electromagnetic locks for the exterior doors. The final hardware sets shall be determined by the AHC and EHC of the supplier as specified in Section 08700. All hardware selected must be suitable for installation on the storefront doors.



10. Provide any and all additional hardware as required for a complete door assembly and proper door operation, at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.03 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM

A. Provide interior storefront system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. System shall be Trifab 450 by Kawneer Company, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Aluminum sections shall be extruded aluminum AA-6063-T5 alloy and temper within commercial tolerance and free from defects impairing strength and/or durability.

C. Mullions shall have a 1-3/4-inch face dimension by 4-1/2-inch depth with a glass stop. Provide center glazed profile.

D. Interior Storefront Doors shall be 190 Narrow Stile by Kawneer, or approved equal. 2.04 MATERIALS A. All exposed aluminum shall be chemically cleaned of all fabricating oils and foreign materials

and be given an ANODIC finish conforming to AA C12C22A41 clear anodized, or other custom anodized color, as approved by the Engineer.

B. The surface condition of this finish coat shall be 100 percent free of holidays, drip marks,

scratches, roll marks, or abrasions that are visible from a distance of 5-feet in good light when in the installed position. Surfaces shall be free of checking, crazing, peeling or loss of adhesion.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. All fasteners for window system shall be Type 305 stainless steel. Expansion on anchors where required shall be two unit type as approved by the Engineer.

B. Glazing materials shall be material compatible with aluminum and those sealants and sealing

materials used in composite structure which have direct contact with the gasket. Standard exterior glazing material shall be glazing tapes in accordance with AAMA 806.1.

C. Expansion anchors, where required, shall be of the two-unit type conforming to the requirements of Section 05500.

D. Pressure sensitive vinyl film for use on aluminum components where they contact with

dissimilar metals shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. 2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the Manufacturers' specifications and Shop Erection Drawings as approved by the Engineer. All components shall be prefabricated within the Manufacturer's shop to the maximum extent practicable.

B. Provide hairline fit at joints, make watertight with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Prior to starting work or processing Shop/Erection Drawings and fabrication, field verify all framing dimensions and installation conditions at the project site, including heights, widths and depths at all specific locations.

1. Make measurements as required in the field to assure proper fit of doors and framing

assemblies with adjacent work prior to fabrication. B. Report to the Engineer any conditions that could adversely affect the proper installation of the

specified work or could require remedial work. C. Examine the areas and field conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed.

Correct any conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected.

D. Starting the specified work of this Section shall imply the Contractor's acceptance of the existing

field conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. All window / door systems and components shall be inspected before installation.

B. All components which are abraded or dented or which are bent, bowed or show any other structural damage or distortion shall be rejected and marked as such and shall be removed from the site. No component will be allowed to be straightened and then incorporated in the work.

C. Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are

acceptable for product installation in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive entrance system and sill is level in accordance with the Manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install the Work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Engineer.

B. All work shall be done by workers skilled in the fabrication and installation of this type of work.

Where assemblies require field connections, temporarily assemble work in the shop and test for accuracy of fit.

C. Specific System Criteria

1. Complete all cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of all metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of anodic color coating.



2. Where field cutting of framing and/or trim components is required, exercise extreme care not to damage or mar the specified aluminum finish.

3. Except for surface applied hardware, all door frames shall be cut, drilled, tapped and

reinforced at the factory as necessary to receive door hardware. Comply with the hardware Manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners to the maximum extent practicable. Any exposed fasteners shall have countersunk heads with finish to match the adjacent work.

4. Glazing stops shall be removable from the inside when swinging doors are locked, also for storefront glazing as detailed.

5. Provide door and storefront framing with internal stiffeners where strengthening is necessary and/or where indicated.

D. Dissimilar Materials Protection

1. Separate any and all aluminum surfaces that come in direct contact with or in close proximity to ferrous metals and/or cementitious materials by means of heavy coating of alkali-resistant bituminous paint, zinc-chromate primer, or non-absorbent tape.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. All installation shall be performed by workmen experienced in the erection of these types of storefront window systems.

B. Install exterior storefronts in conformance with the methods and materials utilized in testing for

approval for Building Code compliance. C. All work of this Section shall be done in strict conformance with the details shown on the

Drawings and approved shop drawings, as specified, and per the Manufacturer's installation recommendations.

1. Set framing components plumb, level, and true to line; properly secure to structure. 2. Accurately hang and adjust doors with all specified hardware to function smoothly and

quietly without binding. 3. Accurately install filler plates within storefront framing, plumb, level and in line, and on

approved bearing blocks per the approved shop drawings.

3.05 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Properly adjust all operating parts and hardware prior to glazing and then re-adjust after glazing and painting operations have been completed. Leave swinging doors ready for use by Owner.

B. The aluminum storefront systems shall be maintained in a clean condition throughout the

construction period, so that they will be without any evidence of deterioration or damage, other than the effects of normal weathering, at the time of final acceptance.



C. Remove all protective coatings, excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. Abrasive cleaning agents or other materials that could damage the anodic color coating on aluminum surfaces shall not be used.

D. Provide watertight testing for leakage before final inspection. E. Storefront systems shall be totally free of any abrasions, nicks, scars, etc, and shall be in good

operating condition at final acceptance. F. Immediately before final acceptance, aluminum storefront systems shall be thoroughly cleaned,

inside and out. The Manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods shall be demonstrated to the Owner's on site personnel during this final cleaning.

G. All storefront systems, including glazing, aluminum work and finish, shall be protected from

damage against harmful substances and construction activities throughout the entire construction period.

H. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, remove all tools, equipment and debris, resulting

from the Work of this Section, and leave the work area in a safe and clean condition. 3.06 CORRECTION OF WORK

A. Repair or replace any damaged work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Any aluminum components that have been damaged, including finish, beyond successful

repair, shall be removed and replaced with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Minor damage shall be repaired as recommended by the storefront door Manufacturer, to

the full satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner.

B. At the completion of construction, any adjacent work marred by the work of this Section shall be cleaned or replaced.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08700

FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and deliver to the project site all finish hardware as shown on the Drawings and as

scheduled or as specified herein. B. The schedule included herein designates the type and quality of the finish hardware desired. The

brand of hardware furnished shall be equivalent to or exceed the quality of the brand or model scheduled.

C. Furnish and deliver to the door Manufacturers all templates and schedules required by the

Manufacturers of the doors and frames to enable the manufacturers to make proper provision in their work to receive the finish hardware. All locks, lock strikes, and flush bolts shall be made to ANSI standard dimensions.

D. Provide Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC)

Services to properly schedule and select all door hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. B. Steel doors and frames are included in Section 08110.

C. Aluminum doors and frames are included in Section 08120.

D. Hardware for blast-resistant doors and frames is included in Section 08315.

E. Overhead doors are included in Section 08331.

F. Hardware for blast-resistant overhead doors is included in Section 08362.

G. Hardware for high speed overhead rubber doors is included in Section 08370.

H. Aluminum storefront and entrance systems are included in Section 08400.

I. Glazing is included in Section 08800.

J. Signage is included in Section 10400.

K. Electrical work is included in Division 16.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Section 01300. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish.

B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in a vertical format as recognized by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Hardware shall be grouped within individual sets that correspond to the numbered sets at the end of this Section. Submittals that include horizontal schedule formats or finish hardware combined together within one large group are unacceptable and will be returned unchecked. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware

schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Index to include location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings

both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc., contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. i. Wiring diagrams with theory of operation.

C. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule in accordance to Division 1, particularly where

acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., aluminum frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule.

D. Keying Schedule: Submit the proposed keying schedule to Engineer for review and approval. Provide keying that matches the existing standards for the Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority (EMTA). When requested, meet with the Owner and Engineer to review the proposed keying schedule and other related facility requirements.



E. Samples if Requested: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finish as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

F. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware.

G. Certificate: Submit Manufacturer’s certificates to confirm that hardware used at fire-rated openings meets or exceeds the specified requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Manufacturers

1. Manufacturers shall include only companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with a minimum of 3-years documented experience.

2. Hardware numbers within the schedule included in Part 3 are based on the following

Manufacturers for the purpose of establishing the minimum required level of quality: a. Butt Hinges McKinney b. Locksets and Latchsets Sargent c. Exit Devices Sargent d. Door Closers Sargent e. Door Trim Rockwood f. Overhead Stops and Holders Sargent g. Thresholds, Gaskets, Astragals, Automatic Door Bottom, Drip Cap Pemko h. Flush Bolts, Dustproof Strikes, Door Stops, Kick Plates and Wall Bumpers Rockwood i. Fire Guard Closer Sargent j. Electric Strikes Von Duprin k. Lock Cylinders Sargent

l. Door Sensors GE Interlogix (Sentrol)

m. Proximity Readers Locknetics



B. Alternate Manufacturers

1. Hardware of the same type, size, weight, function, quality and finish as manufactured by the following Manufacturers, may be bid on the project after approval by the Engineer: a. Butt Hinges Hager, Stanley; or Equal b. Locksets and Latchsets Corbin-Russwin, Best, Schlage; or Equal c. Exit Devices Corbin-Russwin, Von Duprin; or Equal d. Door Closers Corbin-Russwin, LCN; or Equal e. Door Trim Trimco, Burns; or Equal f. Overhead Stops and Holders Rixson, Glynn-Johnson; or Equal g. Thresholds, Gaskets, Astragals, Automatic Door Bottom, Drip Cap National Guard, Reese; or Equal h. Flush Bolts, Dustproof Strikes, Door Stops, Kick Plates and Wall Bumpers Glynn-Johnson, Hager; or Equal i. Fire Guard Closer LCN; or Equal j. Electric Strikes Folger Adam (HES); or Equal k. Lock Cylinders Corbin-Russwin, Best, Schlage; or Equal

l. Door Sensors George Risk Industries; or Equal

2. Substitutions of Hardware a. Proposed substitutes will be equal to the specified material with respect to size, quality,

function, and finish. The supplier proposing to bid on substitute material will request permission to do so from the Engineer not less than ten (10) days prior to bid date. If the substitution is allowed, it will be noted as an addendum. Deviation from this procedure will be cause for rejection of substitution request.

C. Qualifications of Supplier

1. Hardware supplier shall be a recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with

warehousing facilities, who has been providing hardware for period of not less than 5 years.

2. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) shall properly schedule and service hardware requirements.

3. Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) shall properly schedule and service those relative

hardware requirements.



4. The hardware schedule shall be prepared and signed by a certified AHC and EHC where applicable.

E.D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

1. Hardware will meet or exceed the requirements of the International Building Code, 2009

edition. If hardware required by the Building Code has been omitted from this section, it shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Hardware shall conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.

3. Exit devices must be listed under ‘Panic Hardware’ in Accident Equipment List of

Underwriters’ Laboratories. Where labeled fire doors are used as exits, they must be equipped with UL approved labeled fire exit hardware.

F.E. Pre-Installation Conference

1. Prior to the installation of any finish hardware, the supplier and hardware Manufacturer's

representatives shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held, who is in attendance and meeting minutes shall be sent to the Engineer and Owner.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)


C. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A:

1. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

E. National Electric Code (NEC), Articles 500 through 505

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101


I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.



1.06 WARRANTY A. Guarantee workmanship and material provided against defective manufacture. Repair or replace

any defective workmanship and material appearing within period of five (5) years after the date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide ten (10) year factory warranty on door closer body against defects in material and

workmanship from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide a project specific warranty in addition to the Manufacturer’s standard product warranties if necessary to achieve the warranty coverage periods listed above.

D. Replace any shortages and incorrect items with the correct material at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. At completion of project, qualified factory representative shall inspect closer installations. After

this inspection, a letter shall be sent to the Engineer reporting on field conditions, including verification that all closers have been properly installed, adjusted and are in good working order.


A. Pack hardware in boxes. Plainly mark each box with the identification of the opening for which

hardware is intended, including packing list showing each item enclosed, proper screws, bolts, accessories, and similar items in each box.

B. Check hardware on receipt at the project to assure that each set is complete and operative. C. Store hardware in a manner that will prevent damage and which will assure that no items are

removed from any set before installation. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide any special wrenches, tools or accessories that are required for maintenance, as well as

documentation applicable to each different or special hardware component. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Sizes, weights and quality specified are the minimum grade acceptable. B. Provide all required components for a complete and operable door system at each opening.

Should a hardware item not specified be required for completion of the work, furnish such items of the types and quantities suitable for the service required and comparable to adjacent or similar hardware at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Should it be determined that the specified hardware for any opening is unsuitable due to detail or

size of member to which the hardware is to be applied, provide the proper type of hardware to complete the door assembly at no additional cost to the Owner. Such hardware shall be similar in operation to the types of hardware specified and not of a lesser quality.



D. All locks shall have keepers and all catches are to include strikes. Provide escutcheons and cover plates where required to finish or complete an opening.

E. Screws: Phillips head screws shall be used unless otherwise indicated. Do not use aluminum

screws to attach hardware. F. Finishes: Except where specified otherwise, finishes will be Dull Chrome (US26D). Exposed

portions of door closers will have a sprayed finish to match adjacent hardware. Exit device, push plates, pull plates, and kickplates will be Stainless Steel (US32D) Aluminum thresholds and weatherstripping will have a natural aluminum finish.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Butt Hinges

1. Furnish butts in types, weights, and sizes shown. 2. Furnish two (2) butts for each door 5’-0” or less in height plus one (1) butt for each

additional 2’-6” in height or fraction thereof. 3. Furnish with non-removable pins (NRP) on all outward swinging exterior doors.

B. Door Bolts

1. Flush bolts will be equal to Rockwood Mfg. Company’s No. 555-12”, furnished for top and bottom of inactive leaf, complete with dustproof strike No. 570.

2. Provide automatic flush bolts at all fire rated door openings and at other door locations as

required by the Building Code. Automatic flush bolts will be equal to Rockwood Mfg. Company’s Series 1842-12”, furnished for top and bottom of inactive leaf.

C. Door Closers

1. All door closers will be the product of one (1) Manufacturer and will be equal to Sargent’s 351 Series. All closers will be of full rack and pinion construction, with separate valves for adjusting closing and latching speeds and hydraulic back-check, adjustable spring providing Closer Sizes 2 through 6 and removable non-ferrous covers. Series with equivalent features will be acceptable. Provide extra duty arms at all closer locations.

2. Mounting applications to be: Standard or parallel with proper arm and brackets. Closer

location subject to practicality and approval. D. Locksets

1. Furnish Sargent’s ‘8200’ Series, ‘LNL’ Design heavy-duty type locksets and latchsets with 2-3/4 inch backset, 3/4-inch minimum throw latchbolt, and ANSI (1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch) strike, in the functions specified. Acceptable Substitutions: Schlage ‘L9000’, Series, ‘17’.



E. Panic Hardware

1. All exit devices will be the product of one (1) Manufacturer and must be listed under ‘Panic Hardware’ in the Accident Equipment List of Underwriters’ Laboratories. In addition, where devices are required on labeled doors, these exit devices will bear a ‘UL’ label indicating ‘Fire Exit Hardware’.

2. Devices will be Sargent’s ‘80’ Series in types and functions specified and with ‘ETL’

Series outside trim. Acceptable Substitutions: Von Duprin Series ‘98’ with ‘992L17’ Series outside trim.

F. Electric Strikes

1. Furnish electric strikes at all door openings that include a card access system.

2. Operation of electric strike shall be Fail-Secure (FSE) or Non-Fail Safe (NFS) to ensure that door automatically locks in case of power failure.

3. Provide devices rated with an operating voltage of 24 VAC for proper connection to the

building electrical system. Include Silent Operation (SO) feature on all electric strikes to eliminate any audible buzzing sound when the unit has been activated.

4. Provide the size and style of latchbolt keeper best suited for the door assembly to receive

the electric strike. Faceplate shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted. 5. Strikes shall include two internal indication switches suitable for remote door monitoring,

control alarms, indicating lights, and/or electrical interlocking of doors. 6. Devices shall be 6000 Series electric strikes by Von Duprin (Ingersoll Rand Security

Technologies), or approved equal. 7. Provide power supply and/or power transfer equipment as required for use at all door

openings with electric strikes. Model of power supply and power transfer units shall be suitable for use with the strike and all related hardware. Configuration of power supply shall include battery backup and fire alarm input with key lock secured cover.

8. Coordinate with the electrical and security requirements as required to provide a complete building alarm system as well as a functional door assembly.

G. Door Pulls and Push Plates

1. Furnish pull plates and push plates as specified. 2. Pull plates will have grips attached to the plates at the factory.

H. Protection Plates

1. Kickplates shall be 18 gauge (0.050) Stainless Steel, size to be 8-inches high by 2-inches less than the nominal width of single doors and 1-inch less than the nominal width of double doors, and installed on the push side of door opening.



I. Door Stops

1. Furnish the necessary type of stop for each door opening against a wall, fixture or equipment, and complete with fasteners as required by detail. Furnish wall bumpers equal to Rockwood’s No. 406 wherever possible.

2. Furnish overhead stops and/or holders where specified. Coordinate the function of

overhead stops and holders with door closers for proper operation at each door opening. Holders shall not be used under any conditions at fire-rated door assemblies.

J. Door Silencers

1. Furnish rubber door silencers for all door frames. Provide three (3) per single and two (2)

per pair of doors. K. Key Cabinet

1. Lund type No. 1200 Series two (2) tag system with index pocket for storage. Furnish all keys to Owner at completion of job in a key cabinet complete with all keys properly tagged and indexed ready for Owner’s use. Size cabinet as required for the project and allow adequate space for 25% future expansion.

L. Thresholds, Gasketing, Astragals, Automatic Door Bottoms and Drip Caps

1. Thresholds will be of the type specified under the hardware sets, furnished full length of opening with lead expansion shields for anchoring. All thresholds will be set in full bed of mastic by contractor. Mastic bed shall be replaced with fully grouted threshold at heavy-duty locations noted under hardware sets.

2. Gaskets shall be of the type specified under the hardware sets, furnished and installed

continuously along both jambs and head of opening. Provide self-tapping (TEC) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop applied weatherstripping.

3. Astragals, Automatic Door Bottoms and Drip Caps shall be of the type specified under the

hardware sets.

M. Door Position Sensors

1. Door position sensors rated for 120 VAC, 10 amps, and all associated control wiring shall be installed at all door openings around the exterior perimeter of the building.

2. Provide devices rated for 120 VAC, 10 amps, for proper connection to the building electrical system.

3. Sensors located at single or pairs of doors shall be 3/4” diameter switch with wire leads, 1078C Series by GE Interlogix or approved equal.

4. Sensors located at overhead coiling doors shall be aluminum enclosure with armored cable

and wire leads, 2500 Series and door track mounting kit, Series 1092A by GE Interlogix or approved equal.



5. Coordinate with the electrical and security requirements as required to provide a complete

building alarm system. 2.03 KEYING

A. All cylinder locks shall be grand master-keyed into one new set with control and administration master and process/pumping master, all as approved. Factory masterkey with Manufacturer retaining permanent keying records.

B. Provide high security removable core cylinders, with patented key control, for each lock with

construction masterkeying. C. All cylinders shall be construction keyed for Contractor's use during the construction period. All

permanent cores shall be installed upon completion of the project, when directed by the Engineer.

D. All lock cylinders shall meet the requirements of UL437.

E. Furnish cylinders with proper cams and expansion or blocking rings to suit lock with which it is

to be used. F. Coordinate with the Owner to ensure compatibility with the existing standards of the Erie

Metropolitan Transit Authority (EMTA).

G. Furnish the following:

1. Three (3) Grand masterkeys.

2. Four (4) Master keys for each masterkey set.

3. Two (2) Change keys for each lock.

4. Four (4) Construction masterkeys. 5. Two (2) Construction control keys.

6. Three (3) Permanent control keys.

H. Permanently stamp all keys “DO NOT DUPLICATE.”


A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in ‘Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames’ by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by the Engineer.



B. Install each hardware item in compliance with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified under Division 9. Do not install any surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.

F. Secure bumpers to walls with toggle bolts or expansion shields as required by wall construction.

G. Apply and install an adequate separation barrier between any dissimilar metals.

H. Care shall be taken to not mark or damage adjacent work. Repair or replace any damaged work to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or

function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever the installation of hardware is completed more than one month prior to final acceptance or occupancy of an area, Contractor shall return to the work site during the week prior to final acceptance or occupancy to make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items within area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service

1. Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock Manufacturer, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.

3. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units.



4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. The following hardware schedule is included as a guide in establishing the quality, type and

function of hardware required for each opening, and is not to be construed as all inclusive. 1. The final schedule of hardware sets shall be developed by a certified AHC and be

submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. 2. Quantities listed under each hardware set are required for each opening, whether a pair or

single door.

B. Proposed Hardware Sets for the project include the following:

Quantity Item Description Finish

HW SET 1: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Electric Strike 6000 FSE (Voltage Required) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Power Supply PS873BK-FA (Voltage Required) 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier

HW SET 2: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit Balance of Hardware shall be provided by the Overhead Sectional Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 3: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey




HW SET 4:

1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 5: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 5" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 6: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit Balance of Hardware shall be provided by the Overhead Coiling Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 7: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required (Active Leaf) US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Sill, Astragal) Silicone 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 2 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to FSE Electric Strike and Power Supply, 2 Continuous Hinges, 2 Closers, 2 Exit Devices, 2 Overhead Stops, Threshold, etc…) shall be provided by the Aluminum Storefront Door Manufacturer.




HW SET 8: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 64-8913 (Mortise with Lock) US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 2 EA. Flush Bolts 555 x 12” (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Dust Proof Strike 570 (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side of Active) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop/Hold 690H (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Overlapping Astragal 355CS (Active Leaf) Aluminum 2 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 9: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to exterior wall mounted Motion Sensors for automatic door operation by incoming vehicular traffic, high speed motors, etc…) shall be provided by the Overhead Sectional Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 10: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to interior wall mounted Motion Sensors for automatic door operation by outgoing vehicular traffic, high speed motors, etc…) shall be provided by the Overhead Sectional Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 11: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Electric Strike 6000 FSE (Voltage Required) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Power Supply PS873BK-FA (Voltage Required) 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier




HW SET 12: 1 EA. Threshold 2005AKT (Skid Resistant) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Shoe 210AV (Cold Weather Vinyl Insert) Aluminum 1 SET Perimeter Seals S88D (Head & Jambs) Silicone 1 EA. Overhead Rain Drip 346C (Head of Opening + 4”) Aluminum 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to Hinges, Closer, Exit Device with no outside trim, Overhead Stop, etc…) shall be provided by the Blast Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 13: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Electric Strike 6000 FSE (Voltage Required) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Power Supply PS873BK-FA (Voltage Required) 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier

HW SET 14: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to Fusible Link, Perimeter Seals, etc…) shall be provided by the fire-rated Overhead Coiling Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 15: 1 EA. Lock Cylinder As Required US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to Fusible Link, Perimeter Seals, fire-rated Counter Assembly, etc…) shall be provided by the fire-rated Overhead Coiling Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 16: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Office Lockset 8205 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Pull Side) US32D 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D




HW SET 17: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 18: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Office Lockset 8205 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 19: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Service Lockset 8204 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Pull Side) US32D 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 20: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 5" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Passage Latch 8215 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 21: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 22: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Passage Latch 8215 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D




HW SET 23: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 SET Hospital Latches 24-28-115P (Push & Pull Sides) US26D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 24: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Service Lockset 8204 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop/Hold 690H (Concealed) US26D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 25: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Passage Latch 8215 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

Balance of Hardware shall be provided by the Aluminum Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 26: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Service Lockset 8204 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop/Hold 690H (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D


HW SET 27: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Classroom Lockset 8237 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Pull Side) US32D 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D




HW SET 28: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8913 (Mortise with Lock) US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 PR. Automatic Flush Bolts 1842 x 12” (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Dust Proof Strike 570 (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Coordinator 1672 Series US32D 2 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Overlapping Astragal 355CS (Active Leaf) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D HW SET 29: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 2 EA. Exit Device 12-8615 (Concealed Rod w/Passage) ETL US32D 2 EA. Top Strike 605 US32D 2 EA. Bottom Strike 606 (Dust Proof) US32D 2 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Bottom Sweeps 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 PR. Split Astragal 293CV Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 30: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 5" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Service Lockset 8204 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Pull Side) US32D 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 31: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8913 (Mortise with Lock) US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 PR. Automatic Flush Bolts 1842 x 12” (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Dust Proof Strike 570 (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Coordinator 1672 Series US32D 2 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Pull Side) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Overlapping Astragal 355CS (Active Leaf) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 2 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey




HW SET 32: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D

HW SET 33: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP (+Wire Hinge) US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8913 (Mortise with Lock) US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 / As Required (Active Leaf) US32D 1 EA. Electric Strike 6000 FSE (Voltage Required) US32D 1 PR. Automatic Flush Bolts 1842 x 12” (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Dust Proof Strike 570 (Inactive Leaf) US26D 1 EA. Coordinator 1672 Series US32D 2 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Overlapping Astragal 355CS (Active Leaf) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 2 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Power Supply PS873BK-FA (Voltage Required) 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier

HW SET 34: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 5" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Service Lockset 8204 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Electric Strike 6000 FSE (Voltage Required) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey 1 EA. Power Supply PS873BK-FA (Voltage Required) 1 EA. Card Access System by Security Supplier

HW SET 35: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 SET Bathroom Lockset 8265 x LNL US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D




HW SET 36: 1-1/2 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 1 EA. Exit Device 12-64-8813 (Rim with Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core) US32D 1 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 1 EA. Overhead Stop 690S (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 1 EA. Door Bottom Sweep 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 EA. Kickplate 8” x 2” LWOD x 0.050” US32D 1 SET Door Position Sensor 1078C Series Contact with wire leads ABS/Grey

HW SET 37: 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to Fusible Link, etc…) shall be provided by the fire-rated Blast-Resistant Overhead Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 38: 1 SET Perimeter Seals As Required (Head, Jambs, Bottom) Silicone 1 SET Door Position Sensor 2500 Series Contact with wire leads and Aluminum Door Track Mounting Kit

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to east side interior wall mounted Motion Sensors for automatic door operation by west moving vehicular traffic, high speed motors, etc…) shall be provided by the High Speed Overhead Rubber Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 39: 1 SET Perimeter Seals S88D (Head & Jambs) Silicone 1 EA. Door Stop 406 (Wall Bumper) US32D

Balance of Hardware (including but not limited to Hinges, Closer, Exit Device with passage lever, etc…) shall be provided by the Blast Door Manufacturer.

HW SET 40: 3 PR. Butt Hinges 4 ½" x 4 ½" with NRP US32D 2 EA. Exit Device 64-8613 (Concealed Rod w/Lock) ETL US32D 1 EA. Lock Cylinder 6300 (Removable Core / Active Leaf) US32D 2 EA. Top Strike 605 US32D 2 EA. Bottom Strike 606 (Dust Proof) US32D 2 EA. Door Closer EN351-DA (Push Side) US32D 2 EA. Overhead Stop / Hold 690H (Concealed) US26D 1 SET Perimeter Seals 303AS (Head & Jambs) Aluminum 2 EA. Door Bottom Sweeps 315CN (Neoprene Insert) Aluminum 1 PR. Split Astragal 293CV Aluminum 2 EA. Kickplates 8” x 1” LWOD x 0.050” US32D


END OF SECTION



SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all glass and glazing, exterior and interior locations, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

B. Steel doors and frames are included in Section 08110.

C. Aluminum doors and frames are included in Section 08120.

D. Overhead doors are included in Section 08331.

E. Aluminum storefront and entrance systems are included in Section 08400.

F. Glazing for fire-rated window systems is included in Section 08910.

G. Insulated translucent fiberglass panels are included in Section 08950.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, as provided in Section 01300, complete product data for all materials specified within this section. Submittals shall include at least the following:

1. Complete full-size shop drawings by the glass Manufacturer, showing step-by-step glass

setting and sealing procedures. 2. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings. 3. Two representative samples of each type glazing material specified below. Provide glass

color samples that are a minimum size of 12-inches square. Engineer will select reflective coating thickness from the Manufacturer's standard coatings.

4. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency. 5. Submit certification that any glass for fire-rated locations is UL tested and approved. 6. Resubmit any or all submittal data or product samples as required until final approval by

the Engineer.




A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test

B. Consumer Product and Safety Commission:

1. Part 1201 – Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL Building Materials Directory 2. UL 263 – UL Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 3. UL 972 – UL Standard for Safety Burglary-Resisting Glazing Material

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2. ASTM 1376-97 – Standard Specification for Pyrolttic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on

Glass 3. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials 4. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT

Coated and Uncoated Glass 5. ASTM E90 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements 6. ASTM E546 – Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units 7. ASTM E576 – Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in

Vertical Position 8. ASTM E773 – Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units 9. ASTM E774 – Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed

Insulating Glass Units 10. ASTM E971 – Standard Practice for Calculation of Photometric Transmittance and

Reflectance of Materials to Solar Radiation



11. ASTM E998 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Glass in Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under the Influence of Uniform Static Loads by Nondestructive Method

12. ASTM F1233 – Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems

E. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute: 1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) G. Glass Association of North America (GANA) H. Flat Glass Marketing Association’s Glazing Manual I. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

J. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition K. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition L. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass Manufacturer who is both approved and certified by a coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.



E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product Manufacturers and organizations specified within this Section or listed under the referenced standards above.

F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing

with the certification label of an agency that is acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate Manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which the glass complies.

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. H. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with

the certification label of a testing agency that is acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate the Manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

I. Each piece of glass or glass unit shall bear the Manufacturer's label showing the strength, grade,

thickness, type and quality of the material and all labels shall remain in place until the glass has been set, inspected and accepted by the Engineer. All safety and insulating glass shall have permanently etched labels. When glass is not cut to size by the Manufacturer and is furnished from local stock, the Contractor shall provide an affidavit stating the strength, grade, thickness, type, color, quality and Manufacturer of the glass furnished.

J. Should a conflict exist between the specified performance criteria and the minimum Code

requirements, the glazing shall meet the more stringent requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. B. All glass shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, plainly marked with the

identification of material and maker. Materials in broken containers or showing other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

C. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

D. Comply with the insulating-glass Manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and

sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude or temperature change.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Glazing units, except laminated glass, shall be warranted by the product Manufacturer for a minimum period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion, to be free from all manufacturing defects such as seal failure for any insulated units and coating failure.

1. Insulation defects include obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or a visible film on the

interior surfaces of glass.



2. Coating defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of coating deterioration.

B. Laminated glass shall be warranted by the Manufacturer for a minimum period of five (5) years

from the date of Substantial Completion, to be free from all manufacturing defects such as de-lamination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer shall be as indicated below unless otherwise specified in Paragraph 2.02 below:

1. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 2. AGC Flat Glass North America (AFG Industries), Alpharetta, Georgia 3. Guardian Industries Corporation, Auburn Hills, Michigan

4. Viracon, Owatonna, Minnesota

B. Where colors and/or coatings are to be used, the coating may be placed on the inboard or outboard side of the glass. Therefore, if double pane insulation glass is used, there are four surfaces upon which the coating can be placed.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Exterior Glazing

1. Glazing for use within exterior doors, windows and framed openings shall be insulated glass, clear as well as tinted, with low emissivity coating. Glazing shall consist of the Manufacturer’s standard units of two sheets of 1/4-inch thick float glass, in accordance with ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3. Glass in doors, sidelights, windows and other areas designated by the Building Code and/or indicated on the Drawings shall be tempered.

B. Insulated Glass

1. Insulated glass shall be certified by the Insulating Glass Certification Council and shall

meet ASTM E773 and ASTM E774, Class C. For all exterior openings, provide ‘Gray’ tinted glass for the outside sheet and clear glass for the inside sheet. For all interior assemblies, provide clear glass for both sheets. Provide glazing sizes and shapes shall be as shown on the Drawings and as required for the project.

2. The outer sheet shall be heat strengthened glass and the interior sheet shall be annealed glass. The glazing units shall be permanently and hermetically sealed together at the edges using spacers and structural thermal sealant.

3. At exterior doors, provide insulated glass units with an overall thickness of 3/4-inch that consists of two separate lights of 1/4-inch float glass with a 1/4-inch air space. At exterior



windows, transoms or other framed openings, provide insulated glass units with an overall thickness of 1-inch that consists of two separate lights of 1/4-inch float glass with a 1/2-inch air space.

4. Insulated glass assembly shall be ‘Solarban 60’ float glass by PPG Industries, or equal by

AGC Flat Glass, Guardian, Viracon, or approved equal in the thickness and type specified. a. Neutral glass shall be Solarban 60 ‘Clear’ or approved equal. b. Tinted glass shall be Solarban 60 ‘Solargray’ or approved equal.

5. Provide low emissivity coating on the number three (3) surface of all exterior insulated

glass units. Low emissivity glass shall consist of a thin metallic coating applied directly to the glass substrate by magnetically sputtered vacuum. a. Neutral low emissivity glass shall have a light transmittance of 70 percent, a shading coefficient of 0.44 and a summer U-value of 0.29 Btu/hr-ft-degree F. b. Tinted low emissivity glass shall have a light transmittance of 35 percent, a shading coefficient of 0.28, and a summer U-value of 0.27 Btu/hr-ft-degree F.

6. Energy characteristics such as thermal transmittance (U-Factor) and shading coefficient shall comply with all of the minimum requirements of the IECC for the Project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A).

7. Provide spandrel (opaque) insulated glass units where indicated on Drawings. Spandrel glass shall be provided from a single Manufacturer. Spandrel shall be white ceramic frit applied to the number 3 side of glazing unit for either neutral or tinted glass as described above.

8. Provide aluminum spacer between lights with folded and permanently joined corners as approved to provide continuity around perimeter of each unit. Primary seal shall completely cover sides and corners of spacers between spacers and glass, on both sides.

9. Provide dual perimeter seal, inner (primary) seal of polyisobutylene butyl and outer (secondary) seal of structural silicone.

10. Provide approved molecular sieve, silica gel or blend of both for desiccant, sealed into

spacers.

C. All non-labeled door and sidelight or transom glass where applicable (except at exterior doors), shall be clear tempered glass, 1/4-inch thick Herculite by PPG Industries or equal, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

D. Safety Wired Glass

1. All labeled swinging door glass or glass located at hazardous locations as defined by the

Building Code shall consist of UL approved 5/16-inch thick safety wire glass assembly.



2. Glass assembly shall include UL listed minimum 1/4-inch thick clear polished diamond welded wire glass with misco (diamond) pattern and approved safety film.

3. Safety film shall be surface applied heavy duty 7-mil film that meets the minimum human impact safety requirements, can be used within both interior and exterior applications, and has been UL tested and approved as a complete glazing assembly.

4. Safety wire glass shall be SuperLite I-W by SaftiFirst, or approved equal.

5. Provide UL label permanently marked on each piece of glazing.

6. Provide minimum 10-year warranty from the Manufacturer.

E. Fire-rated glass, where required for fire-rated window systems, shall be Pyrostop by Pilkington Group or approved equal. Glass shall be 3/4-inch thick, clear, and 60 minute impact safety resistant. Provide permanent U.L. label mark on each piece of fire-rated glazing.

F. Interior glass in hollow metal frame systems shall be 1/4-inch monolithic annealed clear float

glass, unless indicated to be tempered as required by Consumer Product and Safety Commission - Part 1201, Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials and shown on the Drawings.

G. Glazing Sealant shall be Tremco Mono, Pecora GC-9 Polysulfide, Dap Inc., Flexiseal or equal;

999A Glazing Silicone by Dow; Silalaze II by General Electric or equal; or equivalent 100 percent solids system recommended for glazing to the surrounding frame material or coating. Laminated glass Manufacturer approval is required.

H. Butt Glazing Sealant shall be Dow Corning 795 Silicone; GE Silicone by General Electric

Company or approved equal.

I. Glazing Tape shall be Tremco No. 440, Pecora Extru-seal Butyl Rubber Tape, Dap Inc. Butyl Rubber Sealing Tape or equal. Tape shall be by the same Manufacturer as the glazing compound.

J. Glazing compound for labeled construction glazing shall be DAP No. 33 or equal meeting

NFPA requirements for a hard setting glazing compound with 90 percent inert and non-flammable components as approved.

K. Glazing rods for use with the above glazing compound shall be closed cell polyethylene foam of

diameters to suit joint conditions, all as approved.

L. Setting blocks shall be neoprene, EPDM, or Silicone with a 80-90 durometer hardness and with a minimum length of 0.1-in/sq ft of glass, minimum length of 4-inches.

M. Spacing blocks shall be similar to setting blocks except with a 50 shore A durometer.

N. Glazing strips for non-labeled door and bead glazing, shall be adhesive faced closed cell PVC

foam strip, 1/8-inch thick, 32 durometer hardness. PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All glazing work shall be performed in accordance with the standards of the Glass Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual, latest revision, unless otherwise noted or specified and shall also conform to the approved shop drawings and the Manufacturer's written glazing instructions.

2. All frame elements shall be thoroughly cleaned before glazing commences. 3. All glazing systems for use with insulated glass shall be weeped to the exterior to keep

glazing pockets dry.

B. Doors and Interior Work – Non-Labeled Openings

1. Install continuous glazing strip against rabbet. 2. Set glass in place on setting blocks and install another continuous glazing strip around

perimeter of glass. 3. Install glazing beads, setting against glazing strips, firmly, in order to place a small amount

of pressure against the strips.

C. Exterior glazing – Gasket System

1. Glaze per approved shop drawings using gaskets and appurtenances furnished with the system. Provide setting blocks as required.

D. Labeled Opening Glazing

1. Bed glazing rabbet in the approved hard-setting compound. 2. Set glass using setting blocks. 3. Face glass in the same compound and set beads. 4. Tool compound flush and full between glass and metal surrounds, adding compound as

required. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,

including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass Manufacturer.



C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass Manufacturer.

D. All glass shall be protected under this Section from any accidental damage during construction.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before the date scheduled for

inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Rinse all soap or solvent off of glazing and remove rinse water with a clean squeegee.

F. Follow the glass Manufacturer's written cleaning instructions for each type of glazing.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08910

FIRE-RATED WINDOW SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install fire-rated, fixed aluminum window system including frame and glazing, as shown on the Drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry work is included in Section 04200.

B. Miscellaneous Metals are included in Section 05500.

C. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

D. Firestopping is included in Section 07270.


F. Glazing is included in Section 08800.

G. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of the Submittals Section 01300 in Division 1 – General Requirements of these Specifications.

B. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraphs 1.04, Quality Assurance and 1.07, Performance Requirements, shall be included with the initial submittal for all of the products specified.

C. Submit shop drawings and product data showing the materials of construction and details of fabrication and installation for all products furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall include the following information:

1. Shop-Erection Drawings: Prior to fabrication and delivery, furnish structural calculations

with drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorages and glazing interface with the work of adjacent trades for review by the Engineer. Drawings shall show project specific details including elevations for each frame type, schedules of window frames, conditions at openings with various wall material and thicknesses and installation requirements, joints and connection details, and all associated trim.



2. Manufacturer's Specifications, Data and Product Literature: Submit latest edition of the Manufacturer’s product data providing detailed product description, technical data, specifications and installation instructions as necessary to prove compliance with specified requirements.

3. Materials List: Items proposed to be provided under this Section. 4. Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures: When approved by the Engineer,

will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. Include the Manufacturer's written instructions for the storage and installation of fire-rated aluminum window systems.

5. Certificates: If requested by Engineer, Contractor shall submit a certificate signed by both

the finisher and the Contractor stating that the anodized finishes provided conform to the Specifications. Certificates shall also include certified test reports of finish testing made on random production samples.

D. Samples

1. Prior to fabrication and delivery, submit samples of aluminum frames, glazing, and other

components for finishes, colors and textures to the Engineer for review. Resubmit new samples of each, as required, until final approval is obtained. Approved samples may be incorporated into the project.

E. Code Compliance Report

1. Submit the Manufacturer's documentation or report for code compliance on all fire-rated

aluminum window components.

F. Warranty

1. Submit the Manufacturer's standard product warranty for fire-rated aluminum window system components.

2. The Warranty shall last for a minimum of five (5) years from the Date of Substantial

Completion on the project.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit the Manufacturer's written instructions for care and cleaning of fire-rated aluminum window system components.


A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this Section shall conform to the latest edition of the Building Code. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of the Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

B. Listings and Labels



1. Fire rated framing and glazing shall be under current follow-up services by an approved

independent agency and maintain a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be UL tested and labeled in accordance with the limits of listings.

C. Coordinate the glazing materials and installation for those applications with the appropriate

supplier to ensure full compliance with the Building Code. D. Employees: Use adequate number of Contractor's skilled employees who are thoroughly trained

and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

E. Qualifications

1. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced to perform work of this Section and

must be specialized in the installation of work similar to the work required for this project and who is acceptable by the product Manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be capable of providing field service representation throughout the construction process, approving acceptable installer(s) and approving application method(s).

F. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,

substrate conditions, Manufacturer's installation instructions, and Manufacturer's warranty requirements.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials

2. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences

3. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

4. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

5. ASTM E547 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls

6. ASTM E1233 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference

7. ASTM E2010 – Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies




1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance

Specifications and Methods of Test

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 2. NFPA 257 – Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies 2. UL 263 – Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

E. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 1. UBC 7-4 – Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies


G. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition

H. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

I. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II – Safety Standard for Glazing Materials.

J. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall supply a written warranty from the Manufacturer to cover defects in materials and/or workmanship as follows:

1. Window System: Warranted to be free from defects for a minimum period of two (2) years

from the Date of Substantial Completion on the project. 2. Fire Glass: Warranted to be free from defects (excluding breakage) for a minimum period

of five (5) years from the Date of Substantial Completion on the project.



B. The warranty specified within this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship includes, but is not to be limited to:

1. Failures in operation of operating component or components. 2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard. 3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye. 4. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential

untimely failure of the Work within this Section or the Work as a whole. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Window Performance Requirements 1. Fire Rating: Window system shall be UL tested and approved for 120 minutes.

2. Certification: Windows shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA 252,

UBC 7-4 and UL 263.

3. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory, such as UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) or approved equal.

4. Air Infiltration: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ft of sash perimeter at a static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf.

a. Exterior window systems must comply with the minimum air infiltration

standards of the International Energy Conservation Code.

5. Water Resistance: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E547 and ASTM E331. There shall be no leakage as defined in test method at a static air pressure differential of 10 psf.

6. Uniform Load Deflection: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 55 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.

7. Uniform Load Structural Test: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 82.5 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. The unit shall be evaluated after each load.

8. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): When tested to AAMA Specification 503.1, the thermal transmittance shall not be more than 0.74 BTU/hr/sf/˚F.



a. Exterior window systems must comply with the minimum thermal transmittance

and shading coefficient requirements of the IECC for the Project location in Erie, Pennsylvania (Climate Zone 5A).

B. System Performance Requirements: Provide fire-rated aluminum windows that have been

manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand uniform loads from 65 psf and to maintain the product Manufacturer’s performance criteria without defects, damage, or failure.

1. Design for maximum allowable system deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of

L/240.

2. Design for Wind Load to conform with the minimum Code requirements: a. Basic Wind Speed (3 second gust): 90 mph b. Exposure Category: B c. Importance Factor: 1.0

C. Design and install fire-rated window systems that comply with the minimum requirements of the International Building Code and International Fire Code.


A. Shipment Preparation: Prior to shipment, product Manufacturer shall adequately provide protection for all exposed aluminum framing and trim components against damage to components and to anodized or powder coated finish during shipping, handling and erection operations. All work showing defects or damage of any kind will not be accepted.

B. Shipping and Delivery: Window assemblies shall be shipped to the job-site within the

Manufacturer's original unbroken cartons properly and marked for location within building, complete with installation instructions. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

C. Handling and Storage: All materials for the work of this Section shall be stored and handled as

recommended by the Manufacturer to prevent damage of any nature. Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent binding and avoid significant or permanent damage.




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements for masonry openings by field measurements prior to fabrication or installation. Show recorded measurements on product shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FIXED WINDOW SYSTEM

A. Provide fire-rated aluminum window system for 1.5-inch thick fire-resistant glazing material, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Heavy commercial grade aluminum windows with factory-filled concrete core; factory installed fire-resistant glass and accessories; perimeter trim, window installation hardware and accessories; shims and UL approved anchors; and perimeter sealing of all window units with mineral wool and firestopping sealant.

B. Fixed interior windows shall be UL approved 120-minute (2-hour) fire-rated assemblies as

manufactured by Aluflam North America, Huntington Beach, CA 92649, (714) 899-3990; or approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Framing:

1. Frame construction: Integral structure, pressure plate, and cap from extruded aluminum profiles. Frame core shall be filled internally at the factory with approved cement composite material.

2. Dimensions: a. Perimeter framing face dimension: 2-3/8 inches b. Depth of vertical framing: 6-1/4 inches c. Depth of horizontal framing: 6-1/8 inches

3. Assembly: Frame corners assembled with mechanical fasteners – in factory or in the field.

4. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.



B. Fire Resistant Glazing

1. Assemblies shall be glazed with 120 minute rated, 1-9/16” inch thick, SGG Contraflam 120-N2 fire resistant glazing material as manufactured by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain, Auburn, WA 98001, (888) 803-9533; or equal as approved by window Manufacturer.

a. Material Compatibility: Glazing materials shall be compatible with Aluminum

windows and must be UL tested and approved for use within the fire-rated system.

b. Individual lites shall be permanently identified with a UL listing mark. c. Glazing material installed in ‘Hazardous Locations’ (subject to human impact) shall

be certified to meet the applicable requirements for fire rated assemblies referenced in ANSI Z97.1 Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

d. Visible daylight transmission shall be a minimum of 70%. Glazing material shall be optically clear, colorless and free from unusual distortion.

2. Exterior fire-rated glazing shall be insulated with 1/2-inch airgap and 1/4-inch low-E

coated outboard glass lite. Installation conditions shall be analyzed to assure that fire-rated glazing is not exposed to temperatures outside the 10 – 110 degrees F limits.

C. Glazing And Assembly Accessories

1. Fasteners: All fasteners, setting pads, and glazing clips, shall be stainless or zinc-plated

steel.

2. Glazing Accessories: The glazing material perimeter shall be separated from the perimeter framing system with approved flame retardant intumescent glazing tape. Ceramic setting blocks shall be placed between the metal setting pads and the glazing material. Setting pads and blocks shall be provided by the Manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the Manufacturers' specifications and Shop Erection Drawings as approved by the Engineer. All components shall be prefabricated within the Manufacturer's shop to the maximum extent practicable.

B. Aluminum window assemblies shall be furnished pre-assembled. Aluminum curtainwall

assemblies shall be field glazed.

C. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to the approved dimensions. The Contractor shall provide field verified dimensions within required tolerance (1/8-inch +/-) of window Manufacturer. Shop drawings shall be approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication.

D. Provide hairline fit at joints, make watertight with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

2.04 FINISHES



A. Framing shall be chemically cleaned and pretreated, then finished on all exposed areas with Fluropolymer Paint (Kynar/Duranar) with Finish Color to be selected by Engineer and approved

by Owner to match the adjacent door and frame assemblies. B. Protect painted finish on exposed aluminum surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering prior to shipping.

C. Slight variations in the appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Prior to starting work or processing Shop/Erection Drawings and fabrication, field verify all framing dimensions and installation conditions at the project site, including heights, widths and depths at all specific locations.

B. Examine areas to receive windows to ensure that all substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. Field verify that masonry openings are plumb, square and sized to receive the completed window units and sill plate is level in accordance with the Manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.

C. Report to the Owner’s Representative any conditions that could adversely affect the proper installation of the specified work or could require remedial work.

D. Examine the areas and field conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct any conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until detrimental or unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

E. Starting the specified work of this Section shall imply the Contractor's acceptance of the existing field conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. All aluminum window systems and components shall be inspected before installation. B. Any components which are abraded or dented or which are bent, bowed or show any other

structural damage or distortion shall be rejected and marked as such and shall be removed from the site. No component will be allowed to be straightened and then incorporated in the work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Aluminum window or curtainwall installation shall be performed by a specialty contractor with workmen experienced in the erection of these types of fire-rated window systems, and in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

B. Install fire-rated windows in conformance with the methods and materials utilized in testing for approval for Building Code compliance.



C. All work of this Section shall be done in strict conformance with the details shown on the

Drawings, approved shop drawings, as specified, and in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation recommendations and warranty provisions.

D. General: Install window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash with Manufacturer’s prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials and other corrodible

surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points by complying with AAMA 101, Appendix, titled ‘Dissimilar Materials.’

2. Weathertight Construction: Install sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings, sealants and other components of construction.

E. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage

during product installation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Tests: Engineer shall select window units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with the Manufacturer’s representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract with no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to

Division 1 Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable

air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.15 cfm per foot of crack length, whichever is greater.

b. Water Penetration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf.

3.05 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. The fire-rated aluminum window systems shall be maintained in a clean condition throughout the construction period, so that they will be without any evidence of deterioration or damage, other than the effects of normal weathering, at the time of final acceptance.

B. Clean prior to the Owner’s final acceptance. Remove all protective coatings, excess glazing and

sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from steel or glass surfaces. Glass and frame should be cleaned using soft clean cloth, chamois leathers, sponges or soft paper. Use clean warm water with a mild detergent as approved by the Manufacturer. Abrasive cleaning agents,



detergent that contains either alkaline, acids or fluoride, or other materials that could damage the finished surfaces shall not be used.

C. Immediately before final acceptance, window systems shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and

out. The Manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods shall be demonstrated to the Owner's on site personnel during this final cleaning.

D. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged

installed products. Remove any construction debris from the project site and dispose of all materials in a lawful manner.

E. Provide air infiltration and watertight testing for leakage before final inspection. F. Window systems shall be totally free of any abrasions, nicks, scars, etc, and shall be in good

operating condition at final acceptance.

G. All window systems, including glazing, aluminum frames and finish, shall be protected from damage against harmful substances and construction activities throughout the entire construction period.

1. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. 2. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and

continuous high humidity until they are fully dry. 3. Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. 4. Protect windows from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid,

cement, or other harmful contaminants. 3.06 CORRECTION OF WORK


1. Any components that have been damaged, including finish, beyond successful repair, shall

be removed and replaced with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Minor damage shall be repaired as recommended by the Manufacturer, to the full

satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner.

B. At the completion of construction, any adjacent work marred by the work of this Section shall be cleaned or replaced.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08950

INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes the insulated translucent sandwich panel system for exterior wall openings and sloped explosion relief panels, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work includes providing and installing:

1. Flat factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels

2. Aluminum installation system

3. Aluminum flashing attached to translucent roof panels

4. Custom designed explosion release panels with pressure release fasteners, aircraft restraint

cables, related metal trim and accessories.

1.02 RELATED WORK

1. Precast architectural concrete is included in Section 03450.

2. Masonry work is included in Section 04200.

3. Structural steel is included in Division 5.

4. Miscellaneous metals are included in Section 05500.

5. Rough carpentry is included in Section 06100.

6. Coping, sheet metal flashing and trim are included in Section 07512. 7. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

8. Electrical work and heat tracing is included in Division 16.

9. Structural design criteria is included on Drawing S-1.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Manufacturer’s product data including construction details, material descriptions, thermal properties, light transmittance, product profiles and finishes of components.

B. Submit detailed shop drawings showing panels to be used at both wall and roof applications.

Include elevations, details, dimensions and attachments to all other adjacent work.



C. Submit Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory finished aluminum.

1. When requested, submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and

material indicated for the work and in size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets consisting of two or more units showing the full range of variations expected.

a. Sandwich panels: Units 14-inches by 28-inches in size

b. Factory finished aluminum: Sections 5-feet in length

D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by the panel installer, certifying compliance with project

qualification requirements. E. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type

and class of panel system fully complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current Manufacturer and indicative of products proposed for use on this project.

1. Test reports required include the following:

a. International Code Council Evaluation Report (ICC-ES)

b. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card

c. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635)

d. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244)

e. Impact Strength (UL 972)

f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037)

g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002)

h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72)

i. Fall Through Resistance (ASTM E 661)

j. Panel Insulation U-Factor (NFRC-100)

k. NFRC System U-Factor Certification (NFRC 700)

l. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (NFRC or Calculations)

m. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503)

n. Air Leakage (ASTM E 283)



o. Structural Performance (ASTM E 330)

p. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331)

q. 1200°F Fire Resistance (SWRI)

r. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E-lO8)

s. Daylight Autonomy

F. Submit current documentation indicating regular, independent quality control monitoring under a nationally recognized Building Code review and listing program.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications

1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly

employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.

2. Panel system must be listed by the International Code Council – Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency.

3. Quality control inspections and required testing shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with AC04 ‘Sandwich Panels,’ AC177 ‘Translucent Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Face and Panel Wall, Roof and Skylight Systems,’ as regulated by the ICC-ES.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the

business of installing specified panel systems for at least five (5) consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.

C. Performance Requirements: The Manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and

fabrication of the complete panel system. 1. When requested, include structural analysis data signed that is sealed by the Professional

Engineer (PE), registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Standard panel system shall have less than 0.01cfm/ft² air leakage by ASTM E 283 at 6.24 PSF (50 mph) and no water penetration by ASTM E 331 at 15 PSF; and structural testing by ASTM E 330.

3. Structural Loads: Provide complete panel system capable of handling the following loads:



a. Positive Wind Load: 25 PSF

b. Negative Wind Load: 25 PSF

c. Live Load: 20 PSF

d. Snow Load: 28 PSF; Drift Load: 0 PSF

e. Explosion Venting Release Pressure: 35 + 10-0 PSF

1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in Manufacturer's standard protective packaging.

B. Store panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover, in accordance with the Manufacturer's written storage and handling instructions.


A. American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM)

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. Factory Mutual (FM)

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 68 – Standard on Explosion Protection by Deflagration Venting

2. NFPA 69 – Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems

G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA)



I. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

J. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2009 Edition

K. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply



1.07 WARRANTY

A. Submit Manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel system work which fails in materials or workmanship within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, and deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering and defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. The basis for this specification is for products manufactured by the Kalwall Corporation. Other Manufacturers may bid this project provided they comply with all of the performance requirements of this specification and submit evidence thereof. Listing other Manufacturers’ names in this specification does not constitute approval of their products or relieve them of compliance with all the performance requirements contained herein. 1. Kalwall Corporation, Manchester, New Hampshire, (800) 258-9777

2. CPI Daylighting Incorporated, Lake Forest, Illinois, (800) 759-6985

3. Major Industries Incorporated, Wausau, Wisconsin, (888) 759-2678

4. Or approved equal

2.02 PANEL COMPONENTS

A. Wall Panels – Exterior Wall Openings

1. Face Sheets:

a. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically for architectural use.

b. Face sheets made of acrylic are not acceptable.

c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.

d. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes or 300°F for

25 minutes per the IBC.

2. Interior Face Sheets:

a. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 25 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

b. Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1-inch.



3. Exterior Face Sheets:

a. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1-inch.

b. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 10 and smoke developed no greater than 400 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

c. Color Stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more

than 3.0 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

d. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 ft. lbs. minimum, without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

e. Erosion Resistance: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed 0.7-mils and 40-mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500-grams for 1000-cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers.

4. Appearance:

a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0.070-inch thick, Crystal in color.

b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, 0.045-inch thick, Crystal in color.

c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.

B. Explosion Venting Panels – Sloped Roof System

1. Face Sheets:

a. Translucent Faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins,

formulated specifically for architectural use.

b. Face sheets made of acrylic are not acceptable.

c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.

d. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes or 300°F for 25 minutes per the IBC.



2. Interior Face Sheets:

a. Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1-inch.

b. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 10 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

3. Exterior Face Sheets:

a. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1-inch.

b. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic

unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 10 and smoke developed no greater than 400 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

c. Color Stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more

than 3 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 3 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

d. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held

pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 ft. lbs. minimum, without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

e. Erosion Resistance: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier

embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed 0.7-mils and 40-mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500-grams for 1000-cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers.

4. Appearance: a. Exterior Face Sheets: Smooth, 0.070” thick and Crystal in color.

b. Interior Face Sheets: Smooth, 0.045” thick and Crystal in color.

c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.

5. Explosion Release Panel System:

a. Configuration: Sloped (6:12) roof system designed to provide explosion relief in

compliance with NFPA 68, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

b. Release Pressure: Complete overlapping type panel system shall be designed with pressure release fasteners to ensure that panels release at 35-psf under normal conditions.



c. Attachment Cables: Provide minimum 7 x 19 x 3/16 aircraft restraint cables at each individual panel, equally spaced at 48-inches on center maximum, with 24-inches of slack, to restrain panels to fixed structural steel support system.

C. Grid Core

1. Thermally broken I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with

provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I- beam shall be no less than 7/16-inch. The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- 0.002-inch.

2. Thermal Break: Minimum 1-inch, thermo-set fiberglass composite.

D. Laminate Adhesive

1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council ‘Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives.’

2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037.

3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D-1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions: a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73° F: 540 PSI

b. 182° F: 100 PSI

c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI

d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI

e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI

2.03 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken I-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat sharp edge.

1. Wall Panels:

a. Thickness: 2-3/4”

b. Light transmission: 30%

c. Solar heat gain coefficient: 0.33

d. Panel U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 2-3/4” thermally broken grid, U= 0.23.



e. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U- factor of 0.28.

f. Grid pattern: Shoji, with nominal size of 24-inches by 12-inches.

2. Explosion Venting Sloped Roof Panels:

a. Thickness: 2-3/4”

b. Solar heat gain coefficient 0.13.

c. Panel U - Light transmission: 10%.

d. Panel U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 2-3/4” thermally broken grid, U= 0.10.

e. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U- factor of 0.17.

f. Grid pattern: Nominal size 12” x 24”; pattern Shoji.

B. Standard panels shall deflect no more than 1.9-inches at 30 psf in 10’-0” span without a

supporting frame by ASTM E-72.

C. Standard panels shall withstand 1200ºF fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming.

D. Thermally Broken Panels

1. Minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the bond line.

E. Roof mounted panel system shall pass Class A Roof Burning Brand Test by ASTM E 108.

F. Roof mounted panel system shall meet the fall through requirements of OSHA 1910.23 as demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E 661, thereby not requiring supplemental screens or railings.

2.04 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM

A. Closure System: Thermally broken extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system. Thermally broken perimeter system shall have a urethane bridge.

B. Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under

controlled conditions.

C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.

D. Finish: Exposed aluminum to be the Manufacturer’s factory applied finish that meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604.



1. Color to be selected by Engineer from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.


A. Examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with panel

erection until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Metal Protection

1. Where aluminum will come in direct contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with approved primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by the panel Manufacturer.

2. Where aluminum will come in direct contact with concrete, masonry or pressure treated wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with approved bituminous paint or method as recommended by the panel Manufacturer.

3. Where aluminum will come in direct contact with pressure-treated wood, separate all dissimilar materials by methods as recommended by the panel Manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install the insulated translucent panel system in accordance with the panel Manufacturer's written installation recommendations and approved shop drawings.

1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system.

2. Accommodate all anticipated thermal and mechanical movements.

3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to

provide weather-tight construction.

B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in accordance with the Manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3.04 CORRECTION OF WORK


3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to the Manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, remove all tools, equipment and debris, resulting from the Work of this Section, and leave the work area in a safe and clean condition.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install gypsum systems and related work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Coordinate the work of this Section with other Sections requiring work within, above, or penetrations through the systems.

B. The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Interior metal stud framing for walls, ceilings and bulkheads.

2. Gypsum wall board, tapes, compounds and accessories. 3. Exterior gypsum sheathing, tapes, compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. C. Building insulation is included in Section 07231.

D. Firestopping is included in Section 07270.


F. Doors and frames are included in Division 8.

G. Acoustical tile ceilings are included in Section 09500.

H. Resilient flooring is included in Section 09650. I. Field painting is included in Section 09902.

J. Polymer toilet partitions are included in Section 10155.

K. HVAC and Plumbing work are included in Division 15.

L. Electrical work is included in Division 16.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for approval as provided in Section 01300, shop drawings showing the layout, location of reinforcements for attached items; and Manufacturer's technical data identifying pertinent design details, construction methods, materials and specifications covering system and all components required. Coordinate requirements for attachments and loadings with other Sections.

B. Submit samples of all framing members, accessories and fasteners for approval of the Engineer. C. Product Data:

1. Material list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Manufacturer’s specifications noting fastener detail and spacing and other data needed to confirm compliance with the specified requirements. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM A525 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

2. ASTM C36 – Specification for Gypsum Wallboard 3. ASTM C475 – Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand 4. ASTM C630 – Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard 5. ASTM C645 – Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track)

and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board 6. ASTM C754 – Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board or Water-Resistant Backing Board 7. ASTM C840 – Specification for Fully Processed Cold-Rolled Lamination Steel 8. ASTM C1280 – Specification for Installation of Gypsum Products 9. ASTM C1396 – Specification for Manufacturing of Gypsum Products

B. Gypsum Association (GA)

1. GA 216-85 – Specification for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard C. Steel Stud Manufacturer’s Association (SSMA), Product Technical Information D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Incorporated (UL)



1. Provide applicable fire-rated assemblies listed by UL for fire-rated partitions as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code

(IBC), 2009 Edition F. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. Work of this Section shall conform to the following:

1. Applicable portions of ‘Recommended Specifications for the application and finishing of Gypsum Board,’ GA-216, by Gypsum Association.

B. Allowable Tolerances – 1/16-inch maximum offsets between planes of board faces and 1/8-inch

in 8-feet for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. Obtain gypsum board, trim accessories, adhesives and joint treatment products, from a single

Manufacturer, or from Manufacturers recommended by the prime Manufacturer of gypsum board as approved.


A. Deliver materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with the Manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade.

B. Store in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the floor or

ground levels, and where applicable, protect from freezing. C. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.07 PROJECT / SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Examine the substrates and the spaces to receive the various systems, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Notify the Engineer, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

1. Environmental Conditions a. Maintain building temperature within the range of 55 to 70-degrees F for 24-hours

before, during and after gypsum board installation and joint treatment. b. Provide adequate ventilation to ensure there is no excess moisture within the area of

work.



c. Comply with the standards referenced above for the various systems. 2. Protect other work from soiling, spattering, deterioration and other harmful affects which

may result from finishing operations. 3. Do not heat insulation materials without proper ventilation to avoid condensation.


A. All components shall be Gold Bond products as manufactured by National Gypsum Company (NGC); United States Gypsum Corporation (USG); Georgia-Pacific Corporation (G-P Gypsum); or approved equal.

1. Regular Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type ‘R’, 5/8-inch thick with rounded and

tapered edges, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Sheet size shall be the maximum length and width available to minimize joints. a. Provide moisture-resistant type gypsum wallboard in restrooms, exterior areas and

other areas that are subject to potential moisture.

b. Provide abuse-resistant gypsum wallboard in stairs and other service areas that are subject to frequent impacts and damage.

2. Fire-Rated Gypsum Wallboard: UL approved, ASTM C36, Type ‘X’, 5/8-inch thick with

rounded and tapered edges, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Sheet size shall be the maximum length and width available to minimize joints. a. Provide moisture-resistant type gypsum wallboard in restrooms, exterior areas and

other areas that are subject to potential moisture.

b. Provide abuse-resistant gypsum wallboard in stairs and other service areas that are subject to frequent impacts and damage.

3. Fire-Rated Shaftliner Board: UL approved, ASTM C36, Type ‘X’, 1-inch thick Gypsum

Liner with beveled edges for installation into fire-rated Shaftwall assemblies. Shaftliner shall include moisture-resistant paper on both sides for protection against weather during installation. Provide ‘Fire-Shield’ shaftliner panels by National Gypsum; Firecode ‘Sheetrock’ gypsum liner panel by USG; or approved equal.

4. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness in curved applications. Provide 1/4-inch board with tapered edges where applicable.

5. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C79/C1396, water-resistant underlayment panel with moisture-resistant core, faced with water-repellent paper on both sides, Regular Type, 1/2-inch thick with tongue-and-groove edges. Provide exterior type sheathing where indicated on Drawings to protect assemblies that are exposed to moisture.



6. Cement Board / Backer Board: 5/8-inch thick cement board with woven glass fiber mesh facing complying with ASTM A118.9. Provide at all partitions that are located behind ceramic wall tile, where indicated on the Drawings.

7. Metal Studs – ASTM C645, 20 Gauge ‘C’ shape steel studs in size or depth or gauge as

indicated on the Drawings, specified herein or otherwise required for project completion. 8. Runners – Match studs; type recommended by the steel stud Manufacturer for floor and

head support of studs, and for vertical abutment of gypsum wallboard at other work. Provide slip type detail at connections to structural heads.

9. Shaftwall Studs – UL approved, non-load bearing steel shaftwall studs, running vertically within open cavities that are designed to withstand both positive and negative air pressure forces. Provide minimum 20 Gauge, ‘I’ shaped studs by National Gypsum, ‘CH’ shaped studs by USG, or approved equal. Stud size shall be 2-1/2 inches, 4-inches or 6-inches spaced at 24-inches maximum, as indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for project completion. Overall shaftwall assembly shall comply with the limiting heights as determined by the Manufacturer based on hourly fire-rating, air pressure, wind load, allowable deflection, gauge and spacing of studs.

10. Furring Channels – ASTM C645, 25 Gauge steel, 7/8-inch or 1-1/2 inch in size, hat-shaped

furring channels, where indicated for furred walls, columns, and ceilings. Space at 16-inches on center maximum, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

11. Stud System Accessories – Provide the stud Manufacturer's standard clips, shoes, ties,

reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as required for a complete stud system. 12. Galvanize all steel components to ASTM A525, G60 Standards. 13. Gypsum board, trim accessories, studs and joint treatment shall be the products of single

Manufacturer, or from alternate product Manufacturers when recommended by the proposed prime Manufacturer of the gypsum board products.

14. Jointing tape and compounds shall conform to ASTM C475 and be compatible with the

wallboards used and completely asbestos-free. a. Tape – Paper reinforcing tape approved for use with the wallboards. b. Compounds – Two types, chemically hardening type for bedding and filling and ready

mixed vinyl type or vinyl-powder type for topping and sanding. 15. Accessories and Appurtenances

a. General – Except as otherwise indicated, provide Manufacturer's standard galvanized

steel beaded units with flanges for concealment in jointing compound, including corner beads, casing beads and control joints.

b. Gypsum Board Fasteners – Corrosion resistant complying with standards specified,

Type S for metal studs, all in lengths required for various conditions.



c. Provide approved fasteners and accessories required to secure gypsum systems to substrates and insulation to gypsum systems. All fasteners used at wet or damp locations shall be made of stainless steel.

d. Concealed Sealant – Mastic type; non-shrinking, non-drying, non-migrating and

non-staining, as approved. e. Reinforcing for applied items – For light duty where approved - 20 gauge galvanized

steel sheet attachment plate for toggle bolt applications. ASTM A36 galvanized steel in approved thicknesses and shapes with required fasteners for all other applications.

f. Insulation for stud walls shall be fiberglass, unfaced, batt insulation with a minimum R-Value of 3.34 per inch. Unless otherwise indicated, insulation shall be provided within full depth, breadth and height of stud wall cavity.

g. Vapor Barrier shall consist of 6 mil thick polyethylene sheets with a vapor transmission rating of 0.113 or less. Provide with approved pressure sensitive polyethylene tape to completely and continuously seal all joints.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. All installation shall be performed by workman experienced in drywall installation in strict accordance with the details shown on the Drawings, the approved shop drawings and the Manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. The work of the Section shall be carefully coordinated with the work of all other related trades

including materials to be built into or applied on wallboard and items requiring additional supports within partitions.

C. Maintain a minimum room temperature of 55-degrees F, during application of wallboard and

joint treatment and until completely dry or occupied. Provide adequate ventilation as approved. 3.02 INSTALLATION – METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. Align runner tracks to the partition layout at both floors and ceilings. Secure tacks to floor and ceiling construction not over 16-inches on center. Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner tracks.

B. Use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possible. If necessary, splice studs by

nesting with a minimum lap of 8-inches and fasten laps with two screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place.

1. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and

intersections and adjacent to openings, using 3/8-inch self-drilling screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges of studs. Space studs as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for project.



C. Provide additional studs to support corners at partition intersections and corners and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints. Provide any additional bracing and reinforcing members as recommended by the system Manufacturer to assume complete rigidity at partitions.

D. Carry framing of all partitions up to the underside of structure overhead, unless otherwise noted

on the Drawings.

E. Provide expansion type slip-joint connection at all head connections to structure.

F. At openings and door frames, install two full height studs at all jambs. Fasten the first stud at each jamb with two self-drilling screws to all frame joint anchors. Place second stud in tandem with and against first stud.

G. Above openings and heads of frames, a cut-to-length section of track shall be installed. Flanges

to overlap jamb studs and shall be securely attached to jamb studs.

H. Between frames and ceiling, install cut-to-length jack studs, extending from door frame header track to ceiling track.

I. Where control joint is called for at jamb line above frame, install jack stud approximately 1-inch

from first jamb stud. At all other locations, keep jack studs at least 6-inches from jambs to avoid wallboard joints at jamb line.

J. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing at openings and

terminations in the work and at locations required to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on gypsum board alone.

1. Attention shall be directed to electrical equipment and toilet room accessories requiring

additional support.

2. Coordinate these requirements with the respective trade sections for exact locations. 3.03 INSTALLATION – GYPSUM BOARD AND ACCESSORIES

A. Install gypsum board vertically whenever possible to eliminate end-butt joint conditions.

1. Install Wallboard – Boards shall be of such length so as to eliminate end joints and installed with vertical joints only. Boards shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall not occur on the same stud. Boards shall be applied using screws as specified. Provide expansion joints as shown, as recommended and as directed.

2. Single layer construction – Wallboard shall be held in firm contact with framing member

while fastenings are being driven. Fastening shall proceed from center portion of the wallboard toward the edges and ends. Fasteners shall be set with heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard in the dimple formed by the power screwdriver. Care shall be taken to avoid the breaking of the face paper of the wallboard. Improperly driven screws shall be removed.



3. Screws shall be spaced not to exceed 12-inches on center except at vertical butting edges of

the fire-rated partitions where they shall be 8-inches on center. 4. Corner beads shall be nailed with gypsum wallboard nails spaced no greater than 9-inches

apart on each flange of the bead with the nails opposite. In lieu of nailing, the corner bead may be crimp applied 6-inches on center with a special tool. Provide similar nailing for all board trim.

5. Where wallboard abuts other materials, such as masonry walls and structural frame and

decking, the wallboard shall be held back so as to form a joint, which shall be sealed with an approved synthetic rubber base perimeter sealant.

B. Isolate edges of gypsum board from abutment with structure except at floors. Provide space as

detailed for trim and sealant.

C. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with applicable reference standards and the Manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten

gypsum board to the supports.

E. Install metal corner beads at external corners. Attach with clinch-on corner bead tool. F. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or

semi-exposed. Provide type with face flanges for embedment in jointing compound to provide the details shown and detailed on approved shop drawings.

G. Installation shall conform to ASTM C840 and to the details shown and approved shop

drawings.

H. Screw apply all reinforced cementitious board to studs in similar approved manner using the specific screws specified. Leave 1/8-inch open joints between pieces.

I. Install exterior type gypsum sheathing as indicated in the Manufacturer’s written instructions

and recommendations. 3.04 FINISHING

A. Finish gypsum work in accordance with the referenced standard and to Level 4 of Gypsum Association GA-214. Conform to the approved shop drawings and to the following:

1. Joint compound shall be mixed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

A uniform layer of compound shall be applied over the joint approximately 4-inches wide and filling the groove. The tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded into the compound leaving sufficient compound under tape to provide proper bond.

2. A second and third coat of joint compound or joint finishing compound shall be applied

after each preceding coat has been allowed to thoroughly dry. Coats shall be spread over tape and the tapered portion of edge and feathered out at the edge.



3. All inside corners shall be coated with at least one coat of joint compound over perforated

tape with the edges feathered out. 4. All screw head dimples shall receive at least three coats of compound. 5. Flanges of corner and casing beads shall be concealed by at least two coats of compound

feathered out approximately 9-inches on one or both sides of the exposed metal as applicable for project.

6. Allow each application of compound to joints and fastener heads to dry, then sand as

required.

B. Caution shall be used to avoid roughing of the wallboard paper. All wallboard and treated areas shall be left smooth and ready for painting.

3.05 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. Remove and replace all defective work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.06 CLEAN UP

A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces.

B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove

all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section from the working area. END OF SECTION



SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install ceramic tile at floors, base and walls as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.


A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Joint sealers are included in Section 07901. D. Access doors are included in Section 08311. E. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. F. Polymer toilet partitions are included in Section 10155. G. Toilet and shower accessories are included in Section 10800. H. Plumbing fixtures are included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed project specific shop drawings, showing tile pattern, layouts of

tile jointing and control joints for rooms and areas requiring ceramic tile. B. Product Data

1. Manufacturer's list of items proposed to be used or provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's standard palette showing the various tile colors and textures available. 3. Manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for all products of

this Section. 4. Proposed mix design for ceramic tile layout. 5. Proposed tile setting systems with Manufacturer certification of suitability for the project

installation.



C. Certificates 1. Furnish a Master Grade Certificate for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed

by ceramic tile Manufacturer and Installer. The certificate shall show that the tile mortar and grout complies with the requirements of the Tile Council of America (TCA).

2. Furnish certification by the grout Manufacturer that the products used meet or exceed the

standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Certificate of Grade: "Standard Grade" tile in accordance with American National

Standards Institute Specifications for Ceramic Tile, A137.1-1967 (ANSI-AN-4).

D. Samples

1. Required: Samples of each type and composition of ceramic tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12-inches square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints.

2. Quantity: Two pieces of each type, size and color of ceramic tile, to be submitted to the

Engineer for approval.


A. Tile Council of America (TCA) 1. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 2. TCA A137.1 – Specification for Ceramic Tile

B. Ceramic Tile Institute (CTI) – Standards of the Tile Trade C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A:


F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid



A. Grouting materials shall be manufactured under Tile Council of America (TCA) license. Provide identification and formula number on each container.



B. Grade Certificate and Labeling: With each delivery of ceramic tile, furnish the tile

Manufacturer's "Master Grade Certificate" to the Engineer. C. Acceptable Products: Except as may be specified otherwise use only such products as have been

tested and listed by the Ceramic Tile Institute in its "Tested Materials" list. D. Provide materials obtained from only one source for each type tile and for setting and grouting

to minimize variations in appearance and quality. E. Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled laborers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

F. Installation Specifications: Conform to ANSI A108.5 requirements including ANSI A108.4

requirements for adhesive installation. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three (3)

years documented experience on similar projects. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the project site in the Manufacturer's original unbroken containers with legible labels identifying brand names and contents.

1. Tile cartons shall be grade-sealed by the tile Manufacturer in accordance with ANSI A137

with grade-seals unbroken. 2. Grout shall contain hallmarks certifying compliance with applicable referenced standards.

B. Deliver mastic grout in containers ready for use. C. Store all materials in a dry location under cover in a manner to prevent damage or

contamination. D. Handle all tile products in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's written directions.

E. All tile materials shall be free from chips, cracks, scratches, pits, discoloration or other defects.

Any damaged or defective materials will be rejected. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Install mortar and set and grout the tile, only when the temperature is at least 50-F and rising. B. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance

with ANSI A108.4 and A108.5 and with the Manufacturer's printed recommendations.



C. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces against damage during progress of the work of this

Section.

D. Coordination and Cooperation: Coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades. Perform work without delay to the work in progress.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish and deliver to the Project site, additional ceramic tile materials that match and are from the same production runs as the products installed on the Project and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and clearly identified with labels describing contents.

1. Ceramic Tile and Trim: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to minimum 10-percent of

the amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size of ceramic tile with all representative trim used on the Project.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to minimum 10-percent of the amount installed for

each type, composition, and color used on the Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceramic Tile Products: Dal-Tile Corporation, Summitville, American Olean, Colored, or approved equal.

2. Tile-Setting and Grouting Materials: Laticrete Corporation, Bostik Findley, or approved

equal. 2.02 PRODUCT STANDARDS

A. Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with Standard Grade requirements of ANSI A137.1, “Specifications for Ceramic Tile,” for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with referenced ANSI

Standards. C. Colors, Textures and Patterns: For tile, grout, and other products that require the selection of

colors, surface textures, patterns and other appearance characteristics; comply with the following requirements:

1. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing the tile Manufacturer’s

standard designations for these characteristics. 2. Provide selections to the Engineer from the tile Manufacturer’s full range of colors,

textures, and patterns for products of type indicated.



D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

E. Static Coefficient of Friction (COF): For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products

with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6 COF. 2. Stair Treads: Minimum 0.6 COF. 3. Ramps or Sloped Surfaces: Minimum 0.8 COF.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Floor Tile 1. Floor tile shall be unglazed ceramic mosaic tile, 2-inches by 2-inches square and 1/4-inch

thick in size with cushion edge as approved. 2. Tile patterns shall include three (3) different colors including one field color and two accent

colors as indicated by the Floor Finish Plans on Drawing A-12. 3. Base tile shall include 2-inches by 4-inches by 4-inch high cove base, cove base corner

pieces, bullnose trim and other trim as required and approved. 4. All floor tiles shall have a slip resistant surface that meets or exceeds a 0.60 COF at level

surfaces and a 0.80 COF at sloped surfaces, when measured under wet conditions.

B. Wall Tile 1. Wall tile shall be matte glazed ceramic tile, 4-inches by 4-inches square and 1/4-inch

thick in size with cushion edge as approved. 2. Tile pattern shall include three (3) different colors including one field color and two accent

colors as indicated by the Interior Elevations on Drawing A-13. 3. Provide bullnose pieces and other miscellaneous trim as required for a complete

installation.

C. Tile Colors 1. Field Color – White Granite, D037 by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Accent Color 1 – Cobalt Blue, D023 by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 3. Accent Color 2 – Dark Green, D012 by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 4. Final colors shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from full range of

premium and standard colors available from the ceramic tile Manufacturer.



D. Thresholds 1. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between

adjacent floor finishes. a. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit

height of bevel to 1/2-inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 2. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per

ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. a. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. E. Portland cement mortar for shower receptors shall consist of 1 part portland cement (ASTM

C150 Type II) and 4 parts sand (ASTM C144) by volume. Use an admixture to make mortar bed water resistant.

F. Dry set mortar shall conform to ANSI 118.1 and shall have the TCA hallmark. Provide latex -

portland cement mortar at floors and base.

G. Organic adhesive shall be Hydroment 7001 by Bostik or equal and shall conform to ANSI A136.1, Type 1 and as approved.

H. Grout shall be Hydroment Tile Grout by Bostik or equal. Colors shall be as selected by the

Engineer and approved by the Owner. Allow for up to four standard colors including white.

I. Water shall be fresh, clean and potable, free from organic matter, acids and alkalis. J. Provide any additional materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and

proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to approval of the Engineer. 2.04 CEMENTITIOUS MIXES

A. Setting bed mortar for shower receptors shall conform to ANSI A108.1 with above materials, all as approved.

B. Dry set mortar mix for floor and wall conditions shall conform to ANSI A108.5 as approved.

C. Grout shall be mixed with water only in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.

The colors of the grout shall be strictly controlled so that all joints will be uniform throughout, and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer.

D. Waterproofing for Thin-Set Tile Installations: Provide products that comply with ANSI

A118.10.

E. Setting Materials

1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, TCA F115.02.



F. Grouting Materials

1. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, composed of 100% solids epoxy pigment as required to produce the color indicated.

a. Laticrete: 500 Series Sanded Grout. b. Color: White, Group 2, Traditional.

G. Elastomeric Sealants: Provide Manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants

of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”

1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;

Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide.

H. Miscellaneous Materials

1. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by Manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

2. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral

provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND APPLICATION

A. Workmanship: In accordance with best practice; work performed by skilled craftpersons; jointings, intersections and returns perfectly formed; drilling and cutting neatly done without marring the material; joints straight and solidly filled conforming to applicable "Standard Specifications" of the American National Standards Institute, Inc. ANSI A108.1 and ANSI A108.2.

B. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation

standards in “Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile” that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.

C. Installation Guidelines: TCA’s “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.” Comply with TCA

installation methods indicated.

D. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.



E. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 INSPECTION

A. Surface Conditions: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be

performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected at no added cost to the Owner.

B. Surfaces to be Tiled: Surfaces shall fall within the following maximum variations. Report such

unacceptable conditions and do not install tile until they are corrected. 1. Walls: 1/4 inch in 8-feet. 2. Floors: 1/4 inch in 10-feet.

C. Correction of Substrate: Provide concrete substrates for tile floors that comply with flatness tolerances specified within referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.

1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material Manufacturer’s

written instructions to properly fill any cracks, holes, and depressions. 2. Remove any surface protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

3.03 TILE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements

1. Symmetrical, avoid small cuts; no tile to be cut to a length or width less than 2 of the full

length or width of the tile. 2. Rub cuts smooth with a fine stone. 3. Surfaces in even planes; corners and lines straight and true. 4. Straight joint pattern on walls and ceilings; floor joints paralleled to walls. 5. See the Drawings for special tile patterns on the floor and walls.

B. Floor Tile

1. Setting: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated, including those referencing TCA

installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.



2. Back Buttering: For floor installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by

complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile as referenced within the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.

3. Align floor tile flush and hairline with the adjoining surfaces and/or tile divider strips. 4. Transition Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring

meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

C. Wall Tile 1. Setting: Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements

indicated, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

2. Install metal lath and scratch coat to walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1. 3. Apply wall setting beds not sooner than 24-hours after application of scratch coat in areas

to be tiled. 4. Back Buttering: For wall installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by

complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile as referenced within the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.

5. Provide 1/2-inch to 3/4-inch thick cementitious backer boards behind all wall tile, installed

flush with the face of gypsum drywall and other adjacent surfaces.

D. Divider Strips

1. Required: At edge of ceramic tile floors at all doors and openings where material of floor finish or covering is different on each side of the opening, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

2. Installation: Placed prior to placing mortar setting bed; securely anchored; top to be flush

with finish floor level or adjoining resilient flooring. Divider strips not to be installed where adjoining finish floor is concrete.

E. Accessories: Locate and properly mark prior to start of any tile laying exact locations of

accessories, anchoring devices for equipment, toilet stall partitions, and similar items which penetrate through tile finish.

F. Joints

1. Floor, wall and ceiling tile joints shall be uniform 1/16-inch wide. 2. Expansion Joints: As per American National Standards Institute or where indicated on the

Contract Drawings. 3. Joints as juncture of ceramic tile floor and adjoining concrete finish floor to be same as

floor tile joints. Align joints of ceiling tile with joints of wall tile.



4. Butt joints required between tile and divider strips; make joints flush and hairline, not to be

grouted. 5. All floors tile joints shall be aligned and parallel to the adjacent wall tile joints.

G. Grouting and Pointing

1. Grout all tile joints full and neatly point.

2. Finish grouting for ceramic tile flush with surface of square-edge tile and to be recessed to

the depth of the edge for all purpose edge. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of tile placement and grouting, clean all grout smears and haze from ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use cleaning materials and methods that comply with the ceramic tile and grout Manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Remove mortar and grout prior to hardening during progress of work. Remove any grout

residue from tile work as soon as possible. 2. Use only cleaners that are recommended by the tile and grout Manufacturers and only after

determining that the proposed cleaners are safe for use by testing on extra, unused samples of ceramic tile and other surfaces to be cleaned.

3. Completely protect all hardware, fittings, metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from the

effects of cleaning (both acid and fumes). Thoroughly wash all surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

4. Sandblasting of exposed tile surfaces is prohibited.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. When recommended by tile Manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed ceramic tile walls and floors.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction

period to prevent staining, damage and wear.

1. Cover tile work with reinforced non-staining building paper with joints lapped 2-inches and sealed as necessary protection against wear or damaged of any kind or accumulations of dirt during work operations or other trades within the tiled areas until accepted by the Owner.

C. Prohibit any foot and wheel traffic from ceramic tiled floors for at least seven days after

grouting has been completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.



1. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating Manufacturer that is acceptable to the tile and grout Manufacturer.

2. Trap and remove all coating residue to prevent clogging drains within the tiled area.

3.06 DRAIN TESTING

A. Test all floor drains upon completion of the floor tile work to ensure water flows properly into

all floor drains, as directed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09500 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install acoustical ceilings within rooms as noted on the Drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the following:

1. Lay-In Ceiling Panels

2. Suspended Ceiling Grid 3. Ceiling Panel Anchor Clips

4. Associated System Components

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

C. HVAC equipment is included in Division 15.

D. Fire protection systems are included in Division 15.

E. Electrical equipment and light fixtures are included in Division 16. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled crafts persons who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Design of the Ceiling Suspension System shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the applicable Building Code.

C. Installation of the suspended ceiling system shall be done by applicators that are approved by the ceiling Manufacturer.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. Materials for Suspension Systems: ASTM C635



2. Installation of Suspension Systems: ASTM C636 B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another independent

testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services.

2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical tiles comply with ASTM E1264 for Class A

materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 3. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from UL's

"Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS/Warnock Hersey's "Directory of Listed Products," or from listings of another testing and inspecting agency, are identical in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E119.

4. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) E. Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA)

F. Acoustical Materials: Federal Specification SS-5-118, Class A

G. Terminology and Performance: AIMA Bulletin "Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical

Materials.


I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of the bid opening shall apply.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with applicable provisions of Submittals Section 01300 of Division 1 - General Requirements of these Specifications.

B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit Manufacturer's printed product data, specifications and installation instructions for all materials proposed for use.

C. Samples: Submit one full size acoustical panel of specified material including 12-inch long samples of suspension system components.

1. Samples of each type of acoustical tile shall include pattern, edge detail and finish color

indicated.



2. Samples of suspension system shall include concealed type suspension system members,

and exposed moldings, for each type of color and system required.

3. One sample of ceiling panel seismic anchor clip for each ceiling system required.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing detailing ceiling layout, suspension methods and interface with plaster ceiling and wall materials.

E. Materials Listing: Submit materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

F. Certification: Furnish written proof that specified suspension system is a U.L. approved designed assembly with approved fixture protection.

G. Warranty: Sample warranty from ceiling Manufacturer for a minimum period of 10-years from the date of substantial completion and 30-years for HumiGuard Plus products.

H. Manufacturer’s certification that ceiling products meet or exceed the specified requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver acoustical materials to the job-site in the Manufacturer's original unopened packages or containers with brand name and type clearly marked.

B. Storage of Materials: Handle materials carefully and store them under cover in dry, waterproof enclosure where directed by the Engineer. Immediately before installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity at the spaces in which they will be installed.

1. Store all components to provide suitable protection against deleterious effects from

exposure to moisture, direct sunlight, or other causes.

2. Handle all components to preclude damage. Take special precaution to prevent damage to acoustical ceiling unit edges and corners.

3. Comply with the Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for delivery, storage and handling of all components.

C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the work and materials of all other trades.

D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements

necessary to the approval of the Engineer at no added cost to the Authority. 1.07 EXTRA STOCK

A. Replacement Materials: Deliver to the Owner for use in future modifications, an extra stock of approximately 10-percent of each type of acoustical material installed, packaging each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against deterioration.



1.08 SEISMIC

A. Suspended ceilings shall meet the minimum seismic requirements of the applicable Building Code. Manufacturer shall submit design calculations and a written letter to the Engineer certifying compliance with the seismic requirements for architectural building components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise indicated and subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products

indicated as a fully integrated, compatible system by a single source Manufacturer. B. Acoustical Tiles: Humidity resistant, (‘HumiGuard Plus’), Mold/Mildew and Bacteria resistant

(BioBlock Plus), latex coated mineral fiber complying with ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 1, Pattern E1.

1. Size: 24” x 48” x 3/4” Panel

2. Edge Profile: 15/16” Angled Tegular 3. Color: White (WH) 4. NRC Rating: 0.70

5. CAC Rating: 35

6. Fire Resistance: Class A (UL)

7. Light Reflectance: 0.86

8. R Factor: 1.9 (BTU units) 9. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400 per ASTM

E795. 10. Product: Cirrus Angled Tegular / Fine Texture, Item 535 by Armstrong World Industries;

or approved equal. C. Metal Suspension System: Manufacturer's heavy duty, commercial quality, hot dipped

galvanized steel suspension system complying with applicable ASTM C635 requirements.

1. Size: 15/16” Bottom Flange x 1-1/2” High. 2. Material: Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel.

3. Finish: Baked-on Enamel Paint.

4. Duty Classification: Heavy-Duty.



5. Main Tees: Factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes, and integral bayonet-style end couplings.

6. Cross Tees: Factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes, and integral snap-grid end couplings.

7. Color: White (WH).

8. Wall Molding: Shadow Line Molding with 3/4-inch stepped Reveal with hemmed edge. 9. Product: 200 Snap-Grid (Hook) Exposed Tee System by Chicago Metallic Corporation;

Prelude ML by Armstrong World Industries; or approved equal.

D. Ceiling Panel Anchor Clips: Manufacturer's hold down clips to anchor ceiling panels where required for seismic bracing. Seismic perimeter clips to be made of stainless steel or approved corrosion-resistant material and shall be removable.

E. Finishes and Colors for Metal Suspension System, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal

Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide Manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Stainless steel wire shall have diameter sized so that stress at

three times the hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL EXECUTION

A. Coordination: Work of this Section to be coordinated with work of other trades mechanical and electrical work.

1. Where lighting fixtures are to be installed within the suspension system, fixtures are to be

installed under this Section. Consult with the Manufacturer of light fixtures prior to light fabrication in order to properly coordinate all lighting work with the work of this Section.

B. General Installation Procedures:

1. Provide accurate and level alignment of suspension system.

2. Provide accurate alignment of tile or panels with straight joint lines.

3. Finished exposed surfaces of tiles or panels shall be in continuous contact with the flanges of suspension system members.

4. Finished surfaces of tiles or panels, and exposed surfaces of suspension members shall be completely clean, without blemishes, discoloration or damage.

5. All joints shall be closed and hairline.



6. Edges shall be square and in tight contact with adjoining tile or panels.

7. Fit beveled edges in tight contact with border trim and miter trim back of bevels.

8. Align the joints on vertical surfaces with the joints in ceiling tile, where applicable.

9. Install acoustical ceiling systems requiring seismic restraints pursuant to ASTM E580,

CISCA Recommendation and Governing Codes.

3.02 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify dimensions in the Contract Drawings with field conditions prior to submitting Shop Drawings. Contractor to accept full responsibility for inaccuracies built into the Work. Contractor's start of Work of this Section shall imply this acceptance of job conditions.

B. Contractor shall inspect related work and surfaces; report in writing to the Engineer those conditions which would prevent the proper execution of Work of this Section. Any needed remedial work shall be arranged for and be done by the appropriate trade prior to starting Work of this Section as directed by the Engineer at no added cost to the Owner.

C. Prior to installation, the following conditions must exist:

1. All windows and exterior doors in place and roof watertight.

2. Work of all wet trades completed and thoroughly dried to installation of any system components.

3. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall have completed their work above ceiling lines prior to installation of the acoustical ceiling systems. Coordinate with the Mechanical and Electrical trades prior to the start of ceiling installation.

D. Maintain a uniform temperature of at least 60 degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F and

relative humidity of not more than 70 percent continuously before, during and after installation of acoustical units. Ensure that interior finish work is completed and dry before installation.

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per the

Manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C636. 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with

ASTM E580. 3. Comply with Building Code Requirements for Seismic Design Category A, Importance

Factor 1.0, Site Class C, as indicated in Structural Design Criteria on Drawing S-1. 4. CISCA's Guidelines and Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings within Seismic Zones.



B. Secure ceiling hangers from suspension system members to building's structural members.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with other objects within ceiling plenum. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms, or floor or roof deck. Do not

attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 2. Space hangers not more than 48-inches on center along each member supported directly

from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8-inches from the ends of each member.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim.

Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders

and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and

moldings, spaced 12-inches on center. 3. Fabricate access units for special suspension system access members and tile units modified

as required to allow for removal of access units.

F. Trim Channels: Aluminum extrusions formed with distinct architectural detail groove on top and bottom flanges and special bosses to receive the tee-bar connection clips, hanging clops and splice plates, to provide positive mechanical lock with no visible fasteners. Corner application scan be field-cut or factory-mitered and field-assembled using AXSPLICE: or factory-welded and finished with 12-inch legs. All straight, curved and corners to match the approved shop drawings.

G. Splice Plates: Galvanized sheet steel formed to fit into the trim channel bossed and provide

positive lock between abutting trim channels with factory-installed screws. Also used to connect field-cut and factory-mitered corners, simply bend for desired angle or radius.

H. Install ceiling panel anchor clips at suspended acoustical tile ceilings. Clips to be removable from ceiling grid and shall be installed per the Manufacturer written instructions.

I. Hanging Clips: Sheet aluminum to fit into special trim channel bosses and provide positive

mechanical lock, field-applied screw-fastened connection to suspension members which intersect below the trim channel.



3.04 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM

A. General: In accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Details and the Contract Drawings; and best practice of the trade with maximum deflection of framing members not exceeding 1/360 of span of such member. Independently support light fixtures, weighing more than 56 pounds, from the structure above. Suspension system shall be installed in accurate alignment with building walls and partitions.

B. Hanger Wires: Secure to construction above with approved attachment and secure to main "T" runner spaced 4-feet along length of such member and for 6-inches from end.

C. Lateral Bracing: Provide as required by the Building Code and ASTM E 580 as noted on the Contract Drawings or approved Shop Drawings. Place bracing wire in four equal directions from each lateral bracing point on the main "T" runner and extend to the structure above at maximum 45 degree angle from the horizontal. Coordinate the lateral bracing with the mechanical and/or electrical work and other equipment within the attic spaces.

D. Main "T" Runner Members: Space 2-feet on center and secure to hanger and lateral bracing wires in level position.

E. Cross Members: Attach to main "T" runner member at 24-inch spacings against lateral pullout and make the exposed bottom flanges flush with exposed flanges of main "T" runner to form a 24-inch by 24-inch grid pattern.

F. Boarder of Wall Supports: Secure to wall surfaces and/or other architectural features as indicated on the Contract Drawings in level position, with exposed flanges mitered at corners.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PANELS WITHIN EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM

A. Application: By representative of the applicable ceiling panel Manufacturer.

B. Installation of Panels: Lay panel within the exposed "T" suspension system, with continuous and uniform bearing on suspension system main "T" runner, cross "T" members and on border support flanges to provide 100 percent access to attic spaces. At wall supports provide border tile springs to keep border panel units aligned with field panel units where such border units are smaller than the grid pattern. Use approved type of concealed splines to maintain panel units in a level plane.

C. Furnish and install diffuser and light fixtures as specified within the Electrical and Mechanical Sections.

D. Finish exposed surfaces of panels shall be continuous contact with flanges of suspension system members.

E. Finished surfaces of panels and exposed surfaces of suspension members to be clean, without blemishes, discoloration or damage.

F. Neatly scribe acoustical ceiling units at abutting surfaces and at all penetrations or projections when moldings are not acceptable.



3.06 ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR AND CLEANING OF FINISHED WORK

A. Make adjustments in ceiling system as necessary to ensure compliance with this Specification.

B. Clean any discoloration, finger prints and foreign matter from the ceiling system. Remove and replace any damaged or soiled acoustical ceiling panels at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Upon completion of the Work from this Section, remove all surplus materials, equipment, tools and debris from the job-site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09650

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT), Sheet Vinyl flooring, Base and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, Finish Schedule and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Section 03300. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. C. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of material and installation accessory required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate.

l. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame

resistance characteristics.

B. Samples: Submit two 6-inch by 6-inch verification samples of teach type of product specified in color selected for use.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available for adhesives, heat weld rod, cold weld and

cleaning agents. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. ASTM 97.2 – Floor Materials and Footwear – Voltage Measurement on a Person B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 253 – Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a

Radiant Energy Source 2. NFPA 258 – Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials





D. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A

1. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. Manufacturer: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a company with a minimum of 10 years experience with resilient flooring equivalent to those specified. Manufacturers proposed for use which are not named in this Section, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance requirements specified not less than 10 days prior to bid date.

1. Color Matching: Provide resilient flooring products, including wall base and accessories,

from one manufacturer to ensure color matching. 2. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation.

B. Installers Qualifications: Installer experienced (minimum of 3 years) to perform work of this

Section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to the product Manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations.

B. Deliver all flooring materials, sufficiently in advance of installation, to condition materials to

building room temperature prior to installation.


A. Maintain a temperature of 68o F (plus or minus 5o F) within spaces to receive resilient flooring. Specified temperature shall be maintained at least 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide Manufacturer’s standard one-year warranty against defects in manufacturing and

workmanship of resilient flooring products. Provide Manufacturer’s standard limited wear warranty/conductivity warranty as specified under each product as applicable.



1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish full size units of flooring and base, equal to minimum 10-percent of the total quantity of resilient flooring installed on the Project, as extra materials. Properly label and package all extra flooring materials and deliver to the Owner’s designated on-site storage area.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl composition tile shall conform to ASTM F-1066, Class 2, and FS-SS-T-3l2B, Type IV, Composition 1, Size to be 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick.

1. Armstrong: Designer Essentials, with recycled vinyl content.

2. Provide color 51911 – Classic White or approved equal within rooms designated by the

Finish Schedule on Drawing A-14. Final VCT color shall selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the full range of Manufacturer’s standard and premium available colors.

B. Base shall be nominal 1/8-inch thick, 4-inches high rubber core base conforming to ASTM F

1861, Type TP, Group 2, Style B.

1. Johnsonite, a division of Duramax, Inc: Commercial rubber wall base 1/8-inch, Roppe Corporation, or approved equal.

2. Provide color 80 – Fawn or approved equal. Final rubber base color shall selected by

Engineer from full range of Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

C. Adhesives for each type of resilient flooring and base shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer for the type of flooring substrate below.

D. Vinyl Terminal Strips shall be of beveled vinyl plastic, 3/8-inch x l- l/2" bevel. Final color as

selected by Engineer from full range of Manufacturer’s standard available colors. E. Wax shall conform to Federal Specification P-W-l55; l6 percent concentration.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall inspect area to receive floor and installation of resilient flooring and base shall be deferred until all other work that may cause damage to the floor has been completed.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall be swept clean and shall be free from moisture, paint,

oil, wax, of other film which may affect the adhesion.



B. Cracks, rough areas, joints and other surface defects in the concrete subfloors shall be filled with a material as recommended by the flooring Manufacturer. Ridges, trowel marks and other surface projections shall be ground smooth.

C. Commencement of flooring installation shall constitute acceptance of surface and subfloor.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. All resilient vinyl shall be installed evenly around room. Marbelization shall all run in one

direction; that being the narrow dimension of the room. All work shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Primer, if recommended by the flooring Manufacturer, shall be applied evenly over the floor

surfaces to receive resilient flooring. C. Adhesive shall then be applied after the primer has dried thoroughly. Method of application

shall be in accordance with flooring Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Base shall be secured to the wall with base adhesive. Joints shall be tight and even the base

shall have the top and bottom edges in firm contact with walls and floors. E. Vinyl Terminal Strips shall be installed at exposed edges of resilient floors. The top surface

shall be flush with the finished floor. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Touch-up and repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

B. Immediately upon completion of the flooring, the floor and adjacent surfaces shall be dry-

cleaned with an approved cleaner to remove surplus adhesive and other soiling. C. Floors shall not be washed for at least five days after installation at which time they shall be

washed as recommended by the Manufacturer. Cleaning should utilize non-abrasive materials with a non-alkaline cleaning solution, rinsed thoroughly with clear, cold water and given two coats of wax, machine buffed after each coat. Remove and replace any areas of work that cannot be successfully cleaned.

D. After waxing and until acceptance by the owner, the finished resilient flooring shall be

protected from damage and construction operations. Any damaged flooring shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09901 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop painting systems on ferrous metals, excluding stainless steels, as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Structural Steel is included in Division 5. B. Field Painting is included in Section 09902. C. HVAC Equipment is included in Division 15. D. Electrical Equipment is included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings, Manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed painting systems and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness. Submittals shall indicate compliance with the specification requirements and shall include the following:

1. Representative physical samples of each type of proposed primers and scheduled surface to

be primed.

2. Provide four (4) samples for each Color being submitted. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

1. SSPC SP-1 – Specification for Solvent Cleaning

2. SSPC SP-2 – Specification for Hand Tool Cleaning

3. SSPC SP-3 – Specification for Power Tool Cleaning

4. SSPC SP-5 – Specification for White Metal Blast Cleaning

5. SSPC SP-6 – Specification for Commercial Blast Cleaning 6. SSPC SP-7 – Specification for Brush-Off Blast Cleaning



7. SSPC SP-10 – Specification for Near White Metal Blast Cleaning 8. SSPC SP-11 – Specification for Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

9. SSPC PA-1 – Painting Application Specification


1. ASTM B117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

2. ASTM D3359 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

C. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 for Potable Water Systems D. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. Paint coatings and applications shall meet all Federal, State and Local regulations, including the requirements of local hazardous material agencies.

1.06 EXTRA PAINT

A. Furnish one (1) unopened 1-gallon can for each type and color of paint used on this Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. The following surfaces shall have the paint systems scheduled below applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat noted. The term DFT means minimum dry film thickness.

B. Painting System for Non-Galvanized Structural Steel and Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metals

1. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be cleaned per paragraph 3.01. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Tnemec

1 Coat: H-90-97 Tneme-Zinc (3-5 DFT) (shop priming only)



2 Coats: N69 - Color Hi Build-Epoxoline (3-5 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)

b. Carboline

1 Coat: 859 (3-5 DFT) (shop priming only) 2 Coats: 890 (4-6 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)

c. Ameron

1 Coat: 513-108 (3-5 DFT) (shop priming only) 2 Coats: 400 Polyamide Epoxy (3-5 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)

d. Or approved equal.

C. Painting System for Galvanized Metal and Nonferrous Metals

1. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be cleaned per paragraph 3.01.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Tnemec

1 Coat: Series 27-211 Typoxy Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT)

b. Carboline

1 Coat: Higard Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT)

c. Ameron

1 Coat: M.C.R. 65 Epoxy Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT)


D. Painting System for Submerged Ferrous Metals in potable water (provide certified NSF Standard

61 products)

1. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-10.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Tnemec

1 Coat: FC20-1211 Pota-Pox Epoxy Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT) (shop priming only) 2 Coats: Series 20 Pota-Pox (4-6 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)



b. Carboline

1 Coat: Hi-Gard Epoxy Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT) (shop priming only) 2 Coats: Hi-Gard (4-6 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)

c. Ameron

1 Coat: M.C.R. 65 Gray Epoxy Primer (3.5-4.5 DFT) (shop priming only) 2 Coats: Ameron 395 (4-6 DFT per coat) (shop finish painting only)


E. Non-Primed Surfaces

1. Gears, bearings surfaces and other similar surfaces not to be painted shall be given a heavy

shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of Substantial Completion.

F. Compatibility of Coating Systems

1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the Manufacturer to be

compatible with their corresponding primers and finish coats specified in Section 09902 and which are recommended for use together.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation and Priming

1. Except where other surface preparation methods are specified non-submerged components scheduled for priming shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-6 immediately prior to priming. Submerged components scheduled for priming shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-10 immediately prior to priming.

2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale and other

foreign material before priming. Environment shall be free of airborne dust and dirt until coating is dry.

3. Shop prime in accordance with the coating Manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Galvanized, aluminum, stainless steel and copper surfaces specified to be painted shall have all

oxidation and foreign material removed before painting by SSPC SP-1, using an approved V.O.C. compliant method. Galvanized and other metal surfaces shall then be brush-off blast cleaned to SSPC SP-7 standards to provide a uniform 1-mil surface profile.



C. Non-Primed Surfaces 1. Apply approved coating per the Manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Comply with the application instructions of the coating Manufacturer and the additional requirements of this Section.

E. Apply coatings under conditions within the following tolerances:

1. Air Temperature: Minimum 50 degrees F to maximum 90 degrees F.

2. Surface Temperature: Minimum 50 degrees F to maximum 100 degrees F.

3. Relative Humidity: Maximum 85 percent.

3.02 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT

A. All items to be shop primed shall be cleaned of all loose material and blast cleaned as specified for applicable service prior to priming.

1. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a prime coating has been improperly applied or if a

material contrary to this Section has been used, that deficient coating shall be completely removed by abrasive blasting to white metal and then re-primed in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

B. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance with this

Section. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with this Section by blast cleaning and apply the specified prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots prepared as

approved and retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint coats in the field.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take whatever steps are necessary to properly

protect the shop prime against damage from weather or any other cause. E. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be blast cleaned, protect all motors, drives,

bearings, and gears from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.

F. Shop finish coats, if proposed and allowed, shall be equal in appearance and protection quality

to a field applied finish coat.

1. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat system does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint as directed by the Engineer to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality.

2. Submit to the Engineer substantial evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the

specified finish coat.



3.03 INSPECTION AND REPAIR

A. Measure representative coating areas for DFT per SSPC PA-2. Apply additional coat if required to attain specified DFT.

B. Where characteristics of coating prohibit recoating, remove and replace the unacceptable coating

at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09902

FIELD PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required and perform all the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. It is the intent of this Section to paint all exposed structural and miscellaneous steel; exposed

architectural steel; steel doors; steel frames for door and glazed openings; concrete and metal deck ceilings; masonry walls; chemical tanks and systems; mechanical and electrical equipment; operators and posts; conveying systems, pipe, fittings and valves; electrical conduit and appurtenances; ducts; all as specified in the attached painting schedules as well as all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise indicated within the construction documents. Minor items not mentioned in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of this Section as stated herein.

C. Aluminum paint only where noted (as is specified). Paint items so noted in Paragraph 1.01B and

in accordance with the Paint Color Schedule. Provide vinyl film letters and numbers for markings as specified. Items noted in Paint Color Schedule as having factory finish and other factory finished items obviously are not field painted. The Contractor is responsible for having damaged factory finish painted items repaired or, if so ordered, for replacing items. The various Sections are responsible, as stated in each, for preparation and field touch-up of abrasions, welds and damaged primed areas of primed or galvanized components after erection.

D. If any painting work is performed at an existing operating facility, it will be necessary that all

contaminants, including dust from abrasive blasting, solvents, thinners, paints, etc., shall be kept separate from the occupied spaces, treatment process and from the existing operating equipment, motors, valves, etc. The Contractor shall take whatever precautions are necessary to prevent contamination of the building occupants and water supply at all times during this contract.

E. The following items shall NOT be painted:

1. Concrete (unless otherwise specified in the painting schedules). 2. Exterior masonry (CMU and Brick), unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Acoustical masonry, unless specifically noted otherwise.

4. Precast concrete, unless specifically noted otherwise. 5. Finish hardware, unless specifically noted otherwise. 6. Control panels.

7. Non-ferrous metals and stainless steel, unless specifically noted otherwise.



8. Factory prefinished architectural components.

9. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and name plates of mechanical equipment. 10. Parts of buildings not exposed to sight, unless specifically noted otherwise. 11. Maintenance equipment. 12. Plumbing fixtures and toilet accessories. 13. Furniture, casework and appliances. 14. Acoustical treatment and fireproofing. 15. Mechanical and electrical equipment which has been finished painted in the factory as

specified in Divisions 11, 13, 15 and 16. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete in included in Division 3. B. Masonry and waterproofing agent is included in Section 04200. C. Steel is included in Division 5. D. Waterproofing and damproofing is included in Section 07100. E. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. F. Shop priming and surface preparation of equipment and piping (except copper piping) are

specified in Section 09901 and included in the respective Section with the item to be primed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, the following:

1. Color cards for initial color selections, from the Manufacturer’s standard available options. a. Three sets of 8-inch by 8-inch samples, on 1/4-inch hardboard, of all colors required

for each type of paint. Include special colors as required on project. b. Resubmit all colors until approved by Engineer. 2. Manufacturer’s technical product data and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)


A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) / Society for Protective Coatings

1. SSPC SP-1 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 / Solvent Cleaning



2. SSPC SP-2 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 / Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SSPC SP-5 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 5 / White Metal Blast Cleaning 4. SSPC SP-6 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 / Commercial Blast Cleaning 5. SSPC SP-7 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 7 / Brush-Off Blast Cleaning 6. SSPC SP-10 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 / Near-White Blast Cleaning 7. SSPC PA-2 – Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges


1. ASTM D4258 – Standard for Surface Cleaning of Concrete for Coatings 2. ASTM D4259 – Standard for Abrading Concrete 3. ASTM D4263 – Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic

Sheet Method 4. ASTM D4417 – Standard Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast

Cleaned Steel C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ANSI / ASME A13.1 – Standard for the Identification of Piping Systems D. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 1. National AIM (Architectural and Industrial Maintenance) Coatings Rule – National VOC

Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) 1. RP-0188-88 – Standard Recommended Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of

Protective Coatings F. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 1. NSF 61 – Health Effects of Drinking Water System Components G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) H. Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration I. Federal Hazardous Substances Act (FHSA) J. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC)



K. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

L. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE

A. The Contractor shall require the protective coating Manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as required and ordered and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with the Manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract or the application thereof.

1.06 PRE-PAINTING CONFERENCE

A. Well in advance of commencement of painting operations, but after major equipment has been delivered, a pre-painting conference shall be held. All parties with an interest in the painting work shall attend, including the Contractor, the Manufacturer, the Owner, the Engineer and the paint subcontractor. The Contractor shall contact each party and arrange the meeting.

B. The conference shall include an inspection of the areas to be painted by all parties and

discussion of the conformance of each area with the specifications. Important issues such as environmental conditions, climate control systems, original primer, dry film thickness and monitoring the number of coats that have been field applied shall be discussed and problems shall be resolved.

C. A written record of the meeting shall be submitted to the Engineer.


A. The application subcontractor shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the successful application of similar products and shall have completed comparable work on a similar size project in the previous 3 years. Only qualified painters shall be used on the work and skilled specialists shall be employed where required for proper completion of the project.

B. The work of this Section, including all surface preparation products, cleaners, primers, paints

and accessories associated with the application of each Coating System, shall meet all Federal, State and local regulations. The work of this Section shall also meet the requirements of all applicable Hazardous Materials Agencies.

1. Should it be determined that any painting system or component is unsuitable to one of the

above referenced agencies or standards, the proper products shall be provided and installed on the project for full compliance at no additional cost to the Owner. Such alternative products shall be similar in type to the specified items and not of a lesser quality.

1.08 WARRANTY INSPECTION

A. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of all coating and painting work. The Contractor, painting subcontractor and a representative of the coating material Manufacturer shall attend this inspection with the Owner.



B. All defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one year correction period or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. If a warranty inspection is not held, the Contractor is not relieved of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

1.09 EXTRA PAINT

A. Furnish one (1) unopened 5-gallon container for each type and color of wall paint used on this Project.

B. Furnish one (1) unopened 1-gallon can for all other types and colors of paint used on this

Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All painting materials shall be by the Tnemec Company, Inc.; equals by and, where scheduled, NSF Standard 61 certified equals by Carboline; Ameron (VyGuard); DuPont; or approved equal.

The following types of paints by Tnemec have been used as a basis for the paint schedule:

1. Omnithane (Series 1) – Modified Aromatic Polyurethanr Primer 2. Tneme-Cryl (Series 6) – Acrylic Latex Emulsion (eggshell finish) 3. Adhesion Promoter (Series 44-900) – Adhesion Promoter and Corrosion Protection 4. Hi-Build Epoxoline II (Series V69) – Polyamidoamine Cured Epoxy (low VOC) 5. Silicone Aluminum (Series 90E-92) – High heat silicone aluminum (to 600 degrees F) 6. H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat (Series 113) – Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy (satin finish) 7. Uni-Bond DF (Series 115) – Self-Crosslinking Hydrophobic Acrylic 8. Vinester (Series 120) – Novolac Vinyl Ester 9. Envirofill (Series 130-6602 / off-white color) – Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic (block

filler) 10. Chembuild (Series 135) – Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy 11. Potapox Plus (Series V140) (F - fast cure where scheduled) – Polyamidoamine Cured

Epoxy 12. Elasto-Grip FC (Series 151-1051) – Waterborne Modified Polyamine Epoxy (matte finish) 13. Epoxoprime (Series 201) – Modified Polyamine Epoxy 14. Power-Tread (Series 237) – Quartz-Filled Modified Polyamine Epoxy



15. Tneme-Glaze (Series 280) – Modified Polyamine Epoxy

16. CT Densifyer (Series 629) – Silicate Blend (concrete sealer)

17. Endura-Shield WB (Series 1081) – Waterbased Acrylic Polyurethane (semi-gloss) 18. PPG Industries Rez Polyurethane Satin Clear Plastic Interior Varnish 77-89 - Urethane -

alkyd, clear, satin sheen with approved Rez alkyd-oil stain under.

B. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec products (unless otherwise noted) and Tnemec recommendations for application. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named is submitted to the Engineer in writing for approval within 30 days after given the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

C. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken packages, bearing the

brand and name of the Manufacturer. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned and applied in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's written directions for the applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before using.

D. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the Manufacturer to be

compatible with the finish paints to be used. Refer to Section 09901 for special primers. E. No paint containing lead will be allowed on the project. F. Work areas for the storage and mixing of all painting materials shall be designated by the

Engineer and approved by the Owner.

1. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations.

2. Contractor shall provide the trailer and containers necessary to store and mix the paint

away from the Facility. Separate trash containers shall be provided for the proper disposal of unused painting related materials.

3. Proper containers outside of the buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes

and no plumbing fixture shall be used for this purpose.

2.02 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Color Schedule establishes, defines and assigns a definite color for each category of pipe. B. Banding for pipes shall be as specified in the Color Schedule. Bands shall be 2-inches wide and

spaced at ten feet on center. C. All exposed conduits, trough items and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid and semi-

liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating accessories which are integral to the whole



functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system shall be painted with the colors and/or combination of colors as noted in the Color Schedule.

D. All hangars and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and with the same paint

as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to but not including the flanges that are attached to mechanical equipment, nor the flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Color Schedule.

E. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the equipment

and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the equipment.

F. General Notes and Guidelines

1. All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors of specified equal

Manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the Engineer. 2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here, shall be assigned a color by

the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract.

3. The colors of the Color Schedule shall be interpreted as follows:

Colors Tnemec # White 11WH Orange 04SF Yellow 02SF Dark Yellow 03SF Green 08SF Light Green 09SF Dark Brown 84BR Dark Green 91GN Tan 04BR Ivory 07WH Light Grey 32GR Medium Grey 33GR Dark Grey 34GR Red 06SF Blue 11SF Dark Blue 78BL Medium Blue 26BL Light Blue 39BL Aqua 10GN International Orange 05SF Dark Bronze 86BR Tank Blue 29BL Blue Green 10SF Magenta 14SF

4. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential

hazards shall be Safety Orange #CA26.



5. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 6. All inline equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color, including pumps and

motors, shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to but not including the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is fiberglass and levels are monitored through the tank.

7. All conduit shall be painted to match the background surface on which it is mounted.

2.03 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Color selection for the following items are to be selected by the Engineer and reviewed by the Owner at the time of shop drawing review. The color coding, banding and lettering schedule shall conform to the most current standards of the Owner. The Contractor shall submit color charts for color selections to be reviewed and approved by the Owner.

Piping and Legend Pipe/Band Color

Letters

Compressed Air Low Pressure Air (air wash supply)

Light Green Light Green

Black Black

Instrument Air High Purity Air Combustion Air

Light Green/Dark Green Light Green/Dark Green Dark Green

Black White White

Blower Air Green/Orange

Black

Filtrate Dark Grey/Red

White

Drains Dark Grey

White

Acid Drains Black/Yellow White Plant Influent [water] Medium Blue

Plant Effluent [water] Blue

Foam Spray Water Light Grey/Orange

Black

Aeration Basin Influent Light Grey/Red

Black

Plant Water Blue/Light Grey

White

Protected Water Blue/Green

Potable Cold Water Light Blue

Black

Potable Hot Water Nonpotable Water (lines downstream from backflow preventers) Seal Water (lines downstream from an air gap repump system)

Light Blue Dark Blue/White Dark Blue/Red

Black Red White

Softened Water Blue/White

White

Heating Water Drain

Medium Blue/Red Dark Grey

White White




Letters

Odor Control Recycle or Raw Water Distilled Water

Dark Green/Light Brown Light Blue/Red Light Blue/White

White Black Black

Sprinkler (fire protection water) Red

Black

Fuel Oil Diesel Fuel Hydraulic Oil

Purple Yellow Black/White

Yellow Black White

Gas LP Gas Hydrocarbons

Red/Black Red/Black Black

White White White

Process Sample Residuals Filtrate Laboratory Vacuum Vacuum Pump Discharge

Light Grey/Green Light Brown Dark Grey/Red Dark Green/Light Green Aluminum

Black White White Red Black

Steam International Orange/Red

Black

Acid Dark Yellow/Red

Black

Hydro-Fluorosilisic Acid Yellow/Blue

Black

Sodium Hydroxide Orange/Grey

Black

Aluminum Sulfate Tank Blue/Orange

Potassium Permanganate Orange/White

Black

Zinc Orthophosphate Magenta/Yellow

Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow/Dark Yellow

Aqua Ammonia Yellow/Brown

Black

Ammonia Vapor Acetelyene

Yellow/Brown Red/Blue

Black Black

Chlorine (gas, liquid or vent) Yellow

Black

Sulfur Dioxide Gas Yellow/Blue

Chlorine Solution Yellow/Red

Black

Sulfur Dioxide Solution Yellow/Blue

Ferric Chloride Orange/Blue

Ferric Sulfate Orange

Polymer Light Brown/Red

White

Polyphosphate Potassium Permanganate

Light Brown/Grey Orange/White

White Black

Lime Slurry Light Green

Soda Ash Solution Oxygen

Dark Grey/Green Red/Green

White Black




Letters

Carbon Dioxide Hydrogen Liquid Alum Helium Argon Nitrogen Nitrous Oxide Electrical Conduit Conduit Connections Mounting Backstops

Tank Blue/Yellow Red/White Yellow/Orange Red/Orange Red/Brown Red/Yellow Red/Grey Light Green Light Green Light Green

Black Black Black Black Black Black

B. Color selection for the Building and related Architectural Components:

1. Finish colors shall be as indicated in the Finish Schedule, specified herein, or as selected by

the Engineer and approved by the Owner.

C. Color Coding and Symbols of fill ports:

Fill Port Color / Symbol

High Unleaded Gasoline Red with White Cross Middle Unleaded Gasoline Blue with White Cross Lower Unleaded Gasoline White with Black Cross Vapor Recovery Orange Diesel Yellow Fuel Oil (#1) Purple with Yellow Bar Fuel Oil (#2) Green Kerosene Brown 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES

A. The name of the materials in each pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of fluids, shall be indicated on each pipe system. Titles shall not be located more than 26 linear feet apart and shall also appear directly adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer cleanout and all pieces of equipment.

B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name at least once in each space through which it

passes and thereafter by generally recognized abbreviations, letters or numerals as approved. Identification title locations shall be determined by the Engineer but in general they shall be placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves.

C. Numbers and letters shall be die-cut from 3.5-mil vinyl film and prespaced on carrier tape.

Adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners. Color shall be white or black as approved depending on substrate color.



D. Letter size shall be as indicated in the following table:

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE OR COVERING SIZE OF LEGEND LETTERS

3/4-in to 1-1/4-in 1/2-inch

1-1/2-in to 2-in 3/4-inch

2-1/2-in to 6-in 1-1/2-inches

8-in to 10-in 2-1/2-inches

Over 10-in 3-inches

E. The system for preparation and application of letters shall be Type B a.s.i/2 by ASI Sign Systems; Architectural Graphics Inc. or approved equal. Letter type shall be Optima Bold, upper case. Grid 2 spacing shall be employed. Arrow shall match letter type and size as approved. The instructions of the Manufacturer shall be followed in respect to storage, surface preparation and application of letters.

F. Bands of color, where scheduled, shall be 6-inches wide and spaced along pipe at 5-feet

intervals.

2.05 TITLES FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Titles indicated in attached schedules shall be provided in vinyl film as specified above on all equipment using 1-inch high Optima Bold upper case, Grid 2 spacing, white or black in color as approved depending on substrate. Titles shall be mounted at eye level on machines where possible or at the upper most broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered consecutively as indicated on the mechanical drawings or as directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed in more than one line if required and justified on the left hand side as approved.

2.06 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish to the Engineer for inspection of paint on the Project, wet and dry film thickness gauges, digital temperature reading device and all other equipment required for proper and complete inspection. All testing equipment shall become the property of the Owner once construction has been completed.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. The following surface preparation work shall be included for all items scheduled to be painted unless specifically noted otherwise within this section:

1. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified herein and shall be dry and clean

before painting. Special care shall be given to thoroughly clean interior concrete and CMU surfaces to receive polyamide cured epoxy paint of all marks before application of finish.



2. All metal welds, blisters, etc, shall be ground and sanded smooth. All pits and dents shall

be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, tar and asphalt bearing coatings, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of approved solvents, wire brushing, grinding or sanding.

3. Concrete surfaces shall have been finished as specified. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to the Engineer. Concrete shall be left for one month minimum before painting and shall meet the painting Manufacturer’s minimum moisture requirements, be free of dust, oil, curing compounds and other foreign matter.

4. Concrete masonry unit surfaces shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, loose mortar,

excess joint compound and other foreign matter. 5. Submerged concrete surfaces and those subject to splashing, scheduled to be painted and

for tank coating system and chemical fill station containment, shall be brush sandblasted to open void spaces and bug holes with resultant finish being a uniform profile equal to 80 grit sandpaper.

6. All PVC pipe and other plastic matrix surfaces to be painted shall be lightly sanded and

cleaned of residue before painting. 7. Wood surfaces shall be dry. All encrustations shall be removed. Sand wood to obtain a

smooth surface. 8. Galvanized (except metal deck surfaces), aluminum, and copper surfaces shall have all

oxidation and foreign material removed before painting by SSPC SP-1, using an approved V.O.C. compliant method. Galvanized and, when ordered, the other metal surfaces specified above shall be hand tool cleaned to SSPC SP-2 standards to provide a uniform 1 mil surface profile.

9. Stainless steel shall be solvent cleaned as specified above and then sanded to achieve a uniform 1 mil profile. Remove all sanding residue.

10. Galvanized steel floor and roof deck shall have oxidation, oils and foreign materials

removed and surfaces given a uniform profile without compromising the galvanized coatings. Use SSPC SP1 and SP7 methods as submitted and approved.

B. Chassis Wash, Lube Room and Fuel Room:

1. Special Coating System (W-1) – For use on all horizontal concrete floor surfaces where a

dense, dustproof surface is required. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. New concrete must be sound and free of cracks, dirt, oils, efflorescence, curing compounds and other contaminants. New concrete must cure long enough to walk on prior to application of finish coating.

2. Special Coating System (W-2) – For use on all CMU wall surfaces subject to frequent

cleaning, moisture, staining and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:



a. Allow mortar to cure for 14 days. Level protrusions and mortar spatter.

3. Special Coating System (W-3) – For use on all gypsum surfaces subject to frequent

cleaning, moisture, staining and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. Sand joint compound and level edges. All surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of

contaminants.

4. Special Coating System (W-4) – For use on all previously coated or primed building steel or hollow metal doors and frames subject to moisture. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. SSPC SP 11 Power Tool Clean to Bare Metal all loose coatings and rusted areas.

Feather edges between bare metal and sound existing coatings.

5. Special Coating System (W-5) – For use on all pre-cast concrete ceilings located within areas subject to subject to moisture and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. Allow applied concrete topping to cure to cure for 14 days. All surfaces shall be clean,

dry and free of contaminants.

C. Bus Maintenance, Bus Storage, Parts Storage, Body Shop and Service Areas:

1. Special Coating System (M-1) – For use on all horizontal concrete floor surfaces where a dense, dustproof surface is required. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. New concrete must be sound and free of cracks, dirt, oils, efflorescence, curing

compounds and other contaminants. New concrete must cure long enough to walk on prior to application of finish coating.

2. Special Coating System (M-2) – For use on all CMU that is subject to physical abuse,

staining and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. Allow mortar to cure for 14 days. Level protrusions and mortar spatter.

3. Special Coating System (M-3) – For use on all gypsum wallboard that is subject to physical abuse, staining and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. Sand joint compound and level edges. All surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of

contaminants.

4. Special Coating System (M-4) – For use on all pre-cast concrete ceilings located within areas subject to physical abuse, staining and mild chemicals. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. Allow applied concrete topping to cure to cure for 14 days. All surfaces shall be clean,

dry and free of contaminants.



5. Special Coating System (M-5) – For use on all previously coated or primed building steel

subject to physical abuse. Surface preparation shall include the following:

a. SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Clean all loose coatings and rusted areas. Feather edges between high and low areas of sound existing coatings.

3.02 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. All colors will be selected by the Engineer based on the Color Schedule herein.

B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat noted. These paint systems shall be used for all items scheduled to be painted unless specifically noted otherwise within this section:

1. Exterior non submerged ferrous metals:

1 coat Series V69-1211 on properly prepared unprimed metal or for touch-up (2.0-3.0

DFT) 1 coat Series V69 (4.0 DFT), 1 coat Series 1081 Endurashield (3.0 DFT)

2. Interior non-submerged concrete scheduled for painting:

2 coats Series V69 (5.0 DFT)

3. Interior concrete masonry units:

1 coat No. 130-6602 (80 sq ft/gal minimum scrub-in to fill voids as approved) 2 coats Series V69 (5.0 DFT)

4. Interior non-submerged ferrous metals:

1 coat Series V69-1211 on properly prepared, unprimed metal or for touch-up (2.0-3.0 DFT) 2 coats Series V69 (3.0 DFT)

5. Submerged ferrous metals and ferrous metals subject to submersion or splashing (Surface

shall be lightly sanded or abraded before application of first field coat):

1 coat Series V140 on properly prepared, unprimed metal or for touch-up (2.0-3.0 DFT) 2 coats Series V140 (6.0 DFT)

6. Plastic piping and, where scheduled to be painted, plastic components:




7. Galvanized deck requiring painting and galvanized metals:

Interior 2 coats Series V69 (3.0 DFT)

Exterior 1 coat Series V69 (4.0 DFT), 1 coat Series 1081 (3.0 DFT)

8. Pipe insulation:

1 coat Series 151-1051 (1.0 DFT), 2 coats Series V69 (3.0 DFT) (Plastic or metal sheathed insulation paint as scheduled for the appropriate substrate)

9. Aluminum designated to be painted:

Interior 2 coats Series V69 (3.0 DFT)

Exterior 1 coat Series V69 (4.0 DFT), 1 coat Series 1081 (3.0 DFT)

10. Copper piping:


11. Hot ferrous metal surfaces:

2 coats Series 90E-92 (1.5 DFT)

12. Gypsum work:

1 coat Series 151-1051 (1.0 DFT) 2 coats Series 6 (3.0 DFT)

13. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (Dry Locations):

Primer – Series 135 (3-4 DFT) Finish Coat – Series 113 (4-5 DFT)

14. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (Wet Locations):

Primer – Series 135 (3.0-4.0 mils DFT applied to all bare metal areas) Finish Coat – Series 135 (4.0-6.0 mils DFT with test patch recommended)

15. Service Door – factory polyester finish coated (Sand with 150 grit aluminum oxide paper):

1 coat Series V69 (2.0 DFT), 1 coat Series 1081 (2.0-3.0 DFT)



16. Chemical Resistant Coating on Concrete – (Whip blast concrete according to SSPC SP

13/NACE 6 to a medium sandpaper texture, opening all surface air holes and defects and remove all residue from blasting): 1 prime coat Series 120-5022 (12-15 DFT) 1 coat Series 120-5001 (15-18 DFT) – Provide silicone carbide, slip resistant aggregate broadcast in and adhered to top coat of all floor surfaces

C. Chassis Wash, Lube Room and Fuel Room:

1. Special Coating System W-1 (Sealer for Concrete Floors) – For use on all concrete floor

surfaces subject to impact, abrasion, moisture and mild chemicals. Concrete Sealer – Series 629 (300-350 sq. ft. per gallon) 2. Special Coating System W-2 (100% Solids Epoxy CMU Wall System) – For use on all

masonry surfaces subject to frequent cleaning, moisture, staining and mild chemicals. Block Filler – Series 130 (60-115 sq. ft. per gallon)

Finish Coats – 2 coats of Series 280 (6 mils DFT per coat)

3. Special Coating System W-3 (100% Solids Epoxy GWB Wall System) – For use on all gypsum surfaces subject to frequent cleaning, moisture, staining and mild chemicals.

Primer – Series 201 (150-200 sq. ft. per gallon)

Finish Coats – 2 coats of Series 280 (6 mils DFT per coat)

4. Special Coating System W-4 (Epoxy Coating System for Building Steel) – For use on all previously coated or primed steel subject to moisture.

Spot Prime – Series 135 (3.0-4.0 mils applied to all bare metal areas) Finish Coat – Series 135 (4.0-6.0 mils with test patch recommended)

5. Special Coating System W-5 (Water Based Epoxy Pre-Cast Concrete System) – For use on all pre-cast concrete ceilings located within areas subject to moisture and mild chemicals.

Primer – Series 151 (200-300 sq. ft per gallon)

Finish Coats – 2 coats of Series 113 (4.0-6.0 mils DFT per coat)

D. Bus Maintenance, Bus Storage, Parts Storage, Body Shop and Service Areas:

1. Special Coating System M-1 (Sealer for Concrete Floors) – For use on all horizontal concrete floor surfaces where a dense, dustproof surface is required.



Concrete Sealer – Series 629 (300-350 sq. ft. per gallon)

2. Special Coating System M-2 (100% Solids Epoxy CMU Wall System) – For use on all concrete masonry that is subject to physical abuse, staining and mild chemicals.

Block Filler – Series 130 (60-115 sq. ft per gallon)


3. Special Coating System M-3 (Water Based Epoxy GWB Wall System) – For use on all gypsum wallboard that is subject to physical abuse, staining and mild chemicals.



4. Special Coating System M-4 (Water Based Epoxy Pre-Cast Concrete System) – For use on all pre-cast concrete ceilings located within areas subject to physical abuse, staining and mild chemicals.



5. Special Coating System M-5 (Epoxy Coating System for Building Steel) – For use on all previously coated or primed steel subject to physical abuse.

Finish Coat – Series 115 (3.0-4.0 mils DFT) with Series 44-900 Adhesion Promoter 3.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. General

1. At the request of the Engineer, sample areas of the finished work prepared in strict accordance with this Section shall be furnished and all painting shall be equal in quality to the approved sample areas. Finished areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of workmanship. Experimentation with the factory or paint Manufacturer's warehouse mixed colors shall be furnished to the satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not satisfactory.

2. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and accessories shall

be provided throughout the painting operation. Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc, before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.



3. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the Manufacturer to

achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the Manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied un-thinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, in no case shall the Manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.

B. Field Priming

1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other metals which

are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting schedule. Surface preparation of bare metal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Equipment which is specified to receive a baked-on enamel finish or other factory finish

shall not be field painted unless the finish has been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that have been shop painted and have been damaged or where the shop coat or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish. Preparation and painting shall be provided by the Contractor.

3. Equipment shipped with a protective shop painting coat or coats shall be touched up to the

satisfaction of the Engineer with primers as recommended by the Manufacturer of the finish paint. Preparation and painting shall be provided by the Contractor.

4. Touch-up at exterior ferrous metal locations: All areas that are scraped, scratched, or

otherwise marred after shop priming has been completed, field surface preparation to be power tool cleaned to bare metal using SSPC-SP11. Spot-prime with Series 90-97 Tneme-zinc in field to 2.0-3.0 DFT. Apply intermediate and topcoat as directed within this specification.

C. Field Painting

1. All painting at the site shall be under the strict inspection of the Engineer. Only skilled

painters and, where dictated by special conditions or systems and so ordered, specialist painters shall be used on the work.

2. All painting shall be performed by approved methods with number of coats modified as

required to obtain the total dry film thickness specified. Spray painting shall be performed specifically by methods submitted and as approved by the Engineer.



3. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting shall be done when the temperature is below 60 degrees F, in dust-laden air, when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely disappeared from the surface to be painted.

4. The temperature of all interior rooms to be painted shall be maintained at 60 degrees F

minimum at all hours of the day and shall include weekends. The rooms shall be completely dry with no traces of moisture on the surfaces to be painted. The building must be totally enclosed (permanent roof completely installed), weather tight, well ventilated and adequately illuminated in order to begin any painting activities.

5. Successive coats of paint shall be different shades (from paint Manufacturer's stock or shop

mixed paint) of the required colors so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat the approximate shade of the finished coat to ensure no show-through as approved.

6. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be

thoroughly and uniformly sanded with the type paper appropriate for the undercoats to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted.

7. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to

facilitate inspection. Materials subject to weather shall be primed coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.

8. All surfaces to be painted as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be done shall be

kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's directions.

9. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and

repainted as directed by the Engineer.

10. Only the aluminum work noted on the Drawings or in the Painting Schedule shall be field painted.

3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. All materials and work (coating and surface preparation) shall be accessible and subject to inspection by the Owner’s Representative.

B. The completed work shall be inspected visually by the Owner’s Representative for skips,

holidays, hiding, uniform color and appearance, and other imperfections. All defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

C. Coating thickness on steel shall be determined in accordance with SSPC-PA-2. The number of

readings will be a minimum of that stated in SSPC-PA-2.



D. Coating integrity for coatings in immersion areas or subjected to splash and spillage shall be

determined in accordance with NACE RP0188-88 "Standard Recommended Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings" using the low voltage wet sponge test method. All holidays will be clearly marked for repair.

E. Furnish to the job site and use for coating inspection and make available to the Owner’s

Representative the following test equipment (at all times while painting is in progress):

1. Wet film thickness gauge 2. Dry film thickness gauge (with certified thickness calibrator) equal to Mikrotest III,

Elcometer Inspector III, or Positest 3. Surface temperature gauge 4. Holiday Detector, Low voltage type such as Tinker & Rasor Model M-1, Series 9533 5. SSPC VIS-1-67T Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard 6. Keane-Tator Surface Comparator Number 372 or equal 7. NBS Certified Coating Thickness Standards 8. Sling Psychrometer 9. Surface moisture metering device equal to Delmhors Model DB

F. Contractor shall provide testing by a certified independent agency to ensure that all coating systems meet the minimum requirements for volatile organic compounds (VOCs), as established by the standards referenced above in Section 1.04. All coating materials shall be accessible and subject to inspection. All required testing is to be included within the Contractor’s scope of work and shall be completed on the project at no cost to the Owner.

3.05 CLEANUP

A. At all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting, remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials and all rubbish from and about the buildings and leave the work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.

B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or spattered on all

surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc, leaving the work ready for inspection.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10121 WRITING BOARDS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install wall mounted writing boards, tack boards, coat hook panels and accessories, as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry is included in Section 04200. B. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. C. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901. D. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings showing locations, dimensions, elevations, details of construction and details of erection for boards and coat hook panels.

B. Submit Manufacturer printed brochures and literature for all specified products. C. Submit two samples for each of the following:

1. 12-inch square samples of each type of board with backing and showing proposed

materials, construction, finish and colors. 2. 3-3/4 inch square samples of wooden hook panels with specified hook showing the

proposed materials, construction, finish, colors, and attachment. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WRITING BOARDS



A. Writing Boards shall be ‘Marker Wall’ Model by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; Harrison, Arkansas 72602; (800) 434-4610; or approved equal.

B. Boards shall be provided with a 2.5 mil minimum thickness vitreous porcelain enamel face and

edge coating on 22 gauge especially manufactured enameling steel with 2.5 mil porcelain ground coat under and on back. Sheets shall be factory assembled with a 7/16-inch particle board core and a 0.015-inch thick aluminum backer sheet, all laminated under pressure with a hot melt type, waterproof contact cement. Provide continuous aluminum channel trim around the perimeter of each board.

C. Boards shall be used as a writing surface for use with special markers only. Panel color shall be

white as approved.

D. Provide each board with eight (8) special markers, two (2) each in red, blue, green and black. Markers shall be liquid which dries instantly on surface and which can be completely removed with a standard felt eraser. Provide two (2) such erasers with approved magnetic backs, for each board.

E. Writing Boards shall be provided within the new buildings as follows:

1. Purchase Office A-102 – Provide one (1) writing board, with an overall size of 24-inches

wide by 16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

2. Manager Office A-104 – Provide one (1) writing board, with an overall size of 24-inches

wide by 16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

3. Break Room A-111 – Provide one (1) writing board, with an overall size of 36-inches wide

by 24-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. 4. Fuel Office B-105 – Provide one (1) writing board, with an overall size of 24-inches wide

by 16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. 2.02 TACK BOARDS

A. Tack Boards shall be ‘Tack Wall’ Model by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; Harrison, Arkansas 72602; (800) 434-4610; or approved equal.

B. Boards shall be provided with a designer fabric facing over 1/4-inch thick hardboard backing

material. Fabric shall be equal to Claridge Color 1690 (Gray Mix), as selected by Engineer and approved by Owner. Provide continuous aluminum channel trim around the perimeter of each board.

C. Tack Boards shall be provided within the new buildings as follows:

1. Purchase Office A-102 – Provide one (1) tack board, with an overall size of 24-inches wide

by 16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer.



2. Manager Office A-104 – Provide one (1) tack board, with an overall size of 24-inches wide by 16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

3. Break Room A-111 – Provide two (2) tack boards, with an overall size of 36-inches wide

by 24-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. 4. Fuel Office B-105 – Provide one (1) tack board, with an overall size of 24-inches wide by

16-inches high. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. 2.03 COAT HOOK PANELS

A. Multiple coat hook assembly with rear backer board, as manufactured by Emco Specialty Products, Incorporated; Kansas City, KS 66105, (913) 281-4555; or approved equal.

B. Hooks shall be solid Aluminum, Emco Model ‘A10,’ with upper and lower projections and

Silver finish. Hook size shall be 4-7/8” high by 1-3/8” wide with a maximum 4-1/4” projection.

C. Rear panel shall be solid hardwood with Walnut finish and concealed fasteners. Panel size shall be 5/8” deep by 3-3/4” high with length determined by the number of coat hooks applied.

D. Custom Coat Hook Panels shall be provided within the new buildings as follows:

1. Break Room A-111 – Provide one (1) panel with six (6) coat hooks and an overall length of

30-inches. Locate within room as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that all wall surfaces to receive boards and panels are true and plumb and are properly prepared to receive the specified wall mounted products.

B. Verify that the interior temperature and humidity are acceptable for normal occupied conditions

to ensure that products will not be damaged by excess moisture or temperature variations. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Deliver factory built units completely assembled and in the dimensions shown on the approved shop drawings.

B. Store and handle all products according to the Manufacturer’s written instructions and

recommendations. C. Do not install any boards or coat hook panels on damp walls or in humid weather without heat or

environmental conditioning within the building. D. Install level and plumb using concealed fasteners. Face fasteners will not be accepted on the

project. Extra care should be taken to keep the perimeter trim straight. When applicable, align product mounting height with the adjacent boards or panels within room.



3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Verify that all accessories have been installed as required for each board or panel. Present all markers and erasers for writing boards to the Owner for storage within each room.

B. Clean all surfaces and trim at the completion of work as recommended by the product

Manufacturer. All coat hook panels, writing and tack boards shall be in good condition and ready for use by the Owner.

C. Damaged or defective products shall be repaired, if acceptable to the Engineer, or completely

replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION



SECTION 10155

POLYMER TOILET PARTITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install solid, high density polymer toilet partition enclosures and screens, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Toilet Partitions shall be floor to ceiling mounted, molded under pressure from high density

polymer resin with uniform color throughout. C. Urinal Screens shall be wall mounted with flange supports, molded under pressure from high

density polymer resin with uniform color throughout.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry is included in Section 04200. B. Miscellaneous metals and attachment supports are included in Section 05500.

C. Carpentry work and blocking are included in Section 06100.

D. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. E. Ceramic tile is included in Section 09300.

F. Lockers and benches are included in Section 10500. G. Toilet and shower accessories are included in Section 10800.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, detailed information on materials proposed and installation methods.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Provide two (2) copies of the Manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication and installation. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, door swings, dimensions, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.



3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

4. Show all anchorage and accessory items.

5. Provide setting drawings, templates and instructions for the installation of anchorage devices built into other work.

D. Samples: For each type of unit indicated.

1. Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.

2. Two samples of each type of material, color and finish required for the proposed partition units. Provide 6-inch square samples of the same thickness and material required for the work on this Project.

3. Each type of hardware and accessory.

4. Samples will only be reviewed for color, material, texture and surface reflectivity. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

5. Finish color shall be selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner.

E. Warranty and Product Certificates: For each type of toilet partition and screen, from the product Manufacturer.

F. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.



1. ASTM A167 – Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip



4. ASTM A743 – Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application

5. ASTM A879 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface

6. ASTM B26 – Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

7. ASTM B86 – Specification for Zinc and Zinc-Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings



8. ASTM B221 – Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes

9. ASTM B455 – Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes

10. ASTM B584 – Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

11. ASTM E84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

12. ASTM E2129 – Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products





D. General Services Administration (GSA) / Commercial Item Description (CID)

1. CID-A-A-60003 – Partitions, Toilet, Complete

E. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.


A. Manufacturer shall have minimum ten (10) years experience in the fabrication of high density polymer materials and shall be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

B. Installer shall be approved by the product Manufacturer and shall be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

C. Products and installation shall comply with all of the standards listed above, including but not limited to ANSI A117.1 and ADAAG. In case of a conflict between accessibility requirements on the Project, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Spread Index: Class B (75 or less)

2. Smoke Developed Index: Class B (450 or less)

E. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for the installation of toilet partitions and related work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.




A. Deliver materials in the Manufacturer’s original, unopened and undamaged protective packaging.

B. Store all materials in an enclosed and protected area to prevent physical damage from temperature, moisture, humidity, exposure to the elements, and/or impact from construction activities.

C. Handle all materials to prevent damage to the finished surfaces, in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s written recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide a written warranty from the product Manufacturer that covers all defects in materials, including but not limited to panels, doors and pilasters, against breakage, delamination and/or corrosion, for a minimum period of 25-years from the Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide a written warranty signed by an authorized representative of the Manufacturer that covers all workmanship, for a minimum period of 2-years from the Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Field Measurements: Verify the actual locations of toilet and plumbing fixtures, walls, columns, doors, ceilings, bulkheads, and other construction contiguous with the toilet partitions by field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of the work. Indicate field measurements and site conditions on the shop drawings.


A. Toilet partition enclosures and screens shall consist of solid polymer units that are molded under pressure from either high-density polymer (HDP) or high-density polyethylene (HDPE) resin with uniform color throughout.

B. Manufacturers – Provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

1. General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation, Erie PA 16505, (814) 833-1154.

2. Hadrian Incorporated, Mentor OH 44060, (800) 536-1469.

3. Scranton Products Incorporated, Scranton PA 18505, (800) 445-5148. 2.02 PRODUCT TYPES

A. Toilet Compartments shall be fabricated from solid polymer / plastic doors and partition panels that are supported by pilasters, anchored to the floor and extending to ceiling (floor to ceiling mounted).



1. Provide Model 60-Series HDP partitions as manufactured by the General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation; Model HDPE partitions by Hadrian Incorporated; Model HDPE partitions by Scranton Products Incorporated; or approved equal.

B. Urinal Screens shall be fabricated from solid polymer / plastic partition panels that are anchored to the wall and supported with a continuous aluminum flange (wall hung and flange supported).

1. Provide Model WHF-7 Series HDP screens as manufactured by the General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation; Model HDPE screens by Hadrian Incorporated; Model HDPE screens by Scranton Products Incorporated; or approved equal.

2.03 PARTITION CONSTRUCTION

A. Material: Panels, Doors, Pilasters and Screens shall be solid material, molded under pressure from high-density polymer (HDP) or high-density polyethylene (HDPE) resin, with uniform color and pattern throughout the thickness of material.

1. Characteristics: Resistant to delamination, water, steam, corrosion, soaps, detergents, mildew and odor absorption.

2. Finish: Self-lubricating finish surface that is graffiti resistant to markings from pen, pencil, marker and paint.

3. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral type hinges.

4. Edges: Seamless with eased or machine radius to eliminate any sharp corners.

5. Surface Texture: Orange peel or as selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner.

6. Fire Hazard: Class ‘B’ flame-spread and smoke-developed index requirements, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

7. Minimum Thickness: 1-inch thick solid material for panels, doors, pilasters and screens.

B. Heat-Sink Strips: Attach continuous 1/8-inch thick extruded aluminum strips with tamper-resistant screws to the exposed bottom edges of panels, doors and screens to prevent burning.

C. Pilaster Shoes, Sleeves and Caps: Fabricated from No. 304 stainless steel components, in Manufacturer’s standard design.

D. Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns shall be provided on the Project, one within each restroom (Men A-113 and Women A-114).

1. Color of HDP partitions shall be Colonial (214) within Men’s Restroom A-113 and Fern (272) within Women’s Restroom A-114, as manufactured by General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation; or approved equal.

2. Final color and pattern shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from the full range of the product Manufacturer’s available finishes.



E. Layout and Size: Provide toilet compartments and screens with configurations, dimensions and door swings as indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hinges: Extruded aluminum, paired (top and bottom), wrap-around, self-closing, pivot type hinges, in Manufacturer’s standard design. Provide nylon cams for adjustable door closing position.

B. Brackets and Fittings: Stainless steel, heavy-duty type, in Manufacturer’s standard design. Wall brackets shall be adjustable to keep panels and stiles clear from walls. Stile cover bases shall be minimum 3-inches high, fabricated from No. 304 stainless steel.

C. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted, extruded aluminum slide latch unit designed for emergency access that does not require twisting or turning of the wrist to operate. Provide units with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, which comply with all regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

D. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard, extruded aluminum, combination coat hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting adjacent panels or compartment-mounted accessories.

E. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard, extruded aluminum, rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

F. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit, fabricated from No. 304 stainless steel, at all out-swinging doors that complies with all regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors located at compartments designated as accessible.

G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide Torx or hex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at both tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide anchors at pilasters as required to suit the existing field conditions at ceiling (top) and floor (bottom). Provide shoes, sleeves or caps at the pilasters to conceal anchorage and leveling mechanism at uneven substrates.

B. Supports and Blocking: General Contractor shall provide all necessary steel support framing and/or wood blocking within wall and ceiling assemblies to adequately support the floor to ceiling mounted partition units.

1. General Contractor shall coordinate with the partition Manufacturer to provide the correct size and locations for all required structural supports (both horizontal and vertical) and concealed blocking.



C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 24-inches wide, inward swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inches wide, outward swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch wide clear opening, for all compartments designated as accessible.


A. Coordinate requirements for blocking within stud walls to ensure proper support is provided for all wall attachments.

B. Coordinate requirements for structural support members and bracing above ceiling for adequate attachment of floor to ceiling pilaster.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to covering wall and ceiling framing with finish materials, examine framing to ensure that blocking and structural framing have been installed in correct positions to receive all required mounting attachments and fasteners.

B. Examine all substrates, opening dimensions and existing field conditions for compliance with the final approved shop drawings. Ensure that the field conditions meet all of the requirements for installation tolerances as well as other conditions that could affect the performance of work.

C. Verify the spacing of plumbing fixtures and adjacent construction to ensure compatibility with the installation of partitions.

D. Do not start the work of this Section until any and all deficiencies or unsatisfactory conditions have been adequately corrected.

E. Proceeding with any of the work from this Section shall indicate acceptance with the existing field conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install toilet partitions, doors and urinal screens as shown on the approved shop drawings and in strict compliance with the Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions and recommendations. Units shall be installed rigid, straight, level, true and plumb with horizontal lines level. Secure units in position with the Manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices and fasteners.

1. Maximum Installation Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2-inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1-inch.

c. End Pilasters and Walls: 1-inch



2. Stirrup Brackets:

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

c. Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three (3) brackets attached at midpoint and near both the top and bottom of each panel.

3. Maximum Erection Tolerances:

a. Variation from True Position: 1/4-inch.

b. Variation from Plumb: 1/8-inch.

B. Pilasters, Panels and Screens: Secure pilasters to supporting construction. Level, plumb and tighten the anchorage devices for a complete and rigid installation. Secure panels and doors to pilasters so that the exterior faces are aligned and flush. Hang and adjust doors so they are level and aligned with the adjacent panels when the doors are in the closed position.

C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to concrete floor and auxiliary structural framing directly above the finished ceiling.

1. Attach with heavy duty galvanized steel angle plate, fasteners and anchors.

2. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2-inches into the structural concrete floor unless otherwise indicated in the Manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Suspend pilasters from auxiliary ceiling framing using two (2) minimum 3/8-inch threaded studs, 5-inches long, unless otherwise indicated in the Manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Adjust pilaster supports with leveling nuts and washers to compensate for any floor or ceiling variations.

5. Conceal all floor and ceiling anchors with pilaster shoes, sleeves and/or caps.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach urinal screen panels to walls with continuous, heavy-duty aluminum channel. Provide anchoring devices to suit the supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

E. Wall Attachment: Secure panels and urinal screens to walls with heavy-duty wall brackets.

1. At light gauged steel-framed walls, fasten brackets with toggle or molly bolts into metal studs or backing plates fastened directly to the studs.

2. At wood framed walls, fasten brackets with wood screws into wood studs or blocking fastened directly to the studs.

3. At concrete or masonry walls, fasten brackets with screws and expansion anchors.



4. All fasteners and anchoring devices must be approved by the partition Manufacturer. 3.04 REPAIR

A. Repair any damaged work, as recommended by the product Manufacturer.

B. Replace any significantly damaged, deeply scratched or broken panels, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Replace any unacceptable work, which cannot be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Repair or replace any damaged or missing hardware and fasteners. 3.05 ADJUSTING

A. After the installation is complete, adjust and lubricate all hardware according to the product Manufacturer's written instructions for smooth and proper operation.

B. Hinge Adjustment:

1. Adjust the hinges on all inward swinging partition doors to hold the doors in a partially open position, approximately 30-degrees from the closed position, when unlatched.

2. Adjust the hinges on outward swinging partition doors to return the doors to a fully closed position when unlatched.

C. Adjust and align hardware to provide a uniform clearance along the vertical edge of doors.

D. Adjust pilasters so that the bottoms doors are level in the closed position. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. All components shall be kept clean during installation and throughout the construction process.

B. After installation and adjustment is complete, clean all exposed surfaces of partitions, screens, doors, hardware and fittings.

C. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with the product Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Abrasive cleaners are not acceptable and shall not be used on the Project under any circumstances.

D. Remove any adhesives, sealants or other stains as recommended by the product Manufacturer.

E. Leave all components free from any imperfections and protect the installation from damage during ongoing construction activities, as recommended by the product Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10200

LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install architectural louvers in the sizes and shapes shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420.

C. Joint sealants are included in Section 07901.

D. Dampers and ductwork are included in Division 15.

E. Grilles and registers are included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as indicated in Section 01300, shop drawings showing louver dimensions, location, material types and thicknesses, construction and installation details, accessories and appurtenances.

B. Submit to the Engineer for review, two samples, 6-inch square corner sample of metal finish to

be used. Prepare samples on metal of the same gauge and alloy to be used. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Submit samples of the Manufacturer's premium and standard finishes with colors for each item

specified herein. D. Submit sample of bird screen and screen framing system to be utilized in units to be supplied. E. Manufacturer shall submit certified AMCA 500 test data on 4-foot by 4-foot louver sections as

part of the shop drawings. Tests results shall indicate compliance with product specifications, including free area and pressure drop versus velocity, plus water infiltration data.



1. AA C22A41 – C22 Chemically Etched Medium Matte finish; A41 Anodic coating, Architectural, Class I (0.7 mil minimum) Clear



2. AA C22A42 – C22 Chemically Etched Medium Matte finish; A42 Anodic coating, Architectural, Class I (0.7 mil minimum) Integral Color

3. AA 6063-T5 – T5 Artificial Aging after an Elevated-Temperature Fabrication Process 4. AA 6063-T52 – T2 Heat-Treated; T5 Stress-Relieved by Compressing


1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2. ASTM B211 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bar, Rod and

Wire 3. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 4. ASTM E90 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions 5. ASTM E413 – Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)


D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)

1. Standard 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters 2. Standard 501 – Application Manual for Louvers

E. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 605.2 – Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on

Architectural Extrusions and Panels 2. AAMA 607.1 – Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic

Finishes for Architectural Aluminum 3. AAMA 608.1 – Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically

Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum 4. AAMA 2605 – Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and

Panels

F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition.





A. Fabrication practices, construction details, and installation procedures shall conform to the practices of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) as recommended in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

B. The Contractor shall verify the size, location, and placement of all louvers prior to fabrication.

The Contractor shall coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints, and field assembly of units. Whenever possible, louver units shall be assembled before shipment to the site.

C. The products, materials, and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this

Section shall comply with the minimum Building Code requirements. D. All louvers shall consist of a frame system with a consistent profile and size around the entire

perimeter of the louver assembly. Any louvers with unequal size frames or where the exposed face of the top or bottom frame does not match the two side frames, will not be acceptable.


A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the Manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by the

Manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. 1. Do not use any exposed fasteners on the project except where unavoidable and approved

by the Engineer.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel.

D. Coating protection at dissimilar materials: Provide additional coatings as recommended by the

Manufacturer to prevent direct contact with dissimilar metals or adjacent building materials. E. All louvers, fasteners, and supports shall be designed to meet a wind loading of not less than 30

pounds per square foot (psf). 1.07 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal. C. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as

determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.




A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.


A. Deliver materials in the Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact.

B. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and

construction operations. C. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1.11 SEISMIC

A. Exterior nonstructural wall panels or elements that are attached to or enclose the structure shall be designed by the Manufacturer to resist forces prescribed by the Building Code.

B. The louver Manufacturer shall submit a written letter to the Engineer certifying compliance

with seismic requirements of the Building Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STORM RESISTANT BLADE LOUVERS

A. Louvers shall be constructed from aluminum in the shapes and sizes shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Coordinate the rough opening sizes for louver configurations with the adjacent steel or masonry building components.

B. Louvers shall consist of formed aluminum, stationary type, full continuous high performance blade with sightproof chevron profile, minimum frame depth of 7-inches, having a minimum free area of 50.5-percent for a 4-foot square unit.

C. Storm resistant louvers shall be Model RS-7705, as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc.; or similar by Airolite Company, Ruskin, or approved equal.



D. Structural supports shall be designed to carry a minimum wind load of 30 psf, plus associated negative pressures. Vertical I-aluminum mullions, finished the same as the louver, shall be used at the joints between louvers so that there are no exposed fasteners.

E. All fasteners shall be stainless steel or aluminum series 5000 or 6000.

F. Provide continuous perimeter plates and angles constructed from the same material as louvers.

2.02 SCREENS

A. All louvers connected to ductwork shall be furnished with 1/2-inch aluminum mesh, 0.080-inch diameter wire intercrimp bird screen secured within a rewireable extruded aluminum frame. All louvers not connected to ductwork shall be furnished with 18 x 14 aluminum mesh insect screen 0.0123-inch diameter wire within a rewireable extruded aluminum frame. Mechanically fasten with screws to the inside face of louver frame. Structural supports shall be designed to carry a wind load of 30 psf.

B. Finish of screens shall be the same as the louver.

2.03 ALUMINUM BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Aluminum blank-off panels, of 0.051-inch thick aluminum sheet, finished to match the louver, encapsulating and sealing 2-inch fiberglass board insulation, shall be provided inside of screens as required to close off areas of louvers not required by ducts or for free air passage.

2.04 SILL EXTENSIONS

A. Sill extensions shall be provided as extruded 12-gauge (0.081-inch) formed 8-gauge (0.125-inch) aluminum finished the same as the louver where it is used.

2.05 LOUVER FINISH

A. Louvers shall be cleaned, pretreated and finished-after-assembly with an inhibitive primer and oven-cured Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 resin costing with minimum 1.3 mils dry-film coating thickness.

B. Finish shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of AAMA 2605, “Voluntary

Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”.

C. Finish shall meet or exceed AAMA 605.2 and shall include a minimum 5-year warranty against

color fading. D. Color shall match the adjacent exterior door and frame components. Final color shall be

selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the Manufacturer’s premium and standard available color options.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor and its installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which louvers and associated items are to be installed and notify Engineer, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner

acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in steel, concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the project site.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the

work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. C. Locate louvers plumb, level, with uniform joints and in proper alignment with the adjacent

work. D. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and

replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed by the Engineer. E. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws

where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. F. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and

openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated on the Drawings or as required for project. G. Protect galvanized and non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by

application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces, which will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.

H. Provide concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulations, and install as the work

progresses to make the installations weathertight. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.

B. Clean all exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to

remove fingerprints and dirt accumulation during construction period. Do not let soiling or stains to remain until the final cleaning on project.



C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent that is approved by the Manufacturer for use on the material finishes. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces and dry.

D. Repair any louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so

no evidence remains of any corrective work. If the results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Engineer, remove all damaged materials and replace with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. If approved by the louver Manufacturer, touch up any minor finish abrasions with a

compatible air-dried coating that matches the color and gloss of the factory applied finish coating.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect all installed louvers and associated materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install signage as specified and scheduled herein.

B. Types to be furnished are as follows:

1. Room Identification Signs.

2. Restrictive / Caution Signs.

3. Hazardous Materials Signs.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Doors and frames are included in Division 8.

C. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250.

D. Dimensional letters and plaques are included in Section 10421.

E. Fire extinguisher signs are included in Section 10522.

F. Illuminated exit signs are included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for review, the Manufacturer's complete color range and available type styles.

B. Submit to the Engineer, as specified in Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing

details of construction, erection and electrical work where required.

C. Submit sign layout with shop drawings as follows:

1. Full size layouts of typical Room Identification, Restrictive / Caution, and Hazardous Materials signage.

D. Submit 2 each of the following samples for review and resubmit as required until approved:

1. Full size sample of each proposed plastic Room Identification, Restrictive / Caution, and

Hazardous Materials signage in the colors proposed.



2. Full size sample of each proposed framing and mounting device.

3. Other samples as directed by the Engineer.

E. Submit for review, cleaning and maintenance instructions for all signage components.




C. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A 1. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

2. NFPA 30A – Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages

3. NFPA 52 – Standard for Vehicular Gaseous Fuel Systems Code

4. NFPA 88A – Standard for Parking Structures

5. NFPA 88B – Standard for Repair Garages

6. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

7. NFPA 231D – Standard for Storage of Rubber Tires

8. NFPA 704 – Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials

E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. All signage shall be the standard commercial or custom products of signage companies that have been continuously manufacturing signs for at least 5-years.



B. Signage with typographical or graphic errors (where such errors do not result from direction to the Contractor) shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Signs shall be, except as otherwise specified, manufactured by ASI Sign Systems, equal by Architectural Graphics Inc., Metal Art or approved equal. Catalog numbers indicated are those of ASI Sign Systems, (ASI) unless otherwise indicated. All lettering shall be Optima Bold in both upper and lower case, as specified and scheduled. All exposed surfaces shall be matte finish as approved.

B. Room Identification

1. Plaque type signs (scheduled as Type A) for handicapped rest room shall be ASI Sign Etch

Series by ASI, or equal. Signs shall conform to the ADA guidelines for room function identification. Signs shall be 9-inches high x 6-inches wide x 0.153-inch zinc with square corners. Signs shall consist of raised letters with raised Braille characters. Symbol of access graphic shall be within a 6-inch border area. Provide with 5/8-inch high letters, raised 1/32-inches from the surface of the sign and Grade 2 Braille, raised 1/32-inches. Wall mount by double face adhesive, vinyl foam tape. Sign wording shall be provided as indicated in the Signage Schedule with letters all in upper case. Color shall be selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

2. Plaque type signs (scheduled as Type B) for room identification in handicapped accessible

areas shall be ASI Sign Etch Series by ASI conforming to the ADA guidelines for room identification. Signs shall be 8-inches x 8-inches x 0.153-inch zinc with square edges. Signs shall consist of raised Braille characters with minimum 3/4-inch high lettering, in all upper case letters. Signs shall include two (2) horizontal raised accent stripes, 1-inch wide and 1/32-inch high, with complementary color to main signage. Colors for sign and accent stripes shall be selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer’s standard available colors.

3. Room Identification signs (scheduled as Type C), pressure sensitive letter type, shall be ASI

LTV Series, applied directly to doors. All letters shall be minimum 1-inch high as scheduled in all upper case letters, and located as directed. Letters shall be die-cut from 3.5 mil thick, pressure sensitive vinyl film and pre-spaced on carrier tape. The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners. Color shall be white or black, as selected by Engineer for maximum visibility, depending on color of substrate.

C. Restrictive / Caution Signs

1. Signs shall be ASI SP Series SPF constructed of 0.080-inch acrylic laminated to a 0.080-inch thick acrylic backing with four mounting holes for alternate locations.

2. Letters or symbols shall be screen printed or vinyl process both in subsurface locations.

3. Provide stainless steel fasteners and plastic drill-in anchors as required or stainless steel

wire for fastening where each is ordered.



4. All aspects of Restrictive / Caution signs including color of acrylic and letters shall be in accordance with OSHA standards for accident prevention.

5. Size of signs: 10-inches x 14-inches with 1-inch radius rounded corners.

6. Provide signs in Restrictive Signage Schedule and 20 additional signs, text as directed,

selected from standard "Danger", "Caution", "Notice" and "Safety First" signs of the Manufacturer.

D. Hazard Identification System 1. Contractor shall mark each container of hazardous materials according to the National Fire

Prevention Association (NFPA) Code #704, Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials. 2. The Required NFPA diamond shall be color coded as described in Appendix A of NFPA

704 and shall have an area of 144-square inches (17-inch high diamond, 12-inches on each side, rotated 45-degrees), or 0.5% of the surface of the container, whichever is greater.

a. Sign consists of a large diamond shape made up of four smaller diamonds with

numbers on the diamonds corresponding to the labels for the chemical represented.

b. Four small internal diamonds are to be 6-inches on a side with minimum 4-inch high letters. The overall diamond shall be 12-inches on a side.

c. The Health diamond (on the left) shall be blue with a white number. The Flammability

diamond (on the top) shall be red with a white number. The Reactivity diamond (on the right) shall be yellow with a black number. The Special Reactivity diamond (on the bottom) shall be white with a black symbol or text.

3. One per door or storage vessel as required by NFPA 704, for each of the areas containing

hazardous chemicals. 4. Sign sizes are to be adjusted to suit the number of letters in each sign with a minimum 1½-

inch wide border all around the perimeter. Two lines are permitted. Left-hand justify the letters. If OSHA standards are not applicable, the color of the acrylic shall be Red with 1-inch high White letters.

5. The Contractor shall provide all signage required by OSHA Hazard Communication

Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200(f). 6. Signs shall be wall mounted by the SA/VT fastening method of ASI or equal, continuous

across sign with concealed fasteners. Other suitable means of mechanically fastening with stainless steel or aluminum materials may be used on fences and other unusual mounting locations such as on tanks or containment.

7. All signs for hazard identification shall be made of Aluminum for maximum corrosion

resistance, and shall be suitable for both interior and exterior use. Finish of signs shall consist of a high-intensity reflective surface for increased visibility at night, during a blackout / power outage, or within smoke-filled areas.




A. Signage shall be installed at the locations detailed or as directed, in accordance with the Manufacturer's written recommendations and approved shop drawings.

B. Type A and B Room Identification signs shall be mounted on the wall, centered 60-inches above

the floor and centered 9-inches from the inside of the door frame on the strike side. At double doors, locate the sign to the outside of the inactive door or in the case of two active doors, to the outside of the left door. Final installation shall fully comply with all ADA and ANSI accessibility requirements.

C. Type C Room Identification signs shall be mounted on the entrance side of doors unless

otherwise directed by the Engineer. Text to be centered 60-inches above the floor, justified to a line, 3-inches from the strike edge of unglazed doors, 2-inches from the glazing stop of narrow glazed openings, or on the glazed panel 2-inches from the glazing stop on the strike edge of glazed doors.

D. Restrictive signs shall be mounted 60-inches above the floor at locations in the rooms directed

by the Engineer.

E. Install signage level and plumb. Use short aluminum spacers on uneven surfaces (e.g. CMU, formliner concrete, etc.) to allow flush installation of signs.

F. Scratched, bent or otherwise damaged signage shall be removed and replaced with new signs and mounting components at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Each sign shall be provided with pre-drilled mounting holes by the Manufacturer or installing firm.

H. The Contractor shall adjust the location of signage at the completion of construction and field fit any signs in close proximity to equipment, piping or other obstructions.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas.

B. Clean all of the installed signage products in accordance with the Manufacturers written instructions upon completion of sign installation and then a second time just prior to Final Completion.

C. Repair scratches and other damage which may have occurred during fabrication, installation or cleaning. Replace any damaged components as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.03 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Provide Identification Signs (door signage) to be located as follows:

O Push side of door X Pull side of door

Door #

Room Name Sign Copy Type

Location

Bus Maintenance Building (Designation ‘A’)

DA-100A Maintenance Bays Bus Maintenance Exit

C C

X O

DA-100B Maintenance Bays 12 C Exterior

DA-100C Maintenance Bays 11 C Exterior

DA-100D Maintenance Bays 10 C Exterior

DA-100E Maintenance Bays 9 C Exterior

DA-100F Maintenance Bays 8 C Exterior

DA-100G Maintenance Bays 7 C Exterior

DA-100H Maintenance Bays Bus Maintenance Exit

C C

X O

DA-100J Maintenance Bays Bus Maintenance Exit

C C

X O

DA-100K Maintenance Bays 6 C Exterior

DA-100L Maintenance Bays 5 C Exterior

DA-100M Maintenance Bays 4 C Exterior

DA-100N Maintenance Bays 3 C Exterior

DA-100P Maintenance Bays 2 C Exterior

DA-100Q Maintenance Bays 1 C Exterior

DA-100R Maintenance Bays Bus Maintenance Exit

C C

X O

DA-101A Parts Storage Parts Storage Emergency Exit Only

C C

X O

DA-101C Parts Storage Parts Storage Exit

B C

X O

DA-101F Parts Storage Parts Storage Exit

C C

X O

DA-102A Purchase Office Purchase Office B O

DA-102B Purchase Office Parts Storage Purchase Office

B C

X O

DA-103A Lube Room Lube Room Exit

C C

X O



Door #


Location

DA-103B Lube Room Lube Room Parts Storage

B C

X O

DA-104A Manager Office Manager’s Office B O

DA-105A Tool Storage Tool Storage B O

DA-106A Emergency Electrical

Emergency Electrical Exit

B C

X O

DA-106B Emergency Electrical

Emergency Electrical Exit

B C

X O

DA-107A Mechanical Room Mechanical Room Exit

C C

X O

DA-107B Mechanical Room Parts Storage Mechanical Room

C B

X O

DA-108A Farebox Repair Farebox Repair B O

DA-109A Electrical Room Electrical Room Exit

C C

X O

DA-109B Electrical Room Electrical Room Exit

B C

X O

DA-109C Electrical Room Emergency Electrical Electrical Room

C C

X O

DA-110A Stair Stair Corridor

B B

X O

DA-110B Stair Stair Exit

C B

X O

DA-110C Stair Stair Roof Access

C C

X O

DA-111A Break Room Break Room B X

DA-112A Men’s Locker Room Men’s Lockers Men’s Restroom

A A

X O

DA-113A Men’s Restroom Men’s Restroom A X

DA-114A Women’s Restroom Women’s Restroom A X

DA-115A Women’s Locker Room

Women’s Lockers Women’s Restroom

A A

X O

DA-116A Janitor’s Closet Service Closet B X

DA-117A Tire Storage Tire Storage Exit

C C

X O

DA-118A Chassis Wash 13 C Exterior

DA-118B Chassis Wash Exit Chassis Wash

C B

X O

DA-118C Chassis Wash Chassis Wash Body Shop

B C

X O

DA-119A Maintenance Closet Storage Closet B O



Door #


Location

DA-120A Wash Equipment Wash Equipment B O

DA-122A Machine Shop Machine Shop Body Shop

B B

X O

DA-123A Body Shop Body Shop Exit

C C

X O

DA-123B Chassis Wash 16 C Exterior

DA-123C Chassis Wash 15 C Exterior

DA-123D Chassis Wash 14 C Exterior

DA-123E Body Shop Body Shop Bus Maintenance

B B

X O

DA-123F Body Shop Bus Storage / Not an Exit Bus Maintenance

B B

X O

DA-124B Paint Booth Body Shop Exit

C C

X O

DA-125A Waste Oil Waste Oil B O

DA-126A Electrical Electrical Room Exit

B C

X O

DA-127A Telecom Telecom Room B O

DA-128A Mechanical Mechanical Room Exit

B C

X O

DA-129A Corridor Bus Maintenance C X

DA-129B Corridor Bus Maintenance B X

Bus Storage Building (Designation ‘B’)

DB-100C Bus Storage Bus Storage Exit

C C

X O

DB-100D Bus Storage Not an Exit Not an Exit

C C

Exterior Interior

DB-100E Bus Storage Bus Storage Exit

C C

X O

DB-100G Bus Storage Exit C O

DB-100H Bus Storage Exit C O

DB-100K Bus Storage Bus Storage Exit

C C

X O

DB-100M Bus Storage Bus Storage Exit

C C

X O

DB-101A Ground Storage Grounds Storage B X

DB-102A Counting Room Counting Room B X

DB-103A Lube Room Lube Room B X



Door #


Location

DB-104A Advertising Storage Advertising Storage B X

DB-105A Fuel Office Fuel Office B X

DB-106A Unisex Restroom Unisex Restroom A X

DB-107A Electrical Electrical Room Exit

B C

X O

DB-107B Electrical Electrical Room Exit

B C

X O

Bus Storage Building (Designation ‘B’) – Alternate 9

DB-110A Fuel Room Danger / Do Not Enter C Exterior

DB-110B Fuel Room Danger / Do Not Enter C Exterior

DB-110C Fuel Room Danger / Do Not Enter C Exterior

DB-110D Fuel Room Danger / Do Not Enter C Exterior

DB-111A Vestibule ‘A’ Fuel Room Exit

B C

X O

DB-111B Vestibule ‘A’ Fuel Room Exit

C C

X O

DB-112A Vestibule ‘B’ Fuel Room Exit

B C

X O

DB-112B Vestibule ‘B’ Fuel Room Exit

C C

X O

3.04 RESTRICTIVE/CAUTION SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Provide Restrictive/Caution Signs to be located as follows:

Quantity Sign Copy

Location

6 DANGER Equipment may start without warning

One on wall outside Mechanical Room and one outside each door to the Lube Rooms.

8 DANGER High Voltage Electrical

One on each Electrical Room door and as directed by the Engineer

4 Non-Potable Water Do Not Drink

As directed by the Engineer



Quantity Sign Copy

Location

6 NOTICE Safety Equipment for Emergency Use Only

Located adjacent to emergency eyewash/shower stations

10 NOTICE No Smoking


2 CAUTION HIGH NOISE AREA Ear Protection Required


10 Exit Door Do Not Obstruct

Locate at main exit doors as directed by the Engineer

4 DANGER Authorized Personnel Only


10 NOTICE No Trespassing

Locate around the perimeter of site as directed by the Engineer

2 NOTICE Not an Exit

Locate on both sides of Fire Door DA-123F as directed by the Engineer

2 DANGER Flammable Storage


2 NOTICE Roof Access

Locate near wall mounted ladder at Mechanical Room and Stair as directed by the Engineer

4 WARNING No Smoking – Flammable Gas

Locate at man doors outside of Fuel Room as directed by the Engineer

4 WARNING Blast Doors Close Automatically in the Event of an Emergency

Locate on inside and outside walls of the Fuel Room as directed by the Engineer

6 WARNING Fire Door Closes Automatically in an Emergency

Wall mount on both sides of rolling fire doors DA-101D, DA-101E, and DB-100D as directed by the Engineer

10 NOTICE Do not use for Storage

Locate above rooms with concrete lids within Bus Storage as directed by the Engineer



Quantity Sign Copy

Location

4

Emergency Procedures in Case of Spill, Release or Fire: 1. Use Emergency Pump Shutoff 2. Direct Vehicle Occupants to Exit Vehicles and Leave Area Immediately 3. Keep all Persons away from the area 4. Activate the Fire Extinguishing System that Protects the Fuel Dispensing Area. 3. Notify the Fire Department (Call 911)

Locate at fuel dispensing areas on Project (one at exterior fuel canopy, two at interior Fuel Room, and one at Fuel Office) as directed by the Engineer

3

WARNING – It is unlawful and dangerous to dispense fuel into unapproved containers. – No Smoking. – Stop Engine or Motor. – Portable containers shall not be filled while located inside a trunk, passenger compartment, or truck bed of a vehicle. By Order of the Fire Marshal

Locate at fuel dispensing areas on Project (one at exterior fuel canopy and two at interior Fuel Room) as directed by the Engineer

4 CAUTION

Slippery When Wet Locate throughout the chassis wash areas as directed by the Engineer

3.05 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Provide NFPA Hazard Identification Signs to be located as follows:

Chemical Sign Copy Location

Engine Oil (Motor Oil) CAS# 000034-00-0

1

2 0 –

(2) One on interior wall of each Lube Room, above storage tank as directed by Engineer.

Transmission Fluid

(Transmission Oil)

CAS# 003022-00-0

1 2 0

–

(2) One on interior wall of each Lube Room, above storage tank as directed by Engineer.



Chemical Sign Copy Location

Chassis Grease

(Grease)

CAS# 000858-00-0

1 0 0 –

(2) One on interior wall of each Lube Room, above storage drum as directed by Engineer.

Gear Oil

(Gear Lube)

CAS# 000026-00-0

1

2 0

–

(2) One on interior wall of each Lube Room, above storage drum as directed by Engineer.

Unleaded Gasoline

(Automotive Fuel)

CAS# 8006-61-9

2

3 0

–

(1) Mounted on post near fuel dispensing area at exterior Fuel Canopy, as directed by Engineer.

Diesel Fuel #2

(Fuel Oil)

CAS# 000169-00-0

2

0 0

–

(4) Mounted at interior fuel room of Bus Storage, as directed by Engineer.

Compressed Natural Gas

(CNG)

CAS# 68410-63-9

4

1 0

–

(9) Six mounted at interior fuel room of Bus Storage, one at exterior fuel canopy, and two at CNG storage compound on site; all as directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10421

DIMENSIONAL LETTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work of this Section includes:

1. Custom, rear-illuminated, raised dimensional letters and logos, dedication plaque signage, and building evacuation diagrams, complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Where required at illuminated signage on the Drawings, all associated power and control

wiring shall be furnished and installed under this Section and in accordance with the requirements of Division 16.


A. See Related Sections for additional requirements applicable to this Section:

1. Masonry work is included in Section 04200. 2. Gypsum wallboard systems are included in Section 09250. 3. Signage is included in Section 10400. 4. Electrical work is included in Division 16. 5. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110. 6. Wires, conductors and cables are included in Section 16120. 7. Electrical Classifications are included on Drawing E-3.


A. Reference Standards

1. Manufacturer's written recommendations and product specifications.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. ASI Signage Innovations, Beachwood OH 44122, (216) 831-1345. 2. Gemini Incorporated, Cannon Falls MN 55009, (800) 538-8377.

3. A.R.K. Ramos Signage Systems, Oklahoma City, OK 73109, (800) 725-7266.

4. Steel Art Company, Norwood MA 02062, (800) 322-2828.



5. Or approved equal.

C. Signage Installer

1. Installation shall be performed by the signage Manufacturer or by an installer that is

approved by the signage Manufacturer, and who is specialized and experienced in the signage application herein.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop drawing showing location and sizes of each dimensional letter, custom logo graphics,

building evacuation diagrams, and dedication plaque where applicable. Elevations and details showing the proposed location and anchorage of signage on each structure or substrate.

C. Submit to the Engineer for review, the Manufacturer's complete color range and available type styles.

D. Submit to the Engineer, as provided in Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing details of construction, erection and electrical work where required.

E. Submit sign layouts with shop drawings as follows:

1. Full size layout with graphics and text of Dedication Plaque. 2. Scaled layout of custom exterior logos and dimensional raised letter signage with rear

LED lighting system and all associated components. 3. Full size layouts with graphics and text for all building evacuation diagrams with

the proposed escape routes.

F. Submit two each of the following samples of proposed materials for each type of sign, plaque, diagram, letter or custom graphic. Resubmit as required until approved.

1. A 6-inch minimum corner sample of proposed dedication plaque showing material,

edge detail, lettering and proposed mounting device. 2. Full size sample of typical upper case letter from the custom exterior building signage

made of raised aluminum letters, showing font, proposed finish, edge detail, and proposed mounting device.

3. A 6-inch minimum corner sample of proposed custom logo showing aluminum

material, proposed finish colors, custom graphics, font, edge detail and proposed mounting device.

4. A 6-inch minimum corner sample of the proposed building evacuation diagrams

showing material, edge detail, lettering, graphics and proposed mounting device. 5. Other samples as directed by the Engineer.



G. Operation Instructions:

1. Electrical Wiring Diagrams: Submit ‘as-built’ straight line wiring and schematic diagrams showing electrical connections and control circuitry.

H. Submit to the Engineer for review, cleaning and maintenance instructions for all signage

components. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS


B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities



D. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association (AAMA)

E. Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AMA)

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 170 – Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols

G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

I. National Electric Code (NEC)

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

K. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code

(IBC), 2009 Edition


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNS

A. Raised Aluminum Letters

1. Custom cut solid metal with side wall returns, letters shall be 20-inches high by 4-inches deep minimum at large upper case letters for the name of the Facility, at the Bus Maintenance Building, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.



2. Aluminum stand-off type letters with concealed 1.5-inch thick aluminum mounting studs, minimum 0.090-inch thick aluminum face with minimum 0.063-inch thick side wall returns. Logos shall be enclosed and sealed for weather resistance with 0.25-inch thick clear Lexan back.

3. Finish shall be powder coated aluminum (with one custom color on the exterior and

White colored interior surfaces) for all letter surfaces. Color to be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from both standard and custom Manufacturer finishes available to ensure maximum visibility on the building substrate.

4. Illumination – Letters shall be back-lit with ‘White’ colored, rear LED lighting system with all required power supplies and wiring to connect to building power system.

5. Text shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as selected by Engineer, and approved by the Owner.

6. Custom font and letter spacing shall be selected by Engineer from both standard and custom fonts available from the Manufacturer, and approved by Owner. For the purpose of preliminary layout and pricing, the font shall be ‘Goudy Stout’ as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Raised Aluminum Logos

1. Custom cut solid metal with side wall returns, 75-inches wide by 60-inches high by 4-

inches deep minimum, at the Bus Maintenance Building, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Aluminum stand-off type logos with concealed 1.5-inch thick aluminum mounting

studs, minimum 0.125-inch thick aluminum face with minimum 0.090-inch thick side wall returns. Logos shall be enclosed and sealed for weather resistance with 0.25-inch thick clear Lexan back.

3. Finish shall be powder coated aluminum (with two custom colors on the exterior and White colored interior surfaces) for both graphics and images. Color to be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from both standard and custom Manufacturer finishes available to ensure maximum visibility on the building substrate.

4. Illumination – Logos shall be back-lit with ‘White’ colored, rear LED lighting system with all required power supplies and wiring to connect to building power system.

5. Oval in face of custom logo shall have an open back with transparent, White colored Lexan. Three (3) aluminum plate letters, 7-inches high and 0.25-inches thick, shall be stud mounted to the Lexan face. Color of plate letters within oval shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from standard Manufacturer finishes.

6. Approved artwork, colors and official EMTA logo to be provided and approved by Owner.

C. Electrical Requirements

1. Custom letters and logos shall be supplied with all power supplies, wiring, and controls

required for a complete and fully operational illuminated signage system.



2. Electric power for illuminated signage shall be 277 volt, single phase.

3. The electrical installation shall follow all Division 16 requirements.

4. Signage shall be UL tested and approved.

5. Signage shall be installed in conformance with all NEC requirements.

2.02 BUILDING DEDICATION PLAQUE

A. Dedication Plaque shall be cast bronze (88 percent Cu, 10 percent Sn and 2 percent Pb). B. Size shall be minimum 36-inches wide by 48-inches long by 1/2-inches thick, with Single

Line Border, Stud Mounting System (minimum of four bronze studs drilled and tapped into cast bosses in back), Times Bold letters and pebbled texture background. Border face and letters shall be light oxidized bronze with medium oxidized bronze background, all as selected by Engineer and approved by Owner.

C. Dedication plaque text shall include full names of Owner (Erie Metropolitan Transit

Authority) and Owner's board and key personnel, project name (Transit Operations Facility), names of engineer (CDM Smith), contractor and date completed. Final layout of text, logos and composition will be furnished by the Engineer and/or Owner during construction. For pricing purposes, the Contractor shall assume 1,200 minimum letters, numbers and/or characters with three (3) custom logos and a minimum of three (3) different standard and/or premium finish colors.

2.03 BUILDING EVACUATION DIAGRAMS

A. Custom building evacuation diagrams using horizontal layout, minimum size of 11-inches wide by 8-1/2 inches high, direct color printed on 1/4-inch thick, rigid gator board substrate with white colored face and core material, and matching finished perimeter edges.

B. Diagrams shall include the floor plan for each building with the following colored graphics: 1. Proposed placement of sign (Star with ‘You Are Here’) – Blue in Color 2. Location of Emergency Exits (Target Graphic) – Yellow in Color 3. Location of Fire Extinguishers (Tank Graphic) – Red in Color 4. Location of Fire Alarm Pull Box (Circular Graphic) – Red in Color 5. Location of AED / Automated External Defibrillator (Heart Graphic) – Red in Color 6. Proposed Primary Escape Route (Dashed Line with Arrows) – Red in Color 7. Proposed Secondary Escape Route (Dashed Line with Arrows) – Green in Color

C. Provide a minimum of twelve (12) different diagrams for the Bus Maintenance Building and six (4) different diagrams for the Bus Storage Building. Locations for all proposed evacuation diagrams shall be provided by the Engineer during the submittal review process.



D. Evacuation diagrams shall comply with all applicable requirements of NFPA 170. E. Diagram artwork shall be created by signage Manufacturer over building floor plans using

electronic AutoCAD drawing files provided by the Engineer for each building. Proposed artwork with colored graphics shall be reviewed and approved by Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.

F. High resolution, electronic artwork for all approved final evacuation diagrams shall provided to the Owner for future printing, reproduction and/or modification purposes.

2.04 FABRICATION AND TEXT

A. Create signage for the project to meet all of the requirements indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Comply with the specified requirements for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,

shapes and sizes. C. All signs, letters, logos, diagrams and plaques shall be shop fabricated.

D. Design, fabricate, and install all sign assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and

over stressing of welds and fasteners. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration.

E. Dedication Plaque Finish

1. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system

(polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2).

2. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and finish color coating.

3. Color(s) shall be selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner from the Manufacturer’s standard and premium available colors.

F. Custom Raised Aluminum Letters

1. TRANSIT OPERATIONS FACILITY – Minimum 20-inches high, 4-inch deep letters,

with spacing and layout as indicated on the Drawings (Phase 1) and as specified herein.

2. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2).

3. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer

and finish color coating. 4. Custom powder coated finish shall consist of one (1) custom color, as selected by the

Engineer and approved by the Owner, from both standard and custom Manufacturer finishes available, to ensure maximum visibility on the building substrate.



5. Illumination – Letters shall be back-lit with ‘White’ colored, rear LED lighting system with all required power supplies and wiring to connect to building power system.

G. Custom Raised Aluminum Logo Graphics

1. Raised aluminum logo with notched and curved open sections along the exterior and

interior perimeter edges that include the official ‘e’ logo for the Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority (EMTA).

2. Provide One (1) aluminum logo on the project as follows at the location indicated on

the Drawings:

a. Bus Maintenance Building – Custom aluminum logo, 75-inches wide by 60-inches high by 4-inches deep, on the exterior masonry wall of the North elevation, as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified herein.

3. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system

(polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2). 4. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer

and finish color coating. 5. Custom powder coated finish shall consist of two (2) different custom colors, as

selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. 6. Illumination – Logos shall be back-lit with ‘White’ colored, rear LED lighting system

with all required power supplies and wiring to connect to building power system. 7. Oval in face of custom logo shall have an open back with transparent, White colored

Lexan. Three (3) aluminum plate letters (‘the’), 7-inches high and 0.25-inches thick, shall be stud mounted to the Lexan face. Color of plate letters within oval shall be selected by Engineer and approved by Owner from standard Manufacturer finishes.


A. General Contractor shall coordinate the work of all other trades to ensure spaces for the signage are made available.

B. The custom raised letters and logo graphics shall be mounted on the exterior masonry walls of the new Bus Maintenance Building as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.

C. The dedication plaque shall be mounted inside Corridor (A-129) of the new Bus Maintenance

Building, as directed by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. D. Surfaces shall be flat and clean. E. Install signage level and plumb. Use short aluminum spacers on any uneven surfaces (e.g.

CMU, formliner concrete, etc.) to allow correct installation of all signage.



3.02 CLEANING

A. Repair scratches and other damage which might have occurred during installation.

B. Replace any damaged components as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas.

D. Clean installed products in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions prior to

Final Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10500 METAL LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and provide metal lockers and benches, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Section 03300. B. Masonry work is included in Section 04200.

C. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100. D. Gypsum wallboard is included in Section 09250.

E. Ceramic tile is included in Section 09300.

F. Field painting is included in Section 09902. G. Polymer toilet partitions are included in Section 10155.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, the following information:

1. Product Data: Include Manufacturer brochures, cut sheets and product information, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of locker and bench required.

2. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachment methods.

Show locker filler panels, trim, base, sloping tops, anchors, metal thickness, locking device, hardware and accessories. Provide locker identification system including the numbering sequence.

3. Samples: Include Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of standard and

premium colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. If requested by the Engineer, provide actual color samples for review and final approval.

4. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching

mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of the metal locker Manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, benches and accessories through one source from a

single product Manufacturer C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal

lockers and benches that are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Do not modify the intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Engineer, except with Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to the Engineer for review.

D. Accessibility Requirements: Where metal lockers and benches are indicated to comply with

accessibility requirements, the completed installation shall comply with the "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." These ADA accessibility requirements shall include but are not limited to the following:

1. Provide accessible lockers for at least 5-percent of the total number of lockers, but not

less than one unit, within each locker room on the Project. 2. At accessible lockers, provide at least one (1) shelf located 48-inches maximum above

the floor and one (1) shelf located near the bottom, 15-inches minimum above the floor for forward reach approach.

3. Provide ADA approved hardware for all accessible lockers, that does not require any

tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that operates with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

4. Provide at least one (1) fixed accessible bench within each locker room on the Project. 5. At accessible benches, provide minimum seat size of 20-inches deep, 42-inches long, and

18-inches high, that is floor mounted 2.5-inches maximum from the adjacent vertical wall surface for accessible back support.


A. Do not deliver metal lockers and benches until the designated spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for installation.

B. Deliver materials in the Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels

legible and intact. C. Store materials in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction

operations. D. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings:

1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support metal lockers and benches

before they are installed or enclosed. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish recessed opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal lockers without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor construction to ensure that actual recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Field Verification: Coordinate the size and location of wood and/or concrete bases that are to be constructed for the metal lockers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that the metal lockers and benches can be properly supported and installed as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which the product Manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of the metal lockers and benches that should fail in either materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within the specified warranty period.

1. Failures shall include but are not limited to the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. 2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

B. Warranty Period: Provide a written warranty from the Manufacturer that extends for a period of

two (2) years beyond the date of Substantial Completion, and covers all defects associated with both lockers and benches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products by one of the following, or approved equal:

1. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 2. Penco Products, Inc.



3. Republic Storage Systems Co.

B. This specification uses metal lockers and benches, as manufactured by Lyon Metal Products, Inc., as the minimum standard of quality for all products. The construction standards of this particular product line shall provide the basis for the acceptable levels of quality and functionality.

2.02 METAL LOCKERS

A. Lockers shall be steel, single tier quiet type with continuous sloping hood and 6-inch high closed style base. Size of individual lockers shall be 12-inches wide by 12-inches deep by 72-inches high. Provide Heavy Duty Model by Lyon Metal Products Inc. or approved equal.

B. Quantity: Provide ten (10) lockers at Men’s Locker Room A-112 (One row of ten) and six (6)

lockers at Women’s Locker Room A-115 (One row of six). Lockers shall be fully assembled and shall be anchored to both the floor and wall at each location.

C. Doors and door frames shall be made of cold rolled and leveled sheet steel. Other parts shall be

made of mild cold rolled steel. All steel to be free from imperfections and capable of taking a high grade enamel finish.

D. Doors shall be 14 gauge steel adequately flanged, formations consisting of two right angles at

sides of door and one right angle at top and bottom.

E. Doors frames shall be not less than 16 gauge steel capable of taking the same high grade finish as balance of the locker. All parts to be channel formation securely welded together.

F. All flanges shall be welded together at the corners. Body of lockers, and filler pieces where

required, shall be 16 gauge steel with 18 gauge back panels. G. Provide continuous filler pieces vertically and at sloped top at units at west side of each set of

lockers where required to close and finish the straight run of lockers. Provide end finishing panels with no unnecessary holes to cover the ends of lockers at east side of each set of lockers where they are exposed to view.

H. Color for all lockers, including special high gloss finish, shall match the toilet partitions within

each adjacent restroom. Final colors shall be selected by Engineer from premium colors available from the Manufacturer and approved by the Owner.

I. Provide Manufacturer’s standard continuous steel hinge for all lockers, that is securely mounted

to the door and frame.

J. Ventilation of the locker shall be accomplished by louver slots at the bottom and at the top of each door. Provide mini-louver arrangement type MS-1, as manufactured by Lyon Metal Products, Inc., or approved equal.

K. Furnish hat shelf approximately 9-inches from top, one 5/8-inch diameter galvanized steel coat

hanger rod and four single prong wall hooks. All prongs shall be cadmium plated with ball points and shall be attached with two bolts.



L. Locking device shall be a positive and automatic type locking device of the pre-locking type

whereby locker may be locked while door is open, and then closed without unlocking and without damaging locking mechanism.

1. Rubber silencers shall be provided at each locking lug and at top and bottom of latching

barb. The silencers on the locking lugs shall be securely attached with rivets having the heads molded into the rubber.

2. Latching bar shall be of channel formation and tamper-proof. 3. Handle shall be of the straight lift type, of durable alloy, enameled or plated. Handles

shall have padlock attachment so that handle or latching device cannot be operated when padlock is affixed. Handles shall be so designed to provide a padlock strike to prevent padlock marring finish on locker door. There shall be three locking positions.

M. Locks shall be combination, master-keyed padlocks. Provide two master keys. Locks shall be

National Lock Co.; Master or equal. Provide one lock for each locker.

N. Provide accessible lockers for at least 5-percent of the total number of lockers, but not less than one (1) unit, within each locker room. Accessible locker(s) shall be located in the center of the locker units within Women’s Locker Room A-115, and at the right end of the locker units within Men’s Locker Room A-112.

O. Number plates on each locker shall be polished aluminum with black numerals not less than

1/2-inch high. Plates shall be attached with split rivets. Number the lockers 1 through 6 within Women’s Locker Room A-115 and 1 through 10 within Men’s Locker Room A-112, or as directed by the Engineer. Provide ADA approved signage for all lockers (minimum of one per room) for all lockers designated as accessible units.

P. Surfaces of steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a bonding and phosphatized process to

inhibit corrosion and increase the durability of the applied enamel. All parts shall then be finished with a heavy coat of enamel. Enamel shall be baked-on.

2.03 WOOD BENCHES

A. Bench tops shall be laminated hardwood, maple or birch, using urea resin type glue. Moisture content of wood shall be between 6 and 8 percent. Wood tops shall be minimum 1-1/4-inch thick for full length of each bench.

B. Accessible benches shall have a minimum seat size of 20-inches deep, 42-inches long, and 18-

inches high. Benches shall be floor mounted 2.5-inches maximum from the adjacent vertical wall surface for accessible back support.

C. Bench top shall be mounted on 14-gauge, rust resistant steel base, spaced equally at each end,

minimum four (4) per bench. Pedestal bases shall be painted to match the adjacent metal locker finish. Wood bench tops shall be sanded and finished with three coat (sealer and two finish coats) clear polyurethane gloss finish.

D. Quantity: Provide one (1) bench 42-inches in length within Men’s Locker Room A-112 and one

(1) bench 42-inches in length within Women’s Locker Room A-115, as shown on the Drawings.



E. Provide all necessary stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers for suitably anchoring benches to

concrete floor slab, through ceramic tile floor finish, at the locations indicated on Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a complete

installation.

B. Unit principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site

using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory-weld all frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

D. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. E. Coat Rods: Fabricated from minimum 3/4-inch-diameter steel; nickel plated. F. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates;

with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high. 2.05 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" regarding the recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants

that could impair paint bond. Use Manufacturer's standard methods. D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply the

Manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint Manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.


A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with the requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.



1. Prepare a written report that is endorsed by Installer, listing any conditions that are

detrimental to the performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation of metal lockers and benches only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, rigid, plumb, and true to line; shim as required for proper and complete installation using concealed shims.

B. Lockers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with approved shop

drawings. Lockers shall be anchored to each other, to the wall (at every third locker) and to the base floor (at each locker) with galvanized connections and masonry anchors where required.

C. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard fasteners,

with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. D. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately

together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. E. If requested by the Engineer, demonstrate the smooth and proper operation of all locker units. F. Provide Owner with the combination information or actual keys where applicable, for all locks;

and provide one can of touch-up paint, with color matching lockers and bench supports, for any future repair work.

G. Fasten benches to the floor in accordance with the approved shop drawings and Manufacturer’s

written recommendations. Use stainless steel fasteners and masonry anchors with base connection set in polyurethane base sealant.

H. After completion of locker and bench installation, adjust all doors and hardware, clean all

surfaces and touch-up any minor scratches, as recommended by the Manufacturer. 3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

B. Protect metal lockers and benches from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain or paint. Do not permit

any use of the metal lockers or wood benches during construction. C. Touch up any marred locker finishes to match the adjacent lockers. Replace any metal lockers

that cannot be restored to a factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or approved by the metal locker Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10522

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install fire extinguishers in cabinets where required and with brackets at other locations as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, as provided in Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing details of construction and installation of fire extinguishers, cabinets and brackets.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers




5. NFPA 88A – Standard for Parking Structures

6. NFPA 88B – Standard for Repair Garages 7. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

8. NFPA 231D – Standard for Storage of Rubber Tires

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. Fire Protection Equipment List C. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition

D. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.




A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store all materials in a manner that prevents damage from the environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures and recertification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fire Extinguishers shall be as specified below by J.L. Industries; Larsen’s Mfg. Co., Kidde Belleville; Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. or equal. J.L. Industries model numbers have been used to establish the minimum level of quality and type that is to be provided.

B. Fire Extinguishers shall be Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical type (Ammonium Phosphate), suitable

for Class A, B and C fires, with a minimum UL rating of 4A:60B:C and a maximum UL rating of 20A:120B:C. Units shall be red enameled aluminum cylinders with pressure gauge by J.L. Industries or approved equal. Provide Model Cosmic 10E for 10-lb capacity tank size and Cosmic 20E for 20-lb capacity tank size.

C. Fire Extinguishers shall be Regular Dry Chemical type (Sodium Bicarbonate), suitable for Class

B and C fires, with a minimum UL rating of 60B:C and a maximum UL rating of 120B:C. Units shall be red enameled aluminum cylinders with pressure gauge by J.L. Industries or approved equal. Provide Model Galaxy 10 for 10-lb capacity tank size and Galaxy 20 for 20-lb capacity tank size.

D. Brackets for surface mounted fire extinguishers shall be the Manufacturer’s steel heavy-duty

standard or optional model, which supports both the bottom and sides of extinguishers, with clip-together straps; by J.L. Industries or equal. Hardware shall rigidly secure fire extinguisher in place in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and shall be provided for all units not located within cabinets.

E. Non-Rated Semi-Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets shall be made of Stainless Steel with clear curved door glazing and 2-1/2 inch return trim with rolled edge. Cabinets shall be Model No. 1537 as manufactured by J.L. Industries or approved equal.

F. Fire-Rated Semi-Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets shall be made of Stainless Steel with clear

curved door glazing and 2-1/2 inch return trim with rolled edge. Cabinets shall be UL approved for required fire-rating of wall assembly, Model No. 1537FX as manufactured by J.L. Industries or approved equal.

G. Cabinet doors shall be made of formed sheet stainless steel, full glass access, matching stainless

steel pull handle with roller catch and continuous hinge.



H. Glass shall be 1/4-inch clear tempered glass at non fire-rated cabinets and UL approved double-strength glass at fire-rated cabinets.

I. Identification shall consist of Red vinyl applied letters positioned vertically on the wall above

the extinguisher on a V-shaped white sign with lettering on two faces. Lettering shall read ‘FIRE EXTINGUISHER.’

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall field verify that rough openings for cabinets are sized and located correctly. B. Contractor shall field verify location and clearances for possible obstructions or interferences

prior to installation. C. Contractor shall make field adjustments where required to properly mount fire extinguishers at

the designated locations. D. Beginning fire extinguisher installation means acceptance of the existing field conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Fire extinguishers shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings, as directed by the Engineer, and as required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). In the case of a conflict between requirements (distance, quantity, location, type of extinguisher, etc…), the most stringent criteria shall apply on the Project.

1. Maximum travel distance to fire extinguishers shall be based on building occupancy as

required by the Building Code.

2. Maximum travel distance to fire extinguishers shall be based on the Classification of the Hazard as required by the Fire Code

B. Install all items included in this Section at the mounting heights that comply with all applicable

regulations of governing authorities.

1. All fire extinguishers shall be installed so that the top of the fire extinguisher is not located more than 5-feet above the finished floor.

2. Where cabinets are specified, the cabinet sill shall be set at 2’-6” or as required to ensure that the top of extinguisher within cabinet is not located more than 5-feet above the finished floor.

C. In addition to the locations indicated on the Drawings, provide and install two (2) extra 20-lb

fire extinguishers (FE-1) at the exterior fuel canopy as directed by the Engineer. D. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet

and style of trim to comply with Manufacturer’s instructions.



E. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. All fire extinguishers shall be inspected and certified within thirty days of start-up.

3.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SCHEDULE

Mark Type UL Ratings Size (lbs) Mounting

FE-1 Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical

20A:120B:C 20 Surface / Wall Bracket


4A:60B:C 10 Surface / Wall Bracket


4A:60B:C 10 Semi-Recessed / Non-Rated Cabinet


4A:60B:C 10 Semi-Recessed / Fire-Rated Cabinet

FE-5 Regular Dry Chemical

60B:C 10 Surface / Wall Bracket

FE-6 Regular Dry Chemical

120B:C 20 Surface / Wall Bracket

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10800 TOILET AND SHOWER ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and deliver all toilet and shower accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Masonry is included in Section 04200. B. Carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

C. Gypsum wallboard is included in Section 09250.

D. Ceramic tile is included in Section 09300.

E. Polymer toilet partitions are included in Section 10155.

F. Plumbing fixtures are included in Section 15440.

G. Installation is included in Division 15.

H. Electrical work is included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings, Manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list including gauge and type of material and all fasteners, installation requirements and construction details. Submittals shall include the following:

1. One representative sample of each item and model specified, if requested. 2. Certificate of verification by an independent testing organization of grab bar strength and

installation. 3. Furnish at the time of delivery of materials, four complete sets of maintenance instructions.


A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store materials within unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction operations. Handle and protect in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.



1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee all mirrors for ten (10) years against silver spoilage. Furnish four copies of the guarantee along with maintenance instructions.






D. National Electric Code (NEC) E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) F. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition



A. Products specified by number are products as Manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc. and are used only to determine quality, appearance, workmanship, gauge of metal, capacity and finish. Products by Bradley Washfountain Co.; Watrous Inc. or equal, will be acceptable, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, they meet the intent of this Section as stated immediately above. Accessories furnished shall be the products of one Manufacturer.

B. Grab bars shall be 1-1/2-inch diameter, 1-1/2-inches clear to wall, Type 304 stainless steel, not

less than 18 gauge with peened non-slip gripping surface and satin finish elsewhere, complete with wall returns, stainless steel flanges and concealed mountings. Grab bars shall be mounted to dimensions shown. Completed installation shall be able to support the loads as required by the Building Code.

C. All accessories shall be Stainless Steel, except as specified otherwise.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Item GB18 – B-6806.99-18 (1-1/2” diameter by 18-inch Grab Bar with snap flange) locate vertically on wall inside stalls or restrooms as indicated on the Drawings.



B. Item GB36 – B-6806.99-36 (1-1/2” diameter by 36-inch Grab Bar with snap flange) locate on

wall inside stalls or restrooms as indicated on the Drawings. C. Item GB42 – B-6806.99-42 (1-1/2” diameter by 42-inch Grab Bar with snap flange) locate on

wall inside stalls or restrooms as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Item M1 – B-290 1830 (18-inch by 30-inch Welded Frame Mirror) locate one above each lavatory as indicated on the Drawings. Mirror shall be mounted to comply with all ADA or accessibility requirements above each lavatory as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Item SMSD – B-2111 / 4112-79 (Vertical Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser / Field-Replaceable Valve) locate on wall next to each Lavatory as indicated on the Drawings. Provide one extra all-purpose valve for the future replacement of each soap dispenser valve on Project.

F. Item PT1 – B-262 / 262-130 (Surface Mounted Roll Paper Towel Dispenser / with Towel Mate Accessory) locate on wall near each Lavatory as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Item WR1 – B-2250 (Floor Standing, SS Waste Receptacle with Top, 13-gallon capacity) locate

one within each Restroom location as indicated on the Drawings. In addition, provide one (1) additional unit to be located within Break Room A-111, as directed by the Engineer.

H. Item EHD – B-7128 (Surface Mounted, Electric Hand Dryer, Stainless Steel Cover, Trim Line

Series, UL Listed, 115-Volt, 1725 Watts) locate on wall within each Restroom and Locker Room as indicated on the Drawings.

I. Item SMTD – B-2888 (Surface Mounted, Multi-Roll, Toilet Tissue Dispenser) locate on wall or partition directly adjacent to each toilet as indicated on the Drawings.

J. Item SND – B-254 (Surface Mounted, Sanitary Napkin Disposal) locate on wall or partition of

Women’s Restroom, next to the Toilet Tissue Dispenser, directly adjacent to each toilet as indicated on the Drawings.

K. Item SNV – B-3706-50 (Recessed, Sanitary Napkin / Tampon Vendor, Double Coin Operation)

locate within wall of Women’s Restroom, as indicated on the Drawings. L. Item CH1 – B-212 (Clothes Hook with Bumper) locate one on the back of each toilet partition

door where required for impact protection within Restrooms, as indicated on the Drawings. M. Item CH2 – B-211 (Clothes Hook) locate within Restrooms, as indicated on the Drawings.

N. Item RHS – B-6777 / B-683 (Multiple Robe & Towel Hooks / with 24-inch long Surface

Mounted Shelf above) locate one shelf with four (4) satin robe & towel hooks equally spaced directly below, within Restrooms and Locker Rooms as indicated on the Drawings.

O. Item US – B-239 (34-inch long SS Utility Shelf with three (3) Mop/Broom Holders and four (4)

Rag Hooks) locate one unit above the mop sink inside each Janitor’s Closet, and where indicated on the Drawings.



P. Item CTN – B-6047 / B-204-3 / B-204-1 (Extra Heavy-Duty 60” SS Shower Curtain Rod with Square end flanges / 70” wide by 72” high Vinyl Shower Curtain / 12 Shower Curtain Hooks) Provide one curtain and associated rod assembly at each shower stall within Locker Rooms, as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 ACCESSIBLE SINK PROTECTION

A. Item PG – Model 102E-Z as manufactured by Truebro, Inc., or approved equal. Provide ADA compliant protective covers for all exposed under sink piping. Provide one (1) P-Trap protective cover and two (2) angle valve and supply covers minimum at each Restroom sink location. Color shall be white, as approved by the Engineer, and all protective covers shall be fabricated from flexible, anti-microbial vinyl.


A. Installation is included in Division 15 but work shall be performed as specified below.

B. Coordinate the rough opening size and location of masonry recesses with masonry work. Provide mason with all required rough opening dimensions.

C. Use concealed fastenings where possible or so designed. D. Provide items complete with all escutcheon plates, screws, bolts, and/or anchoring devices as

required for a proper and complete installation.

E. Attach accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed.

F. Mounting height for accessories used by handicapped occupants shall conform to all of the applicable Building Code and/or ADA accessibility requirements.

G. Where required, install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated from the same

material as the accessory, or if galvanized steel, as recommended by the Manufacturer.

H. Install any exposed mounting devices using fasteners that are finished to match the accessories.

I. Provide theft-resistant type fasteners for the mounting of all accessories.

J. Installation of all accessories with electrical components shall comply with NEC and all electrical

requirements included in Division 16.

K. Secure toilet and shower accessories in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions for each item and for each type of substrate construction.

END OF SECTION


111119-81700 11000-1 August 5, 2013 Joint Operations Facility Phase 1 ISSUE FOR RE-BID

SECTION 11000

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following Equipment Schedule provides information on equipment shown on the equipment drawings. Drawings and detailed specifications shall govern if different from schedule. Equipment is listed numerically by mark number with the following information:

1. Mark # - All identical equipment items are assigned the same number. The Equipment Mark Number coordinates this schedule with the Equipment Layout Drawings (See Sheets EQ-1 and EQ-2) and the specifications.

2. Item Description.

3. Spec Section - Identifies division or section where technical specifications for the equipment item can be found. NIC means "Not in Contract".

4. Procurement Method

1. CF/CI = Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed.

2. OF/OI = Owner Furnished/Owner Installed.

3. OF/CI = Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed.

5. Submittals - Identifies type(s) of submittals required. Specific submittal requirements delineated in specification sections take precedence over this attached schedule.

1. PD = Product Data

2. SD = Shop Drawings

3. OM = Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. T = Training of Owner's personnel on specific equipment items

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Mark No. Item Description Spec Proc. Submittals . Section Meth.


BP115 Lift, man, vertical mast NIC OF/OI

BP622 Booth, paint, bus/ truck, downdraft 11501 CF/CI SD, PD, OM, T

BP952 Shaker, paint, industrial, air operated 11501 CF/CI PD, OM, T

BP976 Washer, paint spray equipment 11900 OF/CI

CW500 Washer, hi-pressure, manual w/ detail guns 11510 CF/CI SD, PD, OM, T

FF402 Tank, storage, cube, 1,000 gallon 11900 OF/CI (ATF, EO, EC, GO, WO)

LC251 Drop, utility, trapeze, w/ data 11515 CF/CI SD, PD, T

LC304 Pump, air piston (ATF, EO, GO) 15232 CF/CI

LC307 Pump, air piston (CG), w/hoist 11900 OF/CI

LC324 Pump, diaphragm, (WWS) 15232 CF/CI PD, OM, T

LC324a Pump, diaphragm, (WO) 15232 CF/CI PD, OM, T

LC327 Pump, diaphragm, (EC) 15232 CF/CI PD, OM, T

LC420 Reel bank (CG, WWS) 11900 OF/CI

LC450 Reel bank (ATF, CG, EC, EO, GO) 11900 OF/CI

SE101 Eyewash, wall-mounted, portable NIC OF/OI

SE902 Shower, drench, w/ eyewash CF/CI

SH100 Vise, combination, swivel base, 5" NIC OF/OI

SH212 Buffer/grinder, 8", w/ pedestal 11510 CF/CI

SH237 Drill press, 20", variable speed 11510 CF/CI

SH255 Press, 50 Ton, electric/ hydraulic 11900 OF/CI

SH291 Tank, parts cleaning, medium 11510 CF/CI

SI300 Fuel management system 13140 CF/CI PD, SD, OM, T

ST010 Bin unit, common, 66 opening NIC OF/OI

ST035 Cabinet, drawer, 59 inch NIC OF/OI

ST057 Cabinet, flammable materials, large NIC OF/OI

ST062 Cabinet, storage, shop NIC OF/OI

ST084 Ladder, safety, rolling, 15 step NIC OF/OI

ST094 Rack, arm, single face, heavy duty NIC OF/OI

ST106 Rack, bulk storage, w/ deck NIC OF/OI

ST120 Rack, pallet, w/ deck, 8 ft NIC OF/OI

ST165 Shelving unit, 18" NIC OF/OI

ST350 Workbench, heavy duty 11515 CF/CI SD

VL405 Lift, inground, modular, axle, adjustable, 2 post 14450 CF/CI SD, PD, OM, T

VL703F Lift, drive-on, flush mount, 50,000 lbs., 32 ft. 14450 CF/CI SD, PD, OM, T

Mark No. Item Description Spec Proc. Submittals . Section Meth.


VL703Fa Lift, drive-on, flush mount, 50,000 lbs., 32 ft. 14450 CF/CI SD, PD, OM, T

WF150 Table, welding, downdraft, 4'x4' 11510 CF/CI PD, OM, T

WH122 Hopper, self-dumping, 2 yard, w/ casters NIC OF/OI

XE100 Ladder, safety, rolling, 15 step NIC OF/OI



SECTION 11301 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete oil/water

separators ready for operation and with all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork is included in Division 2. B. Concrete work is included in Division 3. C. Mechanical piping, valves, pipe hangars and supports are included in Division 15. D. Electrical work is included in Division 16. (Note: Explosion-proof equipment required for

gasoline products and other low flash point fluids.) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, shop drawings and

product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details for the oil/water separator, fittings and appurtenances provided. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Statement of Qualifications. 3. Buoyancy Calculations. 4. Shell Thickness Calculations. 5. Warrantees. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The oil/water separator shall be designed in accordance with Stokes Law and the American

Petroleum Institute (API) Publication 421, “Monographs of Refinery Environmental Control – Management of Water Discharges; Design and Operation of Oil/Water Separators”.

B. The oil/water separator shall be constructed in strict accordance with Underwriter Laboratories

Subject UL-58 Standard for Safety, Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. The separator corrosion control system shall be in strict accordance with the Steel Tank Institute, ACT-100-U.



C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A285 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and

Intermediate- Tensile Strength 3. ASTM A515 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for

Intermediate- and Higher- Temperature Service 4. ASTM D2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass- Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe D. Oil/water separator construction shall comply with requirements of National Fire Protection

Association, NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The separator shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable,

and qualified in the design and manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The oil/water separator shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the best practices and methods.

B. A list of references shall be furnished including, but not limited to, arrangement drawings,

names, addresses and telephone numbers of locations where units have been successfully employed.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Each oil/water separator shall be of cylindrical, horizontal, atmospheric-type, double-wall steel

vessel intended for the separation and storage of flammable and combustible liquids. The separator shall consist of three compartments: an interceptor/distributor chamber, a separating chamber and an outlet chamber. The oil/water separator tank and access port manhole covers shall be capable of withstanding HS-20 traffic loading.

B. The oil/water separator will treat the oil and water flow from the floor drain system and bus

wash effluent. The water effluent will be fed to the sanitary sewer. The natant oil will be transferred to an oil collection tanker truck.

C. Design flow rates shall be for maximum of 100 gpm with a total separator volume of 1,000

gallons and an oil capacity of 500 gallons. The separator shall remove oil globules of 20 microns or smaller and reduce effluent concentrations to 10 mg/l oil and grease. Refer to drawing notes for model size at each location.



1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The manufacturer shall package the equipment to prevent normal transit and handling damage to

the separator. B. Flange faces and other protruding fittings or attachments shall be protected from damage. C. All openings shall be covered to prevent entrance of dirt, water and debris. D. The separator shall be equipped with lifting lugs to permit handling by crane. Fittings shall not

be used for lifting. E. The separator shall be carefully handled as directed in the unloading and installation instructions

provided by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The oil/water separator shall consist of inlet and outlet connections, non-clogging flow

distributor and energy dissipator device, stationary baffles, oil coalescing chamber with a parallel corrugated plate coalescer, a sectional removable polypropylene impingement coalescer, effluent downcomer pipe, access for each chamber, fittings for vent, oil pump out, sampling, gauging and lifting lugs.

B. The oil/water separator shall be standard prefabricated inclined parallel-corrugated plate special

purpose displacement type gravity separator designed for intermittent and variable flows of water, oil or any combination of non-emulsified oil-water mixtures. The separator shall accommodate uncontrolled surges of water, oil or non-emulsified oil-water mixtures ranging from zero flow up to one hundred percent of the maximum hydraulic throughput capacity and maintain an acceptable water effluent.

C. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of

establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. Manufacturer shall be Highland Tank Co., Model HTC Double-wall Type I, or approved equal.

D. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to

provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service.

E. Design Criteria 1. The separator tank shell shall be designed to support its own weight, the weight of soil

above at 120 pcf and shall be capable of withstanding a live load equal to an AASHTO HS-20 highway loading or 300 psf (whichever controls) applied to the top slab.

2. All exterior walls of the tank shell shall be designed for an equivalent fluid pressure of 60

lbs/sq ft. Structure shall be designed to resist buoyant uplift forces with a factor of safety of not less than 1.15. The top of the pressure diagram shall be assumed to originate at



finished ground level. Additional lateral pressure from approaching truck wheels and/or 300 psf surcharge (whichever controls) shall be considered in accordance with AASHTO.

2.02 MATERIALS A. The oil/water separator and compartments shall be fabricated of ASTM A285, Grade C, ASTM

A515 or ASTM A36 steel with all seams welded. Minimum shell and head thickness shall be 7 ga. for interior and 10 ga. for exterior.

B. Tank and compartments shall be coated inside and outside with DFT polyurethane, a high

performance coating for service with oils, water, saltwater and underground service. Coating shall have a 70 mil thickness for external surfaces and 10 mil thickness for internal surfaces.

C. Corrosion Protection System shall consist of isolation spool pieces, di-electric isolation gaskets

and bushings, external DFT polyurethane coating and manufacturer’s warranty. 2.03 INLET A. The invert of the separator inlet shall be above the operating surface level of the separator to

provide positive gravity drainage to the inlet pipe. The inlet shall be 6-in diameter steel pipe with a flange connection.

2.04 INTERCEPTOR/DISTRIBUTOR CHAMBER A. The interceptor/distributor chamber shall distribute the flow in an even manner across the width

of the separator and reduce the velocity to produce laminar flow conditions. B. Stationary baffles shall be installed for under flow and solids retention. 2.05 SEPARATING CHAMBER A. The separating chamber shall be properly sized and engineered to the performance requirements

in Paragraph 1.06C above. B. Separator coalescer shall be a series of parallel plates stacked upwards at a 45 degree angle and

spaced 3/4-in apart. Arrangement shall be designed to prevent fouling by debris and gummy solids. The coalescer shall intercept flow from the interceptor/distributor chamber to the separating chamber. The parallel plates shall be removable as one integral unit.

C. Impingement coalescer shall be designed to intercept oil globules of less than 20 microns in

diameter and shall be configured to be sectionalized, removable and polyethylene media. 2.06 OIL REMOVAL SYSTEM (ALARM PANEL AND LEVEL SENSOR) A. Each separator shall be supplied with an audible and visual alarm system that indicates HI oil

level (visual only) and HI HI oil level (audible and visual) of oil storage in the oil/water separator. An audible and visual leak detection alarm system that indicates hydrocarbon and/or water in the interstice shall be provided. A silence control shall be provided for the audible alarms. Level sensor(s) to be intrinsically safe. Level sensor floats to be made of stainless steel.



The control panel shall contain both level sensor and leak detection control and shall be NEMA 4. Power to the control panel is to be 120 VAC, single phase.

2.07 OUTLET A. The treated water shall flow to the furthest point from the inlet, at the most quiescent zone of the

separator. The effluent pipe extension shall be a vertical pipe extending just above the separator floor about 3-in off the floor to the outlet located 6-in below the top of the separator. The outlet pipe shall be a 6-in steel pipe with a flange connection.

2.08 CERTIFICATION A. Manufacturer shall certify that at 100 percent of maximum hydraulic throughput the water

effluent shall contain 10 ppm oil and grease or less. 2.09 ACCESS PORTS A. Two (2) 24-in diameter manholes capable of withstanding HS-20 traffic loading, UL approved,

complete with an extension (length to be field verified by contractor), cover, gasket, and bolts. One manway shall be placed between the inlet and the parallel-corrugated plate coalescer to facilitate access into sediment chamber for solids removal. One manway shall be placed between the parallel-corrugated plate coalescer and outlet to facilitate access into the oil water separation chamber for oil removal and removal of the sectional impingement coalescers. General Contractor to add extensions as necessary to bring access ports to grade.

2.10 HOLD-DOWN STRAPS AND CONCRETE PAD A. Separator shall be supplied with Nylon Hold-down straps. Straps to be doweled into reinforced

concrete base, cast-in-place concrete and reinforcement per Division 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The oil/water separator shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. 3.02 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

A. The separator shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at the factory by filling with water. The separator shall be checked for leaks after the unit has been filled for at least 1 hour.

3.03 FIELD TESTING

A. Prior to start-up, the oil/water separator shall be inspected for proper alignment and proper connections. The tank shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks by filling with water after installation. After testing the tank shall be drained and cleaned before use. No testing shall be performed until the manufacturer's service engineer has provided written certification that the



installed oil/water separator has been examined and found to be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

B. Performance tests shall be conducted on the water effluent to verify that it conforms to the

effluent concentration limitation for oil and grease established in Paragraph 1.06C above. Two 24-hour composite samples shall be collected and analyzed for oil and grease in accordance with EPA, Method 418.1.

3.04 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship

for a period of one year from substantial completion. The warranty shall be limited to repair or replacement of the defective part(s). Steel tank shall have a 30-year limited warranty for corrosion and structural defects.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11396

DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to: 1. Furnish, install, and place in operation one diesel engine driven generator unit installed in a

weatherproof, skin tight, sound attenuating enclosure with double containment sub-base fuel storage tank sized for a minimum of 48 hours of continuous full load operation, including appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

2. Furnish installation assistance, start-up operation, field testing, operator training, operation

and maintenance manuals, and first year service contract.

B. The unit shall have a standby power rating (site rated) of 1500 kW (1875 kVA), at 80 percent lagging power factor with 480 Volt, three phase, 60 Hertz output. The alternator shall be three wire, wye connected, neutral grounded, complete with excitation system and controls. Mount the unit on a steel sub-base, with emergency E-stop, and all essential and desirable appurtenances whether specifically mentioned in this specification or not.

C. Arrange the unit for automatic starting and stopping and load transfer upon failure of the normal

source of power. Parallel operation with the Power Company is not required. Transfer to and from plant load will be open transition transfer.

D. All equipment and controls specified in this Section shall be new and be considered part of the

generator package. The generator manufacturer or his/her licensee shall be responsible for furnishing the package in its entirety as specified herein. External wiring connections to the generator set shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. The generator package shall be complete in all respects and shall include all equipment and controls necessary for a fully operational standby power supply.

E. Furnish equipment under this Section including; but not limited to the following:

1. Diesel engine with attached alternator. 2. Unit mounted radiator with engine driven fan, for cooling of the engine jacket water,

lubricating oil cooler, and after-cooler, including engine mounted and engine driven circulating pump(s).

3. Exhaust system including critical silencer mounted inside the enclosure, flexible

connection, exhaust pipe, pipe supports, and insulation. 4. Fuel supply system including fuel pump, fuel supply and return piping between the engine

and the double wall sub-base fuel tank, fuel filters, priming pump, and appurtenances.



5. Skid mounted factory piping, wiring and valves. 6. Flexible connectors and/or expansion joints. 7. Combination engine/alternator control panel wired, tested and shock mounted at the

alternator end of the unit. 8. Engine mounted electric starter with starting batteries and battery charger. 9. Two generator main circuit breakers 10. Generator structural base. 11. Weatherproof, sound attenuating, aluminum skin tight enclosure for outdoor installation of

the generator unit, incorporating a circuit breaker load center for interior electrical loads, and lighting and receptacles.

12. Spare parts and special tools.

F. Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative during installation, pre-start-up inspection, set-up, start-up, testing, and training of the Owner’s personnel, and for preventive maintenance as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The concrete foundation is included in Division 3. B. Access stair and platform are included in Division 5. C. Instrumentation is included in Division 13. D. Automatic transfer switching circuit breakers are included in Division 16.

E. Field electric wiring and connections are included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, complete sets of shop drawings and product data, including the following:

1. Shop drawings, catalog cuts, brochures, and other materials required to completely describe

the systems and equipment being furnished.

2. Complete assembly drawings with identification, description and dimensions for each separately installed sub-assembly or piece of equipment and associated piping connection schematics.

3. Foundation drawings, indicating size and location of anchor bolts.

4. Performance specifications of all items of equipment.



5. Control panel layout drawings showing interior and exterior views, dimensions, paint finish

specifications, and component bill of materials.

6. Internal electrical, instrumentation, and control wiring diagrams including connections to external systems and equipment.

7. Identification of all field wiring connections to external systems and equipment, including

numbered terminal strip identification. 8. Details of the engine exhaust system including pipe and insulation materials; pipe layout;

and the make, model, size, the attenuation curve, and operating back pressure for the silencing equipment as offered to accomplish the specified silencing for this installation.

9. Details of the main generator circuit breaker showing location, dimensions, ratings, and

enclosure details. 10. A frequency band noise analysis for the proposed generator set showing separate analyses

for engine exhaust noise and for engine mechanical noise including the radiator fan, in dbA at 50 ft distance from the generator set.

11. Details of the proposed battery charger and starting batteries, including cold cranking amps

and ampere hour rating.

12. Details of the proposed jacket water treatment. 13. Description of the weather protected, skin tight, sound attenuating enclosure, including

dimensions, materials of construction, methods of construction and standards, description of all accessories and components, schematic enclosure interior wiring diagrams, color selection charts of available colors, and a statement of certification of the overall noise level in accordance with Paragraph 1.08G.

14. Description of the proposed sub-base fuel tank including dimensions, capacity, materials,

code rating, locations of fittings and accessories, fuel pumps, and details of the fuel tank monitoring system.

15. Alternator rating data sheet showing the alternator output rating, efficiency, and

temperature rise. 16. Load analysis, utilizing the loads as specified herein, to demonstrate that the proposed unit

will start and carry the specified loads. 17. Summary of engine efficiency and emissions data including exhaust temperature, flow rate,

brake specific fuel consumption, and emissions rates of nitrous oxides, carbon monoxide, VOC’s, and particulates stated in grams/bhp-hr, when operating at rated standby load.

18. Statement of certification of engine emissions in conformance with the applicable EPA

Emissions Tier Designation in effect at the time of start-up of the equipment on the site. 19. Certification that the torsional mass-elastic analysis specified herein has been performed.



20. Certification of prototype testing of the unit. 21. Four copies of the manufacturer’s certified shop test record of the complete engine driven

generator unit, in accordance with Paragraph 2.11. The final test record shall show the generator set performance as specified in Paragraphs 1.01B and 1.06A.

22. Draft copy of the written service contract specified in Paragraph 1.05.

23. Draft copies of the warranties for the generator, enclosure, and fuel tank base as specified

in Paragraph 1.10. 24. Description of and reasons for any deviations from the specification as written.

B. Use the following format for submitting data for approval:

1. Engine Data

a. Manufacturer

b. Model

c. Number and arrangement of cylinders

d. RPM

e. Displacement (cu in)

f. Bore x stroke (in)

g. Maximum power at rated RPM h. Aspiration i. Brake Mean Effective Pressure (BMEP) at rated kW (including any parasitic loads and

generator efficiency) (psi)

j. Piston speed (fpm)

k. Make and model of governor

l. Make and model of over speed shutdown device.

m. Maximum allowable engine exhaust back pressure (inches H2O)

n. Engine cold cranking amps o. Brake specific fuel consumption at standby rating (BTU/bhp-hr)



2. Alternator Data

a. Manufacturer

b. Model

c. Rated kVA

d. Rated kW

e. Voltage

f. Rated amperes g. Power factor h. Temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient

1) Stator by thermometer (degrees C)

2) Field by resistance (degrees C)

i. Class of insulation

j. Alternator efficiency including excitation losses and at 80 percent power factor

1) Full load (percent)

2) Three-quarters load (percent)

3) Half load (percent)

k. Subtransient reactance (xd”) (per unit) or (ohms)

3. Guaranteed fuel consumption rate (at alternator terminals at 138,000 BTU/gallon)

a. Full load (gal/hr)

b. Three-quarters load (gal/hr)

c. Half load (gal/hr) 4. Generator unit and accessories

a. Weight of skid mounted generator set (lbs)

b. Weight of complete assembled enclosure including the housing, generator, fuel tank,

and silencer (lbs)

c. Overall length of generator set (ft)



d. Overall length of enclosure base (ft)

e. Overall width of generator set (ft)

f. Overall width of enclosure base (ft)

g. Overall height of generator set (ft)

h. Overall height of enclosure (ft)

i. Exhaust pipe size (inches)

5. Exhaust gas emission data at standby rating:

a. Temperature (degrees F)

b. Flow (ACFM)

c. Carbon Monoxide (CO) (grams/BHP-hr)

d. Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) (grams/BHP-hr)

e. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) (grams/BHP-hr)

f. Particulates (grams/BHP-hr) g. Design EPA Tier Designation

6. Heat rejected to enclosure

a. Engine: (BTU/min) b. Alternator: (BTU/min)

7. Heat rejected to jacket water including lubricating oil and aftercooler (BTU/min)

8. Height from bottom of skid required for removing piston with connecting rod; (also for

removing cylinder liner) (ft)

9. Radiator fan cooling air volume (CFM) 10. Radiator fan static pressure rise (inches H2O)

11. Radiator fan horsepower (hp)

12. Combustion air volume (CFM). 13. Nominal ampere hour and cold cranking ampere rating of the engine starting batteries.1.04




A. Design, manufacture, and assembly of elements of the equipment herein specified shall be in accordance with but not limited to published standards of the following, as applicable:

1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)

2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

5. American Petroleum Institute (API)

6. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

7. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

8. American Welding Society (AWS)

9. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA)

10. British Standards Institution (BS)

11. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

12. Deutsches Institut Fuer Normung (DIN) (German Institute for Standards)

13. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corp. (FM)

14. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

15. Instrument Society of America (ISA)

16. International Standards Organization (ISO) 17. National Electrical Code (NEC)

18. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

20. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

21. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)

22. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

23. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)



24. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Building Code

B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid


A. The engine driven generator set shall be the standard product, as modified by these specifications, of a single manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of equipment and having satisfactory experience in supplying units as herein specified. Build the unit from components that have proven compatibility, reliability and are coordinated and prototype tested to operate as a unit. Design, build, deliver, and field test the unit in accordance with the best practices and methods. The manufacturer shall maintain a permanent organization and supply of spare parts within 100 miles of the project site.

B. Design and build the unit in accordance with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby

Power Systems, Level 2, Type 60; NFPA 37, Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines; NEC 701, Legally Required Standby Systems; and UL 2200, Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; except as modified by these Specifications.

C. The load on the standby generator will consist of up to 1000 kW of motor load.

D. Certify engine exhaust emissions in compliance with the applicable EPA Tier Designation

Emissions Standards under the provisions of 40 CFR 89, Non-Road (Stationary Mobile Off Highway Compression Ignition Engines) when tested per ISO 8178-D2 Emissions Cycle at specified ekW/bHP rating at the time of on-site installation/commissioning.

E. Should equipment that differs from the equipment described in this Section be offered and

determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the design and/or construction of the structure, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc., required to accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner and be as approved by the Engineer. Modifications required to accommodate product substitutions shall not extend the contract time.

F. Design and build the generator unit for standby service at all points within the specified range of

operation, without overheating or excessive vibration or strain. The generator shall require only that degree of maintenance generally accepted as applicable to the specific type of equipment. Design and build all parts for interchangeability so that replacement parts may be installed without additional fitting or machining.

G. Components of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be the products of manufacturers who

can produce evidence of their ability to promptly furnish interchangeable replacement parts as may be needed at any time within the expected life of the equipment.

H. The manufacturer shall have testing facilities adequate for performing the shop tests and

inspections specified herein. Submit a description of the manufacturer's testing facilities. The descriptive matter shall contain illustrative photographs, drawings and such other matter as may be requested.



I. Services of Manufacturer's Representative: See Specification 16000

J. Provide to the Owner, at the time of acceptance of the unit, a written one year manufacturer's service contract for the diesel engine driven generator and support systems as furnished, commencing on the date of acceptance of the unit. Include all costs associated with the service contract in the price bid and furnish a copy of this contract to the Owner at the time of acceptance. This service contract does not supersede or replace the manufacturer's equipment warranty as specified herein.

1. The contract shall include inspections of the installation and performance of the

manufacturer's recommended preventive maintenance to assure the safe and dependable operation of the standby power system throughout the first year of operation for standby service with up to 300 hours per year of operation.

2. The preventive maintenance shall include all maintenance service at the recommended

service intervals as published in the manufacturer’s literature, and as required to maintain the equipment warranty in full effect. The service contract shall include not less than one service at the end of the first year of operation, which shall include, but not be limited to: sample and analyze lubricating oil; change lubricating oil and filters; clean/replace air filters; sample and analyze coolant; clean/replace coolant filters; check coolant level and condition; replace fuel filters; inspect fuel injection system; check heaters; inspect fuel supply system, exhaust system, and starting batteries and battery charger; check and adjust output voltage and frequency; and operate unit to confirm proper operation.

1.06 UNIT PERFORMANCE

A. The facility load (Phases I and II) consists of total running load of up to approximately 1322 kW/1653 kVA.

1. The first load tier includes miscellaneous motors up to 25 hp started across the line,

lighting, resistance heating, and UPS loads. Total running loads approximating resistive characteristics are up to 80 kW/100 kVA. Total motor running loads are 670 kW/838 kVA. These loads will be sequenced on to limit the inrush to 1200kW/1500kW at any time.

2. The second tier load includes up to two (2) 300 Hp compressor motors running with one

starting at a time, all operating on electronic reduced voltage starters. When all pumps run together (maximum power demand), the 300 Hp motors will draw a maximum load of 270 bHp (216 kW). Motors will be step started one at a time, controlled by the SCADA system. Total second tier running load is estimated to be 572 kW/715 kVA. The generator shall be guaranteed capable of starting and carrying the above referenced load for the duration of the utility power failure, and with a rating of 1500 kW/ 1875 kVA.

3. Provide an oversized alternator or enhanced voltage regulator as required to account for the

harmonics from the non-linear loads and motor starting loads. Design the generator set and all of its components to provide stable operation under all operating conditions that the plant load may impose.

B. Under steady load conditions, from zero load to full-rated load, voltage regulation shall be

within plus or minus one half percent, and frequency regulation shall be within plus or minus 0.25 percent (0.15 Hz). Upon application or removal of full- rated load (resistive) in one step,



the transient voltage dip or overshoot shall not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage and recovery to steady state operation shall be within ten seconds.


A. Ship equipment, material and spare parts complete except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection of components.

B. Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and pieces of

equipment for which intended.

C. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be coated, wrapped and otherwise protected from snow, rain, drippings of any sort, dust, dirt, mud, flood and condensed water vapor during shipment and while installed in place during construction. The protective coverings shall remain in place until the work areas are substantially free of all construction dust and debris. Full details of proposed protective measures shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer prior to shipment. Alternator space heater shall be energized at all times during storage.

D. Pack and crate all equipment for shipment and provide treatment for long periods of storage

before use in a temperate climate. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. House the complete generator unit for outdoor operation and include all items and equipment required for unattended automatic operation. Arrange the unit for positive and successful quick starting at a minus 10 degrees F ambient temperature.

B. Factory assemble the complete generator unit with enclosure and all accessories as specified

herein, ready for installation on a concrete foundation with available connections for electric service. The unit shall not require field assembly.

C. Install the generator unit within a skin tight weatherproof sound attenuating enclosure for

outdoor mounting. The enclosure shall have adequate provision for ventilation to limit the maximum summertime temperature within the enclosure to the maximum allowable operating temperature of the equipment, considering full-load engine/alternator heat rejection and 104 degrees F outdoor ambient. All equipment furnished under this Section and intended for installation within the generator enclosure shall be designed for operation in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F plus the temperature rise that will occur within the enclosure either during generator operation, or when the generator is on standby. The altitude at the project site will not be in excess of 500 feet above sea level.

D. The heat sink for rejection of heat from the engine jacket and lube oil cooler shall be a unit

mounted radiator. Provide a separate circuit radiator cooled or charge air cooled aftercooler. Provide for all cooling utilizing an engine mounted and engine driven fan to discharge air past the aftercooler and/or through the radiator, and through a louver to outdoors. Design the aftercooler, radiator and engine fan to dissipate all required heat loads with the generator running at full rated output and with 104 degree F ambient outdoor air. No other source of cooling is available or will be permitted.



E. Provide electric resistance heaters for the engine jacket, starting batteries, and alternator to maintain warmth within the equipment as an aid to starting, to minimize warm-up time, and reduce condensation within the equipment.

F. Design all structure, supports, and anchors for the generator unit for all gravity loads, dynamic

loads, and seismic forces. G. The generator unit within the enclosure, in combination with the engine critical exhaust silencer,

with the generator in operation at full load, shall have a sound pressure level of not more than 65 dbA measured at a distance of 50 feet from the enclosure in any direction. There shall be no pure tone. The generator unit manufacturer shall choose the engine exhaust silencer and the sound attenuating properties of the enclosure to meet these criteria.

H. Space and grading limitations at the proposed site of installation of the generator enclosure

impose limitations upon the dimensions of the enclosure to not exceed 528 inches overall length and 144 inches overall width.

I. Provide stationary or mobile access for the generator enclosure to allow for all authorized

personnel to service the generator and its appurtenances in a manner that complies with the NEC and OSHA standards. Bus clearances and bus traffic shall not be infringed when the method of access is in place.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Special Tools and Spare Parts

1. Furnish one set of all special tools that are recommended by the manufacturer for the normal operation and maintenance of the engine driven generator unit.

2. Furnish the following spare parts:

a. Air filter elements for one complete replacement.

b. Lube oil filter elements for one complete replacement.

c. Fuel filter elements for one complete replacement.

d. Coolant filter elements for one complete replacement. e. One set of fuses including one of each different size and type.

f. One complete change of lube oil plus one gallon of make-up lube oil supplied in

unopened containers.

g. One complete change of ethylene glycol anti-freeze solution to provide a 50 percent solution in the engine cooling system supplied in unopened containers.

h. One anti-freeze test hydrometer.

i. One battery test hydrometer.



3. The spare parts and maintenance tools shall be packed in containers, permanently labeled

by word and part number for easy identification each item and with the words "For Use Only for the Diesel Engine Generator Unit" and properly packed for an extended period of storage before use.

B. Furnish to the Engineer four complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions covering

all equipment furnished under this Section in accordance with Section 01730. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. Include parts lists and parts prices current to the date of submittal, and information relevant to parts supply and ordering. Furnish this information in time for review and approval prior to start-up and site testing of the unit.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Furnish a written two-year extended comprehensive warranty from the equipment supplier(s), written to the Owner, for the generator, enclosure, and fuel tank. The warranties shall extend from the date of acceptance of the equipment and shall include all parts, labor, and transportation for correcting/replacing any manufacturing defects in components of the equipment as furnished.

1. Base the warranty for the generator upon standby use for up to 300 hours per year of

operation. 2. The warranty for the enclosure shall be for manufacturing defects. 3. The warranty for the fuel tank shall be for manufacturing defects which result in structural

deficiencies in the tank or leakage of the primary or containment tanks for any reason other than intentional misuse.

B. Submit draft statements of warranty to the Engineer as part of the submittals package for the

generator, enclosure, and fuel tank. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The diesel engine driven generator set shall be a factory assembled unit as manufactured by Caterpillar, Cummins, Kohler, MTU, or equal.

B. The engine and alternator shall be directly connected with a semi-flexible steel coupling and

shall be mounted on a heavy steel sub-base. Units offered at ratings in excess of their published ratings are not acceptable and will not be approved.

C. The unit shall operate at a rotative speed of not more than 1800 rpm. The engine and alternator

shall be directly connected and shall operate at the same rotative speed. The use of gearing or other speed adjustment between the engine and the alternator, such that the engine and alternator operate at different rotative speeds will not be allowed.



D. The generator set shall be pre-piped and pre-wired. Provide separate pre-wired terminal boxes on the generator skid for A.C. and D.C. wiring. All wiring terminations for connection to field wiring shall be within terminal boxes with numbered terminal strips.

E. The generator set shall be rigid, neat in appearance and shall allow easy access to all parts for

maintenance purposes. Enclose all parts to prevent the throwing or dripping of oil. F. The complete generator unit shall be free from harmful torsional or other vibration throughout

the entire operating load range. The generator manufacturer shall make, or have made, the mass-elastic system analysis of the complete engine-alternator unit. Submit a certification statement that the analysis has been performed, and no harmful vibration will occur during normal operation at any loading condition.

2.02 ENGINE

A. The diesel engine shall operate on ultra-low sulfur No. 2 diesel fuel (ASTM D975). A diesel engine requiring a premium fuel will not be considered. The engine shall be four stroke cycle, turbo-charged with separate circuit or charge air cooled aftercooler, full compression ignition. The engine shall develop its full power output rating including alternator output, alternator efficiency, radiator fan power, and other miscellaneous parasitic loads at a brake mean effective pressure (BMEP) not to exceed 355 psi. The piston speed shall not exceed 2100 feet per minute.

B. The rating of the engine shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published standby rating. The gross

engine horsepower required to produce the standby rating shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published continuous duty rating by more than 130 percent. Continuous duty rating shall be as defined in BS649 or DIN 6270 but in no case shall it exceed the manufacturer’s published continuous duty rating. The gross engine horsepower required for the generator set standby rating described above shall include all parasitic demands such as alternator inefficiencies, fan, fuel pumps, water pumps, and all accessories necessary to the unit’s proper operation while operating at rated load.

C. The engine shall incorporate individual electronically controlled unit injectors for each cylinder,

which combine the electronic actuator, pump assembly, and nozzle into a single unit, to provide precise metering and timing of fuel delivery into each cylinder.

D. Design the engine and electronic injection control system to limit the exhaust emissions of the

engine to comply with EPA Tier 2 Designation Emissions Standards under the provisions of 40 CFR 89, Non-Road Stationary Compression Ignition Internal Combustion Engines when tested per ISO 8178-D2 Emissions Cycle, and without further exhaust emissions control measures external to the engine.

E. The engine shall have removable wet-type cylinder liners of close grained alloy steel, heat

treated for proper hardness as required for maximum cylinder life. The engine block shall be a one piece stress relieved gray iron casting.

F. Engine model shall be KTA50-G9 with P744E Alternator or equivalent.

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Governor



1. Control of engine speed shall be through electronic control of the individual unit injectors

in response to engine speed, load, and engine operating parameters. Locate the electronic governor in the generator control panel, powered by 24 volts dc from the engine starting batteries. House the governor in an environmentally sealed module that obtains engine operating information from sensors mounted on the engine. The control shall be adjustable and programmable through service software. The control shall provide for isochronous regulation from no load to full rated load within 0.25 percent of rated frequency. The control shall provide control to the unit injectors for fuel injection timing and limiting, idle/rated speed setting, programmable speed acceleration ramp rate, and adjustable cool down duration.

2. Furnish a separate overspeed shutdown device that shall, in case of predetermined

overspeed or the operation of various protective devices as later specified, instantly stop the engine without the fuel injection system losing its prime.

B. Supporting Structure

1. Mount the diesel engine, radiator, and alternator on a rigid, welded, fabricated steel base,

sized to maintain the correct alignment of all system components. The base shall extend under the entire length of the engine, alternator, and radiator, and shall fully support each outboard end of the engine-alternator assembly. Fabricate the base of steel I-beam or box section, braced and reinforced as required to maintain alignment between the engine and the alternator. Mount the engine-alternator assembly on the base utilizing rubber pad type vibration isolators and felt washers. Mount the engine radiator separately on the base, independent of the engine-alternator assembly.

2. Shop prime and finish paint all exposed surfaces of the structural steel members of the

fabricated base frame in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard practice. 3. Design the engine-alternator mountings and supports and anchorage to support the

equipment gravity loads, dynamic loads, and seismic forces and shall conform to applicable requirements of the State Building Code.

2.04 SYSTEMS

A. Fuel System

1. The fuel storage tank shall be furnished as part of the generator set enclosure as specified herein.

2. The engine fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter and a water separator, replaceable

element type fuel oil filters, integral fuel supply pump, manually operated priming pump, flexible connectors for both fuel supply and return piping and a solenoid fuel shut off. Fuel filters shall be duplex replaceable element type fuel oil filters, Aquacon Model AC21005, or equal, including cartridge filter for water separation. All fuel filters shall be conveniently located in one accessible housing, ahead of the injection pumps so that the fuel will have been thoroughly filtered before it reaches the injection pump. Fuel filter elements shall be for nominal 10 micron particles and shall be replaceable and easily removable from their housing for replacing without breaking any fuel line connection, or



disturbing the fuel pump, or any other part of the engine. Provide a 2-in diameter differential pressure gauge with 0 to 15 psig scale installed across the fuel filters. No screens or filters requiring cleaning or replacement shall be used in the injection pump or injection valve assemblies. The built-in gear-type engine driven fuel supply pump shall be capable of transferring fuel from the fuel tank and supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure. The excess fuel supplied to the engine shall be returned to the fuel tank.

3. Furnish a Preferred or equal 1-in size Fusomatic valve in the engine fuel supply pipe

between the fuel tank and the engine fuel supply pump. 4. All fuel piping within the enclosure shall be black steel, ASTM A53, and of a size

recommended by the engine manufacturer.

5. All parts of the fuel system shall be installed in full compliance with OSHA Standard 1910.106 and shall meet the approval of and be installed in accordance with all applicable State and Federal codes, laws and regulations.

B. Electric (Battery) Starting System

1. Provide one engine mounted, solenoid shift electric starter, capable of withstanding four

consecutive continuous cranking periods of 15 seconds duration each separated by 15 seconds rest periods before shutting down completely and sounding the overcrank alarm.

2. The starting batteries shall be low maintenance, permanently sealed, long life, lead acid

type, especially designed for diesel engine cranking service. The batteries shall be of a capacity as recommended by the battery manufacturer for cranking the engine being furnished, for the necessary break-away current, cold cranking amperes, ampere hour capacity, and the spinning current for four consecutive starts of 15 seconds of cranking on each start, or for 60 seconds of continuous cranking without being recharged, with a battery temperature of 45 degrees F and with the SAE 30 oil in the engine maintained at 60 degrees F. The batteries shall be manufactured by Delco; Exide; or equal.

3. Furnish a floor mounted containment type, insulated fiberglass battery box with insulated

battery covers specifically designed for battery service. Design the battery box, supports, and anchors for gravity loads and seismic forces in accordance with the applicable requirements of the State Building Code. Furnish and install battery cables with insulated terminals and connectors for connecting the batteries to the electric starter. Furnish all connectors and hardware, cables, grease, and battery lifting device. All battery post connectors shall be insulated.

4. Furnish a completely automatic battery charger for charging the engine starting batteries.

The charger shall conform to UL 1236 and shall be fully automatic, electronically controlled, solid state, temperature compensating, float/equalize-type, designed for maximum battery service life with minimum battery maintenance. Input power supply shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. The direct current output shall be 10 amperes, with voltage regulated to within one percent with plus or minus ten percent fluctuations of the input voltage and shall be current limited at 120 percent of rated output. The unit shall have automatic voltage sensing automatically determined by the charge state of the battery and reducing to milliamp current on fully charged battery. Accessories shall include a direct



current voltmeter and ammeter (panel type, two percent accuracy), float and equalize controls and indicating light, fused A.C. and D.C. circuits, and A.C. power indicating light. Furnish alarms including A.C. power failure, high D.C. voltage, and low D.C. voltage, and low D.C. current. Alarm conditions shall have individual indicator lights on the face of the charger panel and shall operate a relay for common alarm output for remote transmission of alarm to the generator control panel. Connect the remote alarm to an annunciator point on the generator control panel. The charger shall be as supplied by LaMarche, Nife, Sens, or equal and for the correct voltage for the battery. Charger shall be wall mounted inside the enclosure and factory wired to the load center specified herein. The battery charger shall provide control power to the generator control panel when the generator is not running, with correct voltage and current output to the batteries to provide proper battery charge rate for maximum battery life and control panel power requirements.

5. Provide an engine driven automatic battery charging alternator with transistorized voltage

regulator for power supply to the control panel and engine auxiliaries and to charge the starting batteries when the engine is running.

6. Provide an automatic thermostatically controlled heater rated 120 Volts, single phase, for

the batteries to maintain the battery temperature at a minimum of 50 degrees F when the ambient temperature is minus 10 degrees F. The heater shall automatically shut off when the battery temperature attains 90 degrees F. Heater shall have a standard grounded plug connection, connected to an outlet box located near the starting batteries.

C. Air Intake System

1. Provide dry type combustion air intake filter(s) on the engine to protect working parts of

the engine from dirt and grit. Filter(s) shall be heavy duty, two stage with replaceable type filter elements and service indicators.

D. Lubrication System

1. Provide a full pressure lubricating oil system arranged to lubricate and cool the pistons and to distribute oil to all moving parts of the engine including the turbocharger bearings. The lubrication system shall include full flow filters of the replaceable element type easily accessible for removal and replacement. Provide a spring loaded by-pass valve on the filters as an insurance against stopping of lubricating oil circulation in the event the filters become clogged. Provide a shell and tube type oil cooler and a thermostat controlled automatic temperature regulator. Provide an engine driven positive displacement type lubricating oil circulating pump of capacity to circulate the amount of oil required by the engine and turbocharger lubrication and cooling. Provide a sump type crankcase arrangement of sufficient capacity to suit the requirements of the engine. Provide a drain valve inside the enclosure and pipe the drain to the outside of the enclosure for easy access when draining the engine oil.

2. Locate the oil filters on the engine to provide easy access for removal, to minimize spillage

of oil during filter changes, and to provide for easy clean-up of spilled oil.

3. Provide a coalescing type closed crankcase ventilation filtration system with crankcase emission control filter and crankcase pressure regulator to control crankcase emissions.



Collect filtered contaminants in a reservoir or drain back to the crankcase. Pipe the filtered crankcase exhaust gases to the induction air inlet.

4. All drains and vents shall be ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black steel pipe and threaded fittings.

Provide flexible connectors at all connections of off-skid piping to the engine.



E. Radiator Cooling System

1. The engine shall be radiator cooled utilizing a unit mounted radiator and engine driven fan. The fan and radiator shall be adequate for cooling the unit at full rated load with an outdoor ambient temperature of 104 degrees F, and with the temperature rise inside the enclosure corresponding to the heat given off by the alternator and equipment hot surfaces. A pressurized radiator cap, if used, shall be rated for not more than 6 psi on the cooling system. The radiator shall incorporate flanges for attachment to the exhaust damper. The engine shall utilize two cooling circuits, one for the jacket water and oil cooler, and the second for the aftercooler, which shall connect to separate core segments of the unit mounted radiator. Alternatively, an air-to-air heat exchanger may be located in front of the engine driven fan to serve the aftercooler. The separate cooling circuits shall provide sufficient cooling of the aftercooler circuit for control of engine emissions. Provide a low coolant level switch in the radiator top tank for the jacket water circuit, wired to the low coolant alarm on the generator control panel.

2. A blower or pusher type fan mechanically driven by the engine shall cool the radiator. The

fan shall provide a static pressure rise of not less than 0.5-in of water in addition to the losses through the radiator, to move the required air flow through the intake louver and damper, discharge plenum and louver to provide the cooling required by the unit. Provide guards for fan and belts in accordance with OSHA regulations and UL 2200.

3. Furnish an engine driven centrifugal jacket water pump and an auxiliary aftercooler water

pump (if required), equipped with mechanical seals and capable of circulating the required amounts of coolant through the engine jacket, oil cooler, aftercooler and radiator circuits and circuit piping. The pump(s) shall be direct driven by the engine, or the auxiliary water pump may be belt driven from the engine crank shaft extension. Provide for belt tensioning and alignment, and guards in accordance with OSHA. Provide automatic temperature regulating valves for the coolant circuits to maintain a pre-set temperature without restricting the rates of flow through the engine.

4. Coolant shall be for use in ambient temperatures that may range from minus 10 to 104

degrees F, and shall be a pre-mixed 50 percent ethylene glycol antifreeze solution in accordance with ASTM D-6210, especially formulated for extended life. The coolant shall contain additives as recommended by the engine manufacturer for the prevention of both scale formation and corrosion in the engine water jackets and cooling system components that are in contact with the engine coolant. Coolant with additives shall be as manufactured by the NALCO Chemical Company; Dow Chemical; Aqua Laboratory, or equal. Submit detailed information on the proposed jacket water treatment to the Engineer.

5. Provide thermostatically controlled heater(s) for the engine jacket water system to maintain

not less than 90 degrees F in the engine jacket water to assure quick start and load transfer with an ambient temperature of minus 10 degrees F. Heaters shall incorporate an electric motor driven circulating pump operating on heater power supply, to circulate the coolant through the heater unit and the engine jackets to efficiently maintain warmth in the engine jackets. The heater shall include valves on the coolant inlet and outlet connections, or other means to isolate the heater for servicing of the heating elements, without the need to drain the engine cooling system. Power supply to the heaters shall be 208 Volt, single phase. Provide a UL listed, NEMA 12 control panel, mounted on the heater unit to include controls and contactors for operation of the heater unit. Wire the heater to receive its



energy from the load center furnished in the generator enclosure. Furnish a relay within the generator control panel, actuated by the engine start contact to disconnect the heater when the engine is started. Heater shall have a total rating of not less than 9,000 watts.

6. Provide a drain valve on the cooling system, piped to the exterior of the enclosure for easy

access to drain the cooling system. Drain shall be with Schedule 40 black steel pipe and threaded fittings. Provide flexible connectors at the connection of off-skid piping to the engine.

F. Exhaust System

1. The exhaust silencer shall be as manufactured by Maxim; Donaldson; Nelson, or equal, of

aluminized steel construction, and mounted and piped inside the enclosure. The silencer shall be of at least critical grade, and shall attenuate the sum of the octave band levels converted to A-weighted sound pressure levels such that the noise level from the engine exhaust plus mechanical noise from the enclosure will conform to the noise limitation specified in Paragraph 1.08. There shall be no puretone. Size the silencer to operate within the maximum allowable backpressure of the engine, when installed in the exhaust piping system as furnished. Provide a drain tap on the silencer, and provide a piped drain from the silencer drain tap with galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and a manual ball valve. The drain shall extend to a location that the valve can be easily accessed to drain condensation/rain leakage from the silencer.

2. Furnish a stainless steel bellows type expansion joint as recommended by the engine

manufacturer to connect the exhaust silencer to the engine. The flexible connection shall adapt to the engine exhaust outlet connection, and provide a flanged connection to the silencer. The connector shall be of Type 321 stainless steel and designed for an operating temperature of 1200 degrees F.

3. Interior exhaust pipe shall be ASTM A106, Schedule 40 black steel with flanged and

welded fittings. Exhaust pipe shall be of the size recommended by the engine manufacturer. All exhaust line elbows shall be long radius. Paint the exhaust pipe with high temperature paint for corrosion resistance. Interior exhaust pipe shall extend through the roof penetration and terminate with a flange located under the rain hood.

4. The roof penetration through the enclosure shall be with an insulated Type 321 stainless

steel or aluminum roof jack designed to accommodate the specified exhaust pipe and allow a minimum 1 inch air gap between the exhaust pipe and the roof thimble. There shall be no heat conduction path between the exhaust pipe and the roof. The roof thimble shall project above the finished roof and shall include Type 321 stainless steel or aluminum exterior rain hood and flashing. Roof jack shall be as manufactured by GT Exhaust Systems or equal. The open space between the exhaust pipe and the roof jack shall allow for ventilation and shall include screening or mesh to prevent the entrance of insects.

5. The exterior portion of the exhaust pipe extension shall extend vertically above the

enclosure roof to 1.5 times the overall height of the enclosure counting the fuel tank base, with a vertical discharge.



a. Exterior exhaust pipe shall be of high-temperature stainless steel, ASTM A358, Type 321, Class 2, welded, shop fabricated, of Schedule 10S wall thickness. Size shall be as required for the engine.

b. Assemblies of pipe and fittings shall be shop fabricated with welded joints, and shall be

field joined by flange joints. Field welding of stainless steel exhaust pipe will not be allowed. Flange pattern shall be ANSI B16.1, 125 lbs. Flanges shall have stub ends or rolled angle rings, of the same stainless steel as the pipeline, welded to the pipe end and shall utilize stainless steel back-up rings and Type 316 stainless steel bolts. Flange gaskets shall be suitable for operating temperatures to 1200 degrees F.

c. Support the exterior exhaust pipe extension on the structure of the enclosure. Provide

bracing or cable stays as required to assure stability of the exhaust pipe outlet with a wind load of up to 115 mph. All bracing, cable stays, hardware, and fittings shall be of stainless steel, and shall be arranged to allow for thermal expansion of the exhaust pipe.

6. Terminate the exhaust pipe vertically with a Type 321 stainless steel counterbalanced rain

cap with bronze bushings equal to Rain Fighter Systems Inc.; GT Exhaust Systems, or equal.

7. Cover the interior exhaust system, including the flexible section and the exhaust silencer

with insulation to limit the interior temperature of the enclosure, shield heat sensitive components from the exhaust pipe/silencer heat, and provide operator protection in accordance with UL 2200 during generator operation. The insulation shall be of a non-combustible type and shall not contain asbestos or asbestos bearing products. The insulation shall be insulating blanket, consisting of high density fiberglass insulation, 11 pounds per cubic foot, rated to 1200 degrees F, totally encapsulated in Type 304 stainless steel mesh, cut and assembled into components that fit the exhaust system components. The exterior shall have a weather barrier of silicone rubber coated fiberglass cloth. Wrap the blanket segments around the exhaust system components and attach with Type 304 stainless steel wire interlocking with clips built into the blankets, such that the insulation is removable and replaceable. The insulation blanket shall meet MIL-I-16411E-Type II, NRC 136, U.S. Coast Guard Certificate No. 164.009/94/0, UL 492 (self extinguishing), and NFPA A 255. Apply insulation to such thickness that the surface temperature of any portion of the exhaust system downstream of the engine turbo-chargers shall not exceed 150 deg. F when the unit is operating at full load. Provide complete external insulation coverage of the silencer even if it contains interior insulation.

8. Furnish and install all required steel support framing and hanger bands for supporting the

silencer and exterior exhaust pipe extension from the roof of the enclosure.

2.05 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

A. The generator set shall include a combination engine-alternator monitoring/control panel, shock mounted at the alternator end of the unit, oriented to be easily viewed through the open enclosure doors. The control panel shall be all electronic type, with digital displays visible in any lighting condition. House the control panel in a NEMA-4 enclosure designed for unit mounting. Provide all interconnecting wiring between the engine-alternator set and the control panel. Construction of the panel shall conform to UL 508 for control panels. Direct communication with the control panel shall be with an environmentally sealed membrane



keypad. If the control panel adjustment and diagnostics are accomplished through the use of an interconnection to a PC, furnish with the generator all software, instructions, and interconnecting cables required for PC communication with the control panel.

1. The panel shall include, but not be limited to, the following indications displayed on a two

line alpha-numeric digital display:

Lubricating oil pressure Jacket water temperature Engine speed (rpm) A.C. volts, 0.5 percent accuracy A.C. amperes, 0.5 percent accuracy Frequency, 0.5 percent accuracy Output power (kW and kVA) (total and per phase) Power factor Elapsed time meter calibrated in hours and tenths of hours DC volts Diagnostics for servicing Emergency shutdown condition indication lamps for each shutdown condition with

logic to maintain lockout condition and fault light until reset.

2. Operators on the panel shall include:

RUN-STOP-AUTO pushbuttons or switch Control panel menu navigation pushbuttons Emergency stop mushroom type pushbutton Phase selector switch Voltage control Lamp test pushbutton Alarm reset pushbutton

3. The panel shall also include:

Alternator voltage regulator Governor/engine control module

4. The control panel shall include a complete automatic engine start control that operates on

closing contact and stop control that operates on opening contact.

a. The engine control module shall provide for cyclic cranking for a total of at least four 15 second cranking periods separated by 15 second rest periods. If the engine fails to start after the last cranking cycle, the cranking limiter shall terminate further cranking and activate the overcrank alarm.

b. The control panel shall include a three-position control pushbutton or switch with the

following selections: RUN-STOP-AUTO. In RUN, the engine shall start and run with load transfer controlled from a remote location; in STOP, the engine shall stop and shall not start; in AUTO, the engine shall start, run and stop from remote signals



and with load transfer controlled by the automatic transfer switches provided under Division 16 when the unit attains rated voltage and frequency.

c. The generator controls shall include an automatic cool-down timer, to allow the

engine to continue to operate after load transfer back to the normal power supply, to cool down prior to automatic shut-down. The timer shall be adjustable from 0 to 10 minutes and shall be engaged when the selector switch is in the AUTO position.

d. Should any of the protective sensors on the generator activate, the engine control

shall immediately shut down the engine.

5. The control panel shall include an emergency stop pushbutton. Arrange the controls to accept operation of a remote contact to provide for emergency stop. Emergency stop shall over-ride all other controls to immediately shut off the fuel supply and stop the engine. Furnish a break glass type remote emergency stop switch, housed in a NEMA 4 wall mount enclosure, permanently labeled as “Generator Emergency Stop”. Mount the remote emergency stop unit on the exterior of the generator enclosure near the main entrance doorway and wire to the generator control panel. The control panel shall accept the contact close input from the remote emergency stop switch to instantly stop the engine.

6. Provide automatic shutdowns with fault indication for the following conditions:

High coolant temperature Low lubricating oil pressure Engine overspeed Overcrank Fail to crank Over/Under voltage Over/Under Frequency Emergency stop Low coolant level

7. Provide automatic pre-alarms for the following conditions with fault indication for each:

Low coolant temperature Low oil pressure (pre-warn) High coolant temperature (pre-warn) Switch not in AUTO position High/low battery voltage Battery charger fault Generator circuit breaker tripped Fuel leak alarm Low fuel alarm

8. The control panel shall include an audible alarm horn to signal any of the alarm shut-down

or pre-alarm conditions. Alarms shall not reset and the alarm horn shall not shut off until manually acknowledged, and fault lights shall not reset until the fault is resolved. Provide lamp test pushbutton and alarm acknowledge pushbutton



9. The control panel shall accept remote dry contact closure for battery charger common alarm, generator circuit breaker tripped, low fuel alarm, and fuel leak alarm, and shall display each corresponding alarm condition as an individual labeled alarm on the alarm panel.

10. The control panel shall include one normally open and one normally closed electrical relay contact, rated 120 Volts, 10 amps, for operation of a remote alarm on activation of any one or more of the pre-alarm conditions listed above, and shall include one normally open and one normally closed electrical relay contact, rated 120 Volts, 10 amps, for operation of a remote alarm on activation of any one or more of the shut-down conditions listed above.

11. The control panel shall include three normally open and three normally closed electrical relay contacts, rated 120 Volts, 10 amps, A.C., for operation of combustion air and ventilation air dampers within the generator enclosure upon activation of the starting sequence of the engine, and to provide a generator run signal to the automatic transfer switches and the instrumentation system.

12. The generator control panel shall accept the following field wiring connections. Provide numbered terminal strip connections for each.

a. Remote start-stop dry contact closure input from the eight automatic transfer switches

provided under Division 16 – battery voltage pair. b. Remote emergency stop dry contact open input from the remote emergency stop

station – battery voltage pair. c. Battery charger failure dry contact closure input from the battery charger common

alarm contact – battery voltage pair. d. Low fuel alarm, dry contact closure input from the fuel tank low level switch –

battery voltage pair. e. Fuel leak alarm, dry contact closure input from the fuel tank leak detection switch –

battery voltage pair. f. Generator circuit breaker tripped, dry contact closure input from the generator circuit

breaker – battery voltage pair. g. Engine run – three dry contact open/close outputs for remote connection – three 120

volt pairs. h. Generator shut-down alarm – dry contact open/close output for remote connection to

the SCADA system – 120 volt pair. i. Generator trouble alarm – dry contact open/close output for remote connection to the

SCADA system – 120 volt pair. j. Remote generator trouble/shut-down alarm – battery voltage output to remote audible

alarm unit.



k. Dry contacts for output to eight transfer switches for load shedding purposes. 13. The generator control panel shall have a web based IP address accessible. Provide a fiber

converter for connection to the Generator Control Panel. B. The generator set shall include a remote monitoring panel. The panel shall be all electronic type,

with digital displays visible in any lighting condition. House the control panel in a NEMA-1 enclosure designed for wall mounting. Provide all interconnecting wiring between the engine-generator control panel and the remote monitoring panel. Construction of the panel shall conform to UL 508 for control panels.

1. The Remote Monitoring Panel shall include indicators for the following:

Over Temperature Low Oil Pressure Generator Failure Emergency Stop Low Coolant Level Switch not in AUTO position High/Low battery voltage Battery Charger fault Generator circuit breaker tripped Fuel leak Low fuel level

2.06 ALTERNATOR AND EXCITATION SYSTEM

A. The alternator shall be of the open drip-proof bracket type, especially designed for connection to the engine and shall be for the voltage, frequency, and power output as specified in Paragraphs 1.01 and 1.06, designed to start and operate the loads specified in Paragraph 1.06. The alternator shall have Class H insulation. Alternator temperature rise at full load operation shall not exceed 105 degrees C when the unit is operated at full rated load. The alternator shall have Amortisseur windings.

B. The alternator shall be a Cummins; Newage; Kato; Marathon Electric Company unit, or equal.

It shall have a forged or cast alloy steel flanged shaft for direct connection through a flywheel type coupling to the engine, or shall have an adapter and disc coupling, and shall be of the single bearing type with anti-friction bearing.

C. Brace the alternator windings to withstand any possible short circuit stresses. The windings

shall withstand overheating or stresses caused by harmonics generated by the variable frequency drives. The unit shall be "Radio Interference Proof" (RIP) and the "Telephone Influence Factor" (TIF) shall be within the limits of Section 9, ANSI C50.12.

D. The alternator shall be brushless with a rotating permanent magnet generator type excitation

system with Class H insulation and temperature rise not to exceed 105 degrees C. E. The voltage regulator shall be solid state digital (Volts/Hz), three phase sensing, with RFI filters

and associated controls. The voltage regulator shall provide regulation within 0.25 percent no load to full load, with temperature drift of not more than 0.5 percent. The regulator shall provide



true three phase root mean square (RMS) sensing, and shall maintain precise control of the alternator output with up to 20 percent harmonic distortion in the output voltage. A voltage control shall provide a minimum of plus or minus 5 percent voltage adjustment from rated voltage. Include the voltage control in the control panel for easy manual voltage adjustment while the unit is running.

F. The alternator stator core shall be 2/3 pitch, built of low carbon steel laminations,

precision-punched, deburred and individually insulated. Stator coils shall be inserted in insulated core slots. Wound core shall be vacuum impregnated with fungus resistant thermosetting synthetic varnish and baked for maximum moisture resistance, high dielectric strength and high bonding qualities. Armature lamination followers and frame ribs shall be welded integral with frame. Enclosure shall be drip-proof guarded and shall include rodent screens.

G. Alternator rotor poles shall be built up of individually insulated steel punchings. Poles shall be

wound and bonded with high strength varnish, then baked. Cage connections shall be brazed for strong construction and permanent electrical characteristics. Each pole shall be securely bolted to the rotor shaft.

H. Provide a directional blower to draw cooling air from the exciter end, over the rotor poles and

through louvered openings in the drive end.

I. The alternator shall have a permanently lubricated anti-friction bearing. The designed bearing life, based on the B-10 curve of the American Bearing Manufacturers Association, shall be not less than 40,000 hours.

J. Provide an automatic thermostatically controlled space heater rated 120 Volt, single phase power

supply to maintain not less than 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) temperature within the alternator enclosure with an outdoor ambient temperature of minus 10 degrees F, to prevent the accumulation of condensation within the alternator enclosure under outdoor ambient temperature and humidity conditions. Provide a separate manual switch to disconnect the heater when not required. Hard wire the power supply for the alternator space heater to the load center as specified to be installed within the generator enclosure.

K. The alternator shall include a NEMA 1 terminal box, sized and located to NEC clearances, and

located to provide convenient arrangement inside the enclosure for the wiring terminations and circuit breaker. Install potential transformers and current transformers in the terminal box for on board monitoring of generator output voltage and current.

L. At any balanced load between 75 and 100 percent rated output, the difference in line-to-neutral

voltage among the three phases shall not exceed one percent of the average line-to-neutral voltage. Under an unbalanced load, consisting of 25 percent load at 1.0 power factor placed between any phase and neutral and zero load on each of the other two phases, the maximum simultaneous difference in voltage between the three line-to-neutral phases shall not exceed three percent of rated line to neutral voltage.

2.07 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Furnish (2) 1600AF/1600AT generator main circuit breaker(s). The generator main circuit breaker shall be an adjustable trip, molded case, three pole, circuit breaker for three phase



overloads and/or short-circuit protection for the generator load output. The circuit breaker shall operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically during overload and short-circuit conditions. Circuit breaker shall be UL listed and rated per NEC requirements to carry the full ampere load of the generator. The circuit breaker shall include contacts wired to the generator control panel to provide alarm if the breaker is in the “Tripped” or “Off” position. The short circuit rating of the generator circuit breaker shall be 65,000 Amps RMS symmetrical. The generator main, adjustable trip, molded case, circuit breaker shall conform to the following:

1. The molded case circuit breaker type ND, with Optim 550 trip unit as manufactured by

Eaton, shall provide inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics, shall be listed per UL 489 for applications at 100 percent of its continuous ampere rating in its installed enclosure.

2. The trip mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break, mechanically trip-free over-center

switching mechanism operated by a toggle-type handle. Handle shall indicate breaker position. A push-to-trip button mounted on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

3. Trip units shall be adjustable, microprocessor-based, electronic overcurrent trip device with

true three phase RMS sensing of sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal currents, with the following minimum features and functions:

a. Rating plugs shall be adjustable and interlocked so they are not interchangeable

between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed.

b. Trip mode indicators for ground fault, overload and short circuit. c. An operator interface display panel showing diagnostic information and metering

information. d. Trip unit shall be Optim 550 as manufactured by Eaton or equivalent.

4. Provide means to apply a padlock to lock the circuit breaker in the “OFF” position. 5. Provide drop contact to designate that breaker has tripped.

B. Mount the circuit breakers in a NEMA 4 housing attached to the alternator terminal box and

located for easy access. 2.08 SOUND ATTENUATED WEATHERPROOF HOUSING

A. House the skid mounted generator unit, engine starting batteries, battery charger, generator control panel, enclosure load center, fuel return pump, and exhaust silencer in a sound attenuated skin-tight enclosure designed to meet the conditions set forth below. The enclosure shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) for clearance around electrical equipment as specified. The enclosure shall conform to the following design criteria:

1. Rigidity wind test equal to 115 mph



2. Roof load equal to 50 lbs per sq. ft. 3. Floor load equal to 200 lbs per sq. ft.

4. Rain test equal to 4-in per hour

5. Seismic design shall be in accordance with the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Building

Code B. The enclosure shall be of lift-off design, or have a bolt-in-place removable end wall panel at the

generator air discharge end for major maintenance and/or equipment removal. The enclosure shall consist of two side walls, two end walls and roof, with intake/exhaust hoods/plenums as required for sound attenuation. The resulting housing, in combination with the engine exhaust silencer, with the generator in operation at full load, shall meet the noise limitation criteria specified Paragraph 1.08. It shall be the responsibility of the generator unit manufacturer to choose the thickness of insulation, number of baffles, etc. to meet the aforementioned sound criteria.

C. The enclosure roof, walls, and hoods shall each be of aluminum panels, either frameless,

one-piece semi-monocoque, or frame supported construction. All framing members shall be 6063-T6 aluminum, or welded steel. Skin material shall be minimum thickness of 0.040-in aluminum, either prepainted (roof may be mill finish), or painted after fabrication. A minimum of six colors shall be available for the enclosure exterior. Submit example of color selections available for the enclosure exterior. Exposed fasteners for skin panels shall be hand-riveted to the framing members on 3-in centers maximum. Pop rivets and bolts shall not be acceptable exposed fasteners to attach the exterior skin to the framing. Non-exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel self-tapping screws or welded. Camber the roof to aid in rain run-off.

D. Insulation in the walls and roof shall be semi-rigid, thermo-acoustic, thickness as required to

meet the noise criteria specified. Lining shall be perforated, mill-finish aluminum. All joints and cut-outs of the aluminum lining shall have trim strips or other provision to avoid sharp edges. Self-adhesive foam and loose or bat-type insulating materials shall not be acceptable.

E. The floor and underframe shall consist of two wide flange “I” beam or channel longitudinal

skids, with fabricated steel crossmembers on 16 inch centers. Overlay crossmembers with 1/8-in thick steel plate firmly welded to the crossmembers to provide a solid floor. The steel plate shall be diamond pattern for slip resistance, or shall be overlain with self-adhesive non-slip surfacing. A 3/4 inch pressure treated wood subfloor may be used between the crossmembers and the steel deck as required for further sound attenuation, for acoustic isolation of the generator set and base assembly. Provide steel tapping plates coordinated with the generator set manufacturer, for anchoring the equipment within the enclosure. The floor shall provide a flat walking surface without obstructions. Provide floor openings for electric conduit stub-up where required for best conduit wiring access to the equipment within the enclosure. The floor shall incorporate a diked perimeter to form a containment area for spilled fluids such as coolant, fuel, or lubricating oil. The diked volume shall be at least 150 percent of the greatest fluid volume contained within the engine. The dike shall have steel edges welded and/or caulked to the floor. The conduit stub-up and any other floor penetrations shall be diked. The diked area may form the containment within itself, or it may slope and drain to a storage volume. All portions of the diked area shall be accessible for cleaning without removing covers or floor plates.



F. Construct the diesel fuel oil tank in accordance with and bearing the seal of UL 142, Standard

for Protected Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and NFPA 30. The diesel fuel oil tank shall have a usable (90 percent full) storage volume of 5000 gallons and shall be placed in a rupture basin of at least ten percent greater capacity than the fuel tank. The tank shall be complete with internal baffles to prevent short circuiting of the return fuel. Provide tapped connections for engine fuel supply line with dip tube and foot valve, fuel return line, tank drain and rupture basin drain, primary and secondary fuel tank vents, and fill connection. The tank drain connection shall have a manually operated valve with locking handle. Pipe the fuel tank vent connection to outdoors with a vent cap. The tank shall be factory tested for leaks under pressure prior to shipment. The fuel storage tank and rupture basin shall extend under, but not beyond, the entire floor of the enclosure plus air exhaust scoop, except for an area to align with the electrical stub-up from the concrete support pad and shall be no higher than 36-in.

1. Provide a micro-processor-based tank gauging, leak monitoring, overfill alarm, pump

control system, and fill point containment.

a. The complete system including a microprocessor-based central processing and indicating instrument, liquid level sensors, leak detector and overfill alarm station shall be supplied by one supplier. Components connected directly to the tank taps shall be intrinsically safe as approved by Factory Mutual for Class 1, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations. The instrument shall have a die-cast aluminum housing containing all calibration adjustments. The system shall provide a local indication of tank contents in gallons; local alarm indications of tank leak, tank high level, tank overfill, and tank low level; and alarm relay contacts for transmission of common alarm (leak, high level, overfill, and low level). The control panel shall have an alphanumeric LED display visible in any lighting condition to continuously display the contents volume of the tank and to display all alarms in letters. The system shall provide a 4-20 madc output proportional to tank contents in gallons. The control panel shall incorporate push-button controls, common audible alarm and silence pushbutton, high level and overfill alarm circuit test pushbutton. Connect the common alarm output to the generator control panel. The control panel shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply, factory prewired to the enclosure load center. House the panel in a NEMA 4X enclosure mounted inside the generator enclosure located to be easily observed when entering the enclosure.

b. The level sensors shall be float type to provide accurate level monitoring that is

unaffected by changes in the specific gravity of the tank liquid, suitable for No. 2 fuel oil. Connect the level sensor head to a float assembly by a mechanical linkage. The sensor head assembly shall mount to the tank through a standard two inch NPT tank opening. The level sensors shall provide contact closure outputs for low alarm, high alarm, and overfill alarm.

c. The tank leak detector shall be solid state and discriminate between oil and water,

display the leak with two LED’s on its indicating transmitter, and send an appropriate alarm signal to the tank gauge panel. The leak detector shall be intrinsically safe, have continuous electronic checking, fail safe to an alarm condition, and have indicating transmitters with a magnetic test mechanism to exercise the sensors and check the tank gauge response.



G. Provide four-point lifting lugs at or near the corners of the enclosure base, with capacity for rigging the entire assembly. Quality assurance procedures of the manufacturer shall include regular testing of the lifting lugs. Design the enclosure base and attachment to the concrete support pad to support the enclosure gravity loads, dynamic loads, and seismic forces and to conform to applicable requirements of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Building Code. Provide two electrical grounding lugs mounted on the base for connection of the grounding system furnished under Division 16. Provide closure plates on open ends of the enclosure base.

H. Provide personnel access doors to provide full access to each side of the generator set for

maintenance and NEC required access and clearances to the generator circuit breaker. Provide at least one door on each side of the enclosure. One door shall align with the face of the generator circuit breaker to provide full unobstructed face coverage of the circuit breaker enclosure. Provide double door if required to meet the width of the circuit breaker enclosure. If the clearance from the circuit breaker enclosure to the door frame is less than 24 inches, provide a separate door on the same side of the enclosure for access to the engine. Doors shall consist of an extruded aluminum or steel frame with skin material matching the enclosure. Doors shall be fully gasketed to form a weathertight perimeter seal. Hinges shall be forged aluminum or stainless steel with stainless steel pins. Handle shall be stainless steel and padlockable. The door lock mechanism shall be three-point with handle to allow opening from inside even when padlocked on the outside. Doors shall have a full 180 degree swing to rotate out of way during access to the enclosure. Provide a stainless steel hold-open latch on each door.

I. Air handling during operation of the generator set shall be as follows: Air shall enter the

enclosure through a sound attenuating hood and louver. Provide a motor operated damper on the intake louver, wired through the run contact in the generator control panel to open upon engine startup. Radiator discharge shall be through a gravity operated damper and louver, into a sound attenuating discharge plenum with vertical up discharge. The system shall not exceed 0.5-in w.g. total external static pressure to ensure adequate airflow for cooling and combustion. Both the intake and discharge louvers shall be of formed and extruded aluminum, and shall be screened with stainless steel screen. Motor operated and gravity dampers shall be of formed and extruded aluminum or galvanized steel. Damper motor operators shall be arranged for a 120 Volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply, spring to open, power to close. Pre-wire the damper power supply from the enclosure load center.

J. The enclosure shall include all necessary hardware to internally mount the specified critical

exhaust silencer and maintain the weatherproof integrity of the system. Silencer support shall be from the enclosure roof. A floor support system for the silencer shall not be permitted.

K. Provide at least two 120 Volt lights on each side of the enclosure operated by separate switches.

All wiring shall be THHN type and shall run within galvanized steel rigid conduit. Conduit and wiring within the enclosure shall be in conformance with applicable requirements of other Sections of Division 16.

L. All openings in the enclosure shall be screened, baffled, or otherwise closed to prevent the

entrance of insects and rodents.

M. The housing shall have signs on all four sides of the enclosure reading "Danger-High Voltage".

N. The exterior of the enclosure shall receive the manufacturer's standard exterior paint of color as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color chart.



O. It is the intent of this specification to provide complete compliance with all applicable codes,

laws and regulations.

P. The enclosure and all appurtenances as specified herein shall be as manufactured by Pritchard Brown Division of Enviro-Industries, Inc. Baltimore, MD; Acoustic Sheet Metal, Norfolk, VA; DTS Inc., Sioux Falls, SD; or equal.

Q. Provide a 100 ampere 208/120V panel with MLO. All circuit breakers shall be Dolton type.

Panel shall provide power for enclosure loads as required. 2.09 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING

A. The generator set and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finished coated in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice prior to shipment. Furnish a one quart can of touch-up paint.

2.10 SHOP TEST

A. Perform shop tests on the complete generator unit, control panel, and remote monitoring panel, prior to shipment. Submit four copies of the complete certified test record to the Engineer within 30 days after the completed test.

B. These tests shall be sufficient to assure that the unit will operate successfully and meet all

specified operational requirements. The manufacturer shall furnish all necessary instruments, filters, fuel, electric power, and load banks for the test.

C. Test each of the automatic alarm and shut-down devices and include certification of the test in

the shop test record. Test and record the respective values at which the automatic shutdown devices actually alarmed and/or stopped the engine.

D. The shop test shall consist of, but not be limited to, operation on a reactive load bank at 0.8

power factor at full rated standby load. Test and record voltage and frequency regulation and voltage and current balance to show full compliance with this specification. Perform tests to demonstrate transient response from zero load to full load, zero load to half load and half load to full load. During the shop test, take and record readings for each of the following:

1. Time

2. Ambient temperature

3. Load:

a. Volts for each phase

b. Amps for each phase

c. Kilowatts

d. Power factor



e. Frequency

4. Engine jacket water temperature

5. Lubricating oil pressure

6. Gallons of fuel consumed per hour

E. The alternator shall be shop tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 115. Submit certified test

results in accordance with Paragraph 1.03. Testing shall include the following:

1. Cold resistance of all windings

2. Insulation resistance of all windings

3. Polarity of field coils

4. High potential on all windings

5. Open circuit saturation

F. After completion of all testing, the following is required:

1. Seal the load limit using a seal press that embosses the manufacturer's initials on the lead seal.

2. Drain all entrapped water and apply proper protection to prevent the entry of water during

shipment or a long period in storage while waiting for installation. 3. Treat the engine for protection during an extended storage at the job site while waiting for

completion of installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide the services of a qualified factory representative to check the installation of the generator unit to ensure a proper installation, perform check-out and start-up services, conduct the field test specified herein, and instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

B. Mount the generator enclosure skid base on a flat concrete foundation and level to provide equal

bearing for all supports as work of this Section. Utilize grout or other approved means to level the mounting pad to provide equal bearing for all supports as work of this Section. Anchors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Connect the generator unit to field wiring under other Sections of Division 16.

C. Installation shall include furnishing all required coolants, lubricants, and one fill of the fuel tank,

all in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Diesel fuel shall be ultra-low sulfur



content in accordance with Federal and State regulations for stationary standby diesel engines of the horsepower rating of the unit provided.

3.02 EQUIPMENT START-UP

A. After installation and manufacturer's representative check of the installed equipment, operate the unit to demonstrate its ability to operate continuously without vibration, jamming, leakage or overheating and to perform specified functions.

B. Comply with the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions during start-up and

operation.

C. Promptly correct improper installation or operation of the equipment.

D. Cooperate with the supplier of the equipment at the time of start-up and in making of all final adjustments necessary to place the equipment in satisfactory working order. Start-up shall not commence without the presence of the manufacturer's representative.

3.03 FIELD TEST

A. Upon completion of the installation and as soon as conditions permit, the Contractor and the service representative for the manufacturer of the generator unit shall test the generator unit and associated electrical circuits and controls in the presence of the Engineer to assure that the system functions as specified. Before conducting the on-site field tests, submit a copy of the proposed test data log sheet for the Engineer’s approval.

1. Prior to scheduling the test, notify the Engineer in writing that all requirements and

provisions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, that all apparatus shall be clean, properly adjusted and ready for operation and that the Operation and Maintenance Manuals specified in Paragraph 1.09, have been submitted.

2. The manufacturers' representatives shall make such changes in wiring or connections and

such adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to make the circuit, device or control system function as specified and otherwise comply with the Contract Documents.

B. The test shall consist of four hours of continuous operation of the unit using a portable resistive

load bank. Adjust the load bank load to provide one half hour each at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of full load followed by the remaining operating time at rated standby load. Furnish the portable load bank, all connecting cables, metering equipment, and other equipment or devices required to perform the on-site testing. During the test, take the same readings as outlined under Paragraph 2.10 and record results at 30 minute intervals. Testing shall include verification of proper voltage regulation, transient voltage dip and recovery time, and voltage and current balance.

C. As part of the field test, test each of the automatic alarm and shutdown devices and record the

respective values at which the devices will alarm and/or stop the engine. Perform any adjustments required in the devices to make the operating values correspond to those recommended by the engine manufacturer and as recorded during the shop test.



D. After the load bank test has been completed, connect the generator to the station load, and perform additional testing utilizing the main circuit breaker to simulate a utility power failure, to demonstrate the generator unit’s ability to meet the automatic starting, load transfer, and motor starting requirements as specified under Paragraph 1.06, utilizing facility load as available. Operate the facility on generator power for at least 30 minutes then restore utility power via the main circuit breaker. Record generator operating parameters as specified above.

E. Provide a person qualified to conduct sound level testing to take and record octave band sound

pressure level readings with the portable resistive load bank shut off and operating the engine driven generator using the plant load available at the time the field tests are conducted. These readings shall be within the limits specified. If changes are necessary to accomplish the required sound attenuation, perform revisions as required and retest. The Contractor shall furnish the test instrumentation.

F. If the generator unit fails to fulfill the performance requirements of this Specification, take

corrective action and retest the system to assure full compliance. Include all expenses associated with the field tests, including any corrective action, and retesting as part of the scope of work of this Section.

3.04 TRAINING

A. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance for a minimum of two 8-hour working days to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment.

B. Training shall be provided at the site and timed to accommodate all working shifts, including

some late evenings, and early mornings. The instruction period shall be scheduled at least ten (10) working days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to start-up and acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. Training shall include at least system operations, preventive maintenance, and troubleshooting.

C. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, at least 30 working days prior to the start of training,

a training syllabus that includes the above requirements, proposed dates and times for training, and instructor resume. Training may not commence until the first draft of the O&M manual has been submitted for review.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11451

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide and install appliances within rooms as noted on the Drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the following:

1. Microwave Oven.

2. Refrigerator/Freezer.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Rough carpentry work is included in Section 06100.

B. Finish carpentry work is included in Section 06200.

C. Plumbing fixtures and requirements are included in Division 15.

D. Electrical conductors, cables and requirements are included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, submittals shall include Manufacturer brochures, appliance operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and available finishes for each appliance.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by Manufacturers certifying that products comply with all specified requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For each product indicated, include all standard maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: For each product indicated, provide samples of standard and extended warranties available from the appliance Manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by the Manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified Manufacturer that maintains, within 50 miles of the Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.



C. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source.

1. Provide products from same Manufacturer for each type of appliance required.

2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single Manufacturer for the entire Project.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.

3. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.

F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards:

1. Refrigerators and Freezers: AHAM HRF-1

G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance Labeling Rule.

1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.

H. National Electric Code (NEC)

I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

J. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

K. Code of Federal Regulations, 28 CFR, Part 36, Appendix A:


L. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition



M. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Microwave Oven: One-year limed warranty for in-home service on the entire appliance and Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on defects in the magnetron tube.

2. Refrigerator / Freezer: One-year limed warranty for in-home service on the entire appliance and Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.02 BREAK ROOM APPLIANCES

A. Microwave Oven

1. Products:

a. General Electric Company; GE Profile Countertop Convection / Microwave Oven, Model Number PEB1590SMSS.

b. Amana.

c. Or approved equal.

2. Standard features include the following:

a. Cooking Technology: Microwave and Convection

b. Oven Capacity: Minimum 1.5 Cubic Feet.

c. Oven Features: ADA compliant, countertop style oven with 10 Power levels, Electronic scrolling touch controls with digital display, removable pedestal style oven rack, 12-3/4” recessed glass turntable, interior light, timer, child lock-out feature, microwave sensor cooking controls, convection cooking controls, clock, automatic and time defrost.



d. Mounting: Located on countertop above base cabinets within Break Room A-111.

e. Installation: Re-circulating exhaust system (Ductless / non-vented).

f. Electrical Power: 1000 W (IEC-705), 120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz.

g. Oven Door: Counter-balanced, stainless steel finish with observation window.

h. Finish: Stainless Steel with Black colored trim.

B. Refrigerator / Freezer

1. Products:

a. General Electric Company; GE Profile, Energy Star, Model Number PDSS0MFXRSS (Handing of Unit to Match the Floor Plan).

b. Amana.

c. Or approved equal.

2. Type: Freestanding with bottom drawer freezer and swinging refrigerator on top.

3. Storage Capacity:

a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: Minimum 14.0 cu. ft.

b. Freezer Volume: Minimum 6.10 cu. ft.

c. Shelf Area: Four (4) adjustable glass shelves.

d. Total Capacity: Minimum 20.30 cu. ft.

4. Refrigerator Features:

a. Compartment Storage: Vegetable crisper.

b. Door Storage: Dairy compartment.

c. Interior light in compartment.

d. Electronic sensors.

e. Digital temperature display and touch controls.

5. Freezer Features:

a. Ice storage bins.

b. Leveling system.



c. Interior light in compartment.

d. Defrost type (FrostGuard).

6. Electrical Power: Rated 120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz.

7. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified by AHAM HRF-1 at not more than 688 kWh/year under average conditions for a refrigerated volume of 17.9 cu. ft.

8. Temperature Controls: Separate temperature controls for each compartment.

9. Appliance Color: Stainless Steel with Black colored trim.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish: Provide break room appliances with standard Stainless Steel finish, each complying with the Manufacturer's written instructions for surface protection, care and cleaning.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Handing, orientation, location and placement of all appliances shall be provided and installed on project as indicated on the Drawings. Comply with the appliance Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.



D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for additional plumbing, ventilation and electrical requirements.

E. Operation: Test all appliances to ensure that they are in proper working order.


A. Test each appliance to verify all item and features are working properly.

B. Make any necessary adjustments or repairs as recommended by the appliance Manufacturer. Remove and replace ay appliance which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

C. Verify that all required accessories have been furnished and installed.

D. Remove all packing material from residential appliances and leave units ready for operation.

E. Clean and protect all appliances as indicated in the Manufacturer’s written recommendations. END OF SECTION



SECTION 11501

SPRAY PAINTING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and the requirements of Division 1, apply to the Work in this Section.

B. Equipment items as listed below by Equipment Mark Number:

1. BP622 BOOTH, PAINT, BUS/ TRUCK, DOWNDRAFT, SIDE (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. BP952 SHAKER, PAINT, INDUSTRIAL, AIR OPERATED (Ref. Part 2.02)

C. Roughing-in, installation of equipment and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation. All electrical distribution and electrical equipment installation from the single point 480V, 200A feeder. Demarcation point for the paint booth.

D. Piping, wiring, and switching between equipment and utilities.


A. Plumbing General Provisions are included in Section 15400.

B. Plumbing Piping Systems are included in Section 15410.

C. Electrical General Provisions are included in Section 16000.

D. Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports are included in Section 16110.

E. Wires and Cables are included in Section 16120.

F. Wiring Devices are included in Section 16141.

1.03 ALTERNATIVE BIDS

A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements for possible effect on Work of this Section.


A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of five years experience supplying specified equipment.

B. Manufacturer's Representative:

1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufacturer's representative at site to supervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start up.



2. Training: Provide technical representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

1. Submit Product Data in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

2. Restrict submitted material to pertinent data. For instance, do not include manufacturer's complete catalog when pertinent information is contained on a single page.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual

1. Provide complete parts, operating and maintenance manual covering equipment at time of installation including, but not limited to:

a. Description of system and components.

b. Schematic diagrams of electrical and plumbing systems.

c. Manufacturer's printed operating instructions.

d. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

e. List of original manufacturer's parts, including suppliers' part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity, and local parts and service source.

2. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Foldout diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Follow requirements specified in Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Additional costs resulting from substitution of products other than those specified, including drawing changes and construction, will be at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Substitution Approval: Manufacturers listed for each equipment item may bid without substitution approval for that item. Manufacturers not listed shall submit for approval in accordance with "Instructions to Bidders". Prior to installation, submittals for each equipment item by Mark Number shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.



1.07 WARRANTY/CERTIFICATION

A. Warrant work specified herein for one year from substantial completion against defects in materials, function, and workmanship.

B. Warranty shall include materials and labor necessary to correct defects.

C. Defects shall include, but not be limited to noisy, rough or substandard operation; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of finish.

D. Submit warranties in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

E. All parts shall be readily available locally in the United States.

1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment in manufacturer's containers, appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and storage in humid or dusty conditions.

B. Indelibly label all containers, including those contained in others, on outside with item description(s) per title and Mark Number of this specification.

C. Provide equipment and materials specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.

1.09 LABELING

A. Manufacturer shall securely attach in a prominent location on each major item of equipment a noncorrosive nameplate showing manufacturer's name, address, model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data.

B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer's plant.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BOOTH, PAINT, BUS/TRUCK, DOWNDRAFT Equipment Mark Number: BP622

A. General

1. This specification is for provision, installation, and start-up of a downdraft paint booth system. Equipment supplier/installer shall provide equipment specified, all interconnecting ductwork, ductwork support, and all necessary accessories and accoutrements for a complete and operational system. Major system elements are defined in the sections below. Specifications and quantities of materials necessary for interconnection shall be the responsibility of the paint booth supplier/installer. All connections to the building and all roof or wall penetrations shall be coordinated with the requirements of specifications as a whole.

B. Physical Data



1. The booth inside working dimensions shall be 20 feet wide, 50 feet long and 18 feet high.

2. The booth exterior dimensions shall not exceed 22 feet wide, 52 feet long and 21 feet high.

3. The booth vehicle doors shall be a minimum of 14 feet wide by 14 feet high.

4. Personnel access doors shall be a minimum of 36 inches wide by 84 inches high with integral observation window a minimum of 18 inches by 24 inches.

5. The booth shall include two (2) 42 inch diameter exhaust fans with 22,500 CFM each for a total of 45,000 CFM.

6. The booth shall have two (2) intake air make up units with minimum air flow replacement of 22,500 CFM each for a total of 45,000 CFM.

C. Features and Construction

1. The booth shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized steel panels. Panels shall be sealed with acrylic latex caulking. Panels shall use interlocking flanges for a sturdy, airtight joint. Panels shall be joined using ¼ inch self-drilling screws.

2. Booth shall be anchored to floor with 14 gauge angle.

3. Paint booth shall be configured for drive through operations. Booth shall be provided with one (2) sets of drive-thru doors fabricated of 18 gauge steel with steel tubing frames. Door frames shall be fabricated of 12 gauge steel. The locking mechanism on the door shall include rubber gasket and brixon latch to ensure an airtight seal.

4. The booth shall be equipped with a minimum of four (4) access door with an integral observation window. Access doors shall be fabricated of 18 gauge steel with steel tubing frames. Access door frames shall be made of 12 gauge steel angle. Door locking mechanism shall ensure an airtight seal and provide explosion venting.

5. The booth shall be equipped with a minimum of two (2) tube-axial exhaust fan featuring a continuously welding housing with non-sparking polypropylene blades. The blades shall be belt-driven and enclosed in a cylinder for protection from the air stream. The fan motor base shall be located outside the duct area.

6. Each fan shall have a 5 HP high efficiency motor with variable pitch drive sheave. Motors shall feature a heavy gauge steel frame, double sealed ball bearings that are mechanically locked on the shaft end and bolt on motor base.

7. The unit shall include a fully filtered exhaust system complete with exhaust fans and motor assemblies, exhaust stacks, ductwork, weather caps, automatic dampers, flashing, and hardware necessary for a complete and operable installation.

8. The booth shall be provided with an intake plenum located at the top of the booth enclosure. The plenum shall be equipped with a disperser basket, and twenty eight (28) 36 inch by 54 inch intake filters. Filters shall provide over 99 percent efficiency at 10 microns. Filters shall be mounted in hinged, drop-down filter racks.



9. The booth shall be provided with minimum of thirty-six (36) four-foot light fixtures each with four (4) color corrective tubes with T-8 ballasts.

10. The lights shall be Class I, Division 2 rated and ETL and ETL-C listed. The lights shall be accessible from the front/inside and equipped with an interlock switch to disable painting operations when light access door is opened.

11. The booth shall be provided with the following standard components: air solenoid valve to interlock the compressed air for paint guns with the exhaust fan, door limit switches to disable the exhaust fan with any one door is opened, door gaskets, and manometer to monitor the porosity of the exhaust filter.

12. Booth shall have a curing system with variable air volume with VFD, motor and damper package.

13. Paint booth shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) heated air make-up units.

14. Heated Air Make-up Unit (AMU): Provide two (2) each.

a. Make-up unit shall have a gun-type burner rated at 2,000,000 BTU.

b. The unit burner shall include the following, at a minimum.

1) Safe guard control.

2) UV scanner.

3) Electric spark igniter.

4) Ignition transformer.

5) Pilot and main gas valves.

6) Pilot and main gas regulators.

7) Leak test valve.

8) Combustion blower with automatic inlet louvers.

9) On/off switch.

10) Indicator lights.

11) Lockout alarm bell.

12) Control cabinet with terminal strip.

c. Intake Fan: One shall be provided with one (1) intake fan rated at 23,000 CFM. Fan shall be tube-axial, belt driven, with non-sparking polypropylene high temperature blades.

d. Make-up unit shall have a 5 HP high temperature motor with a high effiency EPACT.



e. Make-up unit shall be capable of maintaining 80EF booth temperature above 0EF outside temperature in the spray mode and maintain 160EF booth temperature above 0EF outside temperature in the cure mode.

15. Booth shall be equipped with a compressed air distribution system. Compressed air distribution system shall be standard “shop air” compressed air lines and quick disconnect fittings complete with appropriate filter, lubricator, and regulator. Air line access fittings shall be mounted at standard mounting heights and at two equally spaced intervals along either side of the paint booth.

16. Booth shall include a fire protection system designed to interface with building systems. System shall be designed and installed per federal, state, and local codes.

D. Controls: The equipment shall be preassembled with ON/OFF electrical switching and controls which meet applicable code requirements and provide overload protection for specified equipment. Control panel shall be able to set temperatures, cure cycle times, digital display of set point temperature, and current process temperature, display of cure set time, and time remaining, and current changing operations. Control panel shall be provided with the unit and shall have the following components:

1. NEMA 12 enclosure Type 1 rated industrial panel with main disconnect and door mounted disconnect switch.

2. Motor starters with branch circuit, and overload protection per NEC70 Article 430

3. Automatic balancing system for air flow pressure.

4. Variable frequency drive on exhaust units.

5. Lighting control and circuits: All lights operate of lighting contractor and divided into circuits of not more than 15 amps.

6. Control transformer with primary/ secondary fusing.

7. Emergency stop button.

8. Stack light for visual indication of process or faults.

9. Door switch interface with timer circuit that confirms all doors are closed during spray operation, and faults operation when door is opened in curing operation per NFPA regulations.

10. Spray application equipment interlock.

11. Fire protection interlock for either wet or dry type systems.

12. Terminal Strip Operator or equal interface control station with 5.7” BW touch screen.

13. Control panel shall have capability to be connected to building management/energy management system.



E. Accessories

1. 3 Axis Pneumatic Manlifts, Model No. LP2-1510. 2 each.

a. The lift shall be designed to travel on three (3) axis with a minimum lift height of 15 feet.

b. Lift shall have a basket with 4 inch high kick plates, 42 inch high hand rails and self-closing access doors on each end. The basket floor shall be solid steel safety plate material.

c. Basket capacity shall be minimum 500 pounds.

d. The lift shall have 50 feet of upper rail and 50 feet of lower rail with stops.

e. The lift festoon system shall have two (2) roller trolleys and 50 feet of main air supply hose.

f. Lift shall have emergency stop valve, emergency down valve, and a failsafe lock out device.

g. The lift basket maximum capacity shall be 350 pounds including the operator.

F. Utilities Available

1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 200 Full load amps.

2. Natural Gas: 1-1/2 inch, 4,000,000 BTUH, @ 60 degrees F. Temperature Rise – 4,536 Cubic Feet/ Hour.

3. Compressed Air: 3/8 inch, 80 CFM @ 100 PSI per a manlift.

G. Exhaust: 42 inch diameter, 2 each exhaust and 2 each intake.

H. Manufacturers Reference

1. Prime manufacturer: This specification is based on the equipment identified in Section G.1.a and b below to establish an acceptable standard of quality, performance and features.

a. Air Filtration Company 250 Airport Parkway Oroville, California 95965 Telephone: (530) 533-8907

b. Model: DTPDFDT5036 drive thru with AMS2000C air make-up units and Accessories

2. Other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered equal upon certification of compliance with this specification and the requirements established in SUBMITTALS.

a. Spray Systems, Inc. 1363 East Grand Avenue Pomona, California 91766



Telephone: (909) 623-6944

b. Global Finishing Solutions 12731 Norway Road, P.O. Box 250 Osseo, WI 54758 Telephone: (800)848-8738

I. Booth shall accept one 480V 3-phase, 200A feeder for single point connection. Entire booth electrical system shall be provided and installed by vendor.

2.02 SHAKER, PAINT, INDUSTRIAL, AIR OPERATED Equipment Mark Number: BP951

A. Physical Data

1. The equipment overall dimensions shall not exceed 19 inches wide, 33 inches deep, and 30 inches high.

2. The equipment shall be capable of shaking single 1, 2, and 5 gallon cans, or one case of four each 1 gallon cans.

3. The equipment shall be powered by a 1/3 horsepower air motor.

4. The equipment shipping weight shall not exceed 215 pounds.

B. Features and Construction

1. The equipment frame shall be fabricated of heavy steel channel drilled for floor mounting.

2. The equipment shall include a threaded top clamp mechanism for sealing and locking cans to be shaken with recessed bottom clamp to minimize slippage.

3. The equipment shall include a completely enclosed drive mechanism in a bolted sheet steel housing and permanently lubricated ball bearings and eccentric mechanism.

C. Controls: Controls shall include a 0 to 30 minute timer switch.

D. Utilities Available: ¼ inch compressed air; 80 PSI, 25 CFM.

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer's standard color.

F. Manufacturers Reference

1. Prime manufacturer: This specification is based on the equipment identified in Section F.1.a and b below to establish an acceptable standard of quality, performance and features.

a. Midwest Mixing, Incorporated 5630 Pleasant Boulevard Chicago Ridge, Illinois 60415 Telephone: (708) 422-8100



b. Model: No. 6A


a. Red Devil Equipment Company 7150 Boone Avenue Brooklyn Park, Minnesota 55428 Telephone: (612) 533-2969

b. Miracle Paint Rejuvenator Company, Inc. 500 North Robert Street St. Paul, Minnesota 55101 Telephone: (651) 222-1900

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Coordinate location of rough-in work and utility stub-outs to assure match with equipment to be installed.

B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all items.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman or Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect.

B. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions:

1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with any noted special positioning requirements generally level, plumb, and at right angles to adjacent work.

2. Fitting: Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform in a neat, accurate, professional manner without damaging equipment or adjacent work.

3. Anchorage: Attach equipment securely to prevent damage resulting from inadequate fastenings. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.

4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaces shall be free of tool marks, scratches, blemishes, and stains.



3.03 TESTING

A. After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specifications in the presence of the Architect using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Touch-up damage to painted finishes.

B. Wipe and clean equipment of any oil, grease, and solvents, and make ready for use.

C. Clean area around equipment installation and remove packing or installation debris from job site.

D. Notify Architect for acceptance inspection.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Direct the technical representative to provide specified hours of training to designated Owner's maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of the following equipment. Coordinate, with Owner, training schedule and list of personnel to be trained.

1. Paint Booth (Mark No. BP622): 8 hours.

2. Paint Equipment (Mark Nos. BP952): 1 hour.

B. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Owner's personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11510

SHOP EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK



1. CW500 WASHER, HI-PRESSURE, MANUAL W/ DETAIL GUNS (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. SH212 BUFFER/GRINDER, 8", W/PEDESTAL (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. SH237 DRILL PRESS, 20 INCH, VARIABLE SPEED (Ref. Part 2.03)

4. SH291 TANK, PARTS CLEANING, MEDIUM (Ref Part 2.05)

5. WF150 TABLE, WELDING, DOWNDRAFT, 4' BY 4’ (Ref. Part 2.06)

C. Roughing-in, installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.















B. Manufacturer's Representative:

1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufacturer's representative at site to supervise work related to equipment installation, check out and start up.


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data




1. Provide complete parts, operating, and maintenance manual covering equipment at time of installation including, but not limited to:


b. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing and compressed air systems.



e. List of original manufacturer's parts, including suppliers' part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity and local parts and service source.


C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 -General Requirements of these specifications.






C. Substitution Approval: Manufacturers listed for each equipment item may bid without submittal for that item. Manufacturers not listed shall submit for approval in accordance with "Instructions to Bidders". Prior to installation, submittals for each equipment item by Mark Number shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.07 WARRANTY



C. Defects shall include, but not be limited to noisy, rough, or substandard operation; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of finish.




A. Deliver equipment in manufacturer's containers, appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and storage in humid, dusty conditions.



1.09 LABELING



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WASHER, HI- PRESSURE, MANUAL WITH DETAIL GUNS Equipment Mark Number: CW500

A. General Description

1. System shall include the following equipment:



a. Manual high pressure water spraying guns, 2 each.

b. Manual detergent application guns, 2 each.

c. Wall brackets for manual spray equipment.

d. Handgun control panel, 1 each.

e. High pressure/hot water washer, 1 each

f. Detergent pump for manual chemical application, 1 each.

g. Automatic detergent mixing, 1 each.

h. Degreasing applicator, 1 each.

i. High pressure piping between pumps and the festoon system in the chassis wash bay.

B. Physical Data

1. The overall dimensions of the installed system shall not exceed 75 feet long by 21 feet 6 inches.

2. High pressure washer shall be 9.5 GPM, 2500 PSI with a 20 HP motor and natural gas burner, Hotsy Model 5835SS or equal.

3. The unit shall have the capability to supply two guns simultaneously.


1. Manual high pressure water spraying and detergent application guns:

a. System shall have two (2) 3/8 inch high pressure hoses for 2500 PSI.

b. Unit hose length shall be adapted for the size of the wash bay.

c. Guns shall have durable grips.

d. Hoses shall be mounted on galvanized steel trolleys with ball bearings.

e. Trolleys shall run on stainless steel C- profile rails attached to console along both sides of the wash bay.

f. All hoses shall be mounted with stamped adaptors.

2. Wall brackets for manual spray equipment:

a. Brackets shall be constructed with hot dipped galvanized wall brackets for C- profiles.

b. Brackets shall be mounted with a C/C measurement of 6 feet 6 inches.

3. Detergent pump for manual chemical application:



a. Applicator shall have two (2) 3/8 inch high pressure hoses for 2140 PSI.



d. Hoses shall be mounted on galvanized steel trolleys with ball bearings on both sides of the wash bay.

e. Horizontal multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be constructed of corrosion- resistant stainless steel.

f. Pump shall have a capacity of 6.6 GPM at 60 PSI.

g. Pump shall have a direct drive single- phase electric motor with carbon- type shaft seal.

h. Pump shall a washer- type relief valve with a bypass function.

4. Automatic detergent mixing:

a. Unit shall have a 10 gallon buffer tank for mixing detergent with automatic mixing of concentrated detergent and water. Pre- determined mix of water and detergent shall automatically refill through valve operated by a float.

b. Mixture shall be able to be changed for winter or summer conditions by changing the nozzle in suction hose of the detergent. Equipment shall be delivered with a large number of color- coded nozzles, where each color represents a specific mixture.

c. To prevent separation of detergent from water when equipment is inactive, the equipment shall be delivered with a bypass- type mixture device from pump to tank.

d. Hot dipped galvanized stand.

5. Degreasing applicator:

a. Applicator shall have two (2) 3/8 inch high pressure hoses for 2140 PSI.



d. Hoses shall be mounted on galvanized steel trolleys with ball bearings on both sides of the wash bay.

e. Applicator shall have a detergent pump with an automatic start.

f. Horizontal multi- stage centrifugal pump shall be constructed of corrosion- resistant stainless steel.

g. Pump shall have a capacity of 6.6 GPM at 60 PSI.



h. Pump shall have a direct drive single- phase electric motor with carbon- type shaft seal.

i. Pump shall a washer- type relief valve with a bypass function.

j. Unit shall have a 10 gallon buffer tank for mixing detergent with automatic mixing of concentrated detergent and water. Pre- determined mix of water and detergent shall automatically refill through valve operated by a float.

k. Mixture shall be able to be changed for winter or summer conditions by changing the nozzle in suction hose of the detergent. Equipment shall be delivered with a large number of color- coded nozzles, where each color represents a specific mixture.

l. To prevent separation of detergent from water when equipment is inactive, the equipment shall be delivered with a bypass- type mixture device from pump to tank.

m. Hot dipped galvanized stand.

6. Piping: Manufacturer/supplier shall provide all interconnecting piping between pumping equipment located in equipment room and the spraying equipment located in the chassis wash bay. Piping shall be sized and rated for delivery rates and pressures specified for pumps and spraying equipment.

D. Control Panel

1. A pre-wired, standard voltage, 3 phase, 4-wire, 60 HZ electrical control panel shall be provided for the equipment. Each control panel shall contain a through-the-door main breaker, a 24 volt transformer, and all electrical motor starting equipment and relays necessary to operate the equipment. The control panel shall be UL approved. Each motor circuit shall contain overload protection in all three phases.

2. The control panel shall be wired to provide control for manual operation.

3. The panel shall have a NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure and shall be mounted in an accessible location protected from direct water spray. All push buttons, selector switches, shall be oil tight.

E. Accessories for High Pressure Washer

1. Draft diverter, 12 inches, natural gas: Hotsy or equal, one each.

2. Unit shall be supplied with a stand, to insure flame height is 18 inches AFF as required by code, one each.

3. Primary Remote Station: Hotsy or equal, one each.

4. Auto Start/Stop with Thermal Shut Down: The unit shall be pre-assembled with auto start/stop controls that automatically starts and stops machine with the trigger gun and shuts down the machine after use if the operator fails to do so, Hotsy or equal, 1 each.

F. Utilities Available



1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 30 Amp, 20 HP

2. Water: 1 inch, 10 GPM, 60 PSI

3. Natural Gas: 939,000 BTU

G. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer's standard color.

H. Manufacturers Reference

1. Prime manufacturer: This specification is based on the equipment identified in Section G.1.a and b below to establish an acceptable standard of quality, performance and features.

a. Westmatic Corporation 485 Cayuga Road Cheekowaga, New York 14225 Telephone: (866) 747-4567

b. Model: Manual Spray Equipment (Detail Guns) with specified High Pressure/Hot Water washer and accessories


a. Alkota Cleaning Systems, Inc. P.O. Box 228 Alcester, South Dakota 57001 Telephone: (605) 934-2222

b. Landa Water Cleaning Systems 4275 NW Pacific Rim Boulevard Camas, Washington 98607 Telephone: (360) 833-9100

2.02 BUFFER/GRINDER, 8 INCH, WITH PEDESTAL Equipment Mark Number: SH212

A. Physical Data

1. The unit overall dimensions shall not exceed 22 inches wide, 13 inches deep, and 45 inches high.

2. The base dimensions shall not exceed 17 inches wide and 13 inches deep.

3. The unit shall be equipped with a 3/4 horsepower, 3,600 RPM motor.

4. The wheels shall be a minimum 8 inches in diameter and 1 inch thick with a bore of 3/4 inch. Distance between wheels shall be a minimum of 17 inches.

5. The height to the center of spindle shall be minimum 39 inches.



6. The unit weight shall be a nominal 193 pounds.


1. All motors shall be totally enclosed, direct drive type rated for continuous service, with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

2. Unit shall be configured with two grinding wheels; one coarse and one medium grit.

3. Unit shall be configured with adjustable wheel guards for wheel wear, and provided with rear exhaust outlets, adjustable work rests, and spark breakers.

4. The unit shall be configured with a quenching pot and tool tray mounted on grinder base between wheels.

5. Unit shall be provided with connections for hookup to junction box.

6. Pedestal shall be one piece and fabricated of cast iron.

C. Controls: Pushbutton safety starter shall have ON/OFF pushbutton switch Cincinnati No. 000-501; motor thermal overload and under voltage protection. Switching and other electrical controls shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

D. Accessories: Illuminated eyeshields installed with transformer, Cincinnati No. 000-131, one set of two each per grinder.

E. Utilities Available: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 3/4 HP.

F. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer's standard color.

G. Manufacturers Reference

1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified in G.1.a and b below to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features, and construction.

a. Cincinnati Electrical Tool, Incorporated 5928 State Route 128 Cleves, Ohio 45002 Telephone: (513) 941-5000 b. Model: 102-134 with Accessories


a. Delta International Machinery Corporation



246 Alpha Drive Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15238 Telephone: (412) 963-2400

b. Baldor Electric Company P.O. Box 2400 Fort Smith, Arkansas 72902-2400 Telephone: (501) 646-4711

2.03 DRILL PRESS, 20 INCH, VARIABLE SPEED Equipment Mark Number: SH237

A. Physical Data

1. The equipment shall have nominal dimensions of 22 inches wide, 35 inches deep, and 69 inches high.

2. The table working surface shall be 22 inches wide and 19 inches deep and shall include oil troughs.

3. The working dimensions from the spindle to the table shall be a minimum of 33- 1/8 inches.

4. The working dimensions from the spindle to the base shall be a minimum of 43- 3/8 inches.

5. The column shall be 4 inch diameter and have a wall thickness of .5 inches.

6. The 2.5 inch diameter quill shall have a stroke of 6-1/2 inches.

7. The equipment shall be capable of drilling a minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter hole in cast iron and 7/8 inch diameter hole in mild steel.

8. The equipment shall operate with a 1- ½ horsepower motor.

9. Equipment shall be provided with variable speeds from 150 to 2,000 RPM.

10. The nominal weight shall not exceed 650 pounds.


1. The equipment shall be capable of positive speed changing while the machine is running and shall hold the speed setting constant under all load conditions.

2. The belt drive shall be self aligning.

3. The work table shall be manufactured of cast iron with clamping slots and coolant trough.

4. The work table shall be equipped with a tilt scale providing accurate readings at all ranges of tilt either left or right.

5. The working table shall have a positioning lock for stabilizing table at any position.



6. The work table shall be adjusted using a hand gear crank.

7. Motor assembly shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled.

8. Depth control shall be provided by a self-locking and adjustable depth stop.

9. Spoke wheels shall provide manual speed selection and feed function controls.

C. Controls: The unit shall be manufactured with a push-button which shall include a shrouded START button and a protruding STOP button. Switches and other electrical controls shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

D. Utilities Available: 460 VAC, 1 phase, 1- ½ HP, 7.5A.




a. Clausing Industrial, Inc. 1819 North Pitcher Street Kalamazoo, Michigan 49007-1822 Telephone: (616) 345-7155

b. Model: 2277


a. Powermatic Corporation 619 Morrison Road McMinnville, Tennessee 37110 Telephone: (931) 473-5551

b. Jet Tools, a WMH Company 427 New Sanford Road La Vergene, Tennessee 37086- 4184 Telephone: (615) 793- 8900

2.04 TANK, PARTS CLEANING, MEDIUM Equipment Mark Number: SH291

A. Physical Data

1. The unit overall dimensions shall not exceed 42 inches wide, 30 inches deep, and 34 inches high (64 inches high with lid open).

2. The tank interior working dimensions shall not exceed 30 inches wide, 29 inches deep, and 30 inches high.



3. The pump flow capacity shall be a minimum of 40 GPM through the manifold or 18 GPM through the hose.

4. The unit operating fluid capacity shall be a minimum of 50 gallons and maximum of 85 gallons.

5. The unit shall be equipped with a 1/3 horsepower centrifugal pump.


1. All motors shall be totally enclosed, direct drive type rated for continuous service, with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

2. Unit shall be equipped with pistol grip flush nozzle with flexible neoprene hose. Nozzle shall be adjustable for light spray or solid stream.

3. Unit shall be equipped with extra-long flexible metal faucet flow flush hose.

4. Unit shall be equipped with bi-level work shelves, one constructed of heavy expanded metal and one of solid flanged steel.

5. Safety cover shall be fusible link and spring-loaded.

6. Unit shall allow three-way cleaning action selector valve to permit using pump, pistol grip nozzle, or flush hose simultaneously or singularly.

7. Unit shall be equipped with washable 40 mesh screen filter which filters solvent flow through both hoses.

8. Unit shall be equipped with hydro-jet manifold to disperse cleansing pump flow throughout the tank.

9. Unit shall be equipped with drain plug and two removable sludge trays.

C. Controls: Recessed ON/OFF pushbutton switch; motor thermal overload and under voltage protection. Switching and other electrical controls shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

D. Utilities Available: 115 VAC, 1 phase, 1/3 HP.



1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified in F.1.a and b below to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features, and construction.

a. Graymills Corporation 3705 North Lincoln Avenue Chicago, Illinois 60613 Telephone: (773) 248-6825



b. Model: 800-A


a. Kleer-Flo Company 15151 Technology Drive Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55344-2294 Telephone: (612) 934-2555

2.05 TABLE, WELDING, DOWNDRAFT, 4 X 4 Equipment Mark Number: WF150


1. The downdraft ventilation/ exhaust system shall capture approximately 70 percent of welding and/ or cutting smoke and fumes generated at least 12- 18 inches above the platen surface, by pulling smoke and fumes down through the platen’s square holes. The exhaust blowers shall be industrial grade and have weather resistant covers. The system shall accommodate use of these applications: MIG, Flux- Cored, Stick, TIG, Plasma Cutting, OXY- Acetylene Cutting, ARcair Gouging, and Grinding. The system shall be suitable for galvanized, stainless, aluminum and other metals where toxic fumes may occur.

2. The system shall consist of the following main components:

a. Platen.

b. Steel Stand.

c. Exhaust Blower with accessories.

B. Physical Data

1. Table overall dimensions, with stand, shall not exceed 48 inches wide, 48 inches deep, and 34 inches high.

2. Platen holes shall be maximum 1-3/4 inches square.

3. Platen shall be minimum 2 inches thick.

4. Table weight, with stand, shall be approximately 2800 pounds.


1. Platen:

a. Platen shall have machined shoulders allowing exact, completely flush set up of multiple platen beds, Heads of mounting bolts shall be recessed below the working surface.

b. Platen shall be constructed of machined cast iron.



c. Platen shall be constructed with cross ribbing in both directions to minimize warping and sagging.

d. Platen shall be constructed with cast-in sockets on the bottom of every square hole to allow operators fast and easy bolt-down of tools.

2. Steel Stand:

a. Unit shall be furnished with steel stand, diffuser box, and plenum. Weldsale Model WS44DDS or equal. Stand legs shall be constructed of 6 inch by 6 inch by 3/8 inch steel angle. Stand footpads shall be constructed of ½ inch steel plate.

3. Exhaust Blower:

a. Unit shall be provided with Exhaust Blower, Weldsale Model WS44EB or equal, 1 each.

b. Exhaust blower shall produce minimum 3025 CFM.

c. Blower shall have weather resistant cover for exterior mounting.

D. Utilities Required

1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 2 HP.

2. Exhaust: 10” diameter.

E. Accessories

1. Die stamped 90 degree elbows, Weldsale Model WS44DE or equal, 1 each.

2. Round spiral pipe, 10 inches in diameter by 60 inches long, hangers, and coupler, Weldsale, Model WS44RP, 1 each.

3. Spur reducer, Weldsale Model WS44SPR or equal, 1 each.

F. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard colors.


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified in G.1.a and b below to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features, and construction.

a. Weldsale Company 2151 Dreer Street Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19125 Telephone: (215) 739-7474

b. Model: WS44DD system with including all components noted above.




a. Acorn Iron and Supply Co., Inc. 915 North Delaware Avenue Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19123 Telephone: (215) 922-7070

b. Broadhead Garrett 100 Paragon Parkway Mansfield, Ohio 44903 Telephone: (419) 589-8222

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and manufacturer's instructions:



3. Anchorage: Attach equipment securely to floor, as directed by Architect, to prevent damage resulting from inadequate fastening. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces


3.03 TESTING

A. After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with all specified features in the presence of the Architect using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANUP







3.05 TRAINING


1. Wash Equipment (Mark No. CW500): 1 hour.

2. Shop Equipment (Mark No. SH211, SH237): 1 hour each.

3. Welding Table (Mark No. WF150): 1 hour.


END OF SECTION



SECTION 11515

FABRICATED EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK


B. Equipment items as listed below by Equipment Mark Number

1. LC251 DROP, UTILITY, TRAPEZE, WITH DATA (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. ST350 WORKBENCH, HEAVY DUTY (Ref. Part 2.02)

C. Contractor shall fabricate and provide item per specifications and as shown on Drawings.

D. Contractor shall install equipment with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.





D. Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports are included in 16110.






A. Experience: Equipment shall be manufactured by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of five years experience performing similar fabrication techniques.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.



1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warrant work specified herein for one year from substantial completion against defects in materials, function and workmanship.


C. Defects shall include, but not be limited to loose, damaged, and missing parts and abnormal deterioration of finish.



A. Deliver equipment appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and storage in humid, dusty conditions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DROP, UTILITY, TRAPEZE, WITH DATA Equipment Mark Number: LC251

A. Physical Data

1. The trapeze frame dimensions shall not exceed 24 inches wide, 2-1/4 inches deep, and 72 inches high.

2. The trapeze overall dimensions, less hangers, shall not exceed 24 inches wide, 12 inches deep, and 76 inches high.

3. Installation height shall be 78 inches to the lowest point of the assembly, excluding accessories.


1. The frame shall be constructed of 2-inch by 1-inch by 1/8-inch rectangular hollow structural steel.

2. Frame supports shall be welded link, ¼-inch proof coil chain. Supports shall be attached to the trapeze frame with eyebolts and to overhead structure with appropriate shackles.

3. Frame welds shall be continuous meeting American Welding Society standards.



4. Electrical: Frame shall be provided with 120 VAC quadraplex outlet and rigid conduit shall be mounted to frame with U-bolt supports. Flexible conduit shall be used to connect building and trapeze rigid conduit.

5. Air: Trapeze air piping and principle devices shall be as follows starting at building air piping.

a. Cut-off valve shall be ¾-inch, Graco No. 107141 or approved equal, one each at connection to building air piping.

b. Flexible airline shall be used to connect building and trapeze piping.

c. Main leg and horizontal manifold shall be ¾-inch black steel pipe.

d. Drain valve shall be ¾-inch, Graco No. 106151 or approved equal, one each at bottom of main leg.

e. Filter/regulator/lubricator shall be installed as shown, Graco No. 217073 or approved equal.

f. Quick disconnect couplings shall be 3/8-inch female, Graco No 110198, and ½-inch female, Graco No. 110199, installed as shown with elbows as needed for couplings to point downward.

6. Voice/Data: Frame shall be provided with a combination voice/data outlet. Cable on frame shall be run in plastic pipe. Data shall be CAT 5E or better cable. Phone and data can be run in same conduit.

7. Piping shall be substantially bracketed to frame including inlet and outlet piping from air filter/regulator/lubricator assembly.

8. All materials, fittings, and connectors as required for a complete and operable installation shall be provided by Contractor.

C. Finish: Cover frame with epoxy compatible zinc chromate primer and finish coat of safety yellow epoxy enamel.

D. Utilities Available

1. Electrical: 120 VAC, 20 A.

2. Compressed air: ¾-inch, 120 PSI.

3. Voice/Data

E. Manufacturers Reference: Fabricated item as shown on drawings.

2.02 WORKBENCH, HEAVY DUTY Equipment Mark Number: ST350

A. Physical Data



1. Overall bench dimensions shall not exceed 72 inches wide, 32 inches deep, and 34 inches high.

2. Bench capacity shall be minimum 2,500 pounds.

3. Work surface thickness shall be 3/8 inch.


1. Workbench legs shall be fabricated of 3 by 3 by 3/16 inch steel tubing.

2. Leg braces shall be fabricated of 3 by ¼ inch steel plate continuously welded to tubing.

3. Top braces shall be fabricated of 3 by 3 by ¼ inch angle steel with continuous welds to tubing.

4. Workbench top shall be 3/8 inch plate steel with 50 percent minimum electrical welds to top braces. Corners of top shall be a 2 inch radius. All edges shall be ground smooth.

C. Finish: Cover all exposed steel surfaces including both sides of top, braces, and legs with one coat zinc chromate primer and two coats epoxy paint in Owner's choice of colors.

D. Manufacturer's Reference: Fabricated item as shown on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Coordinate location of rough-in work and utility stub-outs to assure match and/or non-interference with equipment to be installed.


3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions:

1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with any noted special positioning requirements generally level, plumb and at right angles to adjacent work.


3. Anchorage: Attach equipment securely to floor, as directed by Architect, to prevent damage resulting from inadequate fastening. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.




3.03 TESTING


3.04 CLEANUP

A. Touch-up damage to finishes.




END OF SECTION



SECTION 11700 FIRST AID KITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all first aid kits as specified herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer for approval, as provided in Section 01300, shop drawings showing kit construction, finishes, hanging devices and details and description of kit contents.


A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store all materials within unopened packages in a manner that prevents damage from the environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.


A. First Aid Kit shall be Industrial type, Model No. 8172 by Johnson and Johnson Health Care Division, similar by Halco First Aid Products (Division of Norton Company), Zee Medical Services, American White Cross or equal.

B. Furnish two (2) wall mounted First Aid Kits for installation on the Project, one (1) located

within Break Room A-111 of the Bus Maintenance Building and one (1) located within Fuel Office

B-105 of the Bus Storage Building; or as directed by the Engineer. C. Minimum contents of each fully stocked First Aid Kit shall contain the following supplies:

Quantity

Item Description

1 Sheer bandages 1-inch by 3-inch (package of 100)

1 Sheer extra large bandages 2-inch by 4-inch (package of 25)

2 Flexible fabric bandages 1-inch by 3-inch (package of 50)

1 Flexible fabric knuckle bandages (package of 40)

1 Flexible fingertip bandages (package of 25)

1 Telfa non-stick pads – small (package of 12)

2 Telfa non-stick pads – medium (package of 12)

2 4-inch by 4-inch gauze (package of 10)



Quantity

Item Description

4 Elastic roll cling gauze 2 Oval eye pads 2

Triangular bandage

2 Bandage compress

2 Tri-cut medical tape

1 Flex elastic bandage

1 Antiseptic spray

1 Antiseptic wipes (package of 50)

6 Burn gel – foil packs

1 3-in-1 antibiotic first aid ointment (package of 25)

2 Ammonia inhalants (package of 10)

2 Instant ice pack – small

2 Eye drops (1-fluid oz)

2 Eye wash

2 Eye and skin buffering solution

1 Scissors

1 Tweezers

2 Latex gloves - individually pkg

1 First aid guide

1 Finger splint

1 Butterfly closures (package of 100)

1 Insect sting swabs

1 Blood borne pathogen kit

1 Extra strength non-aspirin (package of 250)

1 Antacid (package of 250)

1 Pain reliever aspirin product (package of 250)

1 Blood clotting spray

1 Hydrocortisone cream (package of 25)

1 Alcohol wipes

1 Elastic tape

D. Provide each kit with a minimum of two stainless steel hanging devices designed to allow removal of kit from wall without special tools.


A. Install hanging devices and kits when and where directed by the Engineer. Installation shall be secure and level.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11900

INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Installation of Owner furnished equipment delineated in Section 11000 -Equipment Schedule from storage or existing facilities to new facility.

B. Roughing-in, installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, repairs, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.

C. Piping, wiring, and switching between equipment and utilities.

D. For lubrication equipment provide all valves, fittings, couplers, hangers, and support structure required for complete and operable installation.

E. All coordination and scheduling of examination, relocation, installation, and testing of all delineated existing equipment to be relocated as shown in Section 11000 - Equipment Schedule shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BP976 WASHER, PAINT SPRAY EQUIPMENT

2.02 FF402 TANK, STORAGE, CUBE, 1,000 GALLON (ATF, EO, EC, GO, WO)

2.03 LC307 PUMP, AIR PISTON (CG), W/HOIST

2.04 LC420 REEL BANK (CG, WWS)

2.05 LC450 REEL BANK (ATF, CG, EC, EO, GO)

2.06 SH255 PRESS, 50 TON, ELECTRIC/ HYDRAULIC

END OF SECTION



SECTION 12512

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats at all window locations shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Aluminum storefront and entrance systems are included in Section 08400.

B. Fire-rated window systems are included in Section 08910.

C. Glazing is included in Section 08800.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings showing details of construction and erection of blinds.

B. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide for each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.

1. Slat: Not less than 12-inches long.

2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6-inches long.

3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16-inches wide by 24-inches long.

4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12-inches wide.

5. Cornice: Full-size unit, not less than 12-inches wide.

E. Maintenance Data: Provide for horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.



1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and the ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Engineer of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; “Riviera 1”.

2. Hunter Douglas; “CX80 1” mini aluminum blinds”.

3. Spring Window Fashion LP; “Bali Classic 1”.


B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper as recommended by the Manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.

1. Width: 1 inch.

a. Spacing: Not less than every 0.77-inch.

2. Thickness: Not less than 0.008-inch.

3. Finish: One color, to be selected by Engineer and approved by the Owner from the Manufacturer’s standard available options.

a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following:

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail.

2. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.



3. Light-blocking lower back lip.

4. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of slat; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill.

E. Size: Overall size of blinds shall be as provided as required to fit within windows as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall field verify the actual size of windows to ensure a proper fit and custom size blinds shall be provided if required for the window sizes or shapes used on the project.

F. Maximum Light-Blocking Blinds: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps if slats are tilted closed; with tight tape spacing indicated and slats with minimal-sized rout holes for ladders hidden and placed near back edge for maximum slat overlap; with headrail and bottom rail extended and formed for light-tight joints between rail and adjacent slats or construction.

1. Finish: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats.

G. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag.

1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string.

H. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing over-rotation, and linkage rod, and the following:

1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand.

2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind.

3. Tilt: Full.

J. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel.

K. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long.

L. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Left side of headrail, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Valance: PVC strip

1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats.

N. Mounting: Ceiling mounting, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated.



1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds the spacing recommended by the Manufacturer for the weight and size of blind.

O. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

P. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.

Q. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from Manufacturer's full range.

2.02 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Concealed Components: Non-corrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4-inch per side or 1/2- inch total, plus or minus 1/8-inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4-inch, plus or minus 1/8-inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.

C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated.

D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

E. Color-Coated Finish

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply Manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds at the following window locations on the Project:

1. Purchase Office A-102

2. Manager Office A-104

3. Break Room A-111



B. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Spacing: Locate blinds so that exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1-inch to the interior face of glass.

2. Support: Install intermediate support(s) as required to prevent any deflection in headrail assembly.

3. Clearance: Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for the proper operation of hardware at operable window openings where applicable.

4. Recessed: Install headrail concealed within blind pocket.

C. Installation of blinds shall not damage the integrity of fire-rated windows and any adjacent or direct mounting of blinds must not void the required UL approval for fire tested window assemblies.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

B. All components shall be correctly adjusted and demonstrated to be smoothly operating.


A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to the Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to the Manufacturer and Installer that ensure all horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Engineer, before time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 12690 FLOOR MATS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install loose-laid floor mats

at locations as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Electrical equipment is included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing construction and erection details. Submittal shall include the

following:

1. Two samples each of floor mats for approval of color, texture and material. Sample size shall be approximately 12-inches by 12-inches.



B. Store all flooring materials within unopened packages in a manner that prevents damage from

the environment and construction operations. C. Handle and protect in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide a Manufacturer’s warranty on all floor mats that extends for a minimum time period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion on the Project.



C. National Electric Code (NEC)



D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC),

2009 Edition

H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Loose Laid Floor Mats

1. Mats shall be 1/4-inch thick, 4-feet wide, prime quality rubber compound, free of calendaring and curing defects. Mats shall have narrow continuous longitudinal corrugations and shall be black in color.

2. Mats shall be electric insulating conforming to ASTM D178, Type II, Class 2 and shall be

so branded continuously on back.

3. Provide mats in one continuous length on the access side of all electrical equipment. Mat size shall be equal to the equipment base length. Bevel edges of mats or attach electric insulating rubber reducing strips as approved to provide a non-trip perimeter.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the area to receive floor mats and shall field verify the existing

conditions prior to fabrication or installation of the mats. B. Coordinate with the size of electrical equipment at each Electric Room location and provide

floor mats that closely match the dimensions for each length of floor mounted equipment. B. Commencement of floor mat installation shall constitute acceptance of the existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set loose-laid floor mats in place within the following locations when construction work has been completed and where directed by the Engineer or Owner:

1. Emergency Electrical Room A-106 2. Electrical Room A-109



3. Electrical Room A-126 4. Electrical Room B-107

B. Floor mats shall be installed flush with finished floor surface to prevent tripping hazards.

3.03 CLEANING A. Clean and protect floor mats as recommended by the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION


111119-81700 August 5, 2013 Joint Operations Facility Phase I 13110-1 ISSUE FOR RE-BID

SECTION 13110

CATHODIC PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section applies to underground piping required in the installation of the Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) station, and the following. 1. Design, supply and install a cathodic protection system including anodes, dielectric

flanges, and test boxes for underground pipe between the compressor compound and the fuel islands.

2. Delegated Design: The cathodic protection system outlined herein and in the drawings is

intended to be a guide only, and a minimum standard of supply. Provide drawings and calculations from the system supplier to confirm its adequacy. If required, conduct soil tests to determine the resistivity and corrosiveness of the soil. The system is to be designed to protect the piping over a minimum 30 year life.

B. The Contract Time and milestone dates for this project represent an accelerated construction schedule. Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work.


A. ASME SA106B – Piping Steel in PWR Environments


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Coating and component manufacturers shall have at least 10 years of experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Field and Shop Personnel Qualifications: Field personnel shall be skilled and experienced in the handling and installation of required components

C. Installer Qualifications: Piping subcontractor shall indicate proof of the successful completion of a minimum of 5 projects in the previous 3 years that required cathodic protection. The piping subcontractor shall provide references and staffing lists for these projects and a proposed staffing list for this project to demonstrate that proposed staff will have the required experience

D. Regulatory Requirements: Notify Owner and local plumbing inspection agency at least 14 days in advance of backfilling all piping to allow physical inspection before field coating of welds or burying pipes

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with applicable provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements. 1. Qualifications as stated in Section 1.03 above:

a. Manufacturer experience b. Field and shop personnel experience c. Piping subcontractor experience



2. Cathodic protection system design.


A. Comply with the following: 1. Pipe shall be handled in a manner to prevent possible damage to walls or ends or scratching

of the outside diameter. Pipe shall be unloaded by lifting at both ends of one length to avoid bending and placing the section carefully upon a padded skid such that the entire length is uniformly supported.

2. Handling, storage and transportation of the coated pipe shall be done to ensure no damage

is caused to the coated pipe. If susceptible to damage by light, pipe shall be protected from sunlight.

3. Coating damage caused by improper handling, storage, or transportation of the coated pipe

by the coater or his agent shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. 4. Each length of coated pipe shall be sealed at each end with a plastic vented end cap. Caps

shall be installed such that they will not fall off during transportation, handling, and storage of the pipe.

5. Coated pipe shall be installed within 90 days of being coated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS

A. Buried piping and risers shall be factory coated with a two layer corrosion protection system with a Butyl Rubber adhesive and Polyethylene Topcoat conforming to: 1. CSA Z245.21 2. NACE SP0185 3. ISO 9001:2008 4. ISO 10080

B. Sections of underground piping that are not coated, such as welds, cadwelds, and risers, shall be coated with hot-applied coal tar pipeline coating, using the primer and installation procedure as required by the tape supplier.

C. Coating Application for Mill Coated Pipe: 1. Coating shall be applied in the plant to coating manufacturer’s cleaning, coating and

handling standards. 2. Pipe Markings: Prior to application of the coating, information from the pipe shall be

marked on the coated pipe. Information shall include, as a minimum, the material and grade per ASME SA106B, the pipe size, wall thickness, mill code and heat number.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WORK

A. Cathodic Protection: Follow the cathodic protection design provided by their corrosion designer, with minimum design standards as outlined below and in the drawing package: 1. A minimum of one 60 pound high potential magnesium anode, complete with AWG #12

TW75 orange, solid copper lead wire, shall be installed on each riser to provide cathodic protection.

2. Anodes shall be buried horizontally at least 36 inches lower than the underground piping

and a minimum of 3 feet away from the pipe. 3. The anode wire shall be cadwelded to one of the underground pipes; each pipe shall have at

least two anodes on it. Pipes shall be jumpered together at the station compound end. Jumpers between pipes shall be made above ground. Test boxes shall be supplied and installed in locations approved by the Engineer.

4. Preparing Anode Wire:

a. The anode wire shall be stripped far enough to permit a copper sleeve to be crimped

on the wire. b. Wire #10 and smaller requires a copper sleeve to prevent burning wire off due to

intense heat when cadweld charge is fired.

B. Cadwelding 1. Preparation:

a. Pipe/Fittings:

1) The clean and dry surface to be cadwelded to ensure a good weld.

b. Cadweld Gun (Mold): Select proper mold based on the type of weld.

2. Procedure: Provide cadwelding in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

C. Dielectric Isolation 1. Each end of underground piping shall be fully isolated from the remainder of the system at

the flanges. 2. The central gasket for raised face flanges shall be fabricated from fabric reinforced

phenolic (micarta) material. Isolation washers, except when cast integrally with sleeves, shall be fabricated from fabric reinforced phenolic (micarta) material and shall be 0.125 inch thick.



D. Hot-applied Coal Tar Pipeline Coating: 1. Surface Preparation: Pipe and fittings that are not precoated shall be cleaned of loose mill

coating, scale rust, slag, spatter, moisture and foreign material down to bare metal prior to applying the appropriate coating.

2. Coating Application:

a. Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer specifications and

procedures. b. When applying the coating:

1) Extend the coal tar coating far enough to start one complete spiral over the pipe

coating 2) Having bonded the end of the coal tar coating firmly to the surface of the pipe

coating, the coal tar coating shall proceed spirally using a minimum 1/2 inch overlap while continuing to heat the coating side of the tape a) Apply moderate tension on each wrap to guarantee good adhesion.

3. Risers:

a. If the entire riser is bare, it must have the first layer of coal tar coating applied as

described above. In addition, it shall be double wrapped (i.e.. a second layer applied) to a minimum of 12 inches above and below grade. If a flange or fitting will be installed less than 12 inches above grade, the double layer of coal tar coating shall be applied up to the bottom of the flange or fitting.

b. Risers shall be wrapped from the bottom up.

4. Coating of Cadwelds:

a. Clean pipe of loose scale, slag, spatter, moisture and foreign material. b. Brush cadweld with wire brush to ensure loose scale is removed. c. Ensure that the cadweld temperature is cool prior to applying mastic or coal tar

coating.


A. Factory Inspections and Coating Repairs 1. A coating defect inspection, using an approved holiday detector, shall be made at the

coating plant on all pipe coated, in accordance with this section. The peak voltage of the detector shall be between 12,000 and 15,000 volts measured with the electrode in contact with the coated pipe.



2. The inspection above shall be performed on coated pipe prior to the pipe being placed in storage or being shipped out, whichever is first. Defects found at this time shall be repaired by the coater at no cost to the Owner. The coater shall furnish written certification that the pipe has been applied and inspected in accordance with this Section, and that the pipe and coating are free of defects.

3. Perform coating repairs as follows: Completely remove all of the adhesive and

polyethylene coating. Clean the pipe and apply new adhesive and polyethylene as per the procedure in this Section.

B. Field Inspections and Coating Repairs 1. A coating defect inspection, using an approved holiday detector, shall be made in the field

on underground pipe, immediately prior to backfill, in accordance with this Section. The peak voltage of the detector shall be between 12,000 and 15,000 volts measured with the electrode in contact with the coated pipe.

2. Defects found at this time shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. Furnish written

certification that the pipe has been inspected in accordance with this Section, and that the pipe and coating are free of defects.

3. Perform coating repairs as follows: Completely remove adhesive and polyethylene around

the circumference of the pipe and 4 inches in longitudinal length. Clean the pipe and apply coal tar coating per the procedure in this Section.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13120 FUEL ISLAND CANOPY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete a fuel island canopy suitable for the dispensing of both Gasoline and Compressed Natural Gas (CNG), that is ready for operation and with all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

C. Fuel Island Canopy is a freestanding, pre-engineered metal canopy with integral concrete foundation, steel framing, metal roof, internal roof drains and leaders, vertical fascia, metal ceiling and flush mounted lighting. Exterior fuel canopy shall be designed to match the size, profile, and two post configuration shown on the Drawings.

1. Canopy shall be designed and manufactured to prevent the accumulation or entrapment of ignitable vapors. 2. Canopy design shall be coordinated with the associated Gasoline and CNG fuel dispensing systems that are specified on the Project.

D. Canopy system shall be compliant with NFPA 52, NFPA 30 and NFPA 30A codes.

E. At job completion, vendor shall supply Owner with one (1) full size reproducible set of “As-

Built” drawings.

F. The vendor shall furnish to the Engineer a letter signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer (PE), registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, certifying that the structural framing and fuel island canopy proposed meets the design criteria set forth by the Engineer.

G. The vendor shall furnish to the Engineer two sets of design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer (PE) registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania for the project records.

H. Coordinate the Work of the Fuel Island Canopy with the Fuel Storage and Dispensing System. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork in accordance with Division 2. B. Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete foundations and anchor-bolt installation work is included

in Division 3.



C. Metal fabrications in accordance with Division 5. D. Metal wall panel systems are included in Section 07420. E. Signage is included in Section 10400. F. Fire extinguishers are included in Section 10522. G. Fuel management system is included Section 13140. H. Fuel storage tank is included in Section 13200. I. Fuel storage and dispensing systems are included in Section 13215. J. Roof drain conductors are included in Division 2. K. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 16. L. Electrical classifications are included on Drawing E-3. M. Structural design criteria are included on Drawing S-1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, shop drawings and

product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details for the fuel island canopy, fittings and appurtenances provided. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Statement of Qualifications. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article

to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, must have an annual audit and review of their quality assurance program, and other information specified.

3. Warrantees provided by the Manufacturer. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following pre-engineered metal canopy system components.

1. Structural-framing system. 2. Roof panels. 3. Fascia panels. 4. Drainage System.



C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Canopy supplier to furnish complete canopy CAD drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the canopy will be installed. 1. For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to

attach metal canopy to foundation. 3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary

framing. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

4. Roof Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels on support framing, details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.

5. Concrete Foundation Drawings: Provide Foundation Plan with footing locations, sizes,

reinforcement, and material properties along with footing details, anchor bolt and base plate details.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors

available for each type of the following products with factory-applied color finishes:

1. Deck panels. 2. Fascia Panels

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal canopy systems certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE), registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Include the following:

a. Name and location of Project. b. Name of Manufacturer. c. Overhead Canopy dimensions, including width, length and height. d. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for

cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. e. Governing building code and year of edition. f. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, roof snow load, wind loads/speeds and

exposure and seismic design category.



g. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load

importance factors. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Fuel Island Canopy shall comply with all federal, state, county, and local codes.



D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)




4. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

5. NFPA 704 – Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials

E. Department of Transportation (DOT)

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

I. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA)

J. National Electric Code (NEC)


L. Uniform Construction Code (UCC) Regulation, based on the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition

M. International Fire Code (IFC), 2009 Edition

N. International Fuel Gas Code, 2009 Edition

O. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply




A. Source Limitations: Obtain pre-engineered metal canopy through one source from a single manufacturer who will manufacture and install the canopy and provide both post-installation inspection and installation inspection report.

B. Erector Qualifications: An erector with a minimum of twenty years of experienced who has

specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to the Manufacturer.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A Professional Engineer (PE) who is licensed in the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal fuel canopy systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A minimum of twenty five (25) years of documented experience in

manufacturing overhead canopy systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer to have an annual audit of its quality assurance program. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. E. Product Options: Information on the Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements

for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

F. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Engineer, except with written

approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to the Engineer for review.

G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. All welding shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—

Steel” (with E70XX Electrodes).

2. All structural shop welding shall be done by certified Manufacturer’s welders.

3. Steel shop connections will be welded and field connections will be bolted unless otherwise noted on plans. Manufacturer, with the approval of the project engineer, may change shop welds to field welds.

4. All slag shall be cleaned from all welds and inspected. Steel to be painted with rust inhibitive primer (Red oxide).



H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Electrical equipment installed on these canopies must be suitable for Class 1, Division 2 hazardous locations.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Field Measurements: The General Contractor shall verify actual locations of walls, columns,

and other construction contiguous with pre-engineered metal canopy by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. The General Contractor shall prepare for and pour the concrete footers for the pre-engineered

metal canopy. Manufacturer shall furnish recommended footing AutoCAD drawings and prints and rebar details for concrete floors, as well as provide anchor bolts to be embedded in footer. Such items shall be delivered to the project site in time for installation.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Roof and wall panels shall be well packaged for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Handling: Unload, store, and erect roof and wall panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting,

and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight

and ventilated covering. Store roof and wall panels as recommended by the Manufacturer to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide a complete metal overhead canopy system, manufacturer's standard mutually

dependent components and assemblies that form a metal overhead canopy system. The metal overhead canopy system must be capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. Include primary and secondary framing, roof and wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated, including those in this Article. Provide the design for concrete foundations to be installed by the General Contractor.

1. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining

grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and with a 30-minute working time. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout to be provided and installed by the General Contractor.

B. Metal Overhead Canopy System Design: Of size, spacing, slope, and spans indicated, and as

follows:

1. Frame Type: Fixed Base Cantilevered Steel Tube Columns



2. Clear Height: Provide as indicated by nominal height on the Drawings. 3. Support Locations: Provide as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard lap-seam roof panels. 5. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard.

C. Structural Performance: Provide metal canopy systems capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Design Loads: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Live Loads: See Drawings

3. Wind Loads: Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed as required for the Project location and per the Building Code in effect for the Project.

4. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other than the weight of overhead canopy system for permanent items.

5. Load Combinations: Design metal canopy systems to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load combinations.

6. Deflection Limits: Based on Manufacturer standards D. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal canopy systems capable of withstanding the

effects of earthquake motions determined according to the Building Code in effect for this Project.

1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into

foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Site Conditions: Must meet manufacturer’s Required Job Site Conditions for Installation.

1. Anchor bolts must be installed per erection drawings. Footings need to be free of debris and anchor bolt threads undamaged

2. All work surfaces must be even with no exposed product lines. 1.10 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights. Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.



1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panels: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace roof and fascia panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking peeling, and loss of film integrity.

1. Warranty Period for Roof Panels: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of the Manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of

establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. Manufacturer’s providing evidence of meeting the defined criteria may be considered as an approved equal.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer of canopy materials shall be TFC Canopy; or approved equal. 1. TFC Canopy a division of Centurion Industries, Inc. 1107 North Taylor Road Garrett, Indiana 46738 (800) 832-3212 2.03 MATERIALS

A. Structural Framing Materials 1. Structural-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M 50.0 ksi minimum yield strength.

2. Steel Plate, Bar, or Strip: ASTM A 529/A 529M; 50.0 ksi minimum yield strength.

3. Structural square HSS tube steel: A500 grade B; 46.0 ksi minimum yield strength.

4. Structural round HSS tube steel: A500 grade B; 42.0 ksi minimum yield strength

5. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade 40, with G60 (Z180)

coating designation.



6. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Pre-painted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot dip process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 and the following requirements: a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Grade 40, with G60 (Z180)

coating designation.

7. High-Strength bolt assemblies: ASTM A 325, Type 1. a. Finish: Uncoated.

8. Anchor Rod assemblies: ASTM F1554, Grade 55. a. Finish: Uncoated.

9. Primers: As selected by the Manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems, capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats as follows: a. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, non-photochemically

reactive, rust-inhibiting primer.

B. Deck Materials

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Pre-painted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot dip process and pre-painted with polyester paint and compatible primer on the face side and wash coat on the back side by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 and the following requirements: a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180) coating designation;

Grade 40.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat, mill finish. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy

assembly and disassembly.

1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

2. Fabricate framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Cold-formed members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.

B. Primary Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base

plates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.



1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. 2. Brace compression flange of primary framing by angles connected between frame web and

purlin or girt, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.

3. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime all

primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. C. Secondary Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll

forming or break-forming, with base plates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.

1. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. 2. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime

secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. 2.05 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Canopy Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural-framing system, designed to withstand

required loads, fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide frames with attachment plates and splice members, factory drilled for field-bolted

assembly. B. Bracing: Provide lateral bracing as follows:

1. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.

2.06 ROOF PANELS A. 20 gauge x 16” wide x 3” smooth or embossed steel panels. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly

including trim, copings, corner units, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Panels shall have a finish side coated with a full coat of polyester paint baked on over a

polyester primer. Reverse side shall be protected by a white wash coat baked on over a polyester primer.

2.07 COMPOSITE METAL FASCIA PANELS A. Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc., Composite Materials Division

1. Contact: 401 Volvo Parkway, Chesapeake, VA 23320; Telephone (800) 422-7270; Fax: (757) 436-1896; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.alpolic-usa.com.



B. Proprietary Product: ALPOLIC Composite Metal Panels

1. Standard ALPOLIC composite metal panels.

C. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. D. Composite Metal Fascia Panel Materials 1. Composite Metal Panels:

a. Core: Thermoplastic material that meets performance characteristics specified when

fabricated into composite assembly.

b. Face Sheets: Aluminum alloy 3105 H14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick and as follows: 1) Coil coated with a fluoropolymer paint finish that meets or exceeds values

expressed in AAMA 2605 where relevant to coil coatings.

c. Bond Integrity: Tested for resistance to delamination as follows:

1) Bond Strength (ASTM C297): 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) minimum. 2) Peel Strength (ASTM D1781): 22 in-lb/in (100 N-m/m) minimum. 3) No degradation in bond performance after 8 hours of submersion in boiling water

and after 21 days of immersion in water at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C).

d. Fire Performance:

1) Flamespread (ASTM E84): 5 maximum. 2) Smoke Developed (ASTM E84): 15 maximum. 3) Comply with UL 879 4) V-O Rating: Comply with UL 94.

2. Production Tolerances:

a. Width: +/- 0.04 inch/3 feet (1 mm/m).

b. Length: +/- 0.04 inch/3 feet (1 mm/m). c. Thickness (3 mm Panel): +/- 0.008 inch (0.2 mm). d. Bow: Maximum 0.5% length or width. e. Squareness: Maximum 0.2 inch (5.1 mm).



f. Edges of sheets shall be square and trimmed with no displacement of aluminum sheets

or protrusion of core material.

3. Panel Thickness: 3 mm E. Composite Metal Fascia Panels Accessories

1. General: Provide fabricator’s standard accessories, including fasteners, clips, anchorage devices and attachments.

2. Attach fascia panel to structural frame with a cold formed channel.

2.08 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL CANOPY

A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of Manufacturer's standard, mutually dependent components that form a completely pre-engineered canopy, ready for construction on Project site. Pre-engineered metal canopy shall be capable of withstanding structural and other loads indicated, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Austin Mohawk and Company, Inc., Utica, NY 13501, (800) 765-3110; or approved equal. 1. Provide a 2-bay, drive-through type roof canopy system with 2 center support columns,

30-feet wide by 50-feet long by 18-feet high, as indicated on the Drawings. Fascia shall be 3-feet in high around the canopy perimeter with a height clearance of 15-feet minimum provided under the elevated roof system.

2. Canopy and fascia must be designed to prevent any accumulation of natural gas in the event of a release under the canopy.

C. Structural Canopy Facia: 2-inch Laminated Foam Core Fascia - Panel face is 24 gauge hot-

dipped galvanized steel with a baked enamel finish. Finishes shall be warranted against cracking, checking, peeling or adhesion failure. The foam core specified to be 2”- 1# expanded virgin polystyrene and backing shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel. 1. Provide applied exterior metal wall panel system to the exposed vertical surfaces of the

fascia around the perimeter of the metal canopy system. Wall panels shall include all necessary corner and perimeter trim, as well as fasteners with gaskets that are approved by the fuel canopy Manufacturer.

2. Exterior metal panel system shall consist of 7/8-inch thick steel panels with vertical rib

profile, installed vertically using concealed fasteners. Finish color shall match the exterior metal wall and roof panels on the adjacent building. Color shall be ‘Silversmith’ by Centria Architectural Products; or approved equal, as selected by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.



D. Provide four (4) 250W metal halide equivalent LED light fixtures, suited for the electrical classification where the fuel canopy is located, rated for 277 VAC. All electrical components shall be sealed and rated to meet all applicable NEMA requirements for classified locations.

E. Signage: Shall be provided on all four (4) sides of the canopy fascia to identify the maximum

height clearance provided below the underside of fuel canopy system. Signage shall consist of pressure sensitive letter type, ASI LTV Series, applied as directed by the Engineer. All letters shall be minimum 4-inches high, in all upper case letters, and shall read (CLEARANCE 14’-6’). Letters shall be die-cut from 3.5 mil thick, pressure sensitive vinyl film and pre-spaced on carrier tape. The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners. Color shall be white or black, as selected by Engineer for maximum visibility, depending on the color of substrate.

1. NFPA Hazard Identification Signage and other Caution Signage shall be provided as specified in Section 10400.

2.09 FINISHES

A. Comply with National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale that impair bond of erection materials.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

3.02 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Erect metal canopy system according to manufacturer's written instructions and erection drawings.

B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal canopy system manufacturer's professional engineer.

C. Structural-Steel Erection Tolerances: Comply with erection tolerance limits of AISC 303-05, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Set structural framing in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.



D. Base plates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing

materials and roughen surfaces before setting base plates and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates and bearing plates.

1. Set base plates and bearing plates for structural members on setting nuts. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed

surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout to be provided and installed by the General Contractor.

a. Comply with the Manufacturer's written instructions for proprietary grout materials.

E. Align and adjust framing members before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Make adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of

structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

F. Primary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to

a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts. Tighten bolts by turn-of-the-nut method.

G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary

framing to primary framing using clips, non-high-strength bolts, and or screws as indicated on the Manufacturer’s erection drawings.

H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof where indicated on the Manufacturer’s erection drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The fuel island canopy shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. A work area is required extending 10 feet beyond buildings and canopies in all directions to the extent practical. The work area shall be flat, comprised of hard packed soil or gravel, asphalt, or concrete, and free of open excavation, debris, construction equipment and construction workers. An additional flat work space a minimum of 25 feet by 25 feet or as practical shall be provided adjacent to the canopy and/or building for unloading and storing materials.

C. Set pre-engineered metal canopy plumb and aligned. Level base plates true to plane with full bearing on concrete bases.



D. Fasten pre-engineered metal canopy columns to anchor bolts. Provide Corrosion resistant

stainless steel fasteners. 3.04 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide roof panels of full length when possible:

1. Field cutting by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten eave end of roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal

expansion and contraction. 3. Flash and seal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all

openings. Fasten with self drilling and tapping screws. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to tighten

without damaging screw threads, or panels. 5. Use manufacturer supplied fasteners for exterior applications 6. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment.

B. Deck Panels: Fasten roof panels to purlins with clip system that requires no “Thru Panel” fasteners. 1. “Deck Clips” must be tested and rated to meet the most critical effects of load factors and

load combinations. 3.05 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gutters, downspouts, and other accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions, with positive anchorage and weather tight mounting. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Separations: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating

concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.



3.06 COMPOSITE METAL FASCIA PANELS INSTALLATION

A. General: Install Aluminum composite panels, and other accessories according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Install panels plumb, level and true, in compliance with fabricator’s recommendations. 2. Anchor panels securely in place, in accordance with fabricator’s approved shop drawings. 3. Comply with fabricator’s instructions for installation of concealed fasteners and with

provisions of Section 07901 for the installation of joint sealers. 4. Installation Tolerances: Maximum deviation from horizontal and vertical alignment of

installed panels: 0.25 inch in 20 feet (6.4 mm in 6.1 m), noncumulative.

3.07 FASTENERS A. Anchor Bolts

1. Anchor bolts or foundation bolts are to be set in accordance with approved Manufactures

drawings. They must not vary from the size and dimensions shown on the erection AutoCAD drawings. Use of a plywood template is recommended. Remove template prior to column erection.

2. Anchor bolts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, aggregate grout, non-

corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

B. Bolted Connections

1. All structural erection bolts to conform to ASTM A325. 2. A minimum diameter of ¾ inch erection bolts shall be used for crossbeam-to-column

connections and a minimum of 5/8 inch diameter bolts for all other connections. 3. All drilled holes in structural steel shall be deburred. 4. Flat structural washers (minimum of one) shall be used on all bolted connections. 5. All bolts shall be tightened using AISC turn-of-the-nut method (unless otherwise

specified).

C. Screws 1. Fastening shall be performed per installation prints provided by the manufacturer.



2. Installation screws shall be furnished with electrode deposited cadmium coating unless

otherwise noted. 3. Self-drilling and self-tapping screws shall have a sufficient cut point and a ½-inch O.D.

dished tapping metal backed neoprene washer.

D. Prior to steel erection of any kind, the General Contractor shall grade, back-fill and otherwise prepare the job site to allow for rolling scaffold and ensure safe working conditions including the removal or relocation of overhead power lines.

E. Any grade or elevation situations which deviate from the approved manufacturer’s plans must

be conveyed to the manufacturer prior to fabrication. F. All anchor bolts and/ or leveling plates shall be set within ¼-inch tolerance on layout and grade

level. G. Temporary electrical power is to be provided. H. Connect electrical power service to power distribution system according to requirements

specified in Division 16. I. Dumpster for trash and debris shall be provided by the General Contractor.

3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime welds,

bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning,

SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of shop-painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates are included in Division 9 Section "Painting."

D. Roof and Wall Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as

soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



3.03 WARRANTY

A. One-year warranty on products of its manufacture to be free of defects in materials, leaks, and workmanship for one year from date of shipment. 5-year limited warranty on anodized Aluminum surfaces against oxidation, a 20-year limited warranty against peeling, flaking, and chipping of deck and fascia when properly maintained by owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13140

FLUID MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK



1. SI300 FLUID MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AUTOMATED (Ref. Part 2.01)

C. Roughing-in, installation of equipment and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.







E. Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum) are included in Section 16120.






B. Manufacturer's Representative





1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data











C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications. Shop drawings shall include all wiring and conduit layouts including all transponders, receivers, exit loops, keypads, pulsers, and controller unit. Drawings shall be specific to this project.

















1.09 LABELING



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AUTOMATED Equipment Mark Number: SI300


1. System parameters: Installation shall provide automatic recording of vehicle number, mileage and amounts of diesel fuel, DEF, engine oil, transmission fluid and coolant dispensed to buses and unleaded gasoline dispensed to buses and support vehicles at each service (fueling) position. Additional system equipment shall provide electronic recording of vehicle number, mileage, engine hours and operating and maintenance data from buses equipped with electronic engines and electronic transmissions as defined under special equipment in this specification. This system shall provide a fully functional interface to an underground tank-monitoring controller for monitoring of fluids stored in underground tanks, and fluid deliveries. The system shall provide software for fluid use and inventory reconciliation reports. The system shall permit add-on expansion of additional liquid products, if desired by



owner at a future date, as well as integration with like systems at other facilities with interface capability to a remote central computer. This system shall be fully compatible with like systems at other facilities. The system shall automatically collect, record, transmit, compile and print data as specified herein.

2. System equipment: Provide items and components to perform the above functions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Remote island head (RIH) Unit located at each bus/support vehicle service position. System shall include one spare RIH unit.

b. RIH Controller Unit with internal storage and communication capabilities to provide an interface with existing Information System/Vehicle Maintenance Software by means of direct connection or network interface.

c. Fixed Receivers: Fixed Radio Frequency Receivers shall be located in each bus service position for capture of vehicle number and other data defined in this specification (see special equipment section for complete description.

d. Control valves and pulse generators not included in other specification sections or contract drawings that are required by Fluid Management System (FMS). Locate as required per each service position.

e. Vehicle Detectors, installed in each diesel fueling position, connected to RIH to automatically terminate transaction.

f. Software and programs as necessary for functioning of RIH and system controller server. Software shall verify accurate data transmission using reasonableness checks, parity checks, and other checks required to ensure accurate data transmission. Data in system controller server shall not be erased until accurate data transmission and storage verification is received from the host computer during a transmission session.

g. Vehicle-mounted equipment shall be supplied as required for automatic capture of vehicle number, mileage, engine hours and electronic engine data, where applicable.

B. System Operation

1. The fluid management system (FMS) shall provide mileage, engine hours, diesel fuel, gasoline, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), engine oil, transmission fluid and coolant record management by automatically recording, storing, compiling, and printing formatted transaction data continuously on a 24-hour per day basis.

2. The system shall be automatic except for operator functions specified herein. System shall operate unattended except for normal service operator inputs, operator file update, and periodic status monitoring. Operator transactions shall be in conversational language. Input and output codes shall not be used, unless format and storage capacities absolutely dictate their use. All operator transactions and printer messages shall be defined in plain language and be bound in a system manual.

3. The system shall verify all bus or vehicle identification inputs against bus and vehicle authorization file.



4. The system shall verify all employee identification inputs against employee authorization file.

5. FMS shall utilize an HTML-based graphical user interface to provide the system controller server operator with ability to:

a. Set current date and time.

b. Delete vehicle authorization from file.

c. Enter vehicle authorization and vehicle definition parameters in file.

d. Enter employee authorization information in file.

e. Delete employee from file.

f. Place RIH units off and on line.

g. Set fluid quantity limits for exception reports.

h. Set engine oil type by vehicle for selective oil control.

i. Set request and schedule print option for each report.

j. Request Status of Fluid Storage tanks.

k. Request Record of Fluid Receipts.

l. Request Tank Alarm History.

m. Define Storage Tank Parameters.

n. Produce all reports defined in the System Reporting Requirements section of these specifications.

6. FMS shall provide the capability for all of the above data to be downloaded from a host CPU to the System Controller on demand from the host CPU.

7. Sequence of Operations: RIH display shall prompt fueling operator, in conversational language, for each data item to be entered by the fueling operator.

a. System shall be activated by entry of the fueling operator ID number after the bus or vehicle has stopped in the service bay

b. After entry of a valid employee ID number, the RIH unit shall electronically activate the radio frequency receiver unit to electronically read the vehicle number and other data as defined in the Special Equipment Section of these specifications. In the support vehicle positions, the fueling operator shall be prompted to enter the vehicle number to initiate data capture, if equipped.

c. At this point solenoid valves in the fuel, DEF, engine oil, coolant, and ATF lines shall be energized and opened by the RIH unit. Only the products specified for the fueling vehicle should be energized.



d. Also at this point the RIH unit shall send a request signal to the fuel pump control panel. This signal shall initiate the starter circuit for the submerged fuel pumps.

e. As fuel, DEF, engine oil, ATF, or coolant are dispensed into bus or vehicle, quantities of products dispensed shall be sensed and recorded initially by the RIH unit. Electronic pulser/transducers shall sense fuel and DEF in tenths of a gallon, and other liquids in tenths of a quart.

f. Diesel fuel dispensed shall be displayed on the RIH display as follows:

1) FUEL D<XXX> YYYYY where D is diesel, XXX is the calculated expected fuel required quantity, if available, and YYYYY is the actual quantity in tenths of fuel dispensed.

g. Successive pushing of the SEND button shall cycle the display to show quantities of each of the other fluids dispensed.

h. Products and quantities of each dispensed item shall be transmitted by the RIH unit to the system controller server, which shall have capability to retain a minimum of 500,000 fueling transactions.

i. Upon completion of servicing, vehicle traffic sensor installed in each service position shall sense departure of bus or vehicle and cause RIH to terminate transaction.

j. Transaction shall be automatically terminated at end of any 5-minute interval following cessation of servicing operation.

8. Sequence of Operations - Diesel Service Position Back-up Mode of Operation: The sequence of operations for servicing vehicles which are not equipped with an electronic module or for which there is a malfunction in the on-board electronic module, shall be as follows:

a. The sequence shall begin as described above with the entry of the employee ID and the use of the radio frequency receiver unit.

b. After a short time-out period, during which a vehicle number and mileage are not received by any receiver unit, the RIH unit will automatically proceed with a prompt ENTER VEH NUMBER and require entry through the keypad of a valid vehicle number for the vehicle to be serviced.

c. For the next step the system shall provide the user the capability to ENTER MILEAGE or the system shall automatically calculate mileage based upon fuel dispensed to the vehicle if a mileage is not entered.

d. At this point solenoid valves in the diesel, engine oils, coolant, and ATF lines shall be energized and opened by the RIH unit and succeeding steps would be identical to those described in the preceding paragraph.

9. Sequence of Operations - Support Vehicle Fueling Position

a. The sequence of operations for the support vehicle fueling position shall be the same as the Diesel service position with the exception that transaction termination shall be by time out or pushing RESET button only.




1. Remote Island Heads

a. The RIH unit shall:

1) Be located at each diesel and gasoline service position for diesel, gasoline, DEF, ATF, coolant and oil operation.

2) Be the interface between fueling operator, dispenser, traffic sensors, and FMS.

3) Have the capability to enter into a stand-alone mode of operation should the communication to the system controller be lost or disrupted. RIH shall continue to authorize and record fueling transactions, store the data and transfer data to the system controller upon reestablished communication.

4) Be weatherproof, vandal resistant, and tamper proof.

5) Be plug-in, remove and replace, maintainable.

6) Consist of push-button console with display, mounted on upright stand.

7) Operate in temperature range from 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F, and relative humidity range of 5 to 95 per cent, non-condensing.

8) Communicate with system controller through a Local Area Network connection. Each RIH unit shall communicate via standard Ethernet protocol, independent of any other RIH unit.

b. Keypad shall be a sealed, flat, pressure sensitive unit providing 16 push-buttons permanently labeled as follows:

1) 0-9 digits.

2) SEND (terminates data entry).

3) CLEAR (clears display).

4) RESET (restarts entry sequence).

5) YES (for entry validation).

6) ID (displays vehicle number).

7) NO (for entry validation).

c. Display shall be alphanumeric, backlit LCD unit with a shatterproof glass face, allowing up to 16 characters to be displayed.

d. Two-Position Key Switch: Provide key-operated switch on face of RIH panel to allow selection of either manual mode or automatic mode. One key shall operate all RIH units. Provide two keys to each RIH unit, but all units shall be keyed alike.

2. System Controller

a. Controller shall be, at a minimum, a rack-mounted IBM PC Compatible running supported FMS software on a Microsoft Windows Server 2008 platform. Controller shall be capable of controlling, receiving, and recording data produced by all RIH units as specified in a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 database. System Controller shall operate



independently of agency CPU and communicate with all RIH units through Local Area Network connection only.

b. Controller shall include manufacturer’s software, which shall be a web-browser (HTML) based software for generating reports, viewing vehicle data, employee data, facility data and service data without compromising the integrity of the System database. Such software shall include varying levels of security to limit user access.

c. Controller shall accept fueling data, verify vehicle and employee authorization, and store data. Controller and its RIH units shall be capable of allowing simultaneous transactions of all products without possibility of any confusion of data.

d. Controller memory shall be nondestructive in the event of power outage, and similar malfunctions.

e. Controller shall be capable of being connected to, and automatically transmit data to a host computer system. Connection to Agency Host computer shall be through network connection.

f. Controller shall provide an Ethernet connection for LAN interface to a Tank Monitoring Controller (supplied by others) for inventory and fluid receipt data. Provide software for this Controller to provide complete fluid use, receipt and reconciliation reports and detailed tank status reports.

g. Controller shall have capability to store 500,000 separate fueling transactions and 15,000 vehicle authorization numbers.

h. Controller shall have capability to store 15,000 employee ID authorization numbers.

i. Controller shall have capability to store the mileage input at the last servicing, the calculated miles per gallon for each authorized vehicle, an upper and lower limit of acceptable miles per gallon for each vehicle, and shall be capable of performing the data verification checks and calculations described in the "SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS" section of this specification.

3. System Reporting Requirements: The following reports shall be the minimum provided by the RIH Controller software:

a. Detailed Transaction Report: All data associated with a fueling transaction. Format shall be aligned for ease of reading, and shall include the transaction number for monitoring of real-time activities by management. Asterisks shall denote excess consumption of products dispensed. Reports shall consist of:

1) Date and time of transaction.

2) Transaction number.

3) Totals by service lane.

4) Vehicle number.

5) Employee ID.

6) Manual or electronic entry of vehicle number.



7) Fuel type.

8) Fuel quantity.

9) Engine oil quantity.

10) ATF quantity.

11) Coolant quantity.

12) DEF quantity

b. A daily transaction report shall be printed upon request and shall consist of the entire previous day’s transactions by fleet, shift, service lane, facility, vehicle number and employee number.

c. A daily report shall be generated which indicates all buses or vehicles, which have not been fueled at a specified time and date.

d. A transaction Year-to-Date and Month-to-Date - by commodity, on request.

e. A Commodity Exception Report - by day, week or month, by commodity.

f. Unauthorized Vehicle Service Report: This report shall note transactions of those vehicles serviced that are not in the vehicle authorization file. An authorized code number shall replace vehicle number. This report is printed daily.

g. Vehicle Authorization Status Report: This report provides a master list, printed on request, of all valid vehicle numbers. The report shall indicate vehicle number, facility assignment, and fuel type.

h. Fueling Operator authorization Status Report: This report shall indicate the complete fueling worker authorization file by name, ID number, and facility assignment. The report shall be printed on request.

i. Tank Inventory Report - Shows total gallons of fluid, inches of fluid, inches of water, and temperature in degrees for each tank in the FMS.

j. Fluid Use, Receipt, and Inventory Report.

4. Traffic Sensors: Provide traffic sensor in each service position to sense departure of bus or vehicle. Traffic sensor shall consist of a Model SRF-55 Sonar-based proximity vehicle detector mounted overhead.

5. Fuel Pump Control Relay: Each Remote Island Head unit shall be supplied with a time-delay relay for Submerged Pump Control. Time-delay shall be a minimum of 15 minutes from transaction completion.

D. Special Equipment

1. Bus Mounted Data Recorder System

a. System shall include fixed radio frequency receiver unit positioned in each diesel bus service lane to allow electronic reading of bus number and other data defined in these specifications from vehicles equipped with bus-mounted data recorders. These receiver



units shall send a beacon signal that would cause the bus-mounted data recorder to transmit the vehicle number and other data (specified below) for that bus. The receiver unit shall receive such transmitted data, perform data verification checks, and transfer this information directly to the RIH unit.

b. Data Loggers (Bus-mounted): Included with the system shall be 180 bus-mounted data recorder units suitable for mounting on a transit bus and connecting directly to a J1708/1939 connector on the bus. The data loggers shall be programmable by the owner with vehicle number and codes for defining the set of data to be recorded and reported. Programming software and hardware shall be provided to allow the owner to program or re-program the bus-mounted data recorder units at any time. The data logger units shall include a minimum one-year warranty on all parts, including batteries. The data logger shall be programmed to respond to a beacon signal sent from a Receiver Unit and upon receipt of such beacon signal shall transmit via radio frequency the bus number and other defined data to t he Receiver Unit. The data logger shall provide the following capability, at a minimum:

1) Data always collected and reported:

a) Vehicle Number

b) Vehicle Total Mileage

c) Vehicle Total Engine Hours

2) Fault Indicators captured and reported: Fault Codes reported shall include Subsystem ID and Failure Mode Identifier as defined in SAEJ1587 documentation. Record the last 10 unique Active Fault Codes reported with the Date and Time of the beginning and ending of the last occurrence observed.

3) Last value observed: The data logger shall report the last value observed for 10 items. The user shall be able to define these 10 items using M.I.D. and P.I. D. codes as defined in SAEJ1587 documentation.

Examples: M.I.D. P.I.D.

Engine Idle Hours 128 235 Idle Fuel Used 128 346

4) Maximum and minimum value observed in 24 hours: The data logger shall report the maximum and minimum values observed during the previous 24 hour time period for 10 items defined using M.I.D. and P.I.D. codes. The date and time of the minimum and maximum occurrences shall also be reported. The user shall be able to define the codes for the items to be reported.

Examples: M.I.D. P.I.D.

Engine Coolant Temperature 128 110 Engine Oil Pressure 128 100 Engine Oil Temperature 128 175 Transmission Oil Temperature 130 177 Ambient Air Temperature 128 171



E. Controls: Key type ON-OFF switches shall be on all RIH and controller units. All system components shall be protected from overload and meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

F. Utilities Available: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 5 amps, dedicated line.



a. S & A Systems, Inc 992 Sids Road Rockwall, Texas 75032 Telephone: (972) 722-1009

b. Model: Integrated Fuel/Fluid Management, Underground Tank Monitoring, and Fluid Reconciliation system.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install equipment and wire in accordance with plans, shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions:



3. Anchorage: Attach equipment securely to prevent damage resulting from inadequate fastenings. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.




3.03 TESTING


3.04 CLEANUP





3.05 TRAINING


1. Fluid Management System (Mark No. SI300): 8 hours.


END OF SECTION



SECTION 13200

FACILITY GASOLINE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide a complete operational gasoline fueling system which includes underground storage tank, remote electronic fleet dispensers, underground containment piping, leak detection and monitoring system. System shall include, at a minimum, tank, dispenser, pump, and piping ac-cessories to include valves and fittings. Total gasoline fuel capacity shall be 20,000 gallons.

B. This Section includes gasoline distribution systems and the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping and tubing joining materials.

3. Piping specialties.

4. Valves.

5. Double wall fiberglass gasoline fuel UST.

6. Gasoline UST accessories.

7. Remote fleet gasoline dispensers.

8. Dispenser sump boxes, shear valves, hardware and accessories.

9. Submersible pumps.

10. Liquid-level gage system.

11. Leak-detection and monitoring system.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Electrical general provisions are included in Section 16000.

C. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110.

D. Wires and cables are included in Section 16120.



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. UST: Underground storage tank.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.

E. FRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic.


A. Delegated Design: Design restraint and anchors for gasoline piping, USTs, and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Also include, where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.

3. Each type and size of gasoline storage tank. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Gasoline storage tank accessories.

5. Fleet gasoline dispensers.



8. Dispenser containment sump.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which gasoline piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which gasoline piping and tanks are shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.



C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gasoline equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Gasoline system shall comply with the latest edtion’s of the following:

1. NFPA 30: Flammable and Combustible Liquids.

2. NFPA 30A: Automotive and Marine Service Stations.

3. International Fuel Gas Code.

B. American Petroleum Institute and Petroleum Equipment Institute Applicable Standards for Underground Storage Tanks.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

D. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection (DEP).


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for gasoline piping materials, installation, testing, and inspecting.

C. Comply with requirements of the EPA and the state of Pennsylvania’s Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) requirements and local authorities having jurisdiction. Include recording of gasoline storage tanks and monitoring of tanks and piping.


A. Lift and support gasoline storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate underground piping with utilities.



B. Coordinate piping and equipment with CNG piping and equipment.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gasoline storage tanks and flexible, double-containment piping and related equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Storage Tanks:

a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following when used for storage of gasoline at temperatures not exceeding 150 deg F:

1) Structural failures including cracking, breakup, and collapse.

b. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Double-Containment Piping and Related Equipment:

a. Failures due to defective materials or workmanship for materials installed together, including piping, dispenser sumps, entry boots, and sump mounting adapters.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and joining materials are applied in various services.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

b. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

c. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.

d. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.



2.02 DOUBLE-CONTAINMENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid, Double-Containment Piping: Comply with UL 971.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameron International, Dualoy 3000/LCX Coaxial or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Conley Corporation.

b. Perma-Pipe, Inc.

2. RTRP: ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997 fiberglass coaxial carrier and containment piping and mechanical couplings to seal carrier and containment piping or individually bonded joints.

a. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 2 and NPS 3: 150 psig.

b. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 4 and NPS 6: 125 psig. Compliance with UL 971 is not required for NPS 6 and larger piping.

c. Fittings: RTRF complying with ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997, and made by RTRP manufacturer; watertight sump entry boots, termination, or other end fittings.

3. Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting assemblies with provision for field installation of cable leak-detection system in annular space between carrier and containment piping.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.

1. Metallic Connectors

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) FLEX-ING, Inc.

2) Metraflex Company (The).

3) Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

b. Listed and labeled for aboveground and underground applications by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, or stainless-steel, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig.

e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping.



f. Maximum Length: 30 inches

g. Swivel end, 50-psig maximum operating pressure.

h. Factory-furnished anode.

B. Y-Pattern Strainers

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

C. Manual Air Vents

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.


7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.

B. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

2.05 MANUAL GASOLINE SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with UL 842.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule.



5. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with UL 842.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.



C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.

d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.



2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Anderson Greenwood; Division of Tyco Flow Control.

b. Fulflo Specialties, Inc.



c. Webster Fuel Pumps & Valves; a division of Capital City Tool, Inc.

2. Listed and labeled for gasoline service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.

4. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.

5. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.

6. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.

7. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.

8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig.

9. Relief Pressure Setting: 60 psig.

B. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Ameron International; Fiberglass Pipe Group.

b. Conley Corporation.

c. EMCO Wheaton; a Gardner Denver Company.

d. Environ Products, Inc.


3. Double poppet valve.

4. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.

5. Disk: FPM.

6. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel.

7. Stem: Plated brass.

8. O-Ring: FPM.

9. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass.

10. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F.

11. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire.



12. Air test port.

13. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig.

2.07 DOUBLE WALL FIBERGLASS UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Xerxes Corporation comparable product y one of the following: 1. Containment Solutions, Inc.

B. Description: Horizontal, FRP UST; UL 1316, double wall, with interstitial space and integral, hydrostatic, leak-detection and monitoring system.

C. Construction: the tank shall be of all fiberglass with tank laminates constructed of resin and fiberglass reinforcements without sand fillers. Tanks shall be inert to all petroleum products, and expected external ground contamination. Ribs shall be integrally cast into the tank body. Tanks shall bear the listing mark of the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL 58 and 1746 standards), Inc.

D. The tank shall be capable of the following loading conditions:

1. Internal load: Tank shall withstand 5 psi air pressure test with 5 to 1 safety factor. Contractor shall test each tank individually prior to installation as this is to test for leakage. Maximum test pressure is 5 psi.

2. Vacuum Test: Every tank shall be tested to 11.5 inches mercury vacuum by the tank manufacturer to assure structural integrity.

3. Surface Loads: Tank shall withstand surface AASHTO H-20 axle load when properly installed according to current manufacturer’s installation instruction (32,000 lb.)

4. External hydrostatic pressure: Tank shall withstand 7’ of overburden with the hole fully flooded with 5:1 safety factor against buckling.

5. Each fiberglass reinforced plastic strap for the tank shall be capable of withstanding the buoyancy load of 25,000 lb. for ten-foot (10’) tank diameter.

E. Provide fiberglass piping sump with fittings supplied with the tank. The piping sump shall be installed so that is suitable for monitoring the double wall piping system and containment of its product.

F. All tank fittings shall be 4-inch diameter standard as supplied by the tank manufacturer. All openings shall be fitted with plugs for shipment. The tank shall have openings for one each of the following:

1. Fill line with drop pipe and wear plate. The fill line to each storage tank shall enter at the top of the tank. The minimum diameter of the fill line shall be 3-in and the line shall extend to within 3-in of the tank bottom with an anti-splash deflector provided at the end of the fill line in the tank, or size as shown on drawing. Provide a tight fit fill adapter that shall be installed in a cast-iron manhole unit that allows differential settlement between the tank and the ground surface.



2. Vent/Overfill/Vapor Recovery.

3. In tank automatic gauging and inventory control.

4. Level sticking port with wear plate.

5. Excess water removal line.

6. Leak sensor monitoring.

7. Submersible pump and controls.

G. Tanks shall have an annular space between the primary and secondary shell walls to allow for free flow and containment of all leaked product from the primary tank. This space shall be dry for interstitial monitoring.

H. Provide lifting lugs capable of withstanding the weight of the tank with a safety factor of 3 to 1.

I. Storage tank shall be provided with a separate atmospheric vent conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 30. The vent pipe shall slope back to the tank and shall terminate at least 12 feet above grade or 2 feet above the roof of the adjacent building and shall be located so that discharged vapors will not enter the building openings or downspouts. Vent terminal locations as indicated on the drawings. Each vent terminal outlet shall be provided with a pressure and vacuum relief breather valve to provide sufficient vapor backpressure to ensure vapor recirculation between the fuel delivery truck and the storage tank. A dry disconnect adapter shall be provided to interconnect the tank vent system with the delivery truck vapor space. The size of the vent line connection shall match the equipment connections on the fuel delivery truck. Vent piping shall be 2 in minimum.

J. Capacities and Characteristics

1. Capacity: 20,000 gal.

2. Diameter: 10’-0”.

3. Length: 37’-9”.

K. Deadmen Reinforced Concrete Beam

1. Prefabricated deadmen shall be placed as shown on the drawings to anchors the storage tanks. The deadmen shall be pre-engineered and sized to each 20,000-gallon underground storage tank. Water-table height, number of containment sumps and burial depth must be considered.

2. The deadmen reinforced concrete beams must be designed according to the applicable American Concrete Institute code.

L. Spill Protection

1. Spill container shall be fifteen gallon capacity. Manhole shall have a cast iron ring with an integrally cast handle on a ductile lid. Manhole lid shall have an H-20 load rating.



M. Drop Tube Overfill

1. Drop tubes shall be designed to prevent the overfilling of underground storage tanks by providing a positive shut-off of product delivery. Shut-off valve shall be an integral part of the drop tube used for gravity filling. Drop tubes shall be cut at a 45-degree angle with Drop tube shall be cut at a 45-degree angle, with the top of cut no greater than 6" from the bottom of the tank. Overfill prevention for the storage tanks shall be achieved by means of a float valve in each tank. The automatic shut off device shall stop the flow of product being delivered to the tank when the tank is ninety percent (90%) full. Access shall be provided for servicing the float valve. Provide drop tube cap.

2. Provide an overfill protection stop valve, capable of stopping gasoline flow at 90 percent tank capacity.

N. Stage One Vapor Recovery

1. Stage One Vapor Recovery shall be achieved by means of a vapor check valve adapter, Universal 0611V or approved equal. The recovery shall be a dual point system

2.08 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Red Jacket model RJ 2HP submersible turbine or comparable product by one of the following:

1. F.E. Petro

B. Description: Comply with UL 79, UL 87, and UL 343.


2. Impeller: Turbine.

3. Housing and Volute: Cast iron.

4. Bearings: Bronze, self-lubricating.

5. Seals: Mechanical.

6. Shaft: Polished steel.

7. Suspension Piping: Telescoping to accommodate tank diameter.

8. Base: Steel.

9. Pressure Relief: Built in.

10. Discharge Check Valve: Built in.

11. Drive: Direct, close coupled.

12. Filter System: Particulate filter.



2.09 FLEET GASOLINE DISPENSER

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gilbarco Inc. Gasboy Atlas Series model 9153KXTW1 or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Wayne Dresser Inc.

B. Description: Remote electric fleet dispenser, metal cabinet construction, double nozzle, LCD displays, and fuel control system interface, for dispensing gasoline.

1. Cabinet Construction: Painted 13 gauge galvanized steel.

2. Panels: Removable 20 gauge stainless steel.

3. Maximum Working Pressure: 50 PSI

4. Display: Electric, 1” back-lighted LCD.

5. Computer Register: Electronic register; volume only display. Electronic totalizer displayed on LCD by magnetic switch.

6. Solenoid Valve: 1” solenoid valve for slow down preset operation.

7. Filter: Integrated internal spin on filter.

8. Discharge Connection: 1 NPS.

9. Inlet Connection: 1-1/2 NPS.

10. Interface: DC conduit and junction box.

11. Nozzle Position: Side mount.

12. Flow Rate: 22 GPM.

C. Fuel dispenser containment sump, fiberglass single wall with mounting frame for dispenser.

2.10 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide OMNTEC Manufacturing model MTG-F Kynar or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Caldwell Systems Corporation.

2. Highland Tank & Manufacturing Company, Inc.

3. INCON, Inc.

4. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.

B. Description: Flexible level probes, calibrated, liquid-level gage system complying with UL 1238 with probes or other sensors and remote annunciator panel.



C. Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-tank-level alarms, fuel indicator with registration in gallons, and overfill alarm. Include gage volume range that covers gasoline storage capacity. Panel location indicated on the drawings.

D. Controls: Electrical, operating on 120-V ac.

2.11 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM

A. Cable and Sensor System: Comply with UL 1238. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide OMNTEC

Manufacturing model BX-PDWS (tank interstitials) and model BX-PDS (containment sump) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Raychem Corp; Tyco Electronics Corporation.

b. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.

c. Veeder-Root; a Danaher Corporation Company.

2. Calibrated leak-detection and monitoring system with probes and other sensors and remote alarm panel for gasoline storage tanks including tank sumps, tank interstitial space, containment piping and dry well monitoring.

3. Include fittings and devices required for testing.

4. Controls: Electrical, operating on 120-V ac.

5. Calibrated, liquid-level gage complying with UL 1238 with probes or other sensors and remote annunciator panel.

B. Remote Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-tank-level alarms, fuel indicator with registration in gallons, and overfill alarm. Include gage volume range that covers gasoline storage capacity. Panel location indicated on the drawings.


2.12 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.


A. Pressure test and inspect gasoline storage tanks, after fabrication and before shipment, according to ASME and the following:

1. FRP USTs: UL 1316.

B. Affix standards organization's code stamp.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for gasoline piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gasoline to premises or piping section.

B. Comply with NFPA 30, NFPA 30A and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. System: Provide a complete, functional gasoline fueling system including double wall underground storage tank, leak detection and monitoring system, interconnecting piping, dispensers with dispensing nozzles. Design and installation shall comply with all local, state and federal codes. System configuration, valves, pumps and piping shall comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.05 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install underground gasoline piping buried at least 18 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

B. Install double-containment, gasoline pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent downward toward gasoline storage tank sump.

C. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward gasoline storage tank sump.

D. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls for liquid-tight joints.

E. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping connections to UST.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.

G. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

H. Install conduit underground as required for power and control systems.



3.06 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in accessible locations.

B. Protect valves from physical damage.

C. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating gasoline piping systems.

D. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return lines.

E. Install manual air vents at high points in gasoline piping.

F. Install emergency shutoff valves at dispensers.

G. Furnish and install all conduit and cable for valves.

3.07 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Submersible Pumps

1. Suspend pump from supply piping, anchor motor and piping to tank manway sump.

2. Provide electrical connections to pump.

3. Provide full port ball valve on discharge side of pump. Ball valve to be located within manway sump.

3.08 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

E. Flared Joints: Comply with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench according to fitting manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not over tighten.

F. Fiberglass-Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.



3.09 GASOLINE FUEL UST INSTALLATION

A. Excavate to sufficient depth for a minimum of 3 feet of earth cover from top of tank to finished grade. Allow for cast-ion place, concrete-ballast base plus 6 inches of sand or pea gravel between ballast base and tank. Extend excavation at least 12 inches around perimeter of tank.

B. Set tie-down eyelets for hold-down straps in concrete-ballast base and tie to reinforcing steel.

C. Place 6 inches of clean sand or pea gravel on top of concrete-ballast base.

D. Set tank on fill materials and install hold-down straps.

E. Connect piping.

F. Install tank leak-detection and monitoring devices.

G. Install containment sumps.

H. Backfill excavation with clean sand or pea gravel in 12-inch lifts and tamp backfill lift to consolidate.

I. Install filter mat between top of backfill material and earth fill.

J. Install FRP USTs with FRP hold-down straps, manhole extension, and manhole risers.

K. Fill storage tanks with fuel oil.

3.10 GASOLINE DISPENSER INSTALLATION

A. Set dispensing unit on concrete pad and anchor.

B. Install fiberglass containment sump under dispenser.

C. Provide shear valve mounted with containment sump.

D. Provide flexible pipe connection below shear valve located within containment sump.

E. Furnish and install all wiring and cables.

3.11 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building where indicated.

3.12 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install leak-detection and monitoring system. Install alarm panel inside building where indicated.

1. Double-Wall, Gasoline Storage Tanks: Install probes or use factory-installed integral probes in interstitial space.



2. Double-Containment, Gasoline Piping: Install leak-detection sensor probes in gasoline storage tank containment sumps and at low points in piping and in interstitial space of double-containment piping.

3. Install liquid-level gage.

4. Furnish and install all wiring and cables.

3.13 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.

C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and equipment.


A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, service meter, and earthquake valve.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gasoline piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. Terminate tracer wire in an accessible area, and identify as "tracer wire" for future use with plastic-laminate sign.

1. Piping: Over underground gasoline distribution piping.

2. Gasoline Storage Tanks: Over edges of each UST.

3.15 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING

A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).

d. Color: Gray.



B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Test and Inspections:

a. Tanks: Minimum hydrostatic or compressed-air test pressures for diesel fuel storage tanks that have not been factory tested and do not bear the ASME code stamp or a listing mark acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1) The primary tank shall be pressure tested to UL 142 Standard (minimum 3 to maximum 5 psi) at the factory, and shall be field-tested by the contractor to a maximum 3-psi, according to the company’s recommended testing procedure.

2) The secondary tank shall be tested liquid tight at the factory (minimum 3 to maximum 5 psi), and shall also be field-tested by the contractor to a maximum 3-psi according to the company’s field testing procedure.

b. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at highest point in system:

1) Gasoline Distribution Piping: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 30 minutes.

2) Gasoline, Double-Containment Piping:

a) Carrier Pipe: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 30 minutes.

b) Containment Conduit: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 60 minutes.

c. Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg for minimum 30 minutes.

d. Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in storage tanks to exceed 10 psig

3. Inspect and test gasoline piping according to NFPA 30A, "Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Test liquid-level gage for accuracy by manually measuring gasoline levels at not less than four different depths while filling tank and checking against gage indication.



5. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually operating sensors and checking against alarm panel indication.

6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

7. Bleed air from gasoline piping using manual air vents.

C. Provide final flush of the piping system to eliminate all initial particulate matter in the distribution piping. Then after flushing, fill the distribution piping system and allow a calcification period of a few days. Upon settlement, then flush the system again to ensure that the fluid piping system is completely ready for a quality maintenance use program.

D. Gasoline piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. The installation of underground storage tanks must have direct oversite by a DEP certified third party installer.

3.17 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain liquid-level gage systems, leak-detection and monitoring systems and diesel fuel dispensers.

3.18 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground gasoline piping shall be one of the following. Size indicated is carrier-pipe size.

1. Rigid, double-containment piping.

B. Underground gasoline-tank vent piping shall be the following:


C. Aboveground gasoline-tank vent piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. Vent piping exposed to view shall be painted.

D. Aboveground gasoline piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GASOLINE SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.



B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:


END OF SECTION



SECTION 13215

FACILITY DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide a complete operational diesel fueling system which includes underground storage tanks, submersible pumps, high flow tramway fueling system, above ground and underground containment piping and leak detection and monitoring system. System shall include, at a minimum, tank, tramway system, pump, and piping accessories to include valves, fittings, hangers, and access ladders. Diesel fuel capacity shall be 20,000 gallons.

B. This Section includes diesel fuel distribution systems and the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping and tubing joining materials.


4. Valves.

5. Double wall fiberglass diesel fuel USTs.

6. Diesel fuel USTs accessories.

7. Tramway fueling system.

8. Submersible pumps.

9. Posi/lock fueling system.



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Electrical general provisions are included in Section 16000.

C. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports are included in Section 16110.

D. Wires and cables are included in Section 16120.



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. UST: Underground storage tank.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

E. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.

F. FRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic.


A. Delegated Design: Design restraint and anchors for diesel fuel piping, USTs, and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Also include, where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.

3. Each type and size of diesel fuel storage tank. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Diesel fuel storage tank accessories.

5. Tramway fueling system.

6. Fleet diesel fuel dispenser accessories and hardware.

7. Posi/lock fueling system.





B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For diesel fuel piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer (in the State of Pennsylvania) responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of anchors.

2. Detail fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, and attachments of the same to building structure.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which diesel fuel piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which diesel fuel piping and tanks are shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For diesel fuel equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for diesel fuel piping materials, installation, testing, and inspecting.

C. Comply with requirements of the EPA and the State of Pennsylvania’s Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) Requirements and local authorities having jurisdiction. Include recording of diesel fuel storage tanks and monitoring of tanks and piping.


A. Lift and support diesel fuel storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of diesel fuel storage tanks and flexible, double-containment piping and related equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Storage Tanks

a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following when used for storage of diesel fuel at temperatures not exceeding 150 deg F:

1) Structural failures including cracking, breakup, and collapse.


2. Double-Containment Piping and Related Equipment

a. Failures due to defective materials or workmanship for materials installed together, including piping, dispenser sumps, entry boots, and sump mounting adapters.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and joining materials are applied in various services.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.



2.02 DOUBLE-CONTAINMENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid, Double-Containment Piping: Comply with UL 971.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameron International, Dualoy 3000/LCX Coaxial or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Conley Corporation.

b. Perma-Pipe, Inc.

2. RTRP: ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997 fiberglass coaxial carrier and containment piping and mechanical couplings to seal carrier and containment piping or individually bonded joints.

a. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 2 and NPS 3: 150 psig.

b. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 4 and NPS 6: 125 psig.

c. Fittings: RTRF complying with ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997, and made by RTRP manufacturer; watertight sump entry boots, termination, or other end fittings.

3. Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting assemblies with provision for field installation of cable leak-detection system in annular space between carrier and containment piping.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.

1. Metallic Connectors

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) FLEX-ING, Inc.

2) Metraflex Company (The).

3) Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

b. Listed and labeled for aboveground and underground applications by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, or stainless-steel, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig.

e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping.



f. Maximum Length: 30 inches

g. Swivel end, 50-psig maximum operating pressure.

h. Factory-furnished anode.

B. Y-Pattern Strainers

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.


C. Manual Air Vents

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.


7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.

B. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

2.05 MANUAL DIESEL FUEL SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with UL 842.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.





C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with UL 842.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.



D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.

d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.



2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Anderson Greenwood; Division of Tyco Flow Control.



b. Fulflo Specialties, Inc.

c. Webster Fuel Pumps & Valves; a division of Capital City Tool, Inc.

2. Listed and labeled for diesel fuel service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.

4. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.

5. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.

6. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.

7. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.

8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig.

9. Relief Pressure Setting: 60 psig.

B. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Ameron International; Fiberglass Pipe Group.

b. Conley Corporation.

c. EMCO Wheaton; a Gardner Denver Company.

d. Environ Products, Inc.

2. Listed and labeled for diesel fuel service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Double poppet valve.

4. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.

5. Disk: FPM.

6. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel.

7. Stem: Plated brass.

8. O-Ring: FPM.

9. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass.

10. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F.



11. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire.

12. Air test port.

13. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig.

2.07 DOUBLE WALL FIBERGLASS UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS

A. Basis-of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Xerxes Corporation comparable product one of the following:

1. Containment Solutions, Inc.

B. Description: Horizontal, FRP UST; UL 1316, double wall, with interstitial space and integral, hydrostatic, leak-detection and monitoring system.

C. Construction: The tank shall be of all fiberglass with tank laminates constructed of resin and fiberglass reinforcements without sand fillers. Tanks shall be inert to all petroleum products, and expected external ground contamination. Ribs shall be integrally cast into the tank body. Tanks shall ear the listing mark of the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL 58 and 1746 standards), Inc.

D. The tank shall be capable of the following loading conditions:

1. Internal load: Tank shall withstand 5 psi air pressure test with 5 to 1 safety factor. Contractor shall test each tank individually prior to installation as this is to test for leakage. Maximum test pressure is 5 psi.

2. Vacuum Test: Every tank shall be tested to 11.5 inches mercury vacuum by the tank manufacturer to assure structural integrity.

3. Surface Loads: Tank shall withstand surface AASHTO H-20 axle load when properly installed according to current manufacturer’s installation instruction (32,000 lb.)

4. External hydrostatic pressure: Tank shall withstand 7’ of overburden with the hole fully flooded with 5:1 safety factor against buckling.

5. Each fiberglass reinforced plastic strap for the tank shall be capable of withstanding the buoyancy load of 25,000 lb. for ten-foot (10’) tank diameter.

E. Provide fiberglass piping sump with fittings supplied with the tank. The piping sump shall be installed so that is suitable for monitoring the double wall piping system and containment of its product.

F. All tank fittings shall be 4-inch diameter standard as supplied by the tank manufacturer. All openings shall be fitted with plugs for shipment. The tank shall have openings for one each of the following:

1. Fill line with drop pipe and wear plate. The fill line to each storage tank shall enter at the top of the tank. The minimum diameter of the fill line shall be 3-in and the line shall extend to within 3-in of the tank bottom with an anti-splash deflector provided at the end of the fill line in the tank, or size as shown on drawing. Provide a tight fit fill adapter that shall be



installed in a cast-iron manhole unit that allows differential settlement between the tank and the ground surface.

2. Vent/Overfill/Vapor Recovery.

3. In tank automatic gauging and inventory control.

4. Level sticking port with wear plate.

5. Excess water removal line.

6. Leak sensor monitoring.

7. Submersible pump and controls.

G. Tanks shall have an annular space between the primary and secondary shell walls to allow for free flow and containment of all leaked product from the primary tank. This space shall be dry for interstitial monitoring.

H. Provide lifting lugs capable of withstanding the weight of the tank with a safety factor of 3 to 1.

I. Storage tank shall be provided with a separate atmospheric vent conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 30. The vent pipe shall slope back to the tank and shall terminate at least 12 feet above grade or 2 feet above the roof of the adjacent building and shall be located so that discharged vapors will not enter the building openings or downspouts. Vent terminal locations as indicated on the drawings. Each vent terminal outlet shall be provided with a pressure and vacuum relief breather valve to provide sufficient vapor backpressure to ensure vapor recirculation between the fuel delivery truck and the storage tank. A dry disconnect adapter shall be provided to interconnect the tank vent system with the delivery truck vapor space. The size of the vent line connection shall match the equipment connections on the fuel delivery truck. Vent piping shall be 2 in minimum.

J. Capacities and Characteristics

1. Capacity: 20,000 gal.

2. Diameter: 10’-0”.

3. Length: 37’-9”.

K. Deadmen Reinforced Concrete Beam

1. Prefabricated deadmen shall be placed as shown on the drawings to anchors the storage tanks. The deadmen shall be pre-engineered and sized to each 20,000-gallon underground storage tank. Water-table height, number of containment sumps and burial depth must be considered.

2. The deadmen reinforced concrete beams must be designed according to the applicable American Concrete Institute code.



L. Spill Protection

1. Spill container shall be fifteen gallon capacity. Manhole shall have a cast iron ring with an integrally cast handle on a ductile lid. Manhole lid shall have an H-20 load rating.

M. Drop Tube Overfill

1. Drop tubes shall be designed to prevent the overfilling of underground storage tanks by providing a positive shut-off of product delivery. Shut-off valve shall be an integral part of the drop tube used for gravity filling. Drop tubes shall be cut at a 45-degree angle with Drop tube shall be cut at a 45-degree angle, with the top of cut no greater than 6" from the bottom of the tank. Overfill prevention for the storage tanks shall be achieved by means of a float valve in each tank. The automatic shut off device shall stop the flow of product being delivered to the tank when the tank is ninety percent (90%) full. Access shall be provided for servicing the float valve. Provide drop tube cap.

2. Provide an overfill protection stop valve, capable of stopping diesel fuel flow at 90 percent tank capacity.

2.08 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Red Jacket model RJ 2HP submersible turbine or comparable product by one of the following:

1. F.E. Petro

B. Description: Comply with UL 79, UL 87, and UL 343.

1. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Impeller: Turbine.

3. Housing and Volute: Cast iron.

4. Bearings: Bronze, self-lubricating.

5. Seals: Mechanical.

6. Shaft: Polished steel.

7. Suspension Piping: Telescoping to accommodate tank diameter.

8. Base: Steel.

9. Pressure Relief: Built in.

10. Discharge Check Valve: Built in.

11. Drive: Direct, close coupled.



12. Filter System: Particulate filter

2.09 TRAMWAY FUELING SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Submit to compliance with requirements, provide Fleet Fueling Systems Inc. an ABC Company, Model FF-2000-TS or approved equal.

B. Description: Provide overhead tramway fueling System including support post, rails, hose track, emergency disconnect, hose, posi-lock nozzle, valves, piping and fueling register.

C. Rail System: Provide (3) 4”x4” steel tube support post with base plate anchored to concrete slab in accordance manufacturers recommendations. Provide (3) steel leader rails supported from support post, with (2) front follower rails and (2) rear follower rails. Overall size 23’-0” long x 12’x-0” high.

D. Tramway Trolley: Trolley to have “pull away” emergency valve and coupling that will disconnect if bus pulls away during fueling.

E. Hose and Nozzle: Provide 1” hose rated for diesel fueling with “pull away” coupling. Diesel fueling nozzle to be posi-lock type with automatic dry break for busses. Provide hose hook mounted to vertical post.

F. Fueling Valve and Meter: Provide Pump Measure Control, Inc. (PMC) or approved equal 1-1/2” meter with register for tramway fueling. Meter shall include dual filter housing, air eliminator unions, ball valves, and electronic solenoid valve. Fueling valve and meter package to be mounted on 4”x4” tube steel post. System to connect to VEEDER-ROOT system.

2.10 POSI/LOCK AUTOMATIC DRY-BREAK FUELING SYSTEM (HIGH FLOW DIESEL FILLING)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Emco Wheaton Posi/lock 105 or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Wayne Dresser Inc.

B. Description: Automatic locking filling system for high flow diesel fuel, automatic shut-off when fuel tank is filled, and refueling nozzle constructed of cast aluminum with brass and stainless steel trim.

2.11 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide OMNTEC Manufacturing model MTG-F Kynar or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Caldwell Systems Corporation.

2. Highland Tank & Manufacturing Company, Inc.

3. INCON, Inc.

4. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.



B. Description: Flexible level probes, calibrated, liquid-level gage system complying with UL 1238 with probes or other sensors.

C. Connect to existing panel installed under Phase I construction.

D. Controls: Electrical, operating on 120-V ac.

2.12 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM

A. Cable and Sensor System: Comply with UL 1238.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide OMNTEC Manufacturing model BX-PDWS (tank interstitials) and model BX-PDS (containment sump) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Raychem Corp; Tyco Electronics Corporation.

b. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.

c. Veeder-Root; a Danaher Corporation Company.

2. Calibrated leak-detection and monitoring system with probes and other sensors and remote alarm panel for diesel fuel storage tanks and diesel fuel piping.

3. Include fittings and devices required for testing.


5. Calibrated, liquid-level gage complying with UL 1238 with probes or other sensors.

6. Connect to existing panel installed under Phase I construction.



A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.


A. Pressure test and inspect diesel fuel storage tanks, after fabrication and before shipment, according to ASME and the following:

1. FRP USTs: UL 1316.

B. Affix standards organization's code stamp.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for diesel fuel piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off diesel fuel to premises or piping section.

B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. System: Provide a complete, functional diesel fueling system including double wall underground storage tanks, leak detection and monitoring system, interconnecting piping, dispensers with dispensing nozzles. Design and installation shall comply with all local, state and federal codes. System configuration, valves, pumps and piping shall comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.05 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install underground diesel fuel piping buried at least 18 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

B. Install double-containment, diesel fuel pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent downward toward diesel fuel storage tank sump.

C. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward diesel fuel storage tank sump.

D. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls for liquid-tight joints.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.

F. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

3.06 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in accessible locations.

B. Protect valves from physical damage.



C. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return lines.

D. Install manual air vents at high points in diesel fuel piping.

E. Install emergency shutoff valves at dispensers.

3.07 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Submersible Pumps

1. Suspend pump from supply piping, anchor motor and piping to tank manway sump.

2. Provide electrical connections to pump.

3. Provide full port ball valve on discharge side of pump. Ball valve to be located within manway sump.

3.08 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

E. Flared Joints: Comply with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench according to fitting manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not overtighten.

F. Fiberglass-Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.09 DIESEL FUEL UST INTATLLATION

A. Excavate to sufficient depth for a minimum of 3 feet of earth cover from top of tank to finished grade. Allow for cast-ion place, concrete-ballast base plus 6 inches of sand or pea gravel between ballast base and tank. Extend excavation at least 12 inches around perimeter of tank.

B. Set tie-down eyelets for hold-down straps in concrete-ballast base and tie to reinforcing steel.

C. Place 6 inches of clean sand or pea gravel on top of concrete-ballast base.



D. Set tank on fill materials and install hold-down straps.

E. Connect piping.

F. Install tank leak-detection and monitoring devices.

G. Install containment sumps.

H. Backfill excavation with clean sand or pea gravel in 12-inch lifts and tamp backfill lift to consolidate.

I. Install filter mat between top of backfill material and earth fill.

J. Install FRP USTs with FRP hold-down straps, manhole extension, and manhole risers.

K. Fill storage tanks with fuel oil.

3.10 DIESEL TRAMWAY INSTALLATION

A. Anchor tramway support post to concrete slab.

B. Coordinate location or tramway rails with other trades.

C. Provide diesel fuel meter and valve mounted on stand.

3.11 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building where designated by Owner.

3.12 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install leak-detection and monitoring system. Connect to existing panel installed under Phase I construction.

1. Double-Wall, Diesel fuel Storage Tanks: Install probes or use factory-installed integral probes in interstitial space.

2. Double-Containment, Diesel fuel Piping: Install leak-detection sensor probes in diesel fuel storage tank containment sumps and at low points in piping and in interstitial space of double-containment piping.

3. Install liquid-level gage.

3.13 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.

C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.



D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and equipment.


A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, service meter, and earthquake valve.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above diesel fuel piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. Terminate tracer wire in an accessible area, and identify as "tracer wire" for future use with plastic-laminate sign.

1. Piping: Over underground diesel fuel distribution piping.

2. Diesel fuel Storage Tanks: Over edges of each UST.

3.15 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING

A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).

d. Color: Gray.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Tests and Inspections



a. Tanks: Minimum hydrostatic or compressed-air test pressures for diesel fuel storage tanks that have not been factory tested and do not bear the ASME code stamp or a listing mark acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1) The primary tank shall be pressure tested to UL 142 Standard (minimum 3 to maximum 5 psi) at the factory, and shall be field-tested by the contractor to a maximum 3-psi, according to the company’s recommended testing procedure.

2) The secondary tank shall be tested liquid tight at the factory (minimum 3 to maximum 5 psi), and shall also be field-tested by the contractor to a maximum 3-psi according to the company’s field testing procedure.

3) Where vertical height of fill and vent pipes is such that the static head imposed on the bottom of the tank is greater than 10 psig, hydrostatically test the tank and fill and vent pipes to a pressure equal to the static head thus imposed.

4) Maintain the test pressure for one hour.

b. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at highest point in system:

1) Diesel fuel Distribution Piping: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 30 minutes.

2) Diesel fuel, Double-Containment Piping:

a) Carrier Pipe: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 30 minutes.

b) Containment Conduit: Minimum 5 psig for minimum 60 minutes.

3) Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg for minimum 30 minutes.

4) Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in storage tanks to exceed 10 psig.

5) Inspect and test diesel fuel piping according to NFPA 31, "Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Test liquid-level gage for accuracy by manually measuring diesel fuel levels at not less than four different depths while filling tank and checking against gage indication.

d. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually operating sensors and checking against alarm panel indication.

e. Start diesel fuel transfer pumps to verify for proper operation of pump and check for leaks.

f. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



g. Bleed air from diesel fuel piping using manual air vents.

C. Provide final flush of the piping system to eliminate all initial particulate matter in the distribution piping. Then after flushing, fill the distribution piping system and allow a calcification period of a few days. Upon settlement, then flush the system again to ensure that the fluid piping system is completely ready for a quality maintenance use program.

D. Diesel fuel piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. The installation of underground storage tanks must have direct oversight by a DEP certified third party installer.

3.17 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain liquid-level gage systems, leak-detection and monitoring systems and diesel fuel dispensers.

3.18 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground diesel fuel piping shall be one of the following. Size indicated is carrier-pipe size.


B. Underground diesel fuel-tank vent piping shall be the following:


C. Aboveground diesel fuel-tank vent piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. Vent piping exposed to view shall be painted.

D. Aboveground diesel fuel piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL DIESEL FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:


B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:




END OF SECTION


111119-81700 13500-1 July 31, 2013 Transit Operations Facility Phase 1 CONFORMED

SECTION 13500

CNG GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This contract will include the delegated design, permitting, fabrication, equipment and materials, construction, installation, commissioning, start-up, testing and training associated with the construction of a Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) station as outlined in these specifications and by the accompanying drawings. Work to be performed at Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority (EMTA) facilities as described herein.

1. A CNG station contractor (CNG Contractor) meeting the expertise and experience requirements of the shall coordinate with the General Contractor and all other Contractors on site to ensure that all scope and coordination issues are fully addressed within their scope.

2. The CNG Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with the overall work on the site both under the CNG Contract and by other Contractors.

3. The CNG station conceptual design provided with the bid documents will be used as a basis for the design. The CNG Contractor shall provide delegated design using Pennsylvania licensed professional engineers to complete all required design and permitting. The Owner will retain a firm to provide design and equipment submittal review, construction period inspection and oversight of CNG Contractor commissioning.

4. The CNG Contractor and their delegated design engineer shall be responsible to coordinate all risers and equipment locations and sizes with their equipment supplier(s) and the other Contractors working on the site.

5. EMTA currently operates a CNG station on this property. This station shall not be rendered unusable until the new CNG station is fully operable, tested, commissioned and permitted and until EMTA has indicated that the existing station can be taken off line. The CNG Contractor will not be required to decommission or remove the existing CNG station other than the removal of the storage rack.

6. A CNG equipment compound area will be partially developed by other Contractors under Phase I of this project. This work by other Contractors includes all curbing, retaining walls, guard rail and fencing with gates.

7. The CNG Contractor shall provide all trenching, concrete work, surfacing and the construction of the pipe rack within the CNG compound.

8. Underground high pressure gas lines, low pressure gas supply lines, the tubing sleeve for the defueling panel and underground conduits outside of the CNG equipment compound are all run by other Contractors under Phase I of this project.



9. Electrical power (480 VAC supply power only) and communications conduits will be brought to within the CNG equipment compound by other Contractors. All coordination costs incurred by the Contractor shall be included in the CNG Contractor’s Project Engineering and Construction management expenses. The CNG Contractor shall extend these conduits to the required final location within the CNG compound at the CNG Contractor’s cost.

10. The requirements of these documents designate the minimum scope of supply. Installation work shall include:

a. All freight, offloading, placing, grouting (as required), anchoring and other work associated with installing the CNG equipment.

b. All interconnecting piping and electrical work within the CNG compound including the fabrication of an above ground pipe rack.

c. Extension of the underground gas and vent lines to the indoor dispensers, over the roof and in to the indoor fueling room with final connections to the CNG dispensing equipment.

d. Supply and install all conduit and cable within the indoor fueling room to connect from conduit roughed in by others to the CNG dispensers, fuel management system and building safety and control systems.

e. Supply and install all conduit and cable to connect from conduit roughed in by others to the outdoor CNG dispenser, fuel management system and building safety and control systems.

f. Supply and install all conduit and cable to connect from conduit roughed in by others to the outdoor CNG defueling dispenser.

g. Supplying and pulling the defueling tubing in the sleeve installed by others.

h. The CNG Contractor shall note the underground pipe and conduits that are included in other Contractors’ scope. Note that the CNG Contractor shall supply and install all cabling within the conduits that are supplied by others. The CNG Contractor shall supply and install any and all equipment and services not included in other Contractors’ scope that are required to make the CNG equipment fully functional and specification compliant.

i. All CNG compound area trenching, pads, surfacing, signage and other miscellaneous work with the CNG compound.

j. All CNG compound external curbs, guard rail, fencing, gates and retaining wall is by others.

11. Proposers shall meet the requirements of these drawings and specifications or their proposal will be deemed non-responsive and non-compliant.

12. All site work shall be coordinated and scheduled with EMTA and other Contractors to minimize disruption to EMTA operations. This coordination may require the Contractor



to schedule work off hours or on weekends and to provide steel plates, bridging and hoarding to maintain access to facilities for EMTA.

13. EMTA shall have complete use of facilities as soon as they are inspected and issued final approval by the permitting agencies, even if work on other portions of the contract is not completed.

14. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the project work area(s), including but not limited to all equipment, materials, tools, facilities and vehicles while performing the work of this Contract. This requirement shall be effective twenty-four (24) hours per day for the duration of the Contract.

15. As an Add Alternate, the Contractor shall provide a one (1) year service contract for the routine maintenance and repair of the CNG station. This one year period shall correspond to the Warranty period in start and end date. This work shall include:

a. EMTA will pay the cost of all gas, electric power, and communications to the station.

b. EMTA will provide insurance on the property. Contractor will provide other insurance as indicated elsewhere in this document.

c. Contractor shall keep all operating permits current. Contractor shall at their own expense provide any documentation and/or testing required and pay any fees required for these permits.

d. Contractor shall pay any upgrade or annual license fees as required to keep all copies of software current.

e. The Contractor shall maintain an inventory of all required parts including consumables and major repair parts.

f. This service contract shall include all maintenance required or recommended by the equipment and component manufacturers and all work that is normally provided by current industry best practice.

g. The Contractor shall supply all parts and consumables included within the cost of the contract.

h. Contractor shall maintain a clean facility and shall dispose off-site of all waste material in an environmentally responsible and legal manner. Documentation of proper disposal shall be provided to EMTA. This material will include but not be limited to oil, used filters, desiccant, and dryer and filter condensate.

i. EMTA will use its own staff to provide daily or twice weekly inspections as required to check fluids, drain filters and perform other similar light inspection and service.

j. Contractor shall visit the site not less frequently than once per week to perform inspections and maintenance as required. This inspection shall include the work normally provided by EMTA staff. These visits must be coordinated with EMTA to ensure that there are buses that can be fueled to allow operational testing.



k. Contractor shall review SCADA logs to determine if equipment is operating in expected ranges and to diagnose impending problems.

l. All safety relief valves and pressure transducers and RTDs shall be calibrated annually or more frequently if required.

m. ESD and other safety systems shall be tested at a frequency of annually or more frequently if recommended by the manufacture.

n. Contractor shall provide all other inspection, maintenance, repair, logging of information, ordering and stocking of parts as required to provide a comprehensive maintenance service.

o. Since the installation is covered under the warranty for the first year, there shall be no additional charge for labor or material for the replacement of failed components.

p. At the end of the year, the Contractor shall replace all filter elements in the station.

q. The Contractor shall provide a complete gas detection system calibration, service all mechanical equipment including door operators and fans and test the system in each room and each compressor enclosure not less than annually, or more frequently if recommended by the equipment manufacturers. Contractor shall supply the required calibration gas.

r. Contractor shall maintain detailed records of all inspections, calibrations, tests, maintenance and repairs.

s. Contractor and EMTA staff shall weigh the quantity of oil added and drained in the station. Contractor shall set up and maintain this record keeping system. This record will be used to determine the extent of oil carryover in the station.

t. All records shall be maintained on site in a binder that is accessible to EMTA staff. A copy of all reports from: inspections, tests, calibrations, maintenance, repairs, call outs and all parts consumed shall be submitted monthly electronically and in hard copy with each invoice.

u. The Contractor shall supply 60 minute call back and four hour on site response time (from time of fault shutdown being transmitted either electronically or by phone whichever occurs first). At no time shall the equipment deliver less than 75 percent of firm capacity for more than 12 hours.

v. Callouts that are the result of EMTA actions such as nuisance ESD events and hose drive-aways shall be charged to EMTA at regular time rates as proposed herein with no additional charges for overtime, premium, time, equipment or mileage charges.

w. Contractor shall repeat the training required under this Design Build contract on an annual basis with updates to reflect lessons learned in operating the station. Contractor shall maintain and submit to EMTA the sign in sheet for each training session.



x. Cost of maintenance program shall be invoiced monthly for the previous month based on the greater of the minimum monthly cost or the throughput charge per Therm times the number of Therms measured through the Fleetwatch system.

B. This Section includes general requirements for all work as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1. This Section applies to all sections 13500 to 13900.

2. Secondary equipment suppliers of subassemblies including the dryer, dispenser, storage, and control panel suppliers must review the entire document, not just the section focused on their specific equipment, to ensure that they have a complete understanding of all general mechanical, electrical, controls and other requirements.

3. Requirements stated in this Section are in addition to, and supplement requirements stated in other parts of the Project documents.

C. The CNG Station shall include the design, permitting, procurement, fabrication, testing, delivery, complete installation, startup/commissioning and training for the following equipment:

1. Single tower heated regenerative natural gas dryer.

2. Three electric driven fully packaged and enclosed CNG compressors. Add alternate for one additional compressor package.

3. Refurbishment of the existing EMTA buffer storage assembly.

4. Two single hose, 1-inch, heavy duty vehicle CNG dispensers complete with required buffer storage controls and electronic temperature compensation controls and instrumentation.

5. One dual hose, 1/2-inch, light duty vehicle CNG dispenser complete with required buffer storage controls and electronic temperature compensation controls and instrumentation.

6. One defueling panel complete with required controls.

7. Master control panel (MCP) complete with all required controls and software.

8. SCADA system.

9. Duplex air compressor and twin tower desiccant air dryer.

10. 480 VAC distribution and control panel assembly.

11. Prewired control room and air compressor enclosure.

12. Miscellaneous installation components including automatic and manual gas valves, all flexible connections in the gas piping system, equipment mounted gas detection components, and equipment mounted emergency shutdown (ESD) buttons and remote ESD stations per the specifications.



D. Delegated Design: Design and calculations by an Engineer of Record licensed in the State of Pennsylvania as required to secure permits for the station. The delegated design will also include any redesign required to adapt the design as bid to the actual equipment supplied.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Within these documents:

1. “EMTA” and the “Owner” are defined as the Erie Metropolitan Transit Authority.

2. The “Consultant” and the “Engineer” is defined as an external designate of EMTA that is responsible for design review, inspection and other tasks as instructed by EMTA.

3. The “Equipment Supplier” (or “Fabricator”) is the party providing equipment to the CNG Contractor.

4. The “CNG Contractor” or the “Contractor” is the selected Bidder from this solicitation.

5. The “Authority (or Authorities) Having Jurisdiction” (AHJ) includes any and all agencies that are legally mandated to review, inspect and permit any aspect of the project. This will include but not be limited to City of Erie Building and Safety Department, City of Erie Fire Marshall, City of Erie Electrical and Mechanical Inspection Departments, Electrical and Gas Utilities.

B. The following list includes acronyms and abbreviations used in sections 13500 to 13900 sections pertaining to the work of this Division but not necessarily used in other parts of the Project documents. The list does not contain acronyms used for reference standards, or technical and commonly used and understood abbreviations and acronyms.

AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction ATS Automatic Transfer Switch CNG Compressed Natural Gas DSL Digital Subscriber Line (broadband communication over a phone

line) ESD Emergency Shut Down FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel GDP Gas Detection Panel GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding IS Intrinsically Safe MCC Motor Control Center MCP Master Control Panel MMSCF Million Standard Cubic Feet MTS Manual Transfer Switch NB National Board NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory NTP Notice to Proceed OD Outside Diameter P&ID Piping and Instrumentation Diagram PLC Programmable Logic Controller PQR Procedure Qualification Records PSIG Pounds per Square Inch Gauge



RAP Remote Annunciation Panel SCADA System Control and Data Acquisition SCF Standard Cubic Foot SCFM Standard Cubic Foot per Minute SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding SRV Safety Relief Valve UCP Unit Control Panel VFD Variable Frequency Drive WPS Welding Procedure Specifications


A. Applicable provisions of the latest accepted versions of the following standards shall apply to the work of sections 13500 to 13900, except as modified herein, and are hereby made a part of these Contract Specifications to the extent required:

ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 ASME B31.3 Refinery Piping IBC International Building Code and all applicable reference codes. IFC International Fire Code NFPA 30A Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages NFPA 52 Vehicular Gaseous Fuel Systems Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems OSHA Applicable standards and regulations by Occupational Safety and Health

Administration Local Ordinances All local ordinances including local noise bylaws shall be met. In the event that one code is more stringent than another, the most stringent code will be used as the basis of the bid. In the event that codes contradict each other, the local Authority Having Jurisdiction will determine the governing code.

B. AHJ may also reference additional codes and standards and may impose local or project specific requirements. Contractor is required to meet all such requirements.

C. Contractor shall provide and pay for “Third Party” Certification for all equipment in its packaged form. This shall include but not be limited to the gas dryer, gas compressor packages, all fueling and defueling dispensers and all electrical and gas control panels. No schedule extension will be granted. The third party used for Certification must be a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) acceptable to the AHJ.

D. In addition to adhering to the applicable codes, the Contractor shall perform the work with a degree of skill and diligence normally employed by contractors performing the same or similar tasks. The Contractor shall also use its best judgment to install a system that is safe, reliable, and which performs well.

E. Other sections 13500 to 13900 include additional references referring particularly to work in those sections.




A. Installer Qualifications: See individual sections 13500 to 13900 for specific requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Major components (such as, but not limited to, compressor blocks and cylinders, valves, instrumentation and control) of the same or essentially the same model have been used in similar applications in the United States. If manufacturers other than those listed in this document are proposed, the manufacturer must provide verifiable, positive references citing a minimum of 10 other similarly sized installations in the previous five years within the USA.

2. Further, it must be demonstrated that any proposed alternate compressor block manufacturer has manufactured at least an average of 20 blocks of the proposed model for CNG service per year for the past five years and they must be able to demonstrate consistently available, quality spare parts available on a next day basis through references and through the presence of spare parts in inventory sufficient to construct five compressor blocks and cylinders of the proposed model.

3. Other sections 13500 to 13900 may include additional requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Ensure that assemblies (such as but not limited to compressor packages, gas dryer, dispensers) of the same or essentially the same model have been used in similar CNG station applications in the United States. This requires verifiable positive references citing a minimum of five other similarly sized installations commissioned in the previous five years within the USA.

D. Engineer of Record Qualifications for Delegated Design: A design professional licensed in the State of Pennsylvania and who has a minimum of five years of experience in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those required to support permitting applications which will include stamping manufacturer and site installation drawings.

E. Regulatory Requirements

1. Permitting: This Work shall also include:

a. Providing technical backup required through this phase.

b. Provide an Engineer of Record licensed in Pennsylvania to prepare, review and stamp drawings as required by regulating agencies and EMTA.

c. Secure all necessary construction and operating permits for this project including but not limited to the Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Building and Fire Department.

d. In addition to regulatory construction and operating approvals and permits, if required, the Contractor shall receive approval of the facility from the local gas and electrical utilities prior to these agencies turning on the gas and electrical power to the facility.



F. Drawings: The CNG Station Drawings included with this bid package are diagrammatic and are not intended to show all conduit, wiring, piping, tubing, exact locations of equipment, terminations, or number or types of fittings required by the system. Provide related work which is specified herein, diagrammed or scheduled on the Drawings, required by AHJs and as indicated on other details or elevations for a complete and operating CNG station. Since the final size and configuration may vary from that shown in the Drawings, devices and equipment are indicated only in their approximate locations unless dimensioned or otherwise indicated. Locate equipment and apparatus to maximize serviceability where not dimensioned and coordinate such locations with the work of other trades to prevent interferences. Verify all dimensions on the site.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General requirements include:

1. Manufacturer Approval Drawings: Equipment that is laid out, configured, or designed by the Fabricator based on performance specifications only shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to release of Drawings for manufacturing.

2. All Contractor supplied drawings are to be supplied in D size and B size as follows:

a. 10 hard copy sets at as-built phase.

b. AutoCAD (.dwg) 2010 and 2005 files at each phase and as-built.

c. PDF at each phase and as-built.

3. EMTA will provide all available drawings of the existing facility. Contractor is required to verify the accuracy of these drawings and create any shop drawings that may be required.

4. All equipment drawings are to be submitted at 60, 90 and 100 percent completion. Schedule to submit these drawing packages from date of contract award:

a. 60 percent package and all major equipment submittals due 30 days from award.

b. 90 percent package due 45 days from award.

c. 100 percent package due 60 days from award..

5. No construction can proceed until a complete set of equipment drawings, specifications, and documentation has been submitted and approved by EMTA. Proceeding without approval will be at Contractor’s risk and expense.

6. Certain preliminary work, such as concrete demolition, trenching, excavating associated with the CNG fuelling task may be allowed by the AHJ before final permits are approved. If this work is allowed, Contractor shall first confirm with EMTA that such work can proceed

7. Submittals prior to CNG station fabrication and construction include:



a. Facility layout and details, including full conduit, wire & terminations, pipe and tubing layouts and schedules. If the equipment fully conforms to the bid design a statement reaffirming this will be deemed acceptable.

b. Facility gas, air, vent and drain line Piping and Instrumentation Drawings (P&ID). If the equipment fully conforms to the bid design a statement reaffirming this will be deemed acceptable.

c. General assembly drawings of packaged dryers, compression units, storage assembly and control system, dispensing system (including internal assembly drawings of dispensers and other panels in the system), other station equipment and process piping including elevation and plan views, and major sub-assembly and component drawings.

d. Skid construction drawings for all skid mounted equipment.

e. Gas dryer P&ID drawings, Bills of Material and piping isometric diagrams

f. Compressor P&ID, Bills of Material and piping isometric diagrams

g. Storage gas control P&ID drawings and Bills of Material

h. Dispenser P&ID drawings and Bills of Material

i. Instrument Air System P&ID drawings and Bills of Material

j. Electrical Distribution and Control Panels, Master Control Panel (MCP) and Unit Control Panel (UCP) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) electrical power, control and Emergency Shut Down (ESD) schematics and Bills of Material.

k. Skid and panel penetration and connection drawings

l. Equipment anchoring and grouting details and locations (note that chemical concrete anchor style bolts or approved equal must be used). These drawings must include Pennsylvania Professional Engineer stamped calculations confirming the adequacy of all equipment anchoring as required by the IBC and other applicable codes—this will apply to all equipment of a size and configuration that the code designates.

m. Compressor run simulation based on minimum, maximum and typical suction pressures. These runs shall clearly illustrate operating horsepower draw, pressures, temperatures, rod loads, rod reversal, clearances and piston speeds.

n. Compressor cooler run simulation based on maximum ambient temperatures and maximum flow rates. This run sheet shall clearly illustrate the excess capacity of the cooler, and the maximum noise level at full speed in open field conditions.

o. Product cut sheets listing approvals, materials, dimensions, spare parts, rebuild kits and including exploded parts diagrams for all procured components. Note: If the product cut sheet is for more than one model, size or type of component, the component the product cut sheet is being submitted for must be clearly indicated or the inapplicable information shall be deleted.



p. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) for all shops involved in fabrication of the equipment.

q. Compressor vibration and pulsation analysis report.

8. The Contractor will supply complete equipment and installation drawings as outlined herein. EMTA will review these drawings and the Contractor will make any required revisions as defined by EMTA and the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. EMTA will require a minimum of two calendar weeks to review and comment on initial (60 percent) submittal drawings and documents, and one week to review and comment on subsequent re-submittals. Once these drawings are completed and accepted by EMTA and the AHJs, and the AHJs have issued required building permit(s), EMTA will issue a Fabrication NTP for the equipment production and a separate CNG Station NTP for the site construction.

B. Additional requirements are included in the sections 13500 to 13900.

1. As-built record documents for sections 13500 to 13900 CNG station work includes but is not limited to following:

a. Site plans: Civil/structural, mechanical and electrical.

b. Facility layout and details, including full conduit, wire and terminations, pipe and tubing layouts and schedules.

c. Facility gas, air, vent and drain line Piping and Instrumentation (P&ID) drawings and piping isometric diagrams.

d. General assembly drawings of packaged dryers, compression units, storage assembly and control system, dispensing system, other station equipment and process piping including all elevation and plan views, and major sub-assembly and component drawings.

e. Skid construction drawings.

f. Gas dryer P&ID, Bills of Material and piping isometric diagrams.

g. Compressor P&ID, Bills of Material and piping isometric diagrams.

h. Storage control P&ID and Bills of Material.

i. Dispenser P&ID and Bills of Material.

j. Pilot Air System P&ID and Bills of Material.

k. Distribution and Control Panels, Master Control Panel (MCP) and Unit Control Panel (UCP) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) electrical power, control and Emergency Shut Down (ESD) schematics and Bills of Material.

l. Custom software listings. Fully documented hard and soft copies of all PLC programs, operator interface programs, (SCADA) monitoring programs and any other programs or control devices shall be provided. As an alternative to supplying



the documented PLC and Operator Interface programs, the EMTA will accept one spare pre-programmed PLC CPU and Operator Interface for each distinct PLC and Operator Interface program.

m. Skid and panel penetration and connection drawings.

n. Equipment anchoring and grouting details and locations (note that chemical concrete anchor style bolts or approved equal must be used).

o. Product cut sheets listing approvals, materials, dimensions, spare parts, rebuild kits and including exploded parts diagrams for all procured components. Note: If the product cut sheet is for more than one model, size or type of component, the component the product cut sheet is being submitted for must be clearly indicated or the inapplicable information must be deleted.

p. Vibration/pulsation test results and conclusions. This must indicate the results of the field testing referenced through drawings or pictures to the actual equipment.

q. Original final inspection reports and non-conditional permits to operate from all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

2. Quality Control Manual (note that EMTA may require periodic submission of portions of this material to confirm compliance.) Include the following:

a. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS).

b. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR).

c. Piping and Instrumentation Drawings referenced to isometric drawings.

d. Piping isometric drawings detailing all fittings, flanges, weld locations, pipe size and schedule or tubing size and wall thickness, components, pressure vessels and design pressure. These drawings must indicate which welder performed each weld.

e. X-ray films and reports referenced to individual welds on the piping isometric drawings.

f. Pressure test reports.

g. Form U1A for all pressure vessels.

h. National Board registration for all pressure vessels.

i. Mill test certificates for pipe and tubing.

3. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall include:

a. A description of the system components and operation.

b. Manuals must be specific to the equipment installed. Generic manuals will be deemed incomplete and unacceptable.



c. Outline emergency procedures, standard operating procedures, general sequence of operations, recommended maintenance intervals and procedures, recommended parts, troubleshooting and repair procedures. Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) shall include all repairs to equipment (for example SOPs for the isolation and depressurization then reinstallation of a safety relief valve).

d. All procedures must be specific to the equipment supplied and must reference specific component ID numbers (such as provided on the valve tags).

e. A table shall be provided to clearly outline all maintenance and inspection intervals for each piece of equipment. This shall designate by hours of service or by calendar intervals as applicable and shall indicate all items that are required or recommended by code or current industry practice such as SRV rebuilds, transducer calibration, etc.

f. Manuals shall provide site specific log and inspection forms for each inspection interval.

g. Manuals shall address all parts normally requiring inspection, service, maintenance, repair, or adjustment.

h. Manuals shall include a complete set of as-built and as-commissioned station drawings reduced to “B” size. Manuals shall also provide product cut sheets and product manuals on all components used in the system.

i. Manuals shall provide a comprehensive list of spare parts with supplier and component manufacturer part numbers as well as recommended stocking quantities.

j. Trouble shooting guidelines, flow chart and procedures.

k. Copies of OEM Operation and Maintenance manuals on all outsourced equipment such as the compressor blocks, valves, dryer, etc.

l. Manuals shall be provided in bound hard copy (10 copies), and in text searchable pdf format with each section indexed.

4. Number and Format of Closeout Submittal Documents:

a. All Quality Control, Operation Manuals and As-Built drawings are to be provided to EMTA in bound form with 6 hard copies and in electronic pdf format with all sections tabbed for ease of access to specific equipment.

b. All Operation Manuals, As-Built drawings and all PLC and Operator Interface Programs are to be provided to EMTA on USB Flash drive--six sets.

c. All third party software such as but not limited to PLC and Operator Interface programming software is to be provided on disc to EMTA—one set.



1.06 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Temperature-Minimum: 7 deg F

B. Ambient Temperature-Maximum: 100 deg F

C. Inlet Gas Temperature: 50 deg F

D. Gas Supply Pressure (min / typical / max): 25/30/35 psig

E. Estimated Throughput per Year (Year 5): 100 MMSCF

F. Normal Compressor Outlet Pressure: 4,500 psig

G. Inlet Gas Moisture Content: 7.0 lbs H2O/MMSCF

H. Typical Natural Gas Composition: Gas should be considered to be sweet, average pipeline quality with methane content of 90 to 95 percent and specific gravity of 0.55 to 0.60.

1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Deliveries must be scheduled in cooperation with the Consultant and EMTA.

B. All work on site that could impact the ongoing bus service, maintenance and dispatch activities on site scheduled and executed in cooperation with the Consultant and EMTA.

C. Available Work hours within the buildings and services lanes are as indicated in other sections of this specification.

D. The CNG Contractor shall coordinate the final riser locations and installation schedule of roughins provided by other Contractors with the exact final location and penetration requirements of the CNG equipment. The CNG Contractor shall coordinate their work and activity on site with other Contractors and the EMTA to ensure that any disruptions to EMTA Operations or other Contractors are minimized and known to all parties.


A. Comply with the following:

1. Material shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent possible theft or damage.

2. Site contractors are to provide their own on site secure storage for materials and equipment.

3. Site contractor must take delivery of their own equipment on site.

4. Site contractor must coordinate all work with EMTA to ensure that EMTA’s operations are not adversely impacted by site work.



1.09 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with the safety requirements specified in the General Sections of these Project documents and with OSHA.

B. Take whatever special precautions may be necessary to ensure the safety of personnel and property given the close proximity of 480 VAC power and natural gas at pressures exceeding 4,500 psig.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide in accordance with General Sections Warranties and Bond requirements, and the following:

1. Warrant all equipment and installation work to be free of defective material and workmanship for a period of 12 months from successful completion of all acceptance testing as required by sections 13500 to 13900 not from date of beneficial use. It is the Equipment Supplier’s responsibility to request and receive a letter from the Consultant when tests have been successfully completed. Any defect found during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced free of charge, with shipment and labor charges borne by the Equipment Supplier or Contractor.

2. If the station startup is delayed by EMTA, the warranty period will commence within six months of the date when the equipment arrived at the site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS

A. Manufacturers and models are outlined in specific sections 13500 to 13900.

B. Basis of Design: Products are specified by manufacturer name, description, and/or catalog number to show intended function and quality. Manufacturer’s catalog numbers and descriptions establish the quality of product required.

C. Substitutions

1. In order to propose an alternate component, system, supplier of equipment, or a modification to the specified design that uses specified brands, Contractor shall demonstrate that any proposed alternative system is suitable for and has been successfully used in other projects.

a. Provide technical specifications required to allow EMTA to confirm that design, efficiency, quality, appearance and delivery is comparable to or better than the specified component.

b. Provide a detailed description of the design implications, such as the impact on the size or performance of the equipment, impact on electrical service, and the like. These facility and cost implications shall be itemized and a final net cost adder/reduction presented.



c. EMTA retains the right to refuse any request for substitution that it, in its sole discretion, deems to be less desirable that the specified component.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials are outlined in sections 13500 to 13900.

B. All materials are to be new, unused and current models not scheduled to be discontinued or replaced.

2.03 FINISHES

A. The equipment shall be cleaned, prepared, primed and painted in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, and the following:

1. Paint shall be a minimum 6 mil total film thickness including a corrosion resistant primer and epoxy or enamel top coats. All paint must be suitable for outdoor use and rated for the temperatures of the application.

2. Apply anti-seize lubricants such as Permatex Anti-Seize Lubricant to the bolts on flange sets to prevent future removal problems due to paint accumulation on bolts.

3. Compressor interstage piping paint shall be heat resistant to 400 deg F.

4. Colors shall be as follows:

a. Gas piping shall be heat resistant as applicable. Preferred piping color within the package is bright yellow, however, Equipment Suppliers are permitted to use their standard color.

b. Intrinsic conduits and junction/pull boxes shall be labeled as per NEC.

c. Fire system panels and conduits shall be painted “Fire” red.

d. Other conduits and junction/pull boxes shall be galvanized or factory painted.

e. Air lines shall be black. It is not necessary or allowable to paint Teflon or stainless steel air line or brass or stainless steel air fittings.

f. Stainless steel tubing and fittings shall not be painted.

B. Touch-up Painting in Field: Touch up equipment marred by shipment or erection using the same color and type of finish as the original. The finished condition shall be to the satisfaction of EMTA.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Division. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.



3.02 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION AND ERECTION

A. General Installation Requirements

1. Location of Equipment:

a. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. Exact locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by actual field conditions and changes required by the Equipment Manufacturer.

b. Verify field conditions, arrangements and dimensions.

c. Equipment and associated piping and items which make up the complete CNG station shall conform to the CNG civil and structural drawings, for pertinent dimensions of equipment pads, islands, pits, raceways, and the like. Any changes shall require Consultant approval and be at no cost to EMTA.

2. Other Systems: Examine the mechanical, civil, structural and equipment drawings to determine if any interferences or discrepancies arise. Interferences or discrepancies found shall be reported to the Consultant as soon as practical.

B. Equipment Accessibility: Comply with applicable codes and install equipment to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Equipment deemed inaccessible shall be relocated as directed.

C. Placing, Anchoring and Grouting

1. The Contractor shall offload the equipment on site using a crane conservatively sized for the required lift and boom extension. Contractors are required to provide calculations to the Engineer prior to each lift to determine the minimum crane size. Multiple delivery dates may be required. Spreader bars must be used to lift all equipment.

2. The equipment shall be anchored and grouted (grouting only if required by equipment manufacturers) to reinforced concrete pads as approved by the equipment supplier(s), and as required to meet local seismic or other governing design requirements. If grouting is not required, but it is found that the concrete pad surface variations exceed manufacturer’s requirements or 1/8” whichever is less, metal shims will be required. These shims must stainless steel and be 2” greater in length and width than the width of the beam that they are shimming. Shims are to be inserted to a tight fit then tack welded in place to the beam. If pad irregularities result in a gap of more than ¼”, the Consultant may require remedial pad work to bring the pad into compliance.

3. If required by AHJs, provide structural calculations showing compliance with requirements of local code for loads on anchors.

4. If grouting is required by the compressor packager, it must be installed in 50°F minimum temperatures, or provide external heat and insulation. Grouting shall be completed before equipment is anchored, or connected by piping, tubing or conduit.

a. The equipment shall be grouted as required for complete installation, using a non-shrink epoxy grout.



b. Due to the difficulty in getting the grout to flow under the compressor base, the gas compressors shall be leveled with jacking screws, lifted so the grout can be poured, then lowered into the grout and re-leveled if required.

c. Equipment shall not be placed into service for a minimum of seven days or until the design strength of the grout has been achieved, whichever occurs last.

5. Equipment shall be anchored to the concrete pad where indicated in the Manufacturer Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, use stainless steel chemical (epoxy) concrete anchor bolts (minimum 12-inch embedment for compressors and storage and 8-inch embedment for dryer). Other equipment as specified by the respective manufacturer. Seismic zone requirements or other governing code issues or the manufacturer’s specifications, whichever is greater shall take precedence over the Specifications.

6. A final alignment on the compressor drive couplings shall be performed after anchoring and grouting is complete.

3.03 FIELD AND PLANT QUALITY CONTROL

A. Unit/Equipment/System testing shall include the following:

1. EMTA reserves the right to inspect the manufacturing facility at any time during this Contract without prior notice. EMTA also reserves the right to have test equipment verified and recalibrated for accuracy at any time during the Contract at no cost to EMTA.

2. Submit test procedures, blank test report forms, a list of calibrated test equipment items used in testing with manufacturer, model number, serial number, and calibration date, test set-up and P&ID at least 30 days prior to the date of the scheduled test(s).

3. Shop testing and field testing shall be coordinated with EMTA a minimum of 14 days prior to intended test date.

4. Factory testing (General): Submit copies of completed test reports to EMTA within 48 hours of test completion whether the test was successful or not.

5. Tests witnessed by EMTA or Contractor witnessing of third party testing shall require their signature.

6. If the shop function test is not witnessed by EMTA, a report outlining the outcome shall be notarized by the Contractor and issued to EMTA.

7. After successful completion of factory test(s) and approval by EMTA, the unit shall be shipped to the site. Upon completion of installation, field testing will commence.

8. Coordinate and execute on site tests which may be required by the various regulatory agencies. This testing may include, but not be limited to, a testing of shut-downs and alarms (including fire alarm and ESD system), noise testing and the like. Pay all costs except the cost of the gas and power.

9. EMTA will not unduly delay site tests, and hence will provide vehicles as required for the timely completion of the testing program.



3.04 CLEANING AND PATCHING

A. Provide cutting and patching required for the installation of the Work.

B. Site shall be left in as good a condition as found.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

D. Keep the work areas clean and free from debris and waste material at all times. The interior of boxes, cabinets, control panels, motor control panels, and the like shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and loose materials. Wireways and the like shall also be kept free of moisture and debris.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Startup: Full system startup shall be included.

1. Coordinate with EMTA. Contractor will provide EMTA 14 days advance notice prior to startup.

2. Provide manpower and equipment as required to test and make the station fully operational at no cost to EMTA, subject to approval by EMTA.

3. Acceptance testing shall be completed to confirm all performance parameters as required in these specifications and as represented in the Contractor’s bid are met.

4. Revisit the site after each compressor has accumulated approximately 100 hours.

a. Recheck calibration, alignment and operation of equipment.

b. Change the air and gas compressor oil and replace all air, oil and gas filters on the station with new OEM branded filters.

5. Station acceptance shall be granted contingent on the 100 hour service being performed after acceptance.



B. Training

1. Include operator training.

a. Provide EMTA with 14 days’ notice prior to training.

b. Provide a minimum of three days training on the equipment, at no cost to EMTA.

c. Training materials are to be comprehensive, professional and shall be given to EMTA for EMTA’s future use in training or retraining. Training materials and O&M manuals must include step by step instructions in the required maintenance procedures with reference to drawings using actual component ID numbers. The training materials shall include a table with required service, maintenance and inspection intervals. Training materials must also indicate the normal operating ranges for all parameters.

d. In addition to any general training required by the General Specifications, the Contractor shall provide the following training which shall be specific to this site and this equipment. All training documents shall be color, bound training manuals with color illustrations and pictures from this site. Wherever possible, the manuals shall utilize pictures of equipment on this site and specific equipment numbers (such as valve B-502) to provide clarity and site specificity to the training materials. PowerPoint presentations shall also be assembled to illustrate the content of each of the manuals.

e. Complete CNG system training. The first training module shall include user and first responder training:

1) Definition of common terms.

2) Properties of the fuel.

3) How does this station CNG system operate? This should include an illustration of the gas flow through the system. This description should identify the isolation and venting points present for major components (tanks, compressors, dispensers, etc.) in this station.

4) Provide a video and print version of a safe vehicle fueling Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) that addresses normal fueling and issues that may complicate normal fueling. Video is to be from this site.

5) Identify the safety risks and the required safety precautions (clothing, procedures, etc.)

6) Review the emergency response procedures. What to do in the case of fire, gas leak or venting, explosion.

a) How to make the system safe after an incident.

b) When and where to evacuate to in the event of an incident.



c) Who and when to call to report an incident.

7) This training session is expected to require a minimum of 2 hours per session and shall be delivered to a minimum of 4 groups and may require delivery after normal working hours. These groups might include EMTA staff and contractors, and first responders. 100 copies of the training manual shall be provided.

f. The second module shall include EMTA technical staff training:

1) Performance of daily and weekly inspections (log forms must be provided by the Contractor).

2) Routine maintenance, inspection and service requirements. Training shall include, but not be limited to: instrumentation and SRV calibration intervals and resources, filter replacement, lubricator service, inspecting bores, aligning couplers, and other planned maintenance. Training shall also include maintenance such as valve and ring replacements, and crankshaft, crosshead and connecting rod inspection.

3) Safety procedures.

4) System operation overview.

5) Troubleshooting and debugging procedures. A fault tree shall be provided.

6) This training session is expected to require a minimum of 16 hours per session and shall be delivered to a minimum of 2 groups and may require delivery after normal working hours. These groups might include EMTA staff and contractors, and first responders. 20 copies of the training manual shall be provided.

g. All training manuals, presentations and documentation must be provided in reproducible form without copyright limitation, to allow EMTA to reproduce this information for the purpose of training additional maintenance staff or contractors.

C. A fully documented hard and soft copy of all software programs shall be provided to EMTA (or spare PLC CPUs and Operator Interfaces as previously noted). PLC programming software, Operator Interface programming software, SCADA programming software (Development license) and the like shall be supplied to EMTA. Software shall be registered to EMTA at the time of purchase by the Contractor. If any software requires annual license or support fees, these shall be identified and quantified with the proposal.

D. Original copies of all operating permits from all AHJs must be formally submitted by the Contractor.

E. Station acceptance will not be considered final until the Contractor has provided the City with a written “Certification of Code Compliance,” and a “Certification of Testing Completion.” This compliance document shall certify that the CNG station and garage modifications provided meet all applicable codes as listed herein and as required by the AHJ and been fully functionally tested to ensure that all safety systems are fully operable. This certification shall



be signed and stamped by the Pennsylvania Registered Engineer(s) of Record that provided the system design.

F. An Excel form will be provided during commissioning to summarize all conditions of final acceptance of station. This form must be signed off in each category by EMTA or the Consultant to provide station final acceptance.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13620

CNG CIVIL STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Civil and Structural work required in the installation of the Compressed Natural Gas Station. Work includes but may not be limited to:

1. Supply and installation of all excavation, trenching, site grading, backfill, resurfacing, concrete pads, fencing (by others), impact protection (by others) and other work as listed herein and shown on the Drawings, and as required to accomplish a complete and functioning facility consistent with EMTA’s requirements.

2. Complete installation of the natural gas fueling equipment and control systems and necessary connections.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Sections 13500 to 13900 – All.


A. Applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply to the work of this Section, except as modified herein, and are hereby made a part of these Contract Specifications to the extent required:

1. Pennsylvania and International Building Code

2. Civil and Structural sections of this Phase I specification as amended or clarified in this section.


A. Contractor Qualifications: Per Section 13500, General, and the following:

1. Civil Structural contractors shall have at least five years’ experience in earthwork and concrete work similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Field and Shop Personnel Qualifications

1. Site personnel must be persons possessing current journeyman qualifications in their trade, or be continuously supervised on site by a qualified journeyman.



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Contractor and Foreperson qualifications and experience.

2. Deferred Submittals: See Section 13500, General. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The work under this specification includes but is not limited to, all civil and structural work specifically listed herein and/or shown on the drawings and/or as required to construct a complete system. The work consists generally of the complete installation of the natural gas fueling equipment and control systems and all necessary connections. Without limiting the generality of the previous statement, the work includes the following specific tasks as shown in the contract drawings:

1. Note the work that is to be performed by others in Section 13500 of this CNG specification.

2. The Contractor shall review EMTA-supplied drawings and determine and provide any site surveying that may be required to accurately locate the equipment and services in plan and elevation on the site relative to site benchmarks.

3. The CNG compound area indicated in the drawings is the maximum area available. All equipment shall be located in this area and positioned to provide code compliant setbacks and separations and to provide a level of service access comparable to the conceptual layout provided with this bid package.

4. A soils report for the site is available. Contractor is to requires the report and base their design on the site conditions. The minimum pad construction is indicated herein; however, if a more expensive design is required, the cost of additional design and construction is to be included in this bid.

5. The Contractor shall locate all underground services and obstructions prior to any excavation work. The Contractor shall repair any damage caused to underground services expeditiously and at their own expense. All services are to be relocated if required to ensure that they are not under equipment pads and are accessible for future service/repair.

6. If contaminated soil or any underground obstruction is encountered that was not found on the locates or EMTA supplied documentation, the Contractor is to cease work and wait for direction from EMTA before proceeding. No claims for any additional costs will be allowed unless written approval is given prior to proceeding. Disposing of contaminated materials will be considered as “Extra Work” and compensated by EMTA in accordance with the provisions of other sections of this specification.



7. Contractor shall provide concrete pads for the gas dryer, CNG compressor packages, the storage vessel assembly (current and future), all control panels, and other miscellaneous pads as required by the design.

8. Compressor and gas storage pads shall be a minimum of 18 inches thick with an additional 12 inch deep by 12 inch wide reinforced haunch around the perimeter set on 24 inches of fully compacted clean granular “A”. Pads shall have an average of 6 inches exposed above grade. Pads shall have a minimum of two mats of #5 rebar at 12 inch centers in both directions. Storage pad must be designed to accommodate the addition of the future storage on top of the existing storage rack.

9. Dryer and panel support pads shall be a minimum of 12 inches thick with an additional 12 inch deep by 12 inch wide reinforced haunch around the perimeter set on 24 inches of fully compacted clean granular “A”. Pads shall have an average of 6 inches exposed above grade. Pads shall have a minimum of two mats of #5 rebar at 12 centers in both directions.

10. Adequate space shall be provided between skid mounted equipment and adjoining equipment and fences to facilitate easy access for removal of heavy equipment, and to ensure safe access and egress from all areas.

11. Abutting pads shall be at the same finished grade.

This may require some pads to be set into the ground deeper—a minimum of 3 inches above grade must be maintained.

This may also require some pads to be more than 6 inches out of the ground—pads must have at least 12 inches submerged around the perimeter below pavement base material--this may require these pads to be thicker or include a deeper haunch.

12. Contractor shall design and construct site grading within the CNG compound, to ensure that the area within and around the CNG station equipment is fully drained.

13. Contractor shall resurface the entire CNG station compound area between the concrete pads and the yard apron with concrete and reinforcement to match the yard surface.

14. Fencing and gates will be supplied and installed by others.

15. Guard rail will be by others.

16. Contractor shall supply and install all signs and labels as specified in the specifications, and Codes.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Bollard sleeved covers: (By others)

1. Ideal Shield

2. Hamburg, Michigan

3. 810-231-1722




2.03 MATERIALS

A. Concrete used on equipment pads to be mixed to 4000 psi minimum 28 day strength. Concrete to be 6 percent air entrainment.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Protection of Excavations

1. Care shall be taken to ensure that all excavations are well marked and fenced to ensure that any person entering the construction site will be made aware that the excavations exist.

2. Any site lighting, fencing, barricades, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor.

3. All excavations shall be dry and free of excess water. Such water shall be removed from all excavations before work continues.

B. Trenches

1. All work shall be carried out as outlined in the drawings approved by the Consultant prior to construction. All new fill added to the site will be as specified on the drawings.

2. Electric and gas underground conduits and pipes shall have a minimum 36" and 48” cover respectively and 24 inch lateral separation or deeper with wider separation if required by the regulatory agencies and site conditions. If gas and electric are to share the same trench, a separation of 24 inches is preferred but at no time should the separation be less than 12 inches.

3. In this installation, it will be necessary to connect to several conduits, pipes and sleeves carrying power, communications, and gas that are installed by others. The exact connection elevation and detail will be determined once the exact depth and location of roughins is known.

4. The Contractor shall exercise care in trenching to ensure that the disruption it causes to the site is kept to a minimum. Steel plating and other protective means shall be used where directed by EMTA, but at Contractor expense to minimize impact on operations.

5. A layer of clean screened sand at least 6" thick shall be placed in the bottom of all trenches and tamped. A second 6" layer of clean screened sand shall be placed over the pipes and/or conduits prior to backfilling.

C. Backfill

1. Original (native) materials excavated from the site may be replaced provided that it can be adequately compacted, is free of organic material and does not contain rocks or contamination. Any new fill added shall also adhere to this requirement.



2. All fill shall be spread and mechanically compacted in six (6) inch lifts (layers).

3. Plastic service identification tape with a tracer wire and color coded and containing text describing the service (natural gas, electricity, communications, etc.) shall be rolled out along the length of the trench, 12" below grade.

D. Concrete Work

1. Mixing:

a. Design: All concrete for equipment pads shall have a minimum ultimate strength at 28 days of 4000 psi unless otherwise specified.

b. Slump: The water cement ratio shall be adjusted to provide a slump of 3" plus or minus 2".

c. Mixing Time and Delivery: When a truck mixer is used for mixing and transporting concrete, the concrete shall be delivered to the work site and discharged within 1.5 hours after introduction of mixing water to the cement and aggregate mixture, or the introduction of cement to the aggregate.

d. In hot weather or other conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, discharge time shall be within one hour.

2. Placing Concrete:

a. Concrete shall not be deposited until all reinforcement is properly and securely placed and fastened in its correct position, nor until the forms have been braced, inspected and approved and form ties at construction joints have been retightened, nor until all bucks, sleeves, hanger pipes, conduits and bolts, dowels and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein have been placed and anchored. All forms shall be coated with forming oil to facilitate clean removal. All rebar shall be tied in place and all lower level rebar shall be placed on “chairs” to ensure that rebar is not pushed down out of position as concrete is flowed into the form.

b. Concrete shall not be dropped a distance of more than 48". The placing operation shall be conducted at such a rate that the concrete is always plastic so that it mixes with the previous layer of concrete. No partially hardened, contaminated or re-tempered concrete shall be deposited. The placing operation, once started, shall be continuous until completion of the block or section. The top surfaces shall be level and trowelled with a steel trowel or wooden float.

c. Consolidating All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placing, and shall be blended with the previous layer deposited. Concrete shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded inserts and into the corners of the form work. Excessive vibration likely to cause segregation shall be avoided. Vibrators shall be applied at the point of deposit in areas of freshly placed concrete and allowed to sink by their own weight until they penetrate into the previous layer of concrete. They shall be withdrawn immediately at the same speed at which they sank, moved about 12" to a new location and the process repeated.



d. Adequate means shall be provided to maintain the concrete in a moist condition and a temperature of not less than 60°F for three (3) days or 45°F for five (5) days, or for as much more time as is necessary to ensure proper curing of the concrete. This may require spraying concrete with warm water and/or, insulating with batts or straw and tarping, and/or tarping and heating, as required to maintain this condition.

3. Removal of Forms and Patching

a. Removal: Forms shall be left in place until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to carry the load it must sustain. No forms shall be removed until adequate personnel to properly finish the concrete are present on the job site.

b. Patching: Immediately after removing forms, all form ties shall be removed to a depth of 2" from the surface of the concrete. Burning off ties or other metal will not be permitted. All cavities produced by the removal of metal ties shall be carefully chipped and completely filled with a well-blended mortar consisting of one part cement to three parts sand and the surface shall be left smooth and even. Any poor joints, voids, stone pockets or other defective areas and all holes shall be patched before the concrete is thoroughly dry.

E. Restoration of Surfaces (Asphalt, Sodding and Landscaping)

1. When all trenching, digging and backfilling is completed, all disturbed surfaces shall be restored to their original or designed finished condition. This includes landscaping sodding and/or concrete surfaces to original conditions.

2. Replace and restore sod, topsoil, landscaping, fencing, lighting, irrigation systems, etc., in un-surfaced areas that are disturbed by work under this project to original or design conditions.

3. No asphalt is to be used in resurfacing. In areas not exposed to bus traffic, concrete apron shall be a minimum of 6” thick with 6” WWM as reinforcement.

F. Fencing: (By others)

1. Fencing shall be installed as per the Drawings.

2. Fencing shall be eight (8) feet in height. Corner, end and gate posts shall be a minimum of 3-1/2" diameter schedule 40 wall. Other posts must be a minimum of 2-3/8" diameter schedule 40.

3. PVC coated chain-link material shall be 9 gauge with 2" links.

4. Colored coated fence insert slats shall be installed to match existing fencing on site.

5. All non-coated fencing materials (except privacy slats) shall be heavy hot dipped galvanized steel.

6. A top bar shall be required along the full length of the fence. A middle bar shall be required in each corner or end or gate section of the fence.



7. Double gates with a minimum width of 10 feet and with cane bolt locks must be provided as required to provide adequate access to perform major equipment change out (for example a prime mover or crankcase).

G. Bollards: (By others)

1. Install fixed and sleeved bollards as indicated on the drawings.

2. Minimum Bollard Design requirements:

a. Fixed bollards shall be set into a 24" diameter concrete filled sonotube extending a minimum of 36" below grade. The bollard is to be 8" schedule 40 pipe and must extend 42" above grade and 36" below grade. The bollard is to be concrete filled and concrete capped. The outside of the bollard is to be painted bright yellow. The bollard must then be protected with a bollard sleeve.

b. For removable bollards, the outer (lower) sleeve is to be set into a 24" diameter concrete filled sonotube extending a minimum of 36" below grade. The lower sleeve is to be as required to provide a proper fit with the bollard—9” Schedule 40 pipe is recommended where available. The removable bollard is to be a hollow 8" Schedule 40 pipe and must extend 42" above grade and 36" below grade. The top of the bollard is to be pipe capped. The outside of the bollard is to be painted bright yellow. Two 1” diameter holes shall be provided 12” from the top of the bollard to allow a bar to be run through for lifting. The bollard shall then be protected with a bollard sleeve.

H. Guard Rail (By others)

1. Provided by others.


A. As per other Section 13500, General, and following.

B. Eight test cylinders shall be required to be taken with each concrete truck load. Accurate records of concrete placement shall be maintained and made available to the Consultant upon request. Record date, time, location and quantity of pour, test samples taken and method of placing shall appear in the record of pour. Test samples shall remain on site and subjected to the same curing conditions as the pads, including heat and hydration. Samples shall be broken at a third party certified materials testing laboratory to determine compressive strength at 24 hours, 72 hours, 7 days and 28 days.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Site Cleanup

1. Contractor is to safely store all waste construction material on site and out of EMTA’s work area. Site is to be kept clean and all site hazards shall be rendered safe as soon as it is practical to do so.

2. All waste material must be removed daily and the site fully cleaned at the point of substantial completion and earlier if required by EMTA.



END OF SECTION



SECTION 13650

PIPING AND TUBING AND COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Civil and Structural work required for Piping and tubing work required in the fabrication of the Compressed Natural Gas Station and in the maintenance building upgrades. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. Supply, installation and connection of piping and tubing listed herein and shown on the Drawings, and as required to accomplish a complete and functioning equipment consistent with EMTA’s requirements.

2. Complete installation and internal and external connections of the natural gas fueling equipment and control systems.

3. Piping and tubing work required in the shop fabrication of the CNG equipment.

1.02 RELATED WORK



A. Applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply to the work of this Section, except as modified herein, and are hereby made a part of these Contract Specifications to the extent required:

1. ASME Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications

2. ASME B31.3 Process Piping


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Per sections 13500 to 13900, General, and the following:

1. Equipment manufacturers shall have at least five years of experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Field and Shop Personnel Qualifications

1. Tube fitters shall provide a letter from the local Swagelok and/or Parker Seal-Lok representative (as applicable) certifying that they have been adequately trained in the proper make-up and inspection of Swagelok and/or Parker Seal-Lok products (as applicable).



2. Pressure welding shall be performed by certified welders per ASME Section IX to registered welding procedures.

a. Certification and registration shall be by a National Board (N.B.) registered Agency.

b. Each welder shall permanently stamp their welds with the welder’s identification number and the pipe spool weld identification number.

3. Performance test cards shall be copied and submitted to EMTA for documentation purposes and shown to the Consultant when requested.

4. Welding and piping and tube fitting work on site, regardless of pressure, shall use persons possessing current journeyman qualifications in their trade.

C. Installer Qualifications

1. Piping contractor shall submit proof of successful completion of a minimum of five projects in the previous three years that required significant process piping and high pressure (greater than 4000 psig) stainless steel tubing installation.

2. Piping contractor shall be required to provide references and staffing lists for these projects and a proposed staffing list for this project to demonstrate that proposed staff will have the required experience.

D. Mill Test Reports/Certificates: Gas piping, tubing, and fittings shall be as listed below and shall be ordered with mill test certificates and/or certificates of compliance which shall be submitted to EMTA.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Per section 13500, General and the following:

1. Notify EMTA at least 14 days in advance of any factory pressure testing to allow them the opportunity to witness these tests.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details to include the following:

1. Qualifications:

a. Procedure Qualification Records and Welding Procedure Specification for certified welders.

b. Performance test cards.

c. Tube fitters' qualification letters.

d. Piping subcontractor’s qualifications as indicated.

2. Deferred Submittals: See Section 13500, General.





1. Pipe and tubing shall be handled in a manner to prevent possible damage to walls or ends or scratching of the tube O.D. Pipe and tubing shall be unloaded by lifting at both ends of any one length to avoid bending and placing the section carefully upon a padded skid such that the entire length is uniformly supported to prevent bending or flexure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Piping work specifically listed herein and shown or indicated on the Drawings. Work includes supply and installation of the following:

1. Gas isolation valves (manual and automated), flexible connectors and check valves used in the site installation and piping shall be supplied loose to the installation Contractor by the Equipment Supplier and shall be standardized to the similar components used on the equipment.

2. Piping and tubing work required in the manufacturing, fabrication and installation of the CNG equipment. Site work shall include all required interconnecting piping and tubing with minimum sizes as outlined in the attached drawings. Site-installed piping and tubing shall be placed on pipe racks, covered raceways or underground as required to minimize exposure of piping to hazards on site and to minimize the tripping hazard. Pipes are not to be installed on the top surface of concrete pads except as specifically allowed by the Consultant and in these cases, OSHA compliant covers/bridging must be provided.

3. In this application, a structural steel pipe rack (as indicated in the layout drawings) is to be constructed for all piping within the CNG equipment compound. Pipe rack and all supports and brackets are to be hot dipped galvanized steel or epoxy paint with Tapecoat pipe wrap 12” above to 12” below grade.

4. All lines to and from the CNG Equipment Compound are to be installed by others in trenches under Phase I work. The Contractor is required to coordinate or relocate all risers as required for fit-up to equipment and make connections from underground lines to above ground piping.

5. Piping in the fuel island area and gas piping above and inside the bus garage building shall be anchored to the building frame in a manner consistent with current codes and industry standards. Pipe and tubing above the roof and in the service lanes shall be fixed to a Unistrut (or equal) frame using Stauff (or equal)two piece saddle type pipe clamps at manufacturer required intervals. Pipe running above the roof shall be supported and anchored to the inside parapet wall. The high pressure lines above the roof shall be run as 2” schedule 160 to within 10 feet of the point of entry above the fueling room, where it can be reduced to 1” x 0.120” minum wall TP 316 SA 213 stainless steel tubing. Manual and automatic isolation valves shall be supplied and installed above the roof as indicated



in the bid drawings and shielded against snow and ice. These automated valves shall be fail closed and shall open only when the dispenser is authorized. An adjustable time may be installed on these valves to delay closure under normal conditions by up to 10 minutes to reduce the amount of cycling required by these valves.

6. All pipe racks and anchoring systems must be compliant with seismic requirements for this location.

7. An 8 inch ANSI 150 rated, two or three piece fire rated (API 607) manually operated carbon steel ball valve with stainless steel trim is already installed on the gas service riser. The valve shall be lockable in the open or closed position.

8. Spring return (normally closed) actuated, two or three piece fire rated (API 607) carbon steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a remote, explosion proof solenoid on the inlet to the station, downstream of the flex connector and upstream of the CNG dryer. This valve shall be 8 inch and ANSI 150 rated. This valve shall open only when any CNG compressor is operating and close when no compressor is running, or under ESD conditions.

9. An 8-inch wafer style check valve with soft, bubble tight seat is to be installed downstream of the automated valve.

10. An 8 inch ANSI 150 rated, two or three piece fire rated (API 607) manually operated carbon steel ball valve with stainless steel trim is to be installed on the gas service line downstream of the check valve. The valve shall be lockable in the open or closed position.

11. Supply and install two 36-inch long, 8 inch diameter ANSI 150 rated, stainless steel flexible connectors for connection to the gas dryer.

12. Supply and install 36-inch long, ANSI 150 rated, stainless steel flexible connectors for connection to the compressors. These flexible connectors shall be the same nominal diameter of the compressor inlet piping.

13. Minimum 2-inch Schedule 80 vent piping and required supports and bracketing from the safety relief valves (SRV) on the CNG Dryer and Compressors to a minimum of 15 feet above grade, or five feet higher than the tallest equipment (whichever is higher). Pipe unions shall be provided at each SRV to allow for easy removal and replacement of the SRV. The vent stack shall have a vertical discharge with rain cap (tack welded to the stack and weighted for closure) and be equipped with a drip pocket with a weep hole in the bottom located approximately 24 inches above grade. The pipe rack shall be used to support these vent stacks.

14. Minimum 2-inch Schedule 80 vent piping and required supports and bracketing from the SRVs on the storage assembly to a minimum of 15 feet above grade, or 5 feet higher than the tallest equipment (whichever is higher). Pipe unions shall be provided at each SRV to allow for easy removal and replacement of the SRV. The vent stack shall have a vertical discharge with rain cap (tack welded to the stack and weighted for closure) and be equipped with a drip pocket with a weep hole in the bottom located approximately 24 inches above grade. A separate vent stack shall be provided for each Storage Assembly. The pipe rack shall be used to support these vent stacks.



15. Minimum 2-inch Schedule 80 vent piping from the relief valves in all dispensers to the CNG equipment compound. Pipe unions shall be provided at each SRV to allow for easy removal and replacement of the SRV. The vent stack shall have a vertical discharge with rain cap (tack welded to the stack and weighted for closure) and be equipped with a drip pocket with a weep hole in the bottom located approximately 24 inches above grade. The underground portion of this vent line is installed by others.

16. Tubing and piping shall be installed as defined in the approved equipment supplier shop drawings, as indicated in the Specifications and approved drawings. Tubing shall be installed with expansion offsets and “U” bends as required to allow for expansion/contraction and vibration. All tubing and piping shall be laid out/configured and connected in a manner that allows each section to be removed without disassembly of adjacent piping, tubing or equipment.

17. Compressor interstage piping shall utilize flanged connections to the compressor, bottles and cooler, Compressor interstage tubing shall use flanged or face seal fittings to the compressor, bottles and cooler. Compression fittings are not to be used interstage.

18. Air Piping:

a. Run, route and secure 1-inch Schedule 40 A106B air manifold, with 1/2-inch tubing branch lines and interconnecting air lines as required by the manufacturer’s drawings including all required piping from the building air supply to the coalescing filter and air dryer and from the air dryer to the air manifold.

b. A 3-valve block and bypass around the air dryer is required.

c. The system shall be equipped with unions and arranged such that sections can be readily disassembled for cleaning if necessary.

d. Air piping drops shall be equipped with dirt pockets with locking drain valves and locking isolation valves on each branch line.

e. Provide hose connections complete with ball valves and pipe supports at each skid mounted piece of equipment for use with air tools and for future facility expansion and/or modification.

f. Air lines shall be run to the station inlet fire valve, gas dryer (if required), each compressor, the defueling panel, the buffer panel and each dispenser.

19. Signs and labels as specified in the Drawings, Codes and OSHA.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Gas Instrumentation Tube Fittings

1. Description/Requirements:

a. Tube fittings shall be 316 Stainless Steel (SS).

b. Fittings used on pieces of equipment and on the site installation shall be approved by the compressor packager and identical to those used on the compressor package.



Compression fittings on the site shall be identical make and series. O-ring face seal fittings used on the site shall be identical make and series.

c. Compression fittings shall be dual ferrule design. Both ferrules shall be machined (not stamped) and the rear ferrule is to be hinging design.

2. Manufacturers: Swagelok, or approved equal for compression fittings and Parker "Seal-Lok" or approved equal for face seal O-ring fittings.

a. Fittings shall be supported with manufacturing, engineering and parts storage in North America.

B. Screwed Pipe Fittings: SA 105 forged carbon steel or 316 SS.

C. Tapered Thread Sealant: A high quality anaerobic liquid Teflon thread sealant, or Teflon tape, that is approved for this application by the tube fitting manufacturer.

D. Gauges

1. Description/Requirements: Stainless steel case and wetted parts. 4:1 safety factor at full scale. Glycerin filled with blow out plug. Gauges to operate with maximum pressure at 50 to 70 percent of full scale of gauge.

2. Manufacturers: Swagelok, Ashcroft, WIKA, or approved equal.

E. Low Pressure (less than 500 psig) Ball Valves (including actuated ball valves)

1. Description/Requirements: two-piece or three-piece, carbon steel ball valves with stainless steel trim. Valves larger than 1 inch must include flanged raised face ends.

2. Manufacturers: Worchester, Watts, Habonim, SVF, or approved equal.

F. High Pressure (greater than 500 psig) Ball Valves (including actuated ball valves)

1. Description/Requirements: Stainless steel ball valves with stainless steel trim. Manual valves shall include locking kit.

a. Valves up to and including 3/4-inch: Approved for Alternative Fuel applications with a minimum Cv of 12 for 3/4 inch and 7 for 1/2 inch valves. Pressure rated to be minimum 5,800 psig. End connections shall be compression fittings of the same manufacturer (brand and series) as used in the station.

b. Valves greater than 3/4-inch: Bodies shall be three piece, six bolt design with a minimum pressure rating of 6000 psig and female NPT ends.

c. Check Valves on Compressor Interstage Drains and equipment located Downstream of the Compressor High Pressure Cylinder: 316 stainless steel poppet style with compression ends. Cv shall be minimum 2 on 1/2-inch valves and 6 on 3/4- and 1-inch valves.

2. Manufacturers: Swagelok, Habonim, SVF, Hoke, or approved equal as indicated below:



a. Valves up to and including 3/4-inch: Swagelok "SS-AFS series."

b. Valves greater than 3/4-inch: Habonim, SVF.

c. Check Valves: Hoke "Series 691F” or as recommended by compressor packager.

3. Valves shall be supported with manufacturing, engineering and parts storage in North America.

G. Drain Valves on Filters, Vessels and Throttling Valves

1. Description/Requirements: Valves shall be “Gauge Style” bar stock stainless steel body and trim. Needle/plug shall be non-rotating. Seat shall be replaceable soft seat. Pressure rated to 6,000 psig minimum. Swagelok “Rising Plug” series SS-4PD with replaceable seats—or approved equal.

2. Manufacturers: Swagelok, or approved equal.

a. Valves shall be supported with manufacturing, engineering and parts storage in North America.

H. Safety Relief Valves (SRVs)

1. Description/Requirements: Carbon steel or stainless steel bodies with stainless steel trim and “UV” stamped N.B. rated.

2. Manufacturers: Anderson Greenwood, Consolidated, Mercer, or approved equal.

I. Pressure Transducers

1. Description/Requirements: 316 SS for wetted parts and explosion proof or intrinsically safe. Transducer shall be rated for a minimum 10 percent higher range than the relief valve protecting the system.

2. Manufacturers: Swagelok, Ashcroft, Wika, or approved equal.

a. Transducers shall be supported with engineering and parts storage in North America.

J. Mass Flow Meters

1. Description/Requirements: Stainless steel case and wetted parts. Coriolis type with minimum pressure rating of 5,000 psig. Meter shall have type approval in the United States for retail sale of CNG.

2. Manufacturers: Meter shall be supported with manufacturing, engineering and parts storage in North America.

3. Products: Rosemount-Micromotion CNG 50, or approved equal.



K. Bleed Valves Required for Service

1. Description/Requirements: Stainless steel with minimum design equal to 6,000 psig for high pressure applications and 1.5 times the relief valve setting for station inlet and interstage pressure applications.

2. Manufacturers and Products: Swagelok BV series, Hoke 6600 series, or approved equal.

L. Air Compressors

1. Description/Requirements:

a. Compressors shall be supported with manufacturer owned or approved representative located within 100 miles of the site. This support shall include 24 hour 7 day per week parts and technician support.

2. Manufacturers: Quincy QR Series or approved equal.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Valves, fittings, instrumentation and other mechanical components (except internal compressor components) that are not specifically called out in this Section, shall be non-proprietary, third party supplied.

B. Gas and Lubricating Oil Flow Piping and Tubing

1. Components containing gas shall be carbon steel or stainless steel as indicated below. The vehicle filling hoses are considered to be the only exception to this rule.

2. Compressor and Dryer Carbon Steel Piping: ASME SA106B seamless pipe of appropriate diameter and schedule.

3. Piping on Pipe racks and Underground Piping: ASME SA 312 TP 316/TP 316L (must be double rated) stainless steel pipe in PVC conduit sleeves underground, with no additional cathodic protection required.

4. ASME SA179 carbon steel tubing of diameter and wall thickness as required by ASME B31.3 may be used in the compressor interstage piping only.

5. Tubing: ASME SA213 TP316 seamless, cold drawn stainless steel. This includes gauge lines, pressure transducer sensing lines and pilot pressure gas lines. TP316L and TP316N stainless steel tubing is not permitted. Surface hardness shall not exceed Rockwell B90. Diameters and wall thickness as follows:

a. 1 inch O.D. x 0.120 inch minimum wall – this can be met by special ordering minimum 0.120” wall tubing or by purchasing 0.120 inch average wall tubing that is verified using an ultrasound meter and checking tubing along the continuous length at 90 degree intervals around the perimeter.

b. 3/4 inch O.D. x 0.109 inch average wall

c. 1/2 inch O.D. x 0.065 inch average wall



d. 3/8 inch O.D. x 0.049 inch average wall

e. 1/4 inch O.D. x 0.035 inch average wall

6. Flared fittings shall not be permitted.

7. Zero clearance fittings or pipe “U-bends” shall be used where actuated ball valves, safety relief valves, check valves, and the like, need to be removed for servicing. Zero clearance fittings must be verified to meet the design pressure of the system they are installed in.

8. Thread-o-lets, flanges, swaged nipples, plugs and bushings shall be ASME SA105. All butt weld pipe fittings including elbows, returns and reducers shall be ASME SA234 WPB. Socket weld fittings are not acceptable except on the Gas Dryer. Bolts and studs shall be ASME SA193 Grade B7. Nuts shall be ASME SA194 Grade 2H.

9. Socket weld fittings are not acceptable except on the CNG dryer skid equipment.

10. Pipe unions shall only be used on vent lines. Weld neck flanges are the approved method of connecting pipe spools to equipment—slip on flanges are not approved except on the CNG dryer. Raised Face (RF) flanges shall be used on ANSI Class 900# and lower flanges as well as on any ANSI Class 1500# and higher flanges requiring a flange isolation kit. Ring Type Joint (RTJ) flanges shall be used on ANSI Class 1500# and higher flanges not requiring a flange isolation kit.

11. Screwed pipe and fittings shall be used only where a transition to tubing is required, or for gas service two inches or smaller with pressures below 15 psig, or for vent lines. The use of stainless steel threaded fittings in combination with compression fittings shall be minimized. Seal welding of threaded fittings is prohibited.

12. Where threaded fittings are necessary on gas piping, the fittings shall be selected and arranged such that positioning of the fitting is flexible. The use of tees or elbows with compression ends and threaded ends on the same fitting is prohibited. In such a case, a union tee or elbow shall be used in conjunction with a male or female tube adapter.

a. Some female pipe thread fittings cannot be used downstream of the compressor as they are not rated to high enough pressures. In addition, safety relief valves must be installed so they can be removed and replaced without having to turn the SRV to loosen or tighten it. A flange, compression fitting or zero clearance fitting on the inlet and outlet, in compliance with the above shall be used. Pipe unions may also be used on the SRV vent piping only.

13. Tube fittings in the station shall all be of the same manufacturer and shall be of the same material as the tubing.

C. Gas Vent Lines

1. Gas vent lines shall be of the same materials as specified for gas flow lines. Each line shall be Schedule 80 minimum and sized to match the outlet size or maximum flow capacity of the Safety Relief Valve (SRV) it serves, whichever is greater. Each vent stack shall be sized to match the total maximum flow capacity of the relief valves it



serves. The compressor vent stack is to be a minimum of the same size as the compressor suction piping (2-inch Schedule 80 minimum).

2. Air and gas safety relief valves shall be piped to discharge vertically a minimum of 5 feet above the roof of the shelter (if applicable) and a minimum of 12 feet above surrounding grade, whichever is greater. Vent pipes shall be provided with a drip pocket to trap liquids and/or solids. This pocket shall be located within the enclosure (if applicable) and shall be equipped with a manual drain valve. Vent lines shall be securely fastened and vent stacks shall be given sufficient support to prevent pipe movement during a discharge event. Vent stacks shall also be equipped with rain caps to prevent airborne rain and snow from contaminating the vent piping. Note that gas and air vent systems shall be piped such that mixing cannot occur.

3. Compressor packings shall be externally vented and shall be piped separately from safety relief vent piping and provided with a drip pocket to trap liquids and/or solids. This pocket shall be located within the enclosure and equipped with a manual drain valve.

D. Pilot Air Lines

1. ASME SA213 TP316 tubing as specified in Subparagraph 2.03 above or A106B carbon steel pipe as indicated herein.

2. ½” x 0.065 inch continuous coil stainless steel tubing in PVC conduit sleeve shall be used in the underground section between the defuel panel and the pipe rack and on the underground line from the pipe rack to the station inlet fire valve.

3. Air piping on the pipe rack shall be 1 inch Sch 40 A106B with ½” x 0.065 inch stainless steel branch connections to the individual skids, dispensers and panels.

4. Air lines to and within the fuel room shall be 1 inch schedule 40 A106B.

5. The use of stainless steel tubing and fittings of the same manufacturer selected in Paragraph 2.02 above, or minimum 200 psi rated (4:1 safety factor) Teflon air line with fittings of the same manufacturer selected in Paragraph 2.02. above will be allowed within panels. Airlines installed on equipment skids between components or panels shall be 316 SS tubing.

6. Valves shall be two piece, minimum 600 WOG rated ball valves with steel handles and locking kits.

E. Miscellaneous Piping Components

1. Flange gaskets shall be spiral wound metallic with centering ring (up to ANSI 900# RF, non-isolation), malleable iron (ANSI 1500# RTJ and higher, non-isolation), or phenolic (up to ANSI 2500# RF flange isolation kits only) or a material approved by the Consultant. Gasket materials shall be non-flammable, non-asbestos materials.

2. Threads shall be NPT if tapered, or SAE if straight, unless otherwise specified.

3. Bolts, tubing, piping, and fittings shall be to SAE (i.e. non-metric) standards. Bolts shall be threaded UNF or UNC.



4. Swivel hose ends and fittings shall be 37 degree flare cadmium or zinc plated carbon steel.

5. Gauges shall be equipped with stainless steel wetted parts and rated at 4:1 safety factor (minimum). Gauges shall be equipped with a blow out disc in the case. Gauges shall be selected to provide normal operating pressure (at maximum suction and discharge conditions) at approximately 60 percent of their range. All gauges shall be glycerin filled.

6. Station inlet and compressor inlet valves shall be rated fire safe to API 607. Lever operated valves must be equipped with locking kits capable of securing the valve in either an open or closed position. Actuated and manual ball valves shall be equipped with high cycle life stem and seals and shall be positionable in any orientation. Actuators shall be mounted to ISO or equivalent standards using a minimum of 1/4-inch wall square steel tubing or valve manufacturer supplied bracket. The mounting bracket shall be fastened to the ball valve and the actuator with a minimum of four stainless steel bolts with split lock washers. Actuator/ball valve assemblies shall be factory tested for proper alignment and operation.

7. Safety relief valves, actuated valves (valve stem vertical, actuator above or below valve), and filters shall be mounted in their normal vertical orientation. Mass flow meters shall be mounted to be self draining.

F. Air Compressors and Dryer for the CNG Station

1. The following paragraphs outline the minimum capacity and requirements for the air supply system. The equipment shall be sized such that one air compressor can supply the station’s air requirements. For redundancy, two equally sized compressors are required. If the equipment proposed requires greater capacity or higher pressure, provide that system for the project at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. The compressed air system shall be installed in the air compressor room at the CNG compound.

3. Air Compressors: One duplex air compressor assembly or two simplex air compressor assemblies, tank mounted to a horizontal receiver(s). Each compressor shall include:

a. The air compressors selected shall be the most robust industrial duty design, highest duty cycle units available from the selected manufacturer.

b. The following paragraphs outline the requirements for reciprocating compressors.

1) The air compressor shall be an industrial duty, two stage, air cooled cast iron crankcase and cylinders and rated for continuous duty.

2) The compressor valves shall be disc plate style. Reed or finger style is not acceptable.

3) Compressors shall be equipped to allow continuous loaded/unloaded (or modulated) operation to reduce the number of starts and stops required. The



MCP PLC shall determine automatically if the compressors are cycling frequently that continuous operation mode is required.

4) Provide pressurized lubrication to the running gear. The crankshaft shall run on roller bearings. Compressors shall come loaded with synthetic oil.

5) The compressors shall be a minimum of 2 (two) horsepower each and rated for 150 psig discharge.

6) Air-to-air intercoolers (reciprocating only) and aftercooler (both rotary screw and reciprocating) shall be provided.

7) The compressors shall be equipped with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) approved belt and other guards.

8) A stainless steel braided flex connector at least 18 inches long shall be provided on the discharge piping.

9) Each compressor shall have its own motor which shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) design.

10) The compressors shall be equipped with low oil pressure alarms, high air pressure shut downs and the common receiver outlet shall have a 4-20 mA pressure transducer and a start/stop pressure switch with two isolated contacts. Each compressor shall be equipped with a thermocouple on the head or second stage discharge valve (as applicable) to monitor high temperature. Control functions shall be performed by the Master Control Panel (MCP) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC.) Compressors are to be controlled by the master PLC not by a compressor mounted controller.

11) No starters shall be provided as these are included in the Station Power Distribution and Control Panel.

12) The compressors shall each be tank mounted to a horizontal ASME Section VIII Division 1 rated receiver(s). The receiver(s) shall be a minimum 200 psig design pressure and a minimum of 200 US gallon total volume.

13) A solenoid operated automatic drain valve with an adjustable timer shall be provided on each tank drain.

14) The air compressor shall be anchored with vibration isolation mounts supplied by the air compressor manufacturer and installed per the manufacturer’s requirements.

15) An oversized coalescing filter shall be supplied and installed downstream of the compressor. This coalescing filter shall be comparable in size and capacity to a Parker HN8L-6CUG. A multi-turn manual drain valve shall be included on the bowl.

4. Air Dryer: Include the following:

a. A twin tower heatless regenerative desiccant dryer



b. Dryer to reduce air at 100 psig to not greater than -40 deg F pressure dewpoint.

c. Inlet coalescing filter required.

d. Dryer shall be equipped with an energy saving control system to regenerate the dryer only as required by operating conditions.

e. Active tower light and failure to switch light and alarm.

f. Discharge particulate filter body required.

g. Three valve block and bypass required.

h. Vessels built to ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, and equipped with "UV" stamped relief valves (if applicable).

i. 120 VAC, single phase, 15 A power input. Electrical equipment shall be General Purpose, requiring installation in a safe area.

j. Rated at the flow of one compressor at 100 psig inlet, all pressure retaining components rated for minimum 200 psig. The air dryer shall be equipped with orifices to restrict the flow to its maximum allowable flow rate in the event of low downstream pressure.

k. Downstream of the dryer, a filter/regulator/gauge assembly shall be provided to feed CNG equipment with 100 to 125 psig clean air. A pressure transducer shall be installed downstream of the regulator to monitor and alarm low station air pressure.



PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Piping and Tubing Bending and Fitting Practices

1. Piping and tubing shall be installed in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents; in straight, evenly spaced, parallel runs and properly insulated if indicated on the Drawings. Piping systems shall be built, supported and pitched to provide suitable venting and draining. The piping shall be run true to the vertical and horizontal axis of the facilities wherever possible. If the type of installation requires a slope on the pipe, the slope shall remain even along the pipe. Valves shall be accessible for ease of operation, maintenance and overhaul/replacement. Bends shall be minimized wherever possible. Pipe bends shall not be permitted. Tubing shall be bent using benders which minimize radial distortion. This distortion shall not exceed code requirements.

2. Pipe and tubing shall be cut with a cutter intended for the application. The use of a hand hacksaw is prohibited (unless a Swagelok tube vise and guide is used). The use of a power hacksaw or bandsaw shall be allowed for pipe and one-inch and larger tubing only, provided cuts are square. Cuts shall be deburred externally and internally. Tubing shall be free of scratches subsequent to cutting and deburring. Filings and cuttings shall be removed prior to assembly. Compression fittings and threaded fittings shall be bench made wherever possible (i.e. factory or field preassembled before installation to minimize leaks due to poor or misaligned connections). A hydraulic swager shall be used for 3/4-inch and larger tubing.

3. All sections of tubing and piping shall be designed to allow safe and controlled depressurization. This will require that bleed valves be installed at various points in the system that could be captive. Drain valves on filters are considered to be acceptable depressurization points. As with other valves, these valves shall be identified and tagged with a unique identification number and standard depressurization procedures shall be provided describing in detail by reference to valve numbers how to safety depressurize, purge and re-pressurize all systems in the station.

4. The use of tube unions shall be minimized by using long sticks of tubing—unions will only be allowed where a bulkhead is required, or where the length of tubing without the union will exceed a 20 foot stick. The use of tube union elbows shall be minimized by using bends where feasible.

B. Pressure Welding and Fitting Practices

1. Construction - General Requirements:

a. Provide welding materials, equipment, tools and supplies of a size, grade and quality approved by the Consultant.

b. End Preparation and Fit up: End preparation or beveling shall be made by hand filing, machine tool or flame cutting device. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and regular. Free hand torch beveling shall not be permitted unless previously authorized on a case-by-case basis by the Consultant. Rust, scale, mill slag, primer, moisture, oil or other material which may be detrimental to the finished weld shall



be completely removed from the weld area. The ends of pipe, fittings, valves, and the like, shall be cleaned beyond the beveled edges at least 2 inches both internally and externally to assure no foreign material enters the weld puddle. Cleaning of weld bevels shall be done with power or hand tools.

c. Line up Clamps: The abutting edges of weldments shall be held in alignment by an approved type of line up clamp where practical. When welding fitting to fitting where an approved type of line up clamp is not practical, each fitting shall be properly supported so as to minimize movement and strain during welding. Short runs of station piping or runs of pipe of limited distances shall demand an approved external line up clamp. When using an external line up clamp, the clamp shall not be removed until the stringer bead segments have been uniformly spaced around the circumference of the pipe and shall have an accumulative length of at least 50 percent of the pipe circumference.

d. Alignment: The alignment of the abutting ends shall be such as to minimize the offset between surfaces. For pipe of the same nominal wall thickness, the offset shall not exceed 1/16 inch. Any greater offset, provided it is caused by dimensional variations, shall be equally distributed around the circumference of the pipe or fitting.

2. Electrodes:

a. Size of Electrodes: Welding shall be completed using electrodes according to the electrode size and classification listed on the certified welding procedure.

b. Electrode Protection: Welding electrodes shall be kept dry and protected from any mechanical damage or deterioration. They shall not be used if found or suspected to be defective.

c. Burned or defective electrodes shall not be dropped on the ground or in the raceway, but shall be discarded in a proper container.

3. Welding:

a. Manual Shielded Metal Arc Welding: Welding shall be accomplished by use of low-hydrogen type electrodes, except for the first pass.

b. The root bead and hot pass shall be deposited using conventional electrodes designated for that particular application. All filler and cover passes shall be completed by using low hydrogen electrodes.

c. Dirt, scale and slag shall be removed from each bead and groove, between passes, and after the weld has been completed with either hand or power tools.

d. The cover of cap pass shall be raised a maximum of 1/16 inch above the pipe wall, with a width sufficient enough to cover at least 1/16 inch on each side of the weld groove. A concave cap shall be repaired by the addition of another pass.

e. Welds shall be spaced a minimum of one and a half nominal pipe diameters away from any adjacent weld.



f. Ground Clamps Welding of ground clamps to pipe or fittings shall not be permitted. Ground clamps shall be constructed in such a manner as to fit uniformly and securely enough to eliminate any possibility of arc burns on the pipe or fittings. Ground clamps shall be kept in a good state of repair, lubricated regularly and cleaned when required of rust, slag, spatter, scale, primer, coating materials, and the like. so as to prevent arc burns.

g. Weather Protection: Welding shall be performed within a weather proof enclosure to prevent rain, or foreign objects from contaminating the work. The glare from arc welding shall be blocked by the use of commercially available weld curtains.

h. Exposed Pipe Joints: Pipe joints for buried pipe shall remain exposed until inspected. Where the exposed pipe is in an area where vehicles need to cross, the inspection process shall be expedited to minimize disruption in traffic flow.

C. Pipe and Tubing Support and Fastening Techniques

1. Pipe and tubing shall be adequately supported per ASME requirements to prevent bending, sagging and excessive vibration or damage to threads or flanges. When placing the pipe on to the supports, care shall be exercised so as not to jerk the pipe or impose any stresses that may kink or put a permanent bend or stress in the pipe or crack a thread.

2. Pipe and tubing clamps for suction, interstage, and discharge lines within the compressor package shall be Swagelok or Stauff two piece block/saddle style pipe clamps with aluminum inserts or approved equal within the compressor package. All other tubing and piping within the station shall be supported using Swagelok or Stauff two piece block/saddle style pipe clamps with plastic inserts, or approved equal. As a minimum, clamps on the compressor package shall be placed no greater than 48 inches apart and 12 inches from both sides of any bends. Where the requirements of any codes, or manufacturer or the vibration and pulsation study are more stringent, that clamping interval shall apply. Pipe and tubing shall not be used to support external devices. Clamps and fasteners shall be adequate for the application intended.

3. Clamps and fasteners shall be secured by mechanical means (e.g., welded, bolt with lock washer). The use of adhesives and self-tapping screws shall be approved by the Consultant. The use of Swagelok or Stauff Tubing Support Systems is required for gauge sense lines inside the compressor package and tubing and piping outside the compressor package where temperatures do not exceed approximately 150 deg F. Clamp spacing shall be as per governing code or the clamp manufacturer’s specifications, whichever is more stringent. Unistrut style conduit clamps will not be acceptable for piping and tubing.

D. Identification

1. Weld Identification: After completing a weld, the welder shall mark it to identify their work. Where two or more welders are employed to produce a single weld, the joint shall be marked to identify the portion made by each welder. No notch stencils shall be used. Paint sticks are acceptable so long as the identification will last until the weld has been deemed satisfactory.

2. Valve Identification:



a. Valve Identification: Manual and automated valves (including ball, drain, safety and check valves) shall be equipped with stainless steel or brass labels with a unique valve number clearly indicated in 1/2-inch high letters and permanently affixed to the valve with stainless steel wire or chain.


A. As per other sections 13500 to 13900, General, and following.

B. Non-Destructive Examination of Weld Joints

1. All welds shall be visually examined for uniform appearance and finish.

2. Butt welds shall be subjected to 10 percent full circumference radiographic testing by a N.B. certified agency or as required by governing code, whichever is greater. Acceptability of weld is based on ANSI B31.3. Radiographic test reports and films on shop fabricated piping shall be forwarded to EMTA at time of shipping. Testing shall include 10 percent of each welder’s welds and 10 percent of each pipe size and thickness.

3. Pipe spool sketches referenced to each X-ray to allow later identification of a particular X-ray to a particular weld must be provided along with the X-ray reports and films. These sketches must also identify the welder that performed each weld.

4. Thread-o-lets and weld-o-lets must be die penetrant or mag particle tested.

C. Pressure Testing

1. General:

a. Gas piping shall be pressure tested to a value of 1.5x (hydrostatic) the relief valve setting for 60 minutes, or 1.1x (pneumatic) the relief valve setting for 60 minutes or as required by the local inspection agency. Extreme care shall be used due to the inherent risk of a catastrophic failure which could cause serious injury. Nonessential personnel shall leave and protection from injury shall be provided for those left on site. Shop reports shall be signed by a manufacturer authorized test technician and shall include:

1) Spool number

2) Spool description

3) SRV setting

4) Test pressure(s)

5) Test duration (starting and ending times)

6) Test date

7) Signature of Technician



8) Calibration data for gauges, meters, transducers, telemetry equipment, and the like.

9) Ambient temperature

b. Prior to performing tests, SRV's and filter cartridges shall be removed from the system. Subsequent to the pressure tests, the SRV's and filter cartridges shall be reinstalled.

c. Pressure testing shall be witnessed to the satisfaction of EMTA.

2. Hydrostatic Testing:

a. Pipes shall be removed or isolated to prevent water from entering the compressor or other piping spools. The hydrostatic test shall be performed with clean water only. Pre-testing to approximately 60 psig is required, to locate major deficiencies. Subsequent pressure increases shall be made gradually to prevent "shocking" of the pipe system, increasing the pressure gradually to full test pressure (1.5 times the SRV setting) and holding it for 60 minutes.

b. At the end of the test, a visual inspection of all joints (welded, threaded, compression and flanged) shall be made to determine if any visible leakage has occurred. Immediately after the water has been fully drained from the system, a high velocity dry nitrogen purge shall be made throughout the system until no water remains.

3. Tie-Ins: Piping or tubing tie-ins shall be removed from the system and pressure tested in accordance with the above requirements. After re-installation, the tie-ins will be leak tested at the working pressure of the system.

4. Purging and Pressurizing:

a. Purging and pressurizing shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Consultant or EMTA's designate.

b. Before pressurizing with natural gas commences, the ESD system shall be tested and fully operational. Natural gas shall not be introduced into the system without prior approval of the local gas utility and the express authorization of the Consultant. Air shall be purged from the entire system to the satisfaction of the Consultant prior to pressurizing the system.

c. Before natural gas is introduced into any piping system, fabrication, testing and work requiring flame or sparking devices shall be complete. After natural gas has been introduced, welding or other work which could ignite natural gas vapors shall be performed only upon express authorization by EMTA on a case-by-case basis.

5. Leak Test:

a. Subsequent to final field installation and pressure tests, completed piping with valves in place shall be leak tested before being placed in operation to ensure that it does not leak.



b. The piping and tubing shall be pressurized with natural gas to its normal operating pressure (4500 psig downstream of the CNG compressors) and tested with a suitable liquid leak detector such as "Snoop" (by Swagelok Company).

c. The following locations shall be tested:

1) Flanged joints

2) Threaded joints

3) Tube joints

4) Accessible butt joints

3.03 CLEANING

A. Pipe and Tube Cleaning

1. Subsequent to pipe fabrication and testing, mechanical cleaning with wire brushes and/or swabs or pigs shall be performed where possible, then the pipe shall be cleaned internally with a non-residual, degreasing and slag removing solution. A high velocity dry nitrogen purge shall be made to remove any loose scale, filings, water or other foreign material. Once slag, mill oil and cleaning solution have been removed, the piping shall be coated internally (within 24 hours of the cleaning) with a light coating of the synthetic oil used in the compressor. (Dryer piping is exempted from this requirement but must be shipped with 15 psig dry nitrogen charge with a gauge and sealed valve).

2. Subsequent to tubing fabrication a high velocity nitrogen purge shall be made to remove any loose scale, filings, water or other foreign material.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13660

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Electrical work required in the manufacturing, installation and commissioning of the compressed natural gas station. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. Review the complete project documents to familiarize the CNG Contractor with the points of interface with other Contractors on the site. Other Contractors will be providing underground conduits in areas outside of the CNG compound. The CNG Contractor shall extend these roughed in conduits to the required riser location and the CNG Contractor shall supply and install all power, phone, network and control cabling from the source panel on the site or in the maintenance building to the CNG equipment.

2. Provision and hookup of electrical and controls equipment and materials specifically listed herein and as required to accomplish a complete and functioning system consistent with EMTA’s bus maintenance, operations and specification requirements.

3. Complete fabrication and installation and internal and external connections of the natural gas fueling equipment and control systems.

4. Provide wire, conduit, fixtures, appurtenances and equipment for power, control and communications as indicated.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Schedule 40 PVC rigid conduit (underground—horizontal conduit only); PVC coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (underground risers-including elbows) and galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (aboveground) complete with fittings and seals as required to each of the pieces of equipment (minimum size 3/4 inch).

6. All new conduit work inside the bus maintenance garage shall be compliant with Division 2 locations if the conduit is located within 18-inches of the floor or inside of the fueling room.

7. A minimum 2500 A, 480 V, 3 phase, 4 wire electrical power distribution and control panel (MCC) mounted inside of the Contractor supplied control room. This and all other panels are to be sized and equipped to allow the future installation of up to a total of four compressors without adding additional panels.

8. 42 pole 120/208 VAC/200 Amp distribution panel in the CNG control room with distribution transformer to reduce voltage from the MCC to the 120/208 Volts required by this panel.

9. Master Control Panel (MCP) to house the station PLC and communications and instrumentation central equipment. MCP to be located within the CNG control room.



10. Interconnecting conduit and wiring between the CNG station and the building components and equipment, including power and control panels, per the Drawings and Specifications and as modified by the Contractor to address the requirements of specific equipment vendors.

11. Interface the new CNG dispensers with the Fleetwatch fuel management system. Coordinate with Fleetwatch (SA Systems) to commission the new configuration and make any hardware and software changes as required to make the CNG system fully functional on the Fleetwatch system.

12. Building and pipe rack mounted compressor compound lighting with switch at main man gate. Lighting must provide a well illuminated compressor compound with sufficient number and wattage of fixtures to minimize shadows during night time repair and maintenance activities. Fixtures to be Class I, Division 2 rated HID with swivel mounting brackets. As a minimum, it is expected that this lighting will light 4 sides of the control building, and from the pipe rack the space between each compressor package and both sides of the CNG dryer, as well as the area between the compressors and the EMTA circulation drive lane.

13. A #4/0 copper ground loop is to be installed within the CNG equipment compound. The pipe rack, control room, dryer, storage and each compressor shall be grounded in two places at diagonally opposite corners to this loop. Each section of fence is to be grounded in two locations and each gate is to be jumpered across the hinges.

14. Provide ready access and connection points in conduit or boxes to facilitate field installation and connection.

15. Where necessary to observe minimum bend radii, supply and install adequately sized junction boxes or pull fittings.

16. Terminations and testing of circuits.

17. Fabricator shall leave all seals unpoured but supply approved sealing material (such as “chico”) for the field Installation Contractor. Installer shall pour all seals, including those which were factory installed, only after the station has been made fully operational, testing is complete, and approval by EMTA and regulatory agencies has been given.

18. Explosion proof ESD buttons at each location indicated in the specifications. Each ESD button shall be equipped with two normally closed (NC) contacts. The first NC contact shall be hardwired in with the other station ESDs and the master start pushbutton located on the face of the MCP. The second NC contact shall be hardwired as an independent input to the MCP PLC. The ESD system for CNG must be fully integrated with the liquid fuels ESD system so that any ESD button safely terminates all fuels systems. This integration design and implementation shall be the scope of the Contractor.

19. Telephone lines shall be terminated in the MCP. A telephone handset shall be provided on one line in the MCP. One of the lines in the MCP must be capable of DSL service at maximum bandwidth available from DSL provider.

20. Supply and install network connections to the EMTA internal network using the fiber connection pulled to the CNG control room by the CNG Contractor. Connect the CNG



equipment to the internal or external network as directed by EMTA and make this communication functional.

21. Connect to the building gas detection system and the building control system to exchange data with these systems as outlined in the Controls section of this CNG specification.

22. Provide spare conduits between each piece of equipment. Each underground run of conduit between individual skids and between the skid and the building and between the Master Control Panel and the fuel islands shall include a minimum of two 1.5” spare conduits plus one conduit equal in size to the largest conduit that is required (not including 480 V conduits). Conduits to ESDs are not included in this requirement. Provide poly pull ropes in all spare conduits.

23. Signs and labeling.

24. Provide related Work not included in this Section, which is required through applicable codes and for complete installations.

25. Delegated Design:

a. All electrical design work to make the CNG station equipment fully installed.

b. Lightning rods and grounding cables on the pipe rack, gas compressor units, gas dryer, and gas storage assembly, or as required to provide adequate coverage. The lightning protection system shall comply with NFPA 780.

c. Provision of Electrical Short Circuit & Coordination Study. Address the switchgear protective device over-current and ground fault settings.

d. Arc Flash study of all panels.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Section 16000 - Section 13660 is supplemental to Section 16000. The Contractor must report any discrepancies to the Engineer prior to performing any work. The more restrictive wording shall dictate in the case of a discrepancy unless otherwise notified in writing by the Engineer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Equipment manufacturers (panel fabricators and skid assemblers) shall have at least 10 years of experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance. Provide list of projects.

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Site electrical work shall be performed by a Pennsylvania-licensed electrical contractor.

C. Installer Qualifications



1. Electrical site contractor shall submit proof of the successful completion of a minimum of five projects in the previous three years that required significant hazardous locations construction. The electrical subcontractor shall be required to provide references and staffing lists for previous projects and a proposed staffing list for this Project to demonstrate that proposed staff will have the required experience.

2. Electrical work on site, regardless of voltage, shall be personally supervised by a person possessing a current journeyman electrician certificate of competency valid in Pennsylvania. No electrical work shall be performed on site unless this responsible journeyman is present.

D. Engineer of Record Qualifications for Delegated Design: Same as specified in Section 13500, General.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details to include the following:

1. Product Data: All specified products and materials.

2. Qualifications: Manufacturer’s list of products.

3. Deferred Submittals: See Section 13500, General. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contactors, Panel Pilot Lights and Push Buttons: NEMA rated “heavy duty, industrial,” as manufactured by Square D, or Allen-Bradley or approved equal.

B. SCR and VFD motor control equipment to be Allen Bradley or approved equal.

C. Circuit Breakers: Square D or approved equal.

1. Circuit breakers shall be interchangeable with equipment supplied in the Maintenance buildings.

D. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs): Allen Bradley Compact Logix or approved equal for the MCP and UCPs and Allen Bradley Micro Logix on the CNG dryer. PLCs must be networked together.

E. Motors: Reliance, Siemens, Toshiba, Marathon, or approved equal.

F. Shielded Cable: Belden, Carol or approved equal.



G. Combustible Gas Detectors: Det-Tronics Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector PointWatch Eclipse Model PIRECL or Sensor Electronics; or approved equal. Detectors shall be addressable and include relay and 4-20mA outputs.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Electrical components and assemblies shall be new and shall bear CSA/NRTL or UL or FM approval for this application.

B. All cabling and buss bar shall be copper—aluminum is not acceptable.

C. All breakers are to be rated with KAIC ratings as dictated by utility and short circuit protection study.

D. Controls, displays, switches, IS barriers, relays and contactors, instrumentation and other electrical components that are not specifically called out in this Section shall be non-proprietary, third party supplied.

E. Main compressor drive motors, cooler fan motors and exhaust fan motors shall be 480 VAC with a service factor of 1.15. Compressor main drive motors shall be Class 1, Division 2 rated. Fan motors shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated. Motors over 25 horsepower shall be equipped with thermocouples in each winding to allow monitoring of winding temperatures through the PLCs. Motors shall be rated high or premium efficiency.

F. Motor starters shall be NEMA rated and equipped with overload relays to protect the motor from excessive current. Overloads shall be wired to provide an overload fault signal to the PLC controls. Contactors shall be equipped with an auxiliary contact which will be wired to the PLC controls to indicate a contact closure failure. Motors over 50 horsepower shall be controlled with an SCR electronic soft start.

G. Motors greater than 300 Hp are to be equipped with Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs).

H. Cooling fan motors are to be equipped with VFDs.

I. Electrical panels mounted outdoors shall be NEMA 4 or NEMA 3R rated. Panels mounted indoors or in shelter shall be NEMA 12 or NEMA 4 rated. To the extent possible, electrical panels shall be designed to avoid the need for air purging by using Class 1, Division 2 rated components, or by mounting outside of a hazardous area. The Master Control Panel (MCP) and the Unit Control Panels UCPs) shall be sized such that at least 40 percent of the panel backplate area is available for future installation of additional equipment, including room for an additional 40 percent of terminal blocks of each voltage.

J. Intrinsically protected circuits, pressure transducer circuits and communications cable shall be shielded cable of 18 gauge or larger. Individual pairs shall be shielded. The shield shall be grounded at one end only to the common frame ground.

K. Conduit for Intrinsically Safe (IS) circuits shall be rigid galvanized or “Liquid Tite” sealed and installed in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 1 (Hazardous Locations).



L. Devices isolated from the main skid, such as compressor enclosure door panels, shall be grounded with copper ground cables.

M. Conduit seals shall be EYS or EZS. Sealing cement (chico) shall be packaged and shipped with the equipment to site. Seals shall not be poured until equipment has received final EMTA and regulatory approval.

N. Power Distribution and Control Panel: Panel shall meet seismic requirements of the site locations.

1. Panel bus rating for new CNG MCC panel shall be minimum 2500 A, 480 V, 3 phase, 4 wire.

2. Main panel breaker shall be equipped with an appropriately rated surge suppressor on the load side. Leads from the surge suppressor to the breaker shall not exceed 18”.

3. Breakers for 480 VAC loads including spare breaker slots as indicated in the Drawings. Breakers shall be lockable in the off position and all 480 VAC breakers to include 120 V shunt trip coil.

4. SCR starters for the CNG main compressor motors. SCRs shall be heavy duty rating with integral bypass contactor to engage once motors reach full operating speed.

5. Variable frequency drives (VFD) are to be used for the compressor cooling fans.

6. Disconnects and cross-line starters for fans (other than the compressor cooler fan), air compressors, and pumps shall be provided.

7. CNG station controls shall include a transformer to provide 120 VAC for the equipment complete with a 200 Amp 120/240 VAC 42 pole breaker panel.

8. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) sized to maintain control power for a minimum of 60 minutes on all PLCs, Operator Interfaces, dispenser heads and dispensing system solenoids. The UPS shall be wired to keep the ESD system from activating on loss of power.

O. All electrical panels shall include a fluorescent light inside to facilitate night time work in the panel.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify installation by others as satisfactory prior to commissioning station. Beginning commissioning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Supplemental Installation Requirements:

1. Terminations: The Equipment Supplier shall verify all electrical terminations to the CNG station equipment.

2. Electrical and control wiring systems shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC rigid (underground); PVC coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (underground risers and elbows) and galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (above ground) unless specified otherwise.

3. Conduit for intrinsically safe circuits shall be galvanized rigid metal conduit or “Liquid Tite” sealed and installed in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 1 (Hazardous Locations).

4. Routing and Clearances: Conduits located on walls shall be routed so as not to cross windows, doors and translucent panels. Conduits crossing or parallel to gas or utility piping in underground trenches shall maintain a minimum clearance of one foot.

5. Setting Sleeves: The equipment supplier shall provide a plywood or similar template to indicate accurately the required entry point for conduits penetrating or adjacent to each slab (including the MCP, dryer, compressor and dispenser penetrations.) Work required to be completed in advance of concrete pouring or similar work shall be performed promptly. Set conduit sleeves that pass through concrete floors and walls. Sleeves shall be capped and rigidly supported by templates to prevent shifting during the pouring and finishing of concrete.

6. Conduit Embedded in Concrete: Conduits and couplings within concrete shall be Schedule 40 PVC rigid, unless otherwise specified. Bends shall be long radius, subject to EMTA’s approval. Conduits shall be located as specified on the Drawings. PVC sleeves shall be provided on each concrete pad penetration to minimize stress on conduits due to pad settlement.

7. Conduit runs shall be cleaned to remove debris and water which may have collected during installation, prior to conductors being drawn in.

8. Flexible Conduit: Flexible connections made in a hazardous area shall be approved for NEC Class 1 (Hazardous Locations) requirements. In general purpose and Division 2 areas, only “Liquid Tite” flex with approved seal-tight connectors shall be used. The interior of the dispenser, defueling and buffer panels and other panels containing gas



componentry shall be considered as Class I, Division 1, Group D environments which require braided metal flexible connectors rated for this area.

9. Grounding:

a. General: Grounding shall be done in accordance with the regulations of the NEC and the applicable inspection authority. The use of conduit in place of a ground conductor is prohibited.

b. Ground rods: Grounding and ground rods shall be installed as specified on the Drawings or by the equipment manufacturer and in accordance with NEC requirements. Where ground rods are specified, they shall be interconnected with not less than #4/0 AWG soft drawn, stranded copper conductors, with THWN cross-link insulation, which shall continue and be connected to the main grounding system.

10. Termination: Except for the grounding loop, bare copper wire shall not be permitted below grade.

11. Sealing: The cross-sectional area of the conductors permitted in a conduit seal shall not exceed 25 percent of the cross-sectional area of a conduit of the same trade size. Pour seals after EMTA’s approval. Seals shall be packed within approved packing compound and sealed using UL approved sealing compound. Seals shall not be poured at a temperature lower than that approved by the inspection authority (generally 40 degree F).

12. Labeling and Identification:

a. Intrinsic conduits shall be labeled as indicated in the NEC (NFPA 70).

b. Conduits shall be labeled immediately outside of every box or panel as they enter or leave with stainless steel, aluminum or brass labels. The conduit number and maximum voltage shall be clearly indicated in 1/2 inch high letters and permanently affixed to the conduit with stainless steel wire or chain.

c. At distribution centers, pullboxes, wireways, and the like, feeder conductors of each feeder group shall be neatly labeled, then laced or clipped into a feeder group.

d. Label conductors at each end of every wire and at each junction box where splicing is required with permanent, fade resistant wire numbers as listed on the equipment supplier’s drawings. The numbering system shall be in strict accordance with the equipment drawings. Site numbering which does not match the drawings shall not be acceptable. Where no numbers are shown on the drawings, the wires shall be identified according to the panelboard and circuit number of device terminal block number from which they originate. Hand written labels shall not be used.

e. Spare PLC I/O shall be wired to the terminal strip and labeled. External terminations to the electrical panels shall be made at the terminal strip and labeled.



f. Supply revised installation drawings as well as equipment drawings which indicate wire numbers for all wires including spare conductors.

13. Miscellaneous:

a. Wires and cables shall be bundled neatly and tied using black T & B TY-RAPS, or approved equal. Wiring shall represent a neat appearance upon completion.

b. Conduits except 480 VAC shall be provided with a minimum of 30 percent spares, unless specified otherwise. Spares shall be numbered on the record drawings.

c. Spare conduits shall be equipped with a poly or nylon pull rope and shall be capped with explosion proof fittings at each end.

d. Emergency shutdown (ESD) buttons shall be factory installed on the equipment where indicated on the Drawings, including one at each dispenser, compressor, dryer, and four others to be installed remotely (remote button stations to be shipped loose). Buttons shall terminate dryer, compressor, and dispenser operations immediately and shall require key reset from the master control panel. The ESD circuit shall be hardwired (not PLC input) and shall be failsafe (de-energized condition requiring manual restart).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13710

SINGLE TOWER CNG DRYER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the work required in the design, manufacturing and testing of the single tower CNG dryer for the compressed natural gas station. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. The work includes mechanical and electrical fabrication work and programming required in the shop fabrication of the CNG drying equipment.

1.02 RELATED WORK



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Equipment manufacturers shall have at least 5 years experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Provide list of projects with EMTA contact information.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 13500, General:

1. Manufacturer’s qualifications: Project list.



1. Ship dryer to site only when its foundation pad is completed and ready for permanent installation.

1.06 PROJECT SITE AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Design Conditions

1. Number of dryers 1

2. Minimum Inlet Gas Flowrate 2500 Scfm @ 30 psig inlet;

3. Minimum Process Flow Pipe Size 8 inches

4. Maximum regenerations per year 3



5. Regeneration Time (maximum) 8 hours

6. Maximum Outlet Gas Pressure Dew Point -50 F

7. Outlet Gas Moisture Content <0.25 lbs/MMScf

8. Minimum design pressure 150 PSIG

9. Max. Pressure Drop Across Dryer Assembly 2 PSID

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION FOR CNG DRYER

A. General

1. The design, fabrication, testing, delivery, installation, startup, testing, commissioning and training for a compressed natural gas purification system complete with a coalescing prefilter, captive blower purge, desiccant gas dryer system integral with the regeneration package, particulate afterfilter and relevant controls and instrumentation, factory pre-piped, wired and tested on a common skid.

2. Weatherproofing: Dryer system shall be suitable for operation outdoors without the concern of undue corrosion or degradation of any components from the elements. Electrical components shall be rated as weatherproof and for use in a Class I, Division 2, Group D hazardous area. Valves, actuators or other moving components shall be shielded from accumulation of debris which could hamper their operation. External cooling coils shall be protected from accumulation of debris or fouling by use of shields, screens, and positioning.

Insulation on drying and heating chambers shall be fully weatherproofed with an external metal skin and sealing. Lace on insulation shall be provided on the drying vessel top, condensation vessel, hot side piping, and all other locations required to ensure the efficient operation of the dryer.

3. Design Pressure:

a. The minimum design pressure shall be the greatest of a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum station inlet design pressure, the minimum design pressure indicated in Section 1.05 above, or higher if required due to expansion of gas during the heating cycle of regeneration.

B. Pre-filter and After-filter

1. The pre-filter shall be a coalescing, high efficiency, sub-micron oil removal type, designed to remove aerosols, liquids and solids down to 0.1 microns absolute size and 0.0014 ppmw oil concentration.

2. The after-filter shall be a high efficiency, particulate filter, designed to remove solids down to 1.0 microns absolute size.



3. Filters shall consist of an ASME section VIII designed and U or UM-stamped pressure vessel (if required by vessel size), stainless steel or carbon steel housing rated for the design pressure as specified in Section 13710, Para. 1.05. Filters shall contain the element and the captured liquids and replaceable filter cartridges to remove the contaminants, with both parts combined to form a complete assembly. The filter cartridge shall be positively sealed to the housing by means of elastomeric O-ring seals suitable for natural gas service.

4. The filter housing shall be designed so as to allow servicing of the cartridges without removing the filter assembly from the system piping.

5. The filter assembly shall be equipped with a manual drain valve for the periodic removal of the collected liquid(s) and for depressurization of the chamber for service.

6. A locally-mounted differential pressure gauge shall be provided to indicate the filter element condition.

7. An isolation ball or butterfly valve shall be provided between the filter and the tower switching valve to allow the filter to be serviced without venting down the entire dryer.

C. Drying and Regeneration System

1. The dryer shall be a single tower externally heated regeneration type using 3A molecular sieve as the adsorbing media. Process gas shall not be exhausted to the atmosphere and regeneration shall be accomplished by recirculation of a captive volume of the gas. The regeneration cycle shall include a heating and cooling cycle to ensure proper regeneration of the desiccant and a constant outlet dewpoint at all times.

2. The drying flow shall be downward to minimize fluidization of the desiccant bed in the event of upset conditions.

3. Desiccant chambers shall be of carbon steel construction and ASME Section VIII designed and U-stamped, manufactured and stamped for design pressure at minimum 400 deg F with a 1/16-inch corrosion allowance.

4. The gas piping shall include necessary interconnecting piping from the inlet of the prefilter to the outlet of the after-filter. Included in the piping shall be a prefilter, dryer, after-filter, and other fittings and supports as required.

5. Desiccant chamber shall be fitted with desiccant fill and drain ports to facilitate filling and draining of desiccant without the need to disassemble manifold piping.

6. Desiccant chamber shall be designed and constructed to ensure that wet gas is evenly distributed across the bed to maximize the life of the desiccant bed.

7. Desiccant chamber shall be fitted with a relief valve set at the design pressure of the dryer. Relief valves shall be complete with isolating ball valve with lockable handle and shall have outlets that are piped to a single accumulation pipe header at site for remote venting.



8. Desiccant chamber (tan to tan), heater housing and heated gas piping shall be insulated with two inch fiberglass and aluminum jacket for personnel protection and to minimize heat loss.

9. Desiccant chamber inlet and outlet switching valves shall be high performance, non-lubricated, low pressure drop valves, suitable for high temperature operation. Regular port ball valves or butterfly valves are acceptable as long as the overall system pressure drop requirements are met. Dryer block and bypass valves shall be lockable ball valves.

10. Valves shall be non-proprietary and manufactured through a third party.

11. Dryer desiccant shall be high capacity, non-corrosive, rugged and low pressure drop molecular sieve and a sieve size so selected as not to absorb or desorb a measurable amount of odorant from the main gas stream. The odorant is a mixture of tertiary butyl mercaptan (75 percent weight), isopropyl mercaptan (15 percent weight), and n-propyl mercaptan (10 percent weight).

12. Dryer regeneration at lower than line pressure is permitted. If venting of gas prior to regeneration is required, valves and tubing to the vent stack shall be provided.

13. If it is necessary to regenerate at higher than inlet pressures, lockable ball valves, multi-turn gauge valve, regulator and tubing from a high pressure source shall be provided and configured to ensure the safe pressurization of the regeneration loop.

14. The heating cycle shall continue until the desiccant bed is completely dry and the cooling cycle shall continue until the desiccant bed temperature is within 20 deg F of the ambient temperature, and until all condensate is removed from the regeneration loop (exception: condensate collection tank). A thermocouple shall be provided immediately downstream of the bed to confirm the end of the heating cycle.

15. The cooling cycle shall ensure adequate cooling of the desiccant bed to provide a constant outlet dewpoint at all times.

16. Recirculation of the regeneration gas shall be closed-loop with a blower and motor housed inside a U-stamped ASME Section VIII coded pressure vessel. It shall have the same or higher pressure rating as the dryer vessels. The blower and motor assembly shall be supported on the blind flange of the housing. The housing shall be installed in a manner to provide and allow for ease of access to the blower and motor assembly. The horizontal housing shall be designed to permit sliding it away from the blind flange with minimal effort and by one person. Suitable anchoring of the blower housing shall be provided to support the blower housing (i.e. leveling bolts) once installed. This vessel must be flooded with gas at all times when power is connected to the system. The blower motor is to be certified by the manufacturer for use in a 100 percent natural gas environment.

17. Relief valves shall be installed to protect all ASME vessels. This will include heater chambers, blower vessel, and filters and separators if they are defined as vessels. Relief valves shall be complete with isolating ball valve(s) with lockable handle and shall have outlets that are piped to a single accumulation vent stack.



18. Bleed valves shall be installed in all sections as required to depressurize the dryer for regeneration or for service or repair. These valves shall be tubed to the vent header.

19. A fin and tube type air-cooled regeneration loop gas cooler shall be utilized to cool and condense water vapor from the regeneration gas. It shall have the same pressure and temperature rating as the dryer vessels. The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) for the unit shall account for any pressure increase due to the temperature increase during the dryer regeneration cycle. The cooler shall be complete with a Division 2 rated and weatherproof fan motor, non-sparking fan.

20. A centrifugal type or coalescing, high efficiency separator shall be located downstream of the regeneration gas cooler to remove liquid water. The separator shall be complete with an integral condensate reservoir to accumulate the condensed liquids. The reservoir shall have a liquid capacity equivalent to at least two regeneration cycles.

21. The dryer manufacturer shall specify and supply an appropriate storage and disposal container (minimum five US gallon capacity) to receive odorized water which will be automatically drained from the dryer regeneration loop.

22. A single, electric, external regeneration gas heater shall be used for each dryer. The heater shall utilize “lncoloy” (alloy) sheathed low watt density heater elements located inside an insulated heater housing. The heater shall be complete with a sheath and a chamber, and a chamber downstream piping mounted thermocouple to monitor heater skin, heater chamber and heater outlet regeneration gas temperatures, (adjustable in the controls) to control the regeneration gas temperature and provide heater over-temperature shutdown and alarm. Dryer to also be equipped with a drying chamber downstream temperature thermocouple.

23. Dryer shall be equipped with a PLC to perform the following:

a. Assure full utilization of the moisture holding capacity of the desiccant bed before indicating a need to regenerate.

b. Monitor the regeneration process and indicate switching points within the regeneration cycle.

c. Communicate with the MCP PLC and the monitoring computer via Ethernet Network.

24. The dryer controller shall be comprised of reliable and durable components not susceptible to shorting and corrosion. Control components including controllers and displays shall be third party/non-proprietary manufacture.

25. The dryer control system must be fail safe such that the failure of any component will cause the dryer to fault and shut down and annunciate the cause of the fault.

26. A hygrometer complete with a moisture sensor installed at the dryer outlet to monitor the actual dryer outlet dewpoint shall be provided. The dewpoint shall be indicated in degrees Fahrenheit through a display and transmitted to the MCP PLC.



27. The moisture sensor shall be installed such that it may be serviced without removing desiccant from the dryer and while the dryer is on service.

28. The dryer shall be equipped with both a maintained contact, locking regeneration on/off switch a momentary contact locking regeneration start switch that must be manually held on before the dryer regeneration will start.

29. Dryer regeneration shall be initiated manually upon receipt of a signal from the hygrometer that regeneration is required. The controller shall contain built-in diagnostics to check each operation as it is initiated and provide fault shutdown and annunciation.

30. The dryer system shall be equipped with the following standard instrumentation and alarms. All gauges are to be equipped with isolation valves to permit service without depressurizing connected piping and vessels.

a. Locally mounted inlet and outlet gas pressure gauges.

b. Inlet pressure transducer—mounted upstream of the block and bypass valves.

c. Locally mounted chamber pressure gauge.

d. Regeneration blower gas differential pressure transducer with fault for high and low differential pressure.

e. Locally mounted inlet and outlet filter gas differential pressure gauges.

f. Hygrometer to measure downstream dewpoint.

g. Dryer shall include a fixed temperature heat detector and collection pan mounted above the dryer heater. This detector will be wired as an input to the dryer PLC and to the station Master PLC. A fire signal will cause the station to ESD and activate annunciation devices.

h. Panel mounted Operator Interface to indicate locally and to be communicated to the station master PLC the following parameter values and alarms:

1) High regeneration temperature.

2) High heater chamber temperature.

3) High and low blower differential pressure.

4) Dryer outlet high humidity alarm.

5) Blower motor overload alarm with shutdown.

6) Thermocouple readings and fault status for heater sheath, heater chamber, heater downstream and drying chamber downstream temperatures.

31. Panel mounted ESD button tied into the station ESD system. Any station ESD is to terminate dryer operation. Dryer operation shall be automatically restarted upon restoration of power on the ESD system.



32. If required, a pilot air filter/regulator/SRV set shall be utilized to ensure only clean filtered air of the pressure required is used for panel purging or valve actuation.

33. A block and bypass assembly shall be factory piped with two or three 3-piece, carbon steel, butt weld or flanged, ball valves with stainless steel trim and handles that can be locked in either the open or closed position.

34. A ½” tubing dryer bypass is to be mounted on the dyer side of the block and bypass valves. This tube is to be equipped with a Swagelok rising plug valve.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Dryer assembly shall be designed and manufactured by:

1. PSB Industries Inc. "General Air Division"

2. SPX

3. Approved equal—if submitted a minimum seven days prior to bid closing.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Guards over moving parts shall be non-sparking aluminum construction meeting all OSHA requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 13500, General, for general commissioning requirements.


A. Shop Testing

1. Dryer functions test (no flow) of minimum four hour duration (accelerated cycle).

2. Function test to check operation of control systems, safety alarms and shutdowns.

3. Calibration of instruments.

4. Performance tests to check motor voltage, current draw and power.

B. Field Testing During Startup and Testing

1. Dryer function test of minimum two regeneration cycles without faults and 30 days of normal operation.

2. Function test to check operation of control systems, safety alarms and shutdowns.

3. Calibration of instruments.



4. Performance tests to check motor voltages, current draws and power distribution to other components. Verify all circuits are operational.

5. Verify shutdown alarms and sequences are working.

6. Verify the dew point immediately prior to regeneration and after one regeneration.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13720

CNG COMPRESSOR PACKAGES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the work required in the design, manufacturing and testing of the CNG compressors for the compressed natural gas station. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. The Work includes mechanical and electrical fabrication work and programming required in the shop fabrication of the CNG compression equipment.

1.02 RELATED WORK



A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. As per Section 13500-1.04.

B. Vibration and Pulsation Analysis

1. A professional regularly engaged in vibration analysis shall supervise the vibration measurements and interpret the results.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 13500, General:

1. Product data for products and materials in this section.

a. Include for oil carry-over control, the percentage of oil added that will be recovered in the filtration system before the gas leaves the compressor skid.

b. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 13500:

1) Include sections of the compressor not bled down by the service valve.

2. Manufacturer’s qualifications: Provide documented

a. Evidence of acceptable oil carry-over performance from other projects.

b. Proposed methodology to achieve performance levels for the station.

3. Testing: Vibration and pulsation levels of equipment used in previous installations.





1. Compressors shall be shipped to site only once after the pad has been completed and is ready for permanent installation. Equipment not ready for installation shall not be stored on site.

1.06 PROJECT SITE AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Design Conditions

1. Number of compressors: Three in base bid with one as an add alternate

2. Minimum Inlet Gas Flowrate (per compressor): 550 scfm @ dryer outlet pressure (with station inlet pressure of 30 psig). Bidders are required to fully utilize the horsepower of the main driver at maximum station inlet pressure and 4500 psig discharge pressure. Bidders are encouraged to provide higher flow solutions if these can be achieved at nominal cost.

3. Minimum and maximum main driver size: 250/300 horsepower

4. Minimum Nominal Process Flow Pipe Size-Inlet: Four-inches.

PAT 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE OF CNG COMPRESSOR

A. Each compressor shall be fully packaged and enclosed. Compressor packages shall be identical to one another.

B. The overall CNG equipment compound is indicated on the drawings provided with this specification. Contractor must work within this area while maintaining similar service access as shown in the bid drawings.

C. Equipment mounted on the skid including the compressor frame, the compressor crosshead, the compressor cylinders, the cooler, the motor, the piping, separators, filters and vessels and control panels shall be mounted as close to grade as practical and supported directly from the frame. Mounting of this equipment to the deck plate is not acceptable. Mounting pads for the compressor frame shall be machined flat after they are welded to their support frame. Provision shall be made to allow for shimming of the compressor. If floor decking is used, access holes with minimum six-inch diameter sleeves to facilitate shimming and/or grouting shall be provided into each frame cavity.

D. The output of the compression equipment shall be rated at a minimum of the flowrate specified above for each compressor at the pressure downstream of the CNG dryer at typical station inlet and 4,500 psig discharge. The potential range of pressures on the incoming gas service line is provided in Section 13500. The compressors shall float continuously without adjustment through this range. (Note that these suction pressures are at the station inlet and not the actual compressor suction). If the compressors cannot float through the entire range, a regulator or pressure controller must be provided on each compressor to limit the maximum pressure to



prevent excessive rod load or power requirements. This regulator or pressure controller must allow free flow below its setting so that the compressors utilize the pressure available. The setting of this device shall be specified.

E. Compressors shall be rated for continuous and intermittent/transient operation.

F. The compressors shall be tied into a common suction line, gas dryer, air supply and Master Control Panel. Otherwise, the units shall be constructed to be redundant with gas isolation for each unit. Each compressor shall have its own piping, separators, coolers, relief valves, instrumentation and controls.

G. Compressors to be multi-stage reciprocating compressors. On opposed machines, individual throws will be balanced to within 16 ounces of the opposing throw.

Interstage temperatures shall not exceed 325 deg F at minimum station inlet pressure on lubricated designs or 300 deg F at minimum station inlet pressure on non-lubricated designs. It is anticipated that five stages of compression will be required.

This can be accomplished by providing a dryer that operates at utility inlet pressure and a five stage compressor with a utility pressure inlet—this is the basis of design.

As an alternative, Bidders can provide the same number of screw type booster packages as there is reciprocating compressors. The screw boosters will elevate the gas pressure to an intermediate pressure of 100 to 120 psig, a low pressure buffer sized to store 2 minutes of station flow, a dryer sized to provide the required flow at the 100 to 120 psig pressure, and a four stage reciprocating compressor with an inlet downstream of the dryer. If this approach is used, the screw gas end must be sized to provide 120 percent of the required flow at not more than 70 percent of its rated maximum speed. The screw compressor speed must be controlled with a VFD on its main motor to control output flow to match the reciprocating compressor flow. The screw compressor must be equipped with an aftercooler and high capacity oil separator to provide a level of oil carryover that will not affect the dryer desiccant. The screw compressor package must comply with all sections of this specification that are applicable. If the screw booster approach is used, the compressor main driver can be downsized to provide the required flow per compressor.

H. Crankcases shall be lubricated by a pressurized lubrication system.

I. Cylinders are to be lubricated unless the Bidder can demonstrate a recent history of successful non-lubricated service. This will require the Bidder to provide with their bid, documented evidence of successful and reliable operation of at least 10 CNG compressors in North America with consistent ring and packing life of at least 4000 hours. Evidence must address the methodology used to provide high ring life including ring materials, bore/piston clearance and hardening, piston speeds, maximum temperatures and other design data deemed necessary by the Engineer.

J. Oil carryover control: As a minimum, the compressor packages shall include:

1. The final coalescing filters shall be a pre-coalescer and a coalescer filter in series for each compressor. Each filter shall be sized to handle a minimum of four times the maximum compressor capacity at maximum suction conditions and a discharge pressure of 1,000



psig. (Minimum acceptable filter shall be a Parker J-8.) (Lubricated and non-lubricated designs)

2. The compressors shall use a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) based synthetic oil for crankcase and lubricator that is rated for this service by the oil manufacturer and by the compressor block manufacturer. (Lubricated designs only)

3. Bidders are to specify with their bid, the percentage of oil added that will be recovered in the filtration system before the gas leaves the compressor skid. Bidders are also to specify the maximum oil carryover in Pounds of Oil per MMSCF.

4. Oil shall be fed to the lubricator pump from the crankcase sump (Lubricated compressors). On atmospheric pressure crankcase machines, the crankcase oil level will be continuously replenished from a 5 U.S. gallon “day tank” with sight glass. Each compressor that includes an external oil injection pump (not required on pressurized crankcase compressors) must be equipped with:

a. An explosion-proof or intrinsically safe low lube flow rate switch, and

b. An explosion-proof or intrinsically safe oil level switch.

K. Control, safety and isolation valves:

1. A manual two or three piece fire rated ball valve (API 607) with a carbon steel body and stainless steel trim and a locking kit shall be supplied and installed on the suction line immediately outside of the enclosure. This line shall terminate with a raised face flange.

2. A wafer style suction check valve with a carbon steel body, stainless steel trim and an O-ring seal (bubble tight) shall be installed on the suction line.

3. A spring return (NC) actuated two or three piece fire rated ball valve (API 607) with a carbon steel body and stainless steel trim shall be installed on the suction line upstream of the compressor inlet.

4. Each separator shall include its own check valve and a normally open (NO) actuated ball valve with its own pilot solenoid valve to control drainage of condensates from each stage separator or filter independently. Separators and filters shall be flushed hourly and also on shutdown of the compressor to the recovery tank(s).

5. The final compressor discharge shall be equipped with a check valve.

6. Immediately outside of the enclosure, a manual, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit shall be supplied on each outlet tube. The outlet from this valve shall be a compression fitting.

7. Compressor suction, recovery system and each stage must be equipped with an ASME "UV" stamped safety relief valve set and sealed at the design pressure. SRVs on air receivers or other air equipment shall be equipped with a manual activation lever. This is not permitted on other SRVs.



a. For SRVs located between the compressor inlet and discharge, inlet and outlet ports of SRVs shall be equipped with integral ANSI flanges or compression fittings with tube adapters of appropriate pressure rating, which will ensure that the valves can be reinstalled repeatedly without damage or difficulty in returning the valve to the exact orientation, prior to removal.

b. For the SRV located on the recovery system, a manual, locked open, isolation ball valve shall be provided upstream of the flanged inlet port to the SRV.

8. Manual, stainless steel service drain valve (rising plug or gauge valve type) shall be provided and tubed between sections of piping, and vessels to allow them to be safely blown down to the vent stack. Any sections of the compressor not bled down by the service valve shall be clearly identified in the maintenance procedures.

L. Suction and Interstage Gas Filtration and Pulsation Control

1. Suction filter complete with minimum 0.9 micron absolute filter cartridge. Suction filters and valves must be sized so that the pressure drop shall not exceed two psig at a flowrate of twice the maximum compressor capacity at maximum suction conditions. If the recovery line is tied into the suction line upstream of the filter, without a coalescing filter, a coalescing, high efficiency, sub-micron oil removal type filter, designed to remove aerosols, liquids and solids down to 0.9 microns absolute size and 0.0014 ppmw oil concentration is required. The filter drain port shall be equipped with a manual, lockable isolation valve and tied to the condensate collection tank through a separate drain line.

2. Each compression stage shall be equipped with a properly sized knockout, mesh pad, or vortex separator to remove oil and condensates. This separator shall be mounted after each cooler stage. Piping and coolers shall be oriented to be self draining to the separators, without inadvertently trapping condensate within sections of pipe or cooler.

3. Suction and/or discharge pulsation bottles/dampeners shall be provided as per compressor block manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Cooler Requirements

1. Each stage shall be equipped with a “Box header” ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Coded Cooler. (As an alternative a serpentine cooler will be accepted.) This cooler shall have sections for each stage of compression, and for the crankcase oil.

2. Approach Temperature: Coolers shall be designed and sized to reduce the cold side interstage gas temperature to 15 °F above ambient temperature at maximum compressor cylinder discharge temperature and maximum ambient temperature.

3. Heat exchangers shall be oversized a minimum of 20 percent to compensate for fouling and damaged passes (which require plugs). Thus the cooler must be able to meet the specified approach temperature with 20 percent of the tubes plugged, on all stages.

4. The fan shall be designed to push a minimum of 0.5 inches of water column more than is required to flow air through the cooler alone. This additional static pressure fan load is needed to ensure proper air flow through silencers, baffles, and louvers/dampers. In the



event that these or other restrictions create a total greater than 0.5 inches, that higher figure shall be used to calculate fan size.

5. Tubes shall not be soldered or brazed into the header manifold.

6. The cooler shall be thoroughly cleaned and purged to ensure that contaminants and hydro testing water are removed.

7. The main cooler fan(s) shall be direct driven from a 480 VAC electric motor.

8. The noise generated by a single cooler fan and motor alone (i.e. without sound attenuation equipment) shall not exceed 85 dBA at three feet in open field conditions.

9. Fans shall be aluminum or plastic composite construction.

10. The cooler shall be equipped with an explosion proof or intrinsically safe vibration switch.

N. Piping and Pressure Retaining Components

1. The suction piping to each stage shall be equipped with a commissioning filter/strainer to be changed or removed after 100 hours of successful operation (e.g. a “witches hat” or “Y” style strainer). This strainer shall protect each stage from contamination from piping and coolers. Based on the piping layout, the interstage separator may be accepted as meeting this requirement.

2. Minimum process flow tubing size on discharge side of compressor is 3/4-inch for a 500 scfm compressor.

3. Interstage coolers, piping, separators and appurtenances shall be designed for 350 deg F and a minimum of 20 percent or 50 psi (whichever is greater) above the interstage discharge pressure at maximum suction pressure and 4500 psig discharge pressure. All of these devices shall be stamped and certified for the actual maximum design pressure of the device rather than the calculated required pressure. (For example if a vessel is required to be rated for 600 psig but is actually capable of 680 psig using ASME design standards, the vessel shall be stamped for 680 psig.)

4. Final discharge cooler, piping, separators and appurtenances shall be designed for 350 deg Fahrenheit and a minimum of 5,000 psig.

5. Piping, instrumentation tubing, electrical conduit and devices shall be routed and installed to allow for full access for inspections and repairs of the cooling coils.

6. Coolers and downstream piping shall be designed, constructed and oriented such that all liquids (condensate and oil) will drain by gravity from the cooler inlet to the suction separator of the next stage.

O. Gas Recovery System

1. A "run down" sequence is not acceptable except on high suction pressure machines where permitted by the Engineer.



2. Gas vented during the unloading cycle shall be captured in an ASME Section VIII, Division 1 vessel(s) and cycled back to the compressor suction on the next start up. The recovery receiver shall be sized to contain all gas released from two shutdowns and no recirculation between shutdowns without relief valve activation under any circumstances. The minimum total recovery tank capacity shall be 200 US gallons. Where multiple tanks are used, gas is to be vented into one near the bottom, flow out of the first near the top and into the second at the bottom, then out of the second near the top to the next tank or to compressor suction. Contractor shall supply calculations to validate recovery tank size.

3. A manual, lockable, isolation ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of the first recovery tank and on the outlet of the final recovery tank.

4. A recycle pressure controller or regulator shall be provided downstream of the manual isolation valve on the outlet of the final recovery tank and its pressure drop shall not exceed five psig at a flowrate of twice the maximum compressor capacity at maximum suction conditions. This pressure controller shall be controlled by the Unit PLC using a 4-20 mA output.

a. A NC actuated, carbon steel or stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim shall be mounted downstream of the recycle pressure controller at the connection to the suction line which shall be upstream of the suction pulsation dampener.

b. The line from the recovery tank to the suction shall be sized to allow continuous flow of the compressor when the compressor is running unloaded.

P. Controls and Instrumentation

1. Each compressor package shall be equipped with a Unit Control Panel (UCP) and instrumentation as indicated in Section 13750, Control Systems. The UCP shall be mounted to facilitate easy field connection and service.

2. A reset pushbutton station shall be mounted near the main exit door(s) inside the enclosure. The reset pushbutton shall be a green, recessed, momentary contact type with NO contacts. The pushbutton and enclosure may be intrinsically safe or explosion proof.

3. Compressor suction, discharge at each stage, final discharge (downstream of discharge check valve), recovery system, pilot air and compressor crankcase oil system shall be equipped with remotely mounted, glycerin filled, 2-1/2 inch pressure gauges. Instrumentation tubing shall be included.

4. Compressor suction, discharge at each stage, final discharge (downstream of discharge check valve), recovery system, pilot air and compressor crankcase oil system shall be equipped with explosion proof or intrinsically safe pressure transducers. A manual, lockable, isolation valve is to be provided for the recovery system pressure transducer. The compressor crankcase oil system pressure transducer shall be mounted as close as possible to the compressor. All other pressure transducers shall be mounted remotely. Instrumentation tubing shall be included.

5. The discharge from each stage, ambient temperature, compressor oil, and the enclosure interior shall be equipped with Type J thermocouples or RTD equipped with a stainless



steel armored sheath and cable. Thermocouple wires shall run continuous to their termination point on the UCP PLC thermocouple card.

6. The compressor shall be equipped with an explosion proof or intrinsically safe vibration switch.

7. The controls at each compressor shall be capable of operating in a local, standalone mode without the use of the Master Control Panel (MCP) PLC.

Q. Enclosure

1. Each compressor shall be housed in an enclosure. The enclosure shall shield the compressor and auxiliary equipment from climatic conditions. The enclosure shall be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent heat or gas build up and reject heat generated by the compressor and after cooler.

2. The enclosure shall be designed to limit acoustic emissions from the package by the use of noise attenuating insulation, baffles, silencers, soundproof doors, panel gasketing and low noise fans. Maximum sound emission is to be 75 dBa at 15 feet from the shelter—or lower if required to meet local noise bylaw requirements. No octave band shall exceed the average of its neighbors by more than 5 dBa (based on open field individual operation). The compressor enclosure shall be equipped with sufficient silencers to achieve specified maximum noise level and noise shall be directed away from the property line.

3. Minimum required construction of the compressor shelter includes:

a. Wall and roof constructed of primed and painted galvanized steel (or unpainted aluminum) outside panels. If inside panels are used, they shall be perforated galvanized panels.

b. Openings shall be gasketed and/or sealed, except those required for air flow which shall be equipped with silencers.

1) Insulation in silencers shall be protected from external damage using polyester or nylon fabric between the insulation and the perforated steel panels or as approved by EMTA.

4. Air openings shall be equipped with bird screens.

5. Sufficient access shall be provided using doors and hatches to perform routine or major work on the compressor (e.g. SRV replacement, cooler tube inspection, cooler fin cleaning, oil changes, belt replacement, ring and valve replacement, control valve replacement, compressor frame and cylinder rebuilds, removal of any motor), without removing or disassembling the enclosure. Door holdbacks shall be provided on each door.

On horizontal air flow fans, a minimum clearance of 18 inches shall be provided between the cooler and silencers/baffles to allow for cooler fin cleaning. Service access for infrequent repairs required less than once per year shall be provided by either a door or a



removable panel (e.g. installation of cooler plugs, removal of a cooler or section for repair).

All doors and panels and associated hardware must be robust. All doors and panels must fit well to provide smooth operation of hinges and latches. If the Engineer deems the enclosure to be of inferior construction during the submittal phase, the Contractor will be required to provide a heavier duty design.

6. Materials shall be non combustible or fire rated materials. This shall include insulation, interior and exterior panels, roof, floors and doors, and enclosure framing members.

7. A 480 VAC 3 phase electric exhaust fan shall be provided in the enclosure. Fan shall be activated if the temperature inside the enclosure exceeds 110 deg F and the compressor is not operating, and shall be sized to ensure that with 100 deg F ambient air, that the air temperature inside the shelter does not exceed 120 deg F. The fan shall also be activated by a manual purge switch on the unit control panel door and by the MCP in the event of a gas detection event. The cooler fan(s) may be used to provide this function.

8. Two 250 W, Class I, Division 2, Group D explosion proof lighting fixtures shall be provided inside each enclosure.

9. Compressor crankcase and day tank shall be equipped with an explosionproof, electric immersion heater.

10. Compressor enclosure shall be equipped with space heaters if required by climatic conditions to ensure that equipment starts and operates reliably at the lowest ambient conditions. If space heating is required, all openings must be equipped with actuated, gasketed dampers.

R. Main and Secondary Motors

1. The prime mover shall be an 1,800 rpm electric motor with continuous nameplate horsepower rating equal to or exceeding the maximum compressor and ancillary equipment horsepower requirement.

2. Compressors and main motors shall be direct coupled without gear reduction using a flex disc coupling, or approved equal. This coupling shall be designed for continuous cyclic loading. Provide a compressor mounted flywheel to reduce the amplitude of torsional variances.

3. Compressors of 300 horsepower or less may be belt driven.



S. Miscellaneous Requirements

1. If required or recommended by the compressor block manufacturer in this application and duty cycle, the compressor shall be equipped with a prelube pump.

2. Guards including fan and belt guards shall be OSHA compliant and shall be of a spark proof construction.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Compressor Packages shall be designed and manufactured by:

1. ANGI Energy (packaging Ariel Compressors)

2. JW Operating (packaging Ariel Compressors)

3. Atlas Copco (Greenfield Compression) (packaging Sulzer Compressors)

4. IMW

5. Requests for approved equal must be made a minimum of 21 days prior to bid closing.

6. Knox Western

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Guards over moving parts shall be non-sparking aluminum construction meeting all OSHA requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SHOP AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Mechanical/Acoustical Vibration Analysis and Testing

1. If the compressor package supplier has produced identical packages in past projects, operating under essentially the same conditions, and the packager can supply documented test data to prove that vibration and pulsation levels on the equipment are within the specified requirements, the analysis portion of this Section will not be required. Field tests are required during commissioning/testing to verify that the equipment meets the specified values.

2. A professional regularly engaged in vibration analysis shall supervise the vibration measurements and interpret the results.

3. Test the installed compressor and site piping and make modifications to meet the requirements of this specification.

4. The vibration measuring instruments shall be capable of narrowband frequency analysis from 1 Hz to 50X running speed. They shall be capable of summation averaging for a time period of 30 seconds minimum at all frequencies.



5. Provide instrumentation and make measurements to prove the mechanical integrity of the equipment.

6. Hard copy plots of the vibration amplitude versus frequency of each measurement point shall be supplied to EMTA. The shaft speed shall be identified on these plots.

7. In addition to the requirements outlined herein, provide suction, interstage and discharge pulsation vessels, orifice plates and the like as specified by the compressor manufacturer or as required to meet their recommended pulsation and vibration limits.

8. Piping:

a. The entire range of operating conditions (loaded operation from minimum to maximum suction pressure and from 1,000 psig to 4,500 psig discharge pressure as well as unloaded operation) shall be modeled.

1) As a percentage of average absolute line pressure, shall be limited to seven percent or 3R percent (R = stage pressure ratio), whichever is lower.

2) Pulsation generated unbalanced forces shall be evaluated in all piping and shall be less than 100 lbs peak-peak X nominal pipe size to maximum of 1,000 lbs peak-peak for frequencies up to 30 Hz. At frequencies above 30 Hz the maximum level shall be decreased in a manner similar to the line side pulsation guideline specified in API 618 (i.e. the square root of 30/frequency).

3) The mechanical vibration levels of the piping on the assembled and installed compressor package and the site piping shall not exceed the lesser of 10.0 mils peak to peak displacement, 1 inch/sec peak velocity or 2 G peak acceleration with the compressor running at normal operating speed.

9. Rotating Equipment:

a. The equipment vibration amplitude at all frequencies shall not exceed the lesser of 5.0 mils peak to peak displacement, 0.2 in/second peak velocity on rotating equipment, 0.4 in/second peak velocity on reciprocating equipment or 1 G peak acceleration with the compressor running at normal operating speed.

b. The vibration amplitude may be plotted in acceleration, velocity or displacement; however the limits outlined above shall be clearly identified at each frequency of interest.

B. Shop Testing

1. Cycle valves under maximum operating pressure by actuating solenoids.

2. Function test to check operation of controls systems, system annunciation, safety alarms and shutdowns, coordinated with others.

3. Calibration of instrumentation.



4. Operations of subsystems including ESD and remote alarms.

5. Successful compressor operation on test loop for eight hours (if shop does not have adequate equipment and pressure available, test must be completed during field test).

6. Performance tests to check motor voltage, current draw and power.

C. Field Testing During Commissioning:

1. Mechanical reliability of componentry.

2. Verification of controls logic and wiring.

3. Verification of safety and control device calibration and program logic.

4. Successful operation for 100 loaded compressor hours on each compressor within predicted performance parameters (pressures, temperatures, flow, noise, pulsation and vibration). If the package operates out of specified performance levels, or if nuisance shutdowns occur during this period, correct the underlying problem and the test period shall be restarted.

5. The above flow test will require isolating each compressor with no buffer or other compressor on line and flowing through a single calibrated dispenser to fill a bus. Flow in scfm will be calculated based on the weight of the gas dispensed. Ambient temperature, gas flow temperature and compressor inlet pressure are to be recorded. This data is to be compared to data provided with the proposal. Compressor flow shall be not less than 97 percent of predicted flow.

6. Provide a site test of vibration levels of piping, vessels and other major components (compressor, cooler, motor) for each compressor after startup. This site test will be evaluated to confirm compliance with specified vibration levels.

7. Performance tests to check motor voltages, current draws, and power distribution to other components. Verify all circuits are operational.

8. In-situ noise testing to confirm that CNG compressor package noise levels are within the levels permitted by this specification.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13740

CNG GAS CONTROL, STORAGE AND DISPENSING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the work required in the design, manufacturing and testing of the CNG gas control, storage and dispensing equipment for the compressed natural gas station. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. The station shall include the supply of one defueling system, two single hose dispensers suitable for heavy vehicle applications, one dual hose dispenser suitable for light vehicle applications, the refurbishment of an existing buffer storage system, a station flow control system, and one storage buffer/ESD panel.

2. The Work includes mechanical and electrical fabrication work and programming required in the shop fabrication of the CNG gas control equipment.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Sections 13500 to 13900 - All.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Equipment manufacturers shall have at least ten years of experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with the general clauses of the Contract Documents and this Section, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, fabrication and installation details to include the following:

1. Product Data: for products and materials in this Section.

2. Test Certificates: Dispenser hoses.

3. Qualifications: Manufacturer’s list of projects.



1. Dispensing and gas storage equipment shall be shipped to site only once the Contractor has completed the foundation pad and is ready for permanent installation.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE OF GAS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. CNG Buffer Control, and ESD System:

1. Panel to be mounted at the storage.

2. Panel shall be controlled by the MCP PLC. All flow control valves and flow path tubing to be one-inch actuated ball valves.

3. Provide one explosion-proof or intrinsically safe pressure transducer tied directly into, and monitored by, the compressor MCP PLC.

4. One stainless steel, glycerin filled, four inch pressure gauge shall be installed in the panel. The pressure gauge shall be flush mounted so it can be viewed from the outside of the panel without opening the panel doors.

5. Two explosion-proof, three-way pilot air solenoid valves controlled by the MCP PLC. Logic to be determined during design.

6. Two automatic fail safe, normally closed, one inch stainless steel valve with stainless steel trim. The tubing to/from valve shall be installed so the valve can easily be removed without removing any additional tubing or components. Valves shall be controlled by a three-way solenoid valves with control logic from the station Master PLC. The valves shall provide the following function:

a. If at any time an ESD is pressed, the storage must be isolated by removing power from the spring return, fail safe, actuated ball valve. The master PLC will use a signal from the dispenser to open the storage ESD valves only when a hose is active.

b. If the station is placed in “local mode” this valve must be powered open and close only on ESD.

c. Additional logic to be determined during design.

7. The panel shall be equipped with service bleed valves to properly and safely bleed down fittings required to service all components and instrumentation within the panel.

8. Lines to and from the panel shall be equipped with manual, stainless steel ball valves with stainless steel trim and a locking kit. The inlet and outlet of each valve shall be a compression fitting.

9. Minimum tubing and valve size within the panel and in the flow path from the compressor to the storage and from the storage to the dispenser manifolds is one-inch.

10. Air tubing from the actuators to the solenoid valves and from the solenoid valves to the pilot air supply including one manual ball valve with locking kit for the pilot air supply to the buffer panel. The inlet to this valve shall be 1/4-inch FNPT (for pipe connections) or 3/8-inch stainless steel compression fitting (for tubing connections).



11. Junction boxes and conduits required for installation of the solenoids and pressure transducer including explosion proof seals on each conduit entering the buffer panel.

B. Compressor Discharge Buffer Control, Valve Panel (one per compressor). If Bidders wish to propose an alternative flow control system and strategy, they must submit complete drawings and documentation a minimum of 21 days prior to the bid closing or 7 days before final questions (whichever is earlier) for evaluation by the Engineer. The decision of whether to accept an alternative flow control system and strategy is solely at EMTA’s discretion.

1. Panel to be mounted to the discharge of each compressor.

2. Panel shall be controlled by the UCP PLC.

3. All flow control valves and flow path valves and tubing to be ¾ inch.

4. Provide four explosion-proof or intrinsically safe pressure transducers tied directly into, and monitored by, the compressor UCP PLC.

5. Five stainless steel, glycerin filled, 2-1/2 inch pressure gauges shall be installed in the panels one on the compressor discharge (inlet) line and one on each of the outlet lines. The pressure gauges will be flush mounted so they can be viewed from the outside of the panel without opening the panel doors.

6. Four explosion-proof, three way pilot air solenoid valves. These solenoids shall be controlled by the UCP PLC.

7. Automatic fail safe, normally closed, stainless steel valves with stainless steel trim. The tubing to/from valve shall be installed so the valve can easily be removed without removing any additional tubing or components. Valves shall be controlled by a three-way solenoid valves with control logic from the station Master PLC. The valves shall provide the following function:

a. Direct the flow of gas from the compressor(s), to one of the active dispenser manifolds.

b. If no vehicles are fueling, direct the gas flow to the buffer to keep it at maximum pressure (4500 psig or as set on site).

c. If at any time an ESD is pressed, all valves will fail closed.

d. If the compressor is operating in local mode, power all valves open.

8. Each of the four manifold connection lines shall be equipped with a check valve internal to the panel to prevent back feed from other manifolds.

9. The panel shall be equipped with service bleed valves to properly and safely bleed down fittings required to service all components and instrumentation within the panel.

10. Lines to and from the panel shall be equipped with manual, stainless steel ball valves with stainless steel trim and a locking kit. The inlet and outlet of each valve shall be a compression fitting.



11. Air tubing from the actuators to the solenoid valves and from the solenoid valves to the pilot air supply including one manual ball valve with locking kit for the pilot air supply to the buffer panel. The inlet to this valve shall be 1/4-inch FNPT (for pipe connections) or 3/8-inch stainless steel compression fitting (for tubing connections).

12. Junction boxes and conduits required for installation of the solenoids and pressure transducer including explosion-proof seals on each conduit entering the buffer panel.

C. CNG Buffer Storage System

1. One six vessel storage tube assembly with minimum 70,000 scf of CNG storage (nominal) capacity at 4,500 psig will be provided by EMTA.

2. Contractor is to refurbish half of this assembly (top three tubes) prior to startup of the new station and the other half of the assembly (bottom three tubes) after the existing station is taken off line.

3. Contractor shall safely depressurize the existing storage system. Any loose rust or scale shall be cleared and the vessels shall be repainted with two coats of gloss white enamel.

4. Contractor shall supply and install: six new drain valves, new 3/4-inch lockable isolation ball valves on the process connection of each vessel, new 3/4-inch lockable isolation ball valves on the relief valve connection of each vessel, new "UV" stamped safety relief valves with a Code 62 or Swagelok compression connection that facilitates regular removal and reassembly of these valves. The safety relief valve isolation ball valve shall be locked in the open position.

5. Vessel drain valves shall be arranged and tubed to a height of approximately 24 inches to 36 inches from grade.

6. The assembly must be shimmed such that the drain end is two inches lower than the flow end.

D. Common Requirements for Heavy and Light Duty Vehicle Dispensers

1. Dispenser display heads must be compatible with EMTA’s fuel management system. This display head must provide scalable volume and penny pulse outputs and authorization in and out signals.

2. High capacity, pre-coalescing (Grade 10) filters must be provided at the inlet to each dispenser line. These filters shall have a minimum 5,000 psig rating as well as filter size and capacity meeting or exceeding the specifications of Parker J-6 filters for light vehicle dispensers and Parker J-6 filters for heavy vehicle dispensers. The filter shall be serviceable without removal of adjacent tubing or equipment. The filter shall be equipped with a multi-turn “gauge style” manual drain valve. Filters may be mounted externally beside the dispenser if there is insufficient room in the pit for service.

3. Dispensers shall include electronic temperature compensation as follows:

a. Electronic temperature compensation controlled by the main PLC to regulate to 3,600 psig at 70 deg F.



b. For fast fill, this system shall compensate for ambient temperature and heat of compression effects to fill to 95 to100 percent of tank rated capacity under initial pressure and ambient conditions where code pressure limits do not restrict filling to higher pressures.

c. There shall be no more than two stopped flow pressure checks allowed at the end of each fill.

4. The dispenser shall be fully controlled by the master PLC in the MCP or by a PLC in full communication with the master PLC but mounted in the dispenser. High level serial communication and discrete Input/Outputs are to be used as required to ensure that no part of the system will “deadhead” due to slow communications for status from the dispensers to the compressors or valve panels.

5. Two (redundant) explosion-proof or intrinsically safe pressure transducers shall be installed on tubing immediately upstream of each fast fill hose. The pressure transducers shall be tied directly into and monitored by, the main PLC.

6. One stainless steel, glycerin filled, 2-1/2-inch pressure gauge shall be connected to the tubing upstream of each hose. The pressure gauge shall be tied into the dispenser panel downstream of the automatic valve and flush mounted so it can be viewed from the front of the dispenser panel.

7. Each fast fill hose shall have an ASME "UV" Stamped SRV set and sealed at 4,500 psig to protect the hose from over pressurization. This will include an SRV inlet connection to the process tubing and an adequately sized SRV outlet connection to the vent piping.

8. Components shall be rated to 5,000 psig with safety factor as required by ASME B31.3.

9. Each line within the dispenser shall be equipped with service bleed valves to properly and safely bleed down fittings required to reconnect the hose after breakaway or to service any components or instrumentation in the dispenser.

10. Hoses shall be mounted to be sufficiently anchored and reinforced that it can withstand, without damage, a hose tension four times that imposed by a breakaway event. (This may require the installation of outside four-inch HSS support posts to suspend the fueling hose on fast fill dispensers.)

11. Hoses shall be a maximum of 18 feet in length. EMTA will advise the actual required length prior to shipment of the equipment.

12. Hose retractors with breakaway cables shall be provided to prevent the hose from touching the ground when in use or in storage position.

13. Micromotion CNG050 meter on each hose (approved by local weights and measures authorities).

14. The dispenser shall be shutdown automatically by the master PLC if preset flow rates or fill volumes are exceeded, or if a sudden loss of pressure occurs. These values shall be determined by the Equipment Supplier at time of commissioning. These values must be



easily recalibrated in the field. The Equipment Supplier shall perform tests for EMTA, the Consultant and the local regulatory agency to prove its reliable operation.

15. Dispensers shall be factory and field calibrated to +/-1 percent accuracy with a vehicle fill from 1,000 psig, 2,000 psig and 2,500 psig initial pressures.

16. Dispensers shall include an electronic digital display showing quantity in Therms, GGE or GDE as determined by EMTA at time of commissioning. This unit must be compatible with and fully integrated to the existing fuel management system—this interface to include any upgrades or services required of Fleetwatch to facilitate this tie-in. Pulse output from this display head shall be connected to the fuel management system and to the station MCP PLC.

17. Dispenser shall be equipped with a green “dispenser active” light (or approved equal) mounted at the dispenser. This light will energize when the controller activates the dispensing cycle and will de-energize only after this cycle is fully completed or has been terminated manually. A digital display indicating fill status is acceptable.

18. The dispenser will provide signals to the Master PLC to indicate that a hose is active, the current hose pressure and the flow rate using a high speed pulse counter on the PLC. These signals will be used to open the ESD valves to allow dispensing, and by the SCADA system to log fills.

19. An explosion proof, maintained contact, ESD button shall be installed on each dispenser and clearly labeled. Each ESD button shall be equipped with two Normally Closed (NC) contacts. One NC contact shall be hardwired in series with the other station ESDs and the master start pushbutton located on the face of the MCP. The second NC contact shall be hardwired as an independent input to the MCP PLC.

20. One explosion-proof or intrinsically safe vibration switch shall be installed in each dispenser enclosure. This switch shall initiate an ESD.

21. Air tubing from the actuator to the solenoid valve and from the solenoid valve to the pilot air supply including one manual ball valve with locking kit for the pilot air supply to the dispenser. The inlet to this valve shall be 1/4-inch FNPT (for pipe connections) or 3/8-inch stainless steel compression fitting (for tubing connections).

22. Junction boxes, conduits and explosion proof seals required for installation of the display head, micro motion, lights, solenoid and pressure transducers including explosion proof seals on each conduit entering the dispenser.

E. CNG Heavy Duty Fast Fill Vehicle Dispensers (Two Single Hose dispensers) Requirements

1. Minimum tubing and valve size within the dispenser flow path is 1-inch. Standard port ball valves are acceptable. The mass flow meter is exempted from this requirement.

2. Each dispenser hose assembly shall be 3/4-inch for flow and 3/8-inch for vent and shall be equipped with a stainless steel OPW CT5000 (or approved equal) fueling nozzle (vented away from the dispenser), an OPW ILB-5 (or approved equal) in-line stainless steel breakaway connection to limit longitudinal hose tension (to the level currently stipulated by NFPA 52) on each of the flow and vent hose.



3. One explosion-proof, three-way, pilot air solenoid valve to control the actuated valve. This solenoid valve shall be controlled by the main PLC or the dispenser mounted controller. In the event of an ESD, actuated ball valve must close automatically.

4. One automatic fail safe, normally closed, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim. High pressure solenoid valves are not acceptable. The inlet/outlet of this valve shall be a one-inch compression (or zero clearance) fitting. If compression fittings are used, the tubing to/from the valve shall be installed so the valve can easily be removed without removing any additional tubing or components. This valve shall be controlled by the three-way solenoid valve.

5. Each supply line to the dispenser shall be equipped with a manual, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit mounted upstream of the filters. The inlet to each valve must be a 1-inch compression fitting.

6. A manual, 1-inch stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit shall be provided in an easily accessible location on the outside of the dispenser cabinet just upstream of the fueling hose.

F. CNG Light Duty Fast Fill Vehicle Dispensers (One Dual Hose) Requirements

1. Minimum tubing and valve size within the dispenser flow path is 1/2-inch. Standard port ball valves are acceptable.

2. Each dispenser hose assembly shall be 3/8-inch for flow and 3/8-inch for vent and shall be equipped with a stainless steel OPW CT1000 (or approved equal) fueling nozzle (vented away from the dispenser), an OPW ILB-1 (or approved equal) in-line stainless steel breakaway connection to limit longitudinal hose tension (to the level currently stipulated by NFPA 52) on each of the flow and vent hose.

3. One automatic fail safe, normally closed, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim, per hose. High pressure solenoid valves are not acceptable. The inlet/outlet of this valve shall be a 1/2-inch compression (or zero clearance) fitting. If compression fittings are used, the tubing to/from the valve must be installed so the valve can easily be removed without removing any additional tubing or components. These valves shall be controlled by the three-way solenoid valves.

4. Each supply line to the dispenser shall be equipped with a manual, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit mounted upstream of the filters. The inlet to each valve must be a 1/2-inch compression fitting.

5. A manual, 1/2-inch stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit shall be provided in an easily accessible location on the outside of the dispenser cabinet just upstream of the fueling hose.

G. Vehicle Defueling System

1. There will be a need at the facility to periodically defuel the vehicles partially or completely, to facilitate repairs to the high pressure tubing and vessels on the bus. This defueling process shall be accomplished under controlled and safe conditions.



2. A manual switch shall start the process.

3. A stop switch shall be provided to allow the operator to terminate defueling.

4. A manually-controlled multi-turn rising plug or gauge style throttling valve shall limit flow from the vehicle.

5. Each defueling panel hose assembly shall be equipped with an OPW BDN defuel coupling (that mates to the NGV1 fueling receptacle coupling on the vehicle), a Swagelok 83 Series three-way manual valve (vented away from the dispenser). Other hose requirements are as per the hose requirements specified in Article 2.03, Materials.

6. Two explosion-proof or intrinsically safe 5,000 psig pressure transducers shall be installed in the defueling panel. One transducer shall be installed immediately downstream of the defueling hose and the second transducer shall be installed after the throttling valve. The pressure transducers shall be tied directly into, and monitored by, the main PLC. The controls shall automatically terminate the defueling cycle if the downstream pressure exceeds a preset value (typically 300 to 500 psig) that is settable from the MCP operator interface.

7. The defueling panel shall be equipped with two stainless steel, 0 to 5,000 psig, glycerin filled, 2.5-inch pressure gauges. One gauge shall be installed immediately downstream of the defueling hose. The second gauge shall be installed immediately downstream of the throttling valve. The pressure gauges shall be flush mounted so that they can be viewed from the outside of the defueling panel.

8. One explosion-proof, three-way pilot air solenoid valve shall be installed in the defueling panel. This solenoid shall be controlled by the main PLC to open during defueling and close on excessive defuel pressure or on ESD.

9. One automatic fail safe, normally closed, ½-inch stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim shall be provided in the defueling panel to shut off gas flow in the event of a fault, an ESD, or if the defueling panel is shut off. The inlet/outlet of this valve shall be a ½-inch compression (or zero clearance) fitting. This valve shall be controlled by a three-way solenoid valve.

10. The line from the defueling panel to the vent stack shall be equipped with a manual, stainless steel ball valve with stainless steel trim and a locking kit. The outlet from this valve shall be a ½-inch compression fitting.

11. The defueling panel shall be shutdown automatically by the main PLC if preset pressures are exceeded. These values shall be determined by the Contractor at time of commissioning. These values shall be easily recalibrated in the field.

12. An explosion-proof, maintained contact, ESD button shall be installed on the defueling panel. The ESD button shall be equipped with two Normally Closed (NC) contacts. The first NC contact shall be hardwired in series with the other station ESDs and the master start pushbutton located on the face of the MCP. The second NC contact shall be hardwired as an independent input to the MCP PLC.



13. Air tubing from the actuators to the solenoid valves and from the solenoid valves to the pilot air supply including one manual ball valve with locking kit for the pilot air supply to the defueling panel and one manual ball valve with locking kit for the pilot air supply to the defuel selector panel. The inlet to each valve shall be 1/4-inch FNPT (for pipe connections) or 3/8-inch stainless steel compression fitting (for tubing connections).

14. Supply one vehicle-to-vehicle defueling hose. Hoses shall be conductive 3/8-inch CNG hoses meeting requirements in Article 2.03, Materials, and with an overall length of 50 feet with an in-line breakaway installed at the mid point. Hoses shall be equipped with a Swagelok 83 series three-way valve on each end. One end shall be equipped with an OPW BDN defueling connector. The other end shall be equipped with an OPW NGV1 fueling connector. The vent hose shall be split in the middle of the hose assembly to allow venting.

15. A detailed defueling and vehicle-to-vehicle defueling procedure shall be provided.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Dispensing Equipment shall be designed and manufactured by one of the following:

1. ANGI Energy

2. Atlas Copco (Greenfield Compression)

3. IMW

4. Kraus

5. TGT

6. Knox Western

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Gas control panels shall be NEMA 4 rated painted steel panels. Dispenser frames shall be galvanized steel or primed and painted steel. Dispenser outside panels are to be stainless steel.

B. Dispenser Hoses

1. Hose to be rated for CNG use by manufacturer and marked or tagged "For CNG Use".

2. Carbon steel braid hoses are not acceptable, even if the braid has corrosion resistant plating.

3. If the hose is thermoplastic, it shall be factory pin pricked and pressure tested per NFPA requirements. Hose tag shall include the following:

a. “For CNG Use"

b. Test date

c. Test pressure



d. Hose serial number

e. MAWP (maximum allowable working pressure)

f. Burst pressure

g. A copy of the test certificate shall be included in quality control information for the station.

4. Hoses shall be comprised of:

a. A 2-foot electrically conductive whip hose rated for a minimum of 5000 psig operating pressure and 20,000 psig burst pressure, bonded to a 3/8-inch vent hose of the same specifications as the flow hose.

b. An electrically conductive main hose rated for a minimum of 5000 psig operating pressure and 20,000 psig burst pressure of sufficient length to reach the fueling receptacle on the vehicles yet not touch the ground when the hose is disconnected, bonded to a 3/8-inch vent hose of the same specifications as the flow hose.

c. Total hose length is to be maximum 18 feet or as required by code. Owner will advise preferred length prior to shipping.

5. Flow and vent hoses shall be equipped with an OPW ILB (in line breakaway), (or approved equal), in-line stainless steel breakaway connection to limit longitudinal hose tension to the level currently stipulated by NFPA 52.

6. A hose retractor and a holster are required for each hose to ensure that an 18' long hose does not touch the ground. Hose retractor cable shall be breakaway type.

7. Vent hoses shall be tubed away from the vehicle and vented above the dispenser.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 13500, General, for general installation requirements.

3.02 SHOP AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop Testing – Dispensers:

1. Cycle valves under maximum operating pressure by actuating solenoids.

2. Test display head reset sequence and totalizers using signal generator on Micro Motion electronics.

B. Shop Testing – Storage: As required by governing codes, standards and best industry practice.

C. Field Testing During Commissioning:



1. Mechanical reliability of componentry based on a minimum of 100 fills per dispenser or 30 days operation, whichever occurs first.

2. Verification of controls logic and wiring.

3. Verification of safety and control device calibration, operation and program logic. The Contractor shall submit a calibration procedure for acceptance by the Consultant—this calibration will require the use of a master calibrated meter supply by the meter manufacturer.

4. Accurate and repeatable measurement based on a minimum of 100 fills per dispenser or 30 days operation, whichever occurs first. (not including defueling panel)

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13750

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERIZED CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the control system work required in the manufacturing of the Compressed Natural Gas Station. Work includes but is not limited to:

1. The Work includes but is not limited to, the supply, installation and connection of electrical and control equipment and materials to accomplish a complete and functioning facility. The Work consists generally of the complete fabrication and programming of the natural gas fueling equipment and control systems.

1.02 RELATED WORK



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Equipment manufacturers shall have at least 10 years of experience in manufacturing products and accessories similar to those specified for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 13500, General:

1. Product data for all components of control system.

2. Qualification: Manufacturer’s project list.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE OF ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER CONTROLS

A. Control Enclosure

1. A factory built and factory pre-wired control enclosure shall be supplied. The approximate dimensions are provided in the drawing set, but this room must be sized sufficiently to provide the following functions:

a. House the MCC and MCP panels.

b. House the 120/208 transformer and 42 pole distribution panel.

c. House the UPS.



d. Provide code required access space.

e. Space for a standard 24” x 42” steel desk, and office chair. All furniture to be supplied by the Contractor.

f. House the air compressor and dryer in a separate sound attenuated room.

2. Enclosure is to be gas tight on all sides as required to address the hazardous locations in the facility.

3. Enclosure is to be heated and ventilated in the air compressor room.

4. Enclosure is to be equipped with a heat pump to provide heating and cooling in the control room.

5. Enclosure is to include adequate doors to facilitate all required service.

6. Exterior of the enclosure is to meet the same requirements as the compressor enclosures.

7. Interior is to be equipped with T50 fluorescent lighting as required to provide office level lighting in the rooms.

B. Power Distribution and Motor Control Center (MCC): Panel shall meet seismic requirements of site location.

1. Panel shall be sized and equipped to service all existing and future equipment as outlined herein. See the single line diagram provided with the bid documents to outline the minimum requirements. Breakers, starters, and related controls are not required for the add alternate compressor unless this add alternate is taken by the Owner, however, space must be provided for the future installation of this gear.

2. Main distribution panel to be minimum 2500 A, 480 V, 3 phase, 4 wire. Secondary distribution and control to be minimum sizes as indicated on the single line diagram with this bid package.

3. Breaker panels for 480 VAC loads shall include 25 percent spare breaker slots. Breakers shall be lockable in the off position and all 480 VAC breakers and must include 120 V shunt trip coil.

4. SCR starters for the CNG main compressor motors. SCRs shall be heavy duty rated with an integral bypass contactor to engage once motors reach full operating speed.

5. Disconnects and cross-line starters for fans, air compressors, and pumps. The compressor cooling fan motors are to be controlled with VFDs.

6. All motor control is to be installed in the MCC, however, control for this equipment is to come from the UCPs. The system must be configured to allow the compressors to operate in “local” mode without any control function from the MCP.

7. Disconnects and contactors for compressor heaters and CNG compound lighting.

8. Distribution type transformer to provide 200 Amp 120/208 VAC for the CNG equipment.



9. 42 pole 200 Amp 120/208 VAC breaker panel.

10. Spare locations without circuit breakers shall be properly plugged.

11. Lighting and power panels shall be provided with neat, typed, circuit directories.

C. Equipment Suppliers are to provide a Unit Control Panel (UCP) on each compressor and a Master Control Panel (MCP) to provide overall station control.

1. General:

a. The Master Control Panel (located adjacent to the MCC—see layout drawings) shall be designed to provide centralized station monitoring and control functions. The panel shall be generously sized to allow it to be used as a central pull point for control systems in the facility. (Note requirements for open, unused space to be provided in the panels as outlined in Section 13660, Electrical Equipment Fabrication and Installation).

b. The Master Control Panel shall control all dispensing operations, normal compressor start/stop and the utilization of all compressors. Dispensers that provide their own temperature compensation shall not be permitted.

2. MCP and UCP Requirements:

a. An off/on selector switch shall be provided for each compressor on the face of the MCP hard wired to the MCP PLC and its status communicated to the respective UCP PLC via the Ethernet or Modbus Network.

b. A local/remote keyed selector switch shall be provided for each compressor on the face of the respective UCP hard wired to the respective compressor UCP PLC and its status communicated to the MCP PLC via the Ethernet or Modbus Network. An isolated set of contacts on each selector switch must be hardwired in parallel with the other compressor local/remote keyed selector switches and the MCP PLC buffer and dispenser ESD valve solenoids to open the valves when any compressor is switched into local mode.

c. An off/on selector switch shall be provided for each fast fill dispenser hose on the face of the MCP.

d. A keyed alarm acknowledge pushbutton shall be provided on the face of the MCP hard wired to the MCP PLC. A reset pushbutton shall be provided on the face of the MCP hard wired to the MCP PLC.

e. A horn strobe to indicate station fault shall be provided loose and shall be powered by an output on the Master PLC. This horn strobe is to be mounted above the roof of the control enclosure at a height and location that maximizes its visibility.

3. The MCP shall be equipped with its own Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based control system which shall be linked to each compressor UCP PLC, and dryer PLC via Ethernet. Each compressor UCP PLC shall accept discrete and analog inputs and effect control on its respective compressor.



4. Compressor and dryer UCPs shall be equipped with a panel mounted, NEMA 4 and Class 1, Division 2, Group D rated, color LCD displays, suitable for the ambient temperature range, readable in sunlight or darkness, and installed such that the panel electrical rating is not compromised. The display used in all control panels shall be of the same manufacturer and model number. Outdoor displays are to include a sun and rain shield. Displays shall be connected to the Ethernet network.

5. The MCP shall be equipped with a 15” Allen Bradley color touchscreen to display the overall station status with key operating data on a home screen, with additional screens for each subsystem in the station to display: status and operating parameters for each compressor; the current pressure, status and flow rate and total dispensed quantity of each dispenser; the station inlet pressure; the ambient temperature; the storage pressure; air pressure; hours of each air compressor and the status and operating parameters of the gas dryer.

6. The compressor UCP displays shall indicate suction, interstage and discharge pressures, interstage and discharge temperatures, and machine status (operation, or shutdown mode, full capacity or reduced capacity, type of fault or ready).

7. UCP and the gas dryer control panels shall be NEMA 4 panels, factory mounted and wired on the end of the equipment skid. The UCPs and the MCP panels shall be equipped with a fluorescent light on the inside top with a manual switch.

8. PLC power and power to displays shall be protected by an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) and surge suppression. PLC CPUs, operator interfaces and ESD circuits must be maintained for a minimum of 60 minutes under a power outage event and must automatically restart the system if power is restored within that time unless a fault is present. The UPS must be configured to keep the station from going into an ES on power failure. Power to dispenser meters and display heads, intrinsic barriers, power supplies and transformers and solid state control devices must be protected with surge suppressors across hot, ground and neutral, at its source.

9. The MCP PLC shall control lead-lag start and stop control of gas compressors which are "on-line". This system shall be designed to equalize operating hours on all machines, by starting the machine with the fewest hours first.

10. The MCP PLC shall start an additional "on-line" compressor, when available, to replace a machine which has been automatically shut down for fault conditions.

11. The MCP Operator Interface shall allow the operator to select 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 compressors allowed to operate, however, the MCP shall have the ability to override the automatic operation and manually select a lower number of compressors to be operating if additional compression is not required.

12. The startup logic for compressors should not start any compressor until the buffer is sufficiently depleted (for example-buffer pressure less than 3500 psig) and at least one bus still fueling and below the target pressure minus ten percent.

A second compressor shall not be started unless the buffer is below a preset lower start limit, there are at least two buses actively fueling and the first compressor did not unload



between buses, and so on—the goal of this logic is to limit the number of compressors operating to avoid unloading between buses.

The sequence must time delay the start of a subsequent compressor by approximately two minutes under any compressor start scenario.

13. The PLC shall use data input from the Master PLC Operator Interface maximum compressors operating screen (24 x 7 matrix) to determine the maximum number of compressors allowed to operate each of the 24 hours per day for seven day week intervals. This is intended to allow EMTA to minimize demand charges particularly in high peak periods.

14. Status lights or Operator Interface display shall be provided on the MCP to indicate if:

a. Each compressor is faulted or in local mode.

b. The CNG dryer requires regeneration.

c. A station ESD or power failure has occurred.

15. An audible alarm (bell or buzzer) shall sound at the MCP in case of a station fault. If this alarm is not acknowledged after 60 seconds, remotely mounted lights and or buzzers shall be activated.

16. Audible alarms and strobes shall be silenced/disabled when a keyed momentary contact switch on the MCP is activated. The maximum time lag between alarm generation and alarm activation shall be one second.

17. The MCP PLC shall allow for authorization input from each dispenser fuel management controller.

18. The MCP and PLC shall be equipped with an industrial modem and programmed to provide dial out notification of any fault to a minimum of 4 programmable numbers.

19. The MCP and PLC shall be equipped and programmed to email a notification to a minimum of four programmable email addresses to indicate which piece of equipment is faulted, the time of the fault and the name of the fault.

20. The MCP and PLC shall be equipped and programmed to allow remote and secure access into the PLC for troubleshooting, debugging, programming and updating via Ethernet network.

D. PLC Requirements

1. All PLCs shall be the same model and shall include the same CPU. The dryer shall be exempt from this requirement; however, it shall communicate with the MCP PLC by Ethernet.

2. PLC power supplies shall be the largest output available.



3. PLC racks shall be the largest card capacity available (except in dryer where small racks are permitted). The primary rack of each PLC shall include the CPU, communications modules and any “smart cards”. The expansion rack(s) shall be used for all I/O.

4. I/O cards shall be selected to provide a minimum of 20 percent additional, unused channels which shall be wired to the terminal strip. A minimum of four spare slots shall be provided on each PLC for future needs.

E. PLC Controlled CNG Station Fault Shutdowns

1. Dryer Shutdowns:

a. Dryer outlet high humidity

b. Blower motor overload

c. High cooler discharge temperature

d. High heater bundle or chamber temperature

e. High and low blower differential pressure

f. Transducer, thermocouple or RTD failure (i.e. broken wire or shorted)

g. Heat detector alarm

2. Compressor Shutdowns:

a. Low oil pressure

b. High oil temperature

c. Low suction pressure

d. High suction pressure

e. High interstage and discharge temperature set at or below 325 °F

f. High crankcase pressure (if applicable)

g. High interstage and recovery tank pressure

h. Normal discharge pressure 0-6,000 psig range set at 4,500 psig

i. High discharge pressure 0-6,000 psig range set at 4,700 psig

j. Transducer, thermocouple or RTD failure (i.e. broken wire, or shorted)

k. High vibration in compressor

l. High vibration in cooler fan



m. Low lube flow rate (if pressure lubricated).

3. Electric Motor Shutdowns:

a. High winding temperature

b. Overcurrent

c. Contactor/SCR fault

4. Dispenser Shutdowns:

a. Excess flow rate

b. Excess fill amount

c. Sudden loss of pressure

d. Transducer, thermocouple or RTD failure (i.e. broken wire or shorted)

e. High vibration in dispenser (this is to trigger an ESD)

5. Buffer Storage System Shutdowns: Transducer, thermocouple or RTD failure (i.e. broken wire or shorted)

6. General Shutdowns:

a. Emergency shutdown buttons.

b. Low or high station inlet pressure—a transducer is required on the station inlet piping and on the inlet of the dryer.

c. Air system low or high pressure.

F. CNG Station Control System Interface to the other site control systems:

1. Standby Power System:

a. The CNG Contractor shall supply PLC I/O, wiring terminations, programming and testing to interface to the standby generator system as follows:

1) A signal from the generator to indicate that it is operating and ready to accept load.

2) A signal from the ATS to indicate that the switch is on standby power.

3) A signal from the ATS to indicate that the switch is on utility power.

4) A signal from the ATS to indicate that utility power is available.

5) A signal from the ATS to indicate a switch is imminent in some timed period (10 to 30 seconds).



6) Three spare discrete inputs to address other undefined standby power system status relays.

b. The station shall be configured and programmed to:

1) Automatically, safely shut down in the event of a power outage, without causing relief valves to vent or any damage to any equipment.

2) Automatically restart the equipment when standby or utility power is available. All restarts should be staged so there is a programmable interval of one to five minutes between the start of each compressor.

3) Shut down the system when a transition back to line power is imminent.

c. Automatically restart the system when line power is restored.

2. Building Gas Detection System:

a. The CNG Contractor shall supply PLC I/O, wiring terminations, programming and testing to interface to the gas detection system and/or building control system. The CNG Contractor shall coordinate this interface with the building contractors and system suppliers as follows:

1) A signal from the building gas detection system to indicate 20 percent LEL in any zone.

2) A signal from the building gas detection system to indicate 40 percent LEL in any zone.

3) A signal from the building gas detection system to indicate 20 percent LEL in the fuel room zone.

4) A signal from the building gas detection system to indicate 40 percent LEL in the fuel room zone.

5) A signal from the building gas detection system to indicate trouble in the fuel room zone.

6) Three spare discrete inputs to address other undefined gas detection system status relays.


1) Prevent fueling in the event of any 20 percent LEL in the building or trouble in the fuel room zone.

2) Cause a CNG station ESD in the event of 40 percent in any zone.

3) Notify the building gas detection system if an excess flow, excess fill or sudden loss of pressure alarm occurs in the indoor fueling room dispensers.



3. Building FACP:

a. The CNG Contractor shall supply PLC I/O, wiring terminations, programming and testing to interface to the FACP as follows:

1) Communicate to the CNG station if there is a fire in any zone.

2) Three spare discrete inputs to address other undefined FACP system status relays.


1) Cause a CNG station ESD in the event of a fire in any zone.

4. Building Control System:

a. The CNG Contractor shall supply PLC I/O, wiring terminations, programming and testing to interface to the Building Control system as follows:

1) A signal from the Building Control system from each of the four fabric overhead doors in the fuel room.

2) A signal to the Building Control system for the fuel room exhaust fan system to start.

3) A signal from the Building Control system to confirm fuel room exhaust system fan operation.

4) A signal from the Building Control system to confirm negative pressure in the fuel room.

5) Three spare discrete inputs to address other undefined Building Control system status relays.


1) Notify the Building Control system to start ventilation.

2) Prevent operation of the dispenser until the two overhead doors in its dispenser lane are closed, the exhaust fan is operating and the negative pressure switch is made.

3) Maintain fan operation until a programmable time (initially to be 15 minutes) after the last dispenser operation is completed.

G. Additional Control System Design Requirements:

1. Inputs shall be wired fail-safe (circuit to open on fault condition).

2. In the case of 4-20mA inputs, the PLC shall be configured for 0-20mA inputs to determine if an input is a zero drift (typically 3.6 to 4 mA) or if there is a broken wire (<3.6mA). A reading of 20 mA shall be interpreted as a short circuit.



3. Thermocouple inputs shall be configured so that a broken wire situation is identified and annunciated.

4. Output channels on PLC cards shall be de-energized in the event of an ESD, causing devices such as valves and contactors/motor starters to go to their safe, unpowered condition.

5. Controls shall be organized in a "first out" sequence. The controls react to the first of a possible series of sequential faults, shut the equipment down and lock out subsequent faults.

H. Emergency Shut Down (ESD) System Requirements

1. Hardware Requirements:

a. The ESD system shall operate on 120VAC.

b. Buttons shall be red maintained contact mushroom type. Each ESD button shall be equipped with two Normally Closed (NC) contacts. The first NC contact shall be hardwired in series with the other station ESDs and the master start pushbutton located on the face of the MCP. The second NC contact shall be hardwired as an independent input to the MCP PLC—the PLC will display and log which button was pressed.

c. One manual keyed reset momentary contact switch shall be provided on the Master Control Panel (MCP).

d. A hard wired, Master Control Relay (MCR) shall be provided in the MCP and in each compressor UCP and the dryer UCP.

2. Buttons shall be provided as follows:

a. One button on the MCP, one on each of the compressor UCPs, one on the gas dryer UCP.

b. One button at each dispenser (including the defueling panel) which is of the type that is protected to prevent accidental activation (recessed button). Each dispenser (including the defueling panel) shall be equipped with an internally installed earthquake switch in series with the ESD button.

c. One button located at each end of the indoor fueling service room at the exterior of the room.

d. One button located at each end of the outdoor fueling service lanes.

e. One button outside of each man gate to the CNG equipment compound, and one on the exterior of the Control Enclosure.

f. Other buttons as indicated in the drawings.



g. One button shall be available for remote mounting (location to be determined). This button shall be supplied with a white light indicating station fault, a red light and buzzer indicating an ESD and a keyed alarm silence button.

3. The system shall perform as follows:

a. Power is removed from all motor contactors and the main motor starters.

b. The power is removed from all solenoid valves, and hence the following valves close automatically:

1) Station inlet valve

2) Compressor suction valves

3) Storage panel high pressure line valves

4) Dispenser end high pressure line valves and actuated valves immediately outside of the indoor fueling room.

c. The following valves open automatically:

1) Compressor drains (unloaders) and/or compressor bypass valves.

d. The PLC will communicate an ESD to the SCADA system. The PLC and SCADA system will annunciate and log which ESD button was pressed.

e. The station inlet valve will be controlled by the PLC and will open only when one or more compressors are required to operate and 15 minutes (adjustable) after the last compressor shuts down. The valve will remain closed when no compressors are operating.

f. The storage ESD valve will be controlled by the PLC and will open only when one or more compressors are running or hoses are active.

I. Combustible Gas Detection System Requirements:

1. Detectors are to be Class I, Division 1 rated.

2. One self-contained combustible gas detection unit shall be installed in each compressor enclosure and wired to the UCP for that compressor.

3. The combustible gas detection unit shall be an Infrared (IR) type, and shall include internal diagnostics to confirm that the lens is not dirty.

4. The unit shall have a local LED or LCD readout (suitable for outdoor use) in percent LEL.

5. Detectors are to be addressable through an RS 485/ Modbus, or other standard network protocol.

6. The unit shall have 120V rated relay contacts for 20 percent and 50 percent LEL.



a. A 20 percent LEL signal from the detector to the UCP in a compressor will cause the immediate shutdown of that compressor and starting that compressor’s enclosure exhaust fan.

b. A 50 percent LEL signal from the detector to the UCP in a compressor will cause the shutdown of all compressors.

c. A 20 or 50 percent LEL from the control room unit shall cause an immediate full station shutdown and the shunting of power to all compressors. The control room exhaust fan and damper shall be energized.

d. The above events shall be displayed and logged on the MCP and alarmed as per the response table in the drawings.

7. The unit shall have a 4-20 mA output in percent LEL.

8. One calibration kit shall be included.

J. Systems Control And Data Acquisition (SCADA) System Requirements. All station instrumentation and hardware required to facilitate this level of monitoring (except the monitoring computer and software) whether or not the Add Alternate is accepted. The system shall:

1. Include Rockwell Automation RS View (or approved equal) SCADA development and runtime licenses. The software shall be licensed to EMTA. The license shall be sized to include four times as many tags as required to monitor the parameters below.

2. Include a Dell Precision work station equipped as follows:

a. Core i7 processor

b. Two 1 TB 7200 rpm hard drives.

c. 32 GB on board RAM.

d. 32 GB USB “thumb” drive.

e. Video card approved by SCADA supplier.

f. 27” Dell 1920 x 1080 monitor with soundbar.

g. Dell keypad and wireless mouse.

h. APC Smart UPS 1500 VA desktop UPS.

3. The system shall monitor status of subsystems including Emergency Shut Down (ESD), each compressor, gas dryer, the dispensing and defueling system, air compressors and dryer, valves, fans and motors shall be displayed on a monitoring computer to be networked to the station equipment by Ethernet. The SCADA computer may be mounted on site or remote from the other equipment in another EMTA building.



4. Monitored Parameters and Shutdowns: The following list indicates parameters which shall be monitored, and fault conditions for which the PLC control system shall shut down the equipment. The master control PLC shall have the ability to provide (via the network) this data.

a. Status—SCADA Monitored Parameters:

1) Dryer Status:

a) Inlet pressure

b) Outlet pressure

c) Blower differential pressure during regeneration

d) Regeneration chamber gas inlet temperature during heating

e) Regeneration chamber gas discharge temperature during heating

f) Regeneration chamber internal temperature during heating

g) Status of tower (regeneration in progress, or in use)

h) On-line or fault condition

i) Outlet dewpoint

2) Compressor Status (each compressor):

a) Suction, interstage, discharge, final discharge, recovery tank, pilot air pressure and oil pressure

b) Interstage, discharge, enclosure, ambient, crankcase oil temperature

c) Status of discrete I/O

d) On-line or fault condition

e) Idle or compressing

f) Total hours of operation, loaded hours of operation, number of starts in total

g) Hours of operation in last 24 hours, number of starts in last 24 hours

h) Status of control valves

3) Electric Motor Status:

a) Temperatures of windings

b) Motor faults (overcurrent, contact failure and the like)



4) Dispenser Status (for each fast fill dispenser):

a) Ambient temperature

b) Vehicle pressure (psig)

c) Running and final gas pressure

d) Maximum and steady state flow rate

e) Running and final mass dispensed (Therms or as directed by EMTA)—this will require a high speed counter/frequency input from each dispenser head to the MCP PLC.

f) Status of control valves

5) Storage System Status:

a) Pressure in storage banks

b) Status of valves

6) General Status:

a) Date and time

b) Ambient temperature (precision thermocouple)

c) Gas service pressure.

d) Air system pressure.

e) Status of station inlet valve.

f) Utility or standby power.

5. SCADA Logging:

a. The SCADA shall be configured to log operations and faults automatically as outlined below. These logs shall be in Excel and should be individual files for each category, not a composite file. Given the size limitations of the files, it is required that the system automatically create a new folder and files each month.

b. Individual Log: Log entries shall include the time and date and the ambient temperature: (Dryer logging can be limited to those parameters available on the PLC or by discrete signal.)

c. Dryer Dewpoint: Trigger-once daily and log: (Mandatory)

1) Dewpoint

d. Dryer Regeneration: Trigger regeneration. Log:



1) Start and end time.

2) Each thermocouple maximum reading during heating cycle (if available)

e. Dryer Fault: Trigger dryer fault. Log:

1) Type of fault.

2) Dryer status-drying or regeneration

3) All pressures and temperatures immediately prior to fault (if available)

f. Compressor Operations (for each compressor individually). Trigger-each time a compressor reaches a target pressure such as 4,200 psig, log:

1) Compressor loaded and unloaded hours

2) Compressor starts (total and within last hour)

3) Gas, oil, enclosure and motor temperatures

4) Gas, air and oil pressures

5) Status of valves and status of compressor

6) Gas detector reading (percent LEL)

g. Compressor Fault (for each compressor individually). Trigger shall be any compressor fault then log:

1) Type of fault

2) Data Recorded from Compressor Operations Log: Data shall be captured immediately prior to shutdown

h. Dispenser Transactions (for each dispenser individually). Trigger shall be each fill or attempted fill, then log:

1) Start time and end time of fill

2) Air Pressure

3) Initial and final vehicle pressure.

4) Maximum flow rate

5) Stable flow rate (after the buffer equalizes)

6) Source of gas (which compressor(s))

7) Quantity of gas dispensed—note that the dispenser head will need to communicate with a high speed counter on the MCP PLC.



8) Type of termination—automatic or operator switched

i. Dispenser Fault (for each dispenser individually). Trigger shall be any dispenser fault, then log:

1) Type of fault

2) Data from Dispenser Transaction Log: Data shall be captured immediately prior to shutdown

j. CNG Station Gas Detection. Trigger shall be any gas 20 percent, 50 percent or fault event, then Log:

1) Type of fault or alarm

2) Which detector

3) Time acknowledged

4) Status of dryer, each compressor, each dispenser (operating or standby)

k. ESD: Trigger shall be any ESD event, then log:

1) Which button caused the ESD

2) Time acknowledged

3) Status of dryer, each compressor, each dispenser (operating or standby)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 13500, General, for general installation requirements.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 13900

CNG STATION EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL DATA FORMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Requirements and Contract Obligations

1. Section includes CNG and Equipment Technical Data Forms that must be completed and submitted with each bid. Technical Forms follow this introduction and pricing is to be provided on the included Excel Spreadsheet. On the spreadsheet, Proposers must complete all cells filled in bright green that are applicable to their proposal and Proposers must check that all quantities and calculations are correct. EMTA reserves the right to use either unit pricing or total pricing if discrepancies exist. EMTA further reserves the right to modify quantities and eliminate items without affecting the price of the remaining items.

2. These forms will be used as part of the evaluation as to whether the proposal is compliant with the Specifications and Drawings.

3. Proposers understand and agree that if they are awarded the contract, that the data provided on these forms will form a basis of their proposal. Proposers will not be allowed to substitute suppliers, manufacturers, models, quantities or specifications without the prior written consent of EMTA.

4. In addition to the Information on the forms, Proposer shall be required to provide the computer simulation output from the compressor manufacturer’s simulated runs. This data shall be provided for minimum, typical and maximum station inlet pressure.

5. In addition to the Information on the forms, Proposer shall be required to provide the compressor cooler simulation output from the cooler manufacturer’s simulated runs. This data shall be provided for the maximum ambient temperature and maximum heat load condition. This run must clearly demonstrate the degree to which the cooler capacity exceeds maximum operating load and the run must indicate the fan noise level at this maximum condition.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. All other sections 13500 to 13900, CNG Station Design, Fabrication, Installation and Commissioning.

END OF SECTION



Single Tower CNG Dryer Data

Item # Item Description: Base Specification Compliant

1 Manufacturer:

2 Model:

3 Design Pressure (psig):

4 Flow Capacity in SCFM @ 32 psig:

5 Maximum Inlet Gas Pressure (psig)

6 Vessel Height:

7 Vessel Diameter:

8 Pounds of Desiccant:

9 Type of Desiccant:

10 Manufacturer of Desiccant:

11 Outlet Dewpoint at System Pressure: (F)

12 MMSCF between Regenerations based on specified pounds of H2O/MMSCF:

13 Regeneration Heating Time at 35 F Ambient Temperature:

14 Regeneration Cooling Time at 100F Ambient Temperature:

15 Electrical Classification: (Class and Division)

16 Heater Size: (kW)

17 Amp Draw During Regeneration:

18 Make and Model of Control PLC:

19 Communication with MCP PLC by Ethernet or by Analog and Discrete I/O:

20 System Pressure Drop: (psi)



Single Tower CNG Dryer Data

Item # Item Description: Base Specification Compliant

21 Air Pressure Required: (psig)

22 Air Flow Required: (cfm)

23 Process Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size and Type: (inches/ANSI XXX Flange)

24 Length x Width x Height of Dryer Assembly: (inches)

25 Weight of Assembly: (pounds)

See Next Sheet for Additional Data Requirements



CNG Compressor Data

Item # Item Description: Contractor to Complete Data:

Compressor:

Attach compressor run simulation at maximum ambient temperature and minimum, maximum and typical inlet pressure conditions. This run must indicate predicted

operating pressures, heat rejection and temperatures, rod loads and horsepower at these operating conditions. Unless otherwise specified, all data should be based on

the Current (highest pressure) scenario.

Base Specification Equipment

1 Compressor Packager:

2 Compressor Block Manufacturer:

3 Compressor Block Model:

CNG Compressor Specifications:

4 Rotating Speed: (rpm)

5 Piston Stroke: (inches)

6 Piston Speed: (Feet/minute)

7 Allowable Suction Range: (Minimum and Maximum Pressure in psig)

8 Flow Capacity in SCFM and Hp required @ 32 psig station inlet pressure:

9 Flow Capacity in SCFM and Hp required @ 36 psig station inlet pressure:

10 Flow Capacity in SCFM and Hp required @ 40 psig compressor inlet pressure:

18 Horsepower and Speed of Main Motor: (HP/rpm)

19 Main Motor-Belt Drive or Direct Coupled:

20 Maximum Discharge Pressure: (psig)



CNG Compressor Data


21 Compression Ratio and Maximum Discharge Gas Temperature -1st Stage: (Ratio/Degrees F)

22 Compression Ratio and Maximum Discharge Gas Temperature -2nd Stage: (Ratio/Degrees F)

23 Compression Ratio and Maximum Discharge Gas Temperature -3rd Stage: (Ratio/Degrees F)

24 Compression Ratio and Maximum Discharge Gas Temperature -4th Stage: (Ratio/Degrees F)

25 Compression Ratio and Maximum Discharge Gas Temperature -5th Stage: (Ratio/Degrees F) (If Applicable)

26 Manufacturer Rod Load Rating: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension)

27 Maximum Rod Loads-1st Stage: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension)

28 Maximum Rod Loads-2nd Stage: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension)

29 Maximum Rod Loads-3rd Stage: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension)

30 Maximum Rod Loads-4th Stage: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension)

31 Maximum Rod Loads-5th Stage: (pounds Compression/pounds Tension) (If Applicable)

32 Compressor Ring Material(s)--1st Stage:

33 Compressor Ring Material(s)--2nd Stage:

34 Compressor Ring Material(s)--3rd Stage:

35 Compressor Ring Material(s)--4th Stage:



CNG Compressor Data

Item # Item Description: Contractor to Complete Data: 36 Compressor Ring Material(s)--5th Stage: (if applicable)

37 Compressor Packing Material(s):

38 Expected Ring Life in Intermittent CNG Service: (Hours)

39

Cooling System

Attach cooler run simulation at maximum ambient temperature and maximum heat load--this run must indicate design pressures, heat rejection and temperatures on both sides

of the cooler for each stage. this data should demonstrate that the cooler meets or exceeds the cooling requirements plus the overcapacity requirement as specified in

Section 18520. The run must also indicate the noise level of the fan.

40 Air Cooled: (Y/N)

41 Number of Cooling Fans:

42 Diameter/Hp of Cooling Fan: (inches/Hp)

43 Cooling Fan Air Flow and Maximum Static Pressure: (cfm/inches wc)

44 Noise Level of Cooling Fan alone at 15’ Open Field Conditions: (dbA)

45 Percent Additional Capacity to Allow for Fouling and Tube Plugging: (Percent)

46 Maximum Temperature Rise in Gas above Ambient Temperature Assuming All additional Capacity is Unavailable: (ie 20% of tubes are plugged) (degrees F)



CNG Compressor Data

Item # Item Description: Contractor to Complete Data: Compressor Lubrication

50 Recommended Crankcase Oil

51 'Spin Off' Oil filter-?

52 Recommended Lubricator Oil

53 Points of pressurized lubrication:

54 Amount of oil in gas stream downstream of the final compresor coalescing filter: (pounds per MMSCF)

55 Amount of oil recaptured as a percentage of oil injected or added to the compressor: (percent)

Package Information

60 Suction and/or Discharge Pulsation Vessels on all stages? (yes/no—which stages if no)

61 Size of Blowdown Receiver: (gallons)

62 Design Pressure of Blowdown Receiver: (psig)

63 Estimated Pressure in Blowdown Receiver after Shutdown from Operation at Maximum Suction and Discharge Pressures: (psig)

64 Enclosure Heater Size and Type: (kW/Forced Air)

65 Maximum Noise Level (at loudest point) at 15 feet from the compressor: (dbA)

66 Length x Width x Height of Compressor Assembly: (inches)—Individual Compressor Package

67 Weight of Assembly: (pounds)—Individual Compressor Package.




Buffer Storage Data


1 Manufacturer:

2 Cylinders or Spheres:

3 Design Pressure: (psig)

4 Number of Vessels per Assembly:

5 Outside Diameter: (inches)

6 Vessel Length (cylinders only): (Feet-inches)

7 Weight per vessel including supports (pounds)

8 Water Capacity/Vessel: (Cubic Feet)

9 Total Capacity in SCF of CNG at 4500 psig:

10 Year of Manufacture:

11 Length of Each Assembly:

12 Width of Each Assembly:




Station Valve Data Item # Item Description: Contractor to Complete Data:

Size/Application: Valve Brand: Valve Model Pressure

Rating (psig)

Connection Size and

Type (inches/NPT or ANSI ???

Flanged)

1 ½” and lower ball valve for high pressure:

2 Light Duty Dispenser Flow Control Valves:

3 ¾” ball valve for -high pressure

4 1” ball valve for high pressure

5 >1” Ball Valve for inlet and interstage pressures

6 Compressor recovery system recycle pressure controller:

7 Filter and Vessel Multi-turn Drain Valves-high pressure

8 Storage SRVs

9 Compressor 1st stage Discharge SRV

10 Compressor 2nd stage Discharge SRV

11 Compressor 3rd stage Discharge SRV

12 Compressor 4th stage Discharge SRV

13 Compressor Recovery Tank SRV

14 Dispenser SRV

15 Other:

16




Station Filter Data Item # Item Description: Contractor to Complete Data:

Filter: Brand:

Model and Type: (Model #/Coalescing or Particulate or Mesh Pad)

Pressure Rating: (psig)

Flow Rating: (scfm @ XX psig)

Filter Diameter

and Height: (inches)

Connection Size and

Type: (inches/NPT or ANSI ???

Flanged)

1 Gas Dryer Inlet:

2 Gas Dryer Outlet:

3 Compressor Suction:

4 Compressor 1st Stage:

5 Compressor 2nd Stage:

6 Compressor 3rd Stage:

7 Compressor 4th Stage:

8 Compressor Final Coalescing System-1st Filter:

9 Compressor Final Coalescing System-2nd Filter:

10 Compressor Recovery System:

11 Dispenser Inlet Coalescing System-1/2" dispenser

12 Dispenser Inlet Coalescing System-3/4" dispenser

13 Air System Coalescer:

14 Other:



SECTION 14450

VEHICLE LIFTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK



1. VL405 LIFT, IN-GROUND, MODULAR, AXLE, ADJ., 2 POST (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. VL703F LIFT, DRIVE-ON, PARALLELOGRAM, FLUSH MOUNT, 50,000 POUNDS, 32 FOOT (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. VL703Fa LIFT, DRIVE-ON, PARALLELOGRAM, FLUSH MOUNT, 50,000 POUNDS, 32 FOOT (Ref. Part 2.03)

C. Roughing-in, installation of equipment and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.


1.02 RELATED WORK











B. Manufacturer's Representative





C. Certifications

1. A.L.I.: Unit shall meet standards of the American Lift Institute.

2. Third party testing: Unit shall be third party tested with test results provided in submittal package.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data











C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

2. Shop Drawings shall include a list of all adapters being provided with a corresponding list of all vehicles in Owner’s fleet by required adapter type.












E. All lifts shall be third party certified by party recognized by the Automotive Lift Institute.

F. All parts shall be readily available locally in the United States.





1.10 LABELING

D. Nameplate: Manufacturer shall securely attach in a prominent location on each major item of equipment a non-corrosive nameplate with stamped figures showing manufacturer's name, address, model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data.

E. A.L.I. label: Manufacturer shall securely attach the A.L.I. label of the Automotive Lift Institute.

F. All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer's plant.